Part 02-1 de 04 PS

DELHI METRO RAIL CORPORATION LIMITED
BIDDING DOCUMENTS
FOR
ELECTRICAL CONTRACTS
OF
PHASE - 4 OF DELHI METRO RAIL CORPORATION
JUNE, 2021
PART 2: EMPLOYERS REQUIREMENTS
SECTION-VI: PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS (PS)
VOL 4 PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS (PS)
DELHI METRO RAIL CORPORATION LTD.
(A Joint venture company of Govt. of India & Govt. of NCT of Delhi)
Metro Bhawan, Fire Brigade Lane, Barakhamba Road, New Delhi - 110001
Website: www.delhimetrorail.com
Contract- DE-04 – Particular Specification– Introduction and Project Overview
Volume 4
Particular Specification
CHAPTER 1
Introduction & Project Overview
DMRC/Contract DE-04 /Vol-4/PS Page 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................... 3
1.1 SCOPE AND PURPOSE ...................................................................................... 3
1.2 RELEVANT DOCUMENTS ................................................................................... 4
1.3 DESIGN SERVICES ...................................................................................... 5
1.4 POWER SOURCE .............................................................................................. 5
1.4.1 TRANSCO Substation ............................................................................ 5
1.4.2 DMRC Receiving Substation .................................................................. 6

1. INTRODUCTION
1.1 SCOPE AND PURPOSE
This Specification defines the objectives, guidelines and requirements for

Design, Supply, Installation, Testing and Commissioning of Receiving
Substations (RSS) of DMRC Phase-IV Project at the following locations:
S. No. RSS Location Corridor
1 Madhuban Chowk
R.K. Ashram- Janakpuri West
2 R. K. Ashram
3 Sangam Vihar
IGD – Tughlakabad & Lajpat
Nagar –Saket G Block
4 Vasant Kunj
Along with above mentioned RSS, some augmentations at existing RSS

have also been planned under the scope of this contract.
S. RSS Location Corridor Augmentation

No.
2 X 25 kV bays for Line-8
1 Mukundpur Line-7
standby Source
1X 66 kV bay for
2 Indraprastha* Line-3 interconnection with New
IP RSS
1 No 66/33 kV Transformer
3 Rithala* Line-1 along with incoming and
outgoing bay.
* The Notice to Proceed for the works of augmentation at Indraprastha

(old) RSS and Rithala RSS shall be issued to the contractor separately for
the commencement of work at these RSS.
DMRC/ PS/Chapter-1 Page 3

The works to be executed under the Contract include Design,

Manufacture, Transfer of Technology, Delivery, Installation, Testing,
including Integrated Testing and Commissioning, Technical Support,
Supervision of Maintenance, Training of Employer's Staff and
Documentation for a complete System necessary to deliver the
requirements of this Specification.
1.2 RELEVANT DOCUMENTS
This Specification should be read in conjunction with the General

Conditions of Contract (GCC), the Special Conditions of Contract (SCC),
the General Specification (GS), the Employer's Drawings and any other
document forming part of the Contract.
In the event of a conflict between the General Specification (GS) and this
Specification, this Specification shall prevail. In the event of a conflict
between this Specification and any other standards or specification quoted
herein, the requirements of this Specification shall prevail.
The order of precedence, with item a) having the highest priority, is:
a) Particular Specification
b) General Specification
c) Indian Railway Standards
d) Indian Standards
e) International Standards referenced herein.
f) Other International Standards
g) Other National Standards.
Notwithstanding the precedence specified, in the event of conflicts

between Specifications, the Contractor shall always immediately seek
advice from the Employer.

1.3 DESIGN SERVICES
Design services responsibility for the whole works lies with the RSS
Contractor. The Contactor shall thoroughly satisfy himself that the
tentative capacities, ratings, layouts, protection schemes and quantities of
equipment as specified herein meet the operational requirements.
Taking into account the technical and other data contained in the Bid
documents, the Bidder shall verify the ratings, quantities of equipment
etc., as specified herein and if, the bidder considers any additional
equipment, equipment of higher capacities, and higher ratings for the
systems and sub-systems or any other additions necessary for the
complete, safe, and reliable operation of the power supply system, bidder
shall include such items in his bid, as additional items, providing all
clarifications and justifications for the same. The details and scope of
design services are further described in chapter 8A of Particular
Specifications.
1.4 POWER SOURCE
1.4.1 TRANSCO Substation

Following GSSs of Delhi Transco Ltd. are the Sources of Power supply to
the DMRC’s RSSs.
S. Location of Supplies power to

GSS of DISCOM
No. Receiving Substation Corridors
Sanjay Gandhi Janakpuri West- R.K.
1 Madhuban Chowk
Transport Nagar Ashram
2 DTL Park Street R. K. Ashram
DTL
3 Sangam Vihar, IGD – Tughlakabad
Tughlakabad
IGD – Tughlakabad &
4 DTL Vasant Kunj Vasant Kunj Lajpat Nagar –Saket
G Block

The Incoming power supply for all four Receiving Sub-stations shall be
availed from the following grid sub-stations at 66 kV voltage level, through
cable feeders. The Details of feeders and approximate cable route length
are as under
Voltage
Feeder 1 Feeder 2
Level
S. (Approx. (Approx.)
RSS Site
No ) Route Route
(KV) Source Source
Length Length
(Km) (Km)
Sanjay Sanjay
Madhuban Gandhi Gandhi
1 66 6.0 6.0
Chowk Transport Transport
Nagar Nagar
DMRC Park
R.K. Ashram DTL Park
2 66 2.0 Street / DTL 2.0
Marg Street
Park Street
DTL Vasant DTL Vasant

3 Vasant Kunj 66 1.5 1.5
Kunj Kunj
Sangam DTL DTL

4 66 3.5 3.5
Vihar Tughlakabad Tughlakabad
1.4.2 DMRC Receiving Substation

 DMRC Receiving Substations are located at Madhuban Chowk,
R.K. Ashram Marg, Vasant Kunj, Sangam Vihar,. At all of the
above, DMRC Receiving Substations (RSS), the incoming high
voltage supply (66 kV) will be stepped down to: 25 kV, 33 kV, and
further 33 kV stepped down to 0.415 kV.
 33 kV, three phase supply will be fed to the 33 kV Auxiliary Network

and the Auxiliary Main Substations (located in the same RSS
premises), to meet the Auxiliary power demand at stations and en
route through the Auxiliary Main Substations (AMS) located in
same premises as the RSS.

 25 kV Traction supply shall be taken from RSS for feeding 25kV

supply to depot and main lines Auxiliary Main Substations The
scope of RSS contractor is to provide access to traction contractor
and cable trench/trays up to boundary wall of RSS from RSS/GIS
building.
Note: The details of works at above RSSs are explained elsewhere in this
document.

Contract- DE-04 – Particular Specification – Scope of Work
VOLUME 4 – PARTICULAR SPECIFICATION
CHAPTER 2
Scope of Work

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. GENERAL ......................................................................................................................... 4
1.1. LOCATIONS OF RSS’S ............................................................................................... 4
2. SCOPE (RSS WORKS) ............................................................................................... 4
2.1. BRIEF SCOPE OF WORK:- ......................................................................................... 5
2.3. AUGMENTATION WORK IN EXISTING RSS OF DMRC .......................................... 13
3. MAJOR EQUIPMENTS IN RSS CONTRACTOR SCOPE .......................................... 13
3.1. AIS/GIS TYPE HIGH VOLTAGE BAYS ...................................................................... 14
3.2. AUXILIARY MAIN SUBSTATIONS (AMS) ................................................................. 15
3.3. TRACTION SUBSTATIONS....................................................................................... 15
3.4. EQUIPMENTS INSIDE THE CONTROL ROOM ........................................................ 16
3.5. TRACTION & AUXILIARY MAIN TRANSFORMERS: ................................................ 16
3.6. CRP & SAS: ............................................................................................................... 17
3.7. CONTROL AND LT SUPPLY: .................................................................................... 18
3.8. REACTIVE POWER COMPENSATION SYSTEM: .................................................... 18
3.9. UN-MANNING OF RSS:- ........................................................................................... 19
3.10. OTHER MISCELLANEOUS WORKS: ........................................................................ 19
4. RSS BUILDING AND OTHER CIVIL WORKS:........................................................... 19
4.1. CIVIL WORKS............................................................................................................ 20
5. CABLING ................................................................................................................... 21
5.1. GENERAL .................................................................................................................. 21
5.2. CABLES (EHV, HV, LV & CONTROL):- ..................................................................... 22
6. INTERFACE: .............................................................................................................. 27
7. DOCUMENTS AND MANUALS .................................................................................. 27
7.1. TWO MONTHS AFTER THE ORDER ........................................................................ 27
7.2. FOUR MONTHS AFTER THE ORDER ....................................................................... 29
7.3. SIX MONTHS AFTER THE ORDER ........................................................................... 29
7.4. NINE MONTHS AFTER THE ORDER ........................................................................ 30
7.5. THREE MONTHS BEFORE IN-PLANT ACCEPTANCE OF THE FIRST EQUIPMENT30
7.6. ONE MONTH AFTER IN-PLANT ACCEPTANCE TESTS OF EACH PIECE OF
EQUIPMENT ......................................................................................................................... 32
7.7. ONE MONTH AFTER PUTTING INTO SERVICE ....................................................... 32
7.8. AS - BUILT DRAWINGS ............................................................................................. 32
7.9. OTHER DRAWINGS .................................................................................................. 33

7.10. ELECTRONIC DRAWING FORMAT / DESIGN DOCUMENT FORMAT ..................... 34

8. SUMMARY ................................................................................................................. 34
9. DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS ................................................... 36
9.1. GENERAL .................................................................................................................. 36
9.2. DESIGN ENVIRONMENT .......................................................................................... 36
9.3. BASIC DESIGN PHILOSOPHY AND REQUIREMENTS ............................................ 37
9.4. DESIGN MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL................................................................. 39
9.5. SYSTEM INTEGRATION PROCESS ......................................................................... 39
9.6. INTERFACE MANAGEMENT PLAN .......................................................................... 40
9.7. DESIGN SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS ................................................................. 40
9.8. PERFORMANCE FEATURES REQUIRED ................................................................ 40
9.9. RELIABILITY REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................ 41
9.10. AVAILABILITY ........................................................................................................... 45
9.11. MAINTAINABILITY..................................................................................................... 45
9.12. SAFETY ..................................................................................................................... 45
9.13. CONFORMITY WITH GOVERNING SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER STATUTORY
REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................................................. 45
9.14. QUALITY ASSURANCE ............................................................................................. 47
9.15. TESTING AND INSPECTION..................................................................................... 47
9.16. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE .................................................................................. 47
9.17. ABBREVIATIONS ...................................................................................................... 48

1. GENERAL
1.1. LOCATIONS OF RSS’S
A general description of the broad scope of work, relating to RSS, covered

in this contract, is given below. It shall, however, be clearly understood that
the description is for the purpose of general guidance only and is not
exclusive.
For complete appreciation of the Scope, the Specifications, and Bill of

Quantities / Milestone document along with their Explanatory notes,
Drawings and other relevant paragraphs of the Tender documents shall be
referred to.
The RSS Contractor is responsible to carry out various works in the RSS as
listed below:
S.No RSS Location Corridor Type*
1 Madhuban Chowk R.K. Ashram - GIS

2 R. K. Ashram Janakpuri West GIS
3 Sangam Vihar GIS
IGD – Tughlakabad
4 Vasant Kunj AIS
based on the final scheme DMRC may decide to provide AIS/GIS type
substation
2. SCOPE (RSS WORKS)
The scope of work under the contract includes the following:
Detailed Design, Supply, Installation, Testing and Commissioning of RSS

cum TSS cum AMS at 66 kV incoming supply voltages at Madhuban
Chowk, R.K Ashram Marg, Vasant Kunj and Sangam Vihar, stepped down
to 33 kV, 3 phase supply voltage for the Auxiliaries (AMS) & 27.5 kV (with
Traction Transformer (TT), 1 phase supply voltage for the Traction (TSS)
and bay augmentation of existing RSS at Mukundpur, Indraprastha and
Rithala.

A. Constructions of New RSS:- Following six new RSS are proposed to be

constructed in Phase-IV of DMRC Network.
S.No. RSS Location AMS TSS
33kV 25kV
1 Madhuban Chowk
33kV 25kV
2 R. K. Ashram
33kV 25kV
3 Sangam Vihar
33kV 25kV
4 Vasant Kunj
B. Bay augmentation:- In addition to the above, augmentation in following

existing RSS is also required to be done under the scope of this contract.
S.No. RSS Location Augmentation Required
1. Mukundpur RSS Provision of additional 25kV bays for standby

Source for Line-8 power supply.
2. Indraprastha RSS Interconnection with New IP RSS of Phase-IV
3. Rithala RSS Provision of 66/33kV Additional transformer

along with incoming and outgoing bays for
Rithala –Narela (Metrolite corridor)
C. Interconnection with existing Lines:- In addition to the above, it is

planned to provide phase-IV RSS with interconnection to the Existing Lines
of DMRC at 33KV and 25 KV as per following details to support increased
headway.
S.No RSS of Ph-IV Interconnecting 33KV 25KV

Lines
1. Madhuban Chowk Line-1 --------- 2 bays

2. R.K. Ashram Line-3, line-5 -------- 4 bays
For Item no 2B and 2C above, RSS contractor shall be responsible for

providing required bays as per BOQ along with associated equipments for
fully integrating with the existing Protection, SAS and SCADA system. The
work shall be done on turnkey basis all necessary civil work related to
erection of equipment, Earthing, providing cable Path & cabling, metering,
approval from statutory authority etc. shall be in the scope of work. RSS
Contractor shall interface with the Traction contractor for providing
necessary support for integrating Protection / control with the existing
system. The Contractor shall be responsible for submission of As-built
layout and SLD and all other construction drawings along with relay
coordination & protection schemes (if modified) after execution of work
along with operation and maintenance manuals. The updation of existing as
built drawings, maintenance and Operation manuals, RSS working order
etc. shall be in the scope of work.
For execution of the above work shutdowns will be arranged in consultation

with DMRC O&M and no extra rates are applicable for any delay on account
of DMRC to affect shutdown or time loss due to reasons beyond the control
of DMRC.
2.1. BRIEF SCOPE OF WORK:-
The broad items of work which are included in the RSS Contractor’s Scope
are described below, and wherever an item is excluded from the Scope, it is
specifically brought out.
In general the RSS Contractor is responsible for all works within the RSS
premises and its related EHV cabling work from Grid Substation (GSS) to
DMRC RSS, except for the items of work, which are specifically excluded
from the RSS Contractor’s Scope and which would be carried out by other
Agencies.

The work at each receiving substations cum traction substations and

Auxiliary main substation will broadly comprise of the following except if
specifically stated otherwise in the PS, Drawings & the BOQ:
Construction of substation building with boundary wall, approach road, cable

trenches, foundations, supports, drainage and other civil works. The building
shall have all the amenities and features to be at least similar to the RSS
building built in Phase III of DMRC.
 66 kV AIS / GIS Indoor type High Voltage bays comprising Two nos. of
receiving bays at 66 kV incoming voltage from the respective utilities, One
no. of bus coupler bay, Two nos of outgoing bays for traction transformer,
Two nos of outgoing bays for auxiliary main transformer and Two nos of
spare bays for auxiliary main transformer for future PD requirement (Only
Space)
 25 kV GIS type Traction Substation:- Provision of eight bays or as

specified for the TSS (2 incoming, 1 coupler & 4 outgoing feeder bays for
feeding the 25kV, single Phase AC Traction supply to feed OHE on the
viaduct and additional one bay for the depot traction supply, (where depot is
constructed near RSS) as per the detailed requirement.
 33 kV AIS / GIS Indoor type Auxiliary Main Substation,:- Provision of 9

Nos or as specified of 33 kV indoor type bays for feeders in the AMS for
feeding Auxiliary supply to the ASS at stations (2 Nos), RSS auxiliary
transformers (2 Nos), bus coupler (1 No.), incomers (2 Nos) and 2 spares.
In addition to these 2 Nos of bus riser & PT panel will also be there.
 Supply, Installation, Testing and Commissioning of two Nos of 66kV/33kV

main auxiliary transformers with NGR & On Load Tap Changers.
 Supply, Installation, Testing and Commissioning of two Nos of 66kV/27.5kV

traction transformers with O.L.T.C.
 Supply, Installation, Testing and Commissioning of Auxiliary Main

Substation including equipments inside the AMS Room.

 Provision of earthing grid and lightening protection system.
 Supply, Installation, Testing and Commissioning of gantry structures,

towers.
 Civil Works including the GIS room, Cable Cellar, AMS & Control Room
Building,
 Provision of 110 V DC battery banks (one main + one standby) and battery
chargers cum DCDBs for the DC supply and 2 numbers of online invertors.
 Provision of 2 x 200 KVA dry type transformers for internal sub-station

supply along with RC snubber circuit and / or Surge arrestor for surge
protection as per Transformer Specifications as required.
 Equipment inside the Control Room including control cables inside RSS,
 The main protective relay shall be numerical type, IEC-61850 compliant.

The Substation, Automation System (SAS for monitoring, control, protection,
disturbance recording, event logging etc) shall be provided at each RSS
integrating all the relays at 66 kV/33 kV/25 kV levels and the bay control
units (BCUs) for 66 kV levels. The system architecture will be realized
through IEC-61850 communication infrastructure. No external converters
shall be used and provision shall be there for connectivity to the Operations
Control Centre & BCC on IEC 60870-5-104/101 protocol.
 A redundant (hot-hot) full-fledged industrial server (to run 24 x 7) shall be

provided for each RSS.
 The BCUs shall be provided on the 66 kV bays and housed in the indoor
cubicles in the control room besides / along with relay panels. The BCU
shall have full-fledged graphic display for the position of switching elements.
 For 33 kV & 25kV bays, the controls of CBs are desired to be achieved
through the numerical protective relays combined with control functions or
the independent BCUs. In case the combined protection and control IEDs
are used and they shall have full-fledged graphic display for display of
position of switching elements. Also the local remote switching key pad

shall be available.
 All the station auxiliaries, AC/DC supplies, system alarms shall be taken into
the substation automation system.
 Supply of spare parts, tools and equipment for maintenance/repair facility of

RSS cum TSS and AMS.
 Supply, installation & commissioning of 66 kV HV cabling work from Grid

Substation (GSS) to DMRC RSS.
 Supply, installation & commissioning of 66 kV, 25kV, 33kV and LV cables &
control wirings of suitable sizes or design for requirements within the RSS
boundary location if not stated otherwise.
 Provision of complete building E & M services, circulating area lighting,

landscaping and other requirements as per the normal standards
maintained in DMRC RSS-cum TSS & AMS. The control room will be air-
conditioned.
 Provision for un-manning of RSS including thermal Images Cameras and

communication to OCC.
 Design, Detail Engineering, Supply, Erection, Testing and Commissioning of

33 kV Shunt Reactor and 33 kV STATCOM for Reactive Power
Compensation and power quality improvement along with associated
equipments.
 Provision of Suitable CT/PT and metering arrangement for interphase /

interconnection with Super SCADA system.
2.2. DESIGN WORKS: Contractor shall be responsible for carrying out all the
detailed design works associated with the construction of RSS cum TSS
cum AMS including all electrical, civil, architectural and structural, drainage,
plumbing works etc, (complete RSS work at 06 locations at 66 kV voltage
level) and Augmentation work at existing RSS as detailed above.

2.2.1. Design Services:-
All detailed Design is in the Scope of RSS Contractor. The details of Design
services to be performed are further described in Chapter 8A of PS. It shall
be noted that the rating mentioned in the tender document are minimum
ratings. The tenderer shall verify these minimum ratings and quantities. The
higher ratings required as per detailed design shall be provided by the
bidder at no extra cost to DMRC. The Design and Performance requirement
under the scope of the contract is stipulated in this chapter.
The scope of Design shall be as following but not limited to :-
a) To prepare the detailed equipment layout and other drawings and

specifications pertaining to receiving substation as per the land availability,
site conditions, track layouts keeping in view the various clearances to be
observed.
b) Selection of Lighting arrestors, isolators, bus bar ratings, circuit breakers,

CTs, PTs, metering panels and other equipment at each RSS
c) Protection co-ordination with DISCOMS /TRANSCO and the detailed

protection scheme to be adopted in all RSS and TSS and including those
required for Feeders and auxiliary network. In addition, review and finalize
the detailed technical and performance specifications of main traction power
transformers, Main Auxiliary Power Transformer and Auxiliary distribution
transformers.
d) The work shall cover designing the incoming HV 66kV Power Cable
terminations as well as any outgoing power cable termination in the RSS.
The work shall also include co-ordination of the protection system of the
RSS with that provided by the Power Supply Authority for incoming/outgoing
66 kV cables at RSS. It would cover protection system of internal power
supply network of DMRC. The Work will also include design of the
protection scheme from source to the DMRC RSS.

e) Plan for power and control cable run layout in the RSS premises control
Room, cable trench, supporting and clamping arrangement, cable
termination etc.
f) Design, Drawing & specification of SCADA system giving due consideration

to requirements SAS and the OCC protocols and their integration.
g) Plan, Detail Design Control, co-ordinate and execute the design phase of
the contract of production of drawings, documents and reports to meet the
key schedule dates included in the agreement and as directed by the
Employer’s Representative.
h) To design the scheme using shunt reactor and STATCOM in RSS of DMRC
(Fixed/Variable) for reactive power compensation and power quality
improvement. The contractor shall be required to carry out detailed
measurements design and network modelling, load flow studies to work out
final capacities and scheme of reactive power compensation required for
approval of DMRC
i) Calculations: Calculations shall be prepared according to the best

professional standards and complied into sets that relate to particular aspect
of design. Each set of calculations of power supply and SCADA system
design shall include but not limited to the a method statement including,
(i) Description of the substation structure design.
(ii) Size of equipment foundations.
(iii) Size of cables, conductors including the earthing conductors. This would
give due consideration in laying method, de-rating factors, voltage drops &
other such factors before working down the final results.
(iv) Capacity of circuit breakers, interrupters, disconnecting switches ,

Instrument transformers and other Equipments.

2.2.2. DESIGN VERIFICATION BY INDEPENDENT DESIGNER:
The Design as prepared by contractor and submitted to DMRC shall be

subjected to checking and verification by independent designer appointed
by the contractor with the approval of Employer for these work. Any
suggestions / improvements in the design works suggested by the DMRC /
designer are to be carried out by the contractor at no extra cost to DMRC.
2.2.3. Design Submission and Review
a) Initial Submission: The bidder shall prepare and present calculations,

drawings describing the design which shall at minimum include
i. Report on power supply arrangement
ii. Design Calculations
iii. Earthing Arrangement
iv. Design of Protection scheme
v. Design of SCADA System
b) Intermediate Submission
i. Documents required by the ministry of Railways for approval if

applicable. These documents may include Appropriate design reports,
Design Assumptions, calculations, drawings, Test procedures,
required test results.
ii. Design calculations incorporating corrections / Observations /

Modifications as required.
c) Final Review submission:
i. Design calculations indexed and checked
ii. Drawings sufficiently detailed to define the works, complete and

checked.
iii. All design report including specific actions which are necessary to
complete the design

iv. The detailed implementation schedule detailing the various interfaces

during construction stages with other contractors.
v. Detailed description of the assumed construction methods and

method statements.
2.3. AUGMENTATION WORK IN EXISTING RSS OF DMRC
In addition to above work, augmentation works of Existing RSS’s of DMRC

is to be carried out at following RSS:-
 Indraprastha RSS: One 66 kV incoming/outgoing bay (GIS) is also required

to be provided by the contractor. The 66kV supply is to be extended to one
incomer bay of 66kV at proposed indraprastha RSS of DMRC in phase-IV
by laying 66kV cables. All necessary civil, electrical, protection and control
works, modifications in SAS and SCADA are to be carried out by the
contractor to make the system fully functional. The contractor is required to
visit the site i.e. existing RSS and ascertain the quantum of works to be
carried out.
 Mukundpur RSS: Two numbers of bays 25kV each are required to be

constructed in the existing RSS by extending busbars of 25kV. All
necessary civil, electrical, protection and control works, modifications in
SAS and SCADA are to be carried out by the contractor to make the system
fully functional. The contractor is required to visit the site i.e. existing RSS
and ascertain the quantum of works to be carried out.
 Rithala RSS: One 66kV /33kV transformer along with 2 numbers of bays at
33kV are required to be constructed in the existing RSS by extending
busbar at 66kV and provision of additional incoming and outgoing panels .
All necessary civil, electrical, protection and control works, modifications in
SAS and SCADA are to be carried out by the contractor to make the system
fully functional. The contractor is required to visit the site i.e. existing RSS
and ascertain the quantum of works to be carried out.
3. MAJOR EQUIPMENTS IN RSS CONTRACTOR SCOPE

3.1. AIS/GIS TYPE HIGH VOLTAGE BAYS
3.1.1. INCOMING BAYS
 Design, Supply and erection of the AIS / GIS type High Voltage Bays
consisting of but not limited to all Switchgear, Measurement
transformers, lightning arresters, busbars along with their foundations
to support the various equipments / busbars.
 Design, Supply and erection of any other component or material

required to make the installation complete and operable.
3.1.2. TRACTION TRANSFORMER OUTGOING BAYS
 Design, Supply and erection of GIS type for Traction Transformer

Bays consisting of but not limited to all Switchgear, Measurement
transformers, lightning arresters, busbars along with their foundations
to support the various equipments / busbars

3.1.3. AUXILIARY MAIN TRANSFORMER OUTGOING BAYS
 Design, Supply and erection of GIS type of Auxiliary Main

Transformers Bay consisting of but not limited to all Switchgear,
Measurement transformers, lighting arresters, busbars along with
their foundations to support the various equipments / busbars

 Design in order to keep a spare space for two nos. of Auxiliary Main
transformers
3.1.4. COUPLING BAYS
 Design, Supply and erection of GIS type Coupling Bay consisting of

but not limited to all Switchgear, Measurement transformers, busbars

along with their foundations to support the various equipments /

busbars
3.2. AUXILIARY MAIN SUBSTATIONS (AMS)
 Design, Supply and erection of Auxiliary Main Transformers and

Neutral Grounding Resistors (NGR) and associated Fire Suppression
System.
 All Civil works in the AMS, including, but not limited to Design and
Construction of the AMS and Control room building complete with
lighting (indoors / outdoors), fans, false ceiling and air-conditioning
(wherever required), power sockets, fire-alarm and detection system,
water supply, sanitary and sewage disposal and all other facilities
needed to make the building functionally and operationally
satisfactory.
 Earthing arrangements in the AMS and Control room building and

interconnection of AMS earth with the main RSS earth mesh.
 Supply and erection of all equipments in the AMS room including
 33 kV AIS / GIS type Switchgear panels and associated cabling from

the AMS Transformer to 33 kV Switchgear panels
 33 kV / 415 V Dry type Station Transformers
 All other equipments in the AMS Room, such as Low Voltage

distribution board (LVSB) complete with Incoming and outgoing
breakers and feeders, DC-UPS including Batteries, Battery chargers
and DC Distribution Boards.
 All 33 kV and 415 V cabling in the AMS and RSS.
 Panel Inert gas flooding system as per specification attached in

annexure- 6.
3.3. TRACTION SUBSTATIONS

 Design, Supply and erection of Traction Transformers and associated

Fire Suppression System.
 Design, Supply and Erection of Indoor GIS type 25kV switchgear,

including but not limited to circuit breakers, interrupters, isolators,
along with foundations.
 Design, Supply and erection of all 25kV cables required inside the
TSS, including those from the Traction transformer to 25kV
switchgear
3.4. EQUIPMENTS INSIDE THE CONTROL ROOM
 Design, Supply, installation and putting into operation of Bay

Controllers, Work stations and PC’s and linking with the HV
equipments in the yard.
 Design, Supply, installation and putting into operation of all 33 kV and

25 kV control equipments and relay, and panels.
 Design & Providing a ‘Gateway’ to support control and monitoring of

all EHV / 33 kV / 25 kV systems from any of the two Operations
Control Centers (OCC) located at Metro Bhawan. The gateway shall
be Ethernet compliant.
 Design, Supply and erection of all other equipments in the Control

room as necessary, to enable the protection, control and monitoring
of all 66 /33 kV / 25 kV equipments, from Bay level / Control room /
Operations Control Centers.
3.5. TRACTION & AUXILIARY MAIN TRANSFORMERS:
Contractor shall design and size the transformer so that performance

requirement is fulfilled and transformer losses are as low as possible since
power losses are a real concern. The contractor shall propose the designs,
supported with references of designs adopted in other similar metros in

India and worldwide most recently with improvements in the designs based
on the Aesthetics, working experience or financial savings.
Supply, Installation, Testing and Commissioning of Two Nos of single

phase, 66 kV / 27.5kV Traction Transformers of capacity and other technical
details specified in relevant chapter of PS & On-Load Tap Changers.
Supply, Installation, Testing and Commissioning of Two Nos of 66 kV / 33kV

Auxiliary Main Transformers of capacity and other technical details specified
in relevant chapter of PS with NGR, & On Load Tap Changers.
During the design stage, employer may decide to provide transformers filled
with proven design synthetic Ester oil and with dry plug-in type bushings
(HV, LV) instead of conventional type mineral oil filled OIP bushings
(Adjustment price for both synthetic Ester Oil & dry plug-in type bushings
may be quoted separately in pricing document.)
3.6. CRP & SAS:
The main protective relays shall be numerical type & latest IEC compliant.
The Substation, Automation System (SAS for monitoring, control, protection,
disturbance recording, event logging etc) shall be provided at each RSS
integrating all the relays at all voltage levels. All control and relay panels
and substation automation system shall be installed in control room.
Each of the IED/BCU/BPU provided shall be provided with its similar backup
IED/BCU/BPU to ensure redundancy. This means for each IED/BCU/BPU
the second hot standby IED/BCU/BPU should be provided which should
automatically take over the system in the event of failure of main
IED/BCU/BPU. Refer clause 7 (chap-8A) of PS for details of IEDs /SAS.
The system architecture will be realized through IEC-61850 communication

infrastructure. No external converters shall be used and provision shall be
there for connectivity to the Operations Control Centre & BCC on IEC
60870-5-104. In case of augmentation of existing RSS, a suitable converter
etc, may be utilized to make communication on IEC 60870-5-104 protocol

A redundant (hot-hot) full-fledged server shall be provided for each RSS.

The display unit, 32 inches, LED type shall connect to the station servers.
The LCC for 66kV GIS bay shall be of conventional type. The BCUs shall be
provided on its control and relay panel and housed in the indoor cubicles in
the control room along with other relays. Similarly, for 25 kV the BCU shall
be provided on its control and relay panel. For 33 kV, the BCU shall be
provided on VCB bay (LV compartment).
The Control of all bays is to be achieved through the independent & similar
type of BCUs for all voltage levels. However, the over current / Earth fault
protection may be combined with BCU and shall have full flagged graphic
display for display of position of switching equipments/elements. Also the
local remote switching key pad shall be available.
All the station auxiliaries, AC/DC supplies, system alarms, indications and
control of CBs shall be taken into the Substation Automation System (SAS)
by using BCU of similar type used for other voltage levels. All
IEDs/BCPU/Protective relay shall be IEC-61850 compliant.
All requirements for CRP and SAS (switches, patch chords for networking
panels, servers etc) as mentioned above and in PS.
3.7. CONTROL AND LT SUPPLY:
Provision of 110 V DC battery banks (one main + one standby) and battery
chargers cum DCDBs for the DC supply and 2 numbers of online invertors
shall be installed for SAS and its ancillary equipments.
Provision of 2 x 200 kVA Dry type transformers for sub-station auxiliary

supply and ACDBs.
3.8. REACTIVE POWER COMPENSATION SYSTEM:
MRTS Project has extensive use of EHV, MV cables in its distribution

network, interconnecting 220/132/132 / 66 kV underground cables as
applicable from power supply authority to the substation and 33kV and 25kV
underground cables from RSS to feeding points. To substantiate the actual

requirement of leading power factor compensation & operational issue and

maintain close to unity power factor at interface point, contractor shall carry
out the study and simulation / network modelling with proper method and
provide suitable type of power factor compensation system as per scope of
work given in PS.
Simulation studies: The contractors shall be responsible for collecting all

data which are required for conducting Network modelling and Simulation
studies for Power supply requirements studies.
3.9. UN-MANNING OF RSS:-
DMRC’s all sub-station shall be un-manned. All control and monitoring

functions shall be taken care from OCC SCADA. Control signals for the un-
manning shall be provided by the contractor as per specification given in the
particular specification of the contract. All possible provisions of RSS for Un-
manning shall be taken into account whether it is specified or not.
3.10. OTHER MISCELLANEOUS WORKS:
 Supply, Installation, Testing and Commissioning of cable termination

structures, towers or gantry if required.
 Provision of earthing, earthing grid, metering, lighting and lightning

protection system.
 Supply of spare parts, tools and equipment for maintenance/repair facility of

RSS cum TSS cum AMS.
 Preparation of all type of drawings, interactive O&M training manuals,

evaluation & checking of design and training of staff.
 A standalone desktop PC shall be provided at each RSS with the O&M

procedures for equipments under supply. The maintenance and the report
forms shall be built in the O&M procedures.
4. RSS BUILDING AND OTHER CIVIL WORKS:

Construction of substation building with Boundary Wall, Rail-Cum-Road,

Approach Road, Cable Trenches, Foundations, Supports, Drainage and
other civil works. Substation building includes GIS room, Cable cellar,
Control room, Maintenance Room, Toilet etc. Control room should have
false ceiling and foam concrete false flooring for installation of Control &
Relay panels. The building shall have all the amenities and features to be at
least similar to the RSS building built in Phase III of DMRC.
The design shall also take into account that the DMRC intends to get Green
Building certification of Platinum rating.
Provision of complete building E & M services, fire detection and alarm

system, LED type lighting, landscaping, and other requirements as
mentioned in specifications and as per the normal standards maintained in
DMRC RSS-cum TSS-cum AMS. VRF shall be used for control room air-
conditioning.
Power Transformers installation shall be Indoor/Outdoor type with all

statuary requirements. In this decision of the Engineer in-charge shall be
final & binding.
4.1. CIVIL WORKS
 Geo-technical investigations to determine the safe bearing capacity

of the soil and other design parameters, including Soil conductivity
and soil resistivity.
 All Civil Works in the RSS, including but not limited to land
preparation, inside drainage and connection to the Rain Water
Harvesting system, Constructed wet land sewage treatment plant
with automatic operation of suitable size of pump for lifting of
reusable water from plant to overhead tank, water supply
arrangement, access roads from existing main road to the substation
and approach roads inside RSS of RCC, design and construction of
the AMS and control room building complete in all respects and cable

paths and cable trenches in the Switchyard, as well as inside the

AMS room and control room.
 Survey, Excavation, Backfilling, Barricading, etc for the EHV Cabling

work of the RSS.
 Trenchless/pipe laying for the EHV Cabling work of the RSS.
 Yard lighting
 Lightning protection masts
 Landscaping
 Transformer Oil sump with suitable capacity of pumping

arrangement.
 Baffle walls
 Boundary wall along with gates
 Design and installation of Earth Mesh
 Earthing arrangements in AMS and Control Room building
 Earthing of fencing/boundary walls.
5. CABLING
5.1. GENERAL
The Broad items of Work, which are included in the RSS Contractors
Scope, are described below. In general the RSS Contractor is responsible
for all works connected with the Supply, installation, testing and
Commissioning of HV Cables and associated LV, Control and Monitoring
cables (copper-core or optic fibre, as specified) between the Receiving
Substations of the Power Supply Authority and the DMRC RSS, including
cable termination at either end and straight through joints and bonding, as
necessary. It shall be clearly understood that the description is for the
purpose of guidance only and is not exhaustive. For complete appreciation
of the Scope, the Specifications, Bills of Quantities along with their

Explanatory Notes, Drawings and other relevant parts of the Tender

Documents shall be referred to.
5.2. CABLES (HV, MV, LV & CONTROL):-
Supply, Installation & Commissioning of all HV 66 kV cable as applicable),

MV Cable (33kV, 25kV as applicable), Medium Voltage (415V) cables &
control wiring of suitable sizes or design for requirements within the RSS
boundary location if not stated otherwise.
5.2.1. SCOPE OF HV CABLING:
The Contractor shall be responsible for Supply, Laying, Testing and

Commissioning (including integrated testing and Commissioning) of HV
Cables for Receiving Substations at above mentioned locations. This
includes all works such as excavation of ground, provision of HDPE pipes,
restoration of ground and all other works required to make it fully functional
Cable in all respects.
The work will include but not be limited to: -
Supply, Laying, Testing and Commissioning of HV cables from GSS of

Power supply Authorities to DMRC, Receiving Cum Traction Sub Station
and Auxiliary Main Sub Station. The concerned work would comprise of:
 Design, Supply of HV (66 kV) cables as per requirement specified in

PS and in accordance with the International Standards.
 Submission of Method Statement for cable laying works covering the

cable laying methodology and safety aspects for the approval of
Engineer.
 Final location survey with GPR and confirmation of utilities,

preparation of final construction / cable layout drawings indicating
cable pull boxes, joint locations, any uncharted utilities, utility/route
diversions if any and co-coordinating with the various State and
Central Government Departments & utilities whenever and wherever
necessary on the behalf of DMRC. The co-ordination with city

agencies shall also be done for the purpose of crossing – over /

under or minor shifting of utilities for cable laying etc. in case of major
problems, DMRC may also assist. If for some stretch, road
restoration work is to be done by the contractor, the price quoted in
the BOQ shall be payable.
 Payment deposited to Govt./Civic agencies: Any amount

deposited by contractor to civic agencies for obtaining cable laying
permission shall be reimbursed by DMRC on submission of
documentary evidence.
 Any penalties on any account levied compensation for any

damages or loss during the course of work shall be borne by the
contractor.
 Security deposits to Govt./Civic agencies shall also be submitted /

deposited by contractor
 Laying of the HV and OFC cables/Cat6e Cables for SCADA &

protection as per IS: 1255-1983 or any other relevant international
standards and manufacturer’s recommendations.
 Design, Supply of complete kits with accessories for Jointing, Cross-

bonding, mid-point bonding, single point bonding, termination of
cables, cable termination structure and jumpering at GSS of PSA, its
installation and commissioning using appropriate techniques as
specified with the approval of employer.
 The joints to be located and secured in a pre-casted jointing bay

(preferred) of suitable size as per approved drawing. Adequate
looping length at terminating points
 For bonding, Provision of required number of sheath voltage

limiters (SVL’s), all type of sections, earth electrodes/mesh shall
be (Sheath voltage calculations) done as per IEEE 575 (latest).

 Design and Provision of multi-Conduit HDPE pipes of adequate

mechanical impact strength embedded in concretes as laid in ground
with proper separation for road crossing or abutment (in the case of
Cable crossing the rail/road) and making a bridge to cross the cables
over nallah or drains.
 Road Restoration: Temporary road restoration with proper

compaction and PCC shall be done by the contractor (DMRC civil
specification preferred) to the satisfaction of Engineer-in-charge
within one month as per standard practices and procedures. Final
road restoration will be carried out by the owning civic agency.
 Ground penetration survey (GPR): The contractor shall carry out the
GPR survey of the complete cable system and submit the drawing
marking the coordinates showing distance, depth along the cable
path. The survey should be carried out before starting the cable
laying work to ascertain the utilities and after the completion of cable
laying work so as to prepare “As Built Drawing”.
 Provision of chamber boxes etc. if required for locating/housing the

cable joints, cross bonding and earthing etc.
 Providing necessary (RCC) protection covers, route markers & sand

cushions for the cables.
 Testing and commissioning of HV cables.
 Excavated area due to open excavation, trenchless, pulling pit or any

other method shall be barricaded while executing the work. Each
barricade shall be as per DMRC SHE standards. Penalty as per
various clause of SHE, if barricading not provided, shall be imposed.
 Foot patrolling of the entire power cable route till handing over of the
system (all type of cables)

 Interface with TRANSCO and DISCOMs for obtaining power supply

at receiving substations including necessary protection and insulation
co-ordination. Employer/Employer’s Representative will assist.
 Evaluation & checking of proposed design/ layouts as specified in

tender, preparation of final or modified layout & construction
drawings, protection schemes for approval of employer and final
construction drawings.
 Preparation of drawings, O&M training manuals, evaluation &

checking of design and training of staff. A standalone desktop PC
shall be provided at each RSS with the O&M procedures for
equipments under supply. The maintenance and the report forms
shall be built in the O&M procedures.
5.2.2. ITEMS OF WORKS :
The following items of work are within the Scope of this Tender.
 Final location survey of the Route for HV cables between the Grid
Substation of Power Supply Authority and the DMRC RSS.
 Submission of details of possible alternative routes, together with

their implications on Work Methodology, Execution time, cost, utilities
affected to be diverted and acceptable to civic bodies.
 Preparation of cable paths as per the route accepted by the

Employer and in accordance with approved designs.
 Laying of cables in accordance with the Methodology (pulling,

running out or ploughing in) accepted by the Employer.
 Straight through joints
 Cable terminations at either end.
 Cable termination structure and jumpering at GSS of PSA connecting

cable to the supply point.

 Single bonding or Cross-bonding as necessary with SVLs and

earthings as per approved design
 Laying of Control and Monitoring cables (copper-core or optic fibre)

for protection and communication between the Receiving Substation
of Power Supply Authority and the DMRC RSS. These cables shall
also be laid at the level of Power Cables to avoid damages.
 Testing and Commissioning of the Cables
 Supply of Special Tools and plant and spare parts as specified in the
Bid Documents
 Training of DMRC Staff and Training Instructors, as specified
 Supply of Operation and Maintenance Manuals for HV cables
 Deal and resolve in co-ordination with the Employer the interface with
Local Authorities like state power corporation and other state
government authorities etc to ensure progressing of the field works
as per schedule
 Deal and resolve in co-ordination with the Employer the interface with
TRANSCO and other Power Supply Authorities, to ensure completion
of works in their premises, as per schedule.
 Interfacing with other Contractor / Detailed Design Consultants, as

required
5.2.3. RSS HV CABLING
a) Design, Supply, Laying, Testing and Commissioning of HV cables from Grid

Substation (GSS) of Power supply Authorities to DMRC, Receiving Cum
Traction Sub Station and Auxiliary Main Sub Station.
b) Termination of the HV cables at GSS/GIS end of Power supply Authorities &

DMRC RSS
c) Design, Supply, Laying, Testing and Commissioning of Control, protection

& communication (related to above work)

5.2.4. DESIGN, SUPPLY AND ERECTION OF
a) All 66 kV, 25kV and 33kV cables inside the RSS premises
b) All traction Return current cables between Traction Transformer Secondary

and the return current arrangement in the RSS.
c) Supply and Erection of Copper bar.
d) All LV cables and control cables
e) All necessary termination and jointing for the various cables.
6. INTERFACE:
Interface with Transco and DISCOMs (state DISCOM) for obtaining power
supply at receiving substations including necessary requirements of
protection schemes and insulation co-ordinations, interfacing with
Govt./Civic agencies viz. Municipal authorities, traffic police, water supply
authority, gas supply authority, Telecom utilities, Electricity supply utilities,
PWD, Railways etc. is in the scope of the contractor. However,
Employer/Employer’s Representative will assist.
7. DOCUMENTS AND MANUALS
The contractor shall have to supply in English language, all the following
drawings and documents according to the time table defined below which
may be modified according to the contractual planning of the equipment
supply.
All detailed Design is in the Scope of RSS Contractor. The details of Design
services to be performed are further described in Chapter 8A of PS.
7.1. TWO MONTHS AFTER THE ORDER
a) one short bill of quantities for the supplies, with the precise limits of each
interfaces
b) one overall planning of the stations execution
c) for all high, medium and low voltage equipment:

 final overall dimensions drawings
 handling drawings
 detailed installation drawings
d) civil engineering and outfitting guide drawings
e) detailed construction timetable, precisely defining the various equipment

construction stages.
f) a list of general purpose apparatuses so as to reduce as much as possible,

the different types required
g) for the power transformers and other apparatuses:
 a detailed computation sheet for the apparatus (amount of turns,

magnetic circuit cross-section, impedance, etc.)
 the final overall dimensions drawing of the apparatus, precisely

stating:
 the position of the terminals, cabinets and various accessories
 the position of the oil piping
 the position of the rollers
 the rollers and rail profiles
 the handling drawings of the completed apparatus main crate and the
drawings for the de-tanking operations to be carried out , mentioning
the loads to be lifted. The positions of jacks, slings and hooks shall
have to be clearly defined
h) the diagrams for:
 the regulator control cabinet
 the ventilation and protection auxiliary cabinet
 the detailed construction timetable, precisely defining the various

construction stage of the apparatus.

i) one short bill of quantities for the supplies, with the precise limits of each
interfaces
j) cable route map for all sections
k) one overall planning of the stations execution
l) for all EHV cables:
m) final overall dimensions drawings
n) handling drawings
o) detailed installation drawings
p) civil engineering and outfitting guide drawings
q) detailed construction timetable, precisely defining the various equipment

construction stages
r) a list of general purpose apparatuses so as to reduce as much as possible,

the different types required
Under no circumstance, the various detail modifications required by

perfecting of the installations and requested within 1 month after supply of
the drawings will entitle the manufacturer to delay the delivery or to ask for a
price increase of his supply
7.2. FOUR MONTHS AFTER THE ORDER
For all high, medium and low voltage equipment
 final schematic diagram
7.3. SIX MONTHS AFTER THE ORDER
a) the wiring diagrams for the whole installations, including the schematic
diagrams and the execution diagrams of the grounding circuits and of the
interlocking
b) the general assembly and operating manuals for the whole equipment

c) a general guide for preventive maintenance of the various pieces of

equipment
d) a complete list of sub-contractors
e) the detailed cabling diagrams for the whole installations, including the
schematic diagrams and the execution diagrams of the bonding
arrangements,
f) the general installation and operating manuals
g) a general guide for preventive maintenance
h) a complete list of sub-contractors
The selection of these suppliers is at the manufacturer discretion and

entirely under his responsibility. No approval that may have been given to
him, in this respect, might release him from any of his responsibilities.
7.4. NINE MONTHS AFTER THE ORDER
For the RSS-TSS and AMS, in its final form
a) the complete list of the auxiliary apparatuses
b) the general maintenance guide
c) the station descriptive manual
d) the station manoeuvring manual
7.5. THREE MONTHS BEFORE IN-PLANT ACCEPTANCE OF THE FIRST

EQUIPMENT
a) detailed set of the high, medium and low voltage equipment and of the
power transformer drawings, in their final form:
b) overall dimensions
c) handling
d) schematic and wiring diagrams
e) detailed drawings of each auxiliary

f) electrical and mechanical interlocking diagrams
g) detailed part list
The manufacturer shall have to supply an absolutely complete list of the

apparatus component parts with their referencing and their drawing number
so as to enable setting-up the supplies and spare store general listing (in
form of computerised list). The manufacturer shall supply the relevant
catalogues and subscription to the updating for each part of these
catalogues.
a) detailed operating manuals of all accessories, auxiliaries and special tooling
b) detailed manuals of preventive maintenance specific to each apparatus
c) a recapitulative note specifying the transportation modes, the various

handling methods and the storage precautions
The following shall furthermore be supplied for the power transformer:
a) winding and regulator connection diagrams
b) winding, tank and magnetic circuit main drawings
c) detailed drawing of each auxiliary ( regulator, terminals, relays, protections)
d) a recapitulative note for the transportation modes stating in detail
e) the handling modes (jacks, slings, etc.)
f) the ways to secure in place the main crate on the road or rail-going platform
g) the storage precautions
If the manufacturer deems it necessary to carry out additional modifications

after supply of the documents and data required above, he shall notify this
as soon as possible and request approval
This shall in no event be a justification for extension of the construction time

he must comply with in all cases.

7.6. ONE MONTH AFTER IN-PLANT ACCEPTANCE TESTS OF EACH PIECE

OF EQUIPMENT
The manufacturer shall deliver the related detailed certificate and the
detailed test report and polarity indication of terminals.
7.7. ONE MONTH AFTER PUTTING INTO SERVICE
All documents whose updating will have been required so as to bring them
in accordance with the actual works executed on the site and during testing
and commissioning of the stations shall have to be supplied to the Employer
for updating their documentary files
The manufacturer shall be responsible for the production of the

documentary files. The structure of these files shall be defined at the
beginning of the study; a systematically updated and re-issued table of
contents shall be produced and included with each supply or additional
documents.
The manufacturer shall have to supply entirely all the various files including
folders, insets filing boxes, etc.
The manufacturer shall have to define, for each apparatus, the required
maintenance operations: lubrications, checking or replacement of wear
parts, etc. and shall indicate the following for each of these apparatus:
a) the frequency
b) the process: locking, drainage, pre-disassembly, etc.
c) the special tooling required
d) the personnel qualification and quantity requirements
e) the approximate duration
7.8. AS - BUILT DRAWINGS
The contractor shall prepare the as built and other drawings defined as:

a) As built drawing depicting the completed works that have been certified as
complete.
b) Shop drawings containing information related to the permanent works.
c) Working drawings containing information related to the temporary works

depicting the construction of permanent works.
7.9. OTHER DRAWINGS
7.9.1. The Contractor shall submit drawings as may be required for the operation
and maintenance and repair of the Permanent Works by the Employer.
7.9.2. Information contained on the drawings shall include but not be limited to:
a) arrangement drawings for all sub-systems and individual items of

equipment;
b) installation and fixing drawings for all sub-systems and individual items of
equipment;
c) interface drawings for all sub-systems and individual items of equipment;
d) schematic drawings for all electrical, pneumatic, hydraulic, water and

drainage systems;
e) sizes, material and finish of all fixtures and threads;
f) manufacturer’s code, drawing and reference numbers;
g) wiring diagrams to BS EN 60617, BS 3939 and BS 376 including internal

wiring of sealed unit items;
h) setting dimensions and tolerances; and
i) bill of materials.
7.9.3. The drawings for EHV Cable Laying for RSS (in particular but not limited to)
shall be as follows:
a) Route plan (indicating most economical route out of at least 3-5 routes)
b) Electrical Schematic Diagram

c) Protection Scheme Diagram
d) Cable Layout Plan indicating joints, pull box locations & end terminations
etc.
e) Earthing scheme and cross-bonding Layout Plan
f) Section Diagram at rail/road crossing, abutment crossing, nallah crossing,

cross bonding, jointing, normal location, exit/entry to RSS etc.
g) Individual cable and jointing drawing
h) As built drawings
i) Combined services drawings showing crossings with utilities
j) Mechanical protection drawings of Cables laid in ground, any exposed

stretch of cable and on the cable supports inside the trenches.
7.10. ELECTRONIC DRAWING FORMAT / DESIGN DOCUMENT FORMAT
All the drawings shall be prepared in the Latest version of the AUTOCAD
design tool and pdf version which shall be compatible with latest windows
10 currently prevailing softwares versions and operating systems. All
drawing shall be coordinated and updated in Building Interface management
Software provided by the RSS contractor under this contract. The required
licence for review and Approval of these drawings shall also be provided to
the Employer.
All Civil/Electrical design document shall have to be submitted in the

following format only:-
a) Text Summary – MS Word
b) Design Calculations & Spreadsheets – MS Excel
8. SUMMARY
The work to be performed on the Receiving Substations shall include but

not be limited to:-

Design, Manufacturing Supply, installation, testing and commissioning

(including Integrated testing and Commissioning) of 220/132/66 kV GIS type
Receiving Sub Stations Inclusive of 25 kV Traction and 33 kV Auxiliary Main
Sub Stations and associated High voltage Cabling at Six locations:
 Design, Manufacturing ,Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of

AIS/GIS type and 220/132/66 kV Switchgear
 Design, Manufacturing, Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of

AIS/GIS type Traction Substation (including traction transformers).
 Design, Manufacturing, Supply, Installation, testing and commissioning of

AIS/GIS type Auxiliary Main Substation including transformers and
switchgears.
 Design, Manufacturing, Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of

Control & Monitoring for EHV, and traction power supply, and necessary
gateway for interface with OCC (Operation Control Centre);
 Design, Manufacturing, Supply, Installation, Testing and Commissioning of

complete protection system.
 Design, Manufacturing, Supply, Laying, Testing and Commissioning of EHV

cables from GSS of Power supply Authorities to DMRC Receiving Cum
Traction Sub Station and Auxiliary Main Sub Station.
 Design, Manufacturing, Termination of the EHV cables at GSS of Power

supply Authorities & DMRC RSS.
 Design, Manufacturing, Supply, Laying, Testing and Commissioning of

Control, protection & communication (related to above work)
 Design, Manufacturing, Supply, Laying, Testing and Commissioning of

Reactive Power Compensation System.
 Preparation of the specified land and buildings to receive above

installations;

 Provision of all the construction drawings, documents, and as-built drawings

required to supply, install, test and commission the above installations.
 Supply of spare parts, tools and equipment.
 Deal and resolve in co-ordination with the employer/Employer’s Engineer

the Interface with TRANSCO/DICOMS, municipal corporation, PWD, Traffic
police and other Contractors to ensure timely completion of the Works;
 Ensure Technology Transfer and Training to Employer’s staff.
NOTE THE ENTIRE INSTALLATIONS SHALL :
 be realised to withstand the atmospheric pollution and ambient conditions

furnished in General specifications relevant to the location where installed;
 meet the protective provisions relating to electrical safety;
 meet design requirements of fire safety in accordance with NFPA-130

Standard for Fixed Guide-Way Transit System, latest edition, except where
amended by this PS.
 Meet the design requirements of Electromagnetic Compatibility in

accordance the EN standard 50121-1 to 5 and EN 61000 series.
 Meet the Project Safety and Environment requirements as per “Project

Safety and Environment Manuals”.
 Meet the requirements of CEA safety regulations-2010.
 Meet the requirements of CEA ( sub-station construction) regulation -2010.
9. DESIGN and PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
9.1. General
9.1.1. The design, manufacture, supply, installation, testing and commissioning of

the equipment shall meet the design and performance requirements within
the design requirement specified in this PS.
9.2. Design Environment

9.2.1. Climate Conditions/Operating Environment stipulated in clause 1.12 of

General Specification shall apply.
9.2.2. Isokeraunic level: Average 30 thunderstorm days per year as per latest
edition of IS 2309:1989
9.2.3. The stations / Installation Areas are exposed to extreme weather conditions
such as heat, dust and high humidity and occasional seepage. The system
design shall, take into consideration these conditions and ensure that
performance of the system remains unaffected due to such conditions.
9.2.4. The contractor shall provide necessary equipment i.e. surge protection,
power filters and other necessary equipment to avoid failures of equipment
on account of quality of incoming power supply. Contractor may review
quality of incoming power supply to ensure that performance of the
equipment remains unaffected due to such conditions
9.3. Basic Design Philosophy and Requirements
9.3.1. Proven Design
 The Contractor shall develop the design based on this specification and on
proven and reliable Engineering Practices. The design details shall be
submitted with technical data and calculations to the “Engineer” for review
and approval.
 The System, including all Sub-systems and Equipment shall be of proven
design.
 The Sub-systems and Equipment proposed by the Contractor shall have
been in use and have established their performance reliability on at least
two Mass Rapid Transit Systems with similar environment in Revenue
Service over a period of at least two years during past ten years. The
performance certificate from the client / User of the system is to be
submitted.
 Where similar equipment or Sub-systems of a different rating are already
proven in service, then the design shall be based on such equipment. In
case these stipulations are not fulfilled, the Contractor shall furnish sufficient
information to prove the basic soundness and reliability of the offered Sub-
system.

9.3.2. THE DESIGN PHILOSOPHY SHOULD MEET THE FOLLOWING

CRITERIA:
a) Application of state-of-the-art Technology,

b) Service proven design,
c) Design life of all equipments / services 30 years unless specified.
d) Minimum life cycle cost,
e) Low maintenance cost,
f) Use of interchangeable, modular components,
g) Extensive and prominent labelling of parts, cables and wires,
h) Use of unique serial numbers for traceability of components,
i) High reliability,
j) Low energy loss,
k) System safety,
l) Adequate redundancy and factor of safety,
m) Fire and smoke protection,
n) Use of fire retardant materials,
o) Environment friendly,
p) Adherence to operational performance requirements,
q) Maximum utilisation of indigenous materials and skills, subject to
quality conformity.
9.3.3. Adequate margin shall be built into the design particularly to take care of the
higher ambient temperatures, dusty conditions, high pollution and high
seasonal and general humidity, etc. prevailing in National Capital Region.
9.3.4. Design life of the Major Equipments
S.No Equipment Design Life

1. 66 KV GIS /AIS 30 years
2. 25KV GIS / AIS 30 years
3. 33 KV GIS / AIS 30 years
4. ISOLATORS 30 years
5. Lightening Arrestors 30 years
6. SAS 15 years
7. Softwares 10 years

9.4. Design Management and Control
9.4.1. In order to ensure that the requirements of this Particular Specification are
met, the Contractor shall establish and maintain documented procedures
using ISO 9001 to control and verify the design of the System and all its
equipment. These procedures shall be subject to review by the “Engineer”.
9.4.2. The Contractor shall establish and maintain a systematic, documented,

comprehensive, and verifiable system integration process throughout the
execution of the Contract.
9.4.3. This process shall ensure that interfaces and interaction between System,
infrastructure, sub-systems, software, and operating and maintenance
requirements have been identified and engineered to function together as a
system.
9.5. System Integration Process
9.5.1. The Contractor shall systematically identify and formally document all
design, manufacturing and operational interfaces between equipment within
the System, and between the System and external systems, facilities,
operations and the environment likely to affect or be affected by the System.
9.5.2. A mechanism and assigned project responsibility for interface management

and control shall be provided, such that every identified interface has a
defined resolution process that can be monitored.
9.5.3. The Contractor shall define methods to confirm compatibility between

System equipment and carrying out integration tests at different stages of
the design and interface management process to demonstrate that all
equipment functions perform properly, both individually and as part of the
complete System.
9.5.4. The Contractor shall ensure that performance, availability and safety
requirements are addressed in the design process and that the reliability

and maintainability of all equipment will enable the service performance to

be met.
9.5.5. The system integration process shall be capable of audit by the “Engineer”.
9.6. Interface Management Plan
9.6.1. The Contractor shall submit to the “Engineer” for review an Interface
Management Plan (IMP) and Detail Interface Documents, in accordance
with the General Specification, which defines how the Contractor will
systematically identify and document technical interfaces. This will not
absolve the contractor of the ultimate responsibility for ensuring timely &
appropriate interface.
9.7. Design Submission Requirements
9.7.1. The Contractor shall perform his designs for the Contract in accordance with
the requirements of this PS and the GS. The Contractor shall submit to the
“Engineer” for his review, relevant design information as identified under
each stage. Such submissions shall incorporate the relevant Standards
applicable.
9.7.2. The design submission requirements are detailed in the General

Specification.
9.8. Performance Features Required
9.8.1. The Contractor shall provide built-in diagnostics and remote monitoring
functions for each microprocessor-based equipment and module of the
systems such that the performance requirements can be demonstrated.
9.8.2. The reliability and maintainability processes and procedures shall be

planned, integrated and developed in conjunction with the operating
environment, and the design, development and production functions to
permit the most effective and economical achievements of the systems and
equipment design objective. The Contractor shall prepare RAM analysis
report based on the approved system Design, which shall be validated by

the contractor as per the actual performance data obtained during Defect
Liability period.
9.8.3. In case the contractor is not able to achieve specified / provided target of
RAM, the contractor shall take necessary corrective measures either by way
of change of design of the relevant equipment / component or software
modification at his own expenses to meet the RAM requirement.
9.8.4. The systems shall meet or exceed the requirements for safety and reliability
as specified in National or International Standards for such mass rapid
transit system. The reliability of the systems designed, supplied and
installed is the principal element for availability. It is essential that the
System reliability is as high as reasonably practicable.
9.8.5. A high design standard incorporating redundancy if practicable, flexible

system arrangement, together with good quality products, and adherence to
strict construction standards, are required to ensure high reliability of
systems installed for smooth operation of train services.
9.9. Reliability, Availability and Maintainability
a. Reliability, Availability and Maintainability (RAM) requirements shall be

defined in terms of Mean Time Between Failures (MTBF), percentage
Availability and Mean Time to Repair (MTTR) respectively.
b. The Contractor shall perform RAM analysis up to his scope of Work.
c. The Contractor shall submit Reliability, Availability and Maintainability Plan

to the Employer for review and approval. After system’s design has/have
been completed, the Contractor shall re-verify, that the reliability, availability
and maintainability requirements proposed by him in line with the contract
requirements, shall be met.
d. Delhi Metro Rail Corporation attaches the greatest importance to the

attainment of the highest possible ‘Reliability’ during service of all the
equipment and systems supplied and installed under this contract.

e. The design, manufacture, installation and commissioning of the equipment

as also the training of the operating and maintenance staff shall be such as
to ensure near ‘Zero’ Failure performance.
9.9.1. Reliability Requirements:
a. Mean Time between Failure (MTBF) – It is the ratio of Total Operating Time
accumulated by the Total Population of a particular equipment to the total
number of failures of that particular equipment.
b. Failure –
Any independent failure in the equipment which results in loss of function of

that equipment caused by any of the following:
i. Fault in equipment of sub-system while operating within its design

and environmental specification limits;
ii. Improper operation, maintenance or testing of the equipment as a

result of documentation supplied by the contractor;
iii. Any other fault as per the decision of Engineer-in-charge.
resulting in any one of the following:
i. Non-operation of that particular equipment, even though stand-by

system/redundancy, may be functional;
ii. Removal/repair of the equipment either on-site or off-site;
iii. Degraded operation of the equipment and Non-achievement of the

desired design output or any other performance parameter as
defined in design or specifications;
iv. Any unscheduled shutdown and/or maintenance of the equipment;
v. Disruption of Revenue Services.
c. Reliability Targets –
i. Reliability Targets shall be calculated every month by the contractor

in coordination with nominated representatives of DMRC.

ii. Such calculation shall be started after a stabilization period of 3

months from ‘Taking Over’ or ‘Revenue Operation Date’ (whichever
is earlier).
iii. MTBF to be achieved for various Equipment is defined below:
S.No. Equipment MTBF

1. Numeric Relay (IED)
2. Server
3. VRF
4. Gateway
5. Battery Charger
6. DCDB
7. GIS
8. Transformer
d. The MTBF proposed by the contractor during design and as reviewed and
accepted by DMRC, shall have to be demonstrated by contractor during
DLP. In case of non-compliance of committed/agreed MTBF for a particular
system/sub-system/equipment, the contractor shall have to carry out
required changes/modifications in design, maintenance
methodology/philosophy of all system/sub-system/equipment under the
contract so that the desired MTBF is achieved.
e. Disruption of Revenue Services as a result of equipment/system/sub-

system’s failure, would be looked upon very seriously by DMRC and penalty
at the rate of Rs. 5 Lakhs per incident shall be levied on the contractor, if
such disruption is on account of failure of the contractor.
9.9.2. Availability Requirements:
a. Availability shall be defined in terms of percentage availability.
Percentage Availability = [1 – {Downtime/Total Time}] * 100
Where:

i. Downtime is the total time spent on preventive & scheduled

maintenance during revenue hours plus total time spent on
corrective, breakdown maintenance & repairs during revenue or non-
revenue hours.
ii. Total Time is the time in hours in the assessment period multiplied by
the population of the equipment commissioned.
b. Minimum Availability Targets to be achieved are specified below:
S.No. Equipment Availability

1. Numeric Relay (IED) 99.95%
2. Server 99.95%
3. Gateway 99.95%
4. Battery Charger 99.95%
5. DCDB 99.95%
6. GIS 99.95%
7. Transformer 99.95%
c. Maximum Time to carry out any schedule of preventive maintenance shall
not be more than 4 hours.
9.9.3. Maintainability Requirements:
a. Ease of carrying out Maintenance & Repair, of an equipment/system/sub-

system, is the most important aspect of DMRC. These criteria shall be taken
into account while designing of the system by Contractor.
b. It shall be made sure during design that maintenance tasks are achieved in
minimum time and using minimum manpower.
c. Components, systems and their sub-assemblies which require routine

maintenance, frequent attention shall be modular and easily accessible.
d. Mean Time to Repair (MTTR) – It is the ratio of ‘Cumulative time for repair’
(including time to access) to the total number of Failures.
e. Design shall be such that that the Mean Time to Repair (MTTR) is
minimized throughout the system.

f. The MTTR proposed by the contractor during design and as reviewed and
accepted by DMRC, shall have to be demonstrated by contractor during the
DLP. In case of non-compliance of committed/agreed MTTR for a particular
system/sub-system/equipment, the contractor shall have to carry out
required changes / modifications in design / mounting arrangements /
maintenance methodology / philosophy so that the desired MTTR is
achievable.
9.10. Safety
9.10.1. Safety Requirements
 The installation design shall incorporate measures to avoid presenting

safety hazards to people.
 The Systems design shall incorporate measures to provide for its safe
management and operation.
 The Systems shall not give rise, or be subject to, dangerous interactions
within the railway or with other systems.
 The design of the earthing system shall conform to IS 3043 : 1987
9.10.2. Safety Targets
 The Contractor shall show that the Systems can be maintained safely. The
Contractor shall prepare a Quantified Risk Assessment (QRA) to model the
risk to maintenance and operations staff. The QRA may be based on a
comparison of System features and operating practices with other metro
systems for which risk levels are known.
 The Contractor shall demonstrate that the Systems have been designed to
minimise the risk due to operator and maintainer error, considering both the
ergonomic aspects of the System design to reduce the likelihood of error,
and protective measures adopted to mitigate the consequence of such
error.
 The Contractor shall demonstrate that risk to maintenance and operations
staff, members of public, including trespassers is as low as reasonably
practicable.
9.11. Conformity with Governing Specifications and other Statutory
Requirements

9.11.1. Regulatory Authority and Safety requirements: The Contractor shall

without limitation comply with applicable provisions of the latest edition
of the following standards, referred to as the “Code”.
 Central Electricity Authority Regulation 2010 with latest amendments.

 Indian Electricity Act 2003 with latest amendments.
 Rules and Regulations prescribed by local authorities as applicable.
 Relevant, Indian Standards, IEC Standards, British Standards, and other
National/International standards as applicable.
 Electromagnetic compatibility IEC 61000 -2-4, EN 12015 & EN12016.
 Nominal characteristics of all Plant forming part of the electrical works shall
be specified to conform to the relevant International Electro technical
Commission (IEC) Standards and the International Standards Organization
(ISO).
 Seismic Zone: Comply with code requirements for seismic risk zone V, as
per IS:1893 part I- 2002.
9.11.2. Unless otherwise stated herein, the design, installation, testing and
commissioning shall comply with the latest edition of all applicable
standards issued by the Bureau of Indian Standards and other relevant local
regulations applicable.
9.11.3. The Contractor shall furnish information asked for by a statutory body (e.g.,
EIG, Commissioner of Railway Safety, etc.) in particular format as directed
by “Engineer”.
9.11.4. In the event of a conflict between any of the above applicable or reference
codes, the more stringent requirements shall take precedence.
9.11.5. The Contractor shall be responsible for the completion of the whole of the
Works for system in total conformity with the Codes. It is the Contractor’s
responsibility to comply with all code requirements even if the same is not
specifically mentioned in this specification. It is the Contractor’s
responsibility to coordinate and cooperate with the Power supply authority,
traction Contractor and Other Contractor(s) on issues related to the
installation of the equipments at all stages.

9.11.6. In case the Contractor proposes part of plant in accordance with other
international standards, then detailed comparison documents including
one original copy (in English – translation to English should be the approved
one by the standard originating committee ) of the latest edition of the
referred standard ( and related annexes) are to be submitted for the
Employer’s acceptance. These documents shall detail discrepancies and
advantages it offers. Employer’s Representative reserves the right to accept
or reject such proposal.
9.12. Quality Assurance
9.12.1. The Contractor shall engage experienced installers who have completed
installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for the
contract Works and with a record of successful in service performance.
9.12.2. The Contractor shall ensure that EMC emissions due to installation and
operation of plant for the contract Work does not affect the operation of any
other mechanical and electrical systems.
9.13. Testing and Inspection
(a) The Contractor shall be responsible for carrying out successfully all
Testing and Inspection required by the Regulatory and Statutory
Authorities and ensure compliance to Codes for the Completion of whole of
the Works.
(b) The Contractor shall mobilize all required resources like manpower and
machinery for all testing and acceptance by the Employer’s Representative,
as per the contract.
9.14. Preventive Maintenance
The Contractor shall submit for acceptance and endorsement by Employer’s

Representative, as a part of the O&M documentation, the following
information for all delivered Plant:
(i) Description of recommended and mandatory preventive maintenance
routines.
(ii) Estimated time interval and schedule for the activities, and

(iii) Detail of operational downtime required for each preventive maintenance

activity.
9.15. Abbreviations
The abbreviations used in this Specification are listed in “Chapter -7”.

Contract- DE-04 – Particular Specification– Interface
Volume 4
CHAPTER 3
Interfaces

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INRODUCTION ........................................................................................................ 3
1.1 OBJECTIVE.............................................................................................................. 3
1.2 INTERFACING REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................ 3
2. INTERFACE WITH POWER SUPPLY AUTHORITIES (PSA) ................................... 3
2.1 ITEMS OF INTERFACE............................................................................................ 3
2.2 INTERFACE REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................ 4
3. INTERFACE WITH TRACTION POWER SUPPLY AND SCADA CONTRACTOR.... 8
3.1 ITEMS OF INTERFACE............................................................................................ 8
3.2 INTERFACE REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................ 9
4. INTERFACE WITH THIRD PARTY DESIGN VALIDATOR (IF ANY)......................... 9
5. INTERFACE MANAGEMENT FOR RSS AND SIGNALLING & TELECOM
CONTRACTORS .....................................................................................................11
6. INTERFACE REQUIREMENTS WITH OTHER CONTRACTORS ...........................11
6.1.1 THE MAJOR INTERFACING REQUIREMENTS ARE WITH THE FOLLOWING
AGENCIES / DESIGNERS / CONTRACTORS. .......................................................11
6.1.2 INTERFACE WITH CIVIC AUTHORITIES / DELHI GOVT. CIVIC AUTHORITIES ...12
6.1.3 INTERFACE WITH BSNL, GAS PIPELINE AUTHORITIES, AND OTHER UTILITIES
AUTHORITIES ........................................................................................................12
6.1.4 INTERFACE WITH DEPOT CONTRACTOR ...........................................................12
6.1.5 INTERFACE WITH STATION BUILDING CONTRACTOR ......................................12
6.1.6 INTERFACE WITH SOLAR CONTRACTOR ...........................................................13
6.1.7 INTERFACE REGARDING IGBC RATING ..............................................................13

1. INRODUCTION
1.1 Objective
The design and construction of the Delhi Metro Railway, is a complex

multidisciplinary project, requiring close interaction and co-ordination between
the various designers and builders. The objective of the “Interfacing
document” is to define as clearly as possible the Scope of Work of different
Agencies, so that the problems which could arise during the Execution Stage
are greatly minimized, if not eliminated.
Notwithstanding the above, it is imperative that the RSS Contractor shall

maintain a close Interface with the other concerned Contractors, other
agencies and Design teams, so that the problems faced at site, if any, are
communicated through ‘Interface documents’ and discussed in periodical
‘Interface meetings’, to arrive at logical and expeditious solutions, to ensure
smooth progress of physical works and realization of the scheduled dates of
completion of works.
1.2 Interfacing Requirements
The major interfacing requirements are with the following Agencies /

Designers / Contractors
 Power Supply Authorities
 Govt. authorities like Gas pipelines, PWD, railways, and

telecommunication etc.
 Traction Power Supply & SCADA Contractor (EMI/EMC testing)
 Signalling contractor
 Telecom contractor
 Civil Agency-Sewage, water supply, access roads etc.
2. INTERFACE WITH POWER SUPPLY AUTHORITIES (PSA)
2.1 ITEMS OF INTERFACE

Power Supply required for Traction and Auxiliary purposes will be obtained
from Power supply authority/company/agency. These Authority/company are
collectively referred to as ‘Power Supply Authority (PSA)” and the RSS
Contractor is required to interface with the PSA for the following items
a) Power Supply Authorities (Transco and DISCOM and other state

government authorities)
b) Take off points at PSA sub-stations
c) Protection Co-ordination
d) Metering Equipment
e) Data exchange.
2.2 Interface Requirements
The Interface requirements are described in Table 1

Table 1
Interfacing Requirements with PSA
Item
Item Description RSS Contractor PSA
No.
1. Take-off points at RSS contractor will co-ordinate with PSA will indicate at site as
PSA Substations. PSA to ensure that the necessary CB’s well as schematically the
Termination of and instrument transformers are arrangements for the
cable at the Grid provided by PSA in their switchyard for outgoing feeders to the
Substation of PSA necessary protection and DMRC Substations from PSA
measurement. RSS contractor will Substations. PSA will provide
provide cable terminations, cable the necessary assistance to
paths, cable support structure inside the RSS contractor and
PSA substation for DMRC HT feeder approve the arrangement and
cables. RSS contractor shall provide layout. PSA will accord
along with foundations etc. in the permission to work.
PSA’s premises, provide Termination
boxes, connectors if any required,
Electrical connections to the cable tip
and their fastening, sealing between
cable box enclosures and cable end
parts, provide earth connections and
jumpers for connecting cable end
termination to the power supply take
off point.

2. Supply and RSS contractor will provide cable

Installation of EHV trenches or other arrangement, and
Underground cable supports inside the GSS and
cables from PSA proper planning for cable entry into the
Substation to GSS. RSS contractor will supply and PSA will provide the
DMRC Substation install the underground cables from necessary assistance to the
PSA substation to DMRC RSS. RSS contractor and approve
the arrangement and layout.
3. Cable termination RSS contractor will provide the PSA will accord permission to
structure (CTS) in necessary Cable Terminations, work.
the PSA support structures, earthing of whole
Substation structures inside the GSS of PSA at
the approved/appropriate designed
location.
4. Protection Co- RSS contractor will prepare a self- PSA will verify and approve
ordination explanatory document, describing the the final scheme of
various protective equipment, relays, protection.
etc., and submit to PSA.
5. Metering RSS Contractor will provide necessary PSA will provide necessary
equipment meters for measurement of voltage, metering equipment to
current, power factor, kVA, kVARh, measure kWh, kVARh, kVA,
kWh, at the DMRC RSS. power factor, current and
voltage on their outgoing
feeders/panels at their
Substations and/or at DMRC
RSS, in incomer
feeders/panels of DMRC.
6. Data exchange RSS contractor will indicate to the PSA PSA will approve the final list
the list of data/information which of data/information identified

DMRC would like to exchange (send for exchange between PSA &
/receive) with PSA. For exchange of DMRC.
data RSS contractor will deploy digital
A tentative list has also been
relays and communication cables with
provided in the contract
all necessary arrangements.
chapter 8B.
7. Cable protection RSS contractor will provide the PSA will verify and approve
necessary protection arrangements the final scheme of
(Line differential, distance, overcurrent, protection.
etc), as per design, for the Incoming
EHV Cables. The Relays required to
be provided at the PSA end will be
supplied and installed at the PSA
premises, by the RSS contractor. If
DMRC opt for standby IED for
220/132/66 kV cables than standby
IED also to be provided by RSS
contractor.
Pilot wire for Differential Protection to

be provided for Main & Standby
Relays. The same shall be supplied by
the RSS contractor. The pilot wire shall
be armored type.
8. Jumper RSS contractor will provide jumper

connection connection from termination box
bushing to the EHV Busbar, as per
requirements.
9. Cable Path inside RSS contractor will construct cable PSA will permit laying of
GSS of PSA trench or necessary cable path as per cables in existing trench or
10.
approved design including covers and separable trench if available

other required items for laying cables in the GSS. PSA will permit
in case no spare trench or spare and approve construction and
capacity in available trench of PSA is design of new trench or
available. RSS contractor will necessary cable path for
undertake this exercise for laying cables if no trench is
identification and interaction. available.
11. Cable sheath, RSS contractor will calculate the fault PSA will provide parameters
calculation of fault level based on the data obtained from for carrying out fault level and
level the PSA and check the rating of the short circuit power
cable and design of sheath. calculations.
3. Interface with Traction Power Supply and SCADA Contractor
3.1 Items of Interface
The 25 kV single phase and 33 kV three phase power output from the RSS-
cum-TSS-cum-AMS being supplied and installed by the RSS Contractor, will
be utilised for Traction and Auxiliary purposes, by the DMRC, in the various
Corridors.
A different Contractor, designated as “Traction Power Supply and SCADA

Contractor “Contract” is responsible for supply and installation of the 25 kV
Traction Overhead Equipment & (OHE), 33 kV cable network, Auxiliary
Substations at Stations and a SCADA system. The RSS Contractor is required
to interface with the Traction Contactors for the following items.
a) 25 kV Cables in the RSS/TSS
b) Return current cables
c) Cable paths for 25 kV cables
d) 33 kV cables in the RSS/AMS
e) Cable paths for 33 kV cables
f) Protection, Control and Monitoring

g) SCADA communication requirements
3.2 Interface Requirements
4. For detailed interface requirement, refer Annexure-24 of Chapter 8A of PS.

4.
4. Interface with Third Party Design Validator (If any)
The RSS Contractor will be required to interface with the Third Party Design
Validator for any technical clarifications and/or confirmations.
Item Item Description RSS Contractor Third Party Design

No. Validator
1 Design of the RSS contractor will prepare the Third Party Design
RSS/AMS/TSS all designs of the (220/132/66 Validator will check all the
kV) RSS/AMS/TSS according detailed designs submitted by
to the site conditions and the RSS contractor.
specifications specified in the
Employer’s requirement.
2 Design RSS contractor will submit the Third Party Design

Calculations detailed Design Calculations of Validator will check the
the loading, operation cycle, Calculations of the loading,
Relay settings, losses in the operation cycle, losses in the
equipment, temperature rise, equipment, temperature rise,
efficiency, etc., and other efficiency, etc., and validate
relevant parameters of the same for execution.
Transformers, circuit breakers,
Interrupters, disconnecting
switches, etc. as per the
Employer’s requirements.
3 Power & Control RSS contractor will prepare all Third Party Design
Cabling the Power and control cable Validator will check the

run layout in the entire Power and control

RSS/AMS/TSS premises, cable run layout.
control room, cable trenches,
cable termination (at both RSS
and PSA end)
4 Layouts of the RSS contractor will prepare the Third Party Design
RSS/AMS/TSS all the Civil, Electrical Layouts Validator will check the
according to the site conditions designed Civil, Electrical
and specifications specified in Layouts submitted by the
the Employer’s requirement RSS contractor and validate
and submit it to DMRC for its and approve the same for the
Validation and checking. further execution at the site.
5 Structure Design RSS contractor will prepare the Third Party Design
all the Civil structure designs of Validator will check the Civil
foundations, cables paths (i.e. structure designs of
trenches or other), steel foundations, cables paths
structures, gantry, building (i.e. trenches or other), steel
structure etc. of the structures, gantry, and
substations. building structure etc. of the
substations and validate the
same.
6 Control, RSS contractor will prepare all Third Party Design

Protection the Power Control, Protection Validator will check the
scheme and scheme and metering protection schemes
metering arrangement, of the substation. submitted by the RSS
arrangement contractor

7 Simulation Study RSS contactor shall carry Third Party Design

and validation design / simulation study for Validator shall carry out
reactive power compensation validation of Design Services
requirement at each RSS. carried out by RSS
contractor.
8 SCADA RSS contractor will prepare all Third Party Design

the scheme of the SCADA Validator will check all
control in the RSS including SCADA scheme of the Power
the location of BCUs/RTUs supply arrangement
required as they may be and submitted by the RSS
submit the IO/OP details to contractor and validate the
DMRC. same.
Note:- Any Design modifications/suggestions/changes suggested by the Third Party

Design Validator / DMRC in the Design submitted by the RSS contractor, have to
incorporated in the design by the RSS contactor and get those approved from the DMRC
without any additional cost.
5. INTERFACE MANAGEMENT FOR RSS AND SIGNALLING & TELECOM

CONTRACTORS
6. For detailed interface requirement, refer Annexure-24 of Chapter 8A of PS.
6. Interface requirements with other Contractors
6.1.1 The major interfacing requirements are with the following Agencies /
Designers / Contractors.
 All CIVIC AUTHORITIES/ Delhi govt. (Municipal corporation/Road &

building dept./Jal board/DISCOM and Transco etc.,
 Depot Contractor.
 BSNL, gas pipeline authorities, and other Utilities
 Station Building Contractor

6.1.2 Interface with Civic Authorities / Delhi Govt. Civic Authorities
The RSS Contractor, in the course of survey, execution, testing and

commissioning shall maintain constant interface with Delhi Govt. Civic
Authorities, to obtain
 All permissions and approvals including payment of fees/ restoration

charges/ penalties/ demurrages.
 Clearances for digging along pavements / roads, as necessary
 Restoration of the sites, as required under terms of agreement with

Delhi Govt. Civic Authorities and final clearance to be obtained.
 Sewage, Forest Department for tree cutting for cable laying works
appropriately.
6.1.3 Interface with BSNL, gas pipeline authorities, and other Utilities
authorities
The RSS Contractor, in the course of survey, execution and testing and
commissioning shall maintain constant interface with BSNL, gas pipeline
authorities, and other utilities authorities to ensure that
 The functioning of the utilities is not jeopardized by the actions of the

RSS Contractor
 No damage is caused to the utilities
 And, if any, work is carried out in the vicinity or on the utilities; the
status-quo-ante is restored to the satisfaction of the Utilities.
 Obtaining ‘No objection ‘and final clearance as required including

payment of fees/restoration charges/penalties/demurrages.
6.1.4 Interface with Depot Contractor
For detailed interface requirement, refer Annexure-24 of Chapter 8A of PS.

6.1.5
6.1.5 Interface with Station Building Contractor

6.1.6 For detailed interface requirement, refer Annexure-24 of Chapter 8A of PS.

6.1.6 Interface with Solar Contractor
DMRC shall provide roof top solar for each of the RSSs.
RSS Contractor shall interface with the Solar contractor for necessary
provision required for laying of cables, provision of switchgears, earthing and
design of control room building etc.
6.1.7 Interface regarding IGBC rating
DMRC RSS shall have Platinum IGBC rating.
RSS contractor shall prepare all the related documents in consent with DMRC
appointed IGBC consultant.
RSS contractor shall liaison with IGBC consultant for all necessary approval.
6.1.8 Interface with other Civil and System contractor.
For detailed interface requirement, refer Annexure-24 of Chapter 8A of PS.

Contract- DE-04 – Particular Specification – Testing and Commissioning
Volume 4
CHAPTER 4
Testing and Commissioning
DMRC/Contract DE-04/PS /Chap 4 Page 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. TESTING .................................................................................................................... 3
1.1 TESTING CONDITIONS AND EQUIPMENT ACCEPTANCE ...................................................... 3
1.1.1 Documents related to the tests ............................................................................ 3
1.2 TESTING CONDITIONS .................................................................................................... 4
1.2.1 In-plant testing ..................................................................................................... 5
1.2.2 After shipment and Preliminary tests ................................................................... 5
2. COMMISSIONING ...................................................................................................... 6
2.1 GENERAL...................................................................................................................... 6
2.2 STATION / SITE TESTS ................................................................................................... 6
2.3 PUTTING INTO SERVICE TESTS ....................................................................................... 7
2.4 INTEGRATED TESTING AND COMMISSIONING ..................................................................... 7
2.5 SPECIFIC TESTS............................................................................................................. 7

1. TESTING
This Chapter describes the testing & commissioning relating to the Power supply
equipment and EHV Cabling, in conformity with the requirements of international
standards and Railway practices.
Testing constitutes an essential obligation to comply with the Railway System

requirements.
1.1 Testing Conditions and Equipment Acceptance
The contractor will have to carry out all the tests and checks required guaranteeing
the Employer of the good construction and the satisfactory operation of all power
supply installation. Also the contractor shall co-ordinate & arrange, testing
equipment etc required for testing facilities.
The various high, medium and low voltage equipment, cables and accessories will
be subjected to all the tests required under equipment test sheets (lists are not
exhaustive), and as per the relevant IEC or other standards mentioned in the
technical & performance specification of each equipment or otherwise.
It is reminded that the contractor will be totally entrusted with full assembly and
installation of all pieces of equipment mentioned in this specification, with supplying
the maintenance equipment and the special tooling which shall be delivered as soon
as equipment installation will be completed and with the various duties he is bound
to regarding witnessing of tests at commissioning and supervision after energising.
1.1.1 Documents related to the tests
The contractor shall draft and submit to the Employer approval of "the testing lists",
which he will have to supply in its final form one month before in-plant acceptance of
the equipment.
These lists shall be extremely detailed and include for each piece of equipment:
- The list of the in-plant tests,
- The operating mode (testing procedure) describing how to proceed to perform

properly the test,

- The testing book indicating the expected result of the various tests and provision
to indicate the obtained result during the test and to record all observations.
For the on-site tests, the contractor will have to draft a bilingual testing lists which
will include, for each testing stage and for each piece of equipment the list of all the
operations to be carried out and the precise mentions, for each of these, of the
interventions to be executed, of the references required for proper identification of
the equipment (testing procedure) and of the results which can be expected from
these tests with provision to indicate the obtained result during the test and to record
all observations (testing book).
The contractor will have to supply the various certificates and the relevant
computation sheets, at the latest one month after the tests.
1.2 Testing Conditions
The Employer will appoint representative who will be in charge of supervising the
design, the manufacturing and the assembling of the equipment in the
manufacturer’s works, contractor’s workshops. They will be empowered to halt the
proceeding of any assembly work, which would not be in accordance with the
stipulations, and to have replaced every part damaged during assembly or
transportation. They will witness the in-plant tests.
All delays which could arise from additional tests from modifications required due to
defects will not be able to be used by the contractor to justify price increase or time
extensions.
Each piece of equipment will be subjected to two successive tests: in the plant and
on the site after assembly. These tests will be carried out by the contractor, under
his responsibility and in the presence of the Employer and of the consulting
engineer. Each of these tests will be subjected to a certificate. Provisional
acceptance will be granted only after execution of the both sets of tests.
NOTE: For type tests, the contractor can provide test reports performed according
to the corresponding IEC standard, on similar equipment of same capacity
and design.

1.2.1 In-plant testing
In plant testing concern type and routine tests
 Type tests are tests performed on one or two of a equipment series
 Routine test are tests performed on each equipment
These tests will enable checking the quality of the equipment and its compliance
with the specifications. Once the equipment will have passed the in-plant
acceptance tests, it shall be delivered and installed under the contractor
responsibility.
Concerning some type tests, test certificates issued by recognized agencies will be
able to supplied if the contractor cannot carry out these tests himself and if the test
certificates are related to a similar equipment of same capacity and design.
However, the tests of checking the operation of isolators and earth isolators will
have to be performed as routine test.
The final factory tests will be carried out on the fully assembled equipment as
specified. Thereafter, if required and permitted by the technical features of the
equipment, the equipment may be dis-assembled for transportation purposes. The
dis-assembly should not, however, cause any deterioration of the technical
performance of the equipment. In respect of certain routine tests, it may be
necessary to repeat the tests at more than one stage, and the Contractor should
ensure that this is done, as required by the Employer’s representative. The fact that
certain tests had to be carried out on the equipment and/or any part, at more than
one stage, cannot be claimed by the Contractor, as reason for any failure/sub-
standard technical performances of the equipment.
1.2.2 After shipment and Preliminary tests
1.2.2.1 After shipment
It should be performed at the stage to verify that whether any damage have taken
place during transportation. They should include, at least, the tests listed in the
column “after shipment “of each concerned equipment test sheet
1.2.2.2 Preliminary tests

It should be performed at this stage the tests to verify that equipment have been
installed and assembled correctly.
They should include, at least, the following:
 All test listed in the column “on site “ of each equipment test sheet
 Conformity of the assembly and wiring with the contractor’s drawings and
instructions
 Sealing of all pipe junctions, and the tightness of bolts and connections;
 Proper function of each part of equipment, of each equipment and of

sections
 Cleanliness of installations
2. COMMISSIONING
2.1 General
The Commissioning description, based on the following frame, will have to be

defined by the contractor and submitted to the Employer.
Once the contractor will have completed the after shipment tests, and the various
pieces of equipment installation, the assignment should include:
- Station tests
- Putting into service tests
- After energising
The Employer and the consulting engineer will be empowered to ask for any
additional testing they may deem necessary. The contractor will have to supply the
testing installations and measuring apparatuses required to this effect.
In accordance with the stipulations, provisional acceptance will then take place,
followed by final acceptance at the end of the guarantee time.
2.2 Station / Site Tests
The testing period shall mandatorily be included in the period of the works stated in
the contract project. All putting into tests will be carried out in co-operation with the

Employer or its representative. It should be performed at this stage the tests to

verify that the different sections are electrically and mechanically compatible.
They should include, at least, the following:
 Tests requiring several sections to operate at once,
 Internal and between sections operational and safety Interlocking tests,
2.3 Putting Into Service Tests
It should be performed at this stage the tests verifying that the different equipments
are acting correctly when energised.
2.4 Integrated testing and commissioning
The general testing having shown proper operation, it should be performed, after the
first 15 days of operation, an overall integrated test of the installations, during which
the various actuation and operation situation (putting into service, normal actuation,
failure tripping) will be simulated.
2.5 Specific tests
Once the installation of the various pieces of equipment will have been completed,
and the common test performed, some equipment will require specific tests.
The list of this tests shall be included in the "On site testing" document, which the
contractor will have to supply.

Contract- DE-04 – Particular Specification – Installation and Construction
Volume 4
CHAPTER 5
Installation and Construction
DMRC/Contract: DE-04 /PS/Chap-5 Page 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................................................... 3
1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ...................................................................................................................................... 3
1.2 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS........................................................................................................................................ 4
1.3 CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION PLAN ............................................................................................................. 5
1.4 WORKS AREA ........................................................................................................................................................... 5
1.5 TEMPORARY WORKS ............................................................................................................................................... 6
1.6 CONSTRUCTION PLANT AND EQUIPMENT ................................................................................................................ 6
1.7 SITE SUPERVISION AND SAFETY ISSUES .................................................................................................................. 6
1.8 INSTALLATION OF CABLES ...................................................................................................................................... 7
1.9 WORKMANSHIP ........................................................................................................................................................ 8
2. PROGRAMME REQUIREMENT ............................................................................................. 9
2.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................................................................... 9
2.2 CHANGE IN KEY DATES (KD) AND ACCCESS DATES (AD) ....................................................................... 9
2.3 KEY DATES ..............................................................................................................................................................10
2.4 ACCESS DATES ....................................................................................................................................................13
3. SCHEDULES ........................................................................................................................ 14
3.1 SCHEDULE OF KEY DATES AND ACCESS DATES ....................................................................................................14
3.2 SCHEDULE OF ACCESS DATES ................................................................................................................................15

1. REQUIREMENTS
1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
The Contractor shall comply with all Enactment's in executing the Works, including
but not limited to all statutory provisions on occupational health and safety.
The Contractor shall co-ordinate with Other Contractors in the execution of the
Works. The Contractor shall also co-ordinate and co-operate with all Relevant
Authorities in the execution of the Works.
The installation of all equipment shall be undertaken at all times by suitably trained
and competent employees of the Contractor, to the satisfaction of the Employer’s
Representative.
Only appropriate tools, plant, equipment and vehicles shall be used. Installation of all
equipment shall be in accordance with the Construction and Installation Plan
described in the GS. Installation of all equipment shall conform to the best industry
practices. Precautions shall be undertaken to ensure the safety of personnel and
equipment for all installation works.
The Contractor shall, prior to starting any installation and construction work, identify
any possible hazards, and implement measures of eliminating and/or controlling
such potential hazards, in line with safe working practices.
The Contractor shall ensure that all areas of work are sufficiently illuminated for the
works to be undertaken and that a safe system of work is employed for all activities.
The Contractor shall operate a robust system for the control of persons entering or
working upon the site.
The system shall include as a minimum:
a. register of all employees,
b. personal identification, with photograph,
- levels of competency,
- date of expiry,
- date of issue,

- signature; and
c. register of all visitors.
The Contractor shall co-operate, at all times, with the Employer’s Representative
and Other Contractors to ensure that the Site is protected from unauthorised
admission, either wilfully or otherwise. The Contractor shall make due provision for
the safe access and egress to the Site of Works for its staff and subcontractors. This
access shall be maintained such that it is free of all hazards and is in a safe
condition throughout the duration of the Works.
1.2 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS
The installation and construction work pertaining to this Contract shall include, but
not be limited to the following: -
- Finalisation of the Construction and Installation Programme;
- Survey on Site and review the technical requirements shown in this

Specification and the Employer’s Drawings;
- Production of the calculation sheets and installation drawings for Site

installation;
- Production of specific site designs and drawings based on typical designs and
drawings supplied;
- Installation in accordance with the finalised installation drawings;
- Co-ordination with Other Contractors;
- Submission of the installation reports and records including colour

photographs showing the progress of works and the quality of the materials
and workmanship, taken by the Contractor, in the presence of Employer’s
representative
- Testing and commissioning, as per finalised protocol and programme.
- Production of as built drawings, documents, calculation sheets, and records.

1.3 CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION PLAN
The Contractor shall undertake installation work in stages as shown in the detailed
installation programme. Installation, testing and commissioning of later stages shall
not impact revenue operation of earlier stages.
As a minimum, the detailed Construction and Installation Plan shall include but not
be limited to all the activities described in clause 1.1 above and clause 3.6.1 of the
GS and all other activities covered in this contract, installation details and methods
of all activities, equipment and tools to be used for installation, safety issues,
supervision, temporary land occupation needed and the vehicles to be used for
installation.
1.3.1 Manual Handling
To facilitate handling of equipment during installation and maintenance thereafter,

the RSS Contractor shall install material handling equipment as below:
a. Travelling hoists and unloading jib cranes for traction substations.
b. Any other handling arrangement in order to ensure smooth handling of

Substation equipment, from point of receipt at site to the final point of
installation
The work supply and installation of the hoists and jib cranes shall be in the scope of
RSS contractors. The RSS contractors shall also be responsible for designing the
structures, Install the beams at appropriate locations and provide the hoists and jib
cranes.
The entire material handling plan for receiving substation, auxiliary main substation
traction substation and auxiliary substation for movement of bulky item such as
transformers, 220 kV/132 kV/66 kV, 33kV switchgear cable drums shall be carefully
planned.
1.4 WORKS AREA
The Contractor will be given temporary work sites on or around the land/site for RSS
and additional site if required and available. The Contractor shall comply with the

requirements specified in Chapter 17 of the GS in relation to the use of works sites

allocated to the Contractor.
1.5 TEMPORARY WORKS
The design of the Temporary Works shall be submitted to the Employer’s

Representative for review. All Temporary Works shall be removed on completion of
the Section, or as directed by the Employer’s Representative. All Temporary Works
shall be clearly distinguishable from the Permanent Works.
1.6 CONSTRUCTION PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
The Contractor shall provide for himself the required number of sets Construction
Plant & Equipment, for Construction.
If possible and available an area of approx.1000 sqm will be given to the Contractor
at one suitable location, for his office and godown. In addition the Contractor will be
permitted to use the Substation sites for storage of materials, equipments etc, and
also for a small site office, till the Substations are ready for commissioning.
1.7 SITE SUPERVISION AND SAFETY ISSUES
The Contractor shall set up a Site supervision system, which shall be part of the
overall safety, system assurance and quality management system. Details of Health
and Safety requirements at Site are described in Chapter 18 of the GS.
The Contractor shall adopt an appropriate quality management system throughout

the entire Site installation period to ensure that the System performance
requirements as specified in this PS are achieved.
The Contractor shall provide sufficient number of suitably experienced supervisors

and skilled workers to ensure that the progress and quality of the work, both on Site
and in the Contractor’s workshops, are maintained to the satisfaction of the
Supervisors shall have a minimum of five years’ previous experience in a

supervisory capacity on similar projects and all the skilled workers including
linesmen, electricians fitters and craftsmen, shall have a minimum of two years’
previous experience in installation of similar systems. Supervisors and Skilled

Workers utilized for HV cable jointing shall possess adequate technical expertise
and experience and their deployment is subject to approval by the Employer.
The Contractor’s supervision system shall be responsible not only for the
supervision of the concerned system installation but also for the supervision of the
installation of the primary fixing system (mast foundation), the earth mats and
systems, etc. The supervisors shall work on a full-time basis during the entire
installation process.
The Contractor shall maintain a set of drawings at each project site which accurately
reflect the current status of field changes. The Contractor shall obtain letter of no
objection from the Employer’s Representative for any such changes. The Contractor
shall prepare final drawings showing the as built configuration. These drawings shall
be developed in a logical format to facilitate routine system maintenance and
troubleshooting. All drawings and details shall be endorsed by the Contractor.
The Employer’s Representative reserves the right to undertake, at any time, checks
on the proficiency of the Contractors staff, licensing and all associated
documentation. Should any of the Contractors staff be found incompetent or
unlicensed he shall be removed from the site until their Competency has been
established.
1.8 INSTALLATION OF CABLES
The Contractor shall co-ordinate with the Civil Contractors wherever necessary, for
the installation of cables in cable galleries, trenches, ducts, troughs, risers and other
locations.
The cable system shall, during installation, be fully protected from mechanical
damage and be generally accessible at all points for inspection along its entire route.
Suitable cable markers shall be provided for covered cables upon completion of
installation. Should it prove necessary to cut any cable during installation, all cut
ends shall be properly sealed.
The maximum pulling force of any cable during installation shall not exceed the
design force of cables. For pulling, the Contractor shall use dynamometer for
ensuring maximum pulling force. The Contractor shall use cable rollers for spreading

cables. These should not be pulled and scratched on road/rough surfaces. The
cable drums should be mounted on cable drum jacks of suitable height and capacity
before taking out the cable for installation
All cables shall be installed in the formed cable trenches, shafts, hangers, trays and
brackets. The minimum recommended bending radius of the cables shall be
adhered to during installation. All materials used for termination, jointing and
installation of cables in confined spaces shall have flame retardant, low smoke,
halogen free characteristics. All cables shall be laid in accordance with the Method
statement provided by the cable manufacture and approved by the Employer before
starting of cable laying work.
1.9 WORKMANSHIP
All the installation shall be carried out according to the instructions shown in this
Specification and Employer’s Drawings.
All assemblies of equipment and their components and parts shall be completely
interchangeable if they are of similar type. The style and procedure of the
workmanship shall be consistent throughout the Works.
Unless otherwise specified, the Employer’s Representative shall decide the final
colours for all paint work and other finishes to be applied to any part of the Works.
All parts, which are subject to, wear or damage by dust shall be completely enclosed
in dust proof housings.
Cable manufacturer’s guideline on cable laying, handling, storage, terminations,

jointing etc. should be followed as per site conditions.

2. PROGRAMME REQUIREMENT
2.1 GENERAL
The date of commencement of commercial services, hereinafter referred to as

Revenue Operation Date (ROD), for the various Corridors, covered by this Tender,
are as per relevant clause of bid document.
Accordingly, the various RSS’s shall be ready for commissioning by the dates to
meet the target dates stipulated in Schedule of key dates in the bidding forms fixed
in accordance with the Revenue operation (6 months before ROD).
In addition to the requirements specified in the General Specification, the Contractor

shall program the Works in accordance with a pre-determined sequence to meet
various Key Dates and Access Dates so as to meet the Target Dates of commercial
opening.
2.2 CHANGE IN KEY DATES (KD) AND ACCCESS DATES (AD)
The bidders attention is invited to the various Key Dates described in the
subsequent paragraphs. It is essential that the Contractor shall achieve the identified
work by the specified Key Date mentioned against it, failing which Liquidated
Damages shall become leviable as set out in the Contract. The Employer will, on his
part, make all efforts to provide to the Contractor access to information as well as to
various locations at stations/track/viaduct, in stages, in order to plan/execute his
activities for time-bound completion of his obligations under the Contract, as per the
Access Dates mentioned in the subsequent paragraphs. If, however, due to any
reasons, the Employer is not in a position to provide access or shared access, as
per the stated Access Dates, the Employer, in these circumstances, will inform the
Contractor, in writing, about the proposed revised Access Date, at least 8 weeks
before the scheduled Access Date. The Contractor shall suitably make necessary
changes in his Work Program and shall ensure that, irrespective of the revised
Access Dates, the concerned Key Dates are adhered to. Nothing extra will be paid
to the contractor on this account.

2.3 KEY DATES
The work includes a number of stages. These stages, which are inter-related with,
and essential to the completion of the Site Development, Design, Construction,
Supply, Installation, Testing and Commissioning of Receiving Cum Traction Sub
Station and Auxiliary Main Sub Station and associated cabling works for Delhi
MRTS, are to be achieved by the Key Dates. The Key Dates indicated in the
schedule of Key Dates are mentioned in terms of the time period reckoned from the
commencement of the works, and the deliverables for each Key Date shall be
achieved by the midnight of the day mentioned.
If the identified work is not achieved by the stated Key Dates, liquidated damages
may become applicable as set out in the Contract.
Description of each Key Date is as detailed below for RSS work:
2.3.1 STAGE 1 – Key Date 1 XX: Completion of Civil works of RSS-XX
Achievement:
a. Completion of all Civil works like foundation, trenches, laying of pipes,

building works (except final floor finishing), boundary wall etc.
b. Interfacing Contracts: MCD, NDMC, DDA, HVPNL, UPPCL and other

Relevant Contractors/ Agencies.
2.3.2 STAGE 2 – Key Date 2 XX: Completion of Surveying of cable route and
approval of Drawings for cable laying route from Transco Grid to RSS-XX
Achievement:
a. Completion of the HT cable laying route survey with all the details of utilities,
crossings required, and other arrangements for laying the cable. Preparing &
submitting the detailed programme for laying the HT cable from the supply
authority to the RSS. Submitting the detailed fault level & current carrying
calculations.

Relevant Contractors/Agencies.

2.3.3 STAGE 3 – Key Date 3 XX: Key date for Completion of HT Cable for laying at
RSS – XX
Achievement:
a. Completion of the Cable laying, termination and all other related works of the
HT cable laying for the RSS. Approval of the Design of the detailed fault level
& current carrying calculations.

Relevant Contractors/Agencies.
2.3.4 STAGE 4 – Key Date 4 XX: Key Date for completion of Installation works of
substation equipment of RSS- XX
Achievement:
a. Completion of all the Installation of the all Equipments, gantry structures,

panels, and other equipments of the RSS
b. Interfacing Contracts: Traction and other Relevant Contractors/ Agencies.
2.3.5 STAGE 5 – Key Date 5 XX: Key date Route for access to Traction and Telecom
Contractor at RSS- XX
Achievement:
a. Access to Traction Contractor for laying of 33kV cable from AMS room to
ASS/TSS room of the metro station on the metro alignment.
b. Also, access to telecommunication contractor for providing telecom link to the

RSS.
c. Interfacing Contracts: Traction and other Relevant Contractors/Agencies.
2.3.6 STAGE 6– Key Date 6 XX: Completion of all testing (including acceptance
tests) and Commissioning of RSS and AMS at RSS- XX
Achievement:
a. Completion of all testing (including acceptance tests) and Commissioning of

Receiving Substation cum and Auxiliary Main substation and installation of all

necessary equipment as per tender specifications and building works (final

floor finishing).
2.3.7 STAGE 7– Key Date 7 XX: Energisation, integrated testing, Completion of all
finishing works and service trials of RSS-XX for satisfactory operation
Achievement:
a. Completion of all necessary integrated testing and finishing works. This stage
can be achieved after completion of all the above stages and FOTS (Fiber
Optics) by the telecommunication Contractor and Energisation of Substation
and service trials.
2.3.8 STAGE 8– Key Date 8 XX: Taking over of the system at RSS- XX
Achievement:
a. After completion of all works and satisfactory trial running of system. Supply
of as built drawings and training and supply of manual documents as laid
down in the specifications, will also required to be completed in time including
approval of the commissioner of Metro Railway Safety.
b. Interfacing Contracts: Traction Contractor and other Relevant Contractors/

Agencies.
KEY DATES FOR DESIGN SUBMISSION AT RSS
2.3.9 STAGE 1A– Key Date KDD-1A XX: Submission of the Preliminary Design / Layout
of all the RSS
2.3.10 STAGE 1B– Key Date KDD-1B XX: Submission of the Civil Design / Layout of all
the RSS
2.3.11 STAGE 2 – Key Date KDD XX: Submission of the Design, cable route, Survey
report and programme of laying of all HT Cabling works of all the RSSs.
2.3.12 STAGE 3 – Key Date KDD XX: Submission of the Final Design / Layout of all the
RSS

2.3.13 STAGE 4 – Key Date KDD XX: Approval of the design of RSSs after incorporating
comments, remarks from the Designer, DMRC
2.4 ACCESS DATES
The RSS Contractor will require access to information as well as to sites of RSS. in
stages, in order to plan his activities for time-bound completion of his obligations
under the Contract.
The dates on which such access becomes available are indicated in terms of the
time period reckoned from the Commencement of the Works, and shall mean
guaranteed access by the midnight of the last day of the week mentioned.
The Access Dates are defined as hereunder:
2.4.1 STAGE 1 – Access Date 1 (AD XX): Access date for RSS Contractor to the site of
RSS cum AMS cum- TSS.
This represents the date by which the RSS Contractor will get access to site of the
RSS-cum- AMS cum- TSS.

3. SCHEDULES
3.1 SCHEDULE OF KEY DATES AND ACCESS DATES
The following tables summarize the various Key Dates and Access Dates. All numbers below refer to weeks from
Commencement date of the work.
Key Dates Description RSS RSS RSS RSS RSS RSS

1 2 3 4 5 6
Tentative Date for Award of LOA
KD-1 Completion of Civil works of RSS
KD-2 Completion of Surveying of cable route and approval of
Drawings for cable laying route from Transco Grid to RSS
KD-3 Completion of HT Cable Laying at RSS.
Key dates stipulated in the Section IV
KD-4 Key Date for completion of Installation works of substation bidding forms.
equipment of RSS
KD-5 Key date Route for access to Traction and Telecom
Contractor at RSS.
KD-6 Completion of all testing (including acceptance tests) and

Commissioning of RSS and AMS at RSS.
KD-7 Energisation, integrated testing, Completion of all finishing
works and service trials of RSS-XX for satisfactory operation.
KD-8 Taking over of the system at RSS
Note:
a) All key dates shall be referred from the commencement date of contract.

b) The site shall be made available progressively and if some part is not made available then the extension of time shall be
allowed only to the work/KD of that particular part.
3.2 SCHEDULE OF ACCESS DATES
All number refer to weeks from Commencement Dates of the works
Access Date Description of Stage Weeks
AD1: Access date for RSS-1 10
 Mean Access available from the date of issue of LOA.(for optional part date of NTP)

Contract- DE-04 – Particular Specification – Maintenance and Training
Volume 4
CHAPTER 6
Maintenance and Training
DMRC/Contract DE-04/PS/Chap-6 Page 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INTRODUCTION ..................................................................................................... 4
2. GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF AN EFFICIENT MAINTENANCE SYSTEM ............... 5
2.1 MAINTENANCE MANAGEMENT ............................................................................................................ 5
3. IMPLEMENTATION OF MAINTENANCE ............................................................... 7
3.1 THE LEVELS OF PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE .................................................................................... 7
3.2 DETERMINING REQUIREMENTS IN TERMS OF FACILITIES AND TOOLS.............................................. 8
4. SUPERVISION AND PLANNING OF MAINTENANCE ........................................... 9
4.1 GENERAL .............................................................................................................................................. 9
4.2 EMPLOYER’S MAINTENANCE STRATEGY ............................................................................................ 9

4.2.1 Maintenance Strategy .................................................................................................................. 9
4.3 DIFFERENT LEVELS OF PLANNED MAINTENANCE .............................................................................10
4.4 SUPERVISORY STAFF ...........................................................................................................................10
4.5 MAINTENANCE DURING DLP ..............................................................................................................11

4.5.1 Maintenance Management System (MMS) and Maintenance Arrangement ..............................11
4.5.2 Competency of Personnel ...........................................................................................................11
4.5.3 Maintenance requirements..........................................................................................................12
4.6 SOFTWARE SUPPORT...........................................................................................................................14

4.6.1 General .......................................................................................................................................14
4.6.2 Security Obligations ...................................................................................................................14
4.6.3 Other obligations ........................................................................................................................15
4.7 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PERIODIC INSPECTIONS CYCLE ............................................................17
5. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION ..................................... 18
5.1 GENERAL .............................................................................................................................................18
5.2 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUALS ..........................................................................................18
MAINTENANCE DETAILS COVERED UNDER MANUAL:- ...............................................................................19
5.3 QUANTITY OF MANUALS .....................................................................................................................20
6. TRAINING ............................................................................................................. 22
6.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................................................22

6.2 TRAINING PLAN...................................................................................................................................23

6.2.1 Operations Staff Training ...........................................................................................................23
6.2.2 Maintenance Staff Training ........................................................................................................23
6.3 SYSTEM EQUIPMENT TRAINING- ........................................................................................................24

1. INTRODUCTION
This Chapter describes the maintenance philosophy and training of maintenance

staff for power supply, control & monitoring installations taking into account
international standards and Railway practices.
The Contractor shall provide comprehensive training and documentation to the

employer’s staff in accordance with the requirement of this chapter and the chapter
of General Specifications.
This training shall enable all the installations, to be operated and maintained in the
most efficient and safe manner, so as to achieve the maximum reliability and
economy required by such Mass Rapid Transit System.

2. GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF AN EFFICIENT MAINTENANCE SYSTEM
The maintenance philosophy and management described below should be seen

within the framework of the state of the art and the general prevailing reference
standards with regard to the maintenance of durable goods (in particular, standards
X60-000, X60-010 and X 60-020).
2.1 MAINTENANCE MANAGEMENT
The management of the maintenance process entails defining various levels of

responsibility and enabling them to implement the strategic orientations defined by
the directing authority:
a) by defining their respective missions,
b) by setting objectives for each person,
c) by translating these objectives into action plans,
d) by implementing the means required to carry out action plans,
e) by diagnosing the causes of any deviation from the set objectives,
f) by taking corrective measures concerning the action plans or the objectives.
This management process requires a global approach and helps to improve the
performance of the maintenance work of different components with quality, on time
and at low cost.
It must be implemented at three levels:
 at the level of human resources and management in the context of the

scheduling of work, the allocation of human resources and the training of
personnel,
 at the skills level to ensure quality, safety and suitable working conditions,
 at an economic and financial level to ensure responsible management of

production, spare parts, purchasing and miscellaneous costs.
The quality of this management depends on the capability of those entrusted with
operation and maintenance responsibilities:
 to exploit the results of management within their field of responsibility,

 to react in the event of any deviation from the action plans defined with a view
to achieving the set objectives.
Within the context of this approach, the management control function ensures timely
advice to be given to those with operational and maintenance responsibility:
 by placing at their disposal the tools and information required for piloting and
diagnosis,
 by participating in carrying out this diagnosis,
 by participating in the task of defining the objectives to be achieved.
In conclusion, the process of maintenance management must incorporate two major

components: the management of human resources and the study of the most
suitable means of achieving the set objectives.

3. IMPLEMENTATION OF MAINTENANCE
3.1 The Levels of Preventive Maintenance
The RSS & EHV Cabling System installed shall be such that it requires little or no
maintenance at all. However, the Contractor shall prepare a 4-level preventive
maintenance plan, which shall be made available to the Employer to organize for the
maintenance. The maintenance plan is based on four levels of preventive
maintenance which differ according to the nature and scope of the interventions
carried out there:
 level 1 : systematic in-service examinations, which provide a means of detecting

(without any specific tools and by personnel who are not necessarily skilled) any
anomalies which may have occurred in service according to a random or fortuitous
process, and which may affect traffic and safety,
 level 2 : systematic periodic inspections, which allow skilled personnel to ensure

that, taking account of the service to be provided until the next scheduled
intervention of similar importance, the equipment or the element inspected offers
predetermined guarantees of reliability.
 level 3 : the replacement of elements which are triggered within the framework of
systematic preventive maintenance (when the element reaches the end of the
programmed potential) or conditional maintenance (when it is noted in the course
of an inspection that the normal operation threshold criteria have been reached),
but also within the framework of corrective maintenance,
 level 4 : interventions on dismantled elements and structural equipment (such as

body) carried out to restore the elements concerned to the same level of operation
as an identical new one. These interventions (or overhaul operations) usually
involve resources related to a reconstruction of the element in question.
The frequency of the maintenance operations defined in the cycle can be expressed
either in time (e.g.: every 6 months) or in units of actual utilisation (e.g., months of
operation, electrical power or current flowing through an equipment, mechanical
wearing). The choice depends essentially on the foreseeable or observed disparity in
service of elements belonging to the same family within the relevant cycle.

3.2 Determining Requirements in terms of Facilities and Tools
The Contractor shall prepare and make available to the Employer, details of
requirements of Tools and facilities required for maintenance of the RSS & EHV
Cabling System. In this context, the following aspects shall be kept in mind.
The achievement of the objectives assigned to the maintenance division with regard to
quality, safety and regularity for the lowest possible overall cost requires the
implementation of a number of resources which must be perfectly tailored to the
requirements.
The facilities and tools are part and parcel of the resources placed at the disposal of
the maintenance division to achieve the set objectives.
Owing to the cost of these facilities, the number of maintenance centres to be

equipped and the necessity of keeping the maintenance actions consistent and
uniform, the main choices of facilities and tools are integral part of the System
maintenance policy and program.
When determining these requirements, in-depth knowledge in the dedicated

maintenance plan is needed while taking due account of the experience acquired in
similar fixed installation which has been in service for several years.

4. SUPERVISION AND PLANNING OF MAINTENANCE
4.1 General
The scope and requirements of supervision and planning of maintenance are

stipulated in Chapter 12 of GS, DLP and Spare policy of DMRC provided in pricing
document /BOQ. The following outlines the Employer’s maintenance strategy,
different levels of maintenance, the Maintenance Management System and the
arrangement for maintenance. The Contractor shall make use of all relevant
information to provide supervision of maintenance.
4.2 Employer’s Maintenance Strategy
4.2.1 Maintenance Strategy
The Contractor shall ensure that the design of the software and hardware of the
system designed, installed and commissioned is supportable throughout the service
life of the System to address, as a minimum, the following:
a) design errors in the System;
b) operational changes;
c) environment changes; and
d) changes in infrastructure.
According to the maintenance strategy, all equipment and infrastructure supplied for
the ‘Project’ must be such as to ensure for minimum or no maintenance.
Maintenance activities required must be capable of being performed with little or no
impact on the train service. In addition, the maintenance work systems shall ensure
safety of personnel and equipment.
During the Defects Liability Period (DLP) maintenance of all work will be conducted
by employer under the supervision of the Contractor excluding following items for
which CAMC will be in the scope of contractor During DLP also. The Contractor shall
ensure that for maintenance during the DLP for these items, personnel are always
available with the relevant skills and level of competence as per DLP Policy provided
in BOQ.

S.No Item
1 UPS /Invertor
2 Fire Trace System
3 Fire detection system with FACP
4 VRV AC units
5 Sub-station Automation system inclusive of all hardware &

software i.e. server, desktop, router, gateway, etc.
6 Tower light installed in yard
7 various types of pumps in RSS
The Contractor, upon noticing any defects, deficiency in quality and quantity of
spares and materials shall without delay, arrange for alternative source of supply
and submit his proposal to the Employer’s Representative for review.
4.3 Different Levels of Planned Maintenance
Routine preventative maintenance will be carried out at regular intervals based on

condition, reliability, usage, and service history and equipment manufacturers’
recommendations. The Operating and Maintenance Manual shall describe the
different levels of planned maintenance.
4.4 Supervisory Staff
The Contractor shall provide maintenance staff who are expert in all the different
levels of fault finding, maintenance and repair of the various relevant systems
supplied under the Contract:
a) Cabling system
b) Receiving substation
c) Traction substation including associated switchgear.

d) Auxiliary main substation
Stipulations of clauses 12.3.2, 12.3.3 and 12.3.4 of the GS and DLP and Spare
policy of DMRC shall apply here.
4.5 Maintenance during DLP
4.5.1 Maintenance Management System (MMS) and Maintenance Arrangement
During non-operation time, sections of line will be closed for maintenance work. The
minimum time for possession periods is 3 hours. Ideally, this time shall be the free
time available for work. It excludes time required for trains to return to their stabling
point and time required to take and give up possession. This time is, however, not
available for maintenance in depot.
4.5.2 Competency of Personnel
During Defects Liability Period (DLP) the Contractor shall conduct Maintenance, for
which the Contractor shall provide necessary experienced engineers & Staff for the
the maintenance during this period and ensure that the warranty / guarantee
obligations of the Contractor remains undiluted. During the DLP the Contractor shall
support the Employer with sufficient trained and competent personnel.
Such persons shall have their generic competence established and must
demonstrate their specific competence and knowledge in the particular systems,
environment and procedures. The Contractor shall provide evidence of specific
competence and knowledge, which shall include:
a) assessment and certified training in particular software applications and

operations;
b) recording of competence and work in the license holders logbook; and
c) receiving or in receipt of sufficient and current exposure to the area of work that
the holder is licensed for.
Routine spot checks on licensing may be carried out from time to time by the
Employer’s Representative qualified personnel on the proficiency of the Contractor
staff. In the event of a failure, the Contractor shall undertake the management and
investigation necessary to identify and rectify the cause.

Should the Employer, during the DLP require further investigations at other Sites
throughout the system, the Employer will formally request the Contractor to
undertake such investigations.
4.5.3 Maintenance requirements
Contractor shall be required to attend promptly all the defects appeared in the
system during the defect liability period. The contractor should note the penalty
provisions provided in the bid documents. Penalty of as per DLP policy will be
imposed if major equipments or any complete system is not working for more than
24 hrs. Major Equipments hereby will be treated as:
- Power Transformers
- Circuit breakers
- Protection systems
- Any item which causes failure of the transfer of power supply at 33 kV, 25kV to
DMRC metro lines from the RSS/AMS/TSS.
Testing and Re-commissioning of System and Equipment
In the event of a failure requiring modifications to the System, the Contractor shall
undertake any testing and re-commissioning required. Any such modification shall
be submitted for Employer’s Representative review.
Temporary Alterations to Restore Service
The Contractor shall undertake any temporary modifications necessary to maintain

service. Any such modification shall be submitted for Employer’s Representative
review.
Discrepancies between Installation and Design Records
Should the Contractor discover inconsistencies between the maintenance drawings

and documentation and the installed equipment, the Contractor shall correct all such
errors within two weeks.
Communications

The Contractor shall ensure that adequate communication facilities are provided to
its staff during the DLP.
Location of Staff
The Contractor shall be responsible for locating staff such that the Contractor meets
its obligations.
Storage of Equipment and Materials during the Maintenance Period
The Contractor shall ensure that no equipment is to be stored along the

trackside/road/public area.
The Employer will provide defined storage locations for the support all the different
levels of Maintenance. The Contractor shall satisfy itself and the Employer’s
Representative that the storage locations for equipment and materials will meet the
performance requirements of this PS.
Maintenance Regimes
The Contractor shall provide documented maintenance regimes to be followed by

the Employer upon substantial completion of various components of the work until
the end of the DLP. The Contractor shall produce a maintenance regime as a part of
the O&M Manual for the equipment that shall comprise two constituent parts,
corrective and routine/preventative maintenance. Routine/preventative maintenance
shall be non-intrusive to the day-to-day operation of the train service and be capable
of being pre-planned in advance of the work.
Corrective maintenance shall be available 24 hours per day, able to respond to all
foreseeable circumstances. The maintenance regime shall cover all parts and
equipment of the system designed, installed and commissioned by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall take into account the requirements of the operations and
maintenance when determining and proposing its maintenance regime.
Scope and Hours of Coverage
The regime and structure of corrective maintenance shall be robust in design. The
Contractor shall provide full 24 hour On-Call coverage and shall be such that initial
response and rectification of failure are in accordance with the following:

a) assistance to first level and corrective maintenance within 30 minutes, upon

request of first line maintainer;
b) 24 hour from notification to collection for third level maintenance; and
c) replacement or repair of component from factory within 2 weeks including

transportation time. Any extension to this time shall be agreed with the
Employers and a replacement provided.
All elements of First Line preventative maintenance shall be carried out and
completed during non-traffic hours without interrupting train services.
Failure Investigations
The Contractor shall conduct failure investigations. The OCC Controller will
determine priorities in the event of a conflict between the Contractor and other
Contractors during failure investigation.
Disputes between the Contractor and other Contractors will be resolved by the
Employer’s Representative. The Contractor shall make available to the Employer all
test and failure data as required.
4.6 SOFTWARE SUPPORT
4.6.1 General
The Contractor shall submit to the Employer’s Representative for review, the
software support plan at least 90 days before commencement of software
installation. All changes, bug fixes, updates, modifications, amendments, new
versions shall not result in any non-conformance with this Specification.
The Contractor shall submit all new versions to the Employer’s Representative for
review at least 2 weeks prior to their installation. The new versions of software shall
not degrade the operation of the System.
4.6.2 Security Obligations
Within 14 days of the installation of any software into the Permanent Works by the
Contractor, the Contractor shall submit to the Employer’s Representative for
retention by the Employer two back-up copies of the software.

Any software item delivered by the Contractor to the Employer’s Representative

pursuant to the above Paragraph shall not be translated or modified by the Employer
without the prior consent of the Contractor unless:
a) the owner of the software becomes insolvent or has a receiving order made
against it or makes an arrangement or assignment or composition with or in
favour of its creditors (including the appointment of a committee of inspection) or
goes into liquidation or commences to be wound up or has a receiver, liquidator,
trustee or similar officer appointed over all or any part of its undertaking or assets
or if distress, execution or attachment is levied on, or if an encumbrance takes
possession of, any of its assets or any proceeding or step is taken which has an
effect comparable to the foregoing in any relevant jurisdiction; or
b) the owner of the software ceases to trade; or
c) the owner of the software assigns copyright in the software and the Contractor
fails within 60 days of such assignment to procure in favour of the Employer, a
licence from the new owner in the same terms as that required by the Contract;
or
d) the Contractor is in breach of any of his obligations under the Contract.
4.6.3 Other obligations
The Contractor shall inform the Employer’s Representative immediately when a fault
is discovered within delivered software or documentation. On receipt of a request
from the Employer’s Representative for identification or further diagnosis of a failure
or fault, the Contractor shall provide appropriate resources. The Contractor shall
provide written details as to the nature of the proposed correction to the Employer’s
Representative.
Training
The Contractor shall provide training for Employer's staff to enable the Employer to
make proper use of any new versions.
Fixes or Patches

The Contractor shall notify the Employer promptly of any fixes or patches that are
available to correct or patch faults. The Contractor shall detail any effect such fixes
or patches are expected to have, upon the System.
New Versions
The Contractor shall ensure that all new versions are fully tested and validated on
the simulation and development system prior to installation. The Contractor shall
ensure that all new versions are fully tested and commissioned once installed on the
Site.
The Contractor shall deliver to the Employer any new version, together with the
updated Operation and Maintenance Manuals. The Employer shall not be obliged to
use any new version and that shall not relieve the Contractor of any of its
obligations. Any effect upon the performance or operation of System that may be
caused by a new version shall be brought to the Employer's attention.
Debugging and Trace Software
The Contractor shall provide debugging or trace logging software. The Contractor
shall not install debugging or trace logging software that affects the performance or
functionality of the System.
Routine and Corrective Maintenance Procedures
Routine and corrective maintenance procedures shall be supplied for all equipment.
The format shall be as follows:
a) Uniform format and layout irrespective of equipment supplier;
b) Colour coding for each activity;
c) Cross referenced to the Operation and Maintenance Manuals; and
d) Document control information.
Operation Activities
All operational activities shall comply with the Employer’s safety rules, and
requirements of the Operation and Maintenance Manuals. The Contractor shall
recommend in detail the frequencies for preventive and corrective maintenance, and
what items of work are to be carried, including but not limited to the following:
a) Step-by-Step procedure to carry out the task;
b) Diagrams and flow charts for illustration, if applicable;
c) Precautions for the maintenance personnel to follow; and
d) Estimated duration and manpower required.
4.7 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PERIODIC INSPECTIONS CYCLE
FGI : Full General Inspection
OWS : Other Works Systematic
GI : General Inspection
FGI OW OW OW GI OW OW OW FGI
S S S S S S
1 year ±
2 months
4 years ± 4
months
8 years ± 4
months

5. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION
5.1 General
The Contractor shall provide interactive Operation and Maintenance manuals in soft
copies as well as in hard copies which should be updated, based on the review by
DMRC upto the end of DLP, for use by supervisory, operating and technical staff of
Employer. The Contractor shall prepare and submit RSS working order in
consultation with DMRC.
Requirements of submission have been furnished in Chapter 11 of GS. Each and

every manual shall be divided into indexed sections explaining the subject matter in
logical steps.
Most manuals shall consist of A4-size printed sheets bound in stiff-cover wear-
resistant binders clearly and uniformly marked with the subject matter and reference
number. Where alternative sizes are proposed, (e.g. A5/A6 pocket books of
schematic wiring diagrams) these shall be submitted for review of Employer’
Representative. The binding shall allow for all subsequent changes and additions to
be readily effected.
Information shall be provided in pictorial form wherever possible and shall include
step-by-step instructions and views of the particular equipment including exploded
views. Programmable equipment shall be supplied with sufficient flow charts and
fully documented programmes to enable faults to be quickly identified and system
modification to be undertaken at any time.
The Contractor shall provide clarifications and amendments to the Operation and
Maintenance manuals as necessary during the Defects Liability Period. Updates
shall be provided for the originals and all copies. The Operation & Maintenance
Manuals should be issued by the concerned OEM or, if by the contractor, it should
be duly ratified by the OEM.
5.2 Operation & Maintenance Manuals
Operation Details covered under Manual:-
The Contractor shall provide details explaining the purpose and operation of the
complete system together with its component subsidiary systems and individual item

of equipment. The characteristics, ratings and any necessary operating limits of the
Equipment and Sub-systems shall be provided. The Manual shall focus on operation
aspects under normal and emergency conditions.
Maintenance Details covered under Manual:-
The Contractor particulars of operating parameters, tools for dismantling and testing,
methods of assembly and disassembly, tolerances, repair techniques and all other
information necessary to set up a repair and servicing programme.
The Contractor shall provide documentation for all hardware and software for
computer systems and other associated electronic equipment to meet the following
requirements.
Such documents shall include but not be limited to:
a. manufacturers' documentation supplied as standard with the equipment;
b. hardware configuration with details of expansion capabilities and options;
c. programme loading instructions, including runtime environment configuration;
d. programme listing including comprehensive 'comment statements' in hard copy

and soft format for source code, compilers and development tools necessary to
modify and recompile software;
e. flow charts, data flow diagrams and state diagrams as appropriate;
f. description of software modules including purpose, linkage with other modules,

error routines and any special considerations;
g. memory maps for both internal and peripheral memory showing description of
all programmes, data files, overlay areas, memory available for expansion and
the like;
h. loading and operating instructions for diagnostic programmes and specifically

developed debugging tools; and
i. programming manuals relevant to operating systems, languages, development

tools, etc.

The manual shall also include inspection/overhaul procedure and periodicity of

various inspection/overhaul schedules in detail including the tools, special
tools/plants, and facilities required. The manual shall be subject to review by the
The manual shall also include an illustrated parts catalogue of all plant supplied and
shall contain sufficient information to identify and requisition the appropriate part by
maintenance staff.
The catalogue shall comprise 3 sub-sections.
The first shall be an alphanumeric parts list, which shall include the following
information:
a) Part number
b) Description
c) Name of manufacturer
d) Quantity and Unit
e) Part number of next higher assembly (usually a line replaceable unit).
f) Cross-reference to figure number.
g) Category: e.g. consumable, line replaceable unit, repairable.
h) Life-expected life, Mean time between failure or mean distance between

failure where available.
i) General or specific purpose
The second is a series of illustrations to indicate the location of each replaceable

item which shall be clear and progressive with exploded views to enable parts to be
identified easily by cross-reference with the alpha-numeric list.
And the third an indicative price list which shall list in alpha-numeric sequence the
part number with the price, lead time and vendor.
5.3 Quantity of Manuals
The Contractor shall supply Original plus five hard copies of Operating &
Maintenence Manuals for each RSS. These Manuals shall also be submitted in

electronic format (CD). The drawing files shall be in AUTOCAD format (.dwg) and in
pdf format of latest version duly readable in the latest window based operating
system.
The format of the electronic copies shall be proven in at least two other applications
and shall allow for links between parts catalogue and maintenance instructions. The
Documents Management System and Language used shall be subject to Employer's
Representative's review.

6. TRAINING
6.1 General Requirements
The Contractor keeping the above aspect in view shall provide comprehensive
training to the Employer’s staff in accordance with the requirements contained in this
PS and in the GS (Chapter 10).
The training shall be carried out at such locations where the greatest benefit for
trainees may be gained. This may be in India, abroad, at place of manufacture,
assembly or testing, or at such other locations as may be necessary. All places of
training shall be subject to review by Employer’s Representative.
The training courses and/or sessions shall include system performance

requirements and all major equipment and works designed, by the Contractor.
The calculation of cable capacity, short circuit capacity, overload capacity and duty
cycle shall form part of training. This will include details regarding Bonding, Earthing,
Sheath Voltage Calculations, Effects of various types of Bonding, Termination and
Joints.
The specific objectives of each course, training facilities to be used, the qualification
and experience of the training instructors and the assessment criteria shall be
developed by the Contractor and submitted to the Employer’s Representative for
review at least three months before any course is conducted.
Manuals to be used for training, including the manuals to the instructors and
trainees, shall be delivered to the Employer’s Representative at least six months
before the issue of the Substantial Completion Certificate for the Works, as required
under Chapter 10 of the GS. The training manuals shall be submitted in original plus
five hard copies and in electronic format (CD).
The Contractor shall provide full-time on-Site management and co-ordination of the
entire training programme to ensure the continuity of classes, and proper distribution
of training materials, and be responsible for interfacing with the instructors.
The training courses shall be delivered to all relevant Employer’s staff, including
instructors, operation and maintenance engineering staff. The proposed training
requirements are given at the end of this chapter

6.2 Training Plan
The Contractor shall submit a Training Plan in accordance with the requirements of
the General Specification. In addition, the Training Plan shall include the following:
a) Details of the Contractor’s ability to carry out the necessary training.
b) Details of the proposed approach to structuring and providing the courses

required.
c) Course details including duration, maximum number of trainees, ratio of

trainees to trainers, facilities required or available and prerequisites for
attending the course.
d) Recommendations for additional training or alternative means by which the

Employer’s training objectives may be met.
The Training Plan shall be submitted for review by the Employer’s Representative
and will be implemented in a timeframe such that complete and comprehensive
training has been received by the designated Employer’s staff prior to the System
Acceptance test.
6.2.1 Operations Staff Training
The objective of the training is to enable the Employer’s operations staff to be

familiar with the all equipments in the RSS Systems, with focus on the operational
aspects under normal and emergency conditions.
The training shall also enable the trainee to acquire full capability for identification,
trouble shooting and rectification of faults in the specified duration for all the
equipments installed at RSS. After classroom training (at DMRC Training School),
the staff shall be trained in actual operation (at RSS).
6.2.2 Maintenance Staff Training
The objective of the training is to enable the Employer’s maintenance staff and
Engineering staff to be familiar with the Systems focus on the maintenance aspects
of the System including but not limited to the following:-
a) Full understanding of all the equipment, sub-systems and system, their function,
maintenance and overall requirements.

b) Procedures to be followed for unscheduled maintenance and repair.
c) Identification of failed components and sub-systems in electronic equipment by

use of special test kit as necessary.
d) Modification in the software to extend or modify the control, monitoring and

protection functions.
6.3 System Equipment Training-
Training for all the Equipments / services supplied under the contract shall be
conducted for following levels:-
(i) Level 1 Familiarization & Operation.
(ii) Level 2 Preventive Maintenance and trouble shooting.
(iii) Level 3 Overhauling & replacements.
The contractor shall submit detailed training program for all the equipments /
services supplied under this contract for approval of employer any additional training
requirement deemed necessary by the employer shall be included at no extra cost.
The number of Trainees for each level and period of training shall be decided by the
employer.
The contractor shall prepare Operation & Maintenance manuals duly incorporating
topics related to training for each of the above level. The interactive training videos
for above three (3) levels must also be provided.

Contract DE-04- Particular Specification – Definition and Lists
Volume 4
CHAPTER 7
Definition and Lists
DMRC/Contract: DE-04 /PS/chap 7 Page 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. DRAWINGS LIST ...................................................................................................... 3
2. MAIN APPLICABLE INTERNATIONAL STANDARDS ......................................... 4
3. DEFINITION OF ABBREVIATIONS ........................................................................ 12
4. SPARE PART LIST ................................................................................................. 17
4.1 GENERAL................................................................................................................... 17
5. TOOLING LIST ........................................................................................................ 18
5.1 GENERAL................................................................................................................... 18

1. DRAWINGS LIST
This Tender is Design and Built Tender. Therefore, bidder has to design the system as per specifications. However, for reference
purpose a typical Single Line Diagram as mentioned below has been given in Volume-5 (Tender Drawings) of the Tender
Documents.
S. No. Drawing No. Description
1. Please refer Tender Drawings for details

Contract- DE-04 – Particular Specification – Definition and Lists
2. MAIN APPLICABLE INTERNATIONAL STANDARDS
All equipment of the RSS Contract shall comply with the EMC standards EN
50-121-1 to 5. Concerning the tests, when not defined into the EN 50121, the
equipment shall comply with the relevant EMC standard of the series IEC
61000.
Standard Title
Number
IEC 60038 IEC standard voltage
IEC 60044-6 Instructions related to protection current transformer for

transient state response
IEC 62271-100 High voltage circuit breaker for alternating current
IEC 61869-1,-2,- Instructions related to instrument transformers including

3,-5 transient state response
IEC 60059 IEC standard current
IEC 60099-4 Metal oxide surge arrester without gaps for a.c. systems
IEC 62271-102 Alternating current disconnectors and earthing switches
IEC 60383-1 & 2 Insulators and fittings for overhead lines. Insulators of
ceramic material or glass for overhead line with nominal
voltage higher than 1000 V. Requirements
IEC 60502 Power cables with extruded insulation and their

accessories for rated voltage from 1 kV (Um = 1,2 kV) up
to 30 kV (Um = 36 kV). Part 2: rated voltages from 6 kV
(Um = 7,2 kV) up to 30 kV (Um = 36 kV)
IEC 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP code)
IEC 60617 Graphical symbols for diagrams. Part 2: symbol elements,

qualifying symbols and other symbols having general
application.
IEC 62271-1 Common specifications for high-voltage switchgear and

control gear standards
IEC 60721-3-4 Classification of environmental conditions- Classification of

groups of environmental parameters and their severities-
DMRC/ PS/Chap-7 Page 4

Standard Title
Number
Stationary use at non-weather protected locations.
IEEE 802-3 Ethernet based LANs
UIC 812-3 Technical specification for the supply of solid (monobloc)

wheels in rolled non-alloy steel for tractive and trailing
stock
IEC 60840 Power cables with extruded insulation and their

accessories for rated voltage above 30kV (Um = 36 kV) up
to 100 kV. Test methods and requirements.
IEC 60865 Short-circuit currents - Calculation of effects
IEC 60889 Hard-drawn aluminium wire for overhead line conductor
IEC 60071 Insulation co-ordination
IEC 60076 Power transformer
IEC 61000 Electromagnetic compatibility
IEC 61508-3 Functional safety of electrical/electronic/programmable

safety-related systems. Part 3: software requirements
IEEE 575- latest IEEE guide for the application of Sheath Bonding method
for single conductor cable and the calculation of induced
voltage & current in cable sheath
IEEE-80 Guide for Safety in AC Substation Grounding

Standard Title
Number
EN 10025 Hot Rolled Products of Non-Alloy Structural Steels:

Delivery Conditions
EN 10034 Structural Steel I and H Sections – Tolerances on Shape

and Dimensions
EN 10055 Hot Rolled Steel Equal Flange Tees with Raduised Root
and Toes – Dimensions and Tolerances on Shape and
Dimensions
EN 10056 Structural Steel Equal and Unequal Leg Angles
EN 10083 Quenched and Tempered Steels
EN 10088 Stainless Steels
EN 1301 Aluminium and Aluminium Alloys
EN 50163 Supply Voltage of Traction System
EN 60811 Insulating and Sheathing Materials of Electric Cables
ENV 50121-5 Railway Application Electromagnetic Compatibility Part 5:

Fixed Power Supply Installations
EURONORM 19 IPE Beams; I-Beams with Parallel Flange Facings and

Steel Products – IPN Beams – Dimensions
IEC 60398 General Test for Electro-heating Equipment
IEC 61131 Programmable controllers
IEC 265.1 High Voltage Switch
IEC 61869 General for Instruments Transformers
IEC 61869-2 Current Transformers
IEC 61869-3 Voltage Transformer
IEC 60137 Insulated Bushing for rated Voltage above 1 kV
IEC 61039 Classification of Insulation Liquids

Standard Title
Number
IEC 60168 Tests on Indoor and Outdoor Post Insulators of Ceramic

Material or Glass for Systems with Nominal Voltages
greater than 1000 V
IEC 60228 Conductor of Insulated Cables
IEC 60273 Dimensions of Indoor and Outdoor Post Insulators and

Post Insulator Units for Systems with Nominal Voltages
greater than 1000 V
IEC 60296 Insulating oils for transformers
IEC 60297 Dimensions of mechanical structures of the 482.6 mm (19

in)
IEC 60372 Locking Devices for Ball and Socket Couplings of String
Insulator Units – Dimensions and Tests
IEC 60376 Sulphur Hexafluoride
IEC 60383 Insulators for Overhead Lines with a nominal Voltage

above 1000 V
IEC 60721 Environmental conditions :Specifications for painting
IEC 60623 Sealed Nickel-Cadmium prismatic rechargeable single cell.
ISO 1035 Hot Rolled Steel Bars
ISO 1190 Copper and Copper Alloys
ISO 1234 Split Pins
ISO 1337 Wrought Coppers (having Minimum Copper Contents of

99,85%) – Chemical Composition and Forms of Wrought
Products
ISO 1460 Metallic Coatings – Hot Dip Galvanized Coatings on

Ferrous Materials – Gravimetric Determination of the Mass
per Unit Area
ISO 1461 Metallic Coatings – Hot Dip Galvanized Coatings on

Fabricated Ferrous Products – Requirements

Standard Title
Number
ISO 2092 Light Metals and their Alloys – Code of Designation based
on Chemical Symbols
ISO 2340 Clevis Pins without Head
ISO 2341 Clevis Pins with Head
ISO 261 ISO General Purpose Metric Screw Threads – General

Plan
ISO 262 ISO General Purpose Metric Screw Threads – Selected

Sizes for Screws, Bolts and Nuts
ISO 2859/1 Sampling Procedures for Inspection by Attributes –

Sampling Plans Indexed by Acceptable Quality Level (AQL)
for Lot-by-lot Inspection
ISO 9227 Corrosion Test in artificial atmospheres –Salt Spray Test
ISO 4014 Hexagon Head Bolts – Product Grades A and B
ISO 4017 Hexagon Head Screw Bolts – Product Grades A and B
ISO 4032 Hexagon Nuts, Style 1 – Product Grades A and B
ISO 404 Steel and Steel Products – General Technical Delivery

Requirements
ISO 657 Hot Rolled Steel Sections
ISO 68 ISO General Purpose Screw Threads – Basic Profile
ISO 898 Mechanical Properties of Fasteners
ISO 9000 Quality Management and Quality Assurance Standards
ISO 9001 Quality Systems – Model for Quality Assurance in Design /

Development, Production, Installation and Servicing
ISO 9002 Quality Systems – Model for Quality Assurance in

Production and Installation
ISO 9003 Quality Systems – Model for Quality Assurance in Final

Inspection and Test

Standard Title
Number
ISO 9004 Quality Management and Quality System Elements
ISO 965 ISO General Purpose Metric Screw Threads
UIC 505-1 Railway Transport Stock – Rolling Stock Construction

Gauge
UIC 505-4 Effects on the Application of the Kinematic Gauges defined

in the 505 Series of Leaflets on the Positioning of
Structures in relation to the Tracks and of the Tracks in
relation to each other
UIC 606-1 OR Consequences of the Application of the Kinematic Gauges

defined by UIC Leaflets in the 505 Series on the Design of
the Contact Lines
UIC 606-2 OR Installation of 25 kV and 50 or 60 Hz Overhead Contact

Lines
UIC 608 OR Conditions to be complied with for the Pantographs of

Tractive Units used on International Services
UIC 791 R Quality Assurance of Overhead Line Equipment
UIC 811-1 Technical Specifications for the Supply of Axles and

Trailing Stock
UIC 812-2 Solid Wheels for Tractive and Trailing Stock – Tolerances
UIC 870 O Technical Specification for Grooved Contact Wires
Standard Title
Number
IEC 60028 International specification of soft annealing type copper
IEC 60099-1 Non-linear resistor type gapped surge arresters for A.C.
system
IEC 62271-200 Alternating current disconnectors and earthing switches

Standard Title
Number
IEC 60146-1-3 Semiconductor converters, general requirements and line

commutated converters. Transformers and reactors
IEC 60146-1-1 Semiconductor converters, general requirements and line

commutated converters. Specifications of basic
requirements.
IEC 60196 IEC standard frequencies
IEC 60076-10 Determination of transformer and reactor sound level
IEC 60721-3-3 Classification of environmental conditions- Classification

of groups of environmental parameters and their severity-
Stationary use at weather protected locations.
IEC 60076-11 Power transformers - Part 11: Dry-type transformers
IS 2062 Hot Rolled Medium and High Tensile Structural Steel
RDSO ETI OHE For GI coating on structural steel

13-4-84
IEC 60255-27: Measuring Relays and Protection Equipment

2013
IEC 60068-1 & 2 Environmental Testing of Electronic Equipment
IEC 60815-2 Selection & Dimensioning of High Voltage Insulators

intended for use in Polluted Conditions

Standard Title
Number
IEC 60571 Electronic equipment specification
IEC 60870 Transmission Protocol
IEC 61000-4-2 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 4-2: Testing

ed1.0 and measurement techniques - Electrostatic discharge
immunity test
IEC 61000-4-3 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 4-3 : Testing

and measurement techniques - Radiated, radio-frequency,
electromagnetic field immunity test

and measurement techniques - Electrical fast
transient/burst immunity test

ed2.0 and measurement techniques - Surge immunity test

and measurement techniques - Immunity to conducted
disturbances, induced by radio-frequency fields
IEC 60848 Preparation of block diagrams for control systems
IEC 60870-1-1 Control equipment and systems – General principles
IEC 60870-2-1 Control equipment and systems – Power supply and

environment conditions
IEC 60870-3 Control equipment and systems – Interfaces (electrical

characteristics)
IEC 60870-4 Control equipment and systems – Performance

requirements
IEC 60870-5 Control equipment and systems – Transmission protocol
IEC 61850 Communication networks and systems in substations

3. DEFINITION OF ABBREVIATIONS
Abbreviations Meaning
AC Alternating Current
ACOCB Alternating current outgoing circuit breaker
ACRC Alternating current rectifier contactor
ACRCB Alternating current rectifier circuit breaker
AMS Auxiliary main sub Station
ASS Auxiliary Sub Station
AT Auxiliary transformer
ATCB Auxiliary Transformer Circuit Breaker
ATIS Auxiliary Transformer Isolator
B Traction bus bar
BA Batteries
BAIT Batteries interrupter
C&C Control & Communication
CAMS Computer Aided Maintenance System
CB Circuit Breaker
CCB Coupling circuit breaker
CIS Coupling Isolator
CTATP Current Transformer for protection of Auxiliary Transformer
CTC Current transformer for coupling
CTIM Incoming Current Transformer for Measures
CtT Current transformer for traction transformer
CTTTP Current Transformer for Protection of Traction Transformer

DC Direct Current
DCAC Direct current auxiliary contactor
DCACC Direct current auxiliary coupling contactor
DCOCB Direct current outgoing circuit breaker
DCRC Direct current rectifier contactor
DTN Data Transmission Network
TRANSCO Transmission Company (erstwhile DVB)
ECC Energy Control Centre
EIS Earthing Isolator
EMIS Energy Management and Information System
GRC General Remote Control
IED Intelligent Electronic Device
IS Isolator
IR Indian Railways
IT Interrupter
OCC Operations Control Centre
ITC Coupling interrupter
L Hand operated traction isolator
LAAT Surge arrester for Auxiliary Transformer
LAN Local Area Network
LATT Surge arrester for Traction Transformer
LBCB Lighting bridge circuit breaker
LBCCB Lighting bridge coupling circuit breaker

LBCCT Lighting bridge coupling current transformer
LBCT Lighting bridge current transformer
LBCVT Lighting bridge coupling voltage transformer
LBEIS Lighting bridge earthing isolator
LBVT Lighting bridge voltage transformer
LEIS Line Earthing Isolator
LFCB Lighting feeder circuit breaker (spare)
LFEIS Lighting feeder earthing isolator
LIS Line Isolator
LV Low Voltage
LVACB Low voltage auxiliary circuit breaker
LVACCB Low voltage auxiliary coupling circuit breaker
LVAT Low voltage auxiliary transformer
LVATCB Low voltage auxiliary transformer circuit breaker
LVATEIS Low voltage auxiliary transformer earthing isolator
LVCB Low voltage circuit breaker
LVCCB Low voltage coupling circuit breaker
MC Metro Corridor (Underground Alignment Line 2)
MCCB Metro corridor circuit breaker
MCEIS Metro corridor earthing isolator
MCIS Main coupling isolator
MMI Man Machine Interface
HMI Human Machine Interface

MVCB Medium Voltage Circuit Breaker
NMS Network Management System
NGR Neutral Ground Resistor
OCC Operation Control Centre
OHE Over-Head Equipment
PCW Power Control Workstation
PICOP Person In Charge Of Protection
PLC Programmable Logic Controller
PNCT Primary neutral current transformer
PNEIS Primary neutral earthing isolator
PNLA Primary neutral surge arrester
RC Rail Corridor
RCCB Rail corridor circuit breaker
RCEIS Rail corridor earthing isolator
RSS Receiving Sub Station
SCADA Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition System
SNCT Secondary neutral current transformer
SNEIS Secondary neutral earthing isolator
SNLA Secondary neutral surge arrester
SP Sectioning and Paralleling Post
SSP Sub-Sectioning and paralleling Post
T Transformer
TCB Traction Circuit breaker

TEIS Transformer Earthing Isolator
TSS Traction Sub Station
TT Traction transformer
TTCB Traction Transformer Circuit Breaker
TTIS Traction Transformer Isolator
UPS Uninterruptible Power supply
VDU Video Display Unit
VT Voltage Transformer
VTB Voltage Transformer for traction bus bar
VTBB Bus Bar Voltage Transformer
VTC Voltage transformer for coupling

4. SPARE PART LIST
4.1 GENERAL
The following list indicates the description and quantities of requirement of

spare parts, to be supplied by the Contractor. The Contractor shall deliver these
spare parts, at the same time as of handing over the first lot of erected
equipment, if not earlier in a phased manner. The spare parts shall be
adequate to meet the maintenance requirement for five years.
If, however, the Tenderer feels that some more items or more quantities of the
items mentioned herein are required for the proper operation and maintenance
of the installations supplied and erected by him, for a period of at least 2 years
commencing from the expiry of the Defects Liability Period, the Tenderer shall,
in that case, add such items and/or quantities to this list and shall include the
amended list in his bid.
The spare parts should be delivered to designated storage space in RSS/Depot

as advised by DMRC
Please refer Milestone/Bill of Quantities (pricing Document).
Please note that the quantities of items appearing in the list may be
decreased or increased as required by DMRC. Contractor should procure
these items only after approval by DMRC.
For details please refer spare policy provided in the Bid Documents


Contract- DE-04 – Particular Specification- Technical Description
Volume 4
CHAPTER 8A
Technical Description

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................................ 4
INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................................. 4
POWER SOURCE ........................................................................................................................... 4
POWER SUPPLY CHARACTERISTICS ......................................................................................... 4
GENERAL TECHNICAL CONDITIONS ........................................................................................... 5
2 SUB-STATION EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATION ............................................................................ 12
2.1 HIGH VOLTAGE EQUIPMENT ...................................................................................................... 12
3 AUXILIARY MAINS SUPPLY EQUIPMENT .................................................................................. 31
3.1 AUXILIARY MAIN TRANSFORMER ............................................................................................. 31
3.2 33 KV GAS INSULATED SWITCHGEAR (GIS) ............................................................................ 56
4 TRACTION SUPPLY EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................... 80
4.1 DESCRIPTION ............................................................................................................................... 80
4.2 TRACTION TRANSFORMER ........................................................................................................ 81
4.3 25 KV SWITCHGEAR .................................................................................................................... 97
5 PROTECTIONS CONTROL & MONITORING............................................................................. 114
5.1 GENERAL .................................................................................................................................... 114
5.2 HIGH VOLTAGE PROTECTION ................................................................................................. 118
5.3 33 KV PROTECTIONS ................................................................................................................ 127
6 RELAYS ....................................................................................................................................... 138
6.1 GENERAL .................................................................................................................................... 138
6.2 NUMERICAL RELAYS ................................................................................................................. 138
6.3 DRAW-OUT / PLUG-IN TYPE ..................................................................................................... 138
6.4 OPERATING VOLTAGE / CURRENT ......................................................................................... 138
6.5 AUXILIARY RELAYS / CONTACTS ............................................................................................ 139
6.6 RESET ......................................................................................................................................... 139
6.7 TIMERS ........................................................................................................................................ 139
6.8 DE-ENERGISATION OF CONTROL RELAY .............................................................................. 139
6.9 ISOLATION OF TRIP CIRCUIT FOR TESTING .......................................................................... 140
6.10 SHUNT / SERIES RELAYS ......................................................................................................... 140
6.11 SPARE PAIR OF CONTACTS ..................................................................................................... 141
6.12 SETTING RANGE ........................................................................................................................ 141
6.13 LIST OF INSTALLATIONS USING THE TYPES OF RELAYS.................................................... 141
6.14 PHASE INDICATIONS ................................................................................................................. 141
6.15 SCOPE OF NUMERICAL RELAYS ............................................................................................. 141
6.16 COMMUNICATION PORTS ........................................................................................................ 142
6.17 FACILITIES FOR FAULT DIAGNOSIS ........................................................................................ 142
6.18 RELAY AND PROTECTION PANELS ......................................................................................... 143
7 SUBSTATION AUTOMATION SYSTEM ..................................................................................... 152
7.1 GENERAL .................................................................................................................................... 152
7.2 SYSTEM DESIGN ........................................................................................................................ 154
7.3 BAY LEVEL .................................................................................................................................. 159
8 CABLING ..................................................................................................................................... 182
8.1 GENERAL .................................................................................................................................... 182
8.2 EHV 220/132/66 KV CABLES ...................................................................................................... 184
8.3 MEDIUM VOLTAGE 33 KV CABLES .......................................................................................... 219
8.4 CONNECTING JUNCTIONS - MV ENDS .................................................................................... 219
8.5 25 KV CABLES ............................................................................................................................ 223

8.6 LOW VOLTAGE CABLES AND WIRING...................................................................................... 224

9 EARTHING ................................................................................................................................... 234
9.1 EARTH MESH DESIGN ................................................................................................................ 234
9.2 EXOTHERMIC WELDING ............................................................................................................ 237
9.3 LIST OF REFERENCE STANDARDS ..........................................................................................237
9.4 EARTH MESH CHARACTERISTICS ........................................................................................... 238
9.5 EQUIPMENT CONNECTING MODE TO EARTH MESH ............................................................. 239
9.6 AMS & CONTROL ROOM BUILDING EARTHING ...................................................................... 241
9.7 GAS INSULATED SWITCHGEAR (GIS) ......................................................................................242
9.8 BOUNDARY WALL EARTHING ...................................................................................................242
9.9 SOLAR PANEL EARTHING ......................................................................................................... 243
9.10 LIGHTNING PROTECTION .......................................................................................................... 243
9.11 SIZE OF EARTH MAT CONDUCTOR: ......................................................................................... 244
9.12 TESTING OF EARTHING SYSTEM / PITS .................................................................................. 245
10 METERING .................................................................................................................................. 246
10.1 GENERAL ..................................................................................................................................... 246
11 GENERAL ELECTRICAL WORKS .............................................................................................. 249
11.1 YARD LIGHTING .......................................................................................................................... 249
11.2 LIGHTNING PROTECTION .......................................................................................................... 249
12 CIVIL WORKS .............................................................................................................................. 251
12.1 GENERAL ..................................................................................................................................... 251
12.2 LAND PREPARATION .................................................................................................................. 253
12.3 ACCESS ROADS / RAIL CUM ROAD / RCC ROAD ...................................................................253
12.4 DRAINAGE ................................................................................................................................... 254
12.5 RSS BUILDING (INDOOR GIS, AMS& CONTROL ROOM BUILDING) ...................................... 255
13 AMC: DELETED ......................................................................................................................... 272
14 REQUIREMENTS FOR UN-MANNING OF RECEIVING SUB-STATION (RSS) ........................ 272
15 REACTIVE POWER FACTOR COMPENSATION SYSTEM:- .................................................... 274
15.1 GENERAL ..................................................................................................................................... 274
15.2 CAPACITY OF SHUNT REACTORS AND STATCOM ................................................................ 274
15.3 SCOPE OF WORK ....................................................................................................................... 275
15.7 DESIGN WORKS:-........................................................................................................................276
15.8 TRAINING ..................................................................................................................................... 277
15.9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................................................... 277

1 GENERAL
Introduction
Delhi Metro Rail Corporation Limited (DMRC) has been authorized to

execute works for Delhi Metro of Integrated Multi Modal Mass Rapid Transit
System for Delhi. The details of this section along with the expected date of
opening for carriage of passenger and source of funding are as per ITT. The
Proposed sites for RSSs cum TSS cum AMS to be constructed under the
scope of this contract are indicated in Chapter- 1 of this specifications.
Power Source
Transco Substation
The Proposed Sources for Power along with details of approx. cable route
length are indicated in Chapter- 1 of this specifications..
DMRC Receiving Substation
At all the above DMRC Receiving Substations (RSS), the incoming High
Voltage Supply will be stepped down to:-
 27.5 kV, single phase and will be fed to the traction overhead equipment,
through a Traction Substation (TSS), located in the same premises as the
RSS.
 33 kV, three phase and will be fed to the 33 kV Auxiliary Network and the
Auxiliary substations, to meet the Auxiliary power demand at stations and
en-route, through an Auxiliary Main Substation (AMS), located in the same
premises as the RSS.
Power Supply Characteristics
Nominal Voltage 220 kV 132 kV 66 kV

Maximum Voltage +10%, -15% of +10%, -15% of +10%, -15% of
Variations rated value rated value rated value
Nominal frequency 50 Hz 50 Hz 50 Hz
Maximum frequency
±3% ±3% ±3%
variations
Short circuit Current 40kA for 1 sec 31.5 kA for 1 20kA for 1 sec
unless sec unless unless
otherwise as otherwise as otherwise as

specified in specified in specified in

specifications specifications specifications
General Technical Conditions
Unless indicated otherwise herein, all equipment supplied and installed shall
comply with the International Electro technical Commission (IEC) standards,
or equivalent Indian standards.
The supply shall include all supporting structures, embedded parts, auxiliary
equipment, mechanical linkages, hydraulic piping for control devices with
pumps, auxiliary circuits wiring, interlocking devices, current and voltage
transformers, cable end-boxes. The necessary sub-assemblies must be
assembled in the contractor's plant, taking into account the transportation
conditions. The Terminal Board for the output (control supply) of all panels
(CB, LBS, Isolator, Battery Chargers etc.) shall be factory fitted only.
Complete safety to personnel during operation and ease of maintenance
shall be ensured. The contractor shall study the quality of power supply
network and design and supply the equipment accordingly, failure of any
equipment due to poor power supply quality i.e. surges etc. shall be
responsibility of the contractor. The equipment characteristics are given in
the technical sheets.
Wherever, an alternative arrangement of any equipment/material is given

anywhere in the specifications then the Engineer's decision for use of any
equipment / material shall be final without any cost implication to DMRC.
The scope shall include all activities to make the units fully functional and to
meet the requirements of power supply arrangement. This includes but not
limited to supply and erection of equipment, foundations of all equipment,
all cables, connectors, supporting structures, necessary equipment, small
part steel & other components required to make system fully functional. HV
Bus bar gentry structure shall be made by High Post Insulator (HPI) and
tubular poles
Only hot-dip GI pipe/sheets/nuts/bolts etc shall be used in the RSS work,

nowhere M.S pipe/sheet/nut/bolts etc shall be allowed. All necessary steps
shall have to be taken by the contractor and requirements fulfilled so as to
obtain the Green building Certification (IGBC certification with Platinum

rating) for RSS building. All preparation of documentation for IGBC

certification for RSS is in the scope of RSS contractor. (Details attached as
Annexure-13)
The equipment, process, design shall be meeting these requirements and

is in the scope of contract and included in bid.
Support during Installation, Testing and Commissioning by OEM
The Installation of the equipment must be done under the supervision of

OEM (Original Equipment Manufacturer) and a certificate from OEM must
be submitted that the installation of equipment is done as per
recommendations of OEM.
The Testing and Commissioning of the equipment must be done by the

OEM (Original Equipment Manufacturer) or Authorised agency of OEM, and
a certificate from OEM must be submitted that the Testing and
Commissioning of equipment is done as per recommendations of OEM.
Environment and Climate Conditions
In general all equipment and assemblies shall be suitable for outdoor use in
dry arid and also tropical climates and in areas having heavy rainfall,
pollution due to industry and coastal environment and severe lightning. The
limiting weather conditions, which the equipment has to withstand in service,
are indicated below:
S. No. Parameters Value

1 Maximum ambient air temperature As per GS
2 Minimum ambient air temperature As per GS
3 Maximum relative humidity As per GS
4 Annual rainfall As per GS
Number of thunderstorm days per As per GS
5
annum
Number of dust storm days per As per GS
6
annum
7 Number of rainy days per annum As per GS
8 Maximum basic wind pressure As per GS
9 Altitude above m.s.l (max) As per GS
Very heavy as per IEC
10 Pollution level 815-1986 & IS 13134-
1992

All electronic cards used in IEDs, Relays, Breakers, Invertors, Battery

Chargers/DCDB, PLC, AVRs and all other electronic cards should confirm
to environment factor class minimum 3C2 as per IEC 60721-3-3 for highly
Polluted area. All applicable Cards must have conformal coating and must
be tested for H2S, So2 and mixed gas tests as per IEC 60068 - 1 & 2 for
confirming to the environment class 3C3 as per IEC 60721-3-3. A certificate
to this effect shall be submitted before delivery of material. Relays, cards
and all equipments must be capable for Very heavy pollution level in Delhi
NCR as per IEC
All electronic cards, assemblies, sub-assemblies and components thereof

used in equipment, relays, IED, PLC etc. supplied under this contract shall
be of Industrial grade only as per relevant standards and shall be suitable
for the ambient temperature range between -0.6oC to 50oC. All applicable
cards must have also tested for Environmental test as per IEC 60571 / EN
50155 and shall be done in accordance to IEC 60068. Details of test are
mentioned below:
(i) Dry Heat Test
(ii) Low Temperature Test (in case applicable for Delhi / NCR region
ambient temperature range).
(iii) Change of Temperature Test.
(iv) Damp Heat Test.
(v) Drving Rain Test.
The prior approval for specifications and makes of all components and
subcomponents like relay, cards, capacitors etc. of the equipment shall be
obtained from the Employer. The contractors shall submit details of
configuration in the card, block diagram of the cards and waveform
signature for each electronic card used in the equipment along with O&M
documentation.
All Electrical Panels shall be completely metal enclosed and shall be dust,
moisture and vermin proof.

Vibration and Harmonics:-
The transformer installation would be subject to vibrations on account of

passage of trains on nearby tracks. The AC electric locomotives are fitted
with VVVF type IGBT controlled Converter-Inverter (CI) for feeding the 3-
phase AC Traction Motor. The converter-inverter introduces harmonic
currents in the 25 kV power supply system.
Harmonics With IGBT

3rd (150 HZ)
5th (250 HZ)
7th (350 HZ) Overall 2 %
9th (450 HZ)
11th (550 HZ)
Protection against Corrosion
All outdoor cubicles, marshaling kiosks, control & protection cable

terminations boxes should be made of stainless steel sheet of not less than
2 mm thickness AISI 316 and must be suitable for outdoor applications with
minimum IP-55 level of Ingress protection. The contractor shall submit
Ingress Protection test certificate for fully assembled panels, etc at the time
of vendor approval. All the panels shall be properly sealed after cable
terminations and shall be certified for proper IP rating by the manufacture
after commissioning at site. OEM shall develop testing protocol for the same
and submit to the employer for review. During fabrication proper quality
control of workmanship shall be ensured, so that no rusting is developed on
the cubicles. DMRC reserves right to witness the manufacturing process of
the cubicle.
All Bay Marshalling Kiosk (BMK) should be stainless steel. And only one key
(square key) shall be used to access all equipment.
All steel structure (lattice type) shall be galvanized as 1000 gm/sqm while
pipes with 610 gm / Sqm must be galvanised as per latest relevant RDSO
specifications suitable for Very heavy pollution as per IEC 60815 -2008 & IS
13134-1992. All ferrous parts of equipment shall have galvanization of min
1000 gm/Sqm. The nut and bolts shall be galvanized as per the relevant IS.
Creepage Distance and Clearance

Creepage distance for all equipment shall be 31 mm/kV suitable for very
heavy pollution as per latest edition of IEC 60815 and CEA regulation rule-
43. Clearance between equipment live part to earth shall be as mentioned
below:-
S. Description 25 kV 33 66 kV 132 kV 220 kV

No. KV
1 Between Phases - 320 630 1300 2400
Between one
2 phase & earth for 500 320 630 1300 2100
rigid conductor
Between any point where man may be required to
3
stand to the nearest
Unsecured -
3a 3000 3500 4000 5000
conductor in air
Secured -
3b 2000 - - -
conductor in air
Min height of -
4 busbar (above 3800 4600 4600 5500
foundation top)
Safe working 2800
5 2000 3100 3700 4300
clearance
Connection of Dissimilar Metals
In general, all connections between dissimilar conducting metals i.e. steel &
Copper, Aluminum & Copper, Steel & Aluminum or any other combination
should be provided with suitable bimetallic connection of thickness not less
than 2 mm.
Interlocking
Contractor shall be required to develop interlocking scheme based on the

best prevalent engineering practices for all the HV, LV switchgears and
equipment in RSS, AMS & TSS. The interlocking scheme shall be
developed keeping into view of interlocking provided in DMRC substations
and shall be submitted to DMRC for approval along with SLD. The
interlocking scheme adopted in existing DMRC substations is attached as
Annexure-8
Air Insulated Technology
The High Voltage bays in the Receiving Substations shall be built according
to Air Insulated Technology, unless otherwise specified. The High Voltage

Circuit Breakers and Current Transformers are of SF-6 gas insulated

technology. They shall comply with the outdoor type requirement. The
manufacturer shall check and certify that the equipment characteristics
mentioned herein are suited for the network characteristics, if necessary in
consultation with the Power Supply Authorities viz TRANSCO.
The proposed tentative layout is shown on the enclosed drawings. The

Contractor may try to optimize the layout, if considered necessary, without
compromising on the electrical clearance, accessibility to equipment inside
the RSS, safety requirements and provisions for future. The layouts shall be
subject to approval by the Employer and shall not have any functional
implications.
The manufacturer shall also have to let know his previous experience in the
field of 220 kV, 132 kV and 66 kV SF6 gas insulated apparatuses for air
insulated substations.
Gas Insulated Technology
The High Voltage bays in the Receiving Substations shall be built according
to Gas Insulated Technology (GIS), unless otherwise specified. They shall
comply with the requirements specified in clause 2.
The Contractor may try to optimize the layout, if considered necessary,

without compromising on the electrical clearance, accessibility to equipment
inside the RSS, safety requirements and provisions for future. The layouts
shall be subject to approval by the Employer and shall not have any
functional implications.
The manufacturer shall also have to let know his previous experience in the
field of 220/132/66 kV or above GIS substations.
Design, Layout of Equipment and Arrangement
The apparatuses shall be installed according to the group phase layout,

whereby the three phases of each circuit are installed side-by-side and
advance function-by-function. The architectural configuration of the station
shall make it as compact as possible with clear and logical layout of the bus-
bars, facilitating, in addition, accessibility to all actuating devices and

possible extensions to accommodate equipment to be installed

subsequently.
The means of access to the various equipment for the maintenance staff
shall be safe. The maintenance personnel shall have access to and shall be
capable of moving freely around each element in the cubicles. The
equipment may be supported on metal frames. These frames shall not
hinder access to any part of the station, nor handling, overhauling, and
assembly operations. All the relevant statutory guidelines for various
clearances shall be complied while developing the layout.
Ratings of various Equipment
The rating of various equipment mentioned in the specifications is bare

minimum. It is a design and built contract, the contractor has to design and
if the requirement of rating so arrived is more through design than as
specified then, equipment of more rating shall be provided by the contractor.
The cost of this is deemed to be included in the bid.
The design shall also comply all the statuary requirements as per the CEA
notification on regulations· for Measures relating to Safety and Electric
Supply 2010 (IE Rules). The bid is deemed to include the cost for all such
provisions.
The bidder has to make the system functional smoothly and shall provide
all the required ancillaries wherever required like ladders, safety items,
assisting tools, special maintenance tools recommended by OEM of the
equipment for the smooth functioning of the system.
Quality assurance
The contractor shall prepare and submit quality assurance plan for
manufacturing, Installation, Testing and commissioning of Equipment
supplied under the contract in consultation with the Employer. Due care
shall be taken to avoid manufacturing defects such as voids in cast resin /
porcelain equipment like CT, PT, Dry Type transformer, CB, Insulators etc
The Quality Assurance plan shall be submitted along with the Vendor
Proposal.
All Isolator shall be selected from RDSO/DMRC approved vendor list only.

2 SUB-STATION EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATION
These specifications are generalized for incoming voltage level

220kV/132kV/66kV.
However, the bidder shall bid tender as per voltage level mentioned
in the BOQ.
All switchgear, equipment, bus bars, jumpers, HT cables etc. shall be

designed based on the overloading capacity of the Traction transformers
and Auxiliary Main transformer. However minimum rating will be as specified
in the specifications. The sub-station equipment are classified into following
sections:-
2.1 High Voltage Equipment
High Voltage Equipment located within the premises of the Receiving

Substation (RSS) performs the task of supplying 220/132/66 kV, 3-phase
power supply to the 33 kV distribution network and 1-phase 25 kV Traction
power supply to OHE, through appropriate switchgear, Isolators, Lightening
arrestors, Measuring & Protection arrangements. The High Voltage
Equipment mainly comprises of:
2.1.1 EHV Gas Insulated Switchgear (GIS)
2.1.1.1 Scope of Work
The scope of work comprises of design, manufacture, shop testing, supply,

delivery at site, installation, testing and commissioning of 3-phase,
220/132/66 kV Rated voltage 245/145/72.5 kV, 2000A at 40˚C, 40/31.5/20
kA for 3 Sec, Double Bus Bar Gas insulated indoor type receiving sub-
station. The supply will include all supporting structures, auxiliary
equipment, mechanical linkages, hydraulic piping for control devices with
pumps, SF6 gas piping, auxiliary circuits wiring, interlocking devices, current
and voltage transformers, cable end boxes and SF6 bus ducts. Necessary
sub-assemblies must be assembled in the supplier’s plan, accounting for
the transportation condition.
The EHV/ HV Gas Insulated Switchgear (GIS) Shall be with 5 Years

warranty, i.e. 3 years extended warranty beyond 2 Years Contractual DLP.



The scope of work includes the following (but not limited to):
i. Each Incomer Bay (2 Nos) consisting of;
 Circuit Breaker – 1 No.
 Current Transformer – 1 No.
 Line Disconnector with Maintenance Earth Switch – 1 No.
 Line Earth Switch (Fast acting)- 1 No.
 Voltage Transformer with motor operated isolation device of rated

insulation
 Indoor lightning arrestor with surge arrestor counter on GIS and

having SCADA communicability on IEC 61850 protocol
 Bus Disconnector with Earth Switch – 2 Nos.
 Bus end Maintenance earth Switch – 2 No.
 Other items as required for connection to the two bus bars,

220/132/66 kV incoming cables as applicable through lightning
arrestor and for completing the intent of work
ii. Each Transformer Feeder Bay (4 Nos.) consisting of;
 Current Transformer – 1 No.
 Maintenance Earth Switch (Tr. Side)-1 Nos.
 Bus Disconnectors with Earth switch – 2 Nos.

 Indoor lightning arrestor with surge arrestor counter on GIS and

having SCADA communicability on IEC 61850 protocol
 Other items as required for connection to bus bars, cables, lightning

arrestor etc. and for completing the intent of work
iii. Each Bus Coupler Bay (1 No.) consisting of;
 Current Transformer – 2 Nos.
 Bus Disconnectors with Earth Switch – 2 Nos.
 Other items as required for connection to bus bars, cables etc. and
for completing the intent of work
iv. Each Bus consisting of;
 Voltage Transformer with motorized / manual isolation device of

rated insulation- 1Nos
 Bus Earthing Switch – 1 No.
2.1.1.2 New gas charging equipment with gas cylinders for each set of the newly
constructed GIS substation is covered in the scope of work – After
commissioning this will become property of the Employer. The contractor
would be required to handover them in proper working condition with
enough gas for one charging of complete system.
2.1.1.3 EOT crane with VVVF drive for GIS equipment handling during installation,
commissioning and maintenance etc. shall be provided at each 66kV GIS
substation. The EOT crane lifting capacity shall be adequate to handle the
heaviest package of GIS but shall not be less than 5 tons. For detailed
specifications and scope refer annexure 14.
2.1.1.4 Main Features Required
1) All voltage level GIS equipment shall be built according to the SF6 gas
insulation technology.

2) All voltage level GIS as offered should be fully type tested as per latest IEC
standards at the time of vendor approval and type test report should not be
more than 5 years old at the time of vendor approval.
3) The equipment installed shall offer all necessary facilities for equipping and
connecting the equipment sections to follow, without entailing any shut down
of equipment already in service.
4) In the event of arcing in a compartment, the arces should not extend to the
neighbouring compartment. Any failure to the enclosure of the compartment
shall not lead to damages in the neighbouring compartments. All panels
shall be Internal Arc tested for full fault current as per AFLR for 1 Second.
5) Suitable means of expansions should be provided in the metal enclosure

and pipelines to absorb the actual thermal expansion and contraction of the
SF6 equipment and to facilitate the alignment of switchgear assembly.
6) Internal insulation level between live parts and earth when the pressure of
the gas goes to the atmospheric pressure should not be less than
1.2*66/1.732 kV.
7) The metal enclosures for the SF6 gas insulated equipment modules shall
be made from aluminum alloy. Panels shall be completely metal enclosed
and shall be dust, moisture and vermin proof.
8) GIS should be of modular design, and it should be possible to add feeder

bays for two additional incomers, if required on either end without any
drilling, cutting or welding on existing equipment and without the necessity
of moving or dislocating the existing switchgear bays. The layout of GIS
equipment and transformers should show space earmarked along with
suitable cut outs for the future provision. Future expansion manual shall be
submitted along with vendor proposal.
9) GIS supplier should have minimum 5 years’ experience in design and

manufacturing of similar GIS substations. This shall be explained in
tenderer’s technical proposal. The tenderer will be required to explain
availability of spares and service from technically trained manpower.
10) The incoming 3 phase 220/132/66 kV, 2 runs single core cable feeders can
be of minimum size of 630 mm2 to 1200 mm2. The termination arrangement

shall however be designed for two such cables, so that additional cables
can be terminated later, if required. The outgoing connections from GIS shall
be in gas filled enclosure, designed in such a way that vibration from GIS
equipment and transformer are not transmitted to each other. The
transformer feeder bays should have termination arrangements suitable for
cable cross-section required as per current requirements of transformer.
11) The Disconnectors and Earthing Switches shall be electrically and

mechanically interlocked against mal-operation. Feeder earthing switch
shall be fast acting type with making capacity and isolated from earthed
enclosures and shall permit testing of switchgear. It shall also be possible
to carryout high voltage testing of cable cores without having to open the
breaker assembly or SF6 chamber without disconnecting the cables.
Suitable adapter for such testing should be provided. The details of voltage
level which this adapter can withstand during high voltage testing of cables
shall be clearly indicated and shall not be less than the required voltage
level for cable testing. For other routine maintenance also, no dismantling
of switchgear should be required.
12) The conductors/bus bars shall be of Aluminum and enclosure shall be made
of Aluminum Alloy.
13) The gas barrier insulators shall withstand 1.5 times maximum rated
pressure on one side and vacuum on the other side. All fixtures or nuts or
instruments whose maintenance / opening would leak the SF6 gas should
be clearly ear marked and distinctly identifiable.
14) All gas sampling shall be possible during normal operation and without loss
of gas.
15) Loss of gas per annum shall not exceed 1% by weight in each compartment.
16) Adequate burden capacity shall be available in instrument transformers to

permit provision of additional test, protection on measuring instruments. The
instrument transformer shall have separate metering cores to permit
measurement of values of energy, power, current and voltage as per
required accuracy, giving due consideration to the fact that load during initial
stages may be much lower than designed capacity. All current transformers

shall have a 3-second short-time current rating of not less than the
maximum System fault level. The technical details viz. burden capacity,
knee voltage and turn ratio of the instrument transformers shall be finalized
before manufacturing clearance of the GIS (the calculations shall be
submitted during vendor / technical approval using all the available actual
data). The burden capacity shall be designed keeping in mind at least 40%
spare capacity for future requirements. The instruments shall also be sized
and positioned so that a 5’-5’-6” height operator can read the instrument
without additional support.
17) Clear visual indication of isolator and earthing switch, switch blade position,
whether open or closed shall be provided.
18) Each component shall be modular and complete with ancillary equipment.
The design shall be such that all parts subject to wear and tear are easily
accessible for maintenance purpose. The equipment shall be protected
against all types of voltage surges and shall necessarily include any
component or assembly required for this purpose.
19) Circuit breaker shall be of single pressure interrupter. The moving and fixed
contacts shall be housed in the same interrupter chamber without any split
so as not to affect the synchronism of three phases. The Operating
Mechanism for the circuit breaker shall be Spring/Spring or to give highest
reliability to the system, following loss of supply voltage the operating
mechanism shall have local storage sufficiency for a duty cycle of O-CO
without the need for recharging. The rated duty cycle of the circuit breaker
shall be O-0.3s-CO-15s-CO. The circuit breakers shall be provided with an
“anti-hunting” coil for all commands going to the switchgear. All interlock
and automatic systems within the actuation system shall be designed so
that the circuit breaker executes operations only when it is in a position
enabling to do so completely and reliably.
20) The isolators shall be fitted with a suitable actuation system operating
simultaneously on all three poles, backed up by an emergency manual
actuation in case of malfunction of the former. The isolators shall not change
position under the effect of electro dynamic loads. There shall be hard-wire
interlock between isolator, circuit breaker and earth-switch.

21) In case of any internal arc fault – regardless whether it occurs in a bus bar
section, a busbar isolator or the circuit breaker-repair works should be
possible without shutting down the substation; at least one busbar and the
undisturbed feeder should remain in operation. It should be possible to
remove and replace a fully assembled circuit breaker without interfering the
operation of the adjacent feeder. All circuit breakers should be
interchangeable.
22) The GIS equipment shall be arranged in such a manner that in case of
maintenance work on any of the equipment, at least one bus bar should be
available for operation.
23) Each bay shall be segregated from its neighbour bays by means of gas tight
barrier insulators to ensure that in case of an internal arc the fault will be
restricted to the concerned bay.
24) The Conventional Local Control Cubicles shall be integrated with the GIS
with hard wire interlocking. Provision of SCADA permissive shall also be
present.
25) Following accessories shall be provided for each compartment.
 Pressure relief devices.
 Provision of desiccants.
26) Monitoring of Gas in the enclosure:
Each gas compartment should have its own SF6 pressure monitoring
facilities as well as static filters. Pressure relief devices shall be designed
to limit maximum pressurize below the busting level of the enclosure and
barrier insulation. Instruments communicable to SCADA shall be provided
to continuously monitor the Gas density.
27) The protection devices for this equipment shall ensure permanent
monitoring of gas pressure inside each compartment by means of
temperature compensated monitoring devices triggering a dual alarm
threshold annunciation system in the event of gas pressure drops:

Stage 1: Performance of the station is unaffected, in particular cut-off

capabilities remain intact. Immediate intervention by the
specialist is not necessary, but recommended.
Stage 2: The dielectric properties of the station in the presence of

occurring over voltage shall be such that all the necessary
isolating operations still remain possible without any danger or
any accident taking place. In case of drop of pressure below
minimum level, the concerned breaker should trip and then
lock.
28) The inter bay width shall be sufficient to allow access to all drive
mechanisms and other termination boxes without the need of dismantling
other apparatuses.
29) The design of the cable termination shall allow plugging and unplugging the
HV cable without need of opening the GIS and without any gas work.
Training & competency for cable termination in GIS shall be provided to
nominated DMRC staff.
30) All ratings and requirements not covered in this part but furnished earlier in
this specification in regard to circuit breakers, isolators, earthing switches
and instrument transformers also apply to GIS equipment.
31) There should also be provision of manual PT disconnection handle (outside

GIS) for PT isolation.
32) There shall be provision for testing Lightning arrestor and surge counter
separately to ascertain proper working during service life.
2.1.1.5 Governing Specifications:
The complete GIS equipment shall meet the requirements of latest versions
of IEC/International standards/specifications, a few of these are indicated
below:
CENELEC EN Standards for pressure vessel construction

62155/ IEC 62155
IEC62271-203 Gas insulated metal enclosed switchgear for rated
voltage of 72.5 kV and above
IEC 62271-1 Common specifications for high voltage switchgear
and control gear standards

IEC 60137 Insulated bushings for alternating voltage above

1000 volts
IEC 60044 / IEC Instrument transformers
61869
IEC 62271-100 High voltage alternating current circuit breaker
IEC 62271-102 AC Disconnector and earth switch
IEC 60480 Guide to checking of SF6
IEC 61634 Use handling of SF6
IEC 60859 Cable connector for GIS
IEC 60099 Surge Arrestor/LA
2.1.1.6 Tests
a. The modules individually as well as the assembly shall be subject to various

test, including type test, as required in terms of provisions of Chapter – 9 of
“Employer’s Requirements – General Specifications” prior to shipment. In
case valid type test reports from an independent lab are not available
or the type test reports available are older than 05 years at the time of
vendor approval, then the type tests as per latest relevant standard
shall be conducted by the contractor at an third party accredited Lab
and test may be witnessed by employer’s representative. The cost of
testing shall be borne by the Contractor.
b. Site tests shall include leakage tests, moisture contents in dielectric and
power frequency test to ensure conducting particles present in the Gas are
below permissible limits. These limits shall be furnished by the Contractor.
c. The indicative list of tests is give in chapter 8C of this PS.
2.1.1.7 Earthing
Entire metallic enclosure shall be bonded together and effectively earthed

as per manufactures recommendations.
2.1.1.8 Other Equipment
Main intake power transformers, Earthing system, lighting protection,

illumination arrangement etc. Shall comply with the relevant stipulations of
Outdoor type RSS. The control, monitoring, logging etc shall be identical to
the outdoor type RSS.
2.1.1.9 Transportation, Shipment and Storage

Transportation, shipment and storage of GIS equipment shall be as per

international practice/standards. The manufacturer shall provide detailed
installation procedure along with installation timeline for proper planning of
installation activities. The contractor shall coordinate and arrange all the
required tools and equipment for the installation of GIS at site.
2.1.1.10 Type of Equipment
The 220/132/66 /33kV and 25 kV equipment shall be GIS or AIS type

equipmentas per the details provided in the Pricing documents. These will
be as per specification indicated elsewhere in the tender.
2.1.1.11 Technical Specifications
For detailed technical specifications, please refer Technical Data Sheets

provided in Chapter- 8B. The relevant portions in those sheets shall be filled
by manufacturer / contractor and submitted with vendor proposal.
S. No. Particulars 220 kV 132 kV 66 kV

Enclosure type Three Phase Enclosure
1
2 Rated voltage 245 kV 145 kV 72.6 kV
3 Rated frequency 50 Hz 50 Hz 50 Hz
4 Rated current of bus bar 2000 A 2000 A 2000 A
Rated insulation
a) Power frequency withstand voltage
5 rms 395 kV, 275 kV, 140 kV,
b) Lightning impulse withstand voltage 950 kV 650 kV 325 kV
rms
6 Rated short-time current rms, 3 sec 40 kA 31.5 kA 20 kA
7 Guaranteed SF6 gas losses per year Less than 1 %
2.1.2 Air Insulated Type Switchgear (AIS)
Creepage distance for all the equipment shall be 31 mm/kV. Fault duration
for all equipment shall be taken as 3 sec. All switchgear, equipment,
busbars, jumpers, HT cables etc shall be designed based on the
overloading capacity of the Traction transformers and Auxiliary Main
transformer. However minimum rating will be as specified in the
specifications. This Covers the specifications of various equipment used in
outdoor type RSS are as under:



2.1.2.1 Circuit Breakers
2.1.2.1.1 Governing Specification
The 220 kV / 66 kV Circuit Breakers shall conform to IEC 62271-1 and IEC
62271-100 (C2-M2 class compliant / RDSO approved). The electro-
technical characteristics required to be guaranteed for circuit breakers of
different voltage levels, are shown in the Technical sheets (see Chapter 8B).
2.1.2.1.2 SF-6 type
The circuit breaker must be SF-6 puffer type and single pressure type with
only one breaker per pole, mounted on one insulated support column. The
operating mechanism shall be spring-spring type. The auxiliary supply
for spring charging motor shall be suitable for 110V DC.
The Circuit Breakers shall be fitted with an electrical actuation system

operating simultaneously on all three poles, backed-up by an emergency
manual actuation in case of malfunction of the former.
The moving contact shall be equipped with different compartment allowing

a rise of pressure which shall be used to extinguish the arc and assist the
opening movement, in order to avoid poles deterioration and to reduce the
actuation energy required to operate the CB. It shall be possible to lock the
manual actuating device in open position by means of key and lock system.
2.1.2.1.3 Anti-hunting coil
An “anti-hunting” coil is required on all commands going to the switchgear.

This function prevents execution of two successive closing if the first one is

immediately followed by a trip-out that is to say if the first closing is not

successful.
This prevents the circuit breaker from re-closing and from hunting until any
opening order is given to confirm the tripping. Then a new closing order
could operate.
2.1.2.1.4 Under-voltage coil
2 nos of 110 V DC auxiliary under-voltage trip-out coil with separate MCBs

are required in all circuit breaker with approved means.
2.1.2.1.5 Interlocking
All interlocks and automatic systems within the actuation system shall be
designed so that the circuit breaker executes operations only when it is in a
position enabling to do so completely and reliably. That mean, for example,
when an apparatus is in remote control, the local control does not operate.
2.1.2.1.6 Control system
The contractor shall provide a detailed description of the pneumatic or

spring system used to operate the circuit-breaker, their rated supply
pressure, lower and higher acceptable pressure limits and thresholds
together with the maximum number of consecutive actuation possible while
still enabling correct operation.
Each pole shall be mechanically connected by means of a link and a

transmission assembly to the operating mechanism. The energy needed for
the opening and the closing operations shall be supplied by different springs
located in the control cubicle. It shall be possible to reload the springs
manually by mean of handle.
The control cubicle shall include a remote / local changeover switch and
opening and closing push buttons. The close Push buttons shall be active
in local mode and inactive in remote mode. The open bush button to remain
active in all modes
CB control boxes shall be PU painted or with better rust protecting material

with Minimum IP 65 class and suitable for outdoor application and the life of
control box shall be matched with life of equipment and shall include an anti-

condensation heating. Appropriate Test for Rust protection as per relevant

standards to be submitted.
An optical indicator shall indicate:
 the position of the circuit breaker (Closed or open) with Red & Green
LED indication
 the position of the closing spring (Loaded or unloaded)
2.1.2.1.7 Operating duration
The operating cut-off, opening and closing duration shall comply with the
standards in force (IEC 62271-1, 62271-100). All three poles shall open and
close simultaneously. In case of any mechanical out of synchronization in
the operation of the three poles it shall at least fall within the tolerances
stipulated in the standards in force.
The rated lightning impulse withstand voltage when circuit breaker gap open
should be 950 kV for 220 kV, 650 kV for 132 kV and 325 kV for 66 kV.
2.1.2.1.8 SF6 pressure protection device
The protection devices for this equipment shall ensure permanent

monitoring of gas pressure inside each compartment by mean of
threshold annunciation system in the event of gas pressure drops.
a) Initial alarm threshold
- Performance of the CB is unaffected, in particular breaking capabilities

remain intact.
- Immediate intervention by specialist is not necessary.
b) Second alarm threshold
- CB tripping and locked until SF6 refilling
- Isolating capabilities of the CB remain intact.
- Immediate intervention by specialist is necessary.
- Control orders are inactive.
c) Devices

The devices used must provide full reliability and operating safety and not
represent a weak spot for the tightness of equipment. At no time shall these
devices indicate any wrong data, not lose their accuracy regardless of
ambient temperature or of the operating incident concerned. This is why
monitoring devices with temperature compensation are specified.
Each gas compartment should have its own SF6 pressure monitoring
facilities as well as its static filters. Pressure relief devices should be
designed to limit maximum pressure rise below the bursting level of the
enclosure and barrier insulation but not designed to retain the fragment of
bursting disk. All gas compartments shall be equipped with rupture
diaphragms to prevent the enclosure from uncontrolled bursting.
d) Testing and Inspection Devices
Each compartment will be equipped with valves and connections enabling

gas to be added or direct readout pressure measuring equipment to be fitted
while the equipment is energized.
The various joints and gaskets shall ensure full tightness and be protected
so as to withstand the effects of the various corrosive agents present in the
atmosphere (pollution, temperature, humidity, etc.). The corresponding
flanges shall be fitted with an effective system for testing sealing all leaks
even very slight ones that may occur around or because of these joints.
The apparatuses shall be fitted with pressure release valves with deflectors
to ensure protection against overpressure. Test certificates of this device
shall be supplied.
2.1.2.1.9 Earthing system
Each circuit breaker shall be equipped with an earthing connecting device,

on upstream and downstream side, to earth the isolated circuit.
2.1.2.2 Isolators
2.1.2.2.1 Governing Specification
All isolators shall conform to IEC 62271-1, 62271-102. The electro technical
characteristics required to be guaranteed for isolators of different voltage
levels are shown in the technical sheets (see Chapter 8B).

2.1.2.2.2 General
The isolators shall be fitted with an electrical actuation system operating

simultaneously on all three poles, backed-up by an emergency manual
actuation in case of malfunction of the former. The actuating device shall be
capable to be operated electrically or manually through a changeover switch
with three positions (off / manual / electrical) provided on the motor box.
The isolators shall not change of position under the effects of

electrodynamics loads, which may occur during operation, in particular
those caused by short-circuits.
The isolators shall be of two-column rotary centre break type, with two
moving parts (two rotating columns). They shall be protected against corona
discharge by providing metallic ring. The control cubicle shall be of stainless
steel dust and water proof (IP 55) suitable for outdoor application and shall
include an anti-condensation heating.
2.1.2.2.3 Line Isolator
The line isolator (LIS-x) shall be equipped with earthing isolator (LEIS-x) to
earth the cable from TRANSCO. This earthing isolator shall be mechanically
interlocked with the line isolator LIS to lock the open apparatus when the
other one is closed.
The electrical operation of LEIS-x, shall be available only locally with motor
operated and interlocked with the zero voltage on the cable and with the
open position of up and downstream circuit breakers. That mean it shall be
impossible to operate the LEIS-x, when the cable is charged.
The manual operation shall be subject to the local locking by padlock.

Nevertheless, in order to ensure the safety of the operator, it could be
possible to send a tripping order to the relevant circuit breaker at TRANSCO
side, when putting in manual mode the three-position changeover switch.
2.1.2.2.4 Earthing system
Each isolator shall be equipped with an earthing connecting device, on

upstream and downstream side, to earth the isolated circuit by mean of a
device interconnecting and earthing the three phases.

The line isolators (LIS-x), being equipped with an upstream earthing isolator,
shall have only a downstream earthing connecting device.
2.1.2.3 Current transformer
The current transformers shall be Oil insulated live tank type. That means
core with the secondary winding is housed in the top tank which is LIVE. In
Live Tank the core and secondary winding is insulated against the high
voltage and housed in the top live tank, primary and secondary are enclosed
into a chamber full of Oil to ensure isolation between the both winding and
to reduce the dimension of the active part.
Each incoming section shall be equipped with measuring and protection

current transformer on each phase. Each transformer section shall be
equipped with protecting current transformer on each phase, that is to say
3 current transformers for the auxiliary transformer section and two current
transformers for the traction transformer section.
The coupling section shall be equipped with a set of three protection current
transformers, one on each phase.
2.1.2.4 Voltage transformer
The voltage transformers shall be of capacitive type. Each incoming section

shall be equipped with voltage transformer on each phase. The coupling
section shall be equipped with a set of three voltage transformers on each
half-bus bar.
The high voltage capacitor and intermediate capacitor shall consist of series
connected capacitors. Each element shall be made of high purity cellulose
paper or paper-polypropylene and aluminium sheets or foils forming
electrodes. The oil seal shall be ensured by rubber gasket unaffected by oil
or ambient pollution.
Extension of oil, due to temperature variations, shall be ensured by an

elastic diaphragm also unaffected by oil. Alternatively, stainless steel
bellows are acceptable. The electromagnetic element, MV transformer and
series inductance, shall be located in an hermetically sealed tank filled with
oil.

The electromagnetic part shall be equipped with a protection against over-

voltage and iron resonance phenomenon. The low voltage terminals,
mounted on the tank, shall be made on an insulated epoxy resin containing
the secondary terminals and the fuse-holders. The ground terminals can be
provided outside the secondary terminal box.
Anti-condensation heating arrangement may be provided inside the Low

Voltage terminal box. If anti-condensation heating is not provided, suitable
‘breathers’ have to be provided to remove moisture, if any. The insulator
shall be fastened to the tank by mean of a metal flange, which shall be
bonded to the porcelain.
The insulator leakage path shall be 31 mm/kV. The outer metallic parts,
tank, base, head and flanges, shall not require any maintenance.
2.1.2.5 Outdoor Lightning Arresters
Each phase of the primary side of each transformer and incomer shall be
equipped with polymeric Lightning arrestors as per IEC 60099-4 and IS:
3070 part-3. The Lightning Arrestor should be blast proof. These are made
to protect the transformers against operating over-voltage and, eventually,
against lightning impulses. For this reason they shall be installed
immediately upstream the transformer primary connection. They shall be
zinc-oxide types and they shall contain a single of resistor, which active part
shall be composed of perfectly homogeneous resistors. The polymeric
enclosure shall be with long Creepage distance to ensure good insulation
with a very high level pollution cage or wrap type construction with no gas
volume to ensure that the arrester does not explode during the short circuit
test condition. They shall correspond to the class discharge 4 of the IEC
60099-4. (Minimum discharge capability – 10.8 kJ/kV).
A surge counter shall be SCADA communicable type, which shall be

integrated with DMRC SCADA installed on each lightning arrester to
indicate the number of functioning of each device. They shall also indicate
the value of the leakage current. The Surge Counter shall be electronic type,
compatible with all makes of surge arrestors. The surge arrestors shall not

have any metal oxide blocks which can degrade during usage and add
additional residual voltage.
Surge arrester shall be capable of discharging energy equipment to class 4

of IEC for a 220/132/66 kV system on two successive operations followed
immediately by 50Hz energisation with a sequential voltage profile as
specified in TOV characteristics:-
S. No. Voltage 1 Sec 10 Sec 100 Sec

1 220 kV 234 kV 225 kV 214 kV
2 132 kV 117 kV 113 kV 107 kV
3 66 kV 70.8 kV 68.4 kV 64.8 kV
(Details of sequential voltage profiles are as per IEC)
They shall be well insulated and shall be suitable for outdoor use. All type
tests and routine tests of Lightning Arresters as per relevant IEC standards
as specified in technical specifications shall be carried out if valid report not
available. The type test reports should not be more than 5 years old at the
time of vendor approval.
There shall be provision for testing Lightning arrestor and surge counter
separately to ascertain proper working during service life.
2.1.2.6 Outdoor Bus-Bar
The main bus bars shall be realized with rigid aluminum tubes, with suitable
design, or with higher size to cater the design load of bus bar. Main bus bar
shall be supported on polymeric high post insulator (HPI) as per relevant
IEC. The bus bars and the connection to the apparatuses shall be realized
as strung bus with a double tension adjuster set made of polymeric material.
The strung bus conductor shall be Aluminium tube or higher, as required.
Aluminium Busbar (Hollow Tubular) to which cables (rising from trench) are
connected, should not directly rest on LA so as to avoid damage of LA due
to cable loading.
2.1.2.6.1 Switchyard Hardware (Clamps& Connectors)
Clamps and connectors (For connecting to equipment terminals and

conductors) shall be of aluminum alloy casting type A6 as per IS 617 or
equivalent. In case of copper terminals, the clamps and connectors shall be

of 2mm thick bi-metallic liner/strip. Clamps, connectors and joints shall be

designed for 1.5 times the current carrying capacity of rated equipment/bus
bar current as per latest edition of IS:5561 and other relevant standards.
Contact resistance of each joint shall be as per relevant IS standard.

3 Auxiliary Mains Supply Equipment
Auxiliary Main Substation (AMS) located within the premises of the

Receiving Substation (RSS) performs the task of supplying 33 kV, 3-phase
power supply to the 33 kV distribution network, through appropriate
switchgear and protection arrangements. The AMS mainly comprises of:
 220/132/66 kV / 33 kV Auxiliary Main Transformer,
 33 kV AIS/GIS type switchgear including 33 kV Circuit Breakers, 33

kV busbars, 33 kV potential and current transformers as required,
earth switches, protection relays, meters and all other components
required for satisfactory operation of the switchgear. All Incoming &
outgoing feeders shall be protected with Lightning Arrestors of
suitable ratings along with counter. There shall be provision for
testing of all Lightning arrestors / Surge arrestors and surge counters
provided in AMS system separately to ascertain proper working
during service life.
 33 kV / 415 V, 200 kVA Auxiliary dry type transformers
 415 V AC Distribution Board
 Battery, Battery chargers cum DCDB
 Interface cubicle to act as a link between AMS equipment and

‘GATEWAY’ To SCADA
 Interconnecting power and control cables.
The type of switchgear AIS OR GIS shall be as per details provided in

Pricing documents.
3.1 Auxiliary Main Transformer
3.1.1 Scope
These specifications are applicable to Auxiliary Main Transformer of

3-phase 220/132/66 kV Primary Voltage and 3-phase, 33 kV Secondary
Voltage. Auxiliary Main Transformer shall be designed for outdoor
installation and for operation at frequencies of 50 Hz.

The Auxiliary Main Transformer shall be complete with all Parts, Fittings,
and oil for the first filling, and accessories necessary for its efficient
operation, including mounting frame work of steel. All such Parts, Fittings
and Accessories shall be deemed to be within the scope of this
Specification, whether specifically mentioned or not. The Auxiliary Main
Transformer shall be of proven design.


3.1.2 Governing Specification
The Auxiliary Main Transformers shall comply with the standards of the
International Electro Technical Commission (IEC60076) or equivalent
Indian standards.
3.1.3 Standards
The Auxiliary Main Transformer shall satisfy the requirements given below
and shall also comply with standards in force when they are manufactured,
particularly which are in the following table (unless otherwise stipulated in
the specifications, the latest version of the following standards shall be
applicable): -
S. No. Specification No. Title of Specification

IEC:60076-
1. Power Transformer
1,2,3,4,5 &7
2. IEC : 60214 Tap changer for power transformer
3 IEC 60296 Insulating oil for Transformer
4 IS-335 Insulating oil for Transformer
5 IEC 60028 Conductor for Insulated cable

Insulating Bushing for rated Voltage above

6 IEC 60137
1KV
7 IEC 617-2 Earthing terminal
Specification for painting:- Environmental
8 IEC 60 721-2-5
condition
9 ISO12944-5 Protective Paint system
Synthetic ester Oil (SEO) for Power
10 IEC61099
Transformer
Synthetic ester Oil (SEO) for Power
11 IS16081
Transformer
3.1.4 Characteristics
The Auxiliary power transformers shall meet the following characteristics:
 3-phases type in mineral oil tank,
 Entirely submerged in mineral oil tank,
 Outdoor type, suitable for tropical conditions,
 On load tap changer on primary windings,
 Possibility of various load conditions
 Separate oil conservator
 Cooling by natural or forced air and radiators mounted on

transformer,
 Both transformers in a Substation shall not work permanently in

parallel (only during a transfer without breaking),
 Multiple Transformers shall be exactly similar and replacement for

each other.
 Transformer plus ventilation system noise level should not exceed

70dB, at a distance of 1.5m
 The Vector group shall be: YN yn 0
 Should have thermo symphonic filter
 Oil expansion vessel with Air cell
3.1.5 Rated Power

The transformer shall be manufactured and guaranteed so as to provide a

continuous power rating, measured across the secondary winding at a
voltage of 33 kV under load.
Cooling Rating (MVA)

S.No Name of RSS
System
Madhuban 20
1 ONAN
Chowk
2 RK Ashram ONAN/ONAF 30/45
30
3 Sangam Vihar ONAN
4 Vasant Kunj ONAN 30
The nominal ratings thus defined shall result in temperature rises not
exceeding those stipulated in the standards as specified below.
3.1.6 Overload Capacity
The transformers shall be able to withstand an overload of 25% for duration

of 2 hours, following continuous running at maximum continuous rated load
without exceeding the limits of temperature rise stipulated in the standards
as specified below.
In its bid, the supplier shall indicate the precise overload capacities of the
equipment for 30 minutes, 1 hour, 2 hours and 4 hours rating, on the basis
of the thermal balance resulting from extensive initial operation at load of
1/4, 2/4, 3/4 and 4/4 across the secondary winding.
After overload temperature remaining within the following limits:-
 65°C above ambient temperature for oil.
 75°C above ambient temperature for windings
3.1.7 Rated Voltages
Primary Winding
The primary winding shall be star connected with neutral brought out and
earth connected. The rated voltage shall be 220/132/66 kV at a power
frequency of 50 Hz on the main tapping. Operating voltage may increase to

+ 10% and drop to - 15%. The insulation level of the Auxiliary Main
Transformers shall correspond to the following values:
220/33 kV, 132/33 kV and 66 kV/33kV Transformers
S.
Particulars 220 kV 132 kV 66 kV
No.
Primary winding rated
1 insulation voltage (system 245 kV rms 145 kV rms 72.5 kV rms
highest voltage)
Impulse withstand voltage for 950 kV peak 650 kV peak 325 kV peak
2
primary
Power frequency withstand 395 kV rms 275 kV rms 140 kV rms
3
voltage for primary
Primary Neutral connection
4 145 kV rms 72.5 kV rms 52 kV rms
rated insulation voltage
650 kV 450 kV 250 kV
Impulse withstand voltage for
5 peak peak peak
primary neutral
Power frequency withstand 275 kV rms 185 kV rms 95 kV rms
6
voltage for primary neutral
Secondary winding rated 36 kV 36 kV 36 kV
7
insulation voltage
Impulse withstand voltage for 170 kV 170 kV 170 kV
8
Secondary winding
Power frequency withstand
70 kV 70 kV 70 kV
9 voltage for secondary
winding
1.55 Tesla 1.55 Tesla 1.55 Tesla
10 Maximum flux density
(Wb/m2) (Wb/m2) (Wb/m2)
The primary winding shall be fitted with on-load tap changer on the neutral
end, + 6 x 1.667%, - 9 x 1.667%. The primary neutral point of Auxiliary Main
transformers should be earthed via a suitable capacity & rating of Current
Transformer, isolator and surge arrester.
Secondary Winding
The secondary windings shall be star connected with neutral brought out
and earth connected through NGR. The rated voltage shall be 33 kV rms as
applicable.
The insulation level shall be of a 36 kV rms highest system voltage and the
neutral end shall be fully insulated and earthed through a 20 Ω resistor in
order to limit the current to a maximum of 1000 A admissible into the 33 kV
cable screen as applicable.

The secondary neutral point shall be earthed via a suitable capacity & rating
of Isolator, Current transformers for earth protection and standby earth
protection and surge arrester. The surge arrester shall be located as close
as possible to this terminal. The calculations shall be submitted in the
definition file of transformers at the time of vendor approval.
3.1.8 On-Load Tap Changer
Voltage shall be substantially constant at the untapped windings (secondary

windings) and variable at the tapped winding (primary winding). The
category of regulation applied shall be constant-flux Variable Voltage
regulation (CFVV).
The OLTC shall be fully type tested (type tests reports shall be not be more
than 05 years old at the time of vendor approval or the type tests shall be
conducted at no extra cost to employer.) The on-load tap changer shall be
suitable capacity, design and enclosure type, installed in a separated oil
tank, offering 16 steps (+ 6 step, normal and -9 step), each representing
1.667% of the nominal voltage.
It shall have the following characteristics:
 Enabling 50 000 operations without attention
 Motor and / hand-driven
 Manual, automatic, local remote control & monitoring OLTC from

RSS control room and OCC
 Tap position indicators
 Commutation current compatible with the short duration transformer

over-current.
 Diverter switches shall be designed for high speed operation and

shall be interlocked to ensure that there is no possibility of an
operation stopping in mid-position. Arcing contacts shall be of
tungsten alloy material.
 Positions disabled
 Devices to ease extraction for maintenance purpose.

 Automatic / Manual and Local /Remote selector switch operation,

Control & Monitor of OLTC from RSS control room and OCC
 The oil volume of the on-load tap changer unit must be separated
from the tank for core and winding oil.
 The power circuit of the on-load tap changers shall be connected to

the neutral of the primary windings and shall enable the voltage
variations.
 The full technical description shall be given as regards power and

auxiliary circuits; periodicity for checking and over hauling the power
circuit shall be indicated in the transformer maintenance Manual. The
servomechanism settings shall be designed and executed to avoid
too many actuations
 As the transformer is deemed to run in parallel during power transfer,

OLTC shall be fitted with a servo-mechanism suitable for such a
purpose. The manufacturer shall provide mechanical and electrical
diagrams. A suitable protection relay shall be connected on the oil
pipe between the on-load tap changer and the expansion vessel.
 The voltage ratio shall be checked according to the guaranteed

figures and the tolerances stipulated in the standards.
 OLTC shall Block operation in case any of the pole gets stuck.
 Auto operation of the OLTC shall be blocked in case of transformer

CB is in open condition.
 The operation mechanism of OLTC should ensure simultaneous

operation of all three phases of OLTC and preferably it should have
single transmitting mechanism rod from OLTC motor.
3.1.9 Cooling System
The power transformer shall be designed to operate in ONAN/ONAF mode

(mineral/ester synthetic oil natural / air natural/air forced)

The oil along with inhibitor to be used for the transformer must be in
conformity with the IEC 60296 / IS 12463 standard, and of the highest non-
inflammability degree.
The maximum temperature allowable at nominal rating for each cooling

condition (natural and forced air) shall never exceed:
50°C above ambient temperature for mineral oil
55°C above ambient temperature for the copper winding and the iron core.
Temperature in Transformer shall be measured with OTI and WTI, not by

Fiber based system.
Oil breakdown strength during test should be more than 55 kV / 2.5 mm.
The transformer will be rejected in case the temperature rise exceeds the
guaranteed values by more than five degrees centigrade.
The transformer oil shall comply with the requirements of RDSO viz. IS
12463:1988 with following additional requirements:
Oxidation stability:
 Neutralization value after oxidation -0.2mg KOH/g (max)
 Total sludge after oxidation -0.05% by mass(max)
 Presence of oxidation inhibiter -0.25 to 0.30% by mass
The contractor shall give full description of the design, operation and
maintenance of the proposed air cooling system and indicate the air flows
needed for ventilating the cubicle and the air cooling units:-
 For Natural Ventilation

 For Group-I assisted Ventilation
 For Group-II assisted Ventilation
In case of fire detection into the transformer cubicle, the air cooling system
shall be immediately and automatically switched off.
3.1.10 Short-Circuit Withstand
The transformer shall be designed and constructed so as to withstand

without damage, whatever may result, from an external short-circuit.

The primary winding of the transformer shall be designed for carrying the
full symmetrical short circuit current, for 3 sec. The full symmetrical short
circuit current shall be calculated in accordance with IEC after taking into
account the system impedance on the primary voltage of the transformer.
The design of the primary side bushings of the Transformers shall withstand
the symmetrical current for three seconds during short-circuit on primary
voltage, as specified in IEC 60076-5.
To limit the short-circuit symmetrical current to an allowable value, the

impedance voltage shall never be less than twelve percent (12%). At rated
power and frequency on the main tapping, the impedance voltage shall be
equal to about twelve point five percent (12.5%) inclusive of tolerance as
per IEC 60076-1.
3.1.11 Iron Core
The magnetic core, frame assembly, clamping and general structure of the
transformer shall be mechanically sturdy so as to be capable of withstanding
shocks which may happen during transport or during short-circuit and over-
voltage times.
Cores and magnetic circuit shall consist of cold-rolled grain-oriented silicon

steel sheets. They shall offer guarantee of durability in time, heat resistance
and oil resistance. The tightening bolts shall be suitably insulated and the
ground of the magnetic circuit shall employ generously sized copper
connections and links.
The keying and compression of the laminations, together with the induction
value, shall be designed so as to keep vibrations to a minimum and to
reduce, in particular, the third and fifth harmonics influences. Calculation
sheets to establish maximum flux density (i.e. 1.55 Tesla) shall also be
submitted with Design to employer. The contractor shall submit complete
technical data of the system to the employer. During testing, noise shall be
measured according to the standard and the guaranteed minimum noise
level shall be as low as possible for transformer of this power.
3.1.12 Transformer Losses

The transformers shall be designed for minimum losses. When comparing

between different tenders the present value of the capitalized cost of losses
in the transformers shall be added to their financial bid by the following
formula
PW = K*365*24* C (Wir + b² Wcu)/1000
Where
 PW is the present worth (in IR) of annual capitalized cost of losses

at 8% rate of interest over 25 years
 K is the present worth factor (8% interest, 25 years) = {(1+0.08)25 –

1}/{0.08*(1+0.08)25} = 10.675
 C is the cost of the kWh (in Indian Rupees) = Rs. 7.52
 Wir is the iron losses in Watts at normal voltage and main tapping
 Wcu is the full load copper losses in Watts at normal voltage and
main tapping at 95°C
 b is the load factor of transformer = 50 %
Thus PW = 10.675*365*24* 7.52 (Wir + b² Wcu)/1000
In case the transformer losses during tests are found greater than the values
guaranteed in the offer, a consolidated penalty shall be paid by the
contractor, according to the following formula (for the tolerance permissible
according to IEC standard):
10.675*365*24* C * (d Wir + 0.25 * d Wcu )
Where,
- d Wir and d Wcu are the differences between the test values of iron losses
at full voltage and copper loses at full load on one transformer at main
tapping and the values guaranteed in the offer.
3.1.13 Windings
The winding conductors shall be made of best quality high conductivity

electrolytic copper, in compliance with the standard (IEC 60028)
requirements. The both windings, primary and secondary, shall be designed
to withstand over-voltage and over-current in case of direct short-circuit

across the medium voltage terminals with the primary winding line for three
seconds.
The adjustment windings shall be designed specifically to withstand direct

short-circuit of all part of the adjustment turns that may occur at the contact
plates of the on-load tap changer switches. The winding, connections and
terminal links shall be properly brazed so as to withstand the shocks and
vibrations which may occur during transport or short-circuit time. Testing of
samples must be carried out and submitted for approval during in-plant
inspection before starting assembly of the transformer windings.
Current density for each winding should be not more than 2.5 A/mm². The
insulation material used for the transformer windings and connections shall
be of class A. Calculations for selecting the insulation class shall be
submitted for approval, however, in no case the insulation class shall be
lower than class A.
3.1.14 Terminals and Connections
The primary and secondary connections shall be realized through

porcelain/polymeric bushings insulators as applicable. The porcelain shall
be brown glazed. It shall be unaffected by atmospheric conditions like
fumes, ozone acids, alkaline, dust, sand storms or rapid change in
temperature between 0°C and 75°C under working conditions and the
prevailing environmental conditions/changes in Delhi.
In order to avoid damages to tank in case of disruptive discharge, bushing

base should be connected to the earth. Creepage distance for one bushing
should be 31 mm/kV. Bushings shall be realized in conformity with the IEC
137 standard. Special care shall be taken against transmission of vibrations
by employing a damping system and suitable fittings.
The design shall take into account the ease of overhaul. It should be
possible to withdraw and to remove the transformer at ease.
Interchangeability between transformers shall be achieved through the use
of identical elements. The link between secondary terminals of the
transformer and the switchgear shall be made by cables connected directly
at the outside of the secondary bushing. Bushings shall be realized in

conformity with the IEC 137 standard. The bushings shall be fully type tested
within last 05 years as per relevant IEC at the time of approval or the type
tests shall be conducted at no extra cost to employer.
Calculations for wind load, cantilever load etc. shall be submitted at the time
of vendor approval
NOTE:- Employer may go for primary and secondary connections through

Dry type plug- in termination on the transformer as applicable. The vendor
may quote the price separately in the addition/deletion items given in the
BOQ for the change in the transformer tank design suitable for this type
arrangement and cost of dry type plug-in termination in-place of bushing
mentioned above.
3.1.15 Tank
The transformer tank shall be made of high quality boilerplate steel as per
IS2002 with stiffening frame and girders. The width of the welding sections
shall be sized so as to permit three dismantling operations by grinding
before having to completely reform them.
The thickness of the tank should not be less than 10 mm. and the tank
should withstand full vacuum. The contractor shall provide all necessary
guides for mounting and removing of the tank.
Tank shall only be connected to the earth through core type current
transformer. In case of separated radiators, they shall be earthed and
consequently pipes network shall be mounted with insulating joints.
The tank, valves, joints and gaskets shall be air-tight, water-tight and oil-
tight. The junction shall be capable of withstanding the temperature of a fire
without causing any major leak as per IEC 60076 standards. For this
purpose, the flanges connecting the tank to the pipe-work and the flanges
between parts of the pipe-work shall be designed with particular care.
The tank shall be reinforced in order to render it capable of withstanding the

pressure caused by the various mineral oil treatments. The tank shall be
fitted with hooking points to enable it being lifted in balance by means of an
overhead travelling crane, as the main package on a road trailer or in form
of the complete unit, fully equipped and filled with mineral oil.

The tank shall be secured to a frame equipped with bi-directional and

removable rollers made of cast iron and fitted with locking devices. The
frame shall enable the transformer being laid normally on a slab or
foundation block, without rollers.
The tank shall be equipped with the following auxiliary devices:
 manholes on the tank cover, if necessary,

 flanged oil drainage valves,
 oil sampling cocks at top and bottom of the tank,
 flanged valves suitable to connect the oil filtering unit,
 special pockets for checking by thermometers,
 earthing terminals and also provision of CFT (Core, Frame & tank)
terminal.
Transformers shall be fitted with over-pressure relief device provided with

electrical contacts. Name plate to be provided with all technical particulars
3.1.16 Oil Expansion Vessel
The transformer shall be equipped with an oil expansion air-cell vessel

placed above the transformer. The oil expansion vessel shall be partitioned
so as to avoid mixing between the on-load tap changer oil and the core and
winding oil.
It shall be connected to the transformer through all the necessary pipe-

works, fitted with flexible metal joints and gaskets; the connecting pipe shall
over-extend vertically inside the vessel (at least 8 cm)
The various drainage valves, oil sampling devices and relief valve shall be
provided and easy to reach for each partitioned volume. The Self
dehydrating breather with Silica gel or equivalent fitting and checking glass
shall be accessible easily to change the dehydrating product during
operation of the transformer.
The oil level indicator with auxiliary contacts shall be easily observable from
ground level.
The oil volume should not reach:
 the minimum level by 0°C (Ambient temp.)

 the maximum level by 50°C (Ambient temp.)

3.1.17 Control and Protection
The transformer shall be delivered with "buccholz", thermal and earth fault
protections, all connected to the control and monitoring cabinet.
Buccholz: The term "buccholz" protection denotes the gas-sampling device

and relay for gas fault detection and storage for analysis. The relay shall
comprise two thresholds as follow:
 alarm in case of minor fault such as local overheating of windings or

core (small gas discharge),
 tripping-out in case of major fault (violent gas discharge) or
important oil leakage.
Both transformer and on load-tap changer oil circuits shall be equipped with
"buccholz" protection. They shall be connected to the oil pipe between the
tank and the expansion vessel, without any flat part and any less than 50mm
band.
It shall be free for access and maintenance; a by-pass system shall be

provided to enable oil flow without interrupting operation during
maintenance checks. In order to ease gases chemical analysis, the gas-
sampling device shall be accessible during transformer operation, at man
level.
Thermostat: The thermostat itself shall be installed in the monitoring box,

while the indicator on its facade and the thermal probe shall be installed into
the tank with appropriate pocket.
Tank Earth fault: The insulated tank shall only be connected to the earth
through a Resin cast core type current transformer as per GTP, which shall
be linked to the control system via monitoring cabinet terminal block. The
Transformer tank including all marshalling box/ Kiosk, NIFPS Connecting
pipes & support of Cable must provide insulation with respect to earth for
proper functioning of tank earth fault.
3.1.18 Control and Monitoring Cabinets

Made of stainless steel-sheets, grade-AISI 316 (2% Mb) totally enclosed,

dust-proof and waterproof type (IP55) suitable for outdoor applications it
shall be equipped with:
a) For transformer
 Access doors with padlocks
 415 /240 V protection and power circuits.
 110 V DC control and monitoring relays
 Internal lighting monitored by the door position.
 Heating thermostat with indicators and contacts
 Information terminal block
 Remote control and monitoring multi-pin connector
 Cooler Control system as per following modes:-
 Auto/Manual
 Local Remote
 Fan Control
b) For On-load tap changer

 110 V DC or 415 V AC (3ph) / 220 V AC (1ph) control and monitoring
relays
 On-load tap changer operating equipment and control
 Counter
 OLTC tap position should operate based on voltage level of primary
side voltage of Transformer. This provision shall be provided with
PLC based logic and PLC should be installed in the RTCC indoor
Panel and should have adjustable time & dead band on voltage
settings for OLTC tap operation feature.
 Alternatively, Diverter switch with multi ratio PT arrangement may be
used for OLTC operation on primary voltage sensing.

 RTCC panel should have TPI (tap position indicator) & Remote, Auto
and Manual Operation of OLTC.
 Control of Auto / Manual and Local/Remote selector switch shall also
be possible from OCC /Local SCADA.
 Trip indication of Fan to be provided
All control and monitoring cabinets used in indoor shall conform to the
following minimum specifications
Material Steel
Minimum : 3mm for front cover & base frame
thickness of Steel 2 mm for rear door
sheets 1.6 mm for roof plate, bottom plate & side covers
Powder Coating :
Exterior RAL 7032, Texture finish
Interior : RAL 7032, Texture finish
Base frame Black
Thickness : Min. 80 microns of Powder coating
The Contractor shall submit to the Employer, the complete details of the
Control & Monitoring Cabinets, including details of the structure, process of
finish and painting, wiring, terminal blocks, cubicle illumination heating etc,
for Employer’s approval.
The details adopted for Control and Relay panels, Bay Control and
Protection units, Transformer and On-load tap changer cubicles and all
other Control and Monitoring Cabinets, located inside the RSS Control
Room shall be identical to project an aesthetically good appearance
3.1.19 Metal Work and Paint-Work
Painting should be suitable for salty seaside atmosphere and has to comply
with IEC 60 721-2-5 standard. The entire surface (Internal as well as
External) to be painted shall be prepared by Shot blasting to cleanliness
level, SA21/2 as per ISO 8501/SIS 055900. Ensure that the cleaned surface
is free of oil or grease, scales rust and other residue. Surface profile of the
blasted surface should be approximately 40-60 microns.
All the external surface of the transformer shall be given first coat of Epoxy
zinc rich (having minimum 83% metallic zinc) primer (Min.50 microns
thickness), first intermediate coat of epoxy zinc phosphate paint (Min.60
microns thickness), intermediate coat of Epoxy high build MIO (Min.80

microns thickness), and final coat of glossy Aliphatic Acrylic polyurethane

(Min.50 microns thickness). The total dry film thickness (DFT) of the paints
shall be minimum 240 microns and should withstand 120°C. The shade of
paint shall be gray shade 631 as per IS: 5.
All steel surfaces which are in contact with insulating oil shall be painted
with heat resistant oil- insoluble insulating varnish. After baring, all metal
surfaces shall receive anti-corrosion process (as per IEC 60721-2-5
standard):
 Natural stainless for Bolts & screws

 Hot dip galvanization for radiators
 Rust-proofing and anti-corrosion paint for tank, oil expansion vessel
and other metal surfaces
The transformer and its accessories shall be completely painted in plant.
The necessary touch-ups shall be executed on-site after erection. This
protection shall be fully guaranteed for five years starting from provisional
taking over. Should any noticeable deterioration by rust or corrosion appear
before this time elapses, the contractor should be responsible for repainting
at his own expense and for renewing his guarantee for the work performed.
The painting and preserving of panels for transformer protection should be

similar match with that of other control and relay panels provided in the
control room.
3.1.20 Particular Dispositions, Installation
Transport
For transport either by road, ship or rail, the transformer shall be filled with
oil up to windings top and then with Nitrogen at recommended pressure up
to the tank top or alternatively, the transformer may be filled with Nitrogen,
in full, during transportation. The Impact Recorder shall be mounted on
every power transformer (on returnable basis). The result of the impact
recorder shall be shared by the contractor with Employer.
The bushing, breather, wheels and all other external parts shall be removed
on condition that they can be mounted at site.
Installation

The transformers are to be installed at the RSS-cum-AMS on two running

rails, and consequently must be delivered with a set of swiveling rollers.
These rollers shall be mounted electrically insulated from tank and with
locking devices. The Insulation Resistance (IR) values of power
Transformer shall be measured before unloading and after placement on
rails. IR value between core clamps and core laminations, core to earth and
clamp to earth shall be particularly required.
Material layout and volume shall permit an easy access to every part of the
equipment, in particular those requiring maintenance. The contractor shall
indicate the method of handling all the parts from the main access of the
RSS.
3.1.21 Grounding of Power Transformer Neutrals
Primary Voltage Neutral
The high voltage neutral shall be solidly earthed through an isolator whose
open or closed position shall be according to the general operating condition
of the distribution network. Switches shall be of single phase, air insulated
and manually controlled.
Their insulation level shall be suitable as per primary voltage of transformer.

The actuation level shall be at man height level. Locks and keys shall be
provided to achieve the safety interlocking conditions. Flexible braids to a
copper bar insulated shall connect the primary neutral terminal and whose
cross-section shall enable the current flowing to earth in case of failure. This
link shall be fitted with a Oil type current transformer and a surge arrester,
situated as close as possible to the neutral terminal.
The neutral earthing support structure should be protected on all sides by

GI mesh supported suitably on GI support structures. If earthing is done by
suitable insulation level cable then fencing is not required.
Secondary Voltage Neutral
Grounding of each neutral of the secondary windings of the power

transformers shall be made through a resistor and an Isolator. Temperature
rise according to the duty class shall be reduced to the minimum possible
and never exceed the values stipulated by the IEC standards.

Neutral Grounding resistor (NGR) shall be installed next to the transformer

and shall be surrounded by a frame to avoid any access when the
transformer is working. The frame door shall be interlocked according to this
condition.
The NGR body shall be painted with three coats of non-metallic paint of the
same quality, description and method as that used for outdoor transformers,
total thickness should not be less than 240 µm and should withstand 120
°C.
The contractor shall be responsible for the following, for each of these
resistors:
 installation and securing,

 connection from the resistor input terminal to the neutral terminal of
the transformer via suitable size of a copper cable with suitable
insulation fixed on wood clamping blocks and with a cross-section
suited to the operating rating of the resistor.
 setting and erection of a single-phase, manually controlled, air
insulted, isolator provided to isolate the resistor from the transformer
side
 connection from the resistor output terminal to the underground
earthing circuit of the station via copper bus-bar.
 Erection and connection of various current transformers
 installation and connection of a current transformer after the output
terminal of the resistor.
 grounding of the various main metal sections
 surge arrester situated as close as possible to the transformer neutral
terminal.
The isolator shall be of single phase, air-insulated and manually controlled.
Isolators, surge arresters and current transformers shall be installed on a
portal located respectively over the neutral resistors. Thermostat and space
heater shall also be provided
3.1.22 Fire Protection and Suppression System
In terms of CEA (safety regulations), 2010 “transformers of 10 MVA and

above rating or in case of oil filled transformers with oil-capacity of more

than 2000 litters are provided with firefighting system as per IS - 3034: 1993
or with Nitrogen Injection Fire Protection system”;
In view of above, transformer shall be provided with “Nitrogen Injection Fire

Protection System”. The specifications of “Nitrogen Fire Protection System”
are detailed as below:-
Nitrogen injection fire protection system designed for oil filled transformers
shall prevent tank explosion and the fire during internal faults resulting in an
arc, where tank explosion will normally take few seconds after arc
generation and also extinguish the external oil, fires on transformer top
cover due to tank explosion and/or external failures like, bushing fires, OLTC
fires and fire from surrounding equipment.
The system shall work on the principle of DRAIN AND STIR and on
activation: it shall drain a predetermined quantity of oil from the tank top
through outlet valve to reduce the tank pressure and inject nitrogen gas at
high pressure from the lower side of the tank through inlet valves to create
stirring action and reduce the temperature of top oil surface below flash point
to extinguish the fire.
Conservator tank oil shall be isolated during bushing bursting, tank

explosion and oil fire to prevent aggravation of fire.
Transformer isolation shall be an essential pre-condition for activating the

system. The system shall be designed to operate automatically. However it
shall be designed for manual operation, in case of failure of power supply.
The system shall consist of following equipment:
 Fire extinguishing cubicle placed on a plinth at about 5-10 meter

away from the transformer.
 Control box placed in the control room.
 Pre- stressed non return valve in the conservator pipe.
 Required number of fire detectors on the tank top cover.
 Signal box fitted on the tank top or tank side wall
3.1.22.1 Scope

The scope of this specification covers design, engineering, supply, testing

at works before dispatch, erection, testing and commissioning and
performance demonstration of "fire protection and extinguishing system by
“Nitrogen injection method". The necessary civil work which will be required
for construction of oil soak - pit for the storage of oil coming out from the
transformer and plinth for extinguishing cubicle is in the scope of the
contractor, laying of oil pipe, nitrogen pipe, electrical cables, control boxes,
extinguishing cubicle, nitrogen cylinder, PRY, fire detectors and other
equipment & accessories required for erection, testing, commissioning and
performance demonstration of the complete fire protection system is in the
scope of the contractor. It will be the responsibility of the contractor to
ensure coordination between transformer manufacturer and the supplier of
the Fire Protection System for all the arrangements for the complete
erection, testing, commissioning and performance tests.
Notwithstanding the technical specifications and requirements mentioned

herewith any modification can be incorporated for correct operation of
nitrogen injection fire protection system without extra cost. The full details
of the same are required to be submitted to DMRC for approval.
3.1.22.2 Operational Controls
The system shall be provided with automatic control for fire prevention and
fire extinction. Besides automatic control remote electrical push button
control on control box and local manual control in the fire extinguishing
cubicle shall be provided. Spare interlocks are to be provided for ensuring
that it should not be possible to close HV or LV circuit breakers to energize
the transformer after the activation of the fire prevention and, fire extinction
system.
3.1.22.3 System Activating Signals
Transformer isolation shall be an essential pre-condition for activating the

system. Transformer isolation through Master trip relay or circuit breaker
(HV and LV side in series) has to be incorporated. Besides, two electrical
signals to be provided in series, for activating the system as under:
For Prevention:

 Differential relay,
 Buchholz relay paralleled with pressure relief valve
For Extinction:
 Fire detector.
 Buchholz relay paralleled with pressure relief valve
3.1.22.4 System Equipment
a. Fire Extinguishing Cubicles (FEC), placed on plinth at about

minimum 5 meter away from the transformer shall consist of:
 Nitrogen Gas cylinder with regulator and failing pressure

electrical contact manometer.
 Oil drain pipe with mechanical quick drain valve.
 Electro mechanical control equipment for oil drain and pre
determined regulated nitrogen release.
 Pressure monitoring switch for backup protection for nitrogen
release.
 Limit switches for monitoring of the system.
 Flanges on top panel for connecting oil drain and nitrogen
injection pipes for transformer.
 Panel lighting
 Oil drain pipe extension of suitable sizes for connecting pipes
to oil pit.
a. Control box with activating, monitoring devices and line faults
indicators. (To be placed in control room). It should have audio visual
alarm indication and push button switches.
b. Pre-stressed Non Return Valve (PNRV) to be fitted in the conservator

pipe line, between conservator and buccholz relay operating
mechanically on transformer oil flow rate with electrical signals for
monitoring.
c. Fire detectors to be fixed on transformer tank up cover and On Load

tap Changer for sensing fire.
d. Signal box to be fixed on transformer side wall for terminating cable

connections from fire detectors and PNRV

e. All other consumables necessary for complete system.
3.1.22.5 Other Requirements for System Installations
a. Oil drain and Nitrogen openings with gate valves on transformer tank
at suitable locations.
b. Flanges with dummy pipes in conservator pipe between Buccholz

relay and conservator tank for fixing PNRV.
c. Fire detector brackets on transformer top cover.
d. Spare potential free contacts for system activating signals i.e

differential relay, buccholz relay, pressure relief valve, transformer
isolation (master trip relay).
e. Status of Fire Protection System Operated, NIFPS out of service,

PNRV/TCIV valve close, Fire detector initaion alarm/trip, Nitrogen
cylinder pressure low, Visual/Audio Alarm for NIFPS system and
Visual/Audio Alarm of NIFPS for DC supply fail shall be available on
the Local/OCC SCADA.
f. Pipe connections between transformer to fire extinguishing cubicles

and fire extinguishing cubicle to oil pit.
g. Cabling on transformer top cover all fire detector to be connected in

parallel and inter cabling between signal box to control box and
control box to fire extinguishing cubicle.
h. Plinth for fire extinguishing cubicle. Oil pit with suitable capacity.
3.1.22.6 Technical Details
Fire extinction period
 On commencement of Nitrogen injection : Maximum 30 seconds

 On system activation up-to post cooling: Maximum 3 minutes
 Fire detectors heat sensing temperature: 141 deg celcius
 Heat sensing areas 800 mm radius
 Pre-stressed non-return valve setting for operation: Minimum 60 ltr
per minute
 Power Source:

o Control Box: 110 V DC

o Fire fighting cubicles for lighting: 240 V AC
3.1.22.7 Cabling:
Fire survival cables, able to withstand 750 deg celcius, 4 core * 1.5 mm sq
for connection of fire detector in parallel shall be used. The test certificates
for the cables shall be submitted.
Fire retardant low smoke (FRLS) cable 12 core * 1.5 mm sq. for connection
between transformer signal box/marshalling kiosks box to control box and
control box to fire extinguishing cubicle shall be used.
Fire retardant low smoke (FRLS) cable 4 core * 1.5 mm sq. for connection
between control box to DC supply source and fire extinguishing cubicle to
AC supply source, signal box/marshalling box to pre-stressed non return
valve connection on transformer shall be used.
3.1.22.8 Previous Experience for Qualifying Supplier:
The supplier shall have a minimum experience of two years in the design,
manufacturing, erection, testing and commissioning of nitrogen injection fire
protection system on power transformers of similar or higher rating. At least
2 sets of the system shall be in successful operation for a minimum period
of the 2 years. The supplier shall furnish the details of nitrogen injection fire
protection system supplied by them so far, giving order reference, name and
address of the customer, indicating the dates of commissioning as well as
performance certificate of successful and satisfactory operation for
minimum two years from the customers.
3.1.22.9 Tests
Type Test
Type Test reports including that for detectors along with declared response
time shall be submitted with the Vendor / technical proposal. The system
shall be tested by reputed international testing body or a national testing
body (BIS) recognized laboratory). TAC approval, if any, shall be submitted
with the tender.
Factory Test

Tests will be carried out on individual equipment of the system and the total
system in the supplier’s workshop in presence of purchaser’s
representatives.
Performance Test
Performance test of the complete system shall be carried out after complete
erection at site by the supplier’s representatives. These tests shall include
simulation and verification of the response of the complete system without
actual draining of the oil and injection of the nitrogen gas.
In addition to above, additional tests as required necessary shall be

conducted.
3.1.22.10 Drawings and Manuals
Detailed layout drawings along with the equipment drawing to be given in

the proposal along with the complete bill of materials. After awarding of
contract, detailed dimensional drawing of the system complete bill of
materials including location and size of plinth for cubicles and recommended
capacity of oil soak-pit shall be submitted for purchaser’s approval. After
approval 4 (four) sets of all above drawings and 4 (sets) sets of operation
and maintenance instruction manual (bound) shall be submitted for
purchaser’s use.
3.1.22.11 Spares
One full set of spares nitrogen gas filled cylinder, 50 % of the installed no.
of fire detectors (heat sensing element) shall be provided in addition to
additional other recommended spares. The list of recommended spares is
to be submitted along with the proposal of vendor approval.
3.1.22.12 Test Sheet and GTP
All type tests and routine tests of Transformer, ON load tap Changer and
Bushings as per relevant IEC standards specified in technical specifications
shall be carried out. Short circuit withstand test shall be conducted on one
each type and rating of transformer to validate the design and quality unless
such test has been conducted within last five years on the transformer of
same design. In case there is change in design before five years, the new

transformer design shall be validated by carrying out short circuit withstand

test. All the type test report shall be valid at the time of vendor approval.
The contractor shall submit fully filled technical data sheet given in chapter
8B of PS along with other relevant data during technical approval.
3.1.23 Ester Oil Filled Transformers
If the employer requires ester oil filled transformer, the contractor shall
submit detailed design of the transformer along with relevant extracts of
applicable International/Indian standards. Any savings in size due to ester
oil shall be clearly specified. The contractor shall submit the credentials to
assist proven- ness of the design. Transformer shall be designed with
thermally upgraded papers and OLTC other accessories shall be designed
with high temperature rises, so as to minimize the size of the transformers.
The adjustment price of transformer with synthetic ester oil is to be quoted
in pricing/BOQ document.
3.2 33 kV Gas Insulated Switchgear (GIS)
These specifications are applicable to 33 kV Gas Insulated Switchgear

(GIS) at various Receiving substations, for Power supply distribution
Network. For detailed specifications and scope of work refer Annexure-11.
The 33 KV Gas Insulated Switchgear (GIS) Shall be with 5 Years warranty,

i.e. 3 years extended warranty beyond 2 Years Contractual DLP.



3.3 33 kV Air Insulated Switchgear (AIS)
This 33kV equipment shall include one Auxiliary 33kV cable bridge metal-
clad type cubicles
This bridge shall be divided into two half bridges, each one comprising of
the following:
 1 Auxiliary Bridge Circuit Breaker (LBCB) cubicle,

 1 Auxiliary 33 kV cable Circuit Breaker (RCCB) cubicles
 1 Low voltage Auxiliary Transformer Circuit Breaker (LVATCB)
cubicle
 1 spare circuit-breaker (LFCB) cubicles
 2 Circuit-breaker for Reactive power compensation device.
 Auxiliary circuit breaker for RSS located in/near depot.
 Additional Circuit breaker for interconnection with New / existing line
if required as per BOQ.
All 33 kV circuit breaker shall be provided with one set of 3 phase 33 kV
voltage transformer on cable side and Suitable capacity of Surge Arrester
shall be installed between Phase to Ground with surge Counter & Earthed
properly.
These two half bridges shall be linked through
 1 Coupling Circuit Breaker (LBCCB) cubicle

 1 bus riser cubicle if required
A circuit breaker complying with all necessary safety conditions and
interlocks shall be capable of being mounted inside each circuit-breaker
cubicle.
All Switchgear panels shall be fully type tested in accordance with the latest
IEC standard. In case type test reports are not available at the time of vendor
approval same shall be conducted at third party accredited lab as per latest
standard by the contractor at no additional cost to DMRC.




3.3.1 Switch gear cubicles
3.3.1.1 General data
All circuit breaker cubicles shall be of the same type. All non-welded
assemblies shall be assembled by means of bolts and nuts with mandatory
use of lock-washers. All panels, separating partitions and accessories shall
be mounted similarly, in such a way so as to withstand indefinitely the
vibrations transmitted, in particular by the resetting mechanism of the circuit-
breakers and their actuation.
3.3.1.2 Electrical characteristics
The service voltage is 33 kV. The insulation level is 36 kV minimum

Compliant to latest IEC. All parts of the cubicle (bus-bars, sliding connector,
partition passages) shall be capable of permanently withstanding the
temperature rise caused by the currents and shall match the nominal rating
of the circuit-breaker provided.
The cubicles shall be capable of withstanding without any damage the loads
generated by 1500 MVA peak short-circuits. The number and frequency of
those are not limited in time.
3.3.1.3 Cubicles common part
It must be of metal-clad switchgear type, closed by a door forming the

facade, equipped with riveted marking plates and single-wire diagram also
fitted with the display lamps indicating the presence of 33 kV voltage.
3.3.1.4 Make-up / construction feature
Each cubicle will be metal clad type, air insulated, made of:
 Bar set compartment

 Cable end compartment

 Low voltage (measure, protection & monitoring) compartment
 Apparatus connector compartment with shutter
 Withdrawal trolleys
 Metal clad envelope with appropriate hanging devices
Compartments will be physically separated from each other by metal
partitions, which shall not heat up due to induced magnetic fields action.
All panels, separating partitions and accessories shall be mounted similarly,

in such a way so as to withstand indefinitely the vibrations transmitted, in
particular by the resetting mechanism of the circuit-breakers and their
actuation
All non-welded assemblies shall be assembled by means of bolts and nuts

with mandatory use of lock-washers.
Internal and external metal partitions are connected to the earth, high
voltage electrical links are realized with bushing Auxiliary voltage shall be
110 Vdc +10, -20 % for motors, monitoring and control circuits, Note that all
parts of the cubicle (bus-bars, sliding connector, partition passages) shall
be capable of permanently withstanding the temperature rise caused by the
currents and shall match the nominal rating of the apparatus. All panels shall
be Internal Arc tested for full fault current as per AFLR for 1 Second.
The cubicles shall be protected against fire by means of an ‘automatic fire

detector and extinguisher system’, ‘Firetrace’ type or equivalent, complete
As per detailed specification given in Annexure-6 the contractor shall submit
the complete technical data of the system to the Employer, for approval.
3.3.1.5 Equipment
Cubicles will mainly be equipped with:
3.3.1.5.1 Trolley receptacle compartment:
 Fixed earthing plug-in contact
 a shutter automatically protecting live pieces when the apparatus is

plugged-out
 grounding of the frame of the trolley

 a safety interlocking access to the fixed insertion connectors if the

circuit-breaker is not in the cubicle or if it is in the withdraw position.
 a precise device for displaying the end of insertion travel with limit
switch
 a fixed plug-in socket enabling the flexible connection to be made for

control and monitoring of the circuit-breaker
 the interlocking corresponding to the function of the cubicle
 a general connecting terminal for low voltage circuits of the cubicle.

The terminals shall be tightened by screws; no other connecting
device shall be used
 an annunciation device for 33 kV voltage on, by mean of a capacitive

divider with neon lamps (one per phase), glowing permanently in live
conditions.
3.3.1.5.2 Bar set compartment:
 33 kV, 2000A bar set mounted on insulators, suited to withstand 1500

MVA peak short-circuit.
 Inter-cubicles high-voltage connectors.
In principle, the bus bar shall be of copper and shall be a rectangular

cross-section. Alternatively hollow tubular busbars are acceptable, provided
they meet the current requirement of 2000A.
3.3.1.5.3 Cable end compartment:
 One or two sets of three current transformers for protection and

measurement.
 Three display LED lamps for voltage on fed by capacitive dividers,

annunciation lamps being installed on the front face of the cubicle.
 End-boxes for 33kV three-phase cables of dry type aluminium or

copper of appropriate cross-section, this box shall be supplied
complete with all the necessary materials for installing the cable and
completely making the end connection.

 The connection braids between the two sets of bus bar, the current
transformers and the cable end-box., with sufficient gap so that when
the braids are removed, the output terminals from the cable box be
sufficiently distant from any earth, thus enabling the high voltage
cable to undergo dielectric tests or any fault finding to be carried out
by applying high voltage.
 a cable head earthing isolator with full making capacity, actuated

manually, complete with the necessary interlock. Positions of the
earthing isolator shall be visible through a glazed port.
 Voltage transformers (for all CB cubicles only).
 Surge arresters & Earthed Properly.
This compartment height shall be at least 800mm to ease cable connection

and be equipped with an external cable support device. All CB panels shall
have integral earth switch with full making capacity for cable side earthing.
3.3.1.5.4 Low voltage compartment:
 Voltage presence capacitor dividers, relay Master Trip Relay (MTR)

with reset through SCADA and facade indicator light.
 Open/closed and connect/disconnect position indicator lights and

contacts.
 Digital type Facade measurement indicators (counter, Ammeter &

Voltmeter when required)
 Facade mimic visual diagram
 Control and monitoring devices for the CB (programmable logic

control )
 Control and monitoring, multi pin connector.
 Lockable access door
 Local /remote switch.
 TNC switch for local operation in which close function shall

active in local mode and inactive in remote mode. Trip function
remains active in all modes.

3.3.1.5.5 Withdrawal Trolley:
 Self contained trolley fitted with rollers allowing 3 positions :
- Plugged-in
- Plugged-out (test position)
- out of the cubicle
 The Apparatus (see « Circuit breaker » herein below)
 an apron panel of sheeting, on the front face, carrying the control

button and the open and closed position annunciation via mechanical
display,
 a low voltage connector for all the control and annunciation (flexible
multiple in connectors to the corresponding receptacle on the
cubicle) with a device for securing the plug when handling the circuit-
breaker,
 a grounding contact connecting the frame circuit of the circuit-breaker

to the cubicle grounding bus-bar,
 all the interlocking mechanisms,
 a plugging actuator if necessary,
 a manual actuating auxiliary system, provided with an interlocking

device to avoid electrical control in this case,
 auxiliary annunciation contacts displaying whether the circuit-breaker

is in open or closed position, connected to the terminal board of the
low voltage circuits. Spare open and closed contacts shall be
available in addition to those used for low voltage control and
monitoring circuits.
 an operating counter.
The actuating system shall be of energy accumulation type, with low

transient current consumption when arming the circuit breaker. It shall be
equipped with an anti-hunting device. Rack in/rack out of withdrawal
trolly shall be smooth and easy without any removable tray.

3.3.1.5.6 Cubicles arrangement
All cubicles, boxes or sheaths must be rigidly fastened to the floor. Cubicle
level adjustment can be realized with special steel sections initially anchored
in position. The assembly level thus executed shall enable smooth pulling
of the trolleys in the cubicles.
3.3.1.5.7 Cubicles grounding
Each cubicle shall comprise a Copper bus-bar of suitable cross-section to

which each of the metal masses of the component parts of the cubicle shall
be connected, together with those of the instrument transformers.
The grounding bus-bars of the various cubicles shall form a linkage

interconnected together and a common single collector line shall be
provided for connecting it to the earthing circuit of the station.
The withdrawal trolley will be connected to this grounding bus-bar via a plug-
in/out contact. The cable end manual earthing isolator position shall be
visible, through a glazed port.
3.3.1.5.8 Paint-work
Painting should be suitable for polluted atmosphere and has to comply with
IEC 60721-2-5 standard
After baring of all metal surfaces, an initial coat of rust-proofing and anti-
corrosion paint will be applied; then they will be covered with two coats of
paint and one finishing coat, colour to be defined.
3.3.1.5.9 Protection level
Cubicle enclosures and medium voltage sheaths shall provide an ingress

protection level, IP -3X minimum and shall be vermin proof.
3.3.1.5.10 Identification
The front of each cubicle shall carry a nameplate indicating its identification
number and function. The text and type of nameplate shall be defined later.
o Apparatuses
o Circuit breakers

3.3.1.5.11 Make-up & equipment
Each Circuit Breaker will be three pole type and Vacuum type and will
include :
 Up & down stream plug-in connectors
 Life insulated poles
 Energy accumulation type actuation system (electromechanical

springs)
 Electric and manual arming capability (Tripping and closing coils

motor...)
 Under-voltage tripping coil (Auxiliary voltage off)
 Locking and interlocking devices
 Open / Closed auxiliary contacts
 Low voltage multi-pin connector and flexible cable
3.3.1.5.12 Self-Interlock requirements
Circuit-breaker can be plugged-in or out only if tripped-out. All access to the

fixed plug-in parts is prevented when the circuit breaker is withdrawn. The
interlock shall fulfill the following conditions:
 When unplugged and withdrawn from the cubicle, the circuit breaker
shall inhibit opening of the flaps covering the receptacles and shall
enable the key to be turned.
 By turning the lock and withdrawing the key, it shall not be possible
to plug-in the circuit breaker.
 In addition for the outgoing 33 kV cable cubicles, it shall be possible

to actuate the earth isolator only after first unplugging the circuit
breaker and withdrawing the first key.
 Conversely, the earth isolator being closed, it shall not be possible to

unlock the cubicle in order to plug a circuit breaker in.
 The type of lock shall be selected among equipment considered as

being safety equipment.

 A general diagram of the key interlocks for the station, indicating all
the locks provided for the present equipment shall be prepared.
 Mechanical interlock to be provided to prevent movement of breaker

from service to isolated position OR vice versa in closed position
and if attempted, shall open the breaker.
NOTE: It shall invariably be possible to padlock the interlocks.
3.3.1.6 Current transformers
Each Current transformer will be installed in the cable end compartment

between the downstream pole and the cable connector and at least one in
current Transformer in busbar compartment.
Cable end compartment volume will allow current transformer easy access
and removal.
Current transformers shall be cast resin type. Current transformer

performances shall be as per technical sheets included into the relevant
Chapter.
3.3.1.7 Voltage transformers
Each Voltage transformer shall be installed in the cable end compartment,

connected between the downstream pole and the cable connector through
HRC fuses. Cable end compartment volume will allow voltage transformer
easy access and removal.
Voltage transformers shall be cast resin type. Voltage transformer

performances shall be as per technical sheets included in the relevant
Chapter.
3.3.1.8 Motion and plug-in mode Special devices
All complete sets of plug-in accessories shall be provided for each type of
circuit-breaker, together with four sets of auxiliary plug-in actuating devices,
where the circuit-breaker has such devices.
In addition two hoisting devices (pulley fastened to the ceiling or any other
solution) shall be provided if necessary for the storage position and the
maintenance depot.

3.3.2 33 kV / 415 V, 3 Phase Dry Type Auxiliary Transformers
The Auxiliary Transformers, also referred to as Auxiliary Station

Transformers of 3-phase, 33kV/415V, 200 kVA are required as per detailed
specification attached at annexure-5 of Particular specification to supply the
power requirement at 415 / 230 V of various electrical equipment, systems
and appliances in the RSS. Mainly these comprise of power required for
lighting, fans, air-conditioning, control and monitoring circuits, battery
chargers, space heaters in the switchgear / panels etc. Suitable capacity of
RC Snubber circuit and/or Surge Arrester shall be installed between Phase
to Ground and between phases with Surge Counter having SCADA
communicability on IEC 61850 Ed-2 protocol & Earthed properly as per
specifications.
The 33 kV / 415 V, 3 Phase Dry Type Auxiliary Transformers Shall be with

5 Years warranty, i.e. 3 years extended warranty beyond 2 Years
Contractual DLP. Transformer shall be provided with Condensed aerosol
fire suppression system, the contractor is required to submit detailed
proposal for the same before implementation.


3.3.3 Low Voltage Distribution Board (ACDB)
As per latest relevant standards (IEC 61439), this shall be “Design verified
assembly”
3.3.3.1 General

Both the auxiliary transformers, with a unit power of 200 kVA are intended
to supply the auxiliaries needed for operation of RSS, TSS and AMS
equipment, as well as for the supply of the Auxiliary installation of these
equipment. The low voltage AC Distribution Board has 2 incoming feeders
from the 33 kV / 415 V Auxiliary Transformers, together with a Coupling
Circuit Breaker. There are several 415 V or 240 V outgoing feeders for
feeding the power required for lighting, fans, air conditioning, control and
monitoring of switchgear etc in the RSS-cum-AMS-cum-TSS.
The Detailed specifications for the Board refer Annexure 2.


3.3.4 110 V DC Power Supply System
3.3.4.1 General
The 110V DC Power Supply system, including Battery chargers, Battery

banks etc shall cater for the entire DC power requirement of all equipment
in the RSS-cum-AMS-cum-TSS complex.
3.3.4.1.1 Design Principles
The fundamental demand on a DC system is that it must be robust, simple

and clearly arranged. The DC system shall be based on the following
principles:
 High selectivity
 Main distribution board located adjacent to the battery room
 No common main fuse for battery

 An installation, which is free from the risk of, short-circuits between

the battery and the main distribution board.
 Fully compartmentalized between all battery charger and distribution

board
 DC type MCBs to be used for DC circuits.
The DC system shall be earthed across a high resistance resistor, so that

simple earth fault shall not cause tripping of the system. The DC system
shall be designed to allow unloading tests, boost charging and maintenance
of each to be carried out during normal operation; this implies that provision
shall be made for isolating the battery and the associated rectifier from the
load.
Since the entire system cannot be designed so that short-circuit shall never
occur, it must be provided with circuit protection, these shall provide
absolute and safe selectivity, so that tripping is confined to the minimum.
Only rapid protection characteristic may be used.
3.3.4.1.2 System Description
The control and monitoring circuits shall be supplied with 110 V DC via two
battery charger (FCBC-1 & FCBC-2). FCBC-1 shall feed 110V dc to Battery
bank-1 & DCDB-1 and FCBC-1 shall feed 110V dc to Battery bank -2 and
DCDB-2 in normal condition. In case of failure of one set, automatic
changeover to the other set shall enable backing-up of the supply of the
circuits normally supplied by the faulty one.
For each one of the both 110 V DC supply set, an automatic and manual
change-over system from one source to the other shall be provided and
operate as follows:
Automatic Mode:
When a circuit breaker trips by lack/absence of voltage, the system switches

automatically to the other source, if this one is under voltage, by closing the
coupling circuit breaker.
When the voltage comes back to the normal source then after a delay (delay
is to ensure that the voltage has well come back) the system switches back

automatically to the normal source by closing, first, the normal circuit-

breaker, then by opening the coupling circuit-breaker. The parallel between
the both sources shall be as short as possible.
Manual Mode Without break: In this mode it shall be necessary to choose

between which apparatuses the transfer shall be made:
 First source and coupling
 Second source and coupling
It shall never be possible to make a transfer directly between the first and
the second sources. The transfer shall be obtained by closing the circuit
breaker which shall remain closed at the end of the operation. The opening
of the other one shall be obtained automatically. The parallel between the
both sources shall be as short as possible, but enough to ensure a good
transfer.
The equipment supplied shall be highly safe and reliable; it shall be

described in detail when submitting the relevant drawings (equipment
characteristics, layout plan, protections, monitoring) and it shall be
guaranteed to eliminate all risks of incidents which may occur during the
change-over operation from one source to the other.
The batteries shall be of insulated pole type and wired in floating voltage
mode. In normal situation and for each normal battery-charger set, the
charger shall supply the control and monitoring circuits and shall deliver the
battery trickle charge. In case of fade-out of the AC voltage, the battery shall
immediately and without break replace the charger to ensure permanent
power supply of the circuits and controls.
The entire 110 VDC distribution and the batteries shall be isolated from the
earth; satisfactorily. The overall condition of this isolation shall be monitored
permanently by a specific and highly reliable device. Each battery shall also
ensure DC power supply to safety lighting i.e. DC operated emergency
lighting upon fade-out of AC power supply sources.
3.3.4.2 Equipment Specification

The following 110 V DC source equipment shall be provided in the auxiliary

room and in the battery rooms of the substation.
3.3.4.2.1 Battery
Each battery shall be of stationary compact, Nickel-Cadmium type. They

shall be maintenance free. The capacity of the battery shall be decided by
the Contractor taking into account the permitted voltage tolerance of the
individual loads, the power consumption of various loads, as per
temperature range from -0.6⁰C to 50⁰C and the length of time they are in
operation and the manner in which they draw power.
The precise capacity of each battery bank shall be determined to ensure

total autonomy of the station for 8 hours as required to retain the power
supply of the standby lighting and of the control/monitoring auxiliaries in
case of total failure of the AC sources. The AC load of SAS equipment like
server, gateways, printers and other accessories shall be supplied through
the suitable capacity of 2 Nos. of ON-Line inverter. Inverter will take DC
supply from these two battery sets. Capacity of this load shall also be
considered in the battery capacity.
The battery protection shall be as close as possible to the battery and shall
be contained in separate enclosure for negative and positive pole
respectively. The enclosure shall be made of insulating material. The
connection between the battery and its protection shall consist of single
conductor and shall be run in such a manner so that they are protected from
physical damage.
Each battery half shall be connected through its own battery distribution
board to the main board, and each battery half section shall have its own
supervisory equipment to indicate and alarm for the maximum and minimum
voltage levels on float-charge and earth fault.
The contractor shall submit performance certificate for last five years along
with the Vendor proposal.
.Suitable care must be taken that vent plugs are sturdy and reliable, and this
shall be checked during Factory acceptance test



3.3.4.2.2 Battery Charger cum 110 V DC Distribution Board
The Battery Charger cum 110 V DC Distribution Board shall be Float cum
Boost type suitable for charging Ni-Cd cells, fully compartmentalized with
metal sheet and duly certified, accepted by the battery manufacturer. Both
the chargers shall be housed in separate enclosure.
AC Power Supply:
 Voltage: 230V/415V  10%
 Frequency: 50 Hz  3%
 Maximum short-circuit current: 4000 A rms.
 Recharge to 80% of the battery capacity: 8 hours
DC Output:
 Power supply voltage: suitable for a battery of 110 V
 Operating period after AC supply failure: 8 hours
 Constant power drain: shall be decided by the Contractor, to deliver

the full duty. The minimum capacity of the Battery shall not be less
than 300AH.
3.3.4.2.3 Charger:
The charger shall comprise of an inlet transformer and Thyristor or IGBT

bridge. All electronic components & cards shall be of Industrial grade
(Temperature range - 85 deg.C) and PCB should have conformal coating
suitable for pollution level specified in the GS of contract for Delhi. The

contractor shall submit test certificate for the same along with the Vendor
proposal.
The regulation system shall consist of plug-in modules fitted with

polarization devices. The charger shall include the following monitoring and
measuring devices:
 Maximum and minimum DC voltages (threshold values to be defined)
 Charger shut-down due to an internal fault.
 General alarm for remote monitoring
The charger shall include the following control devices:
 Input MCB of D curve type.
 a main On/Off switch,
 a normal/boost selector switch,
 a control deliberate discharge.
The AC and DC terminal strips shall be separated from each other. Each
battery charger shall be:
 designed to ensure operation according to the battery ratings as

described below,
 installed in a sheet cabinet with feet, closed by panels.
 Ventilation shall be natural.
(i) Characteristics
Major characteristics are described in the annexed technical sheet. The

chargers shall be thyristors / IGBT regulated type. If the charger is Thyristor
type, the number of pulse shall be 12 and wired as Graetz Bridge.
(ii) Operating and Floating Rates
The voltage at the charger current output terminals shall be automatically

kept within +1% for variations of +10% / -15% of the AC voltage and of +5%
of the frequency, whatever may be the output required.
The residual ripple ratio shall be as low as possible (less than 1%) so as not
to disturb the various operating circuits.

(iii) Equalization Charge Operation
This charge shall be able to take place up to the floating voltage within +1%
under the same conditions as above.
Automatic change-over from floating to equalization charge and conversely

Following any failure of more than five minutes of the AC supply network,
the charger shall automatically revert to the charge position right upon return
of the voltage and shall remain on this position throughout the time set by
an adjustable timer (from 1 hour to 20 hours). After this time, the charger
shall return to floating operation. The charger shall remain in floating
operation if the network failure is shorter than five minutes.
(iv) Direct Operation
The charger shall be capable of operating directly, without the battery, under
the same conditions of accuracy as for the floating and charge modes.
(v) Manually Controlled Operation
Operation in manual control shall be possible, i.e. it shall be possible to

execute manual adjustment of the voltage in case of malfunction of the
regulator.
(vi) Alarms
The status of all battery chargers shall be indicated at the AMS, as well as
at the OCC (through SCADA), as per the following convention:
Green – Healthy and in-service, Clean Agent based Indirect Fire Suppression
System: Red – Defective.
The change of status from “Healthy” to “Defective” shall be accompanied by

an audible alarm/hooter, both at the control room of RSS and in the OCC.
However, if the AMS is unmanned, it shall be possible to annul the audible
alarm function at the unmanned RSS.
(vii) Protections and Monitoring
The charger shall be fitted with the following protections installed at its rear:

 A device limiting the current output by the rectifier to its rated current
value with sufficient capabilities of adjustment and possible pick-up
of the set point value
 switching diodes,
 breakers with fuse elements for overall protection on the transformer

primary,
 breakers with fuse elements in series with each rectifier component

(thyristors / IGBT).
 breakers for the various auxiliary circuits,
 an on/off switch controlling a three pole make-break switch with

magneto-thermal protection on the AC circuit and a two pole make-
break switch with magneto-thermal protection on the DC circuit.
 the specific protection to ensure satisfactory operation and protection

of the set.
 Automatic Battery discharging:- Charger shall be programmable from

30 days to 180 days in advance and for discharging time from 30
Minutes to 24 Hrs. to set the automatic discharge of the battery bank.
 All I/O signals for the Battery charger shall be integrated with SAS /
SCADA through RS 485 to avoid spurious tripping, Contractor shall
submit detailed proposal during design stage.
(viii) Miscellaneous
The battery charger equipment shall also include:
 a signalling light denoting the opening of the make-break switch on

the AC side, controlled by the tripping of one of the Miniature Circuit
Breaker protecting the various circuits of the apparatuses,
 a signalling light denoting the opening of the make-break switch on

the DC side through actuation of the magneto-thermal relay,
 a digital voltmeter indicating the voltage on the AC side
 a digital voltmeter indicating the voltage on the DC side

 A digital ammeters which shall indicate whether the battery is under

charge or the battery is only delivering the load.
 the position of the various circuit-breakers and of the protection and

fault relays shall be monitored through two flip-flop stages.
 An inspection light shall be fixed inside the charger compartment,

which will automatically come “on” when the charger compartment is
opened for inspection. This shall be independent of the “on/off”
position of battery charger and shall be operative when the 415 V
supply is available to the charger.
 All light and indications lamps shall be of LED type only
(ix) Tests
Battery Charger shall be fully type tested as per test given in appendix-5 of
the General specification and IEC60571 and shall be done in accordance to
IEC 60068.
(x) Training
The nominated Employer Staff / engineer shall be trained to carry out in

house repair and maintenance of complete battery charger including PCB’s,
Programming, downloading of data (if applicable), associated software and
its operation as applicable. The contractor shall submit detailed training
program for approval of employer.
(xi) Warranty
The Battery Charger Shall be with 5 Years warranty, i.e. 3 years extended
warranty beyond 2 Years Contractual DLP.
(xii) Support during Installation, Testing and Commissioning by OEM




3.3.4.2.4 110 V DC Distribution Board
a) Description
Distribution of the 110 V DC sources shall be gathered inside two specific

cabinets, one for each half station, called DC auxiliary.
These cabinets shall be compartment type equipped with doors, fitted with
flexible seals, close via lock-bars and on which shall be installed a mimic
diagram with signalling lights denoting the position of the main apparatuses.
All control and protection including Under voltage relay of DCDB shall be
realised with 110V DC control supply only.
The contractor shall submit details of vendors for all “brought out” items
along with the vendor proposal for approval of employer.
b) Equipment
Each cabinet shall include the following (list not restrictive):
 Isolating switch
 Master power supply circuit breakers
 Non return diodes and set of normal/stand by supply bars
 The current and voltage protection relays
 The isolation monitoring
 Operation of Low Voltage Distribution Board shall be realized by

putting the system in Auto mode or Manual mode. Selection of Auto
or Manual mode shall be possible through local/OCC SCADA.
Similarly, selection of Local or remote mode shall also be possible
through Local/OCC SCADA.
 The coupling circuit-breaker for the both 110 V DC sources
c) Outgoing Feeders

The outputs, protected by circuit-breaker, whose rating shall be selected

according to the power of the installation services, corresponding to the
distribution circuits intended to supply notably:
 the control, monitoring and protection devices
 the power transformer tap changers monitoring
 the auxiliaries of the fire protection installations
 the safety lighting installations
 the output circuit breaker as spare
 The signalling lights
 An interlocking device prohibiting paralleling
 The position limit switches of the main apparatuses
Provision of the signalling shall be made at the level of these cabinets of the
auxiliaries section.
d) Training
The nominated Employer Staff / engineer shall be trained to carry out in

house repair and maintenance of complete DCDB panel. The detailed
Operation and maintenance manual and training program shall be
submitted for approval of employer.
e) Support during Installation, Testing and Commissioning by OEM


3.3.5 Cable Path

At the Auxiliary Main Substations, the auxiliary network shall be equipped

with the following cable path:
 between incoming circuit breakers and the corresponding main

220/132/66 kV / 33 kV transformer.
 below 33 kV cubicles connecting compartment
 between outgoing cubicles and the viaduct
 between the auxiliary transformer circuit-breaker cells and the

corresponding auxiliary transformer
 between the auxiliary transformer and the corresponding 415 V

incoming CB board
 From the low voltage board to the various electrical ancillary devices
The position and alignments of cable paths shall firstly be such as to

facilitate pulling, laying and securing of the cables and, secondly, shall not
hinder access to the bus-bar box-section. Cable paths shall be linked to a
ground collector.
3.3.6 Accessory Boards
An Accessory Board, containing all accessories required in an MV/ LV

equipment room, shall be provided at a conspicuous place in the AMS
Room. The Accessory Board which may be in the form of lockable
cupboard, shall essentially contain, but not limited to
 Insulating pole
 Gloves
 Electrician standard tool box, complete with all types of pliers,

spanners, screw drivers, insulation tapes, testers, knife and test
lamp.
 Mechanical tool box essentially containing torque wrenches,

spanners, screw drivers, rachets, hammers, lock and key sets.
 Hand-held torches.
3.3.7 Clean Agent based Indirect Fire Suppression System:

AC distribution board (ACDB) shall be protected against fire by means of an

‘Automatic Fire Detector and Extinguisher System’, ‘Fire trace’ type or
equivalent, complete with clean agent based fire suppression system, as
per detailed specification attached at annexure-6.
3.3.8 Safety Equipment
The following Safety Equipment shall essentially be provided and kept at

suitable places in the RSS.
 Fire buckets filled with clean dry stand and ready for immediate use
 Fire extinguishers suitable for dealing with electric fires.
 First aid boxes
 At least 3 gas masks
 Instructions, in Hindi and English, for restoration of persons suffering

from electric shock
 An artificial respirator in all HT substations.
 Discharge Rods 6 Nos for 220/132/66 kV, 6 Nos for 33 kV, 6 Nos for
25 kV.
 Insulated gloves
 Insulating stools
 Protecting glasses
 Body lifting pole
 Single pole voltage detection pole
 Movable earthing and short circuit equipment
 Insulated cable cutting pliers
 Notice about care to electrified peoples
 Salt to avoid kidney blocking

4 Traction Supply Equipment
4.1 Description
Traction Substation (TSS) located by the side of the Receiving Substation,

performs the task of supplying the 25 kV Single Phase power to the traction
overhead equipment through appropriate switchgear and protection
arrangements. The TSS mainly comprises of:-
 Traction Transformer
 25 kV, GIS SF6 indoor/AIS outdoor type for incoming, outgoing and
bus coupler as per data sheet and specification mentioned
elsewhere.
 Instrument transformers, as necessary for protection and

measurement. All Incoming & outgoing feeders shall be protected
with Lightning Arrestors of suitable ratings.
 Protection relays, measurement meters and associated devices, as

necessary
 All interconnecting power cables
 Return cable connection between the traction transformer secondary

earthed terminals, to the return current earthing arrangement in
stainless steel boxes as per drawing and specifications. Provision of
CTs along with meters for monitoring of return current also required.
The return current monitoring shall also be available in SAS.
 All control and monitoring cables for necessary connection of

equipment
 Control and relay panels and other associated equipment to make

the traction substation fully fit to perform its task.
Traction Substation Drawings
The Single Line Diagram of the Traction Substations is shown in the

drawings enclosed in Volume 5 of tender documents.
Performance Specifications

The Performance Specifications of various equipment are described in the

succeeding paragraphs.
4.2 Traction Transformer
4.2.1 SCOPE
These specifications are applicable to Traction Transformer of 2-phase

220/132/66 kV primary voltage and 1-phase, 27.5 kV secondary voltages.
Traction Transformer shall be designed for outdoor installation and for
operation at frequencies of 50 Hz.
The Traction Transformer shall be complete with all Parts, Fittings, and oil
for the first filling, and accessories necessary for its efficient operation,
including mounting frame work of steel. All such Parts, Fittings and
Accessories shall be deemed to be within the scope of this Specification,
whether specifically mentioned or not. The Traction Transformer shall be of
proven design.


4.2.2 Governing Specification& Standards
The Traction Transformers shall comply with the standards of the

International Electro Technical Commission (IEC60076) or equivalent
Indian standards.
The Traction Transformer shall satisfy the requirements given below and
shall also comply with standards in force when they are manufactured,
particularly which are in the following table. (Unless otherwise stipulated in

the specifications, the latest version of the following standards shall be

applicable): -

1. IEC:60076-1,2,3,4,5 &7 Power Transformer
2. IEC : 60214 Tap changer for power transformer
3 IEC 60296 Insulating oil for Transformer
IS 12463:1988 along with
Insulating oil for Transformer (revise for
3A additional requirements
Ester Oil)
of RDSO
Synthetic Ester Oil (SEO) for power
3B IEC 61099
transformers
Synthetic Ester Oil (SEO) for power
3C IS16081
transformers
4 IS335 Insulating oil for Transformer
5 IEC 60028 Conductor for Insulated cable
Insulating Bushing for rated Voltage
6 IEC 60137
above 1KV
7 IEC 617-2 Earthing terminal
Specification for painting:-
8 IEC 60 721-2-5
Environmental condition
9 ISO12944-5 Protective Paint system
4.2.3 Characteristics:-
The Traction Transformers at TSS shall meet the following characteristics:
 2-phase Primary winding of 220/132/66 kV
 1-phase secondary winding of 27.5 kV
 Entirely submerged in mineral oil tank
 Outdoor type, suitable for tropical conditions, satisfying the climatic

conditions of Delhi.
 On load tap changer on primary windings
 Possibility of various overload conditions
 Separated oil conservator
 Cooling by natural oil circulation and banks of radiators mounted on

the tank
 Both transformers shall be identical

 Transformer noise level should not exceed 75dB measured at a

distance of 1.5m
 The Vector group shall be I.i.
 Should have Thermo Symphonic Filter.
 The two transformers at any Traction Substation are not meant to

work in parallel.
 Oil Expansion Vessel with Air cell.
4.2.4 Rated Power
The 66 / 27.5kV transformers shall be manufactured and guaranteed so as

to perform satisfactorily with a power rating, measured across the secondary
winding, of the following value under load with cooling system in operation
(ONAN mode).
Rating
S.No Name of RSS Cooling System
(MVA)
1 Madhuban Chowk ONAN 30
2 RK Ashram ONAN 40
30
3 Sangam Vihar ONAN
4 VasantKunj ONAN 30
4.2.5 Overload Capacity
After constant operation at continuous full load, the transformer shall have
a guaranteed minimum overload capacity of:
 50% for a duration of 15 minutes,
 100% for a duration of 5 minutes,
After overload the temperature rise shall not be more than:
 65°C above ambient temperature for oil.
 75°C above ambient temperature for windings
4.2.6 Rated Voltages

The primary winding voltage shall be 220/132/66 kV, as applicable at a

power frequency of 50 Hz, on the main tapping.
Operating voltage may increase to + 10% or drop to -15% for the traction
transformers. The primary winding shall be fitted with on-load tap changer
offering 16 steps ensuring the primary voltage compensation from -15% to
+10% of primary voltage. The secondary winding voltage shall be 27.5 kV
at a power frequency of 50 Hz, one end being connected to the rails and the
earth.
4.2.7 On-Load Tap Changer
Voltage shall be substantially constant at the untapped windings (secondary

windings) and variable at the tapped winding (primary winding). The
category of regulation applied shall be constant-flux variable voltage type
(CFVV)
The on-load tap changer shall be single-phase enclosure type, installed in

a separate oil tank, offering 16 steps (+6step, normal and -9step), each
representing 1.667% of the nominal voltage. The tap changer shall have the
following characteristics:
 50 000 operations without any attention
 Motor and hand-driven possibility
 Tap position indicators
 Commutation current compatible with the short duration transformer

over-current.
 Diverter switches shall be designed for high speed operation and

shall be interlocked to ensure that there is no possibility of an
operation stopping in mid-position. Arcing contacts shall be of
tungsten alloy material.
 Devices for ease of extraction for maintenance purpose
 Manual/Automatic, Local/Remote, Control & Monitor of OLTC from RSS

control room and OCC.
 OLTC shall Block operation in case any of the pole gets stuck.

 Auto operation of the OLTC shall be block in case of transformer CB is in

open condition.
The oil volume of the on-load tap changer unit must be separated from the
tank for core and winding oil. The power circuit of the on-load tap changers
shall be connected to the primary windings and shall enable the required
voltage variations as mentioned in the annexed technical sheet.
The full technical description shall be given as regards power and auxiliary
circuits; periodicity for checking and over hauling the power circuit shall be
indicated in the transformer maintenance Manual. The servomechanism
settings shall be designed and executed to avoid too many actuations.
The manufacturer shall provide mechanical and electrical diagrams. A

suitable protection relay shall be connected on the oil pipe between the on-
load tap changer and the expansion vessel. The voltage ratio shall be
checked according to the guaranteed figures and the tolerances stipulated
in the standards.
4.2.8 Cooling System
The Traction Transformer shall be designed to operate in ONAN/ONAF

mode (Oil Natural Air natural / Oil Natural Air Forced). The oil along with
inhibitor to be used for the transformer must be in conformity with the IEC
296 standard, or IS 335 (with latest amendments) and of the highest
inflammability degree. Spare oil for at least 10% of each transformer shall
be provided.
The maximum temperature allowable at nominal rating shall never exceed:
 50°C above ambient temperature for mineral oil
 55°C above ambient temperature for the copper winding and the iron
core.
Temperature in Transformer shall be measured with OTI and WTI, not by

Fiber based system.
Dielectric strength of the oil during test should be more than 55 kV /2.5 mm;
the contractor shall mention the method and the referenced standard

employed. The transformer shall be rejected in case the temperature rise

exceeds the guaranteed values by more than five degrees centigrade’ s.
The contractor shall give full description of the design, operation and
maintenance of the proposed air cooling system for ONAN/ONAF mode and
indicate the air flows needed for ventilating the cubicle and the air cooling
units:-
For Natural Ventilation
For Group-I assisted Ventilation
For Group-II assisted Ventilation
In case of fire detection into the transformer cubicle, the air cooling system
shall be immediately and automatically switched off
4.2.9 Short-Circuit Withstand Capability
Short-Circuit On HV Side
The transformer shall be designed and constructed so as to withstand

without damage, or impairment in its performances, any external short-
circuit. The primary winding of the transformer shall be designed for carrying
the full symmetrical short circuit current, for 3 sec. The full symmetrical short
circuit current shall be calculated in accordance with IEC after taking into
account the system impedance on the primary voltage of the transformer.
The design of the primary side bushings of the Transformers shall withstand
the symmetrical current for three seconds during short-circuit on primary
voltage as specified in IEC 60076-5.
To limit the short-circuit symmetrical current to an allowable value; the

impedance voltage shall never be less than twelve percent (12%). At rated
power and frequency on the main tapping, the impedance voltage shall be
equal to about twelve point five percent (12.5%).
Short-Circuit On LV Side
The maximum short circuit current at the output of feeder station has to be
limited at 16 kA to comply with the rolling stock on board circuit breakers

breaking capacity, (compared to distribution network) only limited by the

internal transformer leakage impedance.
Consequently transformers must be designed taking into account this

current short circuit limit, as well as electrodynamics and thermal
constraints. The contractor shall specify a guaranteed value and tolerances
according to the standards and requirements.
4.2.10 Iron Core
The magnetic core, frame assembly, clamping and general structure of the
transformer shall be mechanically sturdy so as to be capable of withstanding
shocks which may happen during transport or during short-circuits and over-
voltages.
Cores and magnetic circuit shall consist of cold-rolled grain-oriented silicon

steel sheets of the best quality, offering every guarantee of durability, heat
and oil resistance. The core tightening bolts shall be suitably insulated and
the grounding of the magnetic circuit shall employ generously sized copper
connections and links.
The keying and compression of the laminations, together with the induction
value, shall be designed so as to keep vibrations to a minimum and to
reduce, in particular, the third and fifth harmonics influences.
Calculation sheets to establish maximum flux density (i.e. 1.55 Tesla) shall
also be submitted with Design to employer. The contractor shall submit
complete technical data of the system to the employer.
4.2.11 Transformer Losses

between different tenders the present value of the capitalized cost of losses
in the transformers shall be added to their financial bid by the following
formula
PW = K*365*24* C (Wir + b² Wcu)/1000

Where
 PW is the present worth (in IR) of annual capitalized cost of losses at

8% rate of interest over 25 years

 K is the present worth factor (8% interest, 25 years) = {(1+0.08)25 –

1}/{0.08*(1+0.08)25} = 10.675
 C is the cost of the kWh (in Indian Rupees) = Rs. 7.50
 Wir is the iron losses in Watts at normal voltage and main tapping
 Wcu is the full load copper losses in Watts at normal voltage and
main tapping at 95°C
 b is the load factor of transformer = 50 %
Thus PW = 10.675*365*24* 7.52 (Wir + b² Wcu)/1000
guaranteed in the offer, a consolidated penalty shall be paid by the
contractor, according to the following formula (for the tolerance permissible
according to IEC standard):
10.675*365*24* 7.52 (Wir + b² Wcu)/1000
Where:
 d Wir and d Wcu are the differences between the test values of iron
losses at full voltage and copper loses at full load on one transformer
at main tapping and the values guaranteed in the offer.
4.2.12 Windings
The winding conductors shall be made of best quality high conductivity

electrolytic copper, in compliance with the standard (IEC 60028)
requirements. Both windings, primary and secondary, shall be designed to
withstand over-voltages and over-currents in case of direct short-circuit
across the medium voltage terminals with the primary winding line for three
seconds. Construction shall take into account electrodynamics and thermal
constraints specific to railway traction duty.
The adjustment windings shall be designed specifically to withstand direct

short-circuit of all part of the adjustment turns that may occur at the contact
plates of the on-load tap changer. The windings, connections and terminal
links shall be properly brazed so as to withstand the shocks and vibrations
that may occur during transport or short-circuit.

Tests on samples shall be carried out and results submitted for approval
before starting assembly of the transformer windings. Current density for
each winding shall be not more than 2.5 A/mm². The insulation material
used for the transformer windings and connections shall be of class A.
4.2.13 Terminals and Connections
The primary and secondary connections shall be realized through

porcelain/polymeric bushings insulators as applicable. The porcelain shall
be brown glazed. It shall be unaffected by atmospheric conditions like
fumes, ozone acids, alkaline, dust, sand storms or rapid change in
temperature between 0°C and 75°C under working conditions and the
prevailing environmental conditions/changes in Delhi.
In order to avoid damages to tank in case of disruptive discharge, bushing

base should be connected to the earth. Creepage distance for one bushing
should be 31 mm/kV. Bushings shall be realized in conformity with the IEC
137 standard.
Special care shall be taken against transmission of vibrations by employing

a damping system and suitable fittings. The design shall take into account
the ease of overhaul. It should be possible to withdraw and to remove the
transformer at ease. Interchangeability between transformers shall be
achieved through the use of identical elements.
The link between secondary terminals of the transformer and the 25 kV

switchgear shall be made by cables connected directly at the outside of the
secondary bushing. Bushings shall be realized in conformity with the IEC
137 standard.
NOTE:- Employer may go for primary and secondary connections through

Dry plug type termination on the transformer as applicable. The vendor may
quote the price separately in the addition/deletion items given in the BOQ
for the change in the transformer tank design suitable for this type
arrangement and cost of dry plug type termination in-place of porcelain
bushing mentioned above.
4.2.14 Tank and Radiators

The transformer tank shall be made of high quality boiler plate steel as per
IS2002 with stiffening frame and girders. The thickness of sections shall be
suitably sized so that it is possible to dismantle by grinding and re-do
welding at least three times, before it becomes necessary to condemn the
sections and refabricate.
The thickness of the tank should not be less than 10 mm, with reinforcement
in order to withstand full vacuum, and mineral oil pressure. Tank shall only
be connected to the earth through current transformer (Core type). In case
of separated radiators, they shall be earthed separately and consequently
pipes network shall be mounted with insulating joints.
The tank itself, the pipe work, valves, joints and gaskets shall be airtight,
watertight and oil-tight. The junction shall be capable of withstanding the
temperature of a fire without causing any leak as per IEC 60076 standards.
The tank shall be fitted with hooking points to enable it being lifted in balance
by means of an overhead travelling crane, either as the main package or in
form of the complete unit, fully equipped and filled with mineral oil.
The frame shall enable the transformer being laid normally on a slab or
foundation block, without rollers. Each dismountable tank and radiators
element shall be equipped with the following auxiliary devices:
 flanged oil drainage valves,
 oil sampling cocks at top and bottom of the tank,
 flanged valves suitable to connect the oil filtering unit,
 hooking points
and overall shall be equipped with:
 special pockets for checking by thermometers,
 earthing terminals according to IEC 617-2 standard
 Frame to ease the transportation
 Swiveling removable rollers with locking devices.
 overpressure relief device provided with electrical contacts

 manholes on the tank cover so as to obtain access to the core

winding assembly, tap changer mechanism, terminal , the lower ends
of all bushings etc. for purpose of repair without lifting the core
winding assembly
Name plate to be provided with all technical particulars.
4.2.15 Oil Expansion Vessel
The transformer shall be equipped with an oil expansion air cell vessel
placed above the transformer on a specific support. It shall be partitioned so
as to avoid mixing between the on-load tap changer oil and the core and
winding oil.
Each partition shall:
 be connected to the transformer through all the necessary pipe-

works, fitted with flexible metal joints and gaskets; the connecting
pipe shall over-extend vertically inside the vessel (at least 8 cm)
 be provided with, easy to reach, drainage valves, oil sampling

devices and relief valve.
 be equipped with a self-dehydrating breather filled with “Silica gel” or

equivalent, permitting easy maintenance during transformer normal
operation.
 be provided with an oil level indicator having auxiliary contacts and

easily observable from ground level.
 The oil volume should be above the minimum level, when the
ambient temperature is 0°C or below. Similarly the oil volume should
be below the maximum level when the ambient temperature is 55°C
or above
4.2.16 Control and Protection
The transformer shall be delivered with "buchholz", thermal and earth fault
protections, all connected to the control and monitoring cabinet

Buchholz: The term "buchholz" protection denotes the gas-sampling

device and relay for gas fault detection and storage for analysis. The relay
shall comprise of two thresholds as follow:
 alarm in case of minor fault such as local overheating of windings or

core (small gas discharge),
 tripping-out in case of major fault (violent gas discharge) and

excessive oil leakage.
Both transformer and load-tap changer oil circuits shall be equipped with
"buchholz" protection. They shall be connected to the oil pipe between the
tank and the expansion vessel, without any flat part and any less than 50
mm bend.
It shall be free for access and maintenance; a by-pass system shall be

provided to enable oil flow without interrupting operation during
maintenance checks. In order to ease gases chemical analysis, the gas-
sampling device shall be accessible during transformer operation, at man’s
working level.
Thermostat: The thermostat itself shall be installed in the monitoring box,

while the indicator on it facade and the thermal probe shall be installed into
the tank with appropriate pocket.
Earth fault: The insulated tank shall only be connected to the earth through
a resin cast core/ring type current transformer as per GTP, which shall be
linked to the control system via monitoring cabinet terminal block.
4.2.17 Control and Monitoring Cabinets
Made of stainless steel-sheets, grade-AISI 316 (2% of Mb) totally enclosed

dust-proof and watertight type (IP55) suitable for outdoor applications it shall
be equipped with:
(a) For transformer
 110 V dc control and monitoring relays

 Heating thermostat. with indicators and contacts
 Cooler Control system as per following modes:-
 Auto/Manual
 Local Remote
 Fan Control
(b) For On-load tap changer
 110 V DC or 415 V AC (3 ph) or 220 V AC (1ph) motor, control and

monitoring relays
 On-load tap changer operating equipment and control
 Counter
 OLTC tap position should operate based on voltage level of primary

side voltage of Transformer. This provision shall be provided with
PLC based logic and PLC should be installed in the RTCC indoor
Panel and should have adjustable time & voltage settings for OLTC
tap operation feature.
 Alternatively, Diverter switch with multi ratio PT arrangement may be

used for OLTC operation on primary voltage sensing.
 RTCC panel should have TPI (tap position indicator) & Remote, Auto
and Manual Operation of OLTC.

 Control of Auto / Manual and Local/Remote selector switch shall also

be possible from OCC /Local SCADA.
All control and monitoring cabinets used in indoor shall conform to the
following minimum specifications
Material : Steel
Minimum thickness of Steel : 3 mm for front cover & base frame
sheets 2 mm for rear door
1.6 mm for roof plate, bottom plate &
side covers
Powder Coating :
Exterior : RAL 7032, Texture finish
Interior : RAL 7032, Texture finish
Base frame : Black
Thickness : Min. 80 microns of Power coating
The Contractor shall submit to the Employer, the complete details of the
Control & Monitoring Cabinets, including details of the structure, process of
finish and painting, wiring, terminal blocks, cubicle illumination heating etc,
for Employer’s approval.
The details adopted for Control and Relay panels, Bay Control and
Protection units, Transformer and On-load tap changer cubicles and all
other Control and Monitoring Cabinets, located inside the RSS Control
Room shall be identical to project an aesthetically good appearance.
4.2.18 Metal Work and Paint-Work
Painting should be suitable for salty seaside atmosphere and has to comply
with IEC 60 721-2-5 standard. The entire surface (Internal as well as
External) to be painted shall be prepared by Shot blasting to cleanliness
level, SA21/2 as per ISO 8501/SIS 055900. Ensure that the cleaned surface
is free of oil or grease, scales rust and other residue. Surface profile of the
blasted surface should be approximately 40-60 microns.
All the external surface of the transformer shall be given first coat of Epoxy
zinc rich (having minimum 83% metallic zinc) primer (Min.50 microns
thickness), first intermediate coat of epoxy zinc phosphate paint (Min.60
microns thickness), intermediate coat of Epoxy high build MIO (Min.80
microns thickness), and final coat of glossy Aliphatic Acrylic polyurethane
(Min.50 microns thickness). The total dry film thickness (DFT) of the paints

shall be minimum 240 microns and should withstand 120°C. The shade of
paint shall be gray shade 631 as per IS: 5.
All steel surfaces which are in contact with insulating oil shall be painted
with heat resistant oil- insoluble insulating varnish. After baring, all metal
surfaces shall receive anti-corrosion process:
 natural stainless for Bolts & screws
 hot dip galvanization for radiators
 rust-proofing and anti-corrosion paint for tank, oil expansion vessel

and other metal surfaces.
The transformer and its accessories shall be completely painted in plant.

The necessary touch-ups shall be executed on-site after erection. This
protection shall be fully guaranteed for five years starting from provisional
taking over.
Should any noticeable deterioration by rust or corrosion appear before this

time elapses, the contractor shall be responsible for repainting at his own
expense and for renewing his guarantee for the work performed. The
painting and preserving of panels for transformer protection should be
similar match with that of other control and relay panels provided in the
control room.
4.2.19 Particular Dispositions, Installation
Transport
For transport either by road, ship or rail, the transformer shall be filled with
oil up to windings top and then with Nitrogen at recommended pressure up
to the tank top or alternatively the transformer may be filled with Nitrogen,
in full, during transportation. The Impact Recorder shall be mounted on
every power transformer (on returnable basis). The result of the impact
recorder shall be shared by the contractor with Employer. The bushing,
breather, wheels and all other external parts shall be removed on condition
that they can be mounted at site.
Installation

The Transformers are to be installed in Substation on two running rails, and

consequently must be delivered with a set of swiveling rollers.
These rollers shall be mounted, electrically insulated from tank and with
locking devices. The Insulation Resistance (IR) values of power
Transformer shall be measured before unloading and after placement on
rails. IR value between core clamps and core laminations, core to earth and
clamp to earth shall be particularly required.
Material layout and volume shall be such that it shall be possible to remove
parts without dismounting other parts.
4.2.20 Test Sheets and GTP Sheets
All type tests and routine tests of Transformer, ON load tap Changer and
Bushings as per relevant IEC standards specified in technical specifications
shall be carried out. Short circuit withstand test shall be conducted on one
each type and rating of transformer to validate the design and quality unless
such test has been conducted within last five years on the transformer of
same design. In case there is change in design before five years, the new
transformer design shall be validated by carrying out short circuit withstand
test. All the type test report shall be valid at the time of vendor approval.
The contractor shall submit fully filled technical data sheet given in chapter
8B of PS along with other relevant data during technical approval.
4.2.21 Ester Oil Filled Transformers
If the employer requires ester oil filled transformer, the contractor shall
submit detailed design of the transformer along with relevant extracts of
applicable International/Indian standards. Any savings in size due to ester
oil shall be clearly specified. The contractor shall submit the credentials to
assist proven- ness of the design. Transformer shall be designed with
thermally upgraded papers and OLTC other accessories shall be designed
with high temperature rises, so as to minimize the size of the transformers.
The adjustment price of transformer with synthetic ester oil is to be quoted
in pricing/BOQ document(this includes the supply of spare ester oil drums
in place of mineral oil, if ester oil filled transformers are chosen).
4.2.22 Fire Protection & Suppression System

Please refer specifications for Auxiliary Main Transformer .
4.3 25 kV Switchgear
4.3.1 General Requirements
4.3.1.1 Operating Conditions
Equipment has to be designed to operate under:
- Outdoor tropical conditions (55° C with 95% relative humidity)
- Electromagnetic specific environment
- Plus 10% minus 15% supply voltage variations
4.3.1.2 Protections against corrosion
All metal pieces (including bolts & screws) shall be realized with stainless
materials.
Stainless could be obtained:
- Using natural stainless material
- By hot dip galvanising
4.3.1.3 Earthing
All non live metal parts including support shall be connected to the earthing
collector, which shall have sufficient section to respect short circuit
constraints, and shall be corrosion protected and labelled in conformity with
the IEC standard 617-2.
4.3.1.4 Paint Work
Painting should be suitable for salty seaside atmosphere, and has to comply
with IEC 60 721-2 & 5
After baring, all metal surfaces shall receive anti-corrosion process:
- Natural stainless for bolts & screws and support
- Rust-proofing and anti-corrosive-paint for other metal surfaces
Then all metal surfaces shall be painted in accordance with the rules of art
with three coats of non-metallic paint of the same quality as prescribed for
outdoor transformers, total thickness should not be less than 120 µm.

4.3.2 25 kV Circuit Breakers
(i) Proper Quality assurance plan and method statement shall be developed
by manufacturer in consultation with the Employer for Manufacturing,
Installation, Testing and Commissioning of the Circuit Breakers.
Maintenance Training to the Employer Staff shall be imparted for carrying
out Periodic Overhaul (POH) of Circuit Breaker along with all documentation
for setting up of POH facility by DMRC.
(ii) Support during Installation, Testing and Commissioning by OEM


(iii) Warranty
The 25 KV Circuit Breaker Shall be with 5 Years warranty, i.e. 3 years

extended warranty beyond 2 Years Contractual DLP.
4.3.2.1 Mounting
The 25 kV Circuit breakers are mounted on steel structures, electrically

linked. The steel structure for mounting shall be in accordance with IEC
standards.
The Circuit breaker shall be at pole top level and control equipment at hand
level.
It shall consist of:
- 1 apparatus, at a minimum of 3.8 metre from ground
- a motorised and manual operation and monitoring box,
- a transmitting mechanism.
All pieces should withstand 10 000 operations without any damage.

4.3.2.2 Apparatus
Each Circuit Breaker shall be SF6 or Vacuum type and shall include:
- Up & down stream connectors
- Life sealed unit pole
- Energy accumulation type actuation system (proven

electromechanical springs actuated mechanism)
- Electric and manual arming capability (Tripping and closing coils

motor...)
- Under-voltage tripping coil (Auxiliary voltage off)
- Locking and interlocking devices
- Open / Closed auxiliary contacts
- Low voltage multi-pin connector and flexible cable
All circuit-breakers shall follow the same electrical and mechanical

characteristics and must be in accordance with IEC standards 62271-100
or RDSO’s standard ETS/PSI/116(4/88) with latest modifications.
4.3.2.3 SF6 type
The current rupturing part consists of a couple of moving and fixed contacts
embedded in a body fastened on cast resin material or hard porcelain brown
glazed insulated at 52 kV (according to the IEC 273), and the moving
contact is connected by means of slipping contact.
SF6 type allows damping cut out operation by mean of internal arcing during
the rupture, and avoids any hard over voltage on line. A suitable device shall
be provided which will ensure permanent monitoring of gas pressure inside
the compartment, triggering a dual alarm threshold annunciation system in
the event of drop in gas pressure. The thresholds shall have the following
definitions.
 Initial alarm threshold
- Performance of the CB is unaffected, in particular breaking

capabilities remain intact.

- Immediate intervention by specialist is not necessary.
 Second alarm threshold
- CB tripping and locked until SF6 refilling
- Isolating capabilities of the CB remain intact.
- Immediate intervention by specialist is necessary.
- Control orders are inactive.
4.3.2.4 Vacuum type
The current rupturing part consists of a vacuum bottle embedded in silicon

rubber to prevent water condensation.
Bottle is fastened on hard porcelain brown glazed insulated at 52 kV

(according to the IEC 273), and the moving contact is connected by means
of flexible copper braid.
4.3.2.5 Common aspects
Operation of the main contact is obtained by means of so called “dead point”

mechanism by which the main contact is locked in the closed position with
the necessary contact force.
Opening of the contacts is obtained by releasing the dead point lock using
2 traction springs to retract the mobile contact to the open position.
The operating mechanism is enclosed within a light alloy ventilate housing

which also contains one of the high voltage contacts and the flexible
conductor connecting the moving contact of the vacuum bottle to the high
voltage terminal.
4.3.2.6 Control Box
Mounted on the pole at hand level ( 1.2m), it shall be made of stainless

steel-sheets AISI 316 (2% of Mb), totally enclosed, dust-proof and water
tight type (IP55), equipped with:
- Access doors with padlocks
- 415/230 V heating device.
- 110 V DC control and monitoring relays and motors

- Remote control and monitoring multi-pin connector.
- Internal lighting controlled by door position
- 230 V AC plug
- 3 positions switch (Remote / local / manual )
- Handle (Facade or beside)
- Label (Facade)
Note:
- Any handle operation shall disable motor supply.
- All equipment shall withstand power frequency test at 2000 V 50Hz /

1mn.
Box should be delivered with 4 pre-drilled cable path  30 mm and a

releasing coil free space
The earthing connector shall be located externally. All electronic cards shall
be earthed as per recommendation of OEM.
4.3.2.7 Transmitting Mechanism
The transmitting mechanism materials (tubes, articulations, etc.) shall be

able to withstand 10 000 operations without any maintenance (except
greasing).
4.3.3 25 kV Isolators
Proper Quality assurance plan shall be developed by manufacturer to avoid

misalignment during manufacturing and installation of Isolators in
consultation with the Employer.
(i) As a part of quality assurance plan minimum following shall be ensured at

the time of installation.
(a) Surface contact resistance of every isolator should be recorded in

closed condition, before commissioning which has to be ensured
within limits after improving alignment and surface contact area (if
required).
(b) All nut bolts of isolator should be tightened with torque wrench only.

(c) There should be a gap of 500mm between male & female contact of
the isolator when in open condition.
(d) Provision of arcing horns must be ensured at the time of installation.
(e) During the initial period after installation, temperature of contact

should be monitored through Thermo vision camera and condition of
contact should be checked up for any welding / overheating sign.
(ii) Support during Installation, Testing and Commissioning by OEM


4.3.3.1 Mounting
The Isolators are mounted on steel structures. The steel structure for
mounting shall be in accordance with IEC Standards. The Isolator shall be
mounted at pole top level and control equipment at hand level.
It shall consist of:
- 1 apparatus, at a minimum of 3.8 metre from ground
- a motorised and manual operation and monitoring box,
- a transmitting mechanism.
All pieces should withstand 10 000 operations without any damage.
4.3.3.2 Apparatus
Each Isolator shall be air insulated type and shall include:
- Up & down stream connectors
- Vertical break

- Electric operation where required and manual operating capability

(closing coils motor...)
- Locking and interlocking devices
- Open / Closed auxiliary contacts
- Low voltage multi-pin connector and flexible cable
All isolators shall follow the same electrical and mechanical characteristics
and must be in accordance with IEC standards 129 or RDSO’s specification
ETI/PSI/ 122 (3/89)
All apparatuses up and down stream connectors shall be made of pre-drilled

copper plates in order to receive 2 x 240mm² copper cable each.
4.3.3.3 Control Box
Mounted on the pole at hand level ( 1.2m), it shall be made of stainless

steel-sheets AISI 316 (2% of Mb), totally enclosed, dust-proof and water
tight type (IP55), equipped with:
- Access doors with padlocks
- 415/230 V heating device.
- 110 V DC control and monitoring relays and motors
- Remote control and monitoring multi-pin connector.
- Internal lighting controlled by door position
- 230 V AC plug
- 3 positions switch (Remote / local / manual )
- Handle (Facade or beside)
- Label (Facade)
Note:
- Any handle operation shall disable motor supply.
- All equipment shall withstand power frequency test at 2000 V 50Hz /

1mn.

Box should be delivered with 4 pre-drilled cable path  30 mm and a

releasing coil free space
The earthing connector shall be located externally.
4.3.3.4 Transmitting Mechanism
The transmitting mechanism materials (tubes, articulations, etc.) shall be

able to withstand 10 000 operations without any maintenance (except
greasing).
4.3.4 Lightning arresters
Each Outgoing feeders shall also be provided with polymeric Lightning

arresters as per IEC 60099-1. The LA shall be selected from RDSO and
CORE, Allahabad approved vendor list only.
These are made to protect the transformers and 25kV cables against
operating over-voltage and, eventually, against lightning impulses on OHE.
For this reason they shall be installed immediately upstream feeding post
isolators inside the TSS.
They shall be zinc-oxide types and they shall contain a string of resistor,
whose active part shall be composed of perfectly homogenous resistors.
The polymeric enclosure shall be with long creepage distance to ensure

good insulation with a very high level pollution with caged or wrapped type
construction with no gas volume to ensure that surge arrester does not
explode during short circuits.
They shall correspond to the class discharge 2 of the IEC 60099-4.

(Minimum discharge capability – 6 kJ/kV at Uc)
A surge counter shall be communicable type, which can be integrated with

DMRC SCADA installed on each lightning arrester to indicate the number
of functioning of each device. There shall be provision for testing Lightning
arrestor and surge counter separately to ascertain proper working during
service life. They shall also indicate the value of the leakage current. The
Surge Counter shall be electronic type, compatible with all makes of surge
arresters. The Surge Counter shall not have any metal oxide blocks which
can degrade during usage and add additional residual voltage.

Lightening arrester shall be capable of discharging energy equipment to

class 2 of IEC for a 25kV system on two successive operations followed
immediately by 50Hz energisation with a sequential voltage profile as
specified below.
42kV for 1 second
41kV for 10 seconds
39kV for 100 seconds
They shall be well insulated and shall be suitable for outdoor use.


4.3.5 Indoor 25 kV Gas Insulated Switchgear (GIS).
4.3.5.1 Scope of Work
The scope of work comprises of design, manufacture, shop testing, supply,

delivery at site, installation, testing and commissioning supervision of 1-
phase, 27.5kV service voltage, (Rated Voltage 52kV), 2000A, 16 kA for 3
sec Gas Insulated Indoor type Switchgear. The supply will include all
supporting structures, auxiliary equipment, mechanical linkage, spring drive,
SF6 gas piping, auxiliary circuit wiring, interlocking devices, current and
voltage transformers, cable End boxes, meters and other accessories.
The 25 KV Gas Insulated Switchgear (GIS) Shall be with 5 Years warranty,

i.e. 3 years extended warranty beyond 2 Years Contractual DLP.



The scope of work includes the following:-
4.3.5.1.1 Incomer Bay each Consisting of:
 Circuit Breaker – 1 No.
 Current Transformer – 1 No.
 Disconnector with Earth Switch – 1 No.
 Voltage Transformer – 1 No.
 Indoor lightning arrestor -1No with surge arrestor counter on GIS and
having SCADA communicability on IEC 61850 protocol. They shall
also indicate the value of the leakage current
 Other items as required for connection to the Bus bars, Incoming

cables through lightning arrestor and for completing the intent of
work.
4.3.5.1.2 Outgoing Feeder Bay Each Consisting of:
 Indoor lightning arrestor -1No with surge arrestor counter on GIS and
having SCADA communicability on IEC 61850 protocol. They shall
also indicate the value of the leakage current

 Other items as required for connection to the Bus bars, Outgoing

cables through lightning arrestor and for completing the intent of
work.
4.3.5.1.3 Bus Coupler (1 No.)
 Other items as required for connection to the Bus bars.
4.3.5.1.4 Bus Bars for Single Bus Arrangement
i) Main features required:
a) The 27.5kV equipment shall be built according to the relevant IEC/EN

standards.
b) Unless indicated otherwise herein, all equipment supplied and

installed shall comply with the IEC/EN standards.
c) Bus zone wise busbar segregation should be provided with gas

monitoring system for each bus zone.
d) Individual Pressure gauge to be provided for each circuit breaker

compartment installed at the front of the panel in order to supervise
the SF6 Gas Pressure.
e) Internal insulation level between live part and earth when the
pressure of gas goes to the atmospheric pressure should not be less
than 1.2*27.5kV
f) The metal enclosures for SF6 gas insulated equipment/module shall

be made from material which does not require protective painting
either internal or external switchgear.
g) GIS supplier should have supplied similar GIS for any metro/rail
system. This shall be explained in tender’s technical proposal. The
tender will be required to explain availability of spares and services
from technically trained manpower in India to support the ultimate
customer DMRC in future.

h) The incoming (single core) cable feeder shall be of suitable size as

per Traction Transformer capacity. The termination arrangement
shall be designed for such cables. The outgoing connections from
GIS shall also be cable.
i) The disconnector and earthing switches shall be mechanically

interlocked against mal-operation. Feeder earthing switch shall be
isolated from earthed enclosures and shall permit testing of
switchgear. It shall also be possible to carry out high pot DC testing
of Cable core without disconnecting the cables.
j) The conductors/bus bars shall be of copper and enclosure shall be

made of corrosion resistant metal.
k) The gas barrier insulation between compartments shall withstand 1.5

times maximum rated pressure on one side and vacuum on the other
side.
l) All gas sampling shall be possible during normal operation and

without loss of gas.
m) Loss of gas per annum shall not exceed 1% by weight in each

compartment.
n) Adequate burden/capacity shall be available in instrument

transformers to permit provision of protection/measuring equipment.
The instrument transformers shall have separate metering cores to
permit measurement of values of energy, power, current and voltage
as per required accuracy.
o) VTs should be mounted inside panel (no external VT is acceptable)

and should be pluggable type and provision should be available to
manually disconnect the VTs from the circuit without the need to take
associated circuit breaker or busbar out of service and the status of
same shall be available with SCADA. The PT shall be provided with
isolation links/switches for enabling the high voltage / IR tests to be
carried out.
p) Clear visual indication of Isolator and earthing switch, whether open

or closed shall be provided.

q) The Switchgear panel should be of modular design with a flanged

connection between circuit breaker and busbar compartment.
r) Interrupting Medium for Circuit breaker shall be Vacuum/ SF6. The

actuating drive should be spring drive. To give the highest reliability
of the system, following loss of supply voltage the operating
mechanism shall have local stored energy sufficient for duty cycle of
O- 0.3s-CO-15s -CO without the need of recharging. The circuit
breaker shall be provided with an anti pumping coil for all the
command going to the switchgear. All interlock and auxiliary system
within the actuation system shall be designed so that the circuit
breaker execute its operation only when it is in a position enabling to
do so completely and reliably.
s) The isolator shall be fitted with a suitable power actuation system

backed up by an emergency manual actuation in case of mal function
of the former. The isolator shall not change position under the effect
of electro dynamic loads.
t) In case of any replacement or extension of switchgear panels at site

it should be possible to replace or add a fully assembled circuit
breaker without interfering the operation of the adjacent feeder as
well as without any bus zone degassing. All circuit breaker of same
rating should be interchangeable.
u) Control cubical shall be conventional type (push button/TNC switch

for equipment operation)
v) Panels shall be completely metal enclosed and shall be dust,

moisture and vermin proof.
ii) Monitoring of Gas in the enclosure:
b) Each gas compartment and each bus zone should have its own
temperature compensated density indicator featuring 3 auxiliary
contacts for alarm.
c) The protection devices for the equipment shall ensure permanent

monitoring of gas pressure inside each compartment by means of


threshold annunciation system in the event of gas pressure drops.
d) The design of the cable termination shall allow plugging and

unplugging the HV cable without need of opening the GIS and without
any gas filling. Training & competency to nominated DMRC staff for
cable termination in GIS shall be provided.
iii) The complete GIS equipment shall meet the requirements of IEC/EN
standard. The modules individually as well as assembly subject to various
routine test including type test. Site test shall include leakage test, moisture
contents in dielectric medium and power frequency test.
iv) Earthing: Entire metallic enclosure shall be bonded and effectively earthed.
v) Technical Specification
 Enclosure Type Single Phase Enclosure

 System Voltage 27.5kV
 Rated Voltage between interrupting contacts 52kV
 Rated frequency 50Hz
 Rated Current 2000A @ 40˚C
3000 A 2400 A for 5
mins
 Power Frequency withstand voltage 95kV rms
 Lightning Impulse withstand voltage 200kVp
 Rated short time current 16 kA for 3sec
 Peak withstand current 40 kA peak
 Guaranteed SF6 gas loss per year < 1%
vi) The switchgear is used for controlling 25kV OHE feeder and 25kV cable.
Vender to confirm suitability of equipment for this application and also
confirm maximum over voltage during switching operation.
vii) In case protection is included in the scope, vendor is responsible for

selection of proper relays, CT/PT application check, co-ordination of relay
setting and all assistance during integrated testing. The CTs shall be located
above the HV cable termination socket.
viii) Cable Termination Kit:

Confirmation of incomer cable size would be made available to the vendor

at the time of manufacturing clearance. The cable entry shall be vertically
from underneath the panel.
ix) Outgoing feeders are two runs of 240 sq.mm copper cable
Along with bid vendor to submit SLD and the GA drawing indicating the
space requirement (length x depth) and the minimum clearance required in
front of the cubicle and back side from the operation/maintenance
consideration.
4.3.6 Instrument Transformers
4.3.6.1 General
These voltage or current transformers shall be masts mounted or mounted

on steel structures in switchgear.
All measuring transformers shall follow the same electrical and mechanical
characteristics and must be in accordance with IEC 61869 (CT) and (VT) or
RDSO’s specifications ETI/PSI/117(7/88), PSI 3156 of 1992
4.3.6.2 Transformers
Each transformer will consist of primary connectors, live-insulated

transformer, and a connecting box.
All unconnected metal part shall be linked to the earth.
4.3.6.2.1 Voltage transformers
 Primary connectors
27.5kV connectors shall be made of bronze pipe 20, length 60mm.
 Secondary connecting box
Secondary winding connection will be realized through a dust-proof and

water tight type (IP55) connecting box fitted with a 6.3 A fuse and able to
receive 2x10mm² screen-cable
This cable will enter the connecting box through a cable seal.
 Transformer

Voltage transformer 27500/110 V shall be dry resin, and shall ensure that
self-heating shall be less than 1°C per hour. The PT Shall be with safety
feature like Anti burst / anti explosion and with polymeric material based
housing.
The self-heating has to comply with the climatic conditions defined in

General Conditions.
The maximum temperature rises should be in accordance with the insulation

medium, as defined in the IEC standard 61869:
The core shall be built up of high-grade cold rolled grain oriented non-ageing
steel laminations
One end of primary windings shall be connected to the catenary and the
other end to the earth collector.
Secondary windings shall be connected to the auxiliary networks via the

connecting box.
Support shall be pre-drilled for pole fixation and fitted with carrying devices
(hook or ring).
4.3.6.2.2 Current transformers
 Primary connectors
Consist of up & down stream connectors, made of pre-drilled copper plates

in order to receive connector fittings rated at 1250 Amps for 2 x 240mm²
cable or bus bar connection. The connectors shall be able to handle at least
2400A for 5 min without overheating.
 Secondary connecting box
Secondary winding connection will be realized through a dust-proof and

water tight type (IP55) connecting box and able to receive 2x10mm² copper
screen-cable
This cable will enter the connecting box through a cable seal.
 Transformer

Current transformers shall be dry resin, and shall ensure that self-heating
shall be less than 1°C per hour. The CT Shall be with safety feature like Anti
burst / anti explosion and with polymeric material based housing.
The self-heating has to comply with the climatic conditions defined in

General Conditions
The maximum temperature rises should be in accordance with the insulation

medium, as defined in the IEC standard 61869.
The core shall be built up of high-grade cold rolled grain oriented non-ageing
steel laminations.

5 PROTECTIONS CONTROL & MONITORING
5.1 General
Definition
The purpose of the protection equipment is to ensure isolation or de-

energizing of equipment whose operating conditions have become
abnormal to avoid:
 Any major repercussions on the traffic
 Any damages or dangerous effects on person and equipment.
All equipment shall be protected as per approved Protection philosophy

attached at annexure-10 and equipment protection implementations at all
voltage levels (220/110/66 kV, 33 kV, 25 kV & LT) are described in their
respective clauses.
The RSS contractor shall interface with the main traction contractor to meet
the functional requirements of the protection system. All the instantaneous
relays should be capable of operating the circuit breaker within a duration
of (70-110) ms from the occurrence of the fault. This time duration should
include the dead time of the relays (20-30 ms), MTR (10-20 ms) & Circuit
Breaker (40-60 ms) and this feature should be demonstrated during testing
of the relays.
CB opening signal and MTR operating signal shall be assigned in

Disturbance Recorder in all relays.
5.1.1 Performances Required
The protection system based on modular sets must comply with a high
performance standard regarding:
i) Reliability
This criterion defines the mean time between failures (MTBF) which has to
be calculated for about 10 years.
ii) Maintainability
This criterion represents the mean time for repairing (MTTR) and has to be
considered only by replacement of faulty function or sub assembly.

The MTTR does not exceed 2 hours not including the dead time to reach
the site. 48 hrs for outdoor agency or 12 hrs for Delhi based agency.
iii) Availability
This is expressed in terms of ratio using the formula:
MTBF
%
MTBF  MT TR
and has to represent a level of 99.95 % .
iv) Safety of Operation
Safety is ensured by the means of Cyclic self-test, ensuring general

supervision on software of equipment. In case of fault, a watchdog is
activated. All of inputs are insulated in galvanic and capacitive view and
complemented.
v) Electro Magnetic Compatibility
Due to the consequent interference level inside RSS, protection equipment

has to present sufficient level of immunity defined by the following
standards:
 IEC 61000.4-2 Class 3,
 IEC 61000.4-4 Class 4,
 IEC 61000.4-5 Class 3.
Such criteria shall be obtained by using either numerical type relays or

specifics PLC cards.
5.1.2 Protection Descriptions
A distinction shall be made between the following cases:-
(i) Hydraulic or Thermal Protections
These protections, such as lack of pressure or abnormal temperature, shall

include measuring elements situated on the protected apparatus, actuating
a contact (mandatory of flip-flop type) which represents the start of the
protection line.
(ii) Electrical Protections

a) Protections through lack of monitoring voltage
Each cut-out apparatus shall include a device controlling its opening and
preventing it of phase - phase from any re-closing in case of lack of
monitoring voltage.
b) Protections through lack of AC voltage
Ensured by means voltage measurements with adjustable threshold,

possibly associated to time delay, adjustable as well. The measurement
shall be supplied from the secondary of the voltage transformers.
c) Protection against phase-phase short-circuits
Ensured by means of current relays (primary current measurement relays

with adjustable threshold, associated to time delay also with adjustable
threshold). The current relay shall be supplied from the secondary of the
current transformers.
d) Over current protections
This function ensures the tripping of concerned circuit breaker when the
current value exceeds the highest allowable load on the network in
instantaneous or delayed time conditions. Following the network
configuration, pre-set tripping thresholds could be commuted via automatic
interlocking or voluntary action.
Tripping curves characteristics could be:
 At constant time,
 At dependent time following a characteristic:
 Inverse,
 Very inverse,
 Extremely inverse.
The relays display should be able to show fault records (fault current,
tripping time, voltage etc.) for every phase
e) Protection against zero sequence faults

At the output level, these shall be ensured by means of zero sequence

current measuring relays (obtained through associating of the currents from
the current transformers). These relays shall not be affected by the
capacitive currents in the cables during unbalanced operating times which
occur on the power supply (such as earthing fault of the other cables, etc.).
f) Differential protections
Based on the instantaneous comparison, for each phase, between the bar
set or transformer incoming current and outgoing current, through current
transformers.
g) Synchro-coupler relay
This relay shall ensure authorization of closing a coupling apparatus. Its own
functioning shall come into service, only in the case of voltage presence on
the both parts of the coupling apparatus.
When into service, it shall compare the phase, the frequency and the voltage
of the both sources to be coupled. Phase difference, frequency difference
and voltage difference shall be settable
h) SF6 Pressure Protection
This protection system shall ensure constant monitoring of gas (SF6)

pressure inside each compartment and shall trigger a dual alarm threshold
communication system when the gas pressure drops.
i) Presence of voltage
Voltage relay shall be used to authorise the operation of the incoming

isolators and earthing isolators on no load, wherever required.
j) Staging of the protections
Selectivity of the protection arrangements shall be provided so as to avoid

all unwanted tripping. The time delay of the various circuit breakers shall be
suitably set so as to ensure chronological selectivity of the tripping.
The supplier shall define precisely the minimum intervals between the
various protection stages, accounting for the timings and for the actuation
times of each one of the apparatus involved. A logic selectivity system shall

be incorporated wherever required. To avoid unwanted tripping, it shall be

necessary, in particular, to take into account transient phenomena such as
energizing of transformers and engagement of cables, etc.
k) Protection of Close and Trip Circuit
All close and trip circuit shall be separately protected by means MCB /
Fuses.
l) Contractor shall be required to design and develop protection scheme for

the RSS/TSS/AMS. Scheme and relay setting proposed should be
developed keeping into view of the 25 kV and 33 kV system of DMRC
network in line and stations. All relay setting shall be calculated as per
the fault level at each and every node in the network.
All unit protections, such as REF, Differential, Bus bar Differential

protection etc., must be tested for stability.
All protection scheme, calculation, settings, tests reports, relay

manual, data cables, relay software, Laptop shall be furnished to
DMRC before commissioning
The RSS contractor is required to coordinate with the Traction

Contractor and Power Supply authority for preparation of protection
scheme and relay settings.
Refer Annexure-9 for Control and Monitoring Signals (I/O List for
SCADA)
All equipment and the system should be designed, manufactured and

installed incorporating all the respective signals and commands in this list,
which is minimum but not limiting
5.2 High Voltage Protection
5.2.1 Incomer Line Protection
Following section details the technical specifications for the 220/132/66 kV

Incomer feeder to DMRC receiving Substation from Transco. Incomer from
Transco shall have the following Main Protections:-

 Integrated Differential Protection cum Line Distance Protection for

220/132/66 kV cables.
 Backup O/C(50/51) & E/F(50N/51N) protection (Both time delayed

and Instantaneous)
 Under voltage protection (27)/ Over voltage protection (59)
5.2.2 Line Differential Protection
 The line Differential Protection IED (Intelligent Electronic Device)

protection relay should be Numerical with full compliance to IEC
61850 standards in every respect and Interoperability with other
manufacturers IEDs and tools should be verified.
 The IED shall be suitable for Protection, control and monitoring of

overhead lines and cables for all Voltage levels in solidly or
impedance grounded networks. The Protection unit should be based
on Phase segregated Line differential Principle and use advanced
and proven algorithms and shall support user friendly Engineering
tool and Disturbance handling tool.
 It should be possible to integrate Protection and control functionality

for several objects in the IED. The IED shall have complete
functionality for single and multi-breaker arrangements with single or
three phase tripping.
 At least four independent parameter setting groups shall be included.

IED shall have extensive self-supervision including analogue
channels.
 It shall be possible to equip the IED with a HMI for local access of all
information. A Restrained dual Bias operate characteristic shall be
used and the highest phase current in any line shall be utilized as
bias current
 Charging current compensation for increased sensitivity for long lines

and cables shall be included. The IED should be suitable for
multiplexed, route switched or dedicated fibre networks.

 The communication channel shall be continuously monitored and an

automatic switchover to a redundant channel shall be possible. IED
shall be provided with programmable logic for tripping and indications
as well as a high. For Line differential communication it shall be
possible to select between a master-master system or master slave
system depending on the functional or economical requirements. An
automatic changeover to Master-slave communication should take
place if an interruption occurs in communication channel in master-
master communication system.
 The line Differential Protection IED shall also have the distance
protection scheme with the features and vice- versa. A backup high
speed full scheme distance protection with at least three zones
should be possible to include in order to get fault clearance in case
of communication failure, it shall be possible to have the distance
protection continuously in operation or only released for operation at
communication failure. The distance Protection shall have
characteristics that will give load encroachment discrimination and
load current compensation of the reactance line in the first zone to
avoid over reach. It should be possible to set the distance Protection
zone in forward, reverse or non-directional mode. Each zone should
have individual resistive and reactive reach settings. Separate phase
selection logic and automatic switch onto fault logic should be
included.
 Disturbance recording, event recording shall be built in features and

included in the IED.
 IED Shall be provided with a front mounted HMI and front port for
connection to a Personal Computer. The IED shall be provided with
communication interface for connection to substation automation as
per IEC 61850 standards. Power supply modules from 48V to 250V
AC/DC shall be available.
5.2.3 Line Distance Protection

A backup high speed full scheme distance protection with at least three
zones should be possible to include in order to get fault clearance in case
of communication failure, it shall be possible to have the distance protection
continuously in operation or only released for operation at communication
failure. The distance Protection shall have characteristics that will give load
encroachment discrimination and load current compensation of the
reactance line in the first zone to avoid over reach. It should be possible to
set the distance Protection zone in forward, reverse or non-directional
mode. Each zone should have individual resistive and reactive reach
settings. Separate phase selection logic and automatic switch onto fault
logic should be included. The IED shall have full compliance to IEC 61850
standards in every respect. The IED should have feature of line differential
protection.
5.2.4 Backup O/C (50/51) & E/F (50N/51N) Protection
 shall have three over current Elements (At least two stage DMT
protection)
 shall be of Numerical type with full compliance to IEC 61850

standards
 shall have facility to select any type inverse characteristics as per IEC
to suit requirement.
 shall have separate High set element for instantaneous function.
 Built in configuration logic to assign inputs/outputs to any functions.
 IED shall have LED for relay healthiness & un healthiness
 Harmonic Inrush Protection feature
Integration of Backup O/C Protection within the Bay Control Unit (IED) will
be acceptable.
5.2.5 Bus Bar Protection
DMRC receiving substations (220/132/66 kV) shall be equipped with a

full-fledged Busbar protection system with following technical
specifications.

 Numerical busbar differential protection scheme with full compliance

to IEC 61850 standards shall be provided for each main bus at the
receiving substation.
 Bus bar protection for each busbar shall incorporate a main

protection and check feature.
 Each Bus Bar protection scheme shall
 have maximum operating time up to trip impulse to trip relay for all
types of faults of 25 mili-seconds at 5 times setting value.
 operate selectively for each bus bar
 Give hundred percent security up to 31.5 kA fault level for 132 kV.
 incorporate continuous supervision for CT secondary against any

possible open circuit and if it occurs, shall render the relevant zone
of protection inoperative and initiate an alarm
 Not give false operation during normal load flow in bus bars.
 Incorporate clear zone indication.
 be of phase segregated and triple pole type
 Provide independent zones of protection.
 include individual high speed electrically reset tripping relays for each
feeder
 be transient free in operation
 Include continuous D.C. supplies supervision.
 Not cause tripping for the differential current below the load current
of heaviest loaded feeder.
 CT switching and External Zone formation is not acceptable.
 shall include trip relays, CT switching relays (if applicable), auxiliary

CT’s (if applicable) as well as additional power supply modules, input
modules etc. as may be required to provide a Bus-bar protection
scheme for the complete bus arrangement i.e. for all the bay or

breakers under this specification as well as for the future bays as per
the Single line diagram for new substations.
 shall incorporate continuous supervision for CT secondary’s and

shall render the relevant zones of protection in operative against
possible open circuit and protection transferred to check zone only.
 Common Reset push Button and bypass switch should be provided

in Bus bar differential protection panel
 Shall have separate MTR.
 Built-in Local Breaker Backup protection feature as a part of bus bar

protection scheme shall also be acceptable.
 The Bus Bar protection relays shall be equipped with built-in DR and
Event recorder
5.2.6 Transformer Protection
5.2.6.1 Auxiliary Main Transformer:-
Auxiliary Main Station (AMS) for different voltage levels will be provided with
the following Protections
 Biased Differential Protection (87T)
 HV&LV Restricted earth fault Protection (64R HV & 64R LV)
 Standby earth fault Protection SEF (51G)
 Backup IDMT and two stage DMT O/C & E/F protection
 Tank Protection (64) shall be replaced with REF protection.
 Harmonic Inrush protection
 Transformer trouble signals (Buchholz, fire protection, OTT, WTT,

PRD etc.) shall be implemented through Master Trip Relay (MTR)
5.2.6.2 Traction Transformer:-
Traction Transformer for different voltage levels will be provided with the
following Protections:-
 Biased Differential Protection (87T)

 Backup IDMT and Three stage DMT O/C protection.
(For Utilising the overload capability of traction transformer the

RDSO guidelines (TI/IN/0022 dated Feb 2010 or latest version) for
relay setting for traction Transformer to be followed with the approval
of Employer)
 Restricted earth fault protection for EHV & 25kV side (Tank
Protection) (64 REF) shall be replaced with REF protection. (64 R)
 Transformer trouble signals (Buchholz, fire protection, OTT, WTT,

PRD etc.) shall be implemented through Master Trip Relay (MTR)
 Harmonic Inrush Protection
Detail description of Transformer Protection is as under:-
a) Transformer Differential Protection (For AMT & TT)
Transformer Differential Protection shall be based on Numerical relay

technology, conforming to IEC 61850 standard and shall be suitable for
protection and monitoring of 3-phase AMS Transformers and single phase
traction transformers. It shall have the following features:
 be triple pole type, with faulty phase identification/ indication
 One IED shall be designed to operate correctly over a wide range of

frequency range in order to cope with Power system frequency
variations during disturbances.
 IED shall be based on advanced and proven algorithms to handle

multitude of application and shall support user friendly Engineering
tool and disturbance handling tool.
 It shall be possible to integrate the Protections functions for

Transformer into one IED.
 The IED shall have extensive self-supervision including analogue

channels. The configuration of the IED shall be such that it will suit
most applications and if needed the same shall be modified easily.
 Transformer differential Protection with short operate time shall be

included and shall have automatic ratio matching the vector group

compensation. Use of Interposing CT’s for ratio correction will not be

acceptable.
 In order to ensure through-fault stability is external summation of

currents not recommended.
 The differential Protection shall have a settable restrain

characteristics and a high set unrestrained function shall also be
included.
 Second harmonic restraint features shall be included in order to avoid

tripping at inrush currents.
 Fifth harmonic restraint feature shall be included to avoid tripping at

over excitation condition.
 Adaptive stabilization for system recovery inrush and Ct saturation at

external faults shall be included. The IED should utilize a measuring
principle that gives high sensitivity for turn to turn faults.
 High or low impedance based restricted earth fault protection with

short operate time and high sensitivity shall be available within the
IED.
 It shall be possible to include Backup Protection functions such as

instantaneous over current functions for phase and earth faults and
time delayed non directional over current functions with inverse and
definite time characteristic with at least two steps for phase and earth
faults.
 Other current functions such as thermal overload alarm based on

thermal model and trip steps shall be possible to include within the
IED.
 The IED shall be provided with programmable logic for tripping and
indications as well as high number of logic blocks and timers for
adaptation.
 IED should have built in disturbance recorder and event recorder.

b) HV & LV Restricted Earth Fault Protection (For AMT & TT)
Restricted earth fault Protection will be based on Numerical technology and

shall have \ following features :-
 be single pole type
 be of current/voltage operated high impedance type
 have a current setting range of 10-40% of 1 Amp./ have a suitable

voltage setting range.
 be tuned to the system frequency
 be used for HV and LV winding wherever applicable.
c) Standby Earth Protection (For AMT)
 have Non directional earth fault protection with IDMT characteristic

with a definite minimum time of 3.0 seconds at 10 times setting and
have a variable setting range of 20-80% of rated current.
 Shall be numerical type
NOTE: Integration of following Protections of Transformers into one

Protection unit IED is acceptable
 Transformer Differential protection
 Restricted earth fault Protection
 Standby earth fault Protection
d) Backup O/C Protection (both time delayed and Instantaneous) (For

AMT & TT)
 shall have three over current Elements

standards
 have facility to select any type inverse characteristics as per IEC to

suit requirement.
 Shall have separate High set element for instantaneous function.

be acceptable.
5.2.7 Bus Coupler
Following sections detail the technical specifications for both Bus coupler
circuit at the Receiving substation.
 Backup O/C protection (Both time delayed and Instantaneous)
 shall have three over current Elements

standards
 have facility to select any type inverse characteristics as per IEC to

suit requirement.
 Shall have separate High set element for instantaneous function.
be acceptable.
5.3 33 kV Protections
General Definition
For the general definition, performances and description of the protections

please refer to above clauses.
5.3.1 33 kV AMS Incomer Circuit Breaker (LBCB)
The protection of this circuit shall consist of:-
 F 50: Instantaneous over current protection
 F 51: Two stage Time delayed over current protection
 F50 N: Instantaneous earth fault protection (zero sequence)
 F51 N: Two stage Time delayed earth fault protection (zero

sequence)
 Under voltage Protection with time delay (27)
5.3.2 33 kV AMS Coupling Circuit Breaker (LBCCB)

The protection of this circuit shall consist of:

sequence)
This circuit shall include also a synchronism check device, which shall
measure:
 The voltage difference between the both sources
 The phase unbalance between the both sources
 The phase correspondence between the both sources
Moreover, in case of lack of voltage on one source, the device shall

authorize the coupling circuit breaker closing without any comparison.
5.3.3 33 kV Cable Feeder Circuit Breaker (LFCB, RCCB)
The protection of this circuit shall consist of:

sequence)
 33 kV cables protection and fault localization
33 kV cables are protected at the AMS side by 33 kV circuit breakers and

their its associated protection relays. This means in case of a fault on 33 kV
cables, it will be cleared by the circuit breaker but the fault cannot be located
and it will not be possible to segregate the faulty section.
The entire 33 kV Cables Network shall be protected by means of main

protection as Line Differential protection with Pilot wires, which will
automatically trip the 33 kV Circuit Breakers on either end of the faulty

Section of the Cable. Line Differential protection with Pilot wires shall also
be provided for the Section of 33 kV cables between ASS-RSS at the RSS.
Differential relay shall be provided by the traction contractor. The space and
CT core, wiring and cut out in the panel shall be provided by the RSS
contractor. In addition not limited to, back-up protection as Instantaneous
and IDMT Overcurrent and Earth fault protection (50, 50N, 51, 51N) shall
be provided, Over Current relay with as required, to ensure that the network
is fully protected against any faults on the 33kV Ring Main Network.
Therefore, the functioning of these protections shall trip the either end of
circuit breaker of 33kV power supply network
5.3.4 Auxiliary Transformer Circuit Breaker (LVATCB)
The protection of this circuit shall consist of :

sequence)
 Temperature Alarm, first threshold
 Temperature tripping, second threshold
 Breaker failure protection (50BF) of LVATCB with LBCB / CCB with

provision of Bypass rotary switch.
The thresholds shall be set according to the maximum of temperature the

auxiliary transformer can withstand without damage.
5.3.4.1 Zero Sequence Protections
A master earthing protection shall be provided through measurement of the

zero sequence current going through the earthing resistor of the 220/132/66
kV / 33 kV transformer. A current transformer installed on the earthing
connection of the neutral, shall supply the current measuring relays of this
protection, which shall be with adjustable threshold.
5.3.4.2 Low Voltage Protection

The low voltage circuit breaker shall be equipped with microprocessor type
relay based protection to protect the main circuit against short-circuit, over-
current and earth fault. This protection shall be equipped on the LVCB and
LVCCB.
The selectivity shall take into account the time delay and the current level of
the downstream protections. It should have adjustable current and time
settings as per capacity of dry type transformers.
5.4 TRACTION PROTECTIONS
The purpose of the protections installed in traction feeder stations is to

isolate all or part of the dependent equipment from the network, in case of
phase-to-phase or phase-to-earth / rail fault.
Traction feeder stations are fitted with 25 kV circuit breakers for ensuring
the isolation of the faulty sections.
The Traction Protection system can be broadly divided into two main
groups:
 Traction set protection, which will essentially include all equipment

starting from the HV busbar to which the Traction Transformers are
connected, upto the 25kV bus bars from which the 25kV Traction
Feeders take off.
 25 kV Traction Feeder Protection, including OHE protection
5.4.1 Traction Set Protection
The protection relays required for protection of Traction Feeders

(Overcurrent, Distance) and for protection against ‘Panto flash over’ and
‘Wrong phase coupling’ shall be provided at RSS by the RSS Contractor. In
addition, the protection relays required for protection of Depot feeders (Line
differential / Distance as applicable and Overcurrent) shall also be provided
by the RSS Contractor. The Detailed logic of PFR and WPC implemented
in existing system of DMRC is attached as Annexure 26 to Chapter 8A for
reference. The contractor is required to develop scheme and logic in
coordination with Traction contractor and submit the same for approval of

employer before implementing. In case of failure of PFR relay, 50 BF should

take over and its delay should reduce automatically reduces to 0 ms.
Each HV circuit-breaker located upstream the power transformer

ensures the protection of:
 the bus bars for connection to transformers on the HV side.
 the transformer,
 the 25 kV bus bars located downstream,
These protections include:
 phase-phase and homo-polar over-current protections on the HV

side (fn 50-51 and fn 50N-51N).,
 the differential current protection of power transformers (fn 87),
 the over-current protection located on the secondary winding side of

the transformer(fn 50-51),
 the over current tank relay protection REF Protection installed on the
main transformer (fn64R),
 The buchholz relay, installed on main tank and tap changer tank, as
well (fn 80),
 the temperature relay (fn 49) including :
 oil temperature,
 winding temperature.
5.4.2 Directional Power Protection
The function of directional protection (fn32) is to check the power transit

direction in the catenary system, mainly due to regenerative braking, which
could flow back to the HV grid through the transformers. Two stages are
involved:
 a slow one,
 a quick one.
When the first stage is activated, a signal is emitted and a time-out 1 is

started. When time-out 1 ends, a second signal is emitted. If, after 3

minutes, the fault still persists, a tripping command is sent to the concerned
traction set circuit-breaker.
When the second stage is activated, at the end of time-out 2, a tripping

command and signal are emitted by the protection device; the 1st stage and
2nd stage current thresholds can be parameterized as well as time-outs,
and angle  of straight line D can be adjusted.
Stage 2
 R

Stage 1
D
5.4.3 25 kV Incomer Feeder
The protection shall consist of:
 F 51: Time delayed over current protection
 Voltage Dependent Over Current Protection , with DMT Protection
 Under voltage tripping to be provided from Line PT with time delay
 Breaker failure Protection (50BF) for TTCB with provision of bypass

rotary switch.
5.4.3.1 Track Feeder Functional Description
From a feeder station, and for the same direction, each track is fed and
protected through an assigned circuit breaker. Each portion of OHE fed by
a circuit breaker is called "sector". Each sector is sub-sectioned into
elementary sections (catenary section between two breaking apparatus).

The sectors of same direction are put in parallel at the level of the paralleling
station through interrupters.
All the faults on:
 the catenary network, together with the switchgear directly connected

thereto,
 the rolling stock (upstream the circuit breakers),
 the paralleling stations (bus-bars, switchgear),
are detected and protected by the circuit breakers of the feeder station
according to the following sequence:
 a fault is detected by the two protection devices (minimum Z or Over

current) of the same direction through the paralleling,
 the related two circuit breakers are switched off,
 the fault localization system is put into service (operation is described

later),
 the paralleling interrupters open due to the lack of power on the two
tracks after a time period of about 500 ms,
 The re-closing order is given to circuit breaker within about 7

seconds,
If the fault remains (10% of the cases):
 the circuit breaker of the faulty sector trips and this is blocked open
for 3 min,
 the fault locator determines the faulty elementary section
 the circuit breaker for the healthy sector switches on.
If the fault is transient (90% of the cases):
 the 2 circuits breakers re-close, the paralleling interrupters close

following the energizing of the two sectors, after a time period of
approximately 1 min.
5.4.3.2 Track Feeder Protection

Each track feeder circuit-breaker is actuated by:
 Minimum impedance protection,(fn 21) to be provided from Bus PT

only
 Fuse failure monitoring for distance protection
 Over current protection (fn 50-51).
 VDOC, with DMT protection
 Emergency/Backup over current protection
 Auto re-closure with provision of bypass rotary switch
 Wrong Phase coupling
 Pantograph Flashover Protection with provision of bypass rotary

switch
 Master trip relay and AC/ DC U/V tripping
 Delta I (current) protection (di/dt)
 Breaker failure protection (50BF) of feeder breaker with 25 kV

Incomer with provision of bypass rotary switch.
In case of 25 kV supply is being feed to Underground section, Differential

Current Protection for track feeder CB’s shall also be provided at RSS in
addition to distance protection of same feeder. Differential Relay shall be
provided by Traction contractor but all other necessary provisions, space,
separate CT cores, wiring, Cutout etc. to be provided by the RSS contractor.
Distance Relay at RSS for this feeder shall be provided by RSS contractor.
Distance Relay should not have any time delay. Time setting = 0s must be
possible.
(a) Minimum Impedance Protection
This module is a single-phase impedance measuring (in R-X co-ordinates)

relay, which operates when the impedance value falls below a selected
adjustment threshold. The minimum impedance module defines the
quadrilateral characteristic by fixing the straight lines D1, D2, D3 and D4.

The possibilities of adjusting the various elements of the parallelogram

enable it to be adapted to various network conditions. This protection is
directional and selective; it makes a distinction between a high load and a
distant fault of small intensity.
The minimum impedance protection is self-supervised and an internal fault

in the protection entails the tripping of the associated circuit-breaker.
(b) Over Current Protection
An over-current protection is designed to detect faults occurring very close

to the feeder station. This protection causes the tripping of the circuit

breaker when the current reaches a value exceeding the highest load on
the network.
Two stages of operation are foreseen:
 an instant one,
 a time-delayed one.
The tripping curves can be of two types:
 constant over time,
 if necessary, dependent over time, following an inverse, highly

inverse or extremely inverse characteristic.
It should be noted that protections with thermal images, which are widely
used in distribution networks, are not suitable for a 50 Hz catenary system.
5.4.3.3 Selectivity of Protections
Selectivity calculation is based on the second-stage time-outs of over-

current protections. As a rule, for a 25 kV fault, it is admitted that the time-
out must be minimum but not nil to avoid tripping on a transient current or a
load transfer.
Therefore, HV protections are calculated with a longer timing, which remains

below the power supplier line protection set values.
5.4.3.4 Other Protections
These protections are mainly concerned with the monitoring of the state and
operation of:
 SF6 gas pressures of HV and 25 kV circuit breakers if any,
 transformer temperature (oil),
 non availability of auxiliary supply (DC)
Two stages are involved:
 the first one is an alarm,
 the second one causes tripping (except for the SF6 gas pressure
which entails blocking) of the equipment concerned.

1) Protection Back Up
Protections have a direct action on the tripping gear of circuit breakers and
inform the local RSS automation protection system.
In case a protection is inoperative, a tripping order is sent to the higher-level

circuit breaker via the local supervision after time delay (except for the
power supplier HV circuit breakers).For 25 kV system, 50BF function shall
be provided for the following cases:-
 25 kV feeder CB to 25 kV Incomer CB
 25 kV Incomer CB to TTCB
2) Fault Locator
This function is activated following a circuit breaker tripping due to:
 Minimum impedance detection,
 Over current,
 allowing an auto re-closure sequence.
The fault locator measures the centenary/ rail loop fault impedance and
compare with the minimum impedance relay and determine the kilometre
point from the feeder station. The fault parameters such as voltage, current,
reactance & impedance should be communicated in SCADA.

6 RELAYS
6.1 General
All relays shall conform to the requirements of IS:3231/IEC-60255/IEC

61000 or other applicable standards. Relays shall be suitable for flush or
semi-flush mounting on the front with connections from the rear. All Relays
must be completely sealed type
All the instantaneous relays should be capable of operating the circuit

breaker within a duration of 70-110 ms from the occurrence of the fault. This
time duration should include the dead time of the relays (20-30ms), MTR
(10-20ms) & Circuit breaker (40-60ms) and this feature should be
demonstrated during testing of the relays
6.2 Numerical Relays
All main protective relays shall be of fully numerical type and shall comply
as per IEC 61850 standard. Further, the test levels of EMI as indicated in
IEC 61850 shall be applicable to these. All the relays shall be directly
connected to the inter bay bus using Electrical/fiber optic cables and shall
support peer to peer communication. The relays shall generate GOOSE
messages as per IEC 61850 standards for interlocking and also to ensure
interoperability with third party relays. Each relay should also generate an
ICD file in XML format for engineering/ integration to a vendor independent
SCADA system. All the relays shall have suitable rear and front ports for
connectivity to SAS and PC/LAPTOP
6.3 Draw-out / Plug-in Type
All protective relays shall be in draw out or plug-in type/modular cases with
proper testing facilities. Necessary test plugs/test handles shall be supplied
loose and shall be included in contractor's scope of supply.
6.4 Operating Voltage / Current
All AC operated relays shall be suitable for operation at 50 Hz. AC Voltage

operated relays shall be suitable for 110 Volts VT secondary and current
operated relays for 1 amp CT secondary. All DC operated relays and timers
shall be designed for the DC voltage specified, and shall operate

satisfactorily between 80% and 110% of rated voltage. Voltage operated

relays shall have adequate thermal capacity for continuous operation.
6.5 Auxiliary Relays / Contacts
The protective relays shall be suitable for efficient and reliable operation of
the protection scheme described in the specification. Necessary auxiliary
relays and timers required for interlocking schemes for multiplying of
contacts suiting contact duties of protective relays and monitoring of control
supplies and circuits, lockout relay monitoring circuits etc. also required for
the complete protection schemes described in the specification shall be
provided. All protective relays shall be provided with at least two pairs of
potential free isolated output contacts. Auxiliary relays and timers shall have
pairs of contacts as required to complete the scheme; contacts shall be
silver faced with spring action. Relay case shall have adequate number of
terminals for making potential free external connections to the relay coils
and contacts, including spare contacts.
6.6 Reset
All protective relays, auxiliary relays , timers , lock out relays (MTR) and
interlocking relays specified shall be provided with self-reset type contacts
/SCADA type as well as with externally hand reset positive action operation
indicators with inscription type. All protective relays which do not have built-
in hand-reset operation indicators shall have additional auxiliary relays with
operating indicators (Flag relays) for this purpose. Similarly, separate
operating indicator (auxiliary relays) shall also be provided in the trip circuits
of protections located outside the board such as Buchholz relays, oil and
winding temperature protection, sudden pressure devices, fire protection
etc.
6.7 Timers
Timers shall be of solid state type. Time delay in terms of milliseconds

obtained by the external capacitor resistor combination is not preferred and
shall be avoided.
6.8 De-energisation of Control Relay

No control relay which shall trip the power circuit breaker when the relay is
de-energized shall be employed in the circuits.
6.9 Isolation of Trip Circuit for Testing
Provision shall be made for easy isolation of trip circuits of each relay for the
purpose of testing and maintenance.
6.10 Shunt / Series Relays
Auxiliary seal-in-units provided on the protective relays shall preferably be

of shunt reinforcement type. If series relays are used the following shall be
strictly ensured:
(i) The operating time of the series seal-in-unit shall be sufficiently shorter than
that of the trip coil or trip relay in series with which it operates to ensure
definite operation of the flag indicator of the relay.
(ii) Seal-in-unit shall obtain adequate current for operation when one or more
relays operate simultaneously.
(iii) Impedance of the seal-in-unit shall be small enough to permit satisfactory

operation of the trip coil on trip relays when the D.C. Supply Voltage is
minimum.
(iv) Trip-circuit seal-in is required for all trip outputs, irrespective of the magnitude
of the interrupted current. The trip-circuit seal-in logic shall not only seal-in
the trip output(s), but also the relevant initiation signals to other scheme
functions, (e.g. initiate signals to the circuit-breaker failure function, etc.), and
the alarm output signals.
(v) Two methods of seal-in are required, one based on the measurement of AC
current, catering for those circumstances for which the interrupted current is
above a set threshold, and one based on a fixed time duration, catering for
those circumstances for which the interrupted current is small (below the set
threshold).
(vi) For the current seal-in method, the seal-in shall be maintained until the circuit
breaker opens, at which time the seal-in shall reset and the seal-in method
shall not now revert to the fixed time duration method. For this seal-in
method, the sealing shall be maintained for the set time duration. For the line

protection schemes, this time duration shall be independently settable for

single- and three-pole tripping.
(vii) Seal-in by way of current or by way of the fixed duration timer shall occur
irrespective of whether the trip command originates from within the main
protection device itself (from any of the internal protection functions), or from
an external device with its trip output routed through the main protection
device for tripping.
Trip-circuit seal-in shall not take place under sub-harmonic conditions (e.g.
reactor ring down).
6.11 Spare Pair of Contacts
All protective relays and alarm relays shall be provided with 10% extra
isolated pair of contacts wired to terminals exclusively for future use.
6.12 Setting Range
The setting ranges of the relays offered, if different from the ones specified
shall also be acceptable if they meet the functional requirements.
6.13 List of Installations using the types of Relays
The bidder shall include in his bid a list of installations where the relays
quoted have been in satisfactory operation.
6.14 Phase Indications
All relays and their drawings shall have phase indications as R-Red, Y-
yellow, B-blue.
6.15 Scope of Numerical Relays
For numerical relays, the scope shall include the following:
(i) Necessary software and hardware to up/down load the data to/from the
relay from/to the personal computer installed in the substation. However,
the supply of PC is not covered under this clause.
(ii) The relay shall have suitable communication facility for connectivity to
SCADA. The relay shall be capable of supporting IEC 61850 communication
standard.

(iii) It is required to have Password Protection in relays for making any

necessary changes in relay setting / configuration. It shall be possible to set
a minimum 6-bit password in the relay from relay HMI/DR PC/Laptop. No
password shall be required to view the settings / configuration in the relays.
(iv) Accuracy Class of Current measurement in relays should be clearly defined.

It should be for a minimum of 1% of the rated value.
(v) All IEDs shall have flexibility to add BI/BOs and have provision of 10 % of
spare BI/BOs after final testing.
(vi) All settings of relay must be readable from HMI of relays.
6.16 Communication Ports
The relays should have communication ports for local communication for
relay settings, modifications, extraction and analysis of fault/event/
disturbance records from a laptop and for communication with substation
automation system.
6.17 Facilities for Fault Diagnosis
The relays shall have the following tools for fault diagnostics
 Fault record – The relay shall have the facility to store fault records
with information on cause of trip, date, time, trip values of electrical
parameters.
 Event record – The relay shall have the facility to store time stamped
event records with 1ms resolution.
 Disturbance records – At least 5 secs of disturbance records shall

be provided in the offered Numerical relays. Each record shall store
data from atleast 5 analogue channels and 16 digital channels. The
data from DR function shall be available in IEEE/COMTRADE format
and shall be compatible with the relay test kit being supplied under
this contract. CB opening status and MTR operating status shall be
assigned in Disturbance Recorder of all relays.
 At least 250 events and minimum 8 oscillographic record in RSS

relays with minimum sampling rate i.e. 16 sample/cycle must be
provided for investigation of all suspicious tripping and also provide

provision for all disturbance record in DRPC. For ASS, minimum 5

oscillographic disturbance records should be provided. The final
Project of DRPC / Engineering PC (for bay controller) shall be
handed over to Employer after commissioning.
6.18 RELAY AND PROTECTION PANELS
This section details the specification requirements for Relay and Protection
panels for the receiving substation. The panels shall be used for housing
the control and protection equipment for 220/132/66 kV and 25 kV system.
The 33 kV control and protection system shall be housed in the local control
cubicle of the 33 kV Switchgear. All type of protection shall be divided in
Group –A & Group-B and tripping at all voltage level shall be routed through
respective MTR.
6.18.1 Constructional Features
a) Simplex panel shall consist of a vertical front panel with equipment mounted
thereon and having wiring access from rear for control panels & either front
or rear for relay panels. All relay and control panels shall be provided with
double door arrangement i.e one inner panel door and one glass front door
with full height toughened glass. In case of panel having width more than
900mm, double leaf-doors shall be provided. Doors shall have handles with
either built-in locking facility or will be provided with pad-lock.
b) Relay panels shall be of simplex type design as indicated. It is the

responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that the equipment specified and
such unspecified complementary equipment required for completeness of
the protective/control schemes is properly accommodated in the panels
without congestion and if necessary, provide panels with larger dimensions.
No price increase at a later date on this account shall be allowed.
c) Panels shall be completely metal enclosed and shall be dust, moisture and
vermin proof. The enclosure shall provide a degree of protection for fully
assembled panel not less than IP-42. Type test report for the ingress
protection shall be submitted at the time of vendor approval. The contractor
shall provide methodology for testing of Ingress protection of the CRP panel
after commissioning at site, same shall be verified during testing stage.

Panels shall be free standing, floor mounting type and shall comprise
structural frames completely enclosed with specially selected smooth
finished, cold rolled sheet steel of thickness not less than 3 mm for weight
bearing members of the panels such as base frame, front sheet and door
frames, and 2.0mm for sides, door, top and bottom portions. There shall be
sufficient reinforcement to provide level transportation and installation.
d) All doors, removable covers and panels shall be gasketed all around with
neoprene gaskets. Ventilating louvers, if provided shall have screens and
filters. The screens shall be made of either brass or GI wire mesh. Cleaning
schedule for the same shall be provided in the maintenance manual.
e) Design, materials selection and workmanship shall be such as to result in

neat appearance, inside and outside with no welds, rivets or bolt head
apparent from outside, with all exterior surfaces tune and smooth.
f) Panels shall have base frame with smooth bearing surface, which shall be
fixed on the embedded foundation channels/insert plates. Anti-vibration
strips made of shock absorbing materials which shall be supplied by the
contractor, shall be placed between panel & base frame.
g) Cable entries to the panels shall be from the bottom. Cable gland plate fitted
on the bottom of the panel shall be connected to earthing of the panel/station
through a flexible braided copper conductor rigidly.
h) Relay panels of modern modular construction would also be acceptable.
6.18.2 Mounting
a) All equipment on and in panels shall be mounted and completely wired to

the terminal blocks ready for external connections. The equipment on front
of panel shall be mounted flush. No equipment shall be mounted on the
doors.
b) Equipment shall be mounted such that removal and replacement can be

accomplished individually without interruption of service to adjacent devices
and are readily accessible without use of special tools. Terminal marking on
the equipment shall be clearly visible.

c) The Contractor shall carry out cut out, mounting and wiring of the free issue
items supplied by others which are to be mounted in his panel in accordance
with the corresponding equipment manufacturer's drawings. Cut outs if any,
provided for future mounting of equipment shall be properly blanked off with
blanking plate.
d) The centre lines of switches, push buttons and indicating lamps shall be not
less than 750mm from the bottom of the panel. The centre lines of relays,
meters and recorders shall be not less than 450mm from the bottom of the
panel.
e) The centre lines of switches, Protection bypass switch, push buttons and
indicating lamps shall be matched to give a neat and uniform appearance.
Likewise the top lines of all meters, relays and recorders etc. shall be
matched.
f) No equipment shall be mounted on the doors.
6.18.3 Panel Internal Wiring
a) Panels shall be supplied complete with interconnecting wiring provided

between all electrical devices mounted and wired in the panels and between
the devices and terminal blocks for the devices to be connected to
equipment outside the panels. When panels are arranged to be located
adjacent to each other all inter panel wiring and connections between the
panels shall be furnished and the wiring shall be carried out internally
b) All wiring shall be carried out with 1100V grade, single core, stranded
copper conductor wires with PVC insulation. The minimum size of the multi-
stranded copper conductor used or internal wiring shall be as follows:
 All circuits except current transformer circuits and voltage transfer

circuits meant for energy metering - one 1.5mm sq. per lead.
 All current transformer circuits one 2.5 sq.mm lead.
 Voltage transformer circuit (for energy meters): Two 2.5 sqmm per
lead.

c) All internal wiring shall be securely supported, neatly arranged, readily

accessible and connected to equipment terminals and terminal blocks.
Wiring gutters & troughs shall be used for this purpose.
d) Auxiliary bus wiring for AC and DC supplies, voltage transformer circuits,

annunciation circuits and other common services shall be provided near the
top of the panels running throughout the entire length of the panels.
e) Wire termination shall be made with solder less crimping type and tinned
copper lugs, which firmly grip the conductor. Insulated sleeves shall be
provided at all the wire terminations. Engraved core identification plastic
ferrules marked to correspond with panel wiring diagram shall be fitted at
both ends of each wire. Ferrules shall fit tightly on the wire and shall not fall
off when the wire is disconnected from terminal blocks. All wires directly
connected to trip circuit breaker or device shall be distinguished by the
addition of red coloured unlettered ferrule.
f) Longitudinal troughs extending throughout the full length of the panel shall
be preferred for inter panel wiring. Inter-connections to adjacent panel shall
be brought out to a separate set of terminal blocks located near the slots of
holes meant for taking the inter-connecting wires.
g) Contractor shall be solely responsible for the completeness and correctness

of the internal wiring and for the proper functioning of the connected
equipment
h) All relay panels should have 2 DC supply (from DCDB-1 & DCDB-2) and
static changeover switch with O-ring diode shall be provided.
6.18.4 Terminal Blocks
a) All internal wiring to be connected to external equipment shall terminate on

terminal blocks. Terminal blocks shall be 1100 V grade and have 10 Amps.
continuous rating, moulded piece, complete with insulated barriers, stud
type terminals, washers, nuts and lock nuts. Markings on the terminal blocks
shall correspond to wire number and terminal numbers on the wiring
diagrams. All terminal blocks shall have shrouding with transparent
unbreakable material.

b) Disconnecting type terminal blocks for current transformer and voltage

transformer secondary leads shall be provided. Also current transformer
secondary leads shall be provided with short circuiting and earthing
facilities.
c) At least 20% spare terminals shall be provided on each panel and these
spare terminals shall be uniformly distributed on all terminal blocks. Unless
otherwise specified, terminal blocks shall be suitable for connecting the
following conductors of external cable on each side
 All CT & PT circuits: minimum of two of 2.5mm Sq. copper.
 AC/DC Power Supply Circuits : One of 6mm Sq. Aluminium.
 All other circuits: minimum of one of 2.5mm Sq. Copper.
d) There shall be a minimum clearance of 250mm between the first row of

terminal blocks and the associated cable gland plate or panel side wall. Also
the clearance between two rows of terminal blocks edges shall be minimum
of 150mm.
e) Arrangement of the terminal block assemblies and the wiring channel within
the enclosure shall be such that a row of terminal blocks is run in parallel
and close proximity along each side of the wiring-duct to provide for
convenient attachment of internal panel wiring. The side of the terminal
block opposite the wiring duct shall be reserved for the Employer's external
cable connections if any. All adjacent terminal blocks shall also share this
field wiring corridor. All wiring shall be provided with adequate support inside
the panels to hold them firmly and to enable free and flexible termination
without causing strain on terminals.
f) The number and sizes of the Employer's multi core incoming external cables
if any, will be furnished to the Contractor after placement of the order. All
necessary cable terminating accessories such as gland plates, supporting
clamps & brackets, wiring troughs and gutters etc. (except glands & lugs)
for external cables shall be included the scope of supply.
g) There shall be provision of Test block in front of C&R panel so that the
testing of protection relays and energy meter can be carried out without
opening of panel door.

6.18.5 Painting
a) All sheet steel work shall be phosphated in accordance with the IS:6005
"Code of practice for phosphating iron and steel".
b) Oil, grease, dirt and swarf shall be thoroughly removed by emulsion

cleaning.
c) Rust and scale shall be removed by pickling with dilute acid followed by
washing with running water rinsing with a slightly alkaline hot water and
drying.
d) After phosphating, thorough rinsing shall be carried out with clean water
followed by final rinsing with dilute dichromate solution and oven drying.
e) The phosphate coating shall be sealed with application of two coats of ready
mixed, stoved type zinc chromate primer. The first coat may be "flash dried"
while the second coat shall be stoved.
f) After application of the primer, two coats of finishing synthetic enamel paint
shall be applied, each coat followed by stoving. The second finishing coat
shall be applied after inspection of first coat of painting. The exterior colour
of paint shall be of a slightly different shade to enable inspection of the
painting.
g) A small quantity of finished paint shall be supplied for minor touching up

required at site after installation of the panels.
h) In case the bidder proposes to follow any other established painting

procedure like electrostatic painting, the procedure shall be submitted for
DMRC’s review and approval.
6.18.6 Name Plates and Markings
a) All equipment mounted on front and rear side as well as equipment mounted
inside the panels shall be provided with individual name plates with
equipment designation engraved. Also on the top of each panel on front as
well as rear side, large and bold nameplates shall be provided for
circuit/feeder designation.

b) All front mounted equipment shall also be provided at the rear with individual
name plates engraved with tag numbers corresponding to the one shown in
the panel internal wiring to facilitate easy tracing of the wiring.
c) All relays and other devices shall be clearly marked with manufacturer's
name, manufacturer's type, serial number and electrical rating data.
d) Name Plates shall be made of non-rusting metal or 3 ply lamicoid. Name

plates shall be black with white engraving lettering.
e) All the panels shall be provided with name plate mounted inside the panel
bearing LOA No & Date, Name of the Substation & feeder and reference
drawing number.
6.18.7 Miscellaneous Accessories
a) 7 Plug Point: 240V, Single phase 50Hz, AC socket with switch suitable to
accept 5 Amps and 15 Amps pin round standard Indian plug, shall be
provided in the interior of each cubicle with ON-OFF switch.
b) Interior Lighting: Each panel shall be provided with a LED lighting fixture
rated for 240 Volts, single phase, 50 Hz supply for the interior illumination
of the panel controlled by the respective panel door switch. Adequate
lighting shall also be provided for the corridor in Duplex panels.
c) Switches and Fuses: Each panel shall be provided with necessary

arrangements for receiving, distributing and isolating of DC and AC supplies
for various control, signaling, lighting and space heater circuits. The
incoming and sub-circuits shall be separately provided with miniature circuit
breakers (MCB). Selection of the main and sub-circuit MCB rating shall be
such as to ensure selective clearance of sub-circuit faults. MCBs shall
confirm to IS: 13947. Each MCB shall be provided with one potential free
contact and the same shall be wired for annunciation purpose. However
voltage transformer circuits for relaying and metering shall be protected by
fuses. All fuses shall be HRC cartridge type conforming to IS: 13703
mounted on plug-in type fuse bases. . Fuse carrier base as well as MCBs
shall have imprints of the fuse 'rating' and 'voltage'.
d) Space Heater: Each panel shall be provided with a space heater rated for
240V, single phase, 50 Hz Ac supply for the internal heating of the panel to

prevent condensation of moisture. The fittings shall be complete with switch

unit.
6.18.8 Panel Earthing
a) All panels shall be equipped with an earth bus securely fixed. Location of
earth bus shall ensure no radiation interference for earth systems under
various switching conditions of isolators and breakers. The material and the
sizes of the bus bar shall be at least 25 X 6 sq. mm perforated copper or
50x6 mm GI strip with threaded holes at a gap of 50mm with a provision of
bolts and nuts for connection with cable armours and mounted equipment
etc for effective earthing. When several panels are mounted adjoining each
other, the earth bus shall be made continuous and necessary connectors
and clamps for this purpose shall be included in the scope of supply of
Contractor. Provision shall be made for extending the earth bus bars to future
adjoining panels on either side.
b) Provision shall be made on each bus bar of the end panels for connecting
Substation earthing grid. Necessary terminal clamps and connectors for this
purpose shall be included in the scope of supply of Contractor.
c) All metallic cases of relays, instruments and other panel mounted equipment
including gland plate, shall be connected to the earth bus by copper wires of
size not less than 2.5 sq. mm. The colour code of earthing wires shall be
green.
d) Looping of earth connections which would result in loss of earth connection

to other devices when the loop is broken, shall not be permitted. Earthing
may be done in such a manner that no circulating current shall flow in the
panel.
e) VT and CT secondary neutral or common lead shall be earthed at one place

only at the terminal blocks where they enter the panel. Such earthing shall
be made through links so that earthing may be removed from one group
without disturbing continuity of earthing system for other groups.
f) An electrostatic discharge point shall be provided in each panel connected

to earth bus via 1 Mega Ohm resistor.
6.18.9 Testing

All protection schemes /logics etc. shall be tested from Primary side using
primary injection kit. Also all configurations, LED indication, Tripping time,
relay times shall be tested at site as per scheme. The detailed testing
procedure shall be developed in consultation with the Employer and shall be
tested jointly with DMRC.
6.18.10 Support during Installation, Testing and Commissioning by OEM


6.18.11 Training
Suitable training for operation, diagnosis of Relays and protection system

including loading and customization of Relay, installation / software
backup, maintenance , etc shall be provided to employer staff. The detailed
training requirement shall be finalised in consultation with the employer.

7 SUBSTATION AUTOMATION SYSTEM
7.1 General
The substation automation system shall be offered from a manufacturer who

must have designed, manufactured, tested, installed and commissioned
similar substation automation system which must be in satisfactory
operation on 220/132/66 kV system or higher.
The Substation Automation System (SAS) shall be installed at the DMRC

receiving substations (220/132/66 kV) to control and monitor all the sub-
station equipment from remote control centre (RCC) as well as from local
control centre.
The SAS shall contain the following main functional parts:
 Bay Protection Intelligent Electronic device (IEDs) for Protection
 Bay Control Intelligence Electronic Devices (IED s) for control and

monitoring conforming to IEC 61850 standards.
 Dedicated Bay Control Units and Bay Protection Units (BPU) shall be
provided for each bay for Control and protection functionality on
IEC 61850 standard. The Bay Control and Protection IEDs shall
communicate on the IEC 61850 standard for Communication
Networks and shall comply to the IEC 61850-5 for communication
data modelling, IEC 61850-6 for Sub-station Configuration,
Description Language for communication and IEC 61850-7-1 to 7-4
for Data Model and Services.
 Station Human Machine Interface (HMI)
 Redundant Gateway for remote control and monitoring via industrial

grade hardware (to OCC and Backup Control Centre). The gateway
should be able to communicate with OCC protocol. Each gateway
shall have two communication ports for simultaneously reporting to
two masters. The SAS system shall be connected to two control
centers on a fiber optic network using two separate channels and will
not be multi-dropped with other RTUs. The gateway shall have one
spare port for connecting to a third master if required in future. The

specific protocol to be implemented shall be advised to the

successful bidder. It will be the bidder's responsibility to integrate his
offered system with existing OCC system for exchange of desired
data. The redundant gateways at RSS should be compatible with
OCC server Configuration.
 Peripheral equipment like printers, display units, key boards, Mouse

etc.
 Each of the IED/BCU/BPU shall be provided with its similar type of

backup IED/BCU/BPU to ensure redundancy. This means for each
IED/BCU/BPU the second hot standby IED/BCU/BPU should be
provided which should automatically take over the system in the
event of failure of main IED/BCU/BPU. This shall also include the
IED/BCU/BPU of PSA end. The Main and Standby BPU shall be
provided with different make of protection relay to avoid similar
software failure in both main and standby simultaneously.
 The main & standby IED/BPU should work HOT-HOT mode always.
Redundancy i.e Back-up BCU/BPU/IED are to be quoted separately
in financial offer. This should be realized by taking standby control
relay panel complete with the BCU and BPU.
 If specified in BOQ, RSS shall be provided with fixed type digital fault
recorder to monitor outgoing feeders of 25kV traction and 33kV
auxiliary network. The DFR shall have adequate memory for storing
historical data and shall have web and local interface for real time
monitoring and downloading historical data of electrical parameters.
Detailed specifications are at Annexure-17
7.1.1 It shall enable local station control via a PC by means of human machine
interface (HMI) and control software package, which shall contain an
extensive range of supervisory control and data acquisition (SCADA)
functions.
7.1.2 It shall include industrial communication gateway, intelligent electronic

devices (IED) for bay control and inter IED communication infrastructure on
IEC 61850.

7.1.3 The communication gateway shall facilitate the information flow with remote
control centers. The bay level intelligent electronic devices (IED) for
protection and control shall provide the direct connection to the switchgear
without the need of interposing components and perform control, protection,
and monitoring functions.
Layout details of Automation Equipment has been considered to be as

follows:
Bay level intelligent electronic devices (IED) for protection and control shall
be provided in the Control Room. Each IED will be directly connected to the
Work station PC of the Station Automation System through a dual managed
Ethernet LAN on fiber optic medium and shall communicate as per the IEC
61850 standard. The SAS shall be equipped with Gateway for remote
communication as detailed elsewhere in the specification.
7.2 System Design
7.2.1 General System Design
a. The Substation Automation System (SAS) shall be suitable for operation

and monitoring of the Bay level intelligent electronic devices (IED) for
protection and control and shall be provided in the Control Room.
b. Each IED will be directly connected to the Work station PC of the Station
Automation System through a dual managed Ethernet LAN on fiber optic
medium and shall communicate as per the IEC61850 standard.
c. The SAS shall be equipped with Gateway for remote communication as

detailed elsewhere in the specification.
d. The Substation Automation System (SAS) shall be suitable for operation

and monitoring of the complete DMRC receiving substation including future
extensions.
e. The systems shall be of the state-of-the art based on IEC61850 for

operation under electrical conditions present in high-voltage substations
and follow the latest engineering practice, ensure long-term compatibility
requirements and continuity of equipment supply and the safety of the
operating staff.

f. The offered SAS shall support remote control and monitoring from
Operation Control centers (OCC) via gateways.
g. In case of communication failure from OCC, control should be transferred

to RSS automatically. Provision of forced transfer shall also be provided.
h. The system shall be designed such that personnel without any background
knowledge in Microprocessor-based technology are able to operate the
system. The operator interface shall be intuitive so that operating personnel
shall be able to operate the system easily after having received some basic
training.
i. The system shall incorporate the control, monitoring and protection

functions specified, self-monitoring, signalling and testing facilities,
measuring as well as memory functions, event recording and evaluation of
disturbance records.
j. Maintenance, modification or extension of components may not cause a

shutdown of the whole substation automation system. Self-monitoring of
components, modules and communication shall be incorporated to increase
the availability and the reliability of the equipment and minimize
maintenance.
k. License for SAS must have a provision for future expansion i.e spare points
must be available for addition of at least 20% of existing bays.
l. Software license should be independent of hardware. If hardware changes

owing to ageing effect / failure , same software license should be usable.
Software’s shall be upgradeable to latest operating system any update /
patch required for the same shall be supplied free of cost during the design
life of the SAS system.
m. I/O modules in IED must be provided to cater the signals + spare

requirement of the respective bays.
n. The Substation Automation (SAS) shall be suitable for operation and

monitoring of the complete DMRC receiving substation including future
extensions.
Ethernet Topology

The Ethernet communication infrastructure to ensure a certain level of

quality, performance and availability at least the following described
criteria’s have to be fulfilled concerning the Ethernet switches and the
topology.
Ethernet Switches
Ethernet switches that fulfill the hardened requirements concerning

temperature, EMC and power supply (110 V DC from the station battery)
suitable to be installed in substations shall be provided, i.e. the same data
as common for numerical protection. External switches are preferred as they
have the advantage that there is no interruption or reconfiguration of the
Ethernet ring if one or several bay devices are taken out of service.
7.2.2 System Architecture
a) The system architecture shall be based on completely distributed approach

also concerning the connection of any device to the system. Meaning any
device, protection as well as control and station level devices shall directly
be connected to the Ethernet backbone.
b) The SAS shall be based on a decentralized architecture and on a concept

of bay-oriented, distributed intelligence.
c) Functions shall be decentralized, object-oriented and located as close as

possible to the process.
d) The main process information of the station shall be stored in distributed

databases. The typical SAS architecture shall be structured in two levels,
i.e. in a station and a bay level.
e) At bay level, the IEDs shall provide all bay level functions regarding control,
monitoring and protection, inputs for status indication and outputs for
commands. The IEDs should be directly connected to the switchgear
without any need for additional interposition or transducers. Separate BCU
to be provided for controlling of 25 kV Bus Coupler CB.
f) Each bay control IED shall be independent from each other and its
functioning shall not be affected by any fault occurring in any of the other
bay control units of the station.

g) The data exchange between the electronic devices on bay and station level
shall take place via the communication infrastructure. This shall be realized
using fiber-optic cables, thereby guaranteeing disturbance free
communication. The fiber optic cables shall be run in G.I conduit pipes. Data
exchange is to be realized using IEC 61850 Communication standard with
a redundant managed switched Ethernet communication infrastructure
h) All the numerical IEDs must be fully IEC 61850 compliant and must have
the following features.
 Have peer-to-peer communication using GOOSE messages (IEC

61850) for interlocking.
 Should be interoperable with third party IEC 61850 compliant devices
 Should generate XML file for integration/engineering with vendor

independent SCADA systems.
 Should be directly connected to the inter bay bus on IEC 61850

without the use of any gateways. Connections of bay protection IEDs
to the IEC 61850 bus through the bay control units is not acceptable.
i) The communication shall be made in 1+1 mode, excluding the links between
individual bay IEDs to switch, such that failure of one set of fiber shall not
affect the normal operation of the SAS. However it shall be alarmed in SAS.
Each fiber optic cable shall have four (4) spare fibers.
j) At station level, the entire station shall be controlled and supervised from
the station HMI. It shall also be possible to control and monitor the bay from
the bay level equipment at all times.
k) Clear control priorities shall prevent operation of a single switch at the same
time from more than one of the various control levels, i.e. OCC, station HMI,
bay level or apparatus level. The priority shall always be on the lowest
enabled control level.
l) The station level contains the station-oriented functions, which cannot be

realised at bay level, e.g. alarm list or event list related to the entire
substation, gateway for the communication with remote control centers.
m) The GPS time synchronizing signal as per IEC61850 standard SNTP

(Simple network time protocol) for the synchronization of the entire system
shall be provided. The local SAS / SCADA should also be synchronised with
master clock at OCC.
n) Drawings related to network architectural diagram with Proper marking and

ferruling of switches/firewall/LIU/FO cables/Ports shall be submitted for
approval.
o) Details of switches/firewall/LIU etc. shall be submitted for approval.
7.2.3 Functional Requirements
The high-voltage apparatus within the station shall be possible to be

operated from different places:
 Operation Control Centers (OCC)
 Station HMI.
 Local Bay controller IED (in the bays)
 Apparatus Level
Operation shall be possible by only one operator at a time. The operation

shall depend on the conditions of other functions, such as interlocking,
synchro-check, etc.
(a) Select-Before-Execute
For security reasons the command is always to be given in two stages:

selection of the object and command for operation under all mode of
operation except emergency operation. Final execution shall take place only
when selection and command are actuated.
(b) Self-Supervision
Continuous self-supervision function with self-diagnostic feature shall be

included.
(c) User Configuration
The monitoring, controlling and configuration of all input and output logical
signals and binary inputs and relay outputs for all built-in functions and
signals shall be possible both locally and remotely. It shall also be possible

to interconnect and derive input and output signals, logic functions, using
built-in functions, complex voltage and currents, additional logics (AND-
gates, OR gates and timers). (Multi activation of these additional functions
should be possible).
The Functional requirement shall be divided into following levels:
a) Bay (a bay comprises of one circuit breaker and associated

disconnector, earth switches and instrument transformer) Level
Functions
b) System Level Functions
7.3 Bay Level
7.3.1 Bay Level Functions
In a decentralized architecture the functionality shall be as close to the

process as possible. In this respect, the following functions can be allocated
at bay level:
 Bay control functions including data collection functionality.
 Bay protection functions
Separate IEDs shall be provided for bay control function and bay protection
function, However BACKUP O/C Protection functions on Line and
Transformer and on the Bus coupler can be integrated with the Bay control
units on respective circuits.
7.3.1.1 Bay Control Functions
a) Overview
 Control mode selection
 Select-before-execute principle
 Command supervision
 Interlocking and blocking
 Double command
 Synchrocheck, voltage selection
 Backup Protection function

 Run Time Command cancellation
 Transformer tap changer control (for power transformer bays)
 Operation counters for circuit breakers and pumps
 Hydraulic pump/ Air compressor control and runtime supervision
 Operating pressure supervision
 Display of interlocking and blocking
 Breaker position indication per phase
 Alarm annunciation
 Measurement display
 Integrated Graphical LCD HMI to display the Graphical Dynamic

SLD, status information, alarms and disturbances with a display of
26 rows with 40 characters each in text mode 10x8 (large) / 20x15
(small) symbols in graphical mode and with at least 4 levels of
password protected access.
 Interface to the station HMI.
 Data storage for at least 200 events
 Extension possibilities with additional I/0's inside the unit or via fiber
optic communication and process bus
NOTE: Integration of Backup Protection functions (Backup Over current

Protection for Incomer feeder and Transformer, Over current
protection on the Bus coupler) with the Bay control unit will be
acceptable.
b) Control Mode Selection
 Bay level Operation
As soon as the operator receives the operation access at bay level the
operation is normally performed via bay control IED. During normal
operation bay control unit allows the safe operation of all switching devices
via the bay control IED.
 Emergency Operation

It shall be possible to close or open the selected Circuit Breaker with ON or

OFF push buttons even during the outage of bay IED.
 Remote Mode
Control authority in this mode is given to a higher level (Remote Control

Centre) and the installation can be controlled only remotely. Control
operation from lower levels shall not be possible in this operating mode.
c) Synchronism and Energizing Check
The synchronism and energizing check functions shall be bay-oriented and

distributed to the bay control and/or protection devices. These features are:
 Settable voltage, phase angle, and frequency difference.
 Energizing for dead line - live bus, live line - dead bus or dead line
dead bus with no synchro-check function.
 Synchronizing between live line and live bus with synchro-check

function
d) Voltage Selection
The voltages relevant for the synchro-check functions are dependent on the
station topology, i.e. on the positions of the circuit breakers and/or the
isolators. The correct voltage for synchronizing and energizing is derived
from the auxiliary switches of the circuit breakers, the isolator, and earthing
switch and shall be selected automatically by the bay control and protection
IEDs.
7.3.1.2 Bay Protection Functions
a) General
The protection functions are independent of bay control function. The

protection shall be provided by separate protection IEDs (numerical relays)
and other protection devices as per section Relay & Protection.
IEDs, shall be connected to the communication infrastructure for data

sharing and meet the real-time communication requirements for automatic
functions. The data presentation and the configuration of the various IEDs

shall be compatible with the overall system communication and data

exchange requirements.
b) Event and Disturbance Recording Function
Each IED should contain an event recorder capable of storing at least 200
time-tagged events. This shall give alarm if 70% memory is full. CB opening
signal and MTR operating signal shall be assigned in Disturbance Recorder in
all relays.
7.3.2 System Level Functions
7.3.2.1 Status Supervision
The position of each switchgear, e.g. circuit breaker, isolator, earthing

switch, transformer tap changer etc., shall be supervised continuously.
Every detected change of position shall be immediately displayed in the
single-line diagram on the station HMI screen, recorded in the event list, and
a hard copy printout shall be produced. Alarms shall be initiated in the case
of spontaneous position changes.
The switchgear positions shall be indicated by two auxiliary switches,

normally closed (NC) and normally open (NO), which shall give ambivalent
signals. An alarm shall be initiated if these position indications are
inconsistent or if the time required for operating mechanism to change
position exceeds a predefined limit.
The SAS shall also monitor the status of sub-station auxiliaries. The status
and control of auxiliaries shall be done through one or more separate similar
IED/BCU and all alarm and analogue values shall be monitored and recoded
through this IED.
7.3.2.2 Measurements
Analogue inputs for voltage and current measurements shall be connected

directly to the voltage transformers (VT) and the current transformers (CT)
without intermediate transducers. The values of active power (W), reactive
power (VAR), frequency (Hz), and the rms values for voltage (U) and current
(1) shall be calculated.

The measured values shall be displayed locally on the station HMI and in
the control centre. The abnormal values must be discarded. The analogue
values shall be updated every 2 seconds. Threshold limit values shall be
selectable for alarm indications.
7.3.2.3 Event and Alarm Handling
Events and alarms are generated either by the switchgear, by the control
IEDs, or by the station level unit. They shall be recorded in an event list in
the station HMI. Alarms shall be recorded in a separate alarm list and
appear on the screen. All or a freely selectable group of events and alarms
shall also be printed out on an event printer. The alarms and events shall
be time-tagged with a time resolution of 1 ms.
7.3.2.4 Station HMI
i) Substation HMI Operation:
On the HMI the object has to be selected first. In case of a blocking or

interlocking conditions are not met, the selection shall not be possible and
an appropriate alarm annunciation shall occur. If a selection is valid the
position indication will show the possible direction, and the appropriate
control execution button shall be pressed in order to close or open the
corresponding object.
Control operation from other places (e.g. REMOTE) shall not be possible in
this operating mode.
ii) Presentation and Dialogues
General
The operator station HMI shall be a redundant with hot standby and shall
provide basic functions for supervision and control of the substation. The
operator shall give commands to the switchgear on the screen via mouse
clicks or keyboard commands.
The HMI shall give the operator access to alarms and events displayed on
the screen. Aside from these lists on the screen, there shall be a printout of
alarms or events in an event log.

An acoustic alarm shall indicate abnormalities, and all unacknowledged

alarms shall be accessible from any screen selected by the operator.
The following standard pictures shall be available from the HMI:
 Single-line diagram showing the switchgear status and measured

values
 Control dialogues with interlocking and blocking details. This control

dialogue shall tell the operator whether the device operation is
permitted or blocked.
 Measurement dialogues
 Alarm list, station / bay-oriented
 Event list, station / bay-oriented
 System status
iii) HMI Design Principles
Consistent design principles shall be adopted with the HMI concerning

labels, colors, dialogues and fonts. Non-valid selections shall be dimmed
out.
The object status shall be indicated using different status colors for:
 Selected object under command
 Selected on the screen
 Not updated, obsolete values, not in use or not sampled
 Alarm or faulty state
 Warning or blocked
 Update blocked or manually updated
 Control blocked
 Normal state
 Bus bar coloration to be provided as Red- Discharged, Green-

Charged, Pink- No Communication, Yellow- Earthed and to be same
in both main as well as standby server.

 Dynamic overview of gateway along with status of gateway (Hot or

Cold) should be available at operator terminal.
iv) Process Status Display and Command Procedures
The process status of the substation in terms of actual values of currents,

voltages, frequency, active and reactive powers as well as the positions of
circuit breakers, isolators and transformer tap-changers shall be displayed
in the station single-line diagram.
In order to ensure a high degree of security against undesired operation, a

"select-before-execute" command procedure shall be provided. After the
"selection" of a switch, the operator shall be able to recognize the selected
device on the screen, and all other switchgear shall be blocked. As
communication between control centre and device to be controlled is
established, the operator shall be prompted to confirm the control action and
only then final execute command shall be accepted. After the "execution" of
the command the operated switching symbol shall flash until the switch has
reached its new position.
The operator shall be in a position to execute a command only, if the switch

is not blocked and if no interlocking condition is going to be violated. The
interlocking statements shall be checked by the interlocking scheme
implemented at bay and station level.
After command execution the operator shall receive a confirmation that the
new switching position has been reached or an indication that the switching
procedure was unsuccessful with the indication of the reason for non-
functioning.
There must be provision a provision of pop ups for critical signals for easy
identification of operator. Pop up/ tag shall remain until acknowledgement
of alarm.
v) System Supervision & Display
The SAS system shall be comprehensively self-monitored such that faults

are immediately indicated to the operator, possibly before they develop into
serious situations. Such faults are recorded as a faulty status in a system
supervision display. This display shall cover the status of the entire

substation including all switchgear, IEDs, communication infrastructure and

remote communication links, and printers at the station level, etc.
 Dynamic overview of gateways to be provided in operator terminal at

RSS
vi) Event List
The event list shall contain events that are important for the control and
monitoring of the substation. The event and associated time (with 1 ms
resolution) of its occurrence has to be displayed for each event.
The operator shall be able to call up the chronological event list on the
monitor at any time for the whole substation or sections of it. A printout of
each display shall be possible on the hard copy printer.
The events shall be registered in a chronological event list in which the type
of event and its time of occurrence are specified. It shall be possible to store
all events in the computer for at least one month. The information shall be
obtainable also from a printed event log.
The chronological event list shall contain:
 Position changes of circuit breakers, isolators and earthing devices
 Indication of protective relay operations
 Fault signals from the switchgear
 Indication when analogue measured values exceed upper and lower

limits. Suitable provision shall be made in the system to define two
level of alarm on either side of the value or which shall be user
defined for each measured.
 Loss of communication.
Filters for selection of a certain type or group of events shall be available.

The filters shall be designed to enable viewing of events grouped per:
 Date and time
 Bay
 Device

 Function e.g. trips, protection operations etc.
 Alarm class
All the events shall be accessible to the operator all the time. In case of
exhaustion of the system capability, deletion of events should occur in “First
In, First Out” basis i.e. event which has been registered first in the system
should be first one to be deleted.
vii) Alarm List
Faults and errors occurring in the substation shall be listed in an alarm list
and shall be immediately transmitted to the control centre. The alarm list
shall substitute a conventional alarm tableau, and shall constitute an
evaluation of all station alarms. It shall contain unacknowledged alarms and
persisting faults. The date and time of occurrence shall be indicated. The
alarm list shall consist of a summary display of the present alarm situation.
Each alarm shall be reported on one line that contains:
 The date and time of the alarm
 The name of the alarming object
 A descriptive text
 The acknowledgement state.
Whenever an alarm condition occurs, the alarm condition must be shown

on the alarm list and must be displayed in a flashing state along with an
audible alarm. After acknowledgement of the alarm, it should appear in a
steady (i.e. not flashing) state and the audible alarm shall stop. The alarm
should disappear only if the alarm condition has physically cleared and the
operator has reset the alarm with a reset command. The state of the alarms
shall be shown in the alarm list (Unacknowledged and persistent,
Unacknowledged and cleared, Acknowledged and persistent). Filters for
selection of a certain type or group of alarms shall be available as for events.
viii) Object picture
When selecting an object such as a circuit breaker or isolator in the single

line diagram, the associated bay picture shall be presented first. In the
selected object picture, all attributes like

 Type of blocking
 Authority
 Local / remote control
 ALDC/SAS control
 Errors etc.,
shall be displayed.
ix) Control Dialogues
The operator shall give commands to the system by means of mouse click
located on the single-line diagram. It shall also be possible to use the
keyboard for command activation. Data entry is performed with the
keyboard. Dedicated control dialogues for controlling at least the following
devices shall be available:
 Breaker and disconnector
7.3.2.5 User-Authority Levels
It shall be possible to restrict activation of the process pictures of each object

(bays, apparatus...) within a certain user authorization group. Each user
shall then be given access rights to each group of objects, e.g.:
 Display only
 Normal operation (e.g. open/close of switchgear)
 Restricted operation (e.g. by-passed interlocking)
 System administrator
For maintenance and engineering purposes of the station HMI, the following
authorization levels shall be available:
 No engineering allowed
 Engineering/configuration allowed
 Entire system management allowed
The access rights shall be defined by passwords assigned during the login
procedure. Only the system administrator shall be able to add/remove users

and change access rights. The System ID from which operation is

performed shall be logged in the event list.
7.3.2.6 Reports
The reports shall provide time-related follow-ups of measured and

calculated values. The data displayed shall comprise:
 Trend reports:
 Day (mean, peak)
 Month (mean, peak)
 Semi-annual (mean, peak)
 Year (mean, peak)
 Historical reports of selected analogue Values:
 Day (at 15 minutes interval)
 Week
 Month
 Year
It shall be possible to select displayed values from the database in

the process display on-line. Scrolling between e.g. days shall be possible.
Unsure values shall be indicated. It shall be possible to select the time
period for which the specific data are kept in the memory.
Following printouts shall essentially be available from the printer and shall
be printed on demand (List is not exclusive):
a) Daily voltage and frequency curves depicting time on X-axis and

the appropriate parameters on the Y-axis. The time duration of the
curve is 24 hours.
b) Weekly trend curves for real and derived analogue values.
c) Printouts of the maximum and minimum values and frequency of

occurrence and duration of maximum and minimum values for each
analogue parameter for each circuit in 24 hr period.

d) Provision shall be made for logging information about breaker status

like number of operation with date and time indications.
e) Equipment operation details shift wise and during 24 hours.
f) Printout on adjustable time period as well as on demand for MW,

MVAR, Current, Voltage on each feeder and transformer as well as
Tap Positions, temperature and status of pumps and fans for
transformers.
g) Printout on adjustable time period as well as on demand system

frequency and average frequency.
h) Reports in specified formats which shall be handed over to

successful bidder.
7.3.2.7 Trend Display (Historical Data)
It shall be possible to illustrate all types of process data as trends - input

and output data, binary and analogue data. The trends shall be displayed in
graphical form as column or curve diagrams with a maximum of 10 trends
per screen. Adjustable time span and scaling ranges must be provided.
It shall be possible to change the type of value logging (direct, mean, sum,
or difference) on-line in the window. It shall also be possible to change the
update intervals on-line in the picture as well as the selection of threshold
values for alarming purposes.
7.3.2.8 Automatic Disturbance File Transfer
All recorded data from the IEDs with integrated disturbance recorder as well
as dedicated disturbance recording systems shall be automatically
uploaded (event triggered or once per day) to a dedicated computer and be
stored on the hard disc.
Complete detail / data of disturbance recorder (DR) should be available at

OCC. The DRPC data shall be communicated to OCC and Metro Bhwan
using network communication. In case of tripping of 25 kV feeders, details
regarding fault distance, fault current and fault voltage should be available
at OCC
7.3.2.9 Disturbance Analysis

The PC-based work station shall have necessary software to evaluate all
the required information for proper fault analysis.
7.3.2.10 IED Parameter Setting
It shall be possible to access all protection and control IEDs for reading the
parameters (settings) from a dedicated monitoring computer. The setting of
parameters or the activation of parameter sets shall only be allowed after
entering a password.
7.3.2.11 Automatic Sequences
The available automatic sequences in the system should be listed and

described, (e.g. sequences related to the bus transfer). It must be possible
to initiate pre-defined automatic sequences by the operator and also define
new automatic sequences.
7.3.3 Gateway:
The gateway hardware shall be of latest technology and of industrial grade

with RTU based technology, PC based gateways are not acceptable. RTU
must be of same make as per Traction contractor to avoid interface issues.
7.3.3.1 Communication Interface
The Substation Automation System shall have the capability to support

simultaneous communications with multiple independent remote master
stations. The Substation Automation System shall have communication
ports as follows:-
 Two ports for simultaneous reporting to two masters, Operation

Control Centre (OCC), both the ports shall work in HOT-HOT
configuration necessary interface to ascertain compatibility with the
SCADA system shall be done by the RSS contractor during design
stage.
 One spare port for connecting to a third master if required in future.
7.3.3.2 Communication Protocol
The communication protocol between IED’s and station HMI shall be on the
global Automation standard IEC 61850 at inter bay level and shall be on IEC

870-5-/104 or existing compatible protocol for communication from local

RSS to the OCC. SCADA Gateway to OCC at RSS shall be independent of
the station LCC that is Substation SAS shall communicate with OCC even
if the Local control centre fails.
7.3.4 System Hardware
The system hardware shall be of latest technology and of industrial grade.

The latest available specification / configuration of Hardware and software
including windows in the industry at the time of installation and
commissioning of servers, must be proposed by the contractor for approval
of the Employer before procurement. For details specification refer
Annexure -20 of chapter 8A.
The servers etc. shall be housed in lockable rack type panels. All the
servers, gateways shall be provided in rack panels with proper ventilation /
heat dissipation arrangement by providing fans controlled by temperature
indicator, thermostat and with suitable filters. Alarm / status of healthiness
of fan shall be taken on SCADA. The integrated server panel shall be
provided by the server supplier. Maintenance instruction for server shall also
be provided by OEM. The server rack panel shall be with glass front door
of full height, The server panel shall have sufficient space to accommodate
OCC communication equipment. Necessary interface with SCADA
contractor shall be done during design stage.
7.3.4.1 Station HMI, and Disturbance Recorder Work station:
The contractor shall provide station HMI. It shall be capable to perform

all functions for entire substation including future requirements as
indicated in the SLD.
a) HMI (Human Machine Interface)
The VDU shall show overview diagrams (Single Line Diagrams) and
complete details of the switchgear with a colour display. All event and alarm
annunciation shall be selectable in the form of lists. Operation shall be by a
user friendly function keyboard and a cursor positioning device. The user
interface shall be based on latest WINDOWS concepts with graphics &
facility for panning, scrolling, zooming, decluttering etc.

All unused USB / network ports to be sealed and blocked to prevent

unauthorised access.
b) LED Visual Display Units
The contractor shall provide three display units , one for station HMI, one
for redundant HMI and one for DR work station. These shall have high
resolution and reflection protected picture screen. High stability of the
picture geometry shall be ensured. The screen shall be at least 32"
diagonally in size and capable of colour graphic displays.
The HMI shall be able to switch the key board and cursor positioning device,
as unit among all the monitors at a console with push button or other
controls.
c) Printer
It shall be robust & suitable for operation with a minimum of 132 characters
per line. The printing operation shall be quiet with a noise level of less than
45 dB suitable for location in the control room. Printer shall accept and print
all ASCII characters via master control computer unit interface.
The printer shall have in built testing facility. Failure of the printer shall be
indicated in the Station HMI. The printer shall have an off line mode selector
switch to enable safe maintenance. The maintenance should be simple with
provisions for ease of change of print head, ribbon changing, paper insertion
etc.
All printers mounted in the control room shall be provided with a separate
printer enclosure each. The enclosure shall be designed to permit full
enclosure of the printers at a convenient level. Plexiglas windows shall be
used to provide visual inspection of the printers and ease of reading. The
printer enclosures shall be designed to protect the printers from accidental
external contact & each should be removable from hinges at the back and
shall be provided with lock at the front.
All reports and graphics prints shall be printed on laser printer. One dot
matrix printer shall be exclusively used for hourly log printing. All printers
shall be continuously online.

d) Mass Storage Unit
The mass storage unit shall be built-in to the Station HMI. All operational
measured values, and indications shall be stored in a mass-storage unit of
CD-ROM / DVD-ROM with 4 GB or more capacity. The unit should support
at least Read (48X), Write (24X), and Re-Write (1 OX) operations, with Multi-
Session capability. It should support IS09660, Rockridge and Joliet File
systems. It should support formatting and use under the operating system
provided for Station HMI. The monthly back up of data shall be taken on
disc. The facility of back up of data shall be inherent in the software.
e) Switched Ethernet Communication Infrastructure:
The bidder shall provide the redundant switched optical Ethernet

communication infrastructure for SAS. The bidder shall keep provision of
100% spare capacity for employer use. One switch shall be provided to
connect all IEDs for two bays of DMRC receiving Substation to
communication infrastructure. Integrated Switches are not acceptable. The
switches shall be equipped with fully integrated redundant power supply. It
shall support priority tagging and SNMP for supervision. The switching time
shall be as low as 5ms per switch. The switch shall be of industrial grade
hardware with EMC to meet SA environment.
Network Management System (NMS) shall be provided as a comprehensive

platform for monitoring, configuring and maintenance of network switches.
7.3.4.2 Bay Level Unit
The bay unit shall use industrial grade components. The bay level unit,
based on microprocessor technology, shall use numerical techniques for the
calculation and evaluation of externally input analogue signals. They shall
incorporate select-before-operate control principles as safety measures for
operation via the HMI. They shall perform all bay related functions, such as
control commands, bay interlocking, data acquisition, data storage, event
recording and shall provide inputs for status indication and outputs for
commands. They shall be directly connected to the switchgear. The bay unit
shall acquire and process all data for the bay (Equipment status, fault
indications, measured values, alarms etc.) and transmit these to the other

devices in sub-station automation system. In addition, this shall receive the

operation commands from station HMI and control centre. The bay unit shall
have the capability to store all the data required as per design of system
reliability . The bay control unit shall be a fully complaint to IEC 61850
standard with icd file furnished for individual IED’s in line with the IEC 61850
standards.
One no. Bay level unit shall be provided for supervision and control of each,
220/132/66kV bay (a bay comprises of one circuit breaker and associated
disconnector, earth switches and instrument transformer). The Bay level
unit shall be equipped with analogue and binary inputs/outputs for handling
the control, status monitoring and analogue measurement functions. For
220/132/66 kV Incomer feeder circuits as well as Transformers circuits and
Bus coupler circuits integration of O/C function within the bay control unit
shall be acceptable.. All bay level interlocks are to be incorporated in the
Bay level unit so as to permit control from the Bay level unit, with all bay
interlocks in place, during maintenance and commissioning or in case of
contingencies when the Station HMI is out of service.
The Bay level unit shall be a fully compliant to IEC 61850 terminal and also
meet the all operational requirements for withstanding electromagnetic
interference according to relevant parts of IEC 61850 standards. Failure of
any single component within the equipment shall neither cause unwanted
operation nor lead to a complete system breakdown.
7.3.4.3 Extendibility in Future
The Offered SAS shall be based on the latest global automation standard
IEC 61850 which as part of it supports future seamless extension and
integration of additional fully complaint IEC 61850 IED’s of other suppliers.
Offered substation automation system shall be suitable for extension in

future for additional bays. During such requirement, all the drawings and
configurations, alarm/event list etc. displayed shall be designed/provided in
such a manner that its extension shall be easily performed by the
contractor/employer. During such event, normal operation of the existing
substation shall be unaffected and system shall not require a shutdown. The

contractor shall provide all necessary software tools along with source
codes to perform addition of bays in future and complete integration with
SAS by the user.
These SCADA / SAS software tools shall be able to configure IED, add
additional analogue variable, alarm list, event list, modify interlocking logics
etc. for additional bays/equipment which shall be added in future with IEDs
of same manufacture/ different manufacture. The all IED are also
compatible to configure / interface with SCADA / SAS software of same
manufacturer / different manufacturer.
7.3.5 Software Structure
The software package shall be structured according to the SAS architecture

and strictly divided in various levels. Necessary Hardwire firewall shall be
provided at suitable points in software to protect the system. An extension
of the station shall be possible with lowest possible efforts. Maintenance,
modification or an extension of components of any feeder may not force a
shut-down of the parts of the system which are not affected by the system
adaptation. For SCADA / SAS - Hardware and software key must be
provided to prevent unauthorised access.
7.3.5.1 Station Level Software:
Human-Machine Interface (HMI)
The base HMI software package for the operator station shall include the
main SAS functions and it shall be independent of project specific hardware
version and operating system. It shall further include tools for picture editing,
engineering and system configuration. The system shall be easy to use,
to maintain, and to adapt according to specific user requirements. Systems
shall contain a library with standard functions and applications.
7.3.5.2 Bay Level Software:
a) System software
The system software shall be structured in various levels. This software

shall be placed in a non-volatile memory. The lowest level shall assure
system performance and contain basic functions, which shall not be

accessible by the application and maintenance engineer for modifications.

The system shall support the generation of typical control macros and a
process database for user specific data storage. In case of restoration of
links after failure, the software along with hardware shall be capable of
automatically synchronizing with the remaining system without any manual
interface. This shall be demonstrated by contractor during integrated system
test.
b) Application software
In order to ensure robust quality and reliable software functions, the main
part of the application software shall consist of standard software modules
built as functional block elements. The functional blocks shall be
documented and thoroughly tested. They form part of a library. The
application software within the control/protection devices shall be
programmed in a functional block language.
c) Network Management System
The contractor shall provide Network Management System software for

following management functions:
 Configuration Management
 Fault Management
 Performance Monitoring
This system shall be used for management of communication devices and

other IEDs in the system. This NMS can be loaded in DR work-station and
shall be easy to use, user friendly and menu based. The NMS shall monitor
all the devices in the SAS and report if there is any fault in the monitored
devices. The NMS shall
 Maintain performance, resource usage, and error statistics for all

managed links and devices and present this information via displays,
periodic reports and on demand reports.
 Maintain a graphical display of SAS connectivity and device status.
 Issue alarms when error conditions occurs

 Provide facility to add and delete addresses and links
d) The contractor shall provide each software in two copies in CD to load into
the system in case of any problem related with Hardware/Communication
etc.
7.3.6 Tests
The substation automation system (IEDs) offered by the bidder shall be

subjected to following tests to establish compliance with IEC 61850 for EHV
sub station equipment installed in sheltered area in the outdoor switchyard
an specified ambient conditions. Each IED/BPU/BCU should confirms to
environment factor class 3C2 as per IEC 60721-3-3 for Very highly Polluted
area. Relay Cards must have conformal coating and confirming with IEC
60815 - 1996 and tested for H2S, So2 and mixed gas tests as per IEC 60068
- 1 & 2.
7.3.6.1 Type Tests:
7.3.6.1.1 Control IEDs and Communication Equipment
a) Power Input:
 Auxiliary Voltage, Current Circuits, Voltage Circuits, Indications
b) Accuracy Tests :
 Operational Measured Values, Currents, Voltages, Time resolution
c) Insulation Tests:
 Dielectric Tests, Impulse Voltage withstand Test
d) Influencing Quantities
 Limits of operation, Permissible ripples, Interruption of input voltage
e) Electromagnetic Compatibility Test:
 1 MHZ. burst disturbance test, Electrostatic Discharge Test,
 Radiated Electromagnetic Field Disturbance Test
 Electrical Fast transient Disturbance Test
 Conducted Disturbances Tests induced by Radio Frequency Field

 Magnetic Field Test, Emission (Radio interference level) Test.
 Conducted Interference Test
f) Function Tests :
 Indication, Commands, Measured value Acquisition, Display

Indications
g) Environmental tests
 Cold Temperature, Dry Heat, Wet heat, Humidity (Damp heat Cycle)
 Vibration, Bump, Shock
 All relay shall be type tested as per IEC-60068-2-60 for Acidic and
heavy pollution environment, H2S, SO2, mixed gas tests
7.3.6.2 Factory Acceptance Tests:
The supplier shall submit a test specification for factory acceptance test
(FAT) and commissioning tests of the station automation system for
approval. For the individual bay level lED's applicable type test certificates
shall be submitted.
The manufacturing phase of the SAS shall be concluded by the factory

acceptance test (FAT). The purpose is to ensure that the Contractor has
interpreted the specified requirements correctly and that the FAT includes
checking to the degree required by the user. The general philosophy shall
be to deliver a system to site only after it has been thoroughly tested and its
specified performance has been verified, as far as site conditions can be
simulated in a test lab. If the FAT comprises only a certain portion of the
system for practical reason, it has to be assured that this test configuration
contains at least one unit of each and every type of equipment incorporated
in the delivered system.
If the complete system consists of parts from various suppliers or some

parts are already installed on site, the FAT shall be limited to sub-system
tests. In such a case, the complete system test shall be performed on site
together with the site acceptance test (SAT).
7.3.6.3 Integrated Testing;

The integrated system tests shall be performed as detailed in subsequent

clauses as per following configuration:
• Station HMI, DR work station, switches along with all IEDs and
printers.
All other switches for complete sub-station as detailed in section project

shall be simulated as needed.
7.3.7 Power Supply
Power for the substation automation system shall be derived from

substation 110V DC system. Online Inverter/s for each RSS of suitable
capacity shall be provided for station HMI and its peripheral devices e.g.
printer etc. Refer Annexure 3 for Inverter specifications. In the event of
Power failure, necessary safeguard software shall be built for proper
shutdown and restart.
7.3.8 Furniture
The SAS shall be supplied with the appropriate furniture to cater the SAS
equipment including the Storage, DESK and Chairs etc. The type and
designs shall be approved by the Engineer to commensurate with at-least
that provided in the existing DMRC RSS.
The space shall also be provided for placing of SCADA servers, RTUs, HMI
etc. The provision of back up SCADA shall however be in scope of other
bidder
7.3.9 Training
Suitable training for operation and diagnosis of Substation Automation and

networking system including installation / software backup etc shall be
provided to employer staff. The detailed training requirement shall be
finalised in consultation with the employer.
7.3.10 Support during Installation, Testing and Commissioning by OEM




8 CABLING
8.1 General
All cables including HV 220 kV, 132 kV, 33 kV, 25 kV and LV cables required
for works in the RSS, except where otherwise stated specifically in this
Tender Documents, shall be supplied and installed by the Contractor.
EHV Cables from the TRANSCO Substations / from existing 220/132/66 kV

line to the RSS:
At GSS End: RSS Contractor will supply 220/132/66 kV terminations,

220/132/66 kV LAs, structures, jumpers & connectors), design and erection
of equipment, their foundations and structure and connecting these
equipment with PSA equipment. The cable path and laying of EHV cables
inside the RSS and GSS premises will be provided by the RSS Contractor.
At RSS end: RSS Contractor will provide suitable trench from entry point of
cable in yard to RSS building and then suitable tray/path to GIS cable
cellar/trench. GIS terminations and its installation, Structures to hold the
cable with termination in cable cellar/trench. Wooden cable support at RSS
is not durable therefore Aluminium cable support / clamps with suitable
cushion may be provided in all cable support at RSS. At unavoidable
locations where Copper cables are provided on angles, proper designed
supports as per relevant IEC standard may be provided to prevent theft.
The exceptions are:
a) 33 kV cables from the AMS to the designated ASS (These cables will be
supplied and erected by the Traction Contractor. Cable paths for these
cables inside the AMS Room and in the yard, up to RSS fencing / boundary
wall will be provided by the RSS Contractor).
b) 25 kV cables from the outgoing 25 kV Switchgear to the 25 kV feeding post

on the alignment. (These cables will be supplied and installed by the
Traction Contractor. Cable paths for these cables up to the RSS fencing /
boundary wall will be provided by the RSS Contractor).

c) Traction Return current cables between the running tracks and the buried
rail or (Negative Return Panel) in the RSS. (These cables will be supplied
and installed by the Traction Contractor. Cable paths for these cables inside
the RSS premises, up to the RSS fencing / boundary wall will be provided
by the RSS Contractor).
Cable insulation
All cables including, 33 kV, 25 kV and LV, required for works inside the RSS
shall be FRLS (Fire Retardant Low Smoke) Type.
Sealing
All the indoor and outdoor cable trench openings to be sealed properly
through EPDM Modular based Cable sealing system or equivalent. The
modules should be “Low Smoke Index, Halogen free cross-linkable rubber
compound based on EPDM (Ethylene-Propylene Diene Terepolymer)” or
equivalent. The system should ensure fool proof protection against hazards
induced by
 Water, Dust, Humidity
 Fire
 Energy Saving (avoid cooling loss & saves AC power)
 Vibrations
 Temperature Variations
 Pull tension
 Noise as well as Rodents to transit (in/out) cables / Pipes.
All cables penetrations of fire-rated walls or floors shall be sealed with a

(multi-cable transit block) system for use in multi-cable transit frames.
 The multi-cable transit system should cover all cable diameters with
a module adapter system where no peeling of single layers is
necessary.
 The module adapters should be colour-coded adapter system like

Red, Grey & Black for visual inspection to ensure that the cable
transits are installed in full compliance.

 The inserting of the adapter module into the module and re-moving
of the module adapters out of the module, respectively, should be
reversible.
 For small to medium cables, the single modules should be interlinked

for easy installation. It should also be possible to separate the
interlinked modules for individual use.
 Vendor needs to provide air blast loading test report with 42 bar
pressure.
 System should have water tightness up to 11 Bar & Gas tightness up

to 7 bar, ATEX approval and age testing certification.
 Frame/Sleeve SS material shall be AISI 316
 The Modular based Cable Sealing & Protection system conforming

to IP65.
 Test Certificates shall be considere issued from International reputed

agency like UL, FM. Also should be seismic tested.
 Application shall be done by Accredited speciality contractor

(HAFSC) and once execution done, complete report should be
submitted using CFS DM software.
8.2 EHV 220/132/66 kV Cables
This specification defines the objectives, guidelines and requirements for

Supply, laying, testing and commissioning of Extra High Voltage Cables
220/132/66 kV from the Receiving Substations of Power Supply Authorities
to the Receiving Substations of DMRC.
The Details of feeders and approximate cable route length for different RSS
are detailed in Chapter -1 of this PS
The works to be executed under the Contract include Design, Manufacture,

transfer of technology, delivery, installation, testing, including integrated
testing and commissioning, technical support, supervision of maintenance,
training of Employer’s staff and documentation for a complete System
necessary to deliver the requirements of this Specification.

8.2.1 EHV Cables
Detailed Description and Its Application
This specification defines the objectives, guidelines and requirements for

Supply, laying, testing and commissioning of High Voltage Cables 66 kV
from the Grid Substations (GSS) of Power Supply Authorities (PSA) to the
Receiving Substations (RSS) of DMRC, or for use at any other locations as
required.
The function of HV Cables is to provide a reliable and maintenance free link

with a 100% standby for feeding power from GSS of PSA to RSS of DMRC
commensurate with the installed transformer capacity. The details of
transformer installed capacities with overload capacities shall be furnished
in tabular form depending at the time of necessity for communicating the
approximate current cable capacity requirement to the contractor. The cable
sizes shall also be worked out according to the rated capacity.
Power Supply characteristics shall be as per latest applicable Indian grid

standards notified by Central Electricity Authority (CEA), India, as amended
from time to time. The reference characteristics of the network are tabulated
as under:
Rated voltage (rms) 220 kV 132 kV 66 kV

Maximum voltage (rms) 245 kV 145 kV 72.5 kV
Frequency 50 Hz 50 Hz 50 Hz
Neutral Solidly earthed Solidly earthed Solidly earthed
Short circuit current 40 kA for 3 sec 31.5 kA for 3 sec 20 kA for 3 sec
Current rating for cables shall be determined taking into consideration the
following installation methods as applicable:
 In the tunnels
 In cast –in pipes
 Trenches
 On brackets
 Ducts
And on the following as per design data:
 temperature correction

 thermal resistivity
 laying depth
 cable distance
 cable grouping factor etc
8.2.1.1 Governing Specifications
The details and specifications applicable to the 66 kV cables are as

under:
The cables shall be of 38/66 kV grade. The cable shall be single core,
stranded circular Aluminum conductor, XLPE insulated, corrugated
Aluminum or Corrugated Copper sheathed suited for rated fault current and
short circuit power, outer covering HDPE sheath and overall graphite
coated, conforming to IEC 60840 for 66 kV. Multiple runs of cables to be
provided as per current carrying capacity. The conductor cross section shall
be as specified in BOQ / Data sheet.
The EHV Cables shall satisfy the requirements given below and shall also
comply with standards in force when the cables are manufactured,
particularly which are in the following table. (Unless otherwise stipulated in
the specifications, the latest version of the following Standards shall be
applicable). :

Power cables with extruded insulation and
their accessories for rated voltage above 30
1. IEC 60840 latest
kV and up to 150 kV- Test Methods &
requirements.
Power Cables with extruded insulation and
2. IEC: 62067 latest their accessories for rated voltages above
150kV.
3. IEC : 60228 – latest Conductors for insulated cables.
IEC: 60502–2-latest
Cross linked polyethylene insulated
4. Applicable clause
Thermoplastic sheathed cables.
only
Power cables with extruded insulation and
their accessories for rated voltage above 30
5. IEC 60840 latest
kV and up to 150 kV- Test Methods &
requirements.
Power Cables with extruded insulation and
6. IEC: 62067 latest their accessories for rated voltages above
150kV.

7. IEC 60230 latest. Impulse test on cables & their accessories.

Calculation of the cyclic and emergency
current rating of cables. Part 2: Cyclic rating
8. IEC 60853-2 latest.
of cables greater than 18/30 (36) kV and
emergency ratings for cables of all voltages
Common test methods for insulating and
7. IEC 60811 latest.
sheathing material of electrical cables.
Electrical test methods for electric cables.
IEC 60885- Part 3 Part 3: Test methods for partial discharge
8.
latest. measurements on lengths of extruded
power cables
IEEE Guide for Field Testing of Shielded
IEEE Std 400.2™-
9. Power Cable Systems Using Very Low
2013
Frequency (VLF) (less than 1 Hz)
8.2.1.2 Abbreviations
 IEC – International Electro technical Council
 ASTM- American Society for Testing and Materials
 IS- Indian Standard
 TSS – Traction Sub Station
 ASS – Auxiliary Sub Station
 RSS – Receiving Sub Station
 OHE – Over Head Equipment
 XLPE – Cross Linked Poly Ethylene
 FRLS – Fire Retardant Low Smoke
 FRLSZH – Fire Retardant Low Smoke Zero Halogen
 FP – Feeding Post
 ACTM – AC Traction Manual
 SP- Sectioning Post
 SSP – Sub Sectioning and Paralleling Post
 SS – Sub Sectioning Station
8.2.1.3 Construction:
All materials used in the manufacture of cable shall be new, unused and of
finest quality. All materials should comply with the applicable provision of

the tests of the specification. IS, IEC, Indian Electricity Rules, Indian
Electricity Act and any other applicable statutory provisions rules and
regulations.
The various Constructional features required for the 66 kV EHV cables are
as under:
i) Conductor
The Conductor shall be of Aluminum with a cross section as specified in

BOQ / Data sheet. The construction shall be reverse concentric stranded
Aluminum, compressed conductor. The Manufacturer shall indicate the
following details :
 Number of wires
 Diameter of wires
 Quality of Aluminium
 Thickness and construction of sheath.
The conductor shall be formed from Aluminum conductor according to class

2 (compact circular stranded) complied with IEC 60228 latest publication.
The maximum temperatures admissible for the conductor are as follow:
 Continuous service 90ºC
 Overload condition 105ºC
 Short Circuit condition 250ºC
ii) Conductor Screen
A Conductor screen made of semiconducting compound shall be provided

over the conductor, by extrusion. The extruded coat shall be continuous,
with a constant mean depth, without bump, perfectly adhering to the
insulation envelope. A semiconducting tape(s) shall be provided below the
extruded semi-conducting conductor screen to prevent penetration of the
compound into the underlying conductor. Minimum thickness of the
conductor screen shall be 0.55 mm for 66 kV cables respectively. The
electric resistivity of the conductor screen shall not be more than 5000 Ώ cm
at 20ºC and not more than 25000 Ώ cm at the working rated temperature.

iii) Insulation
The Insulation envelope shall be of cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE)

insulation applied by extrusion.
Cable Nominal thickness of insulation As per IEC
66 kV > 11 mm 60840
The voltage gradient in the rated working conditions shall be
 Equal to or less than 6 kV/mm at the level of internal semiconductor
 Equal to or less than 3 kV/mm at the level of external semiconductor
The mechanical characteristics shall be as follow:
In delivery condition
 minimal traction resistance : 12.5 Mpa
 minimal elongation before breaking : 200%
After ageing of 240 h at 135 °C
 maximal variation of traction resistance :  25%
 maximal variation of elongation before breaking :  25%
The isolating envelope shall comply with the hot condition elongation test:
 temperature : (2003) °C
 on load duration : 15 minutes
 mechanical constraint : 0.2 Mpa
 maximal elongation on load : 100%
 maximal elongation after cooling : 15%
The insulation compound shall be of high quality, heat, moisture, ozone and
corona resistant. XLPE compound should be from reputed manufacturer
e.g. Borealis Sweden or NUC Japan or equivalent with satisfactory service
experience of more than 5 years. The Insulation shall be applied by triple
extrusion and vulcanized using dry curing process to form a compact
homogenous body free from micro voids and contaminants. The insulation

shall be suitable for operation in wet or dry locations at conductor

temperature not exceeding 90 deg. C for normal operation, and 250 deg. C
for short circuit conditions.
iv) Insulation Screen
The Insulation screening shall be applied direct upon the insulation and shall
be of a layer of extruded semi conducting thermosetting compound firmly
and totally bonded to the insulation. Semi conducting compound should be
from Borealis Sweden or NUC Japan or equivalent with satisfactory
services.
Minimum thickness of Insulation screen should be 0.8 mm. The conductor

screen, insulation & insulation screen shall be extruded in a single process.
(Triple extrusion)
v) Water Swellable Tape
The tape shall be semi-conducting water swellable tape to be applied over

the extruded insulation screening to block and prevent moisture propagation
in a longitudinal direction. The semi-conducting tape shall be suitable for the
operating temperature of the cable and compatible with the insulation.
vi) Metallic Sheath
Metallic sheath shall be either of Corrugated Aluminum sheath. The metallic

sheath shall be able to carry a short circuit current of 31.5 kA for 1 seconds.
In the case of metallic sheath of Corrugated Aluminum or Copper sheath

the bidder shall submit the calculation of area of aluminum or copper sheath
in this support.
vii) Bedding Tape
The bedding shall be anti corrosive layer of Bitumen compound.
viii) Outer Sheath
The outer sheath shall be extruded red/yellow/blue colour or similar as per

phase, graphite coated high density polyethylene, type ST-7 confirming of
requirement of IEC specifications and extruded continuously. The outer
sheath should have embossing at every one meter for Contractor Name,
manufacturer name, DMRC, Voltage grade etc.

The Mechanical Characteristics shall be as follow:
In delivery condition
 minimal traction resistance : 12.5 Mpa
 minimal elongation before breaking : 300%
After ageing of 240 h at 110°C:-Traction Resistance
 minimum value : 12.5MPa
 maximum variation :  25%
Elongation before breaking:
 minimum value : 200%
 maximum variation :  25%
The variation is the difference between the medium value obtained after
ageing and the medium value without ageing, expressed in percentage of
the last.
8.2.1.4 Additional Requirement
The Employer may decide to visit the works of cable manufacturer to verify
the manufacturing process mentioned.
The Bidder along with the bid shall submit the details regarding cable
construction, bill of material and the manufacturing process proposed to be
adopted for the manufacturing of cables to be used in the project, along with
Quality control measures adopted by the Manufacturer, to ensure:
 The values and tolerances are strictly as per IEC.
 The cable manufacturer exercises strict quality control measures,

including stage inspections, routine inspections etc. to ensure
conformity to standards.
Periodical inspections of the Manufacturer works, manufacturing processes,

Internal Quality control records of the manufacturer etc shall be carried out
by the User (DMRC/Nominated agency), to ensure compliance to Quality
standards.

The client will deliver the supply, upon request, only after execution of in-
plant inspection operations and satisfactory testing according to the
technical requirements imposed.
 The cables shall pass all the tests stipulated in the IEC rules in force
on the date of the order.
 The sleeves and the insulating materials used shall meet the
guarantee requirements imposed.
 The equipment shall be capable of withstanding intensive use without

alteration, and of performing its duty even after extended idle period.
 Assembled Pulling eye shall have to be supplied with all cables.
 GI Steel drum with steel packing shall have to be supplied
 Drum length of the cable shall be finalised after approval of Sheath

Voltage calculations.
a) Atmospheric and Climatic Conditions
The entire equipment will be designed for operation in hot weather,

according to the climatic conditions defined in General Specifications.
The equipment will be sturdy and properly treated against corrosion. This
protection shall be suited to the various environmental conditions
encountered in the various parts of the network.
It must be noted that environmental conditions will be very severe during

construction; these conditions shall not be the cause of any alteration of
equipment or material whether already installed or simply stored.
b) Maintenance & Life
The cable should be designed for maintenance free best service life best in
the industry and not less than 30 yrs for all types of installation & under
prescribed environmental conditions.
c) Special Condition
The manufacturer shall have laid down in-house selection process of the
raw material used and shall submit all details, if equivalent raw material is
used wherever specified.

d) Testing
The 66 kV cable shall comply Test Standards as per IEC 62067, IEC
60840 (latest) and IEEE Std 400.2 (latest). The manufacturer shall not
change the Bill of Material used in the manufacturing of samples used for
routine testing and Type testing as repeated above intend to supply against
the contract
e) Data Sheet- 66 kV, CABLE
As per GTP
8.2.2 Cable Laying
8.2.2.1 General
a) The Cable Laying works shall be executed according to the rules of the Art
pertaining to professional grade and generally in compliance with
International Standards and Indian Standards.
b) EHV/HV Power Cable laying shall be carried out by Cable

supplier/Manufacturer
c) The contractor shall conduct the GPR survey to identify the other utilities in
the proposed route and submit at least 3 routes for laying of cable from PSA
grid substation to DMRC RSS with full details including underground utilities
for approval of engineer. After finalization of cable route, the contractor shall
submit the method statement for laying and jointing of cable for approval of
engineer. As far as possible the route for laying of cable should be so
selected that failure can be attended easily. The cable route should avoid
densely populated area. The general guidelines for preparation of Method
Statement for cable laying is given in Annexure 15.
d) The area shall be excavated only after getting necessary permissions from
the concerned civic agencies and work shall be executed as per the
approved method statements. The excavated area for laying of cable
(irrespective of method of laying either by open trench method or trenchless
piping or by any other method) is to be fully protected by means of
barricades of 2.5m width and 2.0m height in continuous manner as per
DMRC SHE standards. Failure on account of not providing the barricade at
the excavated site will attract the penalty as per various clause of SHE of

contract. The barricading should be fully secured and shall be illuminated

throughout the length.
e) The excavated area will be filled up within period of one month from the date
of excavation. The temporary restoration work by filling of excavated area
with the earth with proper compaction using portable road rollers and PCC
over the excavated area shall be done by the contractor satisfaction to the
engineer-in-charge and final restoration shall be done by the civic agencies.
Penalty will be imposed at the rate of Rs. 5000/- per day if contractor fail to
complete the above activities within time frame of one month. Till the time
of restoration, the excavated soil shall be stored properly at an identified
location preferable in the gunny bags to avoid spread on the roads, footpath
etc. Special precaution shall be taken during rainy season.
f) Ground penetration survey (GPR): The contractor shall carry out the GPR
survey of the complete cable system and submit the drawing marking the
coordinates showing distance, depth along the cable path. In case of
trenchless cable, precise location of cables at every meter should be given
with coordinates at precision of minimum 15 cm. The detailed specifications
for GPR survey is given at Annexure-15. The survey should be carried out
before starting the cable laying work to ascertain the utilities and after the
completion of cable laying work so as to prepare “As Built Drawing”.
g) Foot patrolling of cable route (from PSA end to RSS) shall be carried out by
the contractor till handing over of the system to the employer, any type of
damage/defect shall be the sole responsibility of contractor.
h) The contractor shall be liable to arrange all necessary tool and equipment
like DG sets, portable road rollers etc. required for laying of cables without
any additional cost to the Employer.
i) Wherever appropriate the cables shall be laid in trefoil formation as per

finalised design and shall be secured using nylon reinforced glass trefoil
clams of appropriate design at regular interval.
j) Drum length of the cable shall be finalized after approval of Sheath Voltage
calculations.
8.2.2.2 Cable Laying

The EHV Cables between the Power Supply Authorities Substation and the
DMRC RSS shall be laid in ground depending upon the site conditions of
the selected route, any of the following paying conditions, may be adopted
 Case 1 – Direct buried, with the cables (3/6) of each circuit laid in
trefoil formation and side by side in one trench.
 Case 2 – Laid in underground duct
 Case 3 – Laid in Trench less piping.
 Case 4 – Push Pull Method
 Case 5– Laid in abutment crossing/ Laid in Air, supported on

piers/walls, for nallah-crossing
 Case 6:-Laid on DMRC viaduct.
a) Case 1:-Direct Buried Method
The laying conditions shall not be less than the following for Direct Buried
Method:
 The trench for carrying the cables shall be at least 1.8m deep and
1.1m wide, which may vary as per site conditions with the approval
of employer. Sufficient spacing (not less than 2D) should be
maintained between two circuits as per standards.
 Each of the 2 feeders shall consist of 3/6 single-core cables, and laid
in trefoil formation.
 Cables shall be laid at a depth of 1.7 m below the ground level and
over a 100 mm bed of coarse sand.
 Trench is to be filled with sand upto a depth of 1100 mm below the

ground level.
 Warning concrete slabs of at least 50 mm thickness shall be laid

above the sand and on the both inner sides of trench.
 Trench shall then be filled with earth upto a depth of 300 mm below
the ground level.

 A warning net shall then be laid above the earth filling (at 300 mm
depth below the ground level). A warning tape shall also be laid
appropriately with Delhi Metro Rail Corporation marked on it.
 The top space of 300 mm shall be suitably filled with compacted

Boulder and Bitumen/Jelly and given a final finish matching the
surroundings.
 The cables shall be tied through trefoil clamps after 5 meters each
for keeping the cables intact in case of trefoil formation. At locations,
where there is change of level of laying, the cables shall be tied
through trefoil clamps after 2.5 meter each.
 Identification tapes in continuous length should be provided at every

10 m for identification of cable circuits during maintenance/repair.
b) Case 2:- Laid in Underground Duct
In specific locations, the Employer may require the cables to be laid in

underground ducts. The underground ducts shall be laid where road
construction or formation is under construction or where water logging
stretch is expected or as per the specific site condition. The underground
duct may be provided with open cut & cover method with due permission of
civic agency. In specific circumstances, where open cut & cover is not
possible due to site constraints, Suitable safe method may be undertaken
with proper safety norms only after approval of DMRC. The cable shall be
laid in Trefoil formation.
c) Case 3:- Laid in trenchless piping
On all road crossings and at other specific locations, cable laying shall be
through trenchless drilling and the cables shall be passed through suitable
grade High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) of min. diameter equal to 1.5 times
diameter of cable. The grade of HDPE pipe to be used depends upon the
followings:
 Sub-soil properties and conditions
 Lengths of HDD shot
 Depth of HDD shot

PN-6, PE-80 grade HDPE pipes (as per IS: 4984) shall be used for span
length of 70 to 80 meter and depth of shot is less than 5m.
d) Case 4:- Jack Push Pull Method
Jack and Push technology shall be used for trenchless crossing of all rail
crossings and other specific locations:
 As per soil condition the excavated pit, shoring & shuttering is done
to avoid collapse of soil in the pit. In case of sub soil dewatering is
required to be done to maintain the minimum table water in the pit.
 Lowering of guide rail, pushing rig- On readiness of the thrust pit

guide rails are lowered in the pit properly aligned for level and angle
of push. Once aligned the pushing rig and set in position on the
pushing pad/rig itself.
 Lowering of Main pipe- Once the pit is ready, the 1st segment of the
pipe to be pushed is lowered in the pit along with the pushing rig
depending upon the method to be adopted.
 Placement of pipe in position and alignment- The pipe is slowly

pushed into the soil by extending rams of the hydraulic jacks. Once
the pipe tip enters the mother earth the final line and level is checked
again and any misalignment rectified.
 Pushing of the pipe- After the final alignment the pushing of the pipe
starts by extending the rams of the hydraulic jacks. Excavation of the
soil from inside the pipe is done on completion of each stroke of the
ram, which varies from 200 mm to 700 mm depending on the soil
condition and diameter of pipe.
 Closing of the ram and preparing for next stroke- On completion of

each stroke the rams of the jacks are closed or taken back and made
ready for the next stroke. Soil excavated from the pipe is removed.
The ram of the jacks are gradually extended again to push the pipe
segment further.
 Lowering of further segments, jointing and re-pushing- Once the pipe

segment is inserted the pushing pad is withdrawn back towards. The

thrust wall and new pipe segment is lowered, placed in position,

aligned and seal jointed with the old pipe.
 All the process mentioned above repeated till the determined length
of the pipe is pushed through the soil and the penetrating tip of the
main pipe emerges out sufficiently at the receiving pit.
 Obtaining Final level- On arrival of the pipe at the receiving pit the
final level of the pipe is checked and recorded.
 Restoration- Once the inspection and testing is done by the

concerned authority, the site is restored after evacuating the pits. All
pits are filled and leveled. All tool, tackle, machine and material is
finally removed from site.
e) Case 5:-Laid in abutment crossing/ Laid in Air, supported on piers /

walls for nallah-crossing
On all abutment crossing or in air, supported on piers/walls, for nallah

crossing and at other specific locations, cable laying shall be on the
galvanized steel structures which can withstand wind velocity of 160 kmph,
supported on piers and have sufficient structural strength. The minimum
average weight of zinc coating should be 1000g/m2 (RDSO). The cables
should be well protected by providing MS sheet of thickness 8mm at least
fastened with nuts and bolts & tag welded on all sides to be protected from
any pilferages. The arrangement shall render cable absolutely safe from any
natural calamity. The cable shall not be exposed or get affected due to stray
fire caused in the vicinity. All the bridge type structures carrying cables
should be fully enclosed. The cable chamber should be filled with sand
cushioning lockable manholes may be provided in top. The entry of cables
should be properly covered with concrete structure with inclined slopes deep
into the ground. The cable shall be laid in Trefoil formation.
f) Case 6:-Laid on DMRC viaduct.
For cable laying on viaduct will be laid on cable brackets / viaduct slab and
supported on piers/walls for cable raise/ lower shall be on the galvanized
steel structures which can withstand wind velocity of 160 kmph. The
minimum average weight of zinc coating should be 1000g/m2 (RDSO). The

cables should be well protected by providing GI sheet of thickness 8mm at

least fastened with nuts and bolts & tag welded on all sides to be protected
from any pilferages. The arrangement shall render cable absolutely safe
from any natural calamity. The cable shall not be exposed or get affected
due to stray fire caused in the vicinity. The cable shall be laid in Trefoil
formation with stainless steel trefoil clamps tested as per IEC 61914 .
8.2.2.3 Pipes for Pilot Wire / OFC Protection
In addition to HDPE pipes for power cables, one additional PN-6, PE-80
grade HDPE pipes, each for one circuit not less than 100 mm dia, shall be
provided by RSS contractor throughout the entire cable route length
(irrespective of method of laying) for pilot wire protection. HDPE pipes will
also be provided by RSS contractor for other cables such as copper-core or
optic fiber cables for control and monitoring, tele-communication etc. as
indicated in the Interfacing Requirements, cables shall be supplied by other
Contractors).
To achieve redundancy the double run of pilot wire cable shall be laid. The
pilot wire cables shall also be laid at the same depth as of the power cables
to avoid damages.
8.2.2.4 Cable Protection at Changeover Location
The cable path, when changing from buried in ground to underground duct
or trenchless piping shall be adequately protected by proper sealing in
concrete or other suitable means of sufficient mechanical strength to avoid
cable from suffering damage due to heat / fire / water ingress etc.
8.2.2.5 Pulling Chambers, if Required (in any Special Case)
Pulling chambers of size 4m long, 3m wide and at least 2.5m deep shall be
provided, as necessary, along the route for pulling of cables. This pulling
chamber shall be barricaded properly and filled with sand and soil after
laying work completed. The temporary restoration with proper compacted
and PCC shall be done by the contractor, however final restoration shall be
done by civic agency.
8.2.2.6 Route Markers

The route shall be appropriately marked by suitable retro-reflective cable

markers, at every 50m and at both ends of road crossings and positions of
straight through joints shall be indicated by suitable boards.
Pre-casted RCC Jointing Bays shall be provided at the joint location of

suitable size dully approved by engineer-in-charge.
8.2.2.7 General Precautions
Following Precautions in addition to that recommended by the cable

Manufacturer to be taken while laying of cables applicable for all EHV cables
(220/132/66 kV) and HV/MV Cables (33 & 25 kV)shall be taken during cable
laying:-
 In case of direct burial the trench for carrying the cables shall be at
least 1.8m deep and 1.1m wide.
 In case of direct burial cables, the sand bedding for the cables should
be installed smoothly and any object as gravel, stones, harmful
chemical etc should be removed.
 Minimum Bending Radius of the cable shall be more than 20 D,

where D is the diameter of the cable. The bend angle, wall pressure,
pulling tension needs to be maintained with limits during laying of
cables as recommended by the cable manufacture / Indian
Standards.
 On all road / rail crossings and at other specific locations, cable laying
shall be through trenchless drilling and the cables shall be passed
through High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipes of appropriate
diameter and thickness. The minimum diameter of HDPE pipe should
be 1.5 times the diameter of cable. HDPE pipe should have sufficient
strength to take care of forces under heavy traffic when laid under
railways/ road crossings.
 The cable path, when changing from buried in ground to underground

duct or trench-less piping shall be adequately protected by proper
sealing in concrete or other suitable means of sufficient mechanical
strength to avoid cable from suffering damage due to heat/fire/water
ingress etc.

 A thermally stable backfill of sand (with proper compaction) is to be

used to ensure a known thermal conductivity around the cable in
order to maintain the cable rating.
 Cables are installed on a bed of sand by the use of winch or power

rollers. Rollers should be placed at a distance of 3 to 4 meters; at
bends special corner rollers should be placed so that the cable does
not touch the side walls of the trench. This should ensure that no
damage is done to the sheath.
 Proper tools and tackles to be used for laying of cables as

recommended by cable manufacturer / Indian Standards.
 Cable shall be pulled by Winch and if necessary than Manually

however, Cable shall be pulled from one side only; no intimidate
pulling by tying in between shall be done. While pulling the cable both
the pulling tension and side wall pressure should be kept less than
the permissible limits.
Permissible Values for Pulling tension: Fmax = A. Dmax,
where
A = Conductor cross sectional area
Dmax = Maximum permissible stress (N/mm2)
= 50 N/mm2 for single core copper conductor
= 30 N/mm2 for single core Al conductor
Similarly, the Sidewall Pressure (P) = T/R
where,
T = Pulling tension at exit from bend;
P = Side wall pressure;
R = Bending Radius
Coefficient of Friction in Direct Buriel Cables shall be = 0.1 to 0.2
However, if the route has several right angle bends then cable
pushers could be used to reduce the tension and maintain it within
the limits. This will give the necessary relief on the cable by removing

some of the back tension on the cable. By pulling and pushing the
cable at the same time there will be a very low level of tension on the
cable.
 Cable drum shall be unloaded with a crane fit for purpose and shall
have adequate capacity to lift the drum and install in the final position
for installation. Drum should be mounted on the cable jack and
should rotate freely; in case pulling stops overrunning of the drums
should be prevented using drum brakes. When pulling cable
mechanically by a pulling winch, the cabling winch rope is coupled to
the cable by means of the pulling eye. Ensure that the winch has a
pulling recorder and a tension meter. The pulling tension is
transferred to the conductor. Pulling tension and sidewall pressure
should not exceed the maximum permissible pulling tension.
Maximum pulling speed of the cable shall be 7mtrs/min. Pulling
speed shall be reduced at corners.
 Graphite grease should be provided on the cable at the end of the

ramp before the cable enters the trench.
 Manufacturer’s representative (Engineer) shall be available at site

during cable installation, testing and commissioning. He shall certify
that the cable laying, testing and commissioning has been done as
per Manufacturer’s representative and warranty is intact.
 Proper coordination with Joints and termination suppliers shall be

done. Jointing and termination shall be carried out by qualified
jointers certified by manufacturer. The manufacturer shall certify that
the process has been completed as per manufacturer’s
recommendations and warranty is intact.
8.2.2.8 Cable Accessories and Bonding
8.2.2.8.1 Straight Through Joints
The straight through Joints should be Pre- Moulded Type (for 220/132/66
kV) and HEAT SHRINK type or cold shrink type (for 33 kV, 25 kV) of proven
technology and make, suitable for underground buried cables. The joint
should comprise of stress control sleeves, insulating sleeves and co-

extruded dual wall Tubing comprising of an insulating and semi-conducting

layer. A mechanical connector with shear head bolts shall make the
conductor connection. The product should be type tested as per IEC
specifications
(i) General Specifications
 The product offered should be proven and should be in use in India

for a minimum period of 5 years for the same voltage class. List of
past supplies in India to be furnished. Performance certificates to be
submitted along with the offer.
 The product offered should have long (30 years) shelf life. Details of
shelf life of each component shall be submitted with vendor proposal.
 Offers should be supported with type test certificates (not older than
05 years at the time of vendor approval) from CPRI / CESI / KEMA
or accredited test laboratories as per IEC / IEEE specifications, failing
which the offers shall be rejected.
(ii) General Specifications for Joints and Terminations for 220/132/66 kV

Cables
 The Terminations and Joints should be tested in accordance with

both the IEEE 404 as well IEC 60840 / 62067. The contractor shall
submit details of the material (items) used in cable joints along with
vendor proposal.
 Joints and terminations should be done by an experienced jointer

having proper competency for same under the supervision of Joint
manufacturer.
 Ease of Installation: The joint body should be a three piece assembly

to allow for easy installation without the use of special tools and also
to keep a firm control on the positioning of the stress control cone
etc.
 The termination body should be a composite housing with moulded

silicone shedded profile for the external leakage insulation.

 The joint and termination should employ mechanical connectors for

which the manufacturer must have a minimum of 10 years of
experience in the design, manufacturing and usage.
 The terminations should employ a positive sealing at the insulation

end to prevent moisture etc. from seeping into the cable.
 Jointing of EHV / HV cables shall be in sealed environment to prevent

ingress of dust and moisture during jointing process. In case there is
ingress of moisture in the cable, then the cable should be dried using
vacuum drying method. If the same is not able to remove moisture
completely then the drying process shall be done using Nitrogen
purging method at no extra cost to DMRC. The Care shall be taken
in handling the joints during laying as well as during repairing of joints
(if any) to avoid failure at later stage.
The Terminations and Straight Through Joints for 66 kV cables shall be Heat
Shrinkable type suitable for 66 kV (E) Grade of higher, single core 800 sq.
mm, 630 sq. mm or higher, XLPE Insulated, Aluminium or copper sheathed
cable
The 66 kV Joints and Terminations Including SVL Shall be with 5 Years

warranty, i.e. 3 years extended warranty beyond 2 Years Contractual DLP.
(iii) For 66 kV:
The type of terminations for 66kV incoming cables may be Indoor OR

Outdoor depending upon the equipment being provided at PSA end and in
DMRC RSS.
8.2.2.8.2 Bonding
(i) General
In High Voltage power transmission, three single core cables are used in
place of three core cables. In the single core power transmission, the cables
are usually covered with a metallic sheath to prevent ingress of moisture,
protect the core from possible mechanical damage and create an earthed
shield. Unlike the three core cables, the Single core cable behaves like a
transformer. The current carrying conductor of the cable acts as the primary

winding and the metallic sheath as the secondary. The field of the current
carrying conductor induces a voltage in the metallic sheath of the cable. The
calculation of sheath voltage shall be done as per IEEE 575 to limit the
sheath voltage below 65 volt as per cable actually laid. Bimetallic jointing
arrangement shall be used in case of dis-similar material of metallic Sheath
and bonding cables.
(ii) Sheath Induced voltage:
The magnitude of the EMF induced in the cable sheath is directly

proportional to the magnitude of the load current carried by the conductor,
the mutual inductance between sheaths of the cables, the spacing between
the cables and the cable length.
Es = 314. I. L Volts/m
Es = Sheath Voltage
I = Current in the conductor
L = Mutual inductance between the sheaths of cables
This induced EMF causes a circulating current to flow in the sheath when
both ends of the metallic sheath are bonded to the ground.
(iii) Circulating Currents:
Circulating currents are generated in the metallic sheaths of 1/C cables

when the cable's insulated conductor is carrying alternating current and its
metallic sheath is bonded to ground at both ends. It doesn’t matter what
metal the layer is, if it's metal and grounded at both ends there will be a
current induced into it. The magnitude of this circulating current depends on
the current in the conductor and the impedance of the loop formed by this
layer and the ground path.

This sheath circulating current causes sheath-circulating losses and causes

heating. In such cases, the cables must be de-rated to 70% of their normal
conductor current. To utilize the full ampacity of the cable, special bonding
methods are employed.
(iv) Sheath Bonding methods:
(a) Single Point Bonding
(b) Mid-Point Bonding
(c) Cross Bonding
Single Point Bonding:
In single point bonding, one end of the sheath is grounded and the other
end is kept floating. Usually the supply end is grounded. Provision shall be
made to provide the Ground Continuity Conductor of adequate size to
connect both the earthed ends.
When the cable's Armour / sheath / concentric ground is floating at one end,
a standing voltage will be generated on this metallic layer. The magnitude
of this standing voltage is directly proportional to conductor current and to
cable length. It's also proportional to the spacing between cables and how
they're laid out (i.e. flat or trefoil), but current and length are the big
factors. Generally standing voltage is not of concern except if the runs are
long and / or conductor current is high.

As per the earthing practices as laid down in IS 3043, this standing voltage
should not exceed 65 Volts. Typically, Single point bonding is adopted for
feeder lengths not exceeding 1 km.
During installation care must be taken to ensure that cable jackets are not
damaged. If they are damaged the Armour or sheath could make contact
with ground along the run. This forms ground loops, which would, allow
circulating currents to flow and this causes cables to overheat. Sparking
and cable failures have also been observed at points where
cable jackets have been damaged and these circulating currents are
allowed to flow to ground. The floating end should be insulated from the
ground. A Sheath Voltage Limiter is installed at the floating end so as to
ensure that sheath does not see very high voltages at the time of fault. If the
sheath is damaged, moisture ingress & flow of circulating current shall
happen.
Single point bonding shall be carried out with an insulated ground continuity
conductor as per fault current capacity. For longer feeder lengths, multiple
single point bonding shall be carried out with a ground continuity conductor.

Joints With Sheath Interrupts
Sheath
Voltage
Limiters
Ground Continuity Conductor
Fig: Multiple Single Point Bonding

Mid-Point Bonding:
In this method, the bonding is carried out at the center of the cable feeder
and the other two ends are grounded through SVL. This ensures that the
sheath standing voltage is halved.
Cross-bonding:
For longer feeder lengths wherein the Sheath induced voltages are high,
cross bonding of sheaths is to be carried out. The sheaths are electrically
transposed at every splice, reducing both currents and voltages. SVL’s are
needed at 2 out of 3 joint locations.
The sheath bonding Copper cables (3.3 kV) of appropriate size, link boxes,
sheath voltage limiters and other accessories are to be provided. The
Sheath Bonding cables shall be coloured according to phases (R,Y, B) for
easy identification of different phases. The link boxes should be suitable for
underground burial conforming to IP: 68 protection requirement and shall be
housed in a common bay near the jointing bay. The length of sheath bonding
cables should not exceed 10 mtrs.
Major Section
Minor Joints With
Section Sheath Interrupts
Sheath
Voltage
Limiters
Ground Continuity Conductor

Depending upon the route finally chosen, the Contractor shall prepare a
design for Bonding, and shall establish that with the Bonding method
adopted, the sheath voltages do not exceed the max permissible limit.
In case Cross Bonding becomes necessary, the sheaths have to be

electrically transposed at every ‘straight though joint’ location and Sheath
Voltage Limiters (SVL) may require to be provided at 2 out of 3 Joint
locations. This shall be decided during the design of the Bonding method.
The SVL should be designed and provided considering accessibility for
maintenance and measurement requirement. In case of multiple single core
cables are used in one circuit, SVL connection shall be carried out, treating
one set of single core cable of all phases as circuit-1 and other set of single
core cable as circuit -2. Proper cable index shall be adopted to avoid any
wrong connection in SVL.
The contractor will be required to submit the calculation that bonding method
selected by him, single point bonding / mid-point bonding / cross bonding,
ensures that the sheath voltage is limited to less than 65V in case of ultimate
full loading of cable i.e. considering short time overloading also. Generally,
cross bonding is to be used if feeder length is more than 2 kms.
Bonding calculations shall be carried out as per latest IEEE 575 considering
Trefoil and Flat Formation both and accordingly minor & major sections shall
be designed. The Contractor shall prepare detailed calculation of major and
minor sections of cable route in such a way that the requirement of ground
continuity conductor may be avoided.
At the end of all minor section of cross bonding, CT shall be provided

with remote monitoring facility through SCADA.
8.2.2.9 Testing and Inspection
8.2.2.9.1 Type-Tests
A. General
All the equipment which are used for this work shall be of proven design and
standards to achieve a very high level of reliability in service. An equipment
is considered to be proven if it is in successful operation at least for a period
of two years.

Irrespective of the fact that the summary of type test reports was submitted
for 110kV, (E) or higher grade, single core, XLPE insulated, Aluminum
/Copper conductor Aluminium or Copper Sheathed cable along with the bid,
the contractor shall furnish a summary of type test reports for all the
equipment listed below except those equipment which are yet to be type
tested being under development within three (3) months period from the
date of signing the contract.
a) 66 kV (E) grade or above grade, Single Core 630, 800 sq.mm or

above size XLPE insulated cable with Aluminum or Copper sheath.
b) Heat Shrinkable type straight through joint suitable for 66 kV (E)

grade or higher, Single core 800, 630 sq.mm or higher, XLPE
insulated, Aluminum or Copper sheathed cable.
c) Heat Shrinkable type cable terminations (indoor & outdoor) suitable

for 66 kV (E) grade or higher, Single core 800, 630 sq.mm or higher,
XLPE insulated, Aluminum or Copper sheathed cable.
The cable and cable accessories intended to be used for this work shall be:
 Type-tested within the last five (5) years period prior to the date of
design approval
 Proven in service for at least two (2) years as on the date of design
approval.
B. Submission of Performance Certificates
As a proof of satisfactory performance of following equipment during last

two years from the bidder/JV partner /sub contractor from whom Bidder
intends to supply them. The bidder shall furnish the necessary information
in respect of all cables and accessories. The information will be used to
finalize the sub contractor/ sub contractors for the particular equipment for
this work.
1. 66 kV (E) grade or above grade, Single Core 630 sq.mm or above

size XLPE insulated cable with Aluminum or Copper sheath.

2. Heat Shrinkable type straight through joint suitable for 110kV (E)
grade or higher, Single core 630 sq.mm or higher, XLPE insulated,
Aluminum or Copper sheathed cable.
3. Heat Shrinkable type cable terminations (indoor & outdoor) suitable

for 110kV (E) grade or higher, Single core 630 sq.mm or higher,
XLPE insulated, Aluminum or Copper sheathed cable.
C. Type Test Results
Summary of type test results of the above mentioned equipment will be in

the following format:
If the type tests of any equipment being supplied for this work are not yet
conducted by the contractor then all the type tests as per the relevant IEC
shall be conducted at his expense in the presence of employer’s
representative either at manufacturer’s works having requisite facilities and
approved by independent laboratory like KEEMA, Netherland or CESI Italy,
or at KEEMA, Netherlands or CESI, Milano, Italy, CPRI INDIA
manufacturer’s works
Governing Spec for
Result / Remarks
Manufactured by
Testing House/
Month / Year
Name of test
Testing Lab/
Name of the
equipment
conducted
type test
Rating
D. Details of Make of Cables/Accessories
The bidder shall submit to the employer the proposed “make” of all the
above equipment in the bid form along with other details such as rating,
quantity in use, place of installation number of years in satisfactory
operation, summary of type test reports of required rating of
 66 kV or higher grade, 630 sqmm or higher size

Aluminum/copper conductor, XLPE insulated, Aluminum or Copper sheath

cable along with the bid so as to decide the ‘make’ of the items. Based on
the information thus furnished the employer shall decide the ‘make’ of the
items to be used for the work.
The plant & equipment being supplied against this bid shall conform to
relevant IEC standards.
The link box should be of stainless steel and conforming to protection class
of IP:65 to avoid corrosion and entry of water. The thickness of stainless
steel should be not less than 3 mm.
E. Rejection of Type Test Report
When the Employer rejects any specific type test report for particular
equipment stating the grounds for such rejection, the contractor shall re-
conduct the relevant type tests as per the specification in the presence of
Employer’s representatives before the item is supplied by him. Such type
test shall be conducted by the contractor at his own expense at the
manufacturer’s works approved by KEMA Netherland or CESI Italy; CPRI
INDIA in the presence of Employer’s representative.
F. Type Test Reports
The type test reports of the equipment shall be of the tests carried out either
at the manufacturer’s works having requisite facilities or at KEEMA,
Netherlands, CESI, Milano, Italy, and CPRI INDIA during the last five (5)
years period as on the date of vendor approval. If any type test report is
older than 5 years, the type tests will have to be repeated at contractor’s
cost. Employer shall waive some of these tests in case of equipment / sub
assemblies where the manufacturer can establish to the satisfaction of
employer that such tests have already been carried out earlier or where the
equipment have been proved in service. In such a case, manufacturer shall
submit complete test reports along with necessary certification.
8.2.2.9.2 Routine Tests
Routine tests shall comprise of visual inspection of the items and all the
routine tests as per specification. All these tests shall be conducted in the
presence of Employer’s nominated representative at the manufacturer’s

works. Routine test shall be carried out as per specification ICE 60840/IEC
62067 latest versions.
A. General
The following tests shall be carried out on each manufactured length of

cable:
a) Partial discharge test ;
b) Voltage test ;
c) Electrical test on over sheath of the cable, if required.
The order in which these tests are carried out is at the discretion of the
manufacturer. The main insulation of each prefabricated necessary shall
undergo partial discharge and voltage tests according to either 1), 2) or 3)
below:
1) On accessories installed on cable;
2) By using a host accessory into which a component of an accessory

is substituted for test;
3) By using a simulated accessory rig in which the electrical stress

environment of a , main insulation component is reproduced.
In cases 2) and 3), the test voltage shall be selected to obtain electrical
stresses at least the same as those on the component in a complete
accessory when subjected to the test voltages specified.
NOTE: The main insulation of prefabricated accessories consists of the

components that come in direct contact with the cable insulation and are
necessary to control the electric stress distribution in the accessory.
Examples are pre-moulded or pre-cast elastomer or filled epoxy resin
insulating components that may be used singly or jointly to provide the
necessary insulation or screening of accessories.
B. Partial Discharge Test
The partial discharge test shall be carried out in accordance with IEC 60885-
3, IEC 62067 for cables, except that the sensitivity as defined in IEC 60885-

3 shall be 10 pC or better. Testing of accessories follows the same

principles, but the sensitivity shall be 5 pC or better.
The test voltage shall be raised gradually to and held at 1.75 Uo for 10 s
and then slowly reduced to 1.5 Uo. There shall be no detectable discharge
exceeding the declared sensitivity from the test object at 1.5 Uo.
C. Voltage Test
The voltage test shall be made at ambient temperature using an alternating

test voltage at power frequency. The test voltage shall be raised gradually
to 2.5 Uo) and then be held for 30 min between the conductor and metallic
screen/sheath. No breakdown of the insulation shall occur as per latest IEC
60840 /62067
D. Electrical test on over sheath of the cable
When the test is required by the particular contract, the cable over sheath
shall be subjected to the electrical test specified in Clause 3 of IEC 60229.
8.2.2.9.3 Acceptance tests
(i) General
Acceptance tests for the power cable & its accessories shall be carried out
wherever the same is mentioned in the relevant specification governing the
cable and its accessories. All the acceptance tests as mentioned in the
governing specification to which the product is manufactured shall be
conducted in the presence of Employer’s nominated representative by the
Contractor at their manufacturing works.
The following tests shall be carried out on samples which, for the tests in
terms b) may be drum lengths of cable, taken to represent batches:
a) Conductor examination ;
b) Measurement of electrical resistance of conductor and of metallic

screen ;
c) Measurement of thickness of insulation and over sheath
d) Measurement of thickness of metallic sheath
e) Measurement of diameters, if required

f) Hot set test for XLPE, EPR and HEPR insulation Measurement of
capacitance
g) Water penetration test, if applicable
h) Tests on components of cables with a longitudinally applied metal foil
(ii) Frequency of tests
The sample tests in items a) to f) and h) of 4.2.11 shall be carried out on

one length from each batch (manufacturing series) of the same type and
cross-section of cable, but shall be limited to not more than 10% of the
number of lengths in any contract, rounded to the nearest whole number.
The frequency of the other tests as per relevant IEC shall be in accordance
with agreed quality control procedures. In the absence of such an
agreement, one test shall be made for contracts with a cable length above
20 km.
(iii) Repetition of tests
If the sample from any length selected for the tests falls in any of the tests
in , further samples shall be taken from two further lengths of the same batch
and subjected to the same tests as those in which the original sample failed.
If both additional samples pass the tests, the other cables in the batch from
which they were taken shall be regarded as having complied with the
requirements of this standard. If either fail, this batch of cables shall be
regarded as having failed to comply.
(iv) Conductor examination
Compliance with the requirements of IEC 60228 for conductor construction,

or the declared construction, shall be checked by inspection and
measurement when practicable.
(v) Measurement of electrical resistance of conductor and metallic screen
The cable length, or a sample thereof, shall be placed in the test room, which
shall be maintained at a reasonably constant temperature for at least 12 h
before the test. If there is a doubt that the conductor or metallic screen
temperature is not the same as the room temperature, the resistance shall
be measure after the cable has been in the test room for 24 h. Alternatively,

the resistance can be measured on a sample of conductor or metallic

screen, conditioned for at least 1 h in a temperature controlled liquid bath.
(vi) Additional Acceptance Tests
The following additional acceptance tests shall be carried out.
 Additional acceptance tests (1 sample/offered lot) shall be carried out

for Ovality & Eccentricity. Tensile strength and Elongation on
insulation and over sheath before and after ageing and Thermal
Stability on outer sheath of power cable.
 Surface finish and length measurement shall be carried on one

length of each size of offered lot of power cables.
(vii) Short Circuit Test:
Short Circuit test for Power Cables will be conducted by the contractor on
the cable at Manufacturer’s works having requisite facilities approved by
KEMA Netherlands or CESI Italy or at KEEMA, Netherlands or CESI Milano
Italy, CPRI INDIA & shall be witnessed by the Employer’s authorized
representative.
8.2.2.9.4 Test Certificates
Three copies of the test certificates of successful type tests if any carried
out on cables and cable accessories shall be furnished to the Employer
within fifteen days after completion of such type tests.
Three copies of successful acceptance & routine tests carried out on cables
and cable accessories and the certificate of inspection issued by the
Employer’s representative shall be furnished within 15 days, after the
completion of tests by the Employer's representative.
8.2.2.9.5 Responsibility of Contractor for Delivery/Supply
(a) All defects detected as a result of testing / inspection shall be rectified

by the manufacturer at his own expense and shall be documented
and corrected prior to shipment. If in the opinion of Employer, a
repeat of the test is required after such rectification, this shall also be
carried out at the expense of the Contractor.

(b) No cable / accessory shall be supplied until Employer has inspected

the same to his satisfaction and accepted. However, such inspection
and/or acceptance certificate shall not relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility for furnishing the cables and cable accessories
conforming to the requirements of the contract nor prejudice any
claim, right or privilege which the Employer may have because of the
use of defective or unsatisfactory items. Should the Employer waive
the right to inspect any item, such waiver shall be obtained by the
Contractor from the Employer in writing and such a waival shall not
relieve the Contractor in any way from his obligation under the
contract.
(c) Only after obtaining clearance from the Employer, the contractor
shall dispatch the items to site.
8.2.2.9.6 Inspection of Erection Work
All erection work will be subject to inspection by the Employer or his

representative to ensure that the work is done in accordance with the
specification and approved drawing.
Bonding of cable joints at SVL shall be jointly verified by the Contractor and
DMRC (O&M and Project) representative and shall also be certified for
proper connection by third party validator appointed by contractor.
8.2.2.9.7 Inspection and Tests of Completely Laid Cable
(a) General
As soon as the work is completed and ready for inspection and testing, the
Contractor shall advise the Employer in writing. Tests will be carried out by
the Employer jointly with the Contractor. Testing equipment and staff
required for the tests shall be provided by the Contractor free of charge. The
contractor shall take full responsibility for these tests inter alia his other
responsibilities.
The Contractor shall notify the manufacturer of cable and cable accessories
regarding likely date of pre-commissioning tests, one month in advance so
that their representative may be available at site at the time of conducting

the tests. It shall be Contractor’s responsibility to ensure that the cable and
it’s accessories are commissioned as per laid down procedures.
(b) Pre commissioning Tests for the facility as a whole
The following site tests shall be conducted on a completed power cable

installation as per specification IEC 60840/62067 latest versions.
(i) Visual Inspection and Continuity Check
Visual inspection shall include check for satisfactory workmanship.

Continuity check shall be carried out on the cable to ensure that the
cable is continuous.
(ii) DC voltage test of the over sheath
The test shall be conducted as per Clause 15.1 of IEC 60840 or

relevant clause of IEC 62067.
(iii) AC voltage test for the installation.
The test shall be conducted as per Clause 15.2 of IEC 60840 or

relevant clause of IEC 62067.
(iv) The insulation resistance of the cable shall be checked before & after
the HV test on cable. The core resistance shall be measured and the
value corrected in accordance with clause 5 of IEC 60228.
(v) The cable must be discharged on completion of DC High Voltage

Test and the cable shall be kept earthed until it is put into service.
The values obtained during these tests shall be in conformity with the
values obtained during inspection of the materials at the
manufacturer’s works.
(vi) Partial Discharge Test and Tan Delta as per IEEE 400.2 (2013 or
latest version) on HV cables i.e. 66 KV cable should be done in
presence of DMRC representative. Defects observed during testing
should be attended for reliable & uninterrupted supply.
(c) Proforma for Tests
The contractor shall submit the results of tests in quadruplicate in an

approved proforma within 7 days from the date of completion of the tests

but before actual commissioning of the cable. The proforma shall be

developed by the contractor and got approved from Employer within three
(3) months from the effective date of the contract.
8.3 Medium Voltage 33 kV Cables
8.3.1 General
For details specification and data sheet please refer Annexure-21 of

Chapter 8A.
8.4 Connecting Junctions - MV Ends
Please refer Annexure 21 for details.
8.4.1 Connecting Junctions
Connecting junctions shall reconstitute perfectly all elements of the MV

cables, so as to obtain electrical and mechanical characteristics at least
equal to those of the cable. The Contractor shall submit to the client, for
approval, a detailed description of the technique foreseen for execution of
connections in MV lines.
However, maintenance and repair being able to be carried out only during
a short period of time, at night, due consideration shall be given to
connection processes having the following characteristics, quality being
otherwise equal:
 quickness of execution,
 possibility of replacement without having to disturb the cable,
 small bulk.
The Straight through joints shall be Heat Shrink Type with shear head type
mechanical connectors or Cold Shrink type of proven technology and make.
8.4.2 Cable Heads
MV cable heads shall be connected to cable junction boxes with the MV

apparatus. The Sealing Ends shall be Heat Shrink Type with shear head
type mechanical connectors or Cold Shrink type of proven technology and
make.
8.4.3 Execution Rules

The entire supply shall be executed according to all Rules of the Art
pertaining to professional-grade equipment, and in compliance with the
technical specifications and specifications of the International
Electrotechnical Commission relative to power supply cables (IEC 55-1, 55-
2 and 502-1). The supply shall be delivered, upon request by the client, only
after execution of in-plant inspection operations and satisfactory testing
according to the technical requirements imposed.
The cables shall pass all the tests stipulated in the IEC 502 rules in force on
the date of the order. The sleeves and the insulating materials used shall
meet the guarantee requirements imposed. The equipment shall be capable
of withstanding intensive use without alteration, and of performing its duty
even after extended idle period.
8.4.4 Atmospheric and Climatic Conditions
The entire equipment shall be designed for operation in hot weather,

according to the climatic conditions. The equipment shall be sturdy and
properly treated against corrosion. This protection shall be suited to the
various environmental conditions encountered in the various parts of the
network. It must be noted that environmental conditions shall be very severe
during construction; these conditions shall not be the cause of any alteration
of equipment or material whether already installed or simply stored.
8.4.5 Cable Technical and Test Sheet
laying of the cable and its accessories, a dielectric test is carried out through
application, for 15 minutes, of an The tests shall be performed according to
the corresponding IEC standard. After completion of alternating voltage
equal to square root 3.U or a direct voltage equal to 4.U.
8.4.6 Cable Laying Specification
8.4.6.1 General
MV cables shall be laid in cable trenches or in pipes. The cables have the
following approximate overall diameter and linear weights
Description Single Core Three Core

a) 400 sq mm Copper
- overall dia (mm) 49 103
- Weight in kg/km 5070 16820
- Standard length per drum (m) 500 200
b) 150 sq mm Aluminium
- overall dia (mm) 39 81
- Weight in kg/km 1510 5420
- Standard length per drum (m) 500 500
They shall be supplied on reels, the standard of which shall be determined

according to the laying conditions. This specification defines all types of
work related to installation of cable routings, paying out and laying of the
cables, at grade, on viaduct.
The Contractor shall produce a stake-out plan at 1:500 scale, which shall
indicate the precise laying position and the type of routing (in channel or
inside duct), accounting for all specific location of the line (Track crossings
and entry into electrical stations).
8.4.6.2 Cable Routing
8.4.6.2.1 In the Receiving Substation
Routing of the MV cables between the transformers and the incoming circuit
breakers shall be realized in cable channel going up from transformers
secondary windings to the cable head of the incoming circuit breaker cell.
Each connection from the transformer to the circuit breaker shall be made
with suitable number of runs of XLPE cables, each with 3 single core cables
(or with a 3-core cable), with conductor cross-section of 400 mm² copper.
8.4.6.2.2 Laying between the AMS and the Line
Routing of the MV cables between the AMS and the line shall be made
according to the following principle:
 from the outgoing circuit breakers downstream to the base of the

viaduct: into cable channel and duct
 from base of the viaduct to the line: on cable tray. They shall be fixed
on the cable tray every 0.75 m and on each side of change of way.
8.4.6.2.3 Laying in Viaduct

Cables shall be laid on the parapet wall of the via-duct with suitable cable
layers supports suitable for outdoor applications under the walkway.
8.4.6.3 Cables Installation
8.4.6.3.1 Laying out
The cables shall be delivered to the site in lengths of about 200 mtr to 500
mtr, coiled on drums whose total weight (with cables), shall not normally
exceed 8000 kg. At every termination, the cables shall be provided with a
loop of approximately 2m-3m to cater to maintenance requirements, in
future. If cables are laid after the track is in position, then these reels shall
be delivered by train as close as possible to the point of utilization,
accounting for the constraints generated by the actual traffic on the existing
line.
Paying out of the cables can be made manually or mechanically. The

mechanical devices (electric or pneumatic) used for paying out the cables
shall be constructed so as to prevent damaging the cables. These devices
shall be submitted to the client's representative for approval. Should
mechanical paying out not accepted, for whatever reason, the contractor
shall execute paying out of the cables with the number of personnel deemed
necessary by the client's representative.
The laying team shall be under the authority of a supervisor qualified for this
type of work. To execute paying out, this supervisor shall comply with the
instructions given by the client's representative in charge of technical
supervision of cable laying.
All necessary precautions shall be implemented during operation to prevent

any deterioration of the cable; the cable shall not be subjected to any
twisting around its axis, and not be bent to a radius smaller than 1.5 meter.
It shall be subjected only to the traction efforts strictly required to pay it out.
In no event may the cable bear against the ground or against fixed stops; it
shall rest onto rollers, situated sufficiently close to one another. The ends of
two successive reel lengths shall overlap by about two meters to enable
cropping the cable ends before execution of the connection sleeves.

When the client's representative estimates that paying out of cables in a

single length 200 to 500 m risks generating abnormal strains in the cable,
one or several looping may have to be made. A cable looping is defined as
being any operation that requires previous paying out of the cable outside
the channel or cableways. When two cable courses are superimposed
inside channels, each course shall be separated by means of isolating
plates every 3 m.
8.4.6.3.2 Tagging
All cables laid inside channels, or on cable-tray shall carry an 8 x 5 cm PVC

tag placed every 10 m and in specific locations such as connection sleeves,
entry into and exit from ducts, possible pulling chambers. These tags,
fastened via two clamps, shall bear the Organization approved label.
Tagging of cables playing a part in safety as regard identification of the

cables in case of incident, shall be made very carefully and the Contractor
shall be held responsible for any error or for any incident subsequent to such
an error. The tags shall be fastened right after the paying out of each reel.
8.5 25 KV CABLES
8.5.1 General
Detailed description of the equipment and its application in DMRC -

25 kV cables
Cable of copper conductor with cross section of 240 sq. mm. is generally
used; however different cross section may also be used as required subject
to approval of engineer.
For details specification and data sheet please refer Annexure-23 of

Chapter 8A.
8.5.2 Connecting Junctions
Connecting junctions shall reconstitute perfectly all elements of the 25kV

cables, so as to obtain electrical and mechanical characteristics at least
equal to those of the cable. At every termination, the cables shall be
provided with a loop of approximately 2m-3m to cater to maintenance
requirements, in future. The Contractor will submit to the client, for approval,

a detailed description of the technique foreseen for execution of connections

in MV lines.
However, maintenance and repair being able to be carried out only during
a short period of time, at night, due consideration shall be given to
connection processes having the following characteristics, quality being
otherwise equal:
 quickness of execution,
 possibility of replacement without having to disturb the cable,
 small bulk.
The Straight through joints and Sealing Ends shall be Heat Shrink Type with
shear head type mechanical connectors or Cold Shrink type of proven
technology and make.
8.5.3 Execution Rules
The entire supply will be executed according to all Rules of the Art pertaining
to professional-grade equipment, and in compliance with the technical
specifications and specifications of the International Electrotechnical
Commission relative to power supply cables (IEC 840). The client will deliver
the supply, upon request, only after execution of in-plant inspection
operations and satisfactory testing according to the technical requirements
imposed.
The cables shall pass all the tests stipulated in the IEC rules in force on the
date of the order. The sleeves and the insulating materials used shall meet
the guarantee requirements imposed. The equipment shall be capable of
withstanding intensive use without alteration, and of performing its duty even
after extended idle period.
8.6 3.3 KV CABLES
Detailed specification attached as Annexure-22
8.7 LOW VOLTAGE CABLES AND WIRING
This specification is made to define the characteristics of low voltage cables

used for distribution, control and monitoring. They shall be supplied either
in A.C. or in D.C. They shall be used for electrical connection between

apparatuses of RSS, TSS, SSP, AMS and ASS. The general specifications
for fiber optic cable is attached as Annexure-18.
8.7.1 General
Conductors supplied for low voltage or remote control lines shall have a bare
or tinned copper core. Semi flexible conductors shall be used; rigid
conductors shall be prohibited.
The conductor’s cross-section shall be a standard value, and shall never

exceed 240 mm2; above this value, the appropriate number of conductors
shall be connected in parallel. The minimum cross-section of conductors
shall not be less than 1.5 sq mm. The minimum cross-section of
current transformers secondary circuits shall not be less than 6 mm2.
The minimum cross-section of voltage transformers secondary
circuits shall not be less than 4 mm².
The voltage rating of distribution cables shall be 1100 Volts. Grounding

conductors shall have green/yellow-stripped insulation. Neutral conductors
are to be deemed as being active conductors.
All LV Cables shall be of screened & armored, FRLS type with XLPE
insulation. All LV wires shall be FRLS type with PVC Insulation
8.7.2 Cable Cross Section Determination
Determining the technical core section of a cable implies determining the

smallest standard cross-section in the type of cable selected which, under
the applicable environmental conditions, could satisfy the following criteria:
(a) Normal temperature rise
(b) Maximum voltage drop
(i) 3% for main distribution lines (between primary and secondary

cabinets)
(ii) 3% for lighting circuits
(iii) 5% for power circuits
(iv) 12% for motor circuits during start-up
(c) Overload and short-circuit

(d) Protection against indirect contact
(e) If heavy currents are to be carried, the economic section must also
be taken into account.
8.7.3 Standards
All LV & Control Cables shall be screened & armored type as per IS 7098
Pt-1 and IEC60502 Pt-1 in force and shall satisfy the tests given in the above
standard:
8.7.4 Identification
All conductors, cables, wiring, terminals and apparatuses shall be identified

according to the indications of the diagrams. This identification shall be
placed so as to be easily read from the accessible face of the cable or wiring
In all structures, cables shall be marked both at their ends and

approximately every 20 meters over their full length, particularly when they
change of direction, enter conduits, etc. Along the track, cables shall be
identified in the pulling chambers and at their ends.
The identification shall be realized with Tag-Holder providing the following

guarantees:
 Easy fastening,
 Non flammable,
 Permanence of the marking
 Easy reading.
The tag-holder and its bi-directional marking type shall be submitted to the
employers approval.
8.7.5 Connections
All connections, whether made by end-fittings, sleeves or terminals, shall

comply with good trade practice. The connection terminal blocks supplied
by the contractor shall be identified and includes space enabling precise
referencing of all terminals, also possessing all guarantees of permanence
and fastening.

The crimped section of cables shall be insulated by heat-retractable sleeve.

The screen of screened cables shall be connected to ground and continuity
shall be ensured.
8.7.6 Fire-Resistant Cables
The cables used for the supply to safety systems or other such
area/equipment shall be capable of continuing to feed these systems during
a fire. To this end, they shall satisfy the electrical and mechanical integrity
when exposed to heat and vibration test defined by UTE standards 32 310
and 32 070, test No 3 (CR1 type) or equivalent. In addition, the Contractor
shall ensure that the insulation and cladding used minimizes the toxicity and
opacity of the gasses evolved during combustion. All insulation materials
shall be non-hygroscopic.
8.7.7 Cable laying
In general, the cable laying shall comply with the principle of separation
between the control and monitoring circuits and the auxiliary circuits of the
building (lighting, power, and miscellaneous auxiliaries). The routings and
supports of the two circuit networks shall be wholly separated.
Depending on the room gone through and the runs used by the equipment
wiring and links, their purpose (supply or distribution of the auxiliary circuit
cabinets) or the nature of the specific element concerned (wiring, frame),
several different arrangements may be selected to carry the cables and
wires, however, in all cases, good care has to be taken to avoid contact
between conductors and sharp edges of sheets, iron etc.
Systematically, for control and monitoring cables, all the links of a section
shall include 15% spare conductors with at least one spare conductor per
cable.
8.7.7.1 Supports
(a) Cable-Ways of Perforated Sheet
This shall be the normal laying mode of the link conductors. It shall be used
systematically along wiring runs necessitating special mechanical
protection, precaution or when it is necessary to carry several cable-way
levels inside limited space.

Their width shall be defined to enable addition of at least 15% of the number
of the cables initially foreseen. In general, when sheets shall be
superimposed, the clear heights between one another shall be defined so
as to provide perfect accessibility to the cable layers they carry.
All necessary arrangements shall be taken to enable addition or possible

replacement of a conductor in a layer and, consequently, to enable its
pulling. Several superimposed layers of cables may use the same support
sheet but superimposition shall be limited to cables of the same section. If
crossings are required between cables or layers coming from different
sections, a metal element shall be placed between the layers in way of the
crossing. The extent and number of the fastening fittings shall be
determined so as to avoid all distortions between rests. The anchoring
process of the fittings shall be suited to the supporting element concerned.
(b) Cable-Way on Fittings or Bridges
This arrangement shall be used only for small layers, not justifying the use
of slabs. The fittings or bridges shall be sized accounting for possible
addition of 15% additional cables.
One independent fitting shall be provided per set of conductors coming from
a same section; in no event may conductors coming from different sections
be fastened to a common fitting or bridge.
The number of fittings or bridges shall be determined so as to avoid all cable

scalloping between fastenings
(c) Insulating tubes
When conductors are gathered in strands, they may be laid inside an

insulating tube. This solution may be used only for short runs.
(d) Metal Tube
Certain circuits may have to be protected by means of rigid steel tubes or

flexible metal tube; all the necessary precautions shall be taken to insulate
the fastening so as not to cause contacts between masses of different
categories. These metallic tubes shall be properly earthed.
(e) Fastening of Cables and Conductors to their Supports

Fastening of the cables to their supports, whether perforated steel, fittings

or bridges, shall be made by means of loosening-proof clamps made of
flexible insulating material and by mean of mechanical tightening. If several
cables of the same section use a common horizontal run, they shall be able
to be gathered and clamped by the same fastening clamp.
Fastening of conductors shall always be provided immediately next to their

connection ends. In no event may connection to a terminal block be deemed
as being fastening and permanent strain may be exerted on the terminals.
8.7.7.2 Mechanical Protection of Cables and Conductors
In all cases when the layout of the conductors of bar set of the earthing
circuits could render them vulnerable (floor crossings, vertical layers or
horizontal crossings through service passages), the necessary mechanical
protection for the cables and conductors shall be ensured.
These protections shall show sufficient strength to prevent any damage to

the cables and conductors following impacts, which may occur during
equipment handling operations; they shall also possess good resistance
against corrosion.
For vertical layers, the contractor shall ensure supply and installation of
sheet casing ensuring efficient protection up to a height of 2 meters above
ground. In case of single or limited number of conductors a spare tube shall
always be laid. Whenever LV cables or conductors are placed along a run
adjacent to or crossing MV cables, full steel protection on the LV cables
shall be provided.
It shall enable possible pulling of the MV cables without risking to damage

the insulating material of MV cable. This metal protection shall be
connected to the nearest LV earthing collector and shall ensure electrical
protection in the event of incident in the MV cable.
8.7.7.3 Bonding arrangement
Earthing & bonding arrangement for the control cables shall be submitted
by the contractor for review and approval.
8.7.7.4 Third Party Random Sample Testing

In order to ensure the conformity of the cables as per the standards, during
the execution stage, DMRC may conduct the Test on any of the supplied
cables from third party independent lab at its own cost, to ensure the quality
of material supplies. Random cables to be selected from site jointly with the
contractor and to be sent to third party lab. The sizes to be selected shall be
at the sole discretion of the engineer of the contract. If required additional
samples can also be selected at the discretion of the Engineer of the
contract.
If any of the samples fail in the test, the cost of the test along with the
complete replacement of whole lot shall be borne by the Contractor.
8.7.7.4.1 Cables and Wires random site testing procedure
The following random testing procedure will be followed as a preventive

check mechanism for LT cables, Control and wires being procured under
the Electrical Contracts:
a. The random testing shall be carried out from a reputed 3rd party lab in India.
b. The collection of samples shall be done in the presence of representatives

of DMRC, concerned contractor and manufacturer if desire. The identity of
lab shall be kept confidential.
c. All tests (Type, Sampling/Acceptance and Routine tests) to be carried out

on selected samples shall be as per applicable standards mentioned in the
contract from which the sample is drawn.
8.7.7.4.2 The following sample selection criteria shall be followed for

cables/wires: -
a. For FS cables, one sample shall be selected from any of the sizes of power
and auxiliary cables.
b. For Non-FS cables, one sample shall be selected from any of the size of
Non-FS power and auxiliary cables.
c. For Non-FS wires and FS wires, one sample each shall be selected from
any of the available sizes of Non-FS and FS Wires.

The sizes to be selected shall be at the sole discretion of Engineer of the

contract. Additional samples can also be selected at the discretion of
Engineer of contract.
8.7.7.4.3 Sample testing procedure
The following steps shall be followed: -
Step-1:
The selected Cables/Wires are to be sent for testing to 3rd party lab in India.
The identity of the lab shall be kept confidential and no witnessing by

contractor or manufacturer shall be there.
Step-2:
(a) If the sample passes the test, no further action needed and cost of piece of
cable/Wire sent for testing as well as cost of testing will be borne by DMRC.
(b) In case of Failure in any/ some test/s, contractor to be intimated regarding

the non-compliances to standard and be asked to replace the whole lot for
particular size from which the sample was taken for testing. The cost
cable/wire sample and the cost of testing will be borne by the contractor.
Step-3:
(a) In case contractor replaces the whole lot for failed size, the subject is closed
subject to penalty as mentioned in step-6 below. The delay, if any for the
procurement of the replacement material due to failure, shall be considered
as non-compliance and applicable penalty shall be imposed on the
contractor.
(b) If contractor represents, two random samples from the failed Lot shall be
collected by the contractor in the presence of DMRC representative and
after duly sealing the samples will be send to two different NABL accredited
labs ( as approved by Engineer Incharge) for conducting all those re-tests,
which were conducted on the failed sample. Cost of the testing including the
collection of sample and transportation of sample will be borne by the
contractor.
(c) Testing of replaced lot may be asked by Engineer to know the soundness
of replaced lot.

(d) If both the samples pass all the Tests, supplied lot will be deemed as
accepted by DMRC, but in case of failure of any of the samples collected by
the contractor, complete lot will be deemed as rejected and contractor will
replace the whole Lot.
(e) Name of the lab shall be disclosed to the contractor. The re-testing may be
jointly witnessed by representative of DMRC and Contractor, if they wish to
do so.
Step-4:
(a) If both samples pass the testing, the lot for the selected size is to be
considered as complying to standard, no further action is needed.
(b) If any of the samples fails from 2nd testing, the whole lot shall be treated as
failed and the contractor has to replace the lot subject to penalty as
mentioned in step-6 below. Further, the Engineer shall inform to the
committee about the rejection.
The committee shall consider the rejection as follows: -
(a) In case of first rejection from any of the running contract in DMRC for the
particular manufacturer, no action except replacement of particular size
from the lot and penalty.
(b) In case of second rejection from any of the running contract in DMRC for
the particular manufacturer, delist the particular manufacturer from
approved list of DMRC contracts and also from running contracts.
(c) Cost of testing as well cost of sample pieces will be borne by contractor.
Step-5:
(a) In case the contractor represents that lot has already been used at site and
the replacement is not possible, then Engineer of the contract may allow the
cable to continue if he is convinced with the contention of Contractor and it
is technically suitable to continue with the Cable with suitable recovery from
Contractor & imposition of penalty as per step-6. The decision taken by the
Engineer regarding extent of recovery and penalty shall be informed to the
committee.
Step-6:

(a) In case the Contractor replaces the cable, a penalty of at least 10% of
BOQ rate of entire failed lot may be imposed (Exact penalty to be
decided by Engineer of contract).
(b) In case BOQ rate for supply of cable is not given in Contract, then 85%
of Supply, Installation, Testing and Commissioning (SITC) may be taken
as supply element for penalty purpose.
(c) In case the Contractor is not able to replace the cable and request for
continuing with supplied cable and Engineer of Contract considers the
Cable technically suitable, a recovery for deficiency in parameters
should also be recovered in addition to penalty as mentioned above.

9 EARTHING
9.1 Earth Mesh Design
9.1.1 General
The Substation installation is subject to various faults such as operating over

voltages, short circuits or lightning. In order to ensure protection to people
and equipment, an Earth mesh, sized to limit the step and touch voltages
below the dangerous values, shall be provided. The Earth Mesh design and
installation shall be done in accordance with relevant provisions in
standards such as IEEE 80 latest edition. Earthing drawing & design shall
be submitted in coordination with civil design & drawings so that during
execution minimum infringement of earth mat occurs with cable trenches &
other civil structures like pile caps, cable pull pits etc.
Earth network should be designed taking into account conductors'

temperature rise as regard to the faulty current levels.
The Receiving Substation (RSS) Contractor will have to provide a buried

earth mesh in the Substation site. As far as the area over which the RSS /
AMS (Auxiliary Main Substation) & Control Room buildings are situated,
earth mat suitably designed shall be provided under the building housing
the AMS and Control room, apart from the Main Earth Mesh. The design of
the Main Earth Mesh shall be done by the RSS Contractor, taking into
account the site conditions (soil resistivity etc.). The soil resistivity of site in
dry conditions is to be measured by the contractor. In area where soil
resistivity is lower than 10 ohm- m, the minimum value of soil resistivity shall
be taken as 10 ohm-m.
In areas where the soil resistivity is rather high and where it may not be
possible to obtain a low impedance grounding system by spreading the grid
electrodes over a large area, as is done in more favourable conditions, the
various measures given in latest IEEE 80 shall be used for reducing the soil
resistivity so as to meet the site constraints. The Main Earth mesh has to be
linked (by exothermic welding), by means of two copper cables / flats of
appropriate size as given in Clause 9.5 to the following:.

 the earth mat under the AMS room
 the buried rail/connecting strip for traction return current
 Auxiliary Main Transformer neutrals
 All equipment structures supporting equipment
 Baffle walls between transformers.
 Lightning protection Earthing
The connections which are prone to bi-metallic action shall always be done
through bimetallic strips and washers.
9.1.2 Parameters affecting the design of earth mat
Several variable factors are involved in the design of an Earth Mat at

Substations. The following are some of the parameters which affect the
design of Earth mat.
 Magnitude of fault current
 Duration of fault
 Soil resistivity
 Resistivity of surface material
 Earthing mat geometry
 Material of earth mat conductor
 Shock duration etc.
Earth mat for each substation has to be designed individually. The Earth
mat has to be designed for the site conditions and shall ensure a low over
all impedance (not more than 0.5 ohms) and a current carrying capacity
consistent with the fault current magnitude.
9.1.3 Short Circuit Level
The maximum short circuit power (Isc), considered for the whole substation
area, for different voltage levels, are as follow:
 For 132 kV 7200 MVA
 For 66 kV 7200 MVA

9.1.4 Short Circuit Current
Accordingly, the short circuit current (as per CEA regulations-2010) to be

taken into consideration, for the Earth mesh design at Substations, shall be
as follows:
 For 132kV 31.5 kA for 1sec.
 For 66kV 31.5 kA for 1 sec
9.1.5 Duration of fault current
In India, the short term rating of most of the equipment is based on 1.0
second duration of fault. Therefore, 1 second may be adopted on the
duration of fault in the calculations to determine the size of conductor for the
earth mat. For the purpose of determining the safe step and mesh
potentials, duration of 0.5 second may be adopted. However, it has to be
ensured that, on the basis of the protective gear and protective scheme
provided, the fault is cleared within a period not exceeding 0.5 seconds
9.1.6 Determining the max Grid current (IG)
The design value of the maximum grid current IG is given by the following
formula
IG = CP. Df . Ig
Where,
IG = Maximum grid current in Amperes
CP = Corrective projection factor
Df = Decrement factor
Ig = Symmetrical grid current (RMS) in A
Ig = Sf (3IO)
Where,
IO = Zero Sequence fault current
Sf = Current division factor (which relates to the magnitude of the

portion of fault current to that of its portion flowing between the earth mat
and surrounding earth, to the total fault current)

The calculation of Sf is done by deriving an equivalent representation of the

overheard ground wires, neutrals etc, connected to the Earth mat and then
solving the equivalent circuits to determine the fraction of the total fault
currents which flow between the mat and the earth and through the ground
wire or neutrals. In practice, at the design stage, it will be fairly accurate to
adopt a value of 0.5 for Sf to determine the fault current that flows through
the grid to earth.
Hence, the values of maximum grid current IG to be considered for design

of Earth mat for Substations of different voltage levels, may be taken as
follows:
For
132 kV 0.5 x 31.5 = 15.75 kA ≈ 16 kA
66 kV 0.5 x 31.5 = 15.75 kA ≈ 16 kA
Important Note: The above values of max grid current are applicable only
for determining the estimated values of Step and Mesh potentials. For
determining the cross-sectional area of the Earth mat conductor, full fault
current should be considered.
9.2 Exothermic Welding
Suitable sample of molds for each type of joints / connections shall be

submitted to DMRC for approval. Exothermic welding shall comply with
IEEE 837 and UL 467.
The resistance of the joint shall be tested on a random sample. Method

statement clearly indicating various procedures, precautions required for an
effective welding shall be submitted by the contractor for approval.
9.3 List of Reference Standards
Latest edition of all the standards applicable at the time of submission of

design shall be complied:
IEEE 80
IS 3043
CBIP manual on earthing

9.4 Earth Mesh Characteristics
9.4.1 General Design
A mesh made of bare cables/ copper rods, copper strips joined by

exothermic welding forms the protection earth circuit.
Earth conductors should be buried as deep as possible to keep a significant

cylindrical equi-potential area ensuring the earth resistance decreasing. The
common practice consists to bury the mesh at 1m depth, to avoid soil
conductivity variation as regard to the variation of dryness or humidity
conditions.
The connection on power equipment should be made by conductors in loop

mode avoiding the power equipment insulation from the earth mesh in case
of conductor breaking. The earth connection to equipment in antenna mode
is strictly prohibited. Earth conductors should preferably be cylindrical
copper cables/flats. Earth conductors are linked by fixed connection. The
earth mesh implementation should avoid any permanent or occasional
contact of earth conductors with other different metals.
9.4.2 Particular Arrangement to Minimize Voltage Rise
The ground is considered as a pure resistance regarding electrical

phenomenon. Only very bad resistivity conjugated with very high
frequencies involves the ground capacitive parameter. To minimize
electromagnetic coupling between Low voltage cables and HV equipment,
the cables shall be annealed types earthed at each end.
In the aim to:
 Decrease the loop length given by cable shielding and the earth,
 Limit the current in these shields in case of short circuit,
 Minimize the works,
The earth conductors may be buried as far as possible under the LV cable
routing. The distance between LV cables and earth conductors shall be 0.30
m. at minimum to avoid any impact on LV cables in case of earth conductor
overheating. The earth mesh density shall be increased around circuit
breaker and power transformer cells.

9.5 Equipment connecting mode to Earth mesh
9.5.1 Principles
The earth electrode (with chamber) shall be 40mm dia copper perforated
pipe of 3m length shall be provided with proper size of earth chamber not
less than 450mm x 450mm x 450mm, salt & charcoal and test link to
measure the value of electrode as per IS 3043 for connection of various
equipment as specified in the specification.
Copper conductors/strips of suitable size joined by exothermic welding

technique form the Main Earth mesh. Main gantries, frames, equipment
bodies or tank and all metallic structures are to be connected minimum two
locations on an uninterruptible loop of the earth mesh.
equipmentA clamp makes the connection point with bi-metallic sheet plate
located close to the soil from which aerial earth cables linking the equipment
will be connected and crimped on earth mesh. When one clamp is not
enough, it could be provided a copper connecting strip on which several
clamps could be installed.
All of conductors linking an equipment to the earth and liable to support the
short circuit current shall have the same cross section as the earth mesh
conductors. When the equipment connection is only made for equipotential
purpose, the cable cross section could be less than earth mesh conductor
with a minimum of 25 mm². Proper tagging on earth strip ends (equipment
or earth pit end), should be done and reflected in layout plans.
9.5.2 Earth Cable Fixations along the Structures
All cables should be fixed all along the masts and beams as follows:
 Bare cables should keep distance from the metallic supporting

structure to avoid any electrolytic corrosion and should be fixed via
metallic (i.e. bronze or copper alloy) bolted clamp with bi-metallic
sheet plate.
 Insulated cables shall be fixed to the structure in the same manner

as above when earth connection with the structure is necessary, or
by collars mainly used on catenary masts.

9.5.3 Equipment Connection
(a) Measuring Transformers
Voltage Transformers:
To reduce high frequency interference transmission at the secondary side;

the P2 terminal (cold point) of primary winding, located inside the
transformer connection box is connected to the earth mesh at the general
earth connection level.
Current Transformers
The S2 terminal of secondary winding should be connected to the earth

mesh, with a connection as short as possible.
(b) Circuit breakers
Earthing of CB could be ensured through the supporting frame, itself

connected to the earth, except when one part of the equipment is painted.
In this case it is necessary to install an earth cable. In the first case a copper
cable shall jump the mechanical connection between the CB and the frame.
For circuit breakers two earth clamps on each side of the frame base and
linked to the earth mesh should be implemented
(c) Power Transformers
Each file of running rails (if any) and rollers shall be earthed directly. The
tank insulated from the rails is earthed using a low insulated cable via the
protection current transformer The S2 current transformer terminal and
metallic base shall be earthed via a separated connection. The power
transformers earth cable should be as shorter as possible.
The each of four panel of auxiliary transformer cover shall be connected to

the earthing system at minimum two locations by cu strip of 25 x 5 sq. mm..
(d) Neutrals
Two separate and distinct earth pits with chambers and connected to main
earth mat shall be provided for all the transformer neutrals
(e) Isolators

Incoming isolators earth blades should be linked to the isolator base by

copper braid, the base being directly connected to the mesh. Electrical
control boxes should be earthed directly. On hand operated isolators a
copper braid should link the control box with the transmission axle, the
control box being directly connected to the mesh. In both control modes; a
metallic duck board should be installed in front of the control device, linked
to the control boxes and the mesh via a direct connection fixed on the frame.
(f) Lightning Arresters
The lightning arrester earth terminal shall be directly connected to an earth

electrode formed from a separated earth pit (with chamber) and also
connected to the earth mesh. The Earth Pit of LA should be located at the
nearest distance to LA, and strip of minimum length with minimum bends
should be provided for connection.
(g) Earth Gantry Arrangement
In case of gantry arrangement with tower and beam, An ACSR conductor of

suitable size (min. 93.3 sq.mm.) will run continuously through each beam
and towers clamped at suitable interval and earthed to the general mesh by
mean of bimetallic connection.
(h) Lightning Guard Line Earthing
Lightning guard line if provided shall be earthed through 93.3mm steel bare
cable to a specific earth Electrode located at the bottom of each guard line
supporting structure, these earth Electrode being connected to the general
earth mesh at the RSS-cum-TSS.
The connection of panels containing low voltage electronic equipment like

SAS, Relays, PC etc. to be done suitably as per recommendations of
manufacturers of these items with a confirmation from them that such
earthing connection will not interface in the proper functioning of these
devices. If required by manufacturers of these items, a separate earthing
system to be installed by separate earth electrodes for these devices,
panels etc.
9.6 AMS & Control Room Building Earthing

Before laying the foundations of the RSS Building, a well interconnected

Earthing mesh using 120 Sq-mm bare copper flexible conductors will be laid
(buried conductors under the foundation raft). These copper bare flexible
conductors will be taken up to plinth beam and connected to main grid with
exothermic welding to ensure proper connections at minimum two locations
on each face of building. The copper bare conductor will be clamped or
welded to column bar.
The main Earth Mat placed in the switchyard shall be extended to the
building area also and risers to be taken for equipment placed inside the
building. However, Earthing in GIS room shall be provided as per GIS
manufacturer recommendation and connected to main earth mat.
9.7 Gas Insulated Switchgear (GIS)
Earthing requirement of GIS installations are similar to air insulated

substation (AIS), i.e. safety of the operating staff against any hazard and
protection of equipment against electromagnetic interference and damage.
The area occupied by a GIS is typically 10-25% of that of AIS equipment.
Therefore, achieving the required Earth Potential Rise (EPR) or the earth
resistance of grid earth electrode is more challenging task. Earthing of all
GIS equipment shall be done as per recommendation of GIS manufacturer
and calculations shall be submitted in support of dangerous voltages (touch,
step voltages etc.) & grid resistance as per latest IEEE standard 80.
Manufacturer’s representative shall be involved during installation of earth
mat to certify that the earthing of GIS has been done as per manufacturer’s
recommendations.
9.8 Boundary Wall Earthing
Earthing of boundary wall/fencing can be achieved by placement of

boundary wall outside the grid area by 2 m with no electric bonding between
fence and main station grid. Separate earthing shall be done for boundary
wall which is not connected to main earth mat. 25 x 5 mm GI earth strip is
running continuously along the boundary wall/fence and it is connected to
fence at every 02m and also with at least 4 numbers of separate earth
electrode with salt and charcoal of 40mm dia, 3 meter long perforated GI

pipe with test link and earth chamber at each corner of site (not connected
to main earth mat).
If the site constraint (space, area availability etc.) doesn’t allow above
design, then suitable earthing design of boundary wall / fence shall be
submitted as per latest IEEE 80.
9.9 Solar Panel Earthing
The roof top solar panel in the RSS to promote use of renewable energy
and reduce electricity consumption shall be provided by the solar developer.
To meet the earthing requirement of solar system the RSS contractor shall
provide at least two separate earth pits with charcoal and salt of 40mm dia,
3 meter long perforated CU pipe with test link and earth chamber shall be
provided.
9.10 Lightning Protection
Lightning flashes to earth may be hazardous to structures and to services.

The hazard to a structure can result in
 damage to the structure and to its contents,
 failure of associated electrical and electronic systems,
 injury to living beings in or close to the structure.
Consequential effects of the damage and failures may be extended to the

surroundings of the structure or may involve its environment. The hazard to
services can result in:-
 damage to the service itself,
 failure of associated electrical and electronic equipment.
To reduce the loss due to lightning, protection measures may be required.

Whether they are needed, and to what extent, should be determined by risk
assessment. The risk of the probable average annual loss in a structure and
in a service due to lightning flashes, depends on:
 the annual number of lightning flashes influencing the structure and

the service;
 the probability of damage by one of the influencing lightning flashes;

 the mean amount of consequential loss.
Lightning flashes influencing the structure & service may be divided into
 flashes terminating on the structure/service,
 flashes terminating near the structure/service,
Flashes to the structure or a connected service may cause physical damage

and life hazards. Flashes near the structure or service as well as flashes to
the structure or service may cause failure of electrical and electronic
systems due to over voltages resulting from resistive and inductive coupling
of these systems with the lightning current. Moreover, failures caused by
lightning over voltages in users installations and in power supply lines may
also generate switching type over voltages in the installations.
The number of lightning flashes influencing the structure and the services
depends on the dimensions and the characteristics of the structure and of
the services, on the environment characteristics of the structure and the
services, as well as on lightning ground flash density in the region where the
structure and the services are located.
The entire Substation shall be protected against lightning by providing either

earth screen conductors on tower peaks, or by means of Lightning
Protection masts suitably spaced to cover the entire area and assessment
of risk etc. shall be carried out using IS/IEC 62305 or latest.
9.11 Size of Earth Mat Conductor:
The tentative min. size of copper earth mat shall be as follows:
Voltage Fault Current Area of Conductor Size of Earth

(KV) (KA) (Sq mm) Strip
66 31.5 114 mm2 25x5
110/132 31.5 114 mm2 25x5
220 40 144 mm2 30x5

9.12 Testing of Earthing System / Pits
a) Earth mat laying photographs shall be submitted to DMRC before backfilling

so that the same can be utilized for future reference if required.
b) All Earth pits shall be treated pits as per IS 3043 with provision of watering/
perforated pipe. The resistance of individual earth pit shall not be more than
5 ohm for normal soil and 10 ohm for rocky soil.
c) The resistance values of all the earth pits shall be measured and recorded
along with the date of measurement.
d) The location of earth pits shall be clearly marked in the drawings and it
should be identifiable during maintenance.
e) Test link shall be provided for measuring the resistances of earth pits.
f) Test certificates of all the materials used in earthing shall be submitted to

DMRC.
g) A typical drawing showing details of gantry/ structure earthing shall be

submitted separately to DMRC.
h) The contractor shall appoint third party auditor under the scope of this
contract to carryout comprehensive earthing adequacy audit of the entire
substation grounding system to determine the effectiveness of the earthing
system. Comprehensive Audit shall be carried out during commissioning
and again before end of Defect liability period (DLP), brief scope of Audit is
given in Annexure 16. The detailed scope of work and Test methodology
shall be prepared by the auditor and submitted for approval of employer.
Any additional test or test method suggested by the employer shall also be
included in the audit without any additional cost to employer.
9.13 O&M documentation
For each RSS , contractor shall prepare an O&M maintenance manual for
earthing system comprising detail record of soil resistivity, calculation, earth
grid / electrode resistance measurement, As built drawings, etc. As built
Earthing Layout plan shall be displayed in the RSS.

10 METERING
10.1 General
The following metering arrangements shall be provided at the Receiving

Substations. All energy Meters shall be suitable for continuous operation
between 0 ⁰C and +50 ⁰C and shall be as per latest CEA regulation.
10.1.1 On the Outgoing and Incoming Feeders from the Power Supply
Authority
(a) At the Grid End:-
Digital Energy meter (Electronic energy meter, Accuracy class 0.2s,

corresponding CT secondary core shall also be of 0.2S class to enable
measurement of Active energy (kWh), Reactive energy (kVARh), Apparent
energy (kVAh), frequency, power factor, instantaneous maximum demand,
power, integrated maximum demand, total harmonic distortion, TDD with
ABT (Availability Based Tariff) (IS 14697) features etc. The meters should
have recording and memory facilities. Energy meter should have the feature
of downloading data, showing the customized Time of Day (TOD) report of
last month and Maximum demand on the selectable time basis (15 min, 30
min, 01 Hours etc.). There should be provision of communication port in
energy meter, so that Maximum demand and Integrated Demand of every
15min / 30min can be monitored online from SCADA. One Energy meter on
each incoming feeder is required to be provided, which shall be able to
indicate /record/store the energy of the incoming feeder, through suitable
connections. Meters should match tariff scheme (TOD) and Energy Meter
application S/W (for remote metering etc. if applicable) shall also be as per
requirement of particular state. Meters shall also be suitable for open access
requirement as well. Please refer detailed specifications for the Abt type
meter provided as Annexure-25
At the RSS end-
(b) One Digital Energy meter (Electronic energy meter) along with summation
CT of accuracy class of 0.2s for both the incoming feeders as per detailed
specifications for the Non-Abt multifunction meter provided as Annexure-25

(c) Digital Ammeters (to read the value of current in each phase of each of the
Incoming Feeders)
(d) Digital Voltmeter (to read the value of line voltages R-Y, Y-B, B-R, in each
of the Incoming Feeders)
10.1.2 On the Traction Transformer Output side and Outgoing feeders.
(a) Digital Ammeters (to read the value of current delivered by each Traction
Transformer)
(b) Digital Voltmeter (to read the value of secondary voltage of each
Transformer, whether on-load or as hot standby)
(c) One Digital Energy meter (Electronic energy meter) along with summation
CT for both the incoming feeders as per detailed specifications for the Non-
Abt multifunction meter provided as Annexure-25
(d) One separate Digital Energy meter (Electronic energy meter) along with
summation CT for all the O/G feeders of each main lines (i.e separate meter
for each metro line) to measure the energy consumed by each main line
separately and Depot feeders whenever applicable separately as per
detailed specifications for the Non-Abt multifunction meter provided as
Annexure-25.
10.1.3 On the AMS Transformer Output side and O/ G feeders to network

and RSS
(a) Digital Ammeters (to read the value of current delivered by each AMS
Transformer)
(b) Digital Voltmeter (to read the value of secondary voltage of each
Transformer, whether on-load or as hot standby)
(c) One Digital Energy meter (Electronic energy meter) along with summation
CT for both the incoming feeders as per detailed specifications for the Non-
Abt multifunction meter provided as Annexure-25
(d) One separate Digital Energy meter (Electronic energy meter) along with
summation CT for all the O/G feeders of each main lines (i.e separate meter
for each metro line) to measure the energy consumed by each main line
separately, RSS transformer and Depot feeders whenever applicable

separately as per detailed specifications for the Non-Abt multifunction meter

provided as Annexure-25.
10.1.4 Communication to RSS and OCC
All the metering data inclusive of above parameters shall be transmitted /

communicated to SAS in RSS and also to SCADA in OCC through OFC
medium for trends and reports.
10.1.5 Testing of Energy Meters.
All the energy meters should be tested & calibrated by the accredited
laboratory. Contractor must submit the testing & calibration certificate for
Energy Meters in this regard

11 GENERAL ELECTRICAL WORKS
11.1 Yard Lighting
The lighting of the RSS cum TSS shall be provided to permit circulation in
the external area comprising the RSS and the TSS. A lighting coverage of
30 lux at 1 metre from ground level shall be ensured for the entire RSS-
cum-AMS-cum-TSS compound.
This lighting shall be installed on the main masts, over the conductors, with
adequate electrical clearance. The masts, structures, beams used for
hanging conductors should not be used for fixing lighting fixtures, to avoid
shutdown of switchyard and supply during maintenance of lighting fixtures.
This distance shall be at least 3 meters from the conductors but not less
than the safe working clearance permitted by relevant safety rules and
codes in India.
When the mast is inside the area, each face of the mast shall be fitted with
one lamp. When the mast is at one border, only the 3 or the two sides of the
mast, facing into the area, need to be fitted with one lamp each. The
complete lighting fixture shall be type tested as per IS 10322(5) and shall
have an IP code of 65 to ensure a good protection against dust and water
(raining).
LED Light to be provided to have a suitable power to ensure the required

level of illumination specified above. Colour temperature will be 4000/5500
K. The life duration shall be at least 50000 hours. The external yard lighting
shall be provided with timer control
11.2 Lightning Protection
The entire Substation shall be protected against lightning by providing either

earth screen conductors on tower peaks, or by means of Lightning
Protection Masts, suitably spaced to cover the entire area. The Lightning
Mast shall be type tested as per LM-79. Type Test certificate for LM Bolts
as per relevant standard shall also be submitted for approval.
The height and locations of Lightning Masts shall be designed appropriately,

with due consideration to the equipment layout in the RSS, to ensure that
all the equipment meant to be protected against lightning are within

protective zone provided by the Lightning conductor. The Lightning

conductor generally consists of:
 the lightning receiver projecting above the object to be protected
 the earthing grid, and
 the conductor which connects the receiver with the earthing grid and
is meant to carry the lightning current away safely to ground.
The Contractor shall indicate the heights and locations of the Lightning
Masts, on the Substation Layout Drawing, and shall also submit supporting
design calculations to prove the adequacy of the arrangement to cover all
equipment for protection against lightning.

12 CIVIL WORKS
12.1 General
Unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents the whole of the civil,
structural, services and finishing works shall be constructed to comply with
relevant laws and regulations of the Indian Government and of Delhi state
government as well as complying with the requirements of the Delhi Public
Utility Authorities, fire regulations and such additional requirements as may
be stated in the documents. The design requirements relating to fire safety
and escape shall be generally in accordance with NFPA, BS 476 and other
applicable standards. The Contractor will be required to execute civil works
at the RSS-cum-TSS-cum-AMS locations.. The entire substation including
control room along-with electrical items are to be accommodated in this
area. The building shall fully comply with all the statutory requirements. It
shall also fulfil CEA guidelines. Civil design shall comply with the stringent
requirements as per environment condition as given in IS 456 and relevant
RDSO specifications
The specific nature of civil works, required to be done at different locations,

will be different and will depend upon the locations. Broadly, at every RSS,
TSS and AMS locations, where no other civil contractor is working, the
Contractor will be required to arrange for land preparation, erection of
boundary wall, entrance gate, baffle walls between transformers
transformer support anchor blocks, provide architectural services, civil and
structural design services and other auxiliary services like water supply,
lighting, ventilation, air-conditioning, fire detection and alarm etc, for the
AMS and Control Room Building. The services to be provided by the
Contractor are broadly described in the subsequent paragraphs.
The grade of concrete should be as per approved design but not inferior
than M-30 as per IS 456 for all civil construction in RSS.
All necessary steps shall have to be taken by the contractor and

requirements fulfilled so as to obtain the Green building Certification (IGBC
certification with Platinum rating) for RSS building. The equipment, process,
design shall be meeting these requirements and is in the scope of contract

and included in bid. All electrical items shall generally be of 5 star rating as
per BEE
The contractor shall prepare and submit Building Interface Modelling for the
RSS building (including all Civil, Electrical, Plumbing, Air-conditioning and
fire requirement) using Revit 2018 or later with highest level of details to
provide 3D modelling, quantity take off, Clash detection, and construction
schedule linked with animated model. The contractor shall provide one
licenced software along with model to the employer for control and
monitoring of the project. The project monitoring schedule shall also be
prepared in Oracle Primavera P6 version 17 or later. The contractor shall
submit list of civil structure and architecture drawing along with tentative
submission plan before submitting first set of drawings. The contractor shall
take specific approval from employer before engaging design sub-
contractor. All the civil drawings shall be approved by Metro Authority.
Sufficient time (at least 2 weeks) shall be given for such approval.
Accordingly, the drawing submission shall be planned.
The contractor shall use allowed recycled material in civil construction of

RSS building to get platinum IGBC rating. Wet Land type Sewage Treatment
Plant shall be provided subject to the approval of the Engineer-in-Charge.
All preparation of documentation for IGBC certification for RSS is in the

scope of RSS contractor.
Site Facilities
The contractor shall provide and maintain its own site accommodation at
locations consented to by the Engineer. Offices, sheds, stores, mess rooms,
garages, workshops, latrines and other accommodation on the site shall be
maintained in a clean, stable and secure condition. Living accommodation
shall not be provided on the site. The contractor shall comply with the
requirements of Chapter-15 to the Employer’s requirements- General
Specifications. In addition contractor shall provide and maintain field offices
for use of DMRC staff during the contract period at each RSS location of
area not less than 30 sqm with toilet & electricity facility including services
for office upkeep, consumables, furniture, security etc. Contractor shall also

be required to install adequate number of video cameras (duly covering the

entire site area) at each working site under construction. The provision shall
also be made to provide the live streaming of video cameras at the
Engineer’s premises to facilitate the Engineer to monitor the site progress
on a daily basis. There shall be provision for recording of CCTV stream for
at least 1 months and automatic deletion shall be based on FIFO after 1
month only. The DMRC shall be administrator for control of CCTV system.
12.2 Land Preparation
The Bidder is advised to inspect the sites for various RSS-cum-TSS-cum-

AMS locations and gather for himself various details such as topography
and land levels, soil condition including the safe bearing capacity, soil
resistivity etc, HFL (highest flood level) at the Substation site, drainage
requirements etc, in order to ensure that the work content is fully
appreciated by him at the time of preparation of bid.
The site will have to be cleared of all existing encumbrances, leveled and
compacted. The finished ground level of the Substation site shall be above
the Highest Flood Level (HFL) in the Region, to be ascertained by the
Contractor and confirmed by the Local Authorities. In any case, the finished
ground level shall be at least 60 cm above the main rail / road level, near to
the site. The compaction of soil shall be done in accordance with Standard
Engineering practices and the site, after compaction shall be fit, without any
detriment to support the heavy equipment, including transformers whose
weight may be in the region of 100-110 tonnes, supported on 4 wheels
which are spaced approximately 2.4 metres, running on a Broad Gauge
(1.676m) track. During land preparation, if it becomes necessary to cut or
transplant trees, it shall be done by the Contractor with the permission of
Forest authorities/relevant authorities and with the approval of DMRC,
strictly in accordance with the Local laws. Efforts shall be made to transplant
tree instead of cutting to the designated location, the contractor shall appoint
tree transplanting expert for the same. Cutting of tree shall only be done
after exhausting all efforts for transplanting of trees.
12.3 Access Roads / Rail cum Road / RCC Road

The Contractor will be required to provide suitable access road to the

Substation site, from the nearest main road, which has the necessary width
and strength to carry the Power Supply equipment. The Access Road, Rail-
cum-Road in the transformer area and other Approach Road to Building &
Store room inside the RSS shall be of RCC as per DMRC specifications.
For this purpose, the Contractor shall prepare the necessary design and
calculations and submit them to the Employer/Employer’s Representative,
for approval. On approval of designs and calculations, the contractor shall
construct the approach roads as per approved designs. The approach roads
should, at the minimum, be 5.0m wide and shall be able to support 100 –
tonne trailers.
12.4 Drainage
Drainage of the Substation site shall be provided as per the best engineering
practices, so as to prevent surface flooding and pooling of water. For this
purpose, suitably designed drains and sumps shall be provided and if the
water level inside the sump rises above a predetermined level, the sump
water shall be arranged to be evacuated by means of suitable electric
pumps fixed in the sump. In addition, suitable precautions shall also be
taken to prevent transformer insulating oil from being discharged into the
environment in the event of a ruptured transformer tank. This shall be
realised by a retention tank for each transformer
 dimensioned in order to be able to contain the whole transformer oil;
 laid below the transformer;
 covered by a net/grating to maintain a 5 cm width stone bed on which

the oil might fall;
 fitted with a beside extraction pit to be used for oil or raining water
pumping.
The pumping shall be realised with a portable manual or electrical pump,

which is to be stored in the maintenance room. The drainage system of RSS
shall be connected to the local drainage system of the city by the RSS
contractor with the permission of local authorities and it should be suitably

protected to ensure prevention of back flow of outside drainage water to

RSS.
12.5 RSS Building (Indoor GIS, AMS & Control Room Building)
12.5.1 Detailed Design
The RSS Contractor shall submit the General Layout of the RSS / Control
Room Building for approval of employer.. The RSS /control room building
shall be multi storied, so as to accommodate all equipment required for
completion of RSS work and other provision as per national building code.
Working space shall be allotted if available during construction. The
structure shall be of RCC framed structure based on BIS codes. Based on
this, the Contractor will be required to prepare and submit detailed design
of civil, structural, architectural and electrical works. All applicable building
regulations must be observed, and also the rules for good building practice.
After obtaining the Employer’s/Employer’s representative’s approval, the
Contractor will construct the building along with auxiliary works, in
accordance with approved drawings and designs. All drawings, designs,
calculations, etc. shall be reviewed and certified by the independent
structural consultant appointed by contractor with the approval of employer
before submitting to the employer for review.
12.5.2 Civil and Structural Design
The Contractor shall perform the civil and structural design, including the
preparation of calculations, drawings, specifications, cost estimates and
other documents, for but not limited to:
 General arrangement (layout and elevation);
 Structures and sub-structures;
 Foundations;
 Drainage (Covered type);
 Networks (Water, sewage, etc.)
 Baffle walls
 Boundary walls.

 Earthquake resistance as per zone of Delhi
12.5.3 Architectural Services
The Contractor shall perform the Architectural services design, including the
preparation of calculations, drawings, specifications, cost estimates and
other documents, for but not limited to:
 General arrangement (layout and elevation);
 Section and details
 Walls, floors, ceiling finishing
 Doors, frames and windows
 Toilet rooms, and partitions including equipment
 Concrete (types and treatments)
 Thermal and moisture protection
 Electrical and mechanical fittings
 Building surrounding environmental arrangement
The standard of architectural work should be of the same level as existing

for other surrounding buildings of DMRC.
12.5.4 Auxiliary Services
The Contractor shall provide and perform the Auxiliary service design,
including the preparation of calculations, drawings, specifications, other
documents, for but not limited to:
 Lighting, fans and sockets
 Ventilation and air conditioning as per specification attached as

Annexure-4
 Fire alarm and detection as per specification attached as Annexure-

7
 Cables routing (cable trenches, trough, trays etc…)
 False ceiling and raised floor with foam concrete in control room with
Antistatic flooring

 Earthing
 Water pumps
 CO2 sensor as per IGBC requirement
12.5.5 Design Quality Control Plan and Design services
The Contractor shall prepare and submit a Design Quality Control Plan to
the Employer’s Representative and perform the Design Services in
accordance with the Design Quality Control Plan. The Contractor shall be
responsible for the correctness and technical merits of his design,
calculation, drawings, specifications and all other documentation.
All documents shall be delivered, submitted and approved by the

Employer’s representative prior to start the construction work. For each
submission the Contractor will submit an original, 5 copies and the editable
electronic file.
12.5.6 RSS BUILDING: (Indoor GIS, AMS & Control Room Building)
Requirements
12.5.6.1 General
While planning and constructing the buildings and rooms for electrical
equipment, care must be taken to ensure that:-
 all operational requirements are satisfied
 the rooms are free from groundwater and flooding. Brickwork below
plinth beam to NGL / Tie-beam shall be provided for proper protection
of soil erosion/ settlement.
 adequate accesses are provided for operation, transport and fire-

fighting services
 all applicable building regulations are respected.
 the building is structurally and functionally adequate in all respects

and aesthetically presents a good look.
 The cable cellar is to be provided for GIS Building at ground level.

Materials used for the construction of the building shall be new and of good
quality. Materials shall be so chosen that the buildings when erected shall
have good heat and sound insulation properties in normal conditions, as
well as when combined with the heating or air-conditioning equipment
installed by the Contractor. Height of the control room and AMS room shall
be at least 4.8 mt. and that of the GIS room shall be at least 6.5 mts. All
transformers, with all safety requirements, shall be inside building with one
side open towards approach road/access road/main road
12.5.6.2 Walls, Ceiling & Floors
Walls, ceiling and floors must be dry. Both external and internal walls shall
be sound proof and 2 hours fire proof. The external walls and ceilings of the
building shall be provided with the thermal insulation material to prevent
transfer of heat from outside the building to inside through the roof and walls
so as to maintain the ambient temperature inside the building during
different seasons. The Insulation material shall be Environment friendly and
should have long life. The contractor is required to obtain approval of
insulation material from the Employer. The walls of oil type transformer area
shall be 04 hour fire rated. Means of proper exit / evacuation shall also be
planned. The inside surfaces of the walls should be as smooth as possible
to prevent dust deposits.
The ceiling shall be finished in such a way that the equipment are not
endangered by falling plaster. The floor surface must be easy to clean,
pressure-resistant, non-slip and wear-resistant. Concrete floor with
adequate strength to withstand movement of equipment/panels wear-
resistant protective coating with industrial grade (10-12 mm) ceramic tiles
(non skidding type) is recommended for the control room.
False floor / raised floor with foam concrete with anti-static flooring and
inbuilt trench and false ceiling may also be provided as per design in control
room as per Employer’s requirement Attention must be paid to floor loadings
when taking the equipment in and out. In front of control panels and
Switchgear panels, insulated mats of approved design, shall be provided.
The internal walls & ceiling shall be finished with plastic emulsion in control
room and oil bound distemper in other rooms.

In staircase granite shall be used. The hand rail of staircase shall be of

stainless steel (SS 304). All bricks to be used in RSS shall be of average
compressive strength 100kg/cm2 and confirming to that required for green
building/IGBC certification. All floors shall be provided with epoxy coating
and this shall be upto the satisfaction of the engineer in-charge.
12.5.6.3 Doors and Windows
Windows to each room shall be of an area, not less than 50% of the floor
area. Windows must be so arranged that they can be opened and closed
without any personnel coming dangerously close to any live parts. All
windows of the ground floor building shall be fitted with burglar bars firmly
attached to the structure of the building. The window shall be aluminium
section of thickness not less than 5mm with powder coated min thickness
80microns.
All opening windows shall be fitted with locks. Internal doors shall be Two
hours fire rated and shall be fitted with door closers, lever latches, mortise
lock and keys. Window/doors shall be provided with toughened glass of
minimum thickness of 6mm and confirming to IGBC requirements.
External doors shall have barrel bolts both at top and bottom of one leaf and
a Yale lock on the other leaf, they shall be equipped with an Anti-Panic
system permitting urgent door opening by mean of a bar located at 0.7 m
high from floor level.
Emergency fire exit doors with panic bars should be provided in AMS control
room building and shall be accordingly marked. External doors shall be of
solid external quality and hung with heavy-duty hinges.
12.5.6.4 Staircase: structurally shall be of RCC type, width, length and risers should
be as per NBC and shall be covered with granite of suitable color and quality
as approved by engineer in charge. Staircase shall be provided with good
quality of Stainless steel (SS-304) hand rails.
12.5.6.5 Plinth protection shall be provided of good aesthetic appearance with

granite.
12.5.6.6 Air Conditioning

The rooms must be sufficiently ventilated. In the control room, where people
are likely to be present constantly, the following indoor climatic parameters
should be possible to be maintained.
Temperature - 22C Minimum

- 26C Maximum
Humidity - 60% Maximum
The control room should be provided with VRF type AC with sequential logic
controllers to achieve the above results. Number of VRF outdoor and Indoor
unit shall be N+1 configuration where N- working unit as per heat load
calculation and one unit standby in each. The rooms where switchgears are
installed, the maximum relative humidity should not exceed 70%. The
maximum ambient temperature inside the room, averaged over 24 hours
shall not exceed 35C. The detail specification of Variable Refrigerant Flow
System (VRF) (Industrial category Heavy Duty Type) are attached at
Annexure-4
12.5.7 Battery Rooms
In battery rooms, the following additional precautions have to be taken.
 the walls & floor must be resistant to electrolyte action and provided
with acid resistant industrial grade (10-12 mm) ceramic tiles.
 ceilings should be painted with acid-resistant paint which does not

give off harmful vapour.
 Ventilation by means of induced draught is preferred. An air change

rate of 5 times the room volume per hour is recommended.
 The battery rooms shall be fitted with eye washer equipment.
12.5.8 Water Supply, Electricity, Pantry, Sanitation and Fire Fighting
Building shall be supplied with continuous (24 hour) running potable cold
water to the pantry and wash rooms. One reverse osmosis (RO) water
cleaning plant of suitable capacity (suitable storage of at least 30 ltrs) with
cooling facility for drinking water shall be provided in the RSS.
A small pantry with adequate size and provision of the ventilation, power
sockets shall be provided in the RSS / control room building. The location

shall be strategically selected to avoid any heat inflow to the air-conditioned

room.
A bore well of suitable capacity shall be provided with permission of local

authorities in the RSS for water requirement. Rain Water Harvesting should
be provided in RSS. The toilets may use raw water for flushing, shall be
equipped with water closets and sitting type stools and urinal pot with sensor
and shall be adequately ventilated through the ceiling.
The Contractor shall also design and provide necessary arrangements for
the constant and hygienic disposal of all effluent, sewage and rubbish from
the buildings to the nearest sewer line or septic tank. Wetland water type
treatment plant for sewage treatment should be provided with suitable size
of pumps for feeding water to tank. Water meter in the water pipe line for
fresh water as well as raw water to be provided. Storage and septic tanks
shall be required due to restricted hours of water supply in the Delhi Area.
All buildings shall be supplied with electricity at 240 volts, at 50 Hz.

Firefighting equipment shall be provided in accordance with the
recommendations of the Delhi City Fire Brigade.
12.5.9 Exterior Finish
External finish of the RSS Building shall be attractive and pleasing to the
eye preferably of stable / durable cladding material like combination of glass
and Aluminium cladding (ACP) or better material, subject to Employer’s
approval. Considering that the RSS locations and AMS and Control Room
Buildings are prestigious installations and should blend smoothly and
aesthetically with the surroundings, the AMS and Control Room Building
shall have a good exterior finish. Use of an indigenous combination of glass
and exterior texture finish shall be adopted, subject to Employer’s approval.
12.5.10 Internal Equipment
The RSS / control room building shall be designed and constructed to

accommodate the following equipment and facilities:
1) Electrical Equipment Rooms
 66kV switchgear ( In case of GIS)

 33 kV switchgear
 25 kV Switchgear (In case of GIS)
 Low voltage auxiliary transformers 33 kV / 415-240 V
 Low voltage distribution cubicles (AC and DC)
 Battery chargers
 Reactive power compensation device (STATCOM) along with

Transformer.
2) Battery Room
 Batteries
3) Control Rooms
 Control and Relay panels
 SCADA equipment, including work stations
 SCADA system
4) Staircase, Rest Room and Toilets, Maintenance Room
5) GIS room with cable cellar (in case of GIS type substation)
The building shall have sufficient room to accommodate above equipment

and requirements and cellar in case of GIS with all partition walls, openings,
and all facilities, designed to receive power supply installations. Facilities
should include but not restricted to:
 Water; network and equipment (supply, sanitary, sewage…)
 Cables trenches and conduits
 Low voltage installation (lighting socket, fans, ventilation, fire

protection…)
 Doors and locks
 Painting
12.5.11 Low Voltage Installation
12.5.11.1 Lighting &Power

Normal Lighting and Power Supplies
The lighting and power auxiliary outgoings located in AC auxiliary cubicles,

forming the exit point for all the normal lighting supplies and power
connections, shall be supplied from both LT auxiliary transformers. The
lighting and power supplies shall be distributed as follow:
a) AC Auxiliary Cubicle 1:
 The first half lighting of the RSS building and Electrical equipment
rooms
 The first half lighting of the external RSS (e.g. yard/equipment lighting
etc.). The external yard lighting shall be provided with timer control.
 The first half lighting of the external TSS (e.g. yard/equipment lighting
etc.). The external yard lighting shall be provided with timer control.
 The lighting of rest room and toilets
 The lighting of control room
 The supply of sockets in the AMS
 The supply of sockets in control room
 The supply of sockets in TSS
b) AC Auxiliary Cubicle 2:
 The second half lighting of the RSS building and Electrical equipment
rooms
 The second half lighting of the external RSS (e.g. yard/equipment

lighting etc.) The external yard lighting shall be provided with timer
control.
 The second half lighting of the external TSS (e.g. yard/equipment

lighting etc.). The external yard lighting shall be provided with timer
control.
 The lighting of battery room
 The lighting of maintenance room
 The supply of sockets in RSS

 The supply of sockets in battery room
 The supply of sockets in maintenance room
Each outgoing circuit shall be protected by a miniature circuit breaker,

provided with differential protection. The circuits shall always be cut off on
all poles. For instance, in the case of three-phase distribution, the three
conductors shall be cut-off by a four poles circuit breaker.
In the case of 2-wire supply, this shall be cut-off by a two-pole switch and
shall again take place on all poles. Supply of Power socket circuits shall be
made through 5 conductor cables (3 phases, neutral and ground)
c) Standby Lighting
This lighting shall automatically come into service as soon as a voltage

deficiency is detected on either of the two auxiliary cabinets and shall not
go through any intervening switch. The power source for this LED lighting
shall come from two supplies of 110 V DC battery / charger set with
automatic changeover starting ON in case of failure of AC supply. As soon
as the normal half station 415/240 V AC auxiliary sources fail and in order
to prevent untimely operation when the cut-off period is too short, automated
closure of the contactor shall be provided so as to energize the standby
lighting system which shall take over until normal power supply is restored.
This installation shall ensure minimum lighting in the RSS building

guaranteeing personnel safety and permitting, at the points where
necessary, all isolation or re-supply operations following total cut-off of the
medium voltage sources. The standby lighting fixtures shall also be
controllable.
12.5.11.2 Ventilation:
The Control Room should be Air-Conditioned with Industrial Category

Heavy Duty VRF AC with logic controller. The High Voltage rooms shall be
suitably ventilated by air circulation as follows:
 Air inlet louver at the 33 kV switchgear base,
 Air inlet at the base of each transformer cell
 Air exit at the top of each transformer cell

1st Case: Ambient air is less than 35°C, the equipment does not need any
forced ventilation;
The transformer room is at least equal or higher than the 33 kV switchgear

room temperature due to the fact that there is no energy spent into the
switchgear. When the transformer room temperature is higher than the
switchgear room temperature, a natural air convection is made through the
both air inlets and air exit;
2nd Case: Ambient air is more than 35°C, the equipment needs forced
ventilation: in that case, the transformer air fans reinforce the natural air
cooling. The fans shall be mounted on each transformer room to extract air
from the room. A trap shall close automatically the aperture in case of fire
detection. On the other hand, a louver shall close automatically the air inlet
in case of fire detection.
12.5.11.3 Technical Conditions:-
The technical conditions for carrying out the works and providing the
supplies are as follow:
Lighting Equipment
This shall be of LED type. LED Lights shall be type tested as per IS 10032
(5). Average lighting intensity will be 300 lux in the control rooms, and in
technical rooms
 100 lux in the low voltage auxiliary transformer rooms
 80 lux in all other levels and in the stairway.
The LED tubes shall be mounted beneath cover glasses (as shall also be
the case for the standby lighting). In the battery rooms, they shall also be
mounted with glands to keep out acid vapours and hydrogen.
The sealed LED light fittings shall be capable of withstanding impacts and
shall be explosion-proof (as for those in the transformer cubicles). The light
fittings proposed by the contractor are subject to approval by the Employer.
12.5.11.4 Power Sockets

They shall be of sealed, wall mounted type, with four poles plus central
ground, rated for 16 A and 500 V AC and with a cover flap fitted with a plug
holding pin. The external sockets shall be mounted on mast, at the level of
each circuit breaker.
12.5.12 Fire Protection
Auxiliary supply of each fire detection system shall be 110 V DC. In case of
fire in any transformer, the fire detection system shall instantaneously come
into action isolating the transformer by tripping the upstream and the
downstream transformer circuit-breakers and put the fire extinction system
into action. Coming into action, it shall also stop the fan working and close
all apertures (air inlet and air exit) to avoid or minimize any fire propagation.
The thermo element detectors shall be mounted at the cover level of the
transformer. The detectors shall detect at any moment an abnormal
temperature rise generated by a fire on the tank, the terminals or even on
the transformer bed.
The detectors shall be designed and equalized such that they do not operate
at slow temperature rise, which may occur due to a variation of ventilation,
variation load, solar beam, etc. The design of the detectors shall ensure
complete security, such that it will not operate due to any reason except for
fire, and complete dependability in case of fire.
If more than one detector is necessary, they shall be series mounted by a

fire resistant electric cable, which is connected to a detection unit. The
detectors shall be of simple, study inspect vibration proof, moisture acid
resistant construction.
Provision shall be made for a guard current flowing through the detectors.
Interruption of the guard current due to break of the elements series
connecting cable or loose terminal shall activate an audible and visible
alarm signal at the detection unit of the equipment indicating interruption of
guard current. This signal must not activate the extinction system and the
signal can be used for blocking of the extinction system on request. The fire
detection system shall be completed inside the control room building as per
specification attached at Annexure-7.

Fire Fighting Equipment
The contractor shall supply minimum 4 Nos of 4.5 kg CO2 portable fire
extinguishers distributed throughout the yard and equipment room each.
12.5.13 Cable Paths
General
The contractor shall provide all cable paths in the HV yard, in the TSS area
and inside the AMS & Control Room Building.
The safe clearance as per the prescribed standard shall kept between
power and control cables along the cable path.
In Open Yard
The cable path in the open yard shall be in the form of suitable Pre-casted
RCC cable trenches with necessary ladder type (for HV cable) & perforated
cable tray (for LT & Control cable) of GI steel dully supported on GI steel
support and with appropriate heavy duty RCC covers having provision for
lifting, peripheral edge protection angles / MS sheet for precast covers or in
the form of Heavy Duty PVC pipes of suitable diameter, subject to
Employer’s approval. All the Pre-casted RCC covers shall be sound and
free from cracks and other defects which interferes with the proper placing
of the unit or impair the strength or performance of the unit and shall be
suitable for load of minimum 100Kg. The trench covers shall be factory
fabricated with appropriate strength, no cast in situ type trench covers shall
be permitted. The galvanization on cable tray / ladder and support bracket
shall be minimum 1000 gm/sqm.
Where the cable are directly supported on the bracket, to avoid damage of
cable sheath due to sharp edges / burr left in the support bracket, a
polyamide strip is to be provided (bolted) on the bracket arm using
countersunk bolt. The GA drawings of the bracket showing the dimension /
specification of the strip and attachment mechanisum on GI bracket is
provided in the tender drawings.
Inside Rooms

The cable path inside rooms shall be in the form of suitable Pre-casted
RCC/RCC cable trenches with necessary ladder type (for HV cable) &
perforated cable tray (for LT & control cable) of GI steel dully supports on
GI steel support and covered by steel / GI checker plates of good and
aesthetic quality. The galvanization on cable tray / ladder and support
bracket shall be minimum 1000 gm/sqm. Cable support bracket shall be
provided as per detailed in para above for open yard
Separation of different voltage families
As the cable routes are dealing with different voltage family, they have to be
physically separated.
Cable Route Plan
The contractor shall submit cable route plan, cable trench cover drawings,
to the Employer, for approval, well in time. The trench covers shall be factory
fabricated with appropriate strength, no cast in situ type trench covers shall
be permitted.
12.5.14 Boundary Walls
Along the periphery of the Substation site, a 3.0 meter height from FGL
boundary wall matching with the finish of building, consisting of RCC
retaining wall , appropriate foundations, columns, beams and DMRC logo
panels as per DMRC design & specifications, shall be constructed by the
RSS Contractor. Appropriate MS gates of size 7 meter in width with small
gate of approved design shall also be provided to permit movement of
personnel/goods. The design shall be approved by the Employer, decision
of employer in this regard is final and binding.
Suitable size of Medium class GI ROD, Y-post bracket with GI concertina

wire of 0.5 meter height shall be provided on the top of the boundary wall
panel as per drawing. The fencing support members should be grouted in
the boundary wall. Concertina wire and glass pieces to be provided for
security. All GI member shall be of solid shape, no hollow steel member
shall be allowed.
12.5.15 Guard Room

The RSS-cum-AMS-cum-TSS shall be provided with a Guard Room, near

the main gate. Suitable communication link between the Guard and the
Substation operator located in the Control Room, shall be provided. The
Guard shall be able to open the gate only when he is authorized by the
Substation Operator to do so and a suitable interlocking arrangement to
achieve this Security arrangement, shall be provided. The specification shall
be similar or matching to main building. The guard room shall be equipped
with Air-Cooler and toilet. CCTV shall also be provided to look after the RSS
premises whose feed shall be given in control room or guard room as per
employer’s requirement. LED screen for the same shall be provided and
included in the scope of work
12.5.16 Signages
 The entire RSS-cum-AMS-cum-TSS premises shall be provided with

suitable Signages as per RDSO specification. Depending upon the
layout and construction finally adopted, the various installations (eg.
TSS, AMS, HV Bay, Transformers, Control Room etc) shall be
provided with Sign boards, both in Hindi and English. These Sign
boards are in addition to Equipment labeling, which shall be provided
as per approved drawing. The Contractor shall submit drawings for
the proposed Signages, for Employer’s approval and the Signages
shall be provided in accordance with approved drawings.
 The contractor shall provide suitable signages including the sign

board at main gate and on the suitable location of building (in Hindi
and English) and other relevant indicators as per the drawing and
material to be approved by Engineer
12.5.17 Storage Space
Covered storage space for spares, oil drums, cable drums etc of approx 150
sq m. Area should be provided in the RSS where land is available. The land
will be marked in the RSS layout and decided at execution stage. The
storage space should be made of covered shed of rain proof material, with
brick walls, suitable rolling shutters and heavy duty doors & windows for
bigger size of spares to be provided.

Fans, exhaust fans, lighting provisions should be provided. The floor to be

of cemented type. All materials should be of durable quality and of reputed
makes as used in other civil works of RSS. Storage space shall be provided
with appropriate number of rack, Amirah, Furniture etc. for storage of
material / tools etc as approved by the employer.
12.5.18 Land Scaping
The RSS cum TSS cum AMS shall be provided with landscaping and
plantation, pebbles block with grass, on vacant areas left after the
construction of substation as per IGBC requirement to get platinum rating.
The plantation shall be provided on the both sides of approach road to the
control room from the Main Gate, along the boundary walls inside the RSS
boundary, on the both sides of entry doors of the control room. Good quality
plants, green plants, shrubs should be provided and suitably placed. The
care and maintenance of land scaping and plantations provided shall be
carried out upto the end of the DLP period by the contractor. The types of
plants not limited to be provided are as follows:
 Plumeria (Champa)
 Ficus Penda
 Ficus Benjamina, etc.
12.5.19 Civil Specifications:
The further details of the civil specifications are attached as Annexure-1
12.5.20 Change in building foundation
The rates of foundation to be quoted in BOQ shall be based on Foundation

depth of 6.5 Meter from Top of equipment foundation / plinth beam of
building to raft level, if there is change in the depth of foundation of the
building, equipment, boundary wall etc. from the foundation depth specified
above by more than 500MM (increase / decrease), then cost of the
foundation shall be adjusted based on prevailing DSR rates with cost Index.
12.5.21 Chain link fencing:

Switch yard shall be protected with 1.5 meter height GI chain link fencing,
fencing shall be done as per latest RDSO/CPWD specifications. A detailed
drawing along with layout shall be prepared and submitted for approval of
engg-in-charge.

13 CAMC: For CAMC requirement under this contract, please refer CAMC
policy provided in BOQ.
14 Requirements for Un-manning of Receiving Sub-Station (RSS)
Introduction:- On completion of work of RSSs, control and operation of

RSS will be un-manned. SCADA is the backbone to manage unmanned
sub-station. In case of unmanning, the RSS will be controlled and monitored
remotely from OCC. The SCADA which is to be installed at RSS has to
facilitate communication of monitoring, control and protection data of RSS
to OCC/BCC on OFC link through IEC-60870-5-104 or any other compatible
protocol. Apart from this, communicable type CCTV cameras are also to be
installed in indoor and outdoor area of RSS for remotely monitoring the
status of RSS from OCC.
Requirements for Un-manning RSS
A. Control & Monitoring Functions for RSS equipment
The RSS SCADA should be capable of performing following functions:-
 Monitoring of various equipment at OCC.
 Control function of various equipment at OCC.
 Monitoring status of any tripping/abnormality in RSS equipment at

OCC
 Measurement of electrical parameters (voltage, current, energy, MD

etc) at OCC.
 Transformer Oil temperature, HV winding temperature, LV winding

temperature, OLTC winding temperature at OCC.
 Tap position, Status of Local / Remote position of tap changer switch,

control of Auto / Manual / SCADA selector switch, Status of AVR
relay is to be available at OCC.
 Status of NIFPS system is to be available at OCC.
 Status of surge counters of all LAs at OCC.
 Status of Battery charger, ACDB, DCDB, station transformers at

OCC.

 Command for controlling selector switch in Auto / Manual / SCADA

for ACDB and DCDB at OCC.
 Status of SCADA UPS at OCC
The typical signal list covering above requirement under various DI, DO and
AI signals is given in the tender document, however any additional I/O not
included in the list but required to achieve the desired signal at OCC shall
be included at no extra cost to DMRC.
B. Monitoring of Auxiliary devices related to fire
 Status of NIFPS system installed on all Auxiliary and Traction

transformers is to be available at OCC.
 Zone wise Status of Fire Alarm & Control Panel (FACP) is to be

available at OCC.
 Status of Co2/ Novac gas flooding system is to be available at OCC.
C. SCADA Equipment Status
Status of local Main/Standby Servers, Gateways and Network switches to

be made available at OCC.
D. Reporting
 Complete detail of disturbance recorder (DR) should be available at

OCC. In case of tripping of 25 kV feeders, details regarding fault
distance, fault current and fault voltage should be available at OCC.
 Automatic generation of periodical reports at OCC as per the DMRC

approved formats
E. Provision of CCTV cameras (Indoor) {Night Vision Type}
 Control room-2 nos
 AMS /GIS room- 2 nos per room.
 Cellar- 1 nos (GIS)
F. Provision of CCTV cameras (Outdoor).
G. Provision of Thermal Imaging Cameras, where ever required.

15 Reactive Power Compensation System:-
15.1 General
The contractor shall Design, Detail Engineering, Supply, Erection, Testing

and Commissioning of 33 kV Shunt Reactor and 33 kV STATCOM for
Reactive Power Compensation and power quality improvement along with
associated equipment’s & integration with protection and SCADA interface
at Receiving Substations.
The equipment offered should be based on the latest state of the art
technology. The Reactor and STATCOM proposed for use in DMRC is for
33 kV and shall be connected at 33kV bus at Receiving Substation.
The main features required in STATCOM are:
 Voltage regulation due to reactive power
 Dynamic & step less reactive power compensation
 Reduction of apparent power
 No over compensation
 Minimum active power consumption
 Low response time
 Low start-up time
 Harmonics Compensation
 Unbalance compensation
 Other requirement are detailed in specifications
15.2 Capacity of shunt reactors and STATCOM
MRTS Project has extensive use of EHV, MV cables in its distribution

network, interconnecting EHV underground cables from power supply
authority to the substation. In addition to this to feed the auxiliary power
supply at station, the 33 kV cable network is also used approximately in
length of 0.2 Km to 12 km in one circuit and 25 kV cable to feed OHE
approximately length of 500 mtr. to 2.5 km. Lightly loaded or un-loaded

cables generates the reactive power which leads to overvoltage problems

and overcompensation to reactive power at grid substation
Based on the length of different type of cables and their charging current the
leading power factor compensation system capacity is approximately 4.0
MVAR at each Receiving Substation. To substantiate the actual
requirement of reactive power compensation & operational issue and
maintain close to unity power factor at interface point, the contractor shall
be required to carry out detailed measurements design and network
modelling, load flow studies to work out final capacities and scheme of
reactive power compensation required to provide suitable type of reactive
power compensation system as per scope of work given below.
15.3 SCOPE OF WORK
15.3.1 Design, Detail Engineering, Supply, Erection, Testing and Commissioning

of 33 kV Shunt Reactor and 33kV STATCOM for Reactive Power
Compensation and power quality improvement along with associated
equipment’s & integration with protection and SCADA interface at Receiving
Substations of Delhi Metro Rail Corporation.
15.3.2 The Scope also includes all Electrical works such as
15.3.2.1 To design the scheme using shunt reactor and STATCOM in RSS (Fixed /
Variable) for reactive power compensation and power quality improvement.
15.3.2.2 To provide 33 kV shunt reactor (Fixed/Variable) and 33kV STATCOM.
15.3.2.3 To provide 33 kV switchgear equipment’s and necessary power and control

cables.
15.3.2.4 To arrange inspection by DMRCL official for routine / type test / acceptance
test of various items used in project.
15.3.2.5 To undertake all required civil work related to erection of equipment’s.
15.3.2.6 To erect / install 33 kV shunt reactor, STATCOM and 33 kV switchgear with

all associated items, and accessories.
15.3.2.7 To install 33 kV STATCOM and fixed reactor at most appropriate feasible

location of provision of compensator based on arrangement of RSS
substation.

15.3.2.8 To interface and commission the 33 kV shunt reactor, STATCOM and 33

kV switchgear with SCADA system.
15.3.2.9 To obtain statutory approval for the installation.
15.3.2.10 The scope of work shall completely cover the works such as arranging
inspection of routine / acceptance / type test of material used execution and
testing as per specification, packing, supply of equipment’s and materials at
site including insurance and transporting by road/rail/air or any other mode.
15.4 The manufacturer / supplier should have service support facility located in
vicinity so that the manpower and required tools / plants shall be mobilized
within 24 Hr. of any log of complain. The contractor should provide the
address and contact details of these facility.
15.5 Drawing and plans pertaining to System / sub-system design, AC & DC

power distribution system, network design & protection system, installation
drawings including foundation and mounting arrangement drawings etc.
shall be prepared and submitted to DMRC for approval. The work at site
shall commence after the design and drawings are approved by DMRC.
15.6 The contractor shall submit the maintenance plan for each equipment
supplied through this Contract and attend to any failure for a period of 24
Months (2years) ( DLP) from the date of issue of Acceptance certificate
entirely free of including repair and replacement of defective hardware and
software, equipment, system and sub-systems and without any cost of
spares.
15.7 Design Works:-
The contractor shall be responsible for all Works associated with Design,
Detail Engineering, Supply, Installation, Testing and Commissioning of
reactive power compensation devices. It shall be clearly understood by the
Tenderers that the description is for the purpose of guidance only and is not
exhaustive.
The scope of design under this contract shall include network modeling, load
flow analysis etc. to arrive at techno-economic requirement for fixed and
dynamic reactive power compensation devices at each RSS. The
compensation requirement shall be worked out based on the design / actual

fixed load such as HV and MV cables and dynamic load during different
operating conditions i.e. during peak hour, non-peak hours, non – revenue
hours etc.
The contractor is required to verify the same during actual operation through
actual measurement with power analyzers and load flow analysis through
simulation on commercially available simulation software such as ETAP,
MIpower or equivalent. The contractor is required to prepare and submit
design reports along with network model for each RSS from grid level to 415
V level in the DMRC substation (ASS at station level) including 33kV and 25
kV cable network for employer’s approval.
The necessary provisions for adding additional capacity in future based on

actual operational scenarios shall also be provided in the equipment as well
as space in the layouts.
After finalization of design contractor shall supply network model for each
RSS along with latest version of simulation software used for modeling with
license for minimum 5 years (2 users) with update and maintenance
support.
The contractor shall be responsible for preparation of working drawings for

RSS layout and SLD and other construction drawings for facilitating
installation during execution stage.
Contractor shall be responsible for submission of As-built layout and SLD

and all other construction drawings along with relay coordination &
protection schemes (if modified) after execution of work along with operation
and maintenance manuals.
15.8 Training
Contractor shall provide training to Employer’s staff on software model so

that minor modification can be carried out.
15.9 Technical Specifications
Technical Specifications for Reactive power compensation equipment

STATCOM and Shunt reactor are provided in annexure 12.
15.10 Support during Installation, Testing and Commissioning by OEM




Contract- DE-04 – Particular Specification- Technical Description-Chapter- 8B
VOLUME 4 – PARTICULAR SPECIFICATION
CHAPTER 8B
Technical Sheets
DMRC/DE-04/Vol-4/PS Page 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. TRACTION TRANSFORMER ................................................................................. 5
2. ON LOAD TAP CHANGER FOR TRACTION TRANSFORMER ............................. 8
3. AUXILIARY MAIN TRANSFORMER..................................................................... 10
4. ON LOAD TAP CHANGER FOR AUXILIARY MAIN TRANSFORMER ................ 16
5. STATION AUXILIARY TRANSFORMERS ............................................................ 18
6. HIGH VOLTAGE EQUIPMENTS- CIRCUIT BREAKER. ....................................... 19
6.1. 66 KV CIRCUIT BREAKER LCB-X, CCB, ATCB-X .......................................... 19
6.2. 66 KV CIRCUIT BREAKER TTCB .................................................................... 22
6.3. CIRCUIT BREAKER (GIS) ................................................................................ 25
7. ISOLATORS ......................................................................................................... 28
7.1. 66 KV ISOLATOR LIS-X1, LEIS-X ................................................................... 28
7.2. ISOLATOR LIS-X-2, CIS-X, ATIS-X .................................................................. 29
7.3. 66 KV ISOLATOR TTIS-X ................................................................................. 30
7.4. ISOLATOR (GIS)............................................................................................... 32
8. HIGH VOLTAGE EQUIPMENT - FAST ACTING EARTH SWITCH ...................... 34
9. HIGH VOLTAGE EQUIPMENT - CURRENT TRANSFORMERS .......................... 35
9.1. 66 KV CURRENT TRANSFORMER CTI-X .......................................................................................35
9.2. 66 KV CURRENT TRANSFORMER CTC...........................................................................................36
9.3. CURRENT TRANSFORMER CTATP-X ............................................................................................38
9.4. CURRENT TRANSFORMER CTTTP-X ............................................................................................39
9.5. CURRENT TRANSFORMER CTIM-X(GIS) .....................................................................................41
9.6. 66 KV CURRENT TRANSFORMER CTC (GIS) ................................................................................43
9.7. CURRENT TRANSFORMER CTATP-X(GIS) ..................................................................................44
9.8. CURRENT TRANSFORMER CTTTP-X(GIS) ..................................................................................46
10. HIGH VOLTAGE EQUIPMENTS-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS ...................... 48
11. HIGH VOLTAGE EQUIPMENT -SURGE ARRESTER ...................................... 51
11.1. SURGE ARRESTER/ LA (GIS) ......................................................................... 51
11.2. 66 KV SURGE ARRESTER LA-X, LAAT-X, LATT-X ........................................ 52
12. BUS BAR .......................................................................................................... 54
13. PRIMARY NEUTRAL ISOLATOR FOR 66/33 KV TRANSFORMER ................ 56
14. CURRENT TRANSFORMER FOR PRIMARY NEUTRAL (PNCT) FOR 66

KV/33KV TRANSFORMER ............................................................................... 57
15. PRIMARY NEUTRAL SURGE ARRESTER AMT.............................................. 58
16. 66 KV CABLES ................................................................................................. 59
17. 33KV CABLES .................................................................................................. 62
18. 33KV CABLE (BETWEEN 33KV PANEL AND DRY TYPE TRANSFORMER). 65
19. 25KV CABLES .................................................................................................. 68
20. SECONDARY NEUTRAL GROUNDING RESISTOR (FOR 66/33KV AMT) ...... 70
21. SECONDARY NEUTRAL ISOLATOR FOR 66/33 KV TRANSFORMER .......... 72
22. CURRENT TRANSFORMER FOR SECONDARY NEUTRAL (SNCT1, SNCT2)

FOR 66KV/33KV AMT ...................................................................................... 73
23. SECONDARY NEUTRAL SURGE ARRESTER FOR 66KV/33KV AMT ........... 74
24. 33 KV CIRCUIT-BREAKER CUBICLES LBCB, LBCCB .................................. 75
25. 33 KV CIRCUIT-BREAKER CUBICLES AT RCCB, LFCB, CB FOR DEPOT

FEEDERS AND RPC SYSTEM ......................................................................... 78
26. 33 KV CIRCUIT-BREAKER CUBICLES AT LVATCB ...................................... 82
27. 33 KV CURRENT TRANSFORMER LBCT AND LBCCT .................................. 86
28. 33 KV CURRENT TRANSFORMER FOR LFCB AND RCCB ........................... 88
29. 33 KV CURRENT TRANSFORMER FOR AT LVATCB .................................... 89
30. 33 KV VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS (IN ALL 33KV CB EXCEPT COUPLING

CB) 90
31. 33 KV VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS COUPLING (ON BC) LBCVTX .............. 91
32. 25 KV CB (GIS) ................................................................................................. 92
33. 25 KV ISOLATOR (GIS) .................................................................................... 94
34. 25 KV CB (AIS) ................................................................................................. 96
35. 25 KV ISOLATOR (AIS) .................................................................................... 98
36. 25KV CURRENT TRANSFORMERS .............................................................. 100
37. TANK PROTECTION CURRENT TRANSFORMERS ..................................... 102
38. 25 KV VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER (TSS) ...................................................... 103
39. 25 KV LIGHTNING ARRESTOR ..................................................................... 104
40. 3.3 KV CABLE GTP ........................................................................................ 105
1. TRACTION TRANSFORMER
INDICATIONS U Values Required

Manufacturer
Place of manufacture
Port of embarkation
Manufacturer drawing reference
IEC 60076,
Standards
60137, 60296
1) ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Type Outdoor
Coupling I.i.
Rated frequency Hz 50
Rated secondary power MVA As per BOQ
Cooling mode
Primary rated insulation voltage kV 72.5
Primary operating voltage kV 66
Rated Power frequency withstand voltage for
kVr.m.s. 140
One minute
Rated Impulse withstand (1.2/50 micro
kVpeak 325
second)
Secondary maximum non permanent voltage kV 29
Secondary rated voltage Without load kV 27.5
Rated power frequency withstand voltage for
kV 95
one minute secondary winding
Rated impulse withstand (1.2/50 micro
kV 250
second) voltage for secondary winding
Short-circuit voltage
%
- On load tap changer on tap 1
%
- On load tap changer on median tap
%
Voltage drop at secondary winding
V
- 4/4 of secondary load
Short circuit voltage % 13.8
Magnetic loading Tesla < 1.55

Permissible overload duration at
min
- 50% 15
min
- 100% 5
Iron losses kW
Copper losses
kW
- 4/4 of secondary load
Short circuit current at secondary (for 3 sec)
kA
kA
- On load tap changer on median tap
kA 14
Transformation ratio
kV
- On load tap changer on tap 1 56.1 / 27.5
kV
- On load tap changer on median tap 66 / 27.5
kV
- On load tap changer on tap 16 72.6 / 27.5
Power at primary winding
MVA As per BOQ
4/4 of secondary load
Duration of admissible short-circuit Seconds 3
Efficiency (not accounting for the power drawn

by the secondary) As per transformer
- 4/4 of secondary load losses indicated in
Bidding document.
2) CONSTRUCTIONAL CHARACTERISTICS
Winding type
On load tap changer type
- Rating As per transformer
current rating with
over loading
- Number of taps capacity
Voltage corresponding to each tap 15 (+6/-9)
2200
3) DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERISTICS
- Dimensions of complete transformer:
mm
Length/Width/Height (*)
- weight of complete transformer (*)
kg
- with oil
kg
- with inert gas

Handling, i.e. under hooks height required for
M
travelling crane to enable handling (*) 10.5
Rolling tracks (between inner faces of the
rails)
spacing
m 2.14
- large axis
m 1.676
- small axis
- rail profile
4) NOISE LEVEL
Transformer alone (As per testing mode
dB
stipulated in IEC standards)
Overall noise level at a distance of 1.5 m
dB
- at rated voltage and no load
dB
- at 110% of rated voltage and no load 70
dB
- at maximum over-induction
5) MISCELLANEOUS INFORMATION
- Thermal time constant
h
- of oil
h
- of transformer
- Maximum value of energizing current at no
A peak
load
- Value of direct and reverse impedance
Ω
- as seen from primary terminals
Ω
- as seen from secondary terminals
Degree of protection for auxiliary circuit IP 55
6) COOLING SYSTEM (if Applicable)
1. Number & Type of Fans
2. Rated Voltage (AC) V
415 / 230
3. Fan rotating Speed Rpm
4. Power per fan kW
5. Fan starting Current Amp
6. Total Power drawn by Cooling kW
equipment m3/hr
7. Air output per fan m3/hr
Total Air necessary
2. ON LOAD TAP CHANGER FOR TRACTION TRANSFORMER
INDICATIONS U Values required
Manufacturer
Port of embarkation
Standards IEC 60214
Cooling mode ONAN / ONAF
Rated insulation voltage kV 72.5
Operating Voltage kV 66
Rated Power frequency withstand voltage-one kV r.m.s.

140
minute
Rated Impulse withstand (1.2/50 micro kV peak

325
second)
Rated current A As per

transformer
current rating
with over loading
capacity
Short-circuit withstand current

- Thermal (2seconds) kA r.m.s.
- Dynamic kA peak
Tap voltage V 1100
Number of taps 15 (+6,-9)
INDICATIONS U Values required
Mechanical and electrical contact reliability Operation 50,000
Motor drive
- Technical data 110V DC/ 230

- Rated voltage V DC or AC (1ph) / 415 (3ph)
- Rated current AC
- Protection system
- Over current protection device
- Other protections RS 1000 / RS
2001
Degree of protection for auxiliary cubicle IP55
3. AUXILIARY MAIN TRANSFORMER
Manufacturer
Port of embarkation
Standards IEC 60076
Type Outdoor
Coupling YnYn0
Rated secondary power MVA As per BOQ
Cooling mode As per BOQ
Primary rated insulation voltage kV 72.5
Primary operating voltage kV 66
Rated short duration power frequency

140
withstand voltage for primary winding kV r.m.s.
Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage for

325
primary winding kV peak

95
withstand voltage for primary neutral kV r.m.s.

kV peak 250
primary neutral
Secondary rated insulation voltage kV 36
Secondary rated operation voltage under kV 33
load

kV 70
withstand voltage for secondary winding

kV
secondary winding 170
Iron losses kW
Short-circuit voltage
- On load tap changer on tap 1 %
- On load tap changer on median tap % 12.5
- On load tap changer on tap 16 %
Magnetic Loading Tesla < 1.55
Voltage drop at secondary winding

4/4 of secondary load (ONAF mode) V
Permissible overload duration with:

- 10% overload starting from 4/4, 3/4, 2/4,
¼ rated output
h
- 25 % overload starting from 4/4, 3/4, 2/4,
h
¼ rated output
- 50 % overload starting from 4/4, 3/4, 2/4,
h
¼ rated output
- 100% overload staring from 4/4, 3/4, 2/4,
¼ rated output h
Copper losses
- 4/4 of secondary load (ONAF mode) kW
Short circuit current at secondary

- On load tap changer on tap 1 kA
- On load tap changer on median tap kA

- On load tap changer on tap 16 kA
Transformation ratio
- On load tap changer on tap 1 56.1 / 33
- On load tap changer on median tap 66 / 33
- On load tap changer on tap 16 72.6 / 33
Power at primary winding

- 4/4 of secondary load, power factor 0,95 MVA As per BOQ
(ONAN / ONAF)
Impedance voltage % 12.5
Duration of admissible short-circuit seconds 3
Efficiency (not accounting for the power

drawn by the secondary) (ONAN/ONAF)
- 4/4 of secondary load, power factor 0,95 As per losses
indicated in
bidding document
Temperature rise at thermal stabilization for

ONAN/ONAF at secondary at 4/4 load
- for copper °C 55
- for magnetic sheets °C
- for oil °C 50
Temperatures allowable occasionally and

temporarily without limitation of the unit
service life
°C
- for copper °C
- for magnetic sheets °C
- for oil
Allowable overload on secondary in

MVA
permanent duty, power factor 0,9, ambient
temperature 45°C
2) CONSTRUCTION CHARACTERISTICS
Winding type
On load tap changer type

- Rating As per
transformer
current rating
- Number of taps
15 (+6/-9)
- Voltage corresponding to each tap
V
1100
Cooling system
- Number and type of fans

- Rated voltage AC V 415/230
- Fan rotating speed rpm
- Power per fan kW
- Fan starting current A
- Total power drawn by cooling equipment kW
- Air output per fan m3/h
- Total air necessary m3/h
3) DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERISTICS
Transformer
Overall dimension in cubicle

- Length mm
- Width mm
- Height mm
Weight
- of transformer in operating condition kg
- of oil kg
- de-tanked weight kg
Rolling tracks (between inner faces of the

rails)
spacing
m 2.14
- large axis
m 1.676
- small axis
- rail profile
Preserver
- Dimensions
- Oil weight kg
- Installation height mm
Main parcel
Dimensions :
- Length/Width/Height mm
- weight
- with oil kg
- with insert gas kg
Handling, i.e. under hooks height required for

travelling crane to enable handling
- Complete transformer mm
- main parcel placed on the trailer mm
Overall dimension drawing number
4) NOISE LEVEL
Transformer alone (per testing mode

stipulated in IEC standards) dB
Overall noise level at a distance of 1.5 m dB

- at rated voltage and no load dB
70
- at 110% of rated voltage and no load dB
- at maximum over-induction dB
5) MISCELLANEOUS INFORMATION
- Thermal time constant

- of oil h
- of transformer h
- Maximum value of energizing current at no

A peak
load
- Value of direct and reverse impedance

- as seen from primary terminals Ω
- as seen from secondary terminals Ω
- Value of zero sequence impedance

- as seen from primary terminals Ω
- as seen from secondary terminals Ω
(* Approximate only)
4. ON LOAD TAP CHANGER FOR AUXILIARY MAIN TRANSFORMER
Manufacturer
Port of embarkation
Standards IEC 60214
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Cooling mode ONAN/ONAF
Operating voltage kV 66

kV r.m.s. 140
withstand voltage
Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage kV peak 325
Rated current As per transformer

A current rating with over
loading capacity
Short-circuit withstand current

kA r.m.s.
- Thermal (2 seconds)
kA peak
- Dynamic
Tap voltage V 1100
Number of taps 15 (+6, -9)
Mechanical and electrical contact reliability Operations 50,000
Motor drive
- Technical data
110V DC or
- Rated voltage
V DC or AC 230 / 415 V AC
- Rated current
- Protection system
- Over current protection device
- Other protections RS 1000 / RS 2001
Degree of protection for Auxiliary cubicle IP 55
5.
5. STATION AUXILIARY TRANSFORMERS
AUXILIARY TRANSFORMER 200 KVA (FOR RSS AUXILIARY LT POWER

SUPPLY) as per DMRC standard specification of Dry transformer attached as
Annexure-5.
6. HIGH VOLTAGE EQUIPMENTS- CIRCUIT BREAKER.
6.1. 66 KV CIRCUIT BREAKER LCB-X, CCB, ATCB-X
Manufacturer
Port of embarkation
Standards IEC 62271-1,IEC 62271-100, IEC 60076
Type Outdoor
Substation type Open
Phase number 3
Rated short duration power frequency kV r.m.s.

140
withstand voltage
Rated lightning impulse withstand kV peak 325

voltage
Rated short duration power frequency kV r.m.s. 160

withstand voltage across isolating
distance

voltage across isolating distance
Rated current A 2000
Rated short-time withstand current (1 kA r.m.s. 31.5

seconds)
Rated peak withstand current kA peak 50
Breaking capacity kA r.m.s 20
Making capacity kA peak 50
Breaking mode: SF6
Rated operating cycle O-0.3sec-CO-15sec-

CO
Rated auxiliary voltage/Motor Supply Vdc 110
Rated transient recovery voltage (first

pole to clear factor 1,5 & 1,3)
- first reference voltage KV T10
- time s 133
- transient recovery voltage peak KV 36
value
s 5
- time delay
Rated transient recovery voltage for out

of phase breaking
- first reference voltage KV
- time s
- transient recovery voltage peak KV
value
s
- time delay
Out of load transformer current A

breaking capacity
Operating times
- Opening actuation from current

emission on the release coil up to
- Separation of contacts (opening time) ms
- Extinguishing of primary arc (breaking ms
<60
time at rated breaking capacity)
- Closing actuation
from current emission on the
engagement coil up to ms
- Establishment of current ms
(establishment time)
- Start of connecting (closing time)
- Maximum operating difference

between poles ms
- At opening ms
- At closing
Rated SF6 pressure for operation MPa
Rated SF6 pressure for breaking MPa
SF6 under-pressure first threshold MPa

alarm
SF6 under-pressure second threshold MPa

alarm
Operating system
- rated pressure MPa
- minimum pressure %
- maximum pressure %
Operating and auxiliary cubicle IP 55
protection degree
Circuit breaker position auxiliary

contact 4
- open position make contacts 4
- open position break contacts 4
- closed position make contacts 4
- closed position break contacts
6.2. 66 KV CIRCUIT BREAKER TTCB
Manufacturer
Port of embarkation
Standard IEC 62271-1 , 62271-100
Type Outdoor
Number of phase 2
Rated insulation voltage kV 72,5

withstand voltage
Rated lightning impulse withstand

voltage

distance
Rated lightning impulse withstand


seconds)
Breaking mode: SF6
Rated operating cycle O-0.3sec-CO-15sec-CO
Rated auxiliary voltage/Motor Supply Vdc 110
Rated transient recovery voltage (first

pole to clear factor 1,3)
- first reference voltage KV T10
- time s 133
- transient recovery voltage peak KV 36
value
s 5
- time delay
Rated transient recovery voltage for out

of phase breaking
- first reference voltage KV
- time s
- transient recovery voltage peak KV
value
s
- time delay
Out of load transformer current

breaking capacity A
Operating times
- Opening actuation
from current emission on the release
coil up to ms
- Separation of contacts (opening time) ms <60
- Extinguishing of primary arc (breaking
time at rated breaking capacity)
- Closing actuation from current

emission on the engagement coil up to ms
- Establishment of current ms
(establishment time)
- Start of connecting (closing time)
- Maximum operating difference

between poles ms
- At opening ms
- At closing
Rated SF6 pressure for operation MPa 0.36
Rated SF6 pressure for breaking MPa
SF6 under-pressure first threshold MPa

alarm
SF6 under-pressure second threshold MPa

alarm
Operating system
- rated pressure MPa
- minimum pressure %
- maximum pressure %
Operating and auxiliary cubicle IP 55

protection degree
Circuit breaker position auxiliary contact

- open position make contacts 4
- open position break contacts 4
- closed position make contacts 4
- closed position break contacts 4
* values depending on the circuit breaker type
6.3. CIRCUIT BREAKER (GIS)
INDICATIONS U VALUE REQUIRED
Manufacturer
Port of embarkation
Standards IEC 62271-1, IEC 62271-

100, 62271-203
Type INDOOR
Substation type GIS
Phase number 3
Rated short duration power frequency kVr.m.s. 140

withstand voltage

voltage
Rated short duration power frequency kVr.m.s. 160

distance
Rated lighting impulse withstand kV peak 375

Rated current of GIS Bus bar A 2000
Rated current- bay A 1250

seconds)
Breaking capacity kA r.m.s 31.5
Breaking mode: SF6
OPERATING TIMES:
Rated opening time ms ≤ 50
Rated closing time ms ≤ 95
Rated cable charging breaking current A 125
Number of breaks per pole: Nos. 1
First pole to clear factor 1.5
Rated SF6 pressure for operation MPa
Rated SF6 pressure for breaking Mpa
SF6 under-pressure first threshold Mpa

alarm
SF6 under-pressure second threshold Mpa

alarm
Operating system
rated pressure Mpa
minimum pressure %
maximum pressure %
OPERATING MECHANISM
Number per circuit breaker 1
Rated operating sequence O-.3 sec-CO-15sec-CO
Type Spring
Operated
Number of trip coils 2
Number of closing coils 1
Rated control voltage /Motor Supply VDC 110
 For TTCB –one dummy plug shall be provided.
7. HIGH VOLTAGE EQUIPMENTS-ISOLATORS
7.1. 66 KV ISOLATOR LIS-X1, LEIS-X
Manufacturer
Port of embarkation
Standards IEC 62271-1, 62271-102
Type Outdoor
Number of phases 3
Two rotating columns Yes

withstand voltage

withstand voltage across isolating distance

across isolating distance
Insulation medium air
Rated short-time withstand current (1 sec) kA r.m.s. 31.5
Rated auxiliary voltage Vdc 110
Rated control motor auxiliary voltage Vdc 110
Auxiliary cubicle protection degree IP55
Rated mechanical terminal load N
EARTHING ISOLATOR
Electrical values As above
Making capacity Yes
7.2. 66 KV EARTHING ISOLATOR LIS-X-2, CIS-X, ATIS-X
Manufacturer
Port of embarkation
Standards IEC 62271-1, 62271-102
Type Outdoor
Number of phases 3
Rated insulation voltage kV 72,5

withstand voltage



seconds)
7.3. 66 KV ISOLATOR TTIS-X
Manufacturer
Port of embarkation
Standards IEC 62271-1, 62271-102
Type Outdoor
Number of phases 2

withstand voltage


Rated short-time withstand current (1 sec) kA r.m.s. 31.5
7.4. ISOLATOR (GIS)
Manufacturer
Port of embarkation
Standards IEC 62271-1, 62271-102,

62271-203
Type INDOOR
Substation type GIS
Number of phases 3

withstand voltage

distance

Insulation medium SF6
Rated current for bus and bay A 2000

seconds)
2) EARTHING ISOLATOR
Making capacity Yes
8. HIGH VOLTAGE EQUIPMENT - FAST ACTING EARTH SWITCH
Indications U Values required
Manufacturer
Port of embarkation
Standard IEC 60265

Standards
Type IEC 62271-1,
GIS 102
Substation type GIS
Number of phases 3-pole
Rated short-circuit withstand current (r.m.s.) for 3

kA 31.5
sec
Rated making current at 50 Hz kA 80
Bushings
- power frequency withstand voltage kV 10
AC Voltage for 15 minutes)

- DC impulse withstand voltage
kV 30
Operated mechanism
- number per isolator 1
Motor operated
-Control
typevoltage VDC Spring110
charged
9. HIGH VOLTAGE EQUIPMENT - CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
9.1. 66 kV CURRENT TRANSFORMER CTI-X
Manufacturer
Port of embarkation
Standards IEC 44-1
Type Outdoor
Type of substation Open
Number of phases 3
- Rated insulation voltage kV 72.5
- Operating voltage kV 66
- Rated frequency Hz 50
Rated short duration power kV r.m.s. 140

frequency withstand voltage

voltage
Insulation medium OIL
Secondary Cores Core 1 1600 -800-400-200/1 A

(The core to be used for (Measurement) CL 0.2s, 15 VA
differential protection should be of
Core 2 1600-800-400-200/1 A
PS Class)
(Measurement) CL 0.2s, 15 VA
Core 3 1600-800/1A
(Protection) 50VA, PS
Core 4 1600-800/1A
(Protection) 20 VA, PS
Core 5 1600-800/1A
(Protection) 20VA, 5P20
Short-circuit current allowable for 1

kA 31.5
seconds
Permanent operation without danger In
Overheating In
Over-current class
Total weight kg
Overall dimension of one element
Degree of protection for auxiliary IP55

circuit
9.2. 66 KV CURRENT TRANSFORMER CTC
INDICATIONS U VALUE
REQUIRED
Manufacturer
Port of embarkation
Standards IEC 44-1
Type Outdoor
INDICATIONS U VALUE
REQUIRED
Number of phases 3

withstand voltage
Secondary Cores Core 1 1600-800/1A

(The core to be used for differential (Protection) 20VA, PS
protection should be of PS Class)
Core 2 1600-800/1A
Short-circuit current allowable for 1seconds kA 31.5
Overheating In
Overcurrent class
Total weight kg
Degree of protection for auxiliary circuit IP55
9.3. 66 KV CURRENT TRANSFORMER CTATP-X
INDICATIONS U VALUE
REQUIRED
Manufacturer
Port of embarkation
Standards IEC 44-1
Type Outdoor
Number of phases 3

withstand voltage

voltage
Secondary Cores Core 1 300-150/1A

(The core to be used for differential (Protection) 50VA, 5P20
Core 2 300-150/1A
(Protection) 50VA,PS
Core 3 300-150/1A
INDICATIONS U VALUE
REQUIRED
Short-circuit current allowable for 1 kA 31.5

seconds
Overheating In
Overcurrent class
Total weight kg
9.4. 66 KV CURRENT TRANSFORMER CTTTP-X
Manufacturer
Port of embarkation
Standards IEC 44-1
Type Outdoor
Number of phases 2


voltage
- Secondary Cores Core 1 1600-800/1A, 50VA,

(Protection) 5P20
(The core to be used for Core 2 1600-800/1A,50VA,

differential protection should be PS
(Protection)
of PS Class)
Core 3 1600-800/1A,50VA,
(Protection) PS
Actual transformation ratio A 800-400/1
Accuracy class As above
Rated output VA 50

seconds
Permanent operation without In

danger
Overheating In
Overcurrent class
Total weight Kg
Degree of protection for auxiliary IP55

circuit
9.5. 66 KV CURRENT TRANSFORMER CTIM-X(GIS)
Manufacturer
Port of embarkation
Standards IEC60044-1, 60517,

61869
Type Indoor
Type of substation GIS
Number of phases 3

Rated lightning impulse kV peak 325

withstand voltage
- SF6 rated pressure Mpa

- SF6 minimum pressure %
- SF6 maximum pressure %
- Secondary Cores Core 1 (Protection) 1600-800/1A

- (The core to be used for 20 VA, PS
differential protection Core 2 1600-800/1A

should be of PS Class)
Core 3 1600-800/1A
(Protection) 50 VA, 5P20
Core 4 1600-800-400-200/1A
Core 5 1600-800-400-200/1A
Actual transformation ratio A
Rated output VA As Above
Short-circuit current allowable for kA 31.5

1 seconds
Permanent operation without In

danger
Overheating In
Over-current class
Total weight kg
Overall dimension of one

element
Degree of protection for auxiliary

circuit
* THE VA OF CT MAY BE VARIED as per design
9.6. 66 KV CURRENT TRANSFORMER CTC (GIS)
Manufacturer
Port of embarkation
Standards IEC60044-1, 60517
Type Indoor
Number of phases 3

withstand voltage

- Secondary Cores Core 1 1600-800/1A

- (The core to be used for (Protection) 20VA, PS
Core 2 1600-800/1A
PS Class)
Actual transformation ratio A
Rated output VA As above

seconds
Overheating In
Over-current class
Total weight kg
*THE VA OF CT MAY BE VARIED as per design
9.7. CURRENT TRANSFORMER CTATP-X(GIS)
Manufacturer
Port of embarkation
Standards IEC 60044-1, 60517
Type Indoor
Number of phases 3

withstand voltage


- (The core to be used for (Protection) 50VA,PS
Core 2 600-300/1A
PS Class)
(Protection) 50VA,PS
Core 3 600-300/1A
(Protection) 50VA,5P20
Rated output VA 50

seconds
Overheating In
Overcurrent class
Total weight kg
9.8. CURRENT TRANSFORMER CTTTP-X(GIS)
INDICATIONS U VALUE
REQUIRED
Manufacturer
Port of embarkation
Standards IEC60044-1,
60517
Type Indoor
Number of phases 3

withstand voltage
Insulation medium 1 SF6

INDICATIONS U VALUE
REQUIRED

- (The core to be used for differential (Protection) 50VA, PS
Core 2 1600-800/1A
(Protection) 50VA, PS
Core 3 1600-800/1A
Accuracy class As Above
Rated output VA 50
Short-circuit current allowable for 1 seconds kA 31.5
Overheating In
Overcurrent class
Total weight kg
Degree of protection for auxiliary circuit
 THE VA OF CT MAY BE VARIED as per design
10. HIGH VOLTAGE EQUIPMENTS-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
10.1. 66 kV Voltage Transformer VTI-X and VTC-X
Manufacturer
Port of embarkation
Standards IEC 60186
Type of voltage transformer capacitive
Type Outdoor
- Primary insulation voltage kV 72.5
- Rated short-time duration power kV 140

- Rated lightning impulse withstand kV 325

voltage
Actual transformation ratio 66/ 3

- Primary winding kV
110/ 3
- Secondary winding V
Accuracy class 0.2
Rated output at power factor 0,8 lagging VA 75
Total weight kg
10.2. Voltage Transformer VTI-X and VTC-X(GIS)
Manufacturer
Port of embarkation
Standards IEC60186, 62869-1,3
Type of voltage transformer Inductive
Type Indoor
- Primary insulation voltage kV 72.5


voltage
Actual transformation ratio

3
- Primary winding kV 66/√3

3
- Secondary winding V 110110/√3
Accuracy class 0.2
Rated output at power factor 0,8 lagging VA 25
Total weight kg
Degree of protection for auxiliary circuit
11. HIGH VOLTAGE EQUIPMENT -SURGE ARRESTER
11.1. SURGE ARRESTER/ LA (GIS)
Manufacturer
Port of embarkation
Standard IEC 60099-4
Type Indoor
Surge arrester type
Rated system voltage kV 66
Rated voltage for surge arrester kV 60
Permanent voltage kV 47
Nominal discharge current kA 20
Discharge class 3
Energy absorbs in 2 shoks kJ/kV 10
Lightning surge (wave 8/20 µs)
Max. Residual voltage
-5 kA
-10 kA
-20 kA
Switching impulse( front time 30/70 µs)
-1kA
-2kA
Steep current impulse( front time 1/2 µs)
11.2. 66 KV SURGE ARRESTER LA-X, LAAT-X, LATT-X
INDICATIONS U VALUE
REQUIRED
Manufacturer
Port of embarkation
Standard IEC 99-4
Type Outdoor
Surge arrester type ZnO
Rated system voltage kV 66
Rated voltage for surge arrester kV 60
INDICATIONS U VALUE
REQUIRED
Permanent voltage kV 47
Discharge class 4
Energy absorbs in 2 shoks kJ/kV 10.8
Maximum residual voltage (wave impulse

8/20s) kV 144
- 10 kA kV 160.2
- 20 kA
Pressure relief withstand

- current kA 40
- time ms 200
Minimum admissible static flexion moment m.daN 350
12. HIGH VOLTAGE EQUIPMENTS- BUS BAR
Manufacturer
Port of embarkation
Type of bus bar Rigid/ Strung bus
Distance between phases M 2.44 min. as per CEA
1) Conductor
Conductor type Al. Tube
Conductor cross section mm² **
Conductor constitution
- number of wires
- wire diameter mm
- total external diameter mm **
Maximum current at 40°C above 45°C ambient

temperature, without wind A **
Rated short-time withstand current (1 seconds) kA r.m.s. 31.5
2) Tensioner set
Tensioner Set Type Double
Minimum number of element for each half set 8
Nature of each element ceramic
Dry Condition arc voltage kV 70
Wet Condition arc voltage kV 40
3) Pedestal Insulation for Rigid Bus bar
** To be designed and built as per load current requirements commensurating

the transformer maximum overload capacities.
13. PRIMARY NEUTRAL ISOLATOR FOR 66/33 KV TRANSFORMER
INDICATIONS U VALUES REQUIRED
Manufacturer
Standards IEC62271-102, 62271-1
Type outdoor
- Number of pole 1
- Rated insulation voltage kV 52
-Operating voltage kV 38
-Rated short duration power frequency kV r.m.s.

95
withstand voltage
-Rated short duration power frequency kV r.m.s.

withstand voltage across isolating 110
distance
-Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage kV peak 250
-Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage kV peak

290
- Rated current A 800/1000
- Rated short time withstand current ( 3 kA rms

20
second)
- Rated peak withstand current kA peak 50
14. CURRENT TRANSFORMER FOR PRIMARY NEUTRAL (PNCT) FOR 66

KV/33KV TRANSFORMER
Manufacturer
Standards IEC60044-1
Type SF6
Lightning Impulse withstand voltage KV 550
Power frequency withstand voltage KV 230
Actual transformation ratio A 300-150/1-1
Accuracy class PS Class
Overheating In
Overcurrent class
15. PRIMARY NEUTRAL SURGE ARRESTER AMT
INDICATIONS U VALUES
Required
Manufacturer
Type Outdoor
Voltage rating kV 90
Power frequency withstand voltage kV rms 230
Line discharge class 4
Nominal discharge current KA 20
Energy capability 10.8KJ/KV
Lightning Impulse voltage(1.2/50  kV peak 550
Discharge voltage 8/20Discha

1,5 kA kV peak as per IEC
5 kA kV peak
10 kA kV peak
20 kA kV peak
16. 66 KV CABLES
S. DESCRIPTION UNIT VALUE REQUIRED

No
(I) Manufacturer
1. Cable size ** (minimum) Sq mm 800Sq.mm
2. Cable type AL/XLPE/Corrugated AL/PE
3. Voltage Grade (Uo/U (Um) KV 64/110/(123)
4. Reference Standard IEC 60840
5. No and cross sectional area of as per Specification

conductor
6. Conductor material Aluminum
7. Shape Segmental compact stranded
8. Class Standard Class 2/IEC 228
9. Nominal diameter of conductor mm
10. Conductor Screen materials Extruded semi-conducting

comp’d
11. Minimum thickness of conductor mm 0.95

screen
12. Nominal thickness of insulation mm
13. Nominal diameter over insulation mm --
14. Insulation screen material Extruded semi-conducting

comp’d
15. Minimum thickness of insulation mm 0.8

screen
16. W.B. Swellable tape Semi-conductive swellable

tapes

No
17. Metallic sheath material Corrugated aluminum sheath
18. Nominal thickness of metallic mm --

sheath
19. Short circuit current rating (t=3.0 KA 31.5

sec)
20. Outer sheath material HDPE (ST-7 type)
21. Nominal thickness of outer mm --

sheath
22. Minimum thickness of outer mm --

sheath
23. Nominal overall diameter of cable mm --
24. Approx. weight of cable Kg/km --
25. Minimum bending radius mm 20 x D
26. Max. D.C. conductor resistance Q/km As per IEC 60228

at 20’C
27. Star Reactance per phase at 50 Q/mm --

Hz
28. Capacitance per phase uF/km --
29. Charging current per phase at A/km --

Uo, 50Hz
30. Max. current rating in air A --
31. Max. current rating in ground A --
32. Max. conductor temperature on “C 90

continuous

No
33. Max. conductor temperature in ‘C 250

short
Circuit
34. Max short circuit current rating Conductor Sheath
t=0.1sec KA
t=0.2sec KA
t=0.5sec KA
t= 1.0sec KA
Length marking: Length shall be marked with number at one meter intervals on
the sheath.
** Minimum required size: Contractor to design and provide cable as per current
requirements.
17. 33KV CABLES
REFER ANNEXURE-21 FOR DETAILS
Sl. No. Description Unit Values
1 Manufacturer
2 Cable Size Sq mm 400
3 Cable type Copper /XLPE/PVC
4 Voltage Grade (U0/U (U2) KV 18 / 30 (36)
5 Reference Standard IEC 60502
No. and cross sectional area of

as per Specification
6 conductor
7 Conductor Material Copper
8 Shape Circular compact stranded
9 Class/Standard Class 2/ IEC 228
10 Nominal Diameter of Conductor mm
Extruded semi-conducting
Conductor Screen materials
11 com’d
Nominal thickness of conductor

mm
12 screen
13 Insulation material XLPE
14 Nominal thickness of insulation mm
15 Nominal diameter over insulation mm
Insulation screen material (Non- Extruded semi-conducting

16 metallic) com’d
Nominal thickness of insulation

mm
17 screen
Insulation screen material

Copper wires
18 (metallic)
19 Nominal thickness of tape mm
20 No. and Diameter of wires No. /mm -
21 Cross sectional area Sq.mm
Flame retardant polyvinyl

Outer sheath material
22 chloride
23 Nominal thickness of outer sheath mm
24 Nominal overall diameter (± 2mm) mm
25 Minimum bending radius mm
Max. D. C. Conductor resistance

0/km
26 at 20oC
Star reactance per phase at 50

0/km
27 Hz
28 Capacitance per phase uF/km
Charging current per phase at U0,

A/km
29 50 Hz
30 Max. Current rating in air A
31 Max. Current rating in Ground A
Max. Conductor temperature on

90
32 continuous
Max. conductor temperature in

250
33 short Circuit
34 Max. short Circuit current rating
t = 0.1 sec KA 89.7
t = 0.2 sec KA 63.4
t = 0.5 sec KA 40.1
t = 1.0 sec KA 28.4
the sheath.
18. 33KV CABLE (BETWEEN 33KV PANEL AND DRY TYPE

TRANSFORMER).
Refer Annexure-21 for details
1 Manufacturer
3 Cable type AL/XLPE/FRLSH
4 Voltage Grade (U0/U (U2) KV 18/30 (36)

6 as per Specification
conductor
7 Conductor Material Aluminium
Circular compact
8 Shape stranded
Extruded semi-conducting
Conductor Screen materials
11 com’d

mm
12 screen
Insulation screen material (Non- Extruded semi-conducting

16 metallic) com’d
screen
18 Insulation screen material (metallic) Copper wires
20 No. and Diameter of wires No. /mm -
21 Cross sectional area spmm
Flame Retardant polyvinyl

22 Outer sheath material
chloride
Max. D. C. Conductor resistance at

0/km
26 20oC
27 Star reactance per phase at 50 Hz 0/km
Charging current per phase at U0,

A/km
29 50 Hz

90
32 continuous
Max. conductor temperature in

250
33 short Circuit
t = 0.1 sec KA
t = 0.2 sec KA
t = 0.5 sec KA
t = 1.0 sec KA
the sheath.
19. 25KV CABLES
1 Manufacturer
3 Voltage Grade (U0/U (U2) KV 26/45 (52)
4 Operating Voltage KV 27.5
5 Cable type CU/XLPE/PVC
6 Cable Size Sq. mm 240
7.1 Conductor Material Annealed Copper
7.2 Conductor Diameter mm
8.1 Core Screen Extruded semi-conducting com’d
8.2 Thickness of Core Screen mm
9.1 Insulation Extruded semi-conducting com’d
9.2 Thickness of Insulation mm
Non-metallic part of semi-conducting

material plus metallic part consisting of
10.1 Insulating Envelope screen standard wire and copper tape, rated to
carry a short circuit current of 16 KA for
3sec
10.2 Thickness of insulation screen mm
11.1 Outer Sheath mm FRLSH
11.2 Thickness of Outer Sheath mm
Nominal overall diameter of

12 mm
Cable
13 Approx weight of Cable
15 Conductor SCC (3sec) kA 16
the sheath.
20. SECONDARY NEUTRAL GROUNDING RESISTOR (FOR 66/33KV AMT)
Required
Manufacturer
Port of embarkation
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Type Metal in air
Nature of the active part
Rated insulation voltage kV 24
Rated value Ω 20
Allowable tolerance on measurement (at 20°C in % 5

DC)
Rated operating cycle

- Thermal 70Retardation at In=5A °C
- Heating-up at I-20 A, 10 minutes °C
°C
- Heating-up at I-1000 A, 30 seconds
Value of the resistance after operating cycle, at

45°C ambient temperature 
DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERISTICS
Protection degree IP 55
Required
Dimensions
- Length mm
- Height mm
- Depth mm
- Weight kg
21. SECONDARY NEUTRAL ISOLATOR FOR 66/33 KV TRANSFORMER
Required
Manufacturer
Type outdoor
- Number of pole 1
-Operating voltage kV 20
-Rated short duration power frequency kV rms 50

withstand voltage
-Rated short duration power frequency

withstand voltage across isolating distance kV rms 60
-Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage kV peak 125
-Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage

across isolating distance kV peak 135
-Rated current A 1000
- Rated short time withstand current (1second) kA r.m.s. 12.5
- Rated peak withstand current kA peak 31.5
22. CURRENT TRANSFORMER FOR SECONDARY NEUTRAL (SNCT1,

SNCT2) FOR 66KV/33KV AMT
Required
Manufacturer
Standards IEC 44-1
Type
Actual transformation ratio A 1000/1
Accuracy class
SNCT1 PS (for REF)
SNCT 2 5P20
Rated output VA 15
Overheating In
Overcurrent class
23. SECONDARY NEUTRAL SURGE ARRESTER FOR 66KV/33KV AMT
Required
Manufacturer
Type Indoor
Voltage rating kV 24
Power frequency withstand voltage* kV rms 50
Lightning impulse voltage (1.2/50 µs)* kV peak 125
Nominal discharge current KA 20
Energy discharge capability 10.8KJ/KV
Discharge voltage 8/20µs wave

- 1,5 kA kV peak As per IEC
- 5 kA kV peak
- 10 kA kV peak
- 20 Ka kV peak
* its minimum, shall be decided at design stage.
24. 33 KV CIRCUIT-BREAKER CUBICLES LBCB, LBCCB
Required
Manufacturer
Standards
IEC 62271-1, -200,-
200, IEC 60694
- Class AIS type
- Rated operating voltage kV 33
- Rated short time duration power frequency kV r.m.s. 70

withstand voltage
- Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage kV peak 170


- Cubicle rated current A 1250
- Bar set rated current A 1250
- Allowable over-current for 1 second kA r.m.s. 25
- Instantaneous over-current kA peak 62.5
- Number of flip-flop contacts for circuit- minimum
Required
breaker plugging-in and plugging-out

monitoring
- Number of flip-flop contact for earthing minimum

isolator open/closed position monitoring
- Number of flip-flop contacts for isolator minimum

open/closed position monitoring
- Maximum dimensions of the cubicle

- Width mm
- Depth mm
- Height mm
- Depth with circuit-breaker plugged-out mm
-Protection degree
-Overall dimension drawing number
CIRCUIT-BREAKER/ INTERRUPTER
(Vacuum Type)
Three pole type
Rated operating voltage kV 33
Rated short time duration power frequency

kV r.m.s. 70
withstand voltage

kV r.m.s.
withstand voltage across isolating distance @
Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage

kV peak
across isolating distance @
Allowable overcurrent for 3 second kA r.m.s. 25
Instantaneous overcurrent kA peak 62.5
Making capacity kA peak 62.5
Breaking mode:
Opening time ms 
Closing time ms 
Rated operating cycle O-0.3s-CO-15sec-CO
Breaking capacity of cable at no load A
Number of auxiliary contact for open/closed O/O

position of the circuit-breaker O/C
Auxiliary supply voltage V dc 110
Supply voltage for motor drive circuits V dc 110
Allowable variation range of supply voltage +10%, -15%
Power consumption of auxiliary VA
- Coils consumption:
- engagement coil A
- release coil A
- Consumption of arming motor A
25. 33 KV CIRCUIT-BREAKER CUBICLES AT RCCB, LFCB, CB FOR DEPOT

FEEDERS AND RPC SYSTEM
Required
Manufacturer
Standards IEC 62271-1, -200,

IEC 60694
- Class Indoor

withstand voltage


- Allowable over-current for 3 second kA r.m.s. 25
- Instantaneous over-current kA peak 62.5
- Number of flip-flop contacts for circuit- minimum

breaker plugging-in and plugging-out
Required
monitoring
- Number of flip-flop contact for earthing minimum

isolator open/closed position monitoring
- Number of flip-flop contacts for isolator minimum

open/closed position monitoring

- Width mm
- Depth mm
- Height mm
-Protection degree
Values
INDICATIONS U
Required
CIRCUIT-BREAKER( Vacuum Type)
Three pole type
Rated short time duration power frequency kV

70
withstand voltage r.m.s.
Rated short time duration power frequency kV
Values
INDICATIONS U
Required
withstand voltage across isolating distance @ r.m.s.
Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage

kV peak
across isolating distance @
kA
Allowable overcurrent for 3 second 25
r.m.s.
Breaking mode:
Opening time ms 
Closing time ms 0
O-0.3s-CO-15sec-
CO
Number of auxiliary contact for open/closed O/O

position of the circuit-breaker O/C
- engagement coil A
- release coil A
Values
INDICATIONS U
Required
THE CIRCUIT BREAKER FOR REACTIVE POWER SYSTEM SHALL BE

INDUCTIVE SWITCHING DUTY. TYPE TEST MUST BE SUBMITTED.
26. 33 KV CIRCUIT-BREAKER CUBICLES AT LVATCB
Required
Manufacturer
Standards IEC 62271-1, -

200,-200, IEC
60694
- Class Indoor
- Rated short time duration power frequency kV 70

withstand voltage r.m.s.
- Rated short time duration power frequency kV 80

withstand voltage across isolating distance r.m.s.
- Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage across kV peak 195

isolating distance
- Allowable over current for 3 second kA 25

r.m.s.
- Instantaneous overcurrent kA peak 62.5
Required
- Number of flip-flop contacts for circuit-breaker minimu

plugging-in and plugging-out monitoring m
- Number of flip-flop contact for earthing isolator minimu

open/closed position monitoring m
- Number of flip-flop contacts for isolator minimu

open/closed position monitoring m

- Width mm
- Depth mm
- Height mm
-Protection degree
Values
INDICATIONS U
Required
CIRCUIT-BREAKER (Vacuum Type)
Three pole type

kV r.m.s. 70
withstand voltage
Values
INDICATIONS U
Required

kV r.m.s.
withstand voltage across isolating distance @
Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage across

kV peak
isolating distance @
Allowable overcurrent for 3 second kA r.m.s. 25
Breaking mode:
Opening time ms 0
Closing time ms 0
O-0.3s-CO-
15sec-CO
Number of auxiliary contact for open/closed position O/O

of the circuit-breaker O/C
- engagement coil A
Values
INDICATIONS U
Required
- release coil A
27. 33 KV CURRENT TRANSFORMER LBCT AND LBCCT
Required
Manufacturer
Port of embarkation
Standards IEC 60044-1,

IEC62869-1,2
- Rated power frequency short duration withstand

voltage kV 70
- Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage kV 170
Measuring secondary (Core-1)

- Accuracy class 0.5S
- Rated output VA 20
Protection secondary (Core-2)

- Accuracy class 5P15
Protection secondary (Core-3) only for LBCT

- Accuracy class
- Rated output VA PS
Required
Short-circuit current allowable for 3 seconds kA 25
Overheating In
Overcurrent class
28. 33 KV CURRENT TRANSFORMER FOR LFCB AND RCCB
Required
Manufacturer
Port of embarkation
Standards IEC60044-1,
IEC62869-1,2
- Rated power frequency short duration withstand kV 70

voltage
Protection secondary
- Rated output
VA 20
Measuring secondary 0.5S

- Accuracy class VA 15
- Rated output
Overheating In
Overcurrent class
29. 33 KV CURRENT TRANSFORMER FOR AT LVATCB
Required
Manufacturer
Port of embarkation
Standards IEC 44-1
- Rated power frequency short duration kV 70

withstand voltage
Protection secondary
Measuring secondary
- Accuracy class 0.5s
Overheating In
Overcurrent class
30. 33 KV VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS (IN ALL 33KV CB EXCEPT

COUPLING CB)
Required
Manufacturer
Port of embarkation
Standards IEC60044-2, IEC62869-

1,3
- Primary insulation voltage kV 36


- 1st secondary winding V 110/√3
- 2nd secondary winding V 110/√3
Accuracy class
- 1st secondary winding 0.2
- 2nd secondary winding 3P
Rated output
- 1st secondary winding VA 20
- 2nd secondary winding VA 20
THE VA OF VT MAY BE VARIED as per design
31. 33 KV VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS COUPLING (ON BC) LBCVTX
Required
Manufacturer
Port of embarkation
Standards IEC60044-2, IEC 62869-

1,3
- Primary insulation voltage kV 36


voltage

- secondary winding V 110/√3
Accuracy class 3P
Rated output VA 20
THE VA OF VT MAY BE VARIED as per design
32. 25 KV CB (GIS)
Required
Manufacturer
Port of embarkation
Standards IEC 62271-1 ,

IEC 62271-100, 62271-203
Type INDOOR
Substation type GIS
Phase number 1
Operating/service voltage kV 27.5
Rated voltage kV 52
Rated current 2000A
Rated impulse level 200 kVp
Rated power freq withstand voltage 95kV
Breaking capacity 31.5KA
Closing time 95 ms
Opening time 65 ms
Rated short-time withstand current (3 kA r.m.s. 16

seconds)
Breaking mode: SF6
Required
Rated operating cycle 0-.3sec-CO-15 sec-CO

breaking capacity
Operating times
- Opening actuation
from current emission on the release ms
coil up to
- Separation of contacts (opening ms
time)
- Extinguishing of primary arc
(breaking time at rated breaking
capacity)
33. 25 KV ISOLATOR (GIS)
Required
Manufacturer
Port of embarkation
Standards IEC 62271-1, 62271-102,

62271-203, EN 50163, IEC
60850
Type INDOOR
Substation type GIS
Number of phases 1
Two rotating columns
Operating voltage kV 27.5
Rated short duration power frequency 95

withstand voltage kV r.m.s.

voltage

distance
Rated lightning impulse withstand kV peak

Required

seconds)
Rated peak withstand current kA peak
Making capacity
34. 25 KV CB (AIS)
Required
Manufacturer
Port of embarkation
Standards IEC 62271-1 ,

IEC 62271-100, 62271-203
Type Outdoor
Substation type AIS
Phase number 1
Operating/service voltage kV 27.5
Rated voltage kV 52
Rated current 2000A
Rated impulse level 250 kVp
Rated power freq withstand voltage 95kV
Breaking capacity 31.5KA
Closing time 95 ms
Opening time 65 ms

seconds)
Required
Breaking mode: Vaccum
Rated operating cycle 0-.3sec-CO-15 sec-CO

breaking capacity
Operating times
- Opening actuation
from current emission on the release ms
coil up to
- Separation of contacts (opening ms
time)
- Extinguishing of primary arc
(breaking time at rated breaking
capacity)
35. 25 KV ISOLATOR (AIS)
Required
Manufacturer
Port of embarkation
Standards IEC 62271-1, 62271-

102, 62271-203, EN
50163, IEC 60850
Type Outdoor
Substation type AIS
Number of phases 1
Two rotating columns
Operating voltage kV 27.5
Rated short duration power frequency 95

withstand voltage kV r.m.s.

voltage

distance
Rated lightning impulse withstand kV peak

Insulation medium Air
Required

seconds)
Rated peak withstand current kA peak
Making capacity
36. 25KV CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
Required
Manufacturer
Standards IEC 44-1, IEC 60850,

EN 50163
Voltage / earth insulation: (max

kV 27.5
permanent)
Frequency Hz 50
GIS / AIS
Type
(As applicable)
Indoor / Outdoor
Erection
(As applicable)
Rated Impulse withstand (1.2/50 micro

kV peak 200
second)
Rated Power frequency withstand

kV r.m.s. 95
voltage-one minute
voltage (Maximum non – permanent) kV 29
Core 1 2000-1000/1,cl PS
Secondary Core
CT between
(The core to be
Transformer and
used for differential
25kV Busbar
protection should
(TcTx), I/C CTs.
be of PS Class)
Core 2 2000-1000/1, 5P15,
30VA Protection class

Required
2000-1000/1, 0.5s Cl,

Core 3 20VA Measurement
class
1600-800/1, 5P15,
Core 1
CT between 25kV
1600-800/1, 5P15,
Busbar and OHE Core 2
(TcCBxx) O/G
CTs 1600-800/1, 0.5s Cl
Core 3 ,20VA Measurement
class
1600-800/1, 5P15,
Core 1
CT between 25kV
Busbar and OHE 1600-800/1, 5P15,
Core 2
(TcCBxx) O/G 30VA Protection class
CTs for depot
1600-800/1, 0.5s Cl
feeder
Core 3 ,20VA Measurement
class
Withstand Over-current (3s /peaks) kA 16/ 41

37. TANK PROTECTION CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
Tank protection
Required
Manufacturer
Voltage / earth insulation kV 1.2
Frequency Hz 50
Cast resin
Type
( core)
Erection Impulse Outdoor
Rated Impulse withstand

kV peak
(1.2/50 micro second)
Rated Power frequency

kV
withstand voltage-one 5
r.m.s.
minute
Insulation withstand voltage

kV 3
(permanent)
Transformation Ratio 50-200/1
Precision Power VA 5
Precision Class 3
For secondary
Withstand Over-current (1s
kA 1/5 only & It should
/peaks)
be core type CT.
Degree of protection for

IP55
auxiliary circuit
Applicable for all the power transformers

# It should be core type CT

38. 25 KV VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER (TSS)
Manufacturer
Standards IEC60044-2, IEC 60850, EN

50163
Type GIS AIS
Erection Indoor Outdoor
Service frequency Hz 50
Rated Impulse withstand

KV peak 200 250
(1.2/50 micro second)
Rated Power frequency

withstand voltage-one kV r.m.s. 95
minute
Voltage / earth insulation:

kV 27.5
( max permanent)
voltage (Maximum non -

kV 29
permanent)
Resistance of Primary
winding
Secondary core 110 V
Transformation ratio 27.5kV / 110V
Precision Power VA 30 100
Protection Class CI 1
Degree of protection for

IP55
auxiliary circuit
The parameters of CT and PT like VA, winding resistance etc. should be

selected so as to meet the system requirements and ensure that no failure
and other effects like Ferro-resonance should occur while in service.

39. 25 KV LIGHTNING ARRESTOR
Manufacturer
Manufacturing Drawing
reference
Standards IEC60099-4, IEC 60850, EN

50163
Type of Substation GIS /AIS

(As applicable)
Type Indoor / Outdoor

(As applicable)
Lightning Arrestor Type Non-Linear Metal Oxide

Resistor Type, gapless
Nominal System Voltage
Phase – to- Earth KV 27.5
Phase – to- Phase kV 52
Rated Voltage for Lightning kV 42

Arrestor
Max. discharge Voltage at kVp 125

nominal discharge current
Power frequency withstand kV 105

voltage for arrestor housing
Pressure Relief Class A

40.

40. 3.3 KV CABLE GTP
Sl.
Description Unit
No. Values
1 Manufacturer
3 Cable type Copper/XLPE/PVC
4 Voltage Grade (U0/U (U2) KV 1.8/3.0 (3.6) KV
5 Reference Standard IEC 60502-1

240 sq mm
6 conductor
7 Conductor Material Copper
8 Shape Circular compact stranded
Extruded semi-conducting com

11 Conductor Screen materials ‘d

mm
12 screen
Insulation screen material (Non- Extruded semi-conducting com

16 metallic) ‘d
Nominal thickness of insulation

mm
17 screen
18 Insulation screen material (metallic) Copper wires

20 No. and Diameter of wires No. /mm
21 Cross sectional area Sq mm 240

22 Outer sheath material chloride
Max. D. C. Conductor resistance at

0/km
26 20oC
27 Star reactance per phase at 50 Hz 0/km
Charging current per phase at U0, 50

A/km
29 Hz

90
32 continuous
Max. conductor temperature in short

250
33 Circuit
t = 3 sec KA As per specification

Contract- DE-04 – Particular Specification- Technical Description Chapter-8C
VOLUME-4
PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS
Chapter-8C
TEST SHEETS

Contents
1. TRACTION TRANSFORMER .............................................................................. 3

2. AUXILIARY MAIN TRANSFORMER ................................................................... 7
3. 66 KV CIRCUIT BREAKER ............................................................................... 10
4. 66 KV HIGH VOLTAGE ISOLATORS................................................................ 12
5. HIGH VOLTAGE CURRENT TRANSFORMERS .............................................. 15
6. HV CAPACITOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER ................................................. 17
7. HV SURGE ARRESTERS ................................................................................. 19
8. NEUTRAL GROUNDING RESISTORS ............................................................. 21
9. 33 KV CIRCUIT BREAKER ............................................................................... 23
10. 33 KV CURRENT TRANSFORMERS ............................................................ 25
11. 33 KV VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER ............................................................... 27
12. 25 KV HIGH VOLTAGE ISOLATORS ............................................................ 29
13. 25 KV CIRCUIT BREAKER ............................................................................ 32
14. 25 KV CURRENT TRANSFORMERS ............................................................ 35
15. 25 KV VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER ............................................................... 37
16. TANK CURRENT TRANSFORMERS ............................................................ 39
17. ACDB ............................................................................................................. 41
18. BATTERY CHARGERS.................................................................................. 42
19. BATTERY ....................................................................................................... 45
20. 33 KV / 415V STATION TRANSFORMERS ................................................... 47
21. 66KV EHV CABLE ......................................................................................... 49
22. 25KV EHV CABLE ......................................................................................... 52
23. 33KV HV CABLE ............................................................................................ 55
24. 1.1 KV LV CABLE .......................................................................................... 57
25. 33 KV GIS ...................................................................................................... 59
26. 25 KV GIS ...................................................................................................... 61

FOLLWING IS THE LIST OF MINIMUM TEST TO BE PERFORMED ON

EQUIPMENTS SUPPLIED UNDER THIS CONTRACT. THE LIST IS
INDICATIVE ONLY, ANY ADDITIONAL TEST IF REQUIRED AS PER
RELEVENT STANDRAD SHALL BE CONDUCTED BY THE
CONTTRACTOR AT NO-EXTRA COST TO DMRC. EMPLOYER DECISION
IN THIS REGARD IS FINAL AND BINDING.. THE CONTRACTOR IS
REQUIRED TO OBTAIN APPROVAL OF TEST PROTOCOL / METHOD
FROM THE EMPLOYER BEFORE CONDUCTING THE SAME.

1. TRACTION TRANSFORMERS
TYPE OF TEST
Sr. INDICATIONS
No. Type Routine On site
1. Temperature rise test X
2. Dielectric type test X
3. Noise level ** X
4. Short circuit withstand ** X
5. Dielectric Special Tests** X
6. Determination of capacitance winding to

X
earth, and between winding**
7. Determination of transient voltage transfer

X
characteristic**
8. Measurement of zero sequence impedance

X
on three phase transformers**
9. Measurement of the harmonics of the no

X
load current**
10. Measurement of the power taken by fan and

X
oil pump motor**
11. Measurement of Windings resistance X X
12. Measurement of voltage ratio X X
13. Measurement of Short-circuit impedance and

X
load loss

14. Measurement of no-load loss and current X
15. Separate source AC high voltage withstand

X
test (Dielectric test)
16. Induced over voltage withstand test X
17. Polarity Test X X
18. Insulation Resistance Test X X
19. Capacitance and tan delta test on windings X X
20. Capacitance and tan delta test on bushing X X X
21. Magnetic balance and magnetizing current

X X
test
22. Core Insulation resistance X* X
23. No Load Current harmonics measurement X
24. Aux. circuits insulation X
25. Insulation oil breakdown strength X X
26. Dissolved Gas Analysis (DGA) X X
27. Frequency Response Analysis (FRA) X X X
28. Tank, Expansion vessel & Radiator Water

X
tight
29. Piping welds & joints Water tight X
30. Painting & external visual inspection X* X
31. Tightness of OLTC Tank X
32. Mechanical and Electrical operation of on X

load tap changer
33. RTCC, OLTC and Marshalling Box

X X
Functional Test
* Tests to be performed just prior shipment.
** These are special tests.

2. AUXILIARY MAIN TRANSFORMERS
Sr.N TYPE OF TEST

o
INDICATIONS
Typ Routi On
e ne site
2. Dielectric type test X
3. Noise level ** X
5. Dielectric Special Tests** X
6. Determination of capacitance winding to earth, and

X
between winding**
7. Determination of transient voltage transfer

X
characteristic**
8. Measurement of zero sequence impedance on three

X
phase transformers**
9. Measurement of the harmonics of the no load current** X
10. Measurement of the power taken by fan and oil pump

X
motor**
11. Measurement of Auxiliary losses. X
12. Measurement of Zero Sequence Impedance X
13. Measurement of Windings resistance X X
14. Measurement of voltage ratio X X

15. Measurement of Short-circuit impedance and load loss X
16. Measurement of no-load loss and current X
17. Separate source AC high voltage withstand test

X
(Dielectric test)
18. Induced over voltage withstand test X
19. Polarity Test X X
21. Capacitance and tan delta test on windings X X
22. Capacitance and tan delta test on bushing X X
23. Magnetic balance and magnetizing current test X X
24. Core Insulation resistance X* X
25. No Load Current harmonics measurement X
27. Insulation oil breakdown strength X X
28. Dissolved Gas Analysis (DGA) X X
29. Frequency Response Analysis (FRA) X X
30. Tank, Expansion vessel & Radiator Water tight X
31. Piping welds & joints Water tight X
33. Tightness of OLTC Tank X
34. Mechanical and Electrical operation of On load tap X

changer
35. RTCC, OLTC and Marshalling Box Functional Test X X

3. 66 KV CIRCUIT BREAKER
TYPE OF TEST
Sr.N INDICATIONS
Routin On
o. Type
e site
1. Temperature rise X
2. Dielectric tests X X
3. Radio interference voltage test. X
4. Measurement of the resistance of the main

X X
circuit.
5. Lightning impulse withstand voltage X
6. Short circuit withstand X
7. Protection of persons against live parts X X
8. Short time withstand current and peak

X
withstand current tests.
9. EMC test X
10. Mechanical operation test at ambient

X
temperature.
11. Short circuit making and breaking capacity X X
12. Dielectric test on auxiliary and control circuits X X
13. Capacitive current switching test: line-

X
changing current breaking test.
14. Capacitive current switching test: Cable- X

15. Tightness test. X X
16. Verification of the degree of protection. X
17. High temperature test X
18. Magnetising and small inductive current

X
switching
19. Power frequency withstand voltage test X
20. All devices operation checking X X
21. Wiring X X
22. Mechanical operation test at rated, max & min

X X
control voltage.
23. Interlocking X X
25. Exchangeability of similar devices X
26. Measurement of speed and Time X
27. Coil Insulation Resistance X X
28. Timing Test X
29. Breaker Insulation resistance X X
30. Gas leakage test (Tightness test) X X

4. 66 KV HIGH VOLTAGE ISOLATORS
TYPE OF TEST
Sr.N INDICATIONS
Routin On
o. Type
e site
1. Dielectric Test X
2. Power Frequency Voltage Test X
3. Lightning Impulse Voltage Test X
4. Partial Discharge Test X
5. Voltage Test as Condition Check X
6. Radio Interference Test X
7. Measurement of resistance of the main circuit X
8. Measurement of resistance of the auxiliary

X
circuit
9. Temperature Rise Test X
10. Short Time Withstand and Peak Withstand

X
current Test
11. Verification of the Protection X
12. Electromagnetic compatibility tests (EMC) X
13. Tests on Auxiliary and Control Circuits X
14. Functional Test X
15. Electrical continuity of earthed metallic parts

X
test

16. Verification of the operational characteristics of

X
auxiliary contacts
17. Environmental Tests X
18. Test to prove the short-circuit making

X
performance of earthing switches
19. Tests to prove satisfactory operation and

X
mechanical endurance
20. Tests to prove satisfactory operation at

temperature limits
(a). Operation at minimum ambient air

X
temperature
(b). Operation at maximum ambient air

temperature
21. Di-electric test on control & auxiliary circuit X
22. Main circuits resistance value X
23. Withstand voltage at 50 Hz X
24. Withstand voltage at 50 Hz on the isolating

X
distance
25. All devices operation checking X
26. Insulation resistance Test X X
27. Wiring X X
28. Function X X


5. HIGH VOLTAGE CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
TYPE OF TEST
INDICATIONS
Sr.No.
Type Routine On site
3. Tests for accuracy X
4. Short time current test. X
5. Measurement of capacitance and dielectric

X
dissipation factor
6. Internal arc fault test X
7. Determination of the remanence factor X
8. Determination of the instrument security factor

X
of measuring current transformer.
9. Primary windings power frequency withstands

X
voltage test
10. Secondary windings power frequency

X
withstand voltage test
11. Between section power frequency withstand

X
voltage test
12. Determination of the secondary loop time X

constant.
13. Accuracy test-ratio & phase error test on X

metering cores

14. Measurement of instrument security factor for X

metering.
15. Resistance, knee point voltage, exciting current X

X
measurement on special protection
16. Inter turn overvoltage test X
17. Sf6 leakage test. X
18. Terminal marking X X
19. Visual inspection X X
20. Current ratio test X X
21. Polarity test X X
22. Insulation resistance test X X
23. Continuity test X X
24. Secondary winding resistance X X

6. HV CAPACITOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER
TYPE OF TEST
INDICATIONS
Sr.No.
1. Accuracy tests X
2. Temperature-rise test X
3. Capacitance and tan measurement at power-

X
frequency (50Hz)
4. Chopped impulse test X
5. EMC radio interference voltage (RIV) tests X
6. Short-circuit withstand capability test X
7. Lightning Impulse test on primary winding X
8. Wet test for outdoor type transformers X
9. Transient response test X
10. Ferro-resonance tests X
11. Tightness test of a liquid-filled electromagnetic

X
unit
12. Accuracy tests X
13. Power frequency withstand test on the

X
electromagnetic unit.
14. power frequency voltage withstand test on high X

voltage terminal

15. Power frequency test on low voltage terminal. X

(NHF terminal of CVD)
16. Capacitance & tan delta before and after one X

minute power frequency test
17. Partial discharge test X
18. Determination of errors X
19. Sealing test X
20. Verification of terminal marking and polarity X X
22. Insulation Resistance test X X
24. Voltage ratio test X X
25. Exchangeability of similar devices X X

7. HV SURGE ARRESTERS
TYPE OF TEST
INDICATIONS
Sr.No.
1. Insulation withstand test on the arrester housing X
2. Residual voltage test X
3. Long duration current impulse withstand test. X
4. Standard lightning impulse spark over test X
5. Short Circuit test X
6. Measurement of front-of-wave impulse spark

X
over-voltage
7. Operating duty test X
8. Thermal stability test X
9. Partial discharge test X X
10. Leakage current test X
11. Reference voltage test X
12. Current sharing test X
14. Insulation resistance measurement X


8. NEUTRAL GROUNDING RESISTORS
TYPE OF TEST
INDICATIONS
Sr.No.
1. Power frequency withstand test between Line

X
and Earth using 60kV RMS for 1 min
2. Power frequency withstand test between Line

and Earth using 60kV RMS for 1 min for X
auxiliary circuit
3. Insulation resistance value test. X
4. Resistance value test at 30 c ambient temp. X
5. Thickness check X
6. Paint and Visual inspection X
Neutral isolator As per previous

associated isolator
Neutral Current transformer As per previous

associated current
transformer
Neutral LA As per previous

associated LA


9. 33 KV CIRCUIT BREAKER
TYPE OF TEST
Sr.N INDICATIONS
Routin On
o. Type
e site
2. Dielectric tests X
4. Measurement of the resistance of the main

X X
circuit.
7. Protection of persons against live parts X
8. Short time withstand current and peak

X
withstand current tests.
9. EMC test X
10. Mechanical operation test at ambient

X
temperature.
11. Short circuit making and breaking capacity X X
12. Dielectric test on auxiliary and control circuits X X
13. Capacitive current switching test: line-changing

X
current breaking test.
14. Capacitive current switching test: Cable- X

15. Tightness test. X
16. Verification of the degree of protection. X
18. Magnetising and small inductive current

X
switching
19. Power frequency withstand voltage test X
21. Wiring X X
22. Mechanical operation test at rated, max & min

X X
control voltage.
28. Timing Test X
FOR CB OF 33KV REACTIVE POWER SYSTEM INDUCTIVE CHARGING TEST

AS PER RELEVENT STANDARD SHALL BE CONDUCTED.

TYPE OF TEST
Sr.N INDICATIONS
o.

X
dissipation factor
8. Determination of the instrument security factor of

X
measuring current transformer.

X
voltage test
10. Secondary windings power frequency withstand

X
voltage test

X
voltage test

constant.
13. Accuracy test-ratio & phase error test on metering X

cores

metering.

X

11. 33KV VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER
TYPE OF TEST
Sr.N INDICATIONS
o.
2. Short Circuit Withstand Capability Test X
3. Lightning Impulse Withstand Test X
4. Switching Impulse Test X
5. Wet Test for Outdoor Type Transformer X
6. Measurement of Radio Interference Voltage X
7. Determination of Errors X
8. Chopped Impulse Test on Primary Winding** X
9. Measurement of capacitance & dielectric

X
dissipation factor**
10. Mechanical Test** X
11. Transmitted Overvoltage measurement** X
12. Primary windings power frequency withstand X

voltage test
13. Secondary windings power frequency withstand X

voltage test
14. Between section power frequency withstand X

voltage test

17. Transformer ratio X X
18. Verification of terminal marking and polarity X X

12. 25KV HIGH VOLTAGE ISOLATORS
TYPE OF TEST
Sr.No. INDICATIONS
1. Dielectric Test X
2. Power Frequency Voltage Test X
3. Lightning Impulse Voltage Test X
4. Partial Discharge Test X
5. Voltage Test as Condition Check X
6. Radio Interference Test X
7. Measurement of resistance of the main

X
circuit
8. Measurement of resistance of the auxiliary

X
circuit
10. Short Time Withstand and Peak Withstand

X
current Test
11. Verification of the Protection X
12. Electromagnetic compatibility tests (EMC) X
13. Tests on Auxiliary and Control Circuits X
14. Functional Test X
15. Electrical continuity of earthed metallic parts

X
test

16. Verification of the operational characteristics

X
of auxiliary contacts
17. Environmental Tests X
18. Test to prove the short-circuit making

X
performance of earthing switches
19. Tests to prove satisfactory operation and

X
mechanical endurance
20. Tests to prove satisfactory operation at

temperature limits
(a). Operation at minimum ambient air

X
temperature
(b). Operation at maximum ambient air

temperature
21. Di-electric test on control & auxiliary circuit X
22. Main circuits resistance value X
23. Withstand voltage at 50 Hz X
24. Withstand voltage at 50 Hz on the isolating

X
distance
25. All devices operation checking X
26. Insulation resistance Test X X
27. Contact resistance measurement X X
28. Wiring X X
29. Function X X


13. 25KV CIRCUIT BREAKER
TYPE OF TEST
INDICATIONS
Sr.No.
2. Dielectric tests X
4. Measurement of the resistance of

X X
the main circuit.
5. Lightning impulse withstand

X
voltage
7. Protection of persons against live

X
parts
8. Short time withstand current and

X
peak withstand current tests.
9. EMC test X
10. Mechanical operation test at

X
ambient temperature.
11. Short circuit making and breaking

X X
capacity
12. Dielectric test on auxiliary and

X X
control circuits
13. Capacitive current switching test: X

line-changing current breaking

test.
14. Capacitive current switching test:

Cable-changing current breaking X
test.
15. Tightness test. X
16. Verification of the degree of

X
protection.
18. Magnetising and small inductive

X
current switching
19. Power frequency withstand

X
voltage test
21. Wiring X X

X X
rated, max & min control voltage.
24. Painting & external visual

X* X
inspection
28. Timing Test X

29. Contact resistance measurement X X

TYPE OF TEST
Sr.No. INDICATIONS
On
Type Routine
site

X
dissipation factor
8. Determination of the instrument security factor

X
of measuring current transformer.

X
voltage test
10. Secondary windings power frequency withstand

X
voltage test

X
voltage test

constant.
13. Accuracy test-ratio & phase error test on X

metering cores


metering.

X

15. 25 KV VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER
TYPE OF TEST
INDICATIONS
Sr.No.
2. Short Circuit Withstand Capability Test X
3. Lightning Impulse Withstand Test X
4. Switching Impulse Test X
5. Wet Test for Outdoor Type

X
Transformer
6. Measurement of Radio Interference

X
Voltage
7. Determination of Errors X
8. Chopped Impulse Test on Primary

X
Winding**
9. Measurement of capacitance &

X
dielectric dissipation factor**
10. Mechanical Test** X
11. Transmitted Overvoltage

X
measurement**
12. Primary windings power frequency X

13. Secondary windings power frequency X


14. Between section power frequency X

17. Transformer ratio X X
18. Verification of terminal marking and X X

polarity

16. TANK CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
TYPE OF TEST
INDICATIONS
Sr.No.
5. Measurement of capacitance and

X
dielectric dissipation factor
7. Determination of the remanence

X
factor
8. Determination of the instrument

security factor of measuring current X
transformer.
9. Primary windings power frequency

X
withstands voltage test
10. Secondary windings power

X
frequency withstand voltage test
11. Between section power frequency

X
12. Determination of the secondary loop X

time constant.
13. Accuracy test-ratio & phase error test X

on metering cores
14. Measurement of instrument security X

factor for metering.
15. Resistance, knee point voltage, X

exciting current measurement on X
special protection

17. ACDB
TYPE OF TEST
INDICATIONS
Sr.No.
2. Dielectric properties X
4. Clearances and creepage

X
distance
5. Mechanical operation X
6. Degree of protection X
7. Wiring, electrical operation X X
8. Dielectric test X
9. Insulation resistance X X
10. Protective measure X
11. Effectiveness of protective circuit X

18. BATTERY CHARGERS
TYPE OF TEST
INDICATIONS
Sr.No.
1. Rated output test X
2. Over current test X
4. Power loss determination X
5. Confirmation of output frequency

X
adjustable range
6. Checking of automatic control X
7. Dry heat test X
8. Performance test X
9. Surge immunity test X
10. Electrostatic Discharge test X
11. Electromagnetic compatibility test X
12. Cooling test X
13. Vibration shock bump test X
14. Measurement of THD or THF for

X
voltage and/or current.
15. Short circuit test X
16. Damp heat test X
17. Radio Interference test X

18. Salt Mist test X X
19. Visual Inspection X
20. Checking auxiliary devices X
21. Insulation test X
22. Checking the protective devices X
23. Light load and functional test X
24. Measurement of output voltage X
25. Confirmation of output voltage

X
adjustable range
26. High voltage test X
27. Ripple Content Measurement X
28. Current limit test X
29. Efficiency test X
30. Alarm and Function test X
31. Heat run test for 8 hour X
32. Audible noise test X
34. Regulation test X
35. Floating operation mode test X
36. Equalization operation mode test X
37. Direct operation mode test X

38. Protection devices operation X
39. Setting test X X
40. Measurement of power factor X
41. Output voltage unbalance test X
42. Output frequency tolerance band

X
test
43. Immunity test X
44. Emission test X
45. Additional test X
46. Water Tightness Test X
47. Equipment Stress Screening X
48. Low Temperature storage test X

19. BATTERY
TYPE OF TEST
INDICATIONS
Sr.No.
1. Physical examination X X X
2. Dimension X
3. High Rate Current X
4. Charge acceptance at constant

X
voltages
5. Electrolyte Retention X
6. Marking X X X
7. Polarity and absence of short

X X X
circuit
8. Air pressure test X X
9. Ampere-hour capacity X X X
10. Endurance test X
11. Retention of charge X X
12. Discharge performance at low

X
temp.
13. Life cycle test X
14. Environmental tests X
15. Insulation resistance X X
16. Dielectric test. X

17. High temperature float charge X
18. Storage X

20. 33KV/415V STATION TRANSFORMERS
TYPE OF TEST
INDICATIONS
Sr.No.
2. Noise level ** X
4. No Load Current harmonics

X
measurement**
5. Determination of capacitances
of winding to earth and between X
winding**
6. Determination of transient
voltage transformer X
characteristics**
7. Measurement of Zero-sequence
X
impedance**
8. Dielectric test X X
9. Measurement of Short-circuit
X
impedance and load loss
10. Measurement of no-load loss

X
and current
11. Separate source AC high

voltage withstand test (Dielectric X
test)
12. Induced over voltage withstand X

test
13. Measurement of Windings

X X
resistance
14. Measurement of voltage ratio

X X
and phase displacement
16. Magnetic balance and

X X
magnetizing current test
17. Painting & external visual

X* X
inspection

21. 66KV EHV CABLE
TYPE OF TEST
INDICATIONS
Sr.No.
3. Bending test on the cable X X
4. tan δ measurement X
5. Heating cycle voltage test X
6. Partial discharge tests X X
7. lightning impulse voltage test X
8. Power frequency voltage test X X
9. Resistivity of the cable semi-

X X
conducting screens
10. check of cable construction X X
11. Determining the mechanical

properties of insulation before & X X
after ageing
12. Determining the mechanical

properties of over sheaths before X X
and after ageing
13. Ageing tests on pieces of complete

cable to check compatibility of X
materials

14. loss of mass test on PVC over

X
sheaths
15. Pressure test at high temperature

X
on over sheaths
16. Tests on PVC over sheaths at low

X
temperature
17. Heat shock test for PVC over

X
sheaths
18. ozone resistance test for EPR and

X
HEPR insulation
19. Hot set test for XLPE insulations X X
20. Shrinkage test for XLPE insulations X
21. Test under fire conditions X
22. Water penetration test X X
23. Conductor Resistance X
24. Conductor Examination X
25. Check of Dimension X
26. High voltage test for30 min X
27. DC voltage test on outer sheath X
28. Capacitance measurement X
29. Measurement of Dc electrical

X
resistance of conductor
30. Measurement of DC electrical X

resistance of armour

22. 25KV EHV CABLE
TYPE OF TEST
Sr. No. INDICATIONS
3. Bending test on the cable X X
4. tan δ measurement X
5. Heating cycle voltage test X
6. Partial discharge tests X X
7. lightning impulse voltage test X
8. Power frequency voltage test X X
9. Resistivity of the cable semi-

X X
conducting screens
10. Check of cable construction X X
11. Test for determining the

mechanical properties of
X X
insulation before and after
ageing

mechanical properties of over X X
sheaths before and after ageing
13. Ageing tests on pieces of

complete cable to check X
compatibility of materials


X
sheaths

X
on over sheaths
16. Tests on PVC over sheaths at

X
low temperature
17. Heat shock test for PVC over

X
sheaths
18. ozone resistance test for EPR

X
and HEPR insulation
20. Shrinkage test for XLPE

X
insulations
22. Water penetration test X X
26. High voltage test for 30 min X
27. DC voltage test on outer sheath X
28. Capacitance measurement X
29. Measurement of Dc electrical

X
resistance of conductor

30. Measurement of DC electrical

X
resistance of armour

23. 33KV HV CABLE
TYPE OF TEST
INDICATIONS
Sr.No.
1. Insulation resistance
measurement at ambient X
temperature.
measurement at maximum X
conductor temperature
3. Voltage test for 4 hours X X

X X
ageing



X
sheaths

X
on over sheaths
10. Tests on PVC over sheaths at X

low temperature
11. ozone resistance test for EPR

X
and HEPR insulation

X
insulations
15. water penetration test X
16. Special Bending test X
17. Additional test on Halogen free

X X
over sheath
19. conductor Examination X
21. High voltage test for5 min X
22. Partial discharge test. X
23. Volume resistivity test X

24. 1.1 KV LV CABLE
TYPE OF TEST
Sr.No. INDICATIONS
measurement at ambient X
temperature.
measurement at maximum X
conductor temperature
3. Voltage test for 4 hours X X

X X
ageing


8. Loss of mass test on PVC over

X
sheaths

X
on over sheaths
10. Tests on PVC over sheaths at X

low temperature
11. Ozone resistance test for EPR

X
and HEPR insulation

X
insulations
15. Water penetration test X
16. Special Bending test X
17. Additional test on Halogen free

X X
over sheath
21. High voltage test for 30 min X
22. Volume resistivity test X

25. 33 KV GIS
TYPE OF TEST
INDICATIONS
Sr.No. Type Routine On site
2. Lightning impulse withstand

X
voltage

X
peak withstand current
4. Test of tightness of the gas

X X
filledcompartment
5. Test under condition of arcing

X
due to internal fault.
6. Power frequency voltage test X
7. Pressure test of the gas

X X
filledcompartment
8. Cable charging current switching

X
tests
9. Proof of the degree of protection

X
(IP 65, 4X, 2X)
10. Mechanical operation test X X
11. Mechanical impact test X
12. Partial discharge tests X
13. Mechanical endurance test X

14. Measurement of the resistance of

X X
the main circuit.

X
current switching

X
parts

X
capacity

voltage test on auxiliary and ` X
control circuits

X X
voltage test

X
rated, max & min control voltage.
22. Inspection of Wiring X X
24. Painting & External visual

X* X
inspection

26. 25 KV GIS
TYPE OF TEST
INDICATIONS
Sr.No.
COMPLETE BAY
1. Dielectric test X
3. Measurement of the resistance of the

X
circuit

X
peak withstand current
6. Test of tightness of the gas

X X
filledcompartment
7. Test under condition of arcing due to

X
internal fault.
8. Power frequency voltage test X
9. Pressure test of the gas

X X
filledcompartment
10. Cable charging current switching

X
tests
11. Proof of the degree of protection (IP

X
65, 4X, 2X)
12. Mechanical operation test X X

13. Mechanical impact test X
14. Partial discharge tests X
15. Mechanical endurance test X
16. Measurement of the resistance of the

X X
main circuit.

X
current switching

X
parts

X
capacity
20. Power frequency withstand voltage

` X
test on auxiliary and control circuits
21. Power frequency withstand voltage

X X
test
22. Mechanical operation test at rated,

X
max & min control voltage.
24. Inspection of Wiring X X
26. Painting & External visual inspection X* X

BIDDING DOCUMENTS
FOR
ELECTRICAL CONTRACTS
OF
PHASE - 4 OF DELHI METRO RAIL CORPORATION
JUNE, 2021
PART 2: EMPLOYERS REQUIREMENTS
SECTION-VI: PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS (PS)
(ANNEXURE TO PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS (PS))
(A Joint venture company of Govt. of India & Govt. of NCT of Delhi)
Metro Bhawan, Fire Brigade Lane, Barakhamba Road, New Delhi - 110001
Website: www.delhimetrorail.com
Contract- DE-04 – Particular Specification- Annexure-1 (Civil Work Specification) of Chapter 8A
CIVIL WORK SPECIFICATION
1. GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
1.1. These specifications contained herein shall be read in conjunction with other
tender documents.
1.2. The work shall be carried out in accordance with the “Good for Construction”
drawing and designs as would be issued to the Contractor by the Engineer
duly signed and stamped by him. The contractor shall not take cognizance of
any drawings, designs, specifications etc. not bearing Engineer’s signature
and stamp. Similarly, the contractor shall not take cognizance of instructions
given any other Authority except the instructions given by the Engineer in
writing.
2. Reference to the Standard Code of Practice:
2.1. Contractor shall make available all relevant codes of practice at Site as
applicable along with the followings major codes with upto date
revision/correction slips and other relevant specifications described in these
specifications.
(i) ASCE (American Society of Civil Engineers)
(ii) ASME (American Society of Mechanical Engineers)
(iii) ASTM (American Society of Testing Materials)
(iv) BS (British Standard)
(v) CPWD (Central Public Works Department)
(vi) IS (Indian Standards)
(vii) IRS (Indian Railway Standards).
(viii) MORTH
(ix) DMRC Outline Construction Specification for Civil Works.
(x) DMRC Outline Design Specifications for Phase-IV (As applicable for
Elevated Stations)
2.2. Detail site survey shall be carried out and locate the existing nearby structure
of RSS, which could be affected during constructing activities such as
excavation, concreting, etc. and necessary arrangements or precaution shall

be taken by the Contractor at his own cost in order to protect the same.
Method statements shall submit separately for approval of Engineer-in-
charge.
2.3. Layout drawing shall be prepared indicating basic facilities such as Site
office, Testing Laboratory, canteen (optional), toilet, wheel-washing facility
etc. and submit for approval of Engineer-in-charge.
3. Earthwork
2.4. No claim whatsoever on account of any discrepancy between the sub-

surface conditions that may be actually encountered at the time of execution
of the work and those given in these Tender Documents shall be admissible
to the Contractor under any circumstances whatsoever.
2.5. Excavation shall be carried out in any material met on the site to the lines,
levels and contours shown on the detailed drawings and the Contractor shall
remove all excavated materials to soil heaps on site or transport for use in
filling on the site or stack them for reuse as directed.
2.6. Excavated material shall not be deposited within 1.5m from the top edge of
the excavation.
2.7. Excavation for all works and of materials required for filling shall be to the
exact width, length and depth shown on the drawings or as directed by the
Engineer. Where the nature of soil or the depth of the trench and season of
the year, do not permit vertical sides, the contractor at his own expense shall
put up the necessary shoring, strutting and planking with due regard to the
safety of personnel and works and to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The
construction barricading will have a width of 7.0m (outside to outside of
barricading). This can be increased at specific locations with approval of
Engineer. The Contractor shall submit method statements for approval of
Engineer demonstrating how this will be achieved at site. If required, driving
of rolled section / sheet pile of suitable size shall be done into the soil to
retain earth as directed by Engineer.
2.8. Foundation pits/trenches shall not be excavated to the full depth unless
construction is imminent. The last fifteen (15) cm depth of the excavation
shall not be done until concreting work is imminent. The full depth may at the
discretion of the Engineer-in-Charge be excavated and the bed covered with
a fifty (50) mm (minimum) thick (or as indicated on drawing) layer of lean
concrete 1:4:8 mix (1cement: 4 coarse sand: 8 crushed stone aggregate) if
shown in the drawing, or after watering if required, and consolidating the
bed.
2.9. If the bottom of any excavation has been left exposed by the Contractor and
in the opinion of the Engineer-in-Charge, that has become badly affected by
the atmosphere or by water, then the Contractor shall remove such portions
of the deteriorated material as the Engineer-in-Charge may direct and shall
make good with lean concrete 1:4:8 mix (1 Cement: 4 Coarse Sand: 8
Crushed Stone Aggregate). All expenses for such additional concrete and
excavation shall be borne by the Contractor.
2.10. Where excavation is made in excess of the depth required, the Contractor
shall, at his own expense, fill upto required level with lean concrete 1:4:8 mix
(1 Cement : 4 Coarse Sand : 8 Crushed Stone aggregates ) or as decided by
Engineer-in-Charge. If excavation is carried out to greater width and length,
such extra width and length shall be filled in by Yamuna sand.
2.11. The Contractor shall provide suitable drainage arrangement to prevent

surface water from any source entering the foundation pits at his own cost.
2.12. The Contractor shall make all arrangements for dewatering during
excavation and subsequent works, the accumulated water from any source
(including subsoil water) in the excavated pits/trenches and keeping the
excavated pits/trenches dry for subsequent works.
2.13. The Contractor shall make necessary arrangements for lighting, fencing and
other suitable measures for protection against risk of accidents due to open
excavation.
2.14. The sides of the excavation may be cut sloping, or shored and strutted to
hold the face of earth as per site requirements and as directed by the
Engineer-in- Charge. Where the excavation is to be carried out below the
foundation level of an adjacent structure, the precaution to be taken such as
under pinning, shoring and strutting etc. shall be determined by the
Engineer- in-Charge. No excavation shall be done unless such precautionary

measures are carried out as per directions of the Engineer-in-Charge. The
payment for such precautionary measures shall be borne by Contractor.
2.15. Loose or soft bed ground encountered in excavation at the required depth
shall on the Engineers-in-Charge's instructions be excavated to a firm bed
and difference made up to the required level with lean concrete 1:4:8 mix (1
Cement : 4 Coarse Sand : 8 Crushed Stone Aggregates)
2.16. Any obstacle encountered during excavation shall be reported immediately

to the Engineer-in-Charge and shall be dealt with as instructed by him.
2.17. The Contractor shall not undertake any concreting in foundation until the
excavation pit/trench is approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.
2.18. The specification for earth work shall also apply to excavation in rock in
general.
2.19. Near habitations and traffic prone areas, trenches and foundation pits or any
other excavation work shall be fenced, provided with proper caution signs
and marked with red lights, reflectors at night to avoid accidents. The
contractor shall take all adequate protective measures to see that excavation
operations do not affect or damage adjoining structures.
2.20. Excavation material required for filling shall be stacked or dumped where
indicated by the Engineer. Excavated material not required for filling and any
surplus material shall be removed or spread on the site as directed by the
Engineer. Dumping of this surplus material shall be in an environmental
friendly manner using trampoline cover, dumper, placer etc and according to
the levels/grades as indicated by the Engineer. The cost of such removal
and spreading shall be borne by the Contractor and deemed to be included
in the Contract Rates. Necessary approval from the local authorities for
carting and dumping surplus material is to be obtained by the contractor.
4. Back Filling around Foundations and In Plinth
4.1. Back filling around completed foundations, structures, trenches and in plinth
shall be done to the lines and levels shown on the drawings including any
trimming of the surfaces, as may be necessary. Where sufficient suitable
material is not available from the excavation, the Engineer-in-Charge may
direct to import suitable earth from other sources. The filling shall be done in
layers of thickness not exceeding 15 cm with watering, rolling and ramming
by manual methods/ mechanical compactors to grade and level as shown on
drawings to obtain 95% laboratory maximum dry density.
4.2. In case sand is used for backfilling in foundation and plinth, it shall be got
approved by the Engineer. In the foundation, the backfilling shall be done in
layers not more than 200mm thick and shall be thoroughly watered and
consolidated by approved method. The rate for backfilling using sand in
foundation/Trenches shall be borne by Contractor.
4.3. Backfilling material shall be as approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.
4.4. The material shall be free from rubbish, roots, hard lumps and any other
foreign organic material. The compaction of filling shall be carried out as
specified in drawings or as directed by engineer in charge.
4.5. For open foundation resting on rock, if the sound rock is located at very
shallow depth, the contractor is required to cut the rock (of all type or
strength) to a depth so that open foundation with a minimum earth cushion of
500mm may be accommodated.
4.6. In order to protect the ground floor of control room building, brick wall of
230mm thickness shall be provided below the Plinth beam along the
periphery of the control room building. Height of such brick wall shall be
measured from Plinth beam (bottom) at a depth of 2.0m or foundation level
(bottom of PCC) whichever is smaller. In case building foundation is more
than 2.0 m then a tie beam shall be provided at the depth of 2.0m and brick
work shall be done from the tie beam.
5. Concrete: Plain & Reinforced
These specifications shall be read in conjunction with the IS: 456-2000 and
CPWD specifications 2009 with up to date correction slips. Minimum grade
of Ready Mix concrete shall be of M-30 and P.C.C of M-15. Concrete cubes
shall be cast, tested and evaluated as specified in IS: 516 and Contractor
shall provided the facility at site for the same at his own cost.
5.1. Materials
5.1.1. Before bringing to the site, all materials for concrete shall be approved by the
Engineer. All approved samples shall be deposited in the office of the
Engineer before placing orders for the materials with suppliers. The materials
brought on to the works shall conform in every respect to their approved
samples.
5.1.2. Fresh samples shall be deposited with Engineer whenever type or source of
any material changes. The contractor shall check fresh consignment of
materials it is bringing on to the works to ensure that they conform to the
specifications and/or approved samples.
5.1.3. The Engineer shall have the option to have any of the materials tested to find
whether they are in accordance with specifications at the contractor’s
expense. All bills vouchers and test certificates which in the opinion of the
Engineer are necessary to convince him as to the quality of materials or their
suitability shall be produced for his inspection when required.
5.1.4. Any materials, which have not been found to conform to the specifications
and not approved by the Engineer shall be rejected forthwith and shall be
removed from the site by the contractor at his own cost within the time
stipulated by the Engineer. The Engineer shall have the powers to cause the
contractors to purchase and use materials from any particular source, as
may in his opinion be necessary for the proper execution of work.
5.1.5. Contractor shall also ensure that all constituents of exposed concrete shall
be taken from same sources to achieve a uniform colour and texture.
5.2. Cement
5.2.1 Cement used, shall be of approved manufacturers, brand as listed in

“Annexure- A“ and shall be of the following types:
a) 43 grade Ordinary Portland Cement conforming to IS:8112- For

Plaster/Mortar
b) 53 grade Ordinary Portland Cement conforming to IS:12269- For

Concreting work
For piling and foundation work, slab at grade, underground structures and all
structures in contact with earth, type of cement shall be as mentioned in
clause 5 on pile foundations.
5.2.2 Whenever possible all cements of each type shall be obtained from one
constant source throughout the contract, cement of different types shall not
be mixed together. Different brands of cement or the same brand of cement
from different sources shall not be used without prior approval of the
Engineer.
5.2.3 Contractor may obtain cement in bulk and store it in suitable silos of
adequate capacity each type of cement shall be stored in a separate silo and
it shall be ensured that cements of different quality are not mixed up.
5.2.4 All cement shall be fresh when delivered and at ambient atmospheric
temperature.
5.2.5 In fair faced elements, the cement used in the concrete for any complete
element shall be from a single consignment. All cement for exposed concrete
shall be from the same approved source and uniform in colour.
5.2.6 Packaged cement shall be delivered to the site in original sealed bags, which
shall be labeled with the weight, name of manufacturer, brand and type.
Cement received in torn bags shall not be used. The contractor shall provide
complete facilities at his own cost at site for carrying out the following tests:
a) Physical Test for Hydraulic cement as per IS:4031
b) Consistency of Cement Paste by vicat’s apparatus as per IS:4031 and

IS:5513
c) Compressive strength on cement as per IS:4031, IS:650 and

IS:10080
d) Soundness Test of Cement by Le Chaterlier Apparatus as per IS:5514
5.2.7 Total chloride content in cement shall in no case exceed 0.05 percent by
mass of cement. Also, total Sulphur content calculated as Sulphuric
Anhydride (SO3), shall in no case exceed 2.5 percent and 3.0 percent when
tri-Calcium Aluminate per cent by mass is upto 5 or greater than 5
respectively.
5.3. Aggregate
5.3.1. Aggregates from natural sources shall be in accordance with IS:383 The
contractor shall submit to the Engineer certificates of grading and
compliance for all consignments of aggregate. In addition at site from time to

time, the contractor shall allow for carrying out such tests and for supplying
test records to the Engineer. The aggregates shall be procured from
approved sources only as directed by the Engineer from time to time.
For fair faced concrete, the contractor shall ensure that aggregates are free
from iron pyrites and impurities, which may cause discoloration. Aggregates
shall be stored on paved areas in different compartments according to their
nominal size.
5.3.2. Fine Aggregate
The contractor shall provide complete facilities at site for determining grading
of aggregates by sieves as per IS:383, IS:460, IS:1607 and IS:2386. Grading
of aggregate shall be within the grading zones I, II, III.
Fine aggregates shall be river sand, pit sand, stone dust or other approved
sand. It shall be free from clay, loam, earth or vegetable matter, salt or other
harmful chemical impurities. It shall be clean, sharp, strong angular and
composed of hard siliceous material.
The contractor shall provide complete facilities at site for carrying out
following tests:
a) Proportion of clay, silt and fine dust by sedimentation method as per

IS:2386 part II
b) Moisture content in fine aggregates as per IS:2386 part-III.
c) Bulk density / Bulkage.
5.3.3. Coarse Aggregate
The coarse aggregate shall be crushed stone. Coarse aggregate obtained

from crushed or broken stone shall be angular, hard, strong, dense, durable,
clean and free from soft, friable, thin plate, elongated or flaky pieces and any
other deleterious material.
Coarse aggregate shall conform to IS:383 and testy for conformity shall be
carried out as per IS:2386, part I and IV
Maximum size of coarse aggregate shall be such that the concrete can be
placed without difficulty so as to surround all reinforcement thoroughly and fill
the concrete of formwork. Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer the

nominal maximum size shall not exceed 20mm.
5.4. Brick
Brick work at site should be done as per IS 2212. The contractor shall
provided complete facilities at site for carrying out following tests as per IS
3495:1992
a) Dimensional tolerance
b) Water absorption
c) Efflorescence
d) Compressive strength
5.5. Water
5.5.1. Water from approved source:
Potable water only shall be used for the works. Contractor shall have his own
source of water duly approved by Engineer. The water shall be free from any
deleterious matter in solution or in suspension and be obtained from an
approved source. The quality of water shall conform to IS 456. However, the
chloride content in water shall not exceed 500mg/litre.
5.5.2. Storage:
The Contractor shall make his own arrangements for storing water, if
necessary, in drums or tanks or cisterns, to the approval of the Engineer.
Care shall be exercised to see that water is not contaminated in any way.
5.5.3. Testing:
Before starting any concreting work and wherever the source of water
changes, the water shall be sampled and tested accordance to IS:3025-2009
for its physical, chemical and other impurities to ascertain its suitability for
use in concrete for approval of the Engineer. No water shall be used until
tested and found satisfactory. Cost of all such Tests shall be borne by the
contractor.
5.6. Transporting, Placing, Compacting And Curing:

Transporting, placing, compacting and curing of concrete shall be in

accordance with IS: 456 and other relevant codes.
5.6.1. Transporting:
The mix after discharging from the mixer shall be transported by transit
mixers, buckets, pumps etc. or as approved by the engineer without causing
segregation and loss of cement slurry and without altering its desired
properties with regard to water cement ratio, slump, air content, cohesion
and homogeneity. It should be ensured that the concrete is moved to its final
destination before it attains an initial set.
The transportation is to be done by agitating transit mixers, pumps or other

approved methods.
5.6.2. Placing:
The method of placing shall be such as to prevent segregation by providing

windows in the formwork for pouring concrete or by Tremie pipe (For Pile).
The thickness of horizontal layers shall not exceed 300mm. High velocity
discharge of concrete causing segregation of mix shall be avoided. The
concrete shall be placed in the forms gently and not dropped from a height
exceeding 1.5m except in columns where the maximum allowed will be
2.0m. Each layer of concrete shall be compacted fully before the succeeding
layer is placed and separate batches shall follow each other so closely that
the succeeding layer shall be placed and fully compacted before the layer
immediately below has taken initial set.
For columns/walls shear key shall be provided on the head portion of the
columns/walls of 1st stage, and before start the 2nd stage of concrete, shear
key area shall be clean properly, so that concrete gets a proper bonding.
Concreting of any portion or section of the work shall be carried out in one
continuous operation and no interruption of concreting work will be allowed
without approval of the Engineer.
5.6.3. Compaction:
Internal (needle) and surface (screed board) vibrators of approved make

shall be used for compaction of concrete.
Internal vibrators shall be used for compaction of concrete in foundations,

columns, buttresses arch section, slabs etc, and if required surface vibrators
shall also be used. Depending on the thickness of layer to be compacted, 25
mm, 40 mm, 60 mm and 75 mm dia internal vibrators will be used. The
concrete shall be compacted by use of appropriate diameter vibrator by
holding the vibrator in position until:
(i) Air bubbles cease to come to surface.
(ii) Resumption of steady frequency of vibrator after the initial short

period of drop in the frequency, when the vibrator is first inserted.
(iii) The tone of the vibrated concrete becomes uniform.
(iv) Flattened, glistening surface, with coarse aggregates particles

blended into it appears on the surface.
(v) After the compaction is completed, the vibrator should be withdrawn

slowly from the concrete so that concrete can flow in to the space
previously occupied by the vibrator. To avoid segregation during
vibration the vibrator shall not be dragged through the concrete nor
used to spread the concrete. The vibrator shall be made to penetrate,
into the layer of fresh concrete below if any for a depth of about
150mm. The vibrator shall be made to operate at a regular pattern of
spacing. The effective radii of action will overlap approximately half a
radius to ensure complete compaction.
(vi) To secure even and dense surfaces free from aggregate pockets,
vibration shall be supplemented by tamping or rodding by hand in the
corners of forms and along the form surfaces while the concrete is
plastic.
(vii) A sufficient number of spare vibrators shall be kept readily accessible

to the place of deposition of concrete to assure adequate vibration in
case of breakdown of those in use.
(viii) Form vibrators whenever used shall be clamped to the sides of

formwork and shall not be fixed more than 450 mm above the base of
the new formwork and concrete shall be filled not higher than 230mm
above the vibrator. The formwork must be made specially strong and
watertight where this type of vibrator is used.
Care must be taken to guard against over vibration especially where

the workability of the concrete mix is high since this will encourage
segregation of the concrete.
(ix) Plain concrete in foundations shall be placed in direct contact with the
bottom of the excavation, the concrete being deposited in such a
manner as not to be mixed with the earth. Plain concrete also shall be
vibrated to achieve full compaction.
5.6.4. Concrete placed below the ground shall be protected from falling earth
during and after placing. Concrete placed in ground containing deleterious
substances shall be kept free from contact with such ground and with water
draining there from during placing and for a period of seven days or as
otherwise instructed thereafter. Approved means shall be taken to protect
immature concrete from damage by debris, excessive loading, abrasion,
vibrations, deleterious ground water, mixing with earth or other materials,
and other influences that may impair the strength and durability of the
concrete.
5.6.5. Curing:
(a) Curing of concrete shall be complete and continuous using potable

water free from chlorides and sulphates water that is free of harmful
amounts of deleterious materials that may attach, stain or discolor the
concrete as per IS 456. Minimum wet curing will be for seven days by
ponding water followed by moist curing by spraying water which shall
be maintained up to a total period for at least 21 days from the date of
casting.
(b) Immediately after compaction and completion of any surface finishes

the concrete shall be protected from the evaporation of moisture by
means of polythene sheathing, wet Hessian or other material kept
soaked by spraying. As soon as the concrete has attained a degree of
hardening sufficient to withstand surface damage moist curing shall
be implemented and maintained for a period of at least 15 days after

casting.
(c) Method of curing and their duration shall be such that the concrete will
have satisfactory durability and strength and members will suffer a
minimum distortion, be free from excessive efflorescence and will not
cause undue cracking in the works by shrinkage.
(d) Steam curing with approved methodology can be adopted if required,

for precast units. No extra payment will be made for adopting steam
curing.
(e) Curing compounds of approved manufacturers or brands as listed in

“Annexure- A“ may be permitted with Engineer’s Approval. However it
is required to be proved that after using curing compound, the
concrete shall not have less strength than concrete cured by water
curing. It shall not have any discolouration on the structural concrete.
5.7. Admixtures
5.7.1 Chemical admixtures are not to be used until permitted by the Engineer. In
case their use is permitted, the type, amount and method of use of any
admixtures proposed by the Contractor shall be submitted to the Engineer
for approval. The minimum cement content specified shall not be reduced on
account of the use of the Admixtures.
5.7.2 The contractor shall further provide the following information concerning
each admixture to the Engineer:-
(a) Normal dosage and detrimental effects if any of under dosage and
over dosage.
(b) The chemical names of the main ingredients in the admixtures.
(c) The chloride content, if any, expressed as a percentage by weight of

admixture.
(d) Whether or not the admixture leads to the entrainment of air when
used in the manufacturer's recommended dosage.
(e) Where two or more admixtures are proposed to be used in any one
mix, the manufacturer's written confirmation of their compatibility.
5.7.3 In reinforced concrete, the chloride content of any admixture used shall not
exceed 2 percent by weight of the admixture as determined in accordance
with IS:6925 and the total chloride and sulphate contents in concrete mix
shall not exceed 0.15 and 4.0 percent respectively by weight of cement.
5.7.4 The admixtures when used shall conform to IS: 9103. The suitability of all
admixtures shall be verified by trial mixes.
5.7.5 The addition of calcium chloride to concrete containing embedded metal will
not be permitted under any circumstances.
5.7.6 Retarding admixtures when used shall be based on ligno-sulphonates with

due consideration to clause 5.2 and 5.3 of IS: 7861..
6. Reinforcement
These specifications shall be read in conjunction with the CPWD

specifications 2009 with up to date correction slips. Only TMT bar of
approved manufacturers or brands as listed in “Annexure- A” shall be used
of Grade not less than Fe-500D at any case. However, if necessary,
introduction of new grade can be directed by Engineer-in-charge as per the
latest relevant Indian standard and contractor is bound to implement the
same without any financial benefits. The reinforcement steel shall be from
Primary products and no re-rolled steel shall be supplied.
6.1. Any steel specified for reinforcement shall conform in every respect to the
latest relevant Indian Standard Specifications and shall be of tested quality
under the ISI Certification Scheme.
6.2. All reinforcement work shall be executed in conformity with the drawings
supplied and instructions given by the Engineer and shall generally be
carried out in accordance with the relevant Indian Standard Specifications
IS:2502 Bending and Fixing of Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
6.3. Inspection & Testing as per IS 1786:2008:
Every bar shall be inspected before assembling on the works and any
defective, brittle, excessively rusted or burnt bars shall be removed. Cracked
ends of bars shall be cut out.
No work shall be commenced without the Engineer’s approval of the bar

bending schedule. Manufacturer’s Certificate shall be supplied for each lot of
supply.
Specimens sufficient for three Tensile Tests for each different size of bar for
each consignment delivered, or for 10 tonnes of supply of that size,
whichever is less shall be sampled and tested by the Contractor. Batches
shall be rejected if the average results of each batch are not in accordance
with the specifications.
6.4. Bar bending and Bar Bending Schedule:
All bars will be carefully and accurately bent by approved means in

accordance with IS: 2502, and relevant drawings. It shall be ensured that
depth of crank is correct as per the bar cutting and bending schedule and
bent bars are not straightened for use in any manner that will injure the
material.
Prior to starting bar bending work, the Contractor shall prepare bar bending
schedule from the structural drawings supplied to him and get the same
approved by Engineer. Any discrepancies and inaccuracies found by the
Contractor in the drawings shall be immediately reported to the Engineer
whose interpretation and decision there to, shall be accepted.
6.5. Lapping & Welding/Mechanical Splicing:
(a) As far as possible bars of the maximum length available shall be

used. Laps shown on drawings or otherwise specified by the Engineer
will be based on the use by the Contractor of bars of maximum length.
In case the Contractor wishes to use shorter bars, laps/couplers
(approved make with permission of DMRC) shall be provided in the
manner and at the locations approved by the Engineer.
(b) Bars having butt or lap welds shall be provided as specified in the
drawings or as instructed by the Engineer.
6.6. Spacing, Supporting And Cleaning:
a. All reinforcement shall be placed and maintained in the positions

shown on the drawings to be prepared by contractor.
b. The Contractor shall provide approved types of supports for

maintaining the bars in position and ensuring required spacing and
correct cover of concrete to the reinforcement as specified on the
drawings. Cover blocks of required shape and size, M.S. Chairs and
spacer bars shall be used to ensure accurate positioning of
reinforcement. Cover blocks shall be cast well in advance and shall
consist of approved proprietary pre-packaged free flowing mortars
(Conbextra HF of Fosroc or equivalent). They shall be circular in
shape for side cover and square for bottom cover. The cost of cover
block shall be deemed to have been included in the rates.
c. Anti corrosion coating (at-least 03 coating) shall be applied to all

reinforcements before using them in any structure. Prior approval of
Engineer’s may be required in order to select the make of the
materials.
d. Bars must be cleaned, before concreting commences, of all scale,

rust or partially set concrete which may have been deposited there
during placing of previous lift of concrete.
e. G.I. wire shall be used for binding reinforcement.
6.7. Structural Steel:
All structural steel shall be hot deep galvanized by zinc coating having
thickness 1000gm/sqm and of tested quality and shall conform to following
standards:
IS: 226 Structural steel (Standard Quality)
IS: 2062 Grade-B Structural steel (Fusion Welding quality)
IS: 961 High Tensile Structural Steel (Ordinary)
IS: 1161 Steel Tubes for Structural purposes
IS: 8500 – Grade Fe 540HT
The Contractor shall supply to the Engineer copies of the manufacturer

certificate that the steel brought to the site for incorporation in the works is of
a quality fully complying with the specification. If required by the Engineer,
the Contractor shall arrange for testing of the steel samples as per IS:1608 –
1599.
6.5.1. Bolts and Nuts
For splicing of any structural member wherever required HSFG bolts and
nuts of property class-8.8 conforming to IS-3757 and IS:6623 (1985)
respectively shall be used. Unless specified otherwise, the bolts shall be
hexagonal.
All anchor bolts shall be of property class of 8.8 and nuts shall conform to
IS:1363 (1992). IS:1364 (1992) and IS:1367 as applicable and unless
specified otherwise, shall be hexagonal. All nuts shall conform to property
class compatible with the property class of the bolt used.
6.5.2. For HSFG bolts, washer shall be conforming to IS:6649 (1985)
Plain washers shall be conforming to IS:5369 (1975) unless otherwise

specified. One washer shall be supplied with each bolt and in case of special
types of bolts, more than one washer as needed for the purpose shall be
supplied. An additional double coil helical spring washer, conforming to
IS:6755 (1980) shall be provided for bolts carrying dynamic or fluctuating
loads and those in direct tension. Tapered washers, conforming to IS:5372
(1975) and IS: 5374 (1975) shall be used for channels and beams
respectively wherever required.
6.5.3. Templates
Templates used throughout the work shall be of steel in cases where actual
materials have been used as templates for drilling similar pieces, the
Engineer shall decide whether such materials are fit to be used as parts of
the finished structure.
6.5.3.1. Clearance
The clearance between fraying surface of bolted connections shall not be

greater than 1mm at each end. If separation is between 1 to 3mm the
surface should be tapered to eliminate the separation. Over 3mm separation
shall be filled with filler plates.
6.5.3.2. Drilling
a. Holes for bolts shall be drilled to conform to Clause 10 of IS:7215-

1974. Punching of holes shall not be permitted. All holes except as
staged hereunder, shall be drilled to the required size, 3mm less in
diameter and reamed thereafter to the required size. All matching
holes for bolts shall register with each other so that a gauge of 0.8mm
less in diameter than the hole cab pass freely through the members
assembled for bolting, in the direction at tight angle to such members.
b. All drilling shall be free burrs.
c. No holes shall be made by gas cutting process.
7. Pile Foundation
7.1. Setting Out:
The Contractor shall establish and maintain permanent datum level points,
base lines and grid lines to the satisfaction of the Engineer and shall set out
with a suitable identifiable pin or marker the position of each pile. The setting
out of each pile shall be agreed with the Engineer at least 8 working hours
prior to commencing work on a pile and adequate notice for checking shall
be given by the Contractor.
Notwithstanding such checking and agreement, the Contractor shall be

responsible for the correct and proper setting out of the piles and for the
correctness of the positions, levels, dimensions, and alignment of the piles.
7.2. Cement:
a. The cement to be used for piling and all foundation work shall be
conforming to following Indian Standard Specifications.
b. IS: 455 Specification for Portland slag cement
c. Cement shall be free from lumps and caking.
7.3. Concrete Mix Design
The concrete shall be M30 size of coarse aggregate shall not exceed 20mm.
For cast-in-situ piles concrete with a slump of 150 to 175mm (consistent with
the method of concreting) will be required. Minimum cement contents for
design mix shall not be less than 400kg/m³ of concrete in piling. For piling
Qty. of cement shall be as per the design mix or the minimum cement
content whichever is greater shall be used.
The contractor shall submit mix design calculations and get the approval
from Engineer well before the starting of installation of piles and carry out
adequate numbers of tests to ensure the minimum specified strength as
indicated in drawings.
7.4. Concrete cube tests:
Concrete cubes shall be cast, tested and evaluated as specified in IS:516

and Contractor shall provided the facility for the same at site.
7.5. Reinforcement:
a. The reinforcement shall conform to the requirements specified in

clause 3. extending for the full length of the pile and shall project 60
times bar diameters above the cut off level or as specified kin the
drawing. Only circular concrete cover blocks threaded on to the helix
shall be used for ensuring the specified cover.
b. Joints in main longitudinal bars will be permitted only where in the

opinion of the Engineer, each bar cannot be supplied in one complete
length where permitted joints shall be provided at agreed centers,
designed to develop the full strength of the bar across the joint,
provided with adequate extra links or stirrups and staggered in
position from those of adjacent longitudinal bars, all to be approval of
the Engineer.
c. All main longitudinal bars shall be tack weld at lapping if any and to
the pile cap reinforcement. The last one circle of helical stirrups at
each end shall be welded to main longitudinal bars.
7.6. Cast In-Situ Bored Piles:
7.6.1. General:
a. Diameters of the piles shall be the concrete shaft diameters and shall
not be less than the diameters specified in the drawing.
b. These shall be formed by boring to the founding strata specified on

the drawing or as directed at site. The sides of the boring shall be
prevented from collapsing by one of the following:
(i) Permanent mild steel liner (cased pile)
(ii) Removable mild steel casing (uncased pile)
c. Piles shall be constructed in a sequence approved by the Engineer.

During boring, the Contractor shall, where required by the Engineer,
take soil, rock or ground water samples and transport them to an
approved testing laboratory or carry out soil tests as directed.
d. The method adopted shall be chosen giving due consideration to the

subsoil data ground water conditions and to the other relevant
conditions at site as well as to the presence of adjacent structures.
e. The bottom of the steel lining shall be sufficiently in advance of the

boring tool to prevent settlement of outside soil and formation of
cavities.
f. Removable mild steel castings shall be used only with extreme

caution individual castings shall be joined together by screwing or any
other approved method and not by direct butting with external lug
connections. The inner surface of casings shall be smooth and free of
all internal projections.
7.6.2. Boring:
a. Boring shall be done using hydraulic drilling rigs with oscillator

arrangement suiting to different kinds of strata encountered.
b. Use of liner for type 4 to 6 meters from ground level or more depth, to
protect loose soil falling in bore hole as directed by engineer, is
essential.
c. Bentonite slurry shall satisfy the following properties as all times:
(i) Mud density shall not exceed 1.05 g/cc
(ii) Marsh Cone viscosity 30.40 seconds

(iii) The sand content of Size < 0.075mm shall not be more than 1
percent.
(iv) Liquid limit of betonies shall not be less than 400 percent
(v) Bentonite shall be saturated for 24 hours and then used
d. When using bentonite mud, flushing shall be done after lowering of

inserting reinforcement cage and tremie before starting of concreting
with fresh bentonite slurry.
7.7. Penalty on mishandling of bentonite
Mishandling of bentonite (like splashing of bentonite outside specified width

of barricading of non-cleaning of tires of dumpers and transit mixers before
leaving the piling site thereby making the road dirty etc is strictly prohibited.
Noncompliance of same shall attract a penalty as follows:
a. On first observation - Rs. One lac
b. On second observation - Rs. Two lacs.
c. On third and each subsequent observation - Rs. Three lacs.
7.8. Alignment of Piles
a. Piles shall be installed as accurately as possible according to the

drawings either vertically or to the specified batter. All deviations will
be measured at the cut off level of the piles. The deviation from the
true axis shall not be more than 1.5% for vertical piles and 4% for rake
piles. Piles should not deviate in location by more than 75mm when
used in groups. For single or 2 piles used under columns, deviation
shall not be more than 50mm.
b. The Contractor shall maintain a record of actual pile locations in the

form of drawing and submit the information to the Engineer at suitable
intervals.
7.9. Defective Piles
a. The Engineer reserves the right to reject any pile, which in his opinion
has not been constructed in accordance with the specifications.
b. The Contractor will not be paid for rejected piles. The increase in cost
of the pile caps, tie beams and other measures adopted for
strengthening because of rejection of defective piles shall be borne by
the Contractor.
7.10. As- Built Drawings
On completion of the work, the Contractor will submit a plan showing the
exact location and length of each pile as constructed at site, as well as dates
of concreting, cube test results etc. The original tracing of this drawing shall
be submitted to the Engineer.
8. Storage of Materials
8.1. General
All materials shall be so stored as to prevent deterioration, and to ensure the

preservation of their quality and fitness for the work if required by the
Engineer. The materials shall be stores under cover and suitably painted for
the protection against weather any material, which has deteriorated or has
been damaged shall be removed from site and replaced by new members,
as directed by the Engineer at no extra cost and time.
a. The steel to be used in fabrication shall be a stored in separate stack

clear of the ground section wise and lengthwise.
b. The storage area shall be kept clean and properly drained. Structural
steel shall be so stored and handled in such a manner that members
are not subjected to excessive stresses and damage. Girders and
beams shall be placed in upright position. Long members shall be
supported on closely spaced skids to avoid unacceptable deflection.
8.2. Covered Steel
All field connection materials, paints etc. shall be stored on racks and
platforms, off the ground in a properly covered building by the contractor.
9. Paint
a. All paint delivered to the fabrication shop/Site shall be ready mixed, in

original sealed containers, as packed by the paint manufacturers, and
no thinners shall be permitted.
b. Paint shall be stirred frequently to keep the pigment in suspension.
c. All paint shall have a low VOC content.
9.1 Storage of Paints
a. All paints shall be stored strictly in accordance with the requirements

laid down by the paint manufacturers. The storage area shall be well
ventilated and protected from sparks, flame, direct exposure to sun or
excessive hat, preferably located in an isolated room or in a separate
building.
b. All paint container shall be clearly labeled to show paint identification,

date of manufacture, batch number, order number and special
instructions in legible form. The containers shall be opened only at the
time of use. Paints which have liveried, gelled or otherwise
deteriorated during storage shall not be used. The Engineer shall not
use paints for which the shelf life specified by the supplier has expired
without inspection and approval by the Engineer.
10. Scaffolding
All scaffolding as required shall be provided till the completion of work.

Contractor shall have to be checked the scaffolding materials into a regular
interval so that defective materials shall be ruled out from the site.
11. Tolerance for Finished Work
The finished work shall conform to the following tolerance.
a. All the hairline joints shall be in perfect lines and levels.
b. Plumb
i) In any 3m + 5mm
ii) Maximum per floor +10mm
iii) Maximum for total height + 15mm
c. Horizontal
i) In any 3m + 5mm
ii) Maximum for total length + 10mm

12. Formwork For Exposed Concrete Surfaces:
The facing formwork, unless indicated otherwise on drawings, or specifically

approved by the Engineer in writing, shall generally be made with materials
not less than the thickness mentioned below for different elements of the
structure:
i. Plain slab soffit and sides of beams, girders, joists and ribs and side
of walls, fins, parapets, pardis, sun-breakers, etc shall be made with:
a. Steel plates not less than 4mm thick of specified sizes stiffened
with a suitable structural framework, fabricated true to plane
b. Timber planks of 20mm actual thickness and of specified

surface finish, width and reasonable length,
c. Plywood not less than 12mm thick (IS:4990 - Specification for

Plywood for Concrete Shuttering Work) or 3mm thick plywood
with a 20mm timber plank backing, of specified sizes stiffened
with a suitable timber framework. At joints 6mm/10mm sponge
to be provided.
ii. Bottoms of beams, girders and ribs, sides of columns shall be made
with:
a. Steel plates not less than 5mm thick of specified sizes stiffened
with a suitable structural framework, fabricated true to plane
b. Timber planks of 35mm actual thickness and of specified

surface finish, width and reasonable length,
c. Plywood plates not less than 12mm thick, of specified sizes

stiffened with a suitable timber framework.
iii. For sub stations suitable steel formwork is to be used unless as

specified by Engineer.
12.1 For Sloped Surfaces
1. Forms for sloped surfaces shall be built so that the formwork can be
placed board-by-board immediately ahead of concrete placement so
as to enable ready access for placement, vibration inspection and
finishing of the concrete.
2. The formwork shall also be built so that the boards can be removed
one by one from the bottom up as soon as the concrete has attained
sufficient stiffness to prevent sagging. Surfaces of construction joints
and finished surfaces with slopes steeper than 2 horizontal: 1 vertical
shall be formed as required herein.
12.2 Formwork For Curved Surfaces:
1. The contractor shall interpolate intermediate sections as necessary

and shall construct the forms so that the curvature will be continuous
between sections. Where necessary to meet requirements for
curvature, the form lumber shall be built up of laminated splices cut to
make tight, smooth form surfaces.
2. After the forms have been constructed, all surface imperfections shall
be corrected and all surface irregularities at matching faces of form
material shall be dressed to the specified curvature.
12.3 Formwork For Waffle Slab:
Shuttering for Waffle Slab/ Coffered Slab shall be with Fibre Glass moulds of
approved design. They can also be of Precast concrete unit as per design to
form as part of structural concrete. The moulds shall be of uniform shape
and dimension to give the desired shape of Coffered slab.
12.4 Age of Concrete At Removal Of Formwork:
Age of Concrete at Removal of Formworks shall be in accordance with

CPWD Specifications 2009 and IS: 456, with upto date correction slips. The
Engineer may vary the periods specified if he considers it necessary.
Immediately after the forms are removed, they shall be cleaned with a jet of
water and a soft brush.
12.5 Reuse of Forms:
The Contractor shall not be permitted reuse of timber facing formwork

brought new on the works more than 5 times for exposed concrete formwork
and 8 times for ordinary formwork. 5 or 8 uses shall be permitted only if
forms are properly cared for, stored and repaired after each use. The
Engineer may in his absolute discretion order rejection of any forms he
considers unfit for use for a particular item irrespective of no of items the
shuttering has been used and order removal from the site of any forms he
considers unfit for use in the Works. Used forms brought on the site will be
allowed proportionately fewer uses as decided by the Engineer. Use of
different quality boards or the use of old and new boards in the same
formwork shall not be allowed. If any other type of special or proprietary form
work is used, the no. of times they can be used will be determined by the
Engineer.
Annexure- A
EMPLOYER’S REQUIREMENTS
APPROVED MANUFACTURERS/SUPPLIER
All materials and products shall conform to the Contract Specification of DMRC,
BIS codes and other relevant codes etc. and shall be of make as approved by
DMRC.
For the list of approved makes for products and materials Please refer DMRC
website http://www.delhimetrorail.com/.. No Further approval is required to be
taken for usage of these makes. The list of approved vendors / makes will be
updated by DMRC on its website from time to time, and at the time of submitting the
Vendor proposal for the work after award of contract by the Contractor, the updated
list as available on DMRC website, will be applicable for items included in this list.
Further, the request of equivalent manufactures shall only be considered as an
exception wherein it is certified by all the approved manufacturer’s/suppliers
that they are not able to provide the required quantity of products/materials..
Sl. Details of
Manufacturer’s Name
No. Materials/Products
OPC ACC, Ultratech, Ambuja, JK

Lakshmi, JSW, Orient Cement
, JK Cement
Cement
1
PSC DALMIA, JSW, Vadraj, Birla
Gold
Prequalified Manufacturers as per RDSO’s latest

2 Reinforcement Bars
approved list with proper approval of DMRC
FOSROC, SIKA QUALCRETE, BASF, CHRYSO, Vista,

CICO, Pinnacle, MYK Schomburg, Thermax, Kunal
3 *Epoxy
Conchem, Sunanda, Fairmate, Greensboro Polychem,
STP, DON, Berger, MC–Bauchemie, Fibrex, MAPEI,
Ultracon, Buildtech, ECMAS, Durabuild
MYK Schomburg, Migua, CS, Sanfield, Inpro, 3R

Joints & Seals, VR Engineers, Greensboro
4 *Expansion Joints
Polychem, Maruti, MC-Bauchemie, Asian Paints,
ECMAS
Buildtech, FOSROC, DON, SIKA, MBT, MC-

Bauchemie, Pidilite, CHRYSO, MYK Schomburg,
BASF, MAPEI, Kunal Conchem, UNIROCK , CICO,
5 *Admixtures ECMAS, CAC, Fairmate, Vista, Thermax, TP
Buildtech, Sunanda, Molecules Conchem, Pinnacle,
Durabuild, Ultracon, Ado additives, Asian, Greensboro
Polychem, STP, Berger, Fibrex
CICO, FOSROC, SIKA PLAN, MBT, BASF, SWC,

6 Waterproofing System
Pidilite, MYK Schomburg, Kunal Conchem, Don, STP
HILTI, FISCHER,BIT, TRUTEK, FOSROC, Mungo,

Minova, UIP, Wuerth (Please note that ETA
7 *Anchor Fastener
Certification is mandatory for using/supplying fasteners
for load bearing structural members)
TATA, SAIL, ESSAR, Maharashtra Pipes, Jindal Steel

& Power Ltd., K.L. Steel, Steel Works & Power
8 Structural Steel
Engineers, SKS Ispat & Power, Shamli Steel,
Topworth, Goodluck India, Rimjhim
ESAB, Advani-Orlikon Weld Alloy, Modi Arc/Weld Excel

India, GEE, Honavar, K.M. Crown Welding
9 Welding Electrodes
Consumables, Supercon Schweisstechnik, Dwekam
Electrodes, L&T Eutectic, Victor
*Horizontal Tie Dextra, BB Bars System, BBV Systems, Minova,

10
Bars/Shear Bars Euroalloy
11 Formwork Release FOSROC, MC Bauchemie, CICO, CHRYSO, Fibrex,

Agent BASF, DON, Sunanda, Pinnacle, Fairmate, Durabuild,

CAC, Adoadditives, MYK Schomburg, Greensboro
Polychem, Thermax, STP, MAPEI, Asian Labs,
ECMAS ,Ultracon, Buildtech.
* Reinforcement Dextra, Halfen Moment, Sanfield, Kridhan , JB Engg

Couplers (cold forged
12
paralled threads type
only)
Waterproofing Texas India, BASF, FOSROC, SWC, STP Ltd, CETCO

13
Membrane Ashapure JV
FOSROC, SIKA, BASF, MBT, CHRYSO, DON,

Fairmate, CICO, MYK Schomburg, Pinnacle,
ECMAS, Minova, Durabuild, CAC, Asian Paints, STP,
14 *Non shrink Grout
BERGER, Fibrex, Ado Additives, Thermax, CICO,
Greensboro Polychem, Ultracon, Kunal Conchem,
MC-Bauchemie, Asian Labs, MAPEI, Buildtech
CICO, Pidilite, BASF, FOSROC, CHRYSO, STP,

SIKA, Sunanda, Fairmate, Kunal Conchem,
15 *Poly-sulphide Sealant Durabuild, Asian Paints, MYK Schomburg, DON,
Greensboro Polychem, Ultracon, ECMAS, Fibrex,
MC-Bauchemie, Buildtech
Sundram Fasteners, Pioneer Nuts & Bolts, Unbrako,

Nelson, Panchsheel, LPSEJOT, UIP, Canon, Trutek,
*Steel Structural Kwality Forge, Atul Fasteners, Imperial Bolts, Pooja
16
Fasteners Forge (Please note that ETA Certification is mandatory
for using/supplying fasteners for load bearing
structural members)
Berger, Johnson, Nicholson, Nerolac, Asian, Akzo

17 Paints
Nobel, PPG
Duroply (Green marked BWR Grade of Sarda Plywood

18 Plywood Industries Ltd.). Century Plywood Green Plywood, kiply
India Ply
Clean Tech Concure, Vista, FOSROC, STP, Kunal

Conchem, CHRYSO, CICO, DON, Pinnacle, Durabuild,
BERGER, Fibrex, Greensboro Polychem, UNICRETE,
19 *Curing Compound Ado Additives, UNIROCK, SIKA, Fairmate, MYK
Schomburg, Ultracon, ECMAS, Asian Labs, Asian
Paints, Molecules Conchem, MC- Bauchemie, MAPEI,
Thermax, Buildtech, CAC
Float Glass/Toughened Flat Glass India Ltd./Asahi Float/Modiguard Reliable

20 Glass/Insulating Glass/ Safety Glass Ltd./ Glaverbel/Saint Gobain/Tata Float
Laminated Glass
21 Powder Coatings Berger/Nerocoat/Jenson & Nicholson
Roff Rainbow Title Mate of Roff Construction Chamicals

Pvt. Ltd./Winsil 20/Silicon Sealant of GE Bayer
Silicon/Zentrival
22 Title Joint Filter
FM of MC-Bauchemie (India) Pvt. Ltd./Laticrete.
Toyo Ferrous Crete (P) Ltd.
23 Ceramic Tiles Kajaria/Bell/Johnson/Nilco/Somany
24 Glass Mostac Tiles Mirdul Enterprises/Italia/Bisazza
Multiples standards of integrated waterproofing

Modified Bituminous Membrane limited SUPER Thermolay/Polyflex of STP
25 Membrane Roof Limited/Lotus-3 of the Structural Waterproofing Co.
waterproofing Limited/Heavy Duty Poyply of Ana Roofings Private
Limited
“Techoxy” by Choksey Chemicals Pvt. Ltd. Toyo

26 Epoxy Putty
Ferrous Crete (P) Ltd.
Signum, Shakti Met, Goddrej, Radiant, Pacfic, Global

27 Fire Door
Fire Protective Agency
Door Fitting, S.S. door Dorma, Hafele, Doorset, Dline

28 handles, heavy duty
door closures etc.
29 Stone cladding clamps Hilti, Fisher, Canon
30 Textured plaster TEXFIN products (M/s. NIKO)
M/s. JK White Cement Works/Ms. Modi Industries Ltd.

31 Wall Putty
(Paint section)/Toyo Ferrous Crete (P) Ltd.
Epoxy paint, Epoxy M/s H C Associates, Asian

clear primer, Epoxy
polyurethane floor
coating epoxy Screed,
Epoxy seat coat Self
levelling
32 Compound (Epoxy, PU,
EPU), Patch repair
compound, chemical
resistant cement
mortars, Epoxy tar
compound & Epoxy
coaltar Coating
Mineral Fibre False Armstrong, India Gypsum

33
Ceiling
34 Metallic false ceiling Armstrong, Luxalon, Fameline Drumlin
35 Reflective glass Glaverbel, Saint Gobain, Ashahi
36 Wood Polish Sheentac, Asian

37 Granite As per approved sample and BOQ
38 Acrylic Distemper Berger, Asian, Nerolac, Jenson & Nickison
39 Cement Paint Supercem, Snowcem
40 Stainless Steel Jindal, SAIL
Ready Mix Concrete ACC, Unitech, Grasim

41
(RMC)
42 Locks at stations Abloy Locks or Equivalent
* Polymer WALLGRIP, TRISHUL, Shubham Minerals, Goldy

43
Minerals, GeoPolymer
Geotechnical Cengers, CEG Testhouse, Delhi Test House, SHREE

BALAJI Test House, Techpro, Arun Soil Labs, Indian
44 Investigation
Geotechnical, Raicon, Composite Combine
Technocrats, Secon, Sai Geotech
Material Testing ADS Labstech, Anshu Tech, Arihant, SHREE BALAJI

Test House, Beauru Veritas, ShriRam, National Test
45
House, Spectro, Indian Institute of Technology,
Pioneer, Secon, Delta, CEG Test House
* Softeye GFRP Dextra, FIREP International, Minova, Hughes

46
Brother, Geo Constech
* Rock Bolts/Swellex Geo Constech, DSI, Atlas Copco, FIREP International,

47
Minova
Bolts
* Fly Ash Block/ AAC Siporex, Ascolite, J.K. Laxmi, Ashtech, UNICRETE
48
Block
* Pre-Coated Profiled TATA Blue Scope, Multicolor, Kamdhenu, Essar Steel,

49 Bhushan Steel, Ispat Profile India, Super Disco Ispat,
Metal Sheethings
Aditya Profiles
Fly Ash Thermal Plants, Ashcrete, Ultra Pozz, Star Pozz,

50
Ashtech, Jaycee Build Corp LLP, SUPERPOZZ P500
* Polycarbonate Gallina Acroplus, Coxwell, Poly U, Fabic, Lexan,

51 (SABIC Innovative Plastics), DANPALON, GE Plastics,
Sheets
VMI Plastics, Power Chem Plast, Super Disco Ispat
* Liquid Polymer BASF, MAPEI , NINA, CICO, Kunal Conchem, MYK

membrane Schomburg, Sunanda, ECMAS, Durabuild, Asian
52 waterproofing Paints, STP, DON, BERGER, FOSROC, Greensboro
Polychem, Ado Additives, MC-Bauchemie, Thermax,
Asian Labs, CHRYSO, Ultracon, Buildtech
* Curing Compound Clean Tech Concure, Vista, FOSROC, STP, Kunal

Conchem, CHRYSO, CICO, DON, Pinnacle, Durabuild,
BERGER, Fibrex, Greensboro Polychem, UNICRETE,
53 Ado Additives, UNIROCK, SIKA, Fairmate, MYK
Schomburg, Ultracon, ECMAS, Asian Labs, Asian
Paints, Molecules Conchem, MC- Bauchemie, MAPEI,
Thermax, Buildtech, CAC
* Water stopper/ Bar Kanta Rubber, Greenstreak, Duron, Sunanda, Wall

54 Grip, Asian Paints, FOSROC, Maruti, CHRYSO,
DON
* Integral Crystalline Penetron, XYPEX, SIKA

55
Waterproofing Method
Micro Silica Thermal Plants, Sika Elkem, FOSROC, MAPEI,

Corniche, Star Silica, CICO, Rockfit, Jaycee Build
56
Corp LLP, Vista, Kunal Conchem, CAC, BASF,
Buildtech, Ashtech, Ultracon, Alccofine
* Corrosion Protection Berger, Johnson Nicholson, Nerolac, Asian Paints,

57 Akzo Nobel, Jotun, Shalimar, 3M Fosroc, Hempel,
Paints
Universal Paint, Sunanda, Kunal Conchem, STP,
DON, INM Nuvent Paints, CICO, CHRYSO,

Greensboro Polychem
* Drainage Pipes Tirupati Plastomatics, Duraline, REX, STIPL,

58
Kriti, Vishal, Eonn, Giga Pipes.
Pile Integrity Testing CIMEC, Spectro, ADS Labstech, ATL, Avantech,

Geodynamics, AIMIL, Cengers, CBRI, EMC India,
59 Pile Dynamic, Composites Combine Technocrats,
CEG test House (PLEASE NOTE THAT NABL
ACCREDITION IS MANDATORY)
NOTE: For the categories marked as *, the enclosed undertaking performa

should be duly filled and signed by authorized representatives of concerned
agencies.
Contract- DE-04 – Particular Specification- Annexure-1 (Civil Works) of Chapter 8A
UNDERTAKING
Name of Contract: Date of start of work:
Category of work: Date of completion of
work
This is to certify that work of ………………… (Category to be mentioned)

at
………………… (Location) of the contract ……………………. (Name of contract) has

been executed/completed in accordance with the manufacturer’s/supplier’s
specifications and as per the approved method statement.
The work has been jointly inspected by authorised representative of ……………

(Manufacturer/supplier), …………………… (Executing agency)
&
…………………………….. (Contractor) during its execution and all non-conformities

observed during inspection have been complied to achieve the best industry standards.
The undersigned take full responsibility of the overall adequacy, accuracy,

effectiveness &
warranty (upto design life) of the completed work as per the provision of the
contract
……………………. (Contract number) and Outline Construction Specifications of

DMRC.
(Stamp and (Stamp and (Stamp and

Manufacturer Executing agency Contractor
Representative Representative Representative

Contract- DE-04 – Particular Specification- Annexure-2 (ACDB Specification) of Chapter 8A
AC DISTRIBUTION BOARD
1. Detailed Description o f the Equipment & Its Application i n DMRC: Low Voltage
Electrical Panels
1.1 The design, manufacturing , testing , installation and commissioning of complete 415
V, 3 phase, 4 wire and 50 Hz low voltage main switchboard is as defined in IEC/EN
61439-1, built up from compartments to house busbars, terminal blocks, internal and
control wiring, instrumentation, relays, interlock and padlocking facility, emergency
push buttons, equipment for 61850 compliant/SCADA /RS 485/ Mod bus connectivity
of communicable ACB/MCCB interface, indication lamps, control and auxiliary
switches, contacts, control power supply, air circuit breaker, MCCB, MCB, CTs and
PTs, and any other items considered necessary to deliver the functions of incoming
and outgoing power supplies.
1.2 Both the auxiliary transformers, with a capacity of 200 kVA are intended to supply the
auxiliaries needed for operation of RSS, TSS and AMS equipment, as well as for the
supply of the Auxiliary installation of these equipment. The low voltage AC Distribution
Board has 2 incoming feeders from the 33 kV / 415 V, 200 kVA Auxiliary Transformers,
together with a Coupling Circuit Breaker. There are several 415 V or 240 V outgoing
feeders for feeding the power required for lighting, fans, air conditioning, control and
monitoring of switchgear etc in the RSS-cum-AMS-cum-TSS
2. Governing Specifications
Electrical Panels along with equipments shall conform to the latest standard or
harmonize as per the respective standard as given below or specified along with the
equipment in the specification.
In case of any conflict between specifications & the standards, the

instructions/decision of the Engineer' or Employer's authorized representative shall
be binding.
3. Technical and Installation Requirement
3.1 Description

Distribution of the low voltage circuits shall be provided with three specific cabinets,
one for the half sub-station one, and the other for the half sub-station two, each
supplied by the corresponding auxiliary transformer. These both cabinets are
respectively called LVSB1 (Auxiliary Board 1) and LVSB2 (Auxiliary Board 2). The third
one shall be dedicated to the coupling and to the supply of the rectifier two.
These cabinets shall be placed side by side to form a consistent assembly and shall
be fitted, on their door, with a bar-type mimic diagram with signalling elements
indicating the position of the main apparatuses. The LVSB1, LVSB2 and LVCSB
cabinets shall each include a Master Circuit Breaker, plug-out type, lockable by lock
and key. These Circuit Breakers are designated as LVACB1, LVACB2, LVACCB.
These Circuit Breakers are interlocked in such a way that normally only any 2 out of
the three can remain in closed position at any point of time.
In normal operation LVACB1 and LVACB2 are closed, LVACCB is open. In case of
voltage lack on one of the two bus bars, the relevant circuit breaker trips and the
coupling circuit breaker closes with two (2) seconds delay to determine that there is
real voltage lack (not to change for a temporary voltage drop).
At the coming back of the voltage, on the normal supply, the coupling circuit breaker
shall trip with a delay of two seconds to ensure that the real voltage has come back,
and the tripped circuit breaker shall close within 300 ms to ensure not to parallel both
auxiliary transformers.
Operation of Low Voltage Distribution Board shall be realized by putting the

system in Auto mode or Manual mode. Selection of Auto or Manual mode shall
be possible through local/OCC SCADA. Similarly, selection of Local or remote
mode shall also be possible through Local/OCC SCADA after selection on
manual mode.
In addition, these Circuit Breakers shall be interlocked with the Auxiliary Transformer
cubicle to ensure that

a) In case ACDB key is withdrawn, LVACB and corresponding LVATCB shall trip,
similarly if key from corresponding ponding LVATCB is withdrawn then, LVACB
and LVATCB shall trip.
b) It should not possible to open the door of the transformer cubicle if the LVACB
of the particular transformer is in ‘closed’ position.
c) When, due to an overload on the downstream of the breaker as per

transformer capacity, the LVACB should trip, and the corresponding 33 kV
Circuit Breaker (LVATCB) on the upstream of the particular transformer shall
also trip.
d) When, due to a ‘Transformer fault’ the 33 kV Circuit Breaker (LVATCB) of the

concerned transformer trips, then corresponding LVACB shall also trip.
e) If door of the transformer cubicle is opened with its key, it should trip the
particular 33 kV Circuit Breaker (LVATCB) and LVCAB i.e. both side circuit
breakers, in case any of these are in closed position.
3.2 Other Components
The LVSB1 and LVSB2 cabinets shall include the following (list is only indicative and
not restrictive).
a) A master protection of 630 A, Four Pole, Circuit Breaker, Not less than 10KA
Short circuit rating, plug-out type, lockable by lock and key
b) A set of four poles Tinned copper bus bar 1000 A (short Circuit current 10 KA
for 1 sec) for supply
c) A set of output circuit-breakers
d) The signalling contact on each apparatus
e) A specific outgoing for a battery chargers
f) An interlocking device prohibiting paralleling.
g) Energy meter with summation CT on two incoming supply as per Annexure-25.
Similarly, the coupling LVCSB cabinet shall include the following.

a) A master protection of 630A, Four Pole, Circuit Breaker, Not less than 10KA
Short circuit rating , plug-out type, lockable by lock and key
b) A set of four poles Tinned copper bus bar 1000 A (short Circuit current 10 kA
for 1 sec for supply.
As far as the outgoing feeders for control room AMS room and maintenance room
lighting, fans, air-conditioning etc and those for 66/33/25 kV Switchyard, Traction &
Auxiliary Main Transformer bays, 33 kV Switchgear, 25 kV Switchyard, Battery
chargers and for the 415 V distribution board requirements are concerned, the
Contractor shall provide adequate number of feeders to meet the full requirements.
The details shall be submitted to the Employer, for his review and approval, by the
Contractor. However, the following is the minimum requirement in each of the LVSB1
and LVSB2 cabinets.
a) 4 feeders each with 25A 40A MCB, for Control Room & AMS Building lighting,
fans with energy meter of accuracy class 1.
b) 3 feeders each with 25A 40AMCB, for 66 kV Switchyard.
c) 4 feeders each with 25A 32AMCB, for Transformers OLTC.
d) 3 feeders each with 25A 40A MCB’s for 33 kV Switchgear
e) 3 feeders each with 25A 40A MCB, for 25 kV Switchyard.
f) 2 feeders each with 25A 32A MCB, for Relay Panels.
g) 2 feeders each with 100A TP MCCB’s for Battery Chargers
h) 4 feeders as spares with 3 feeders each with 25A MCB and 1 feeder with
32 A MCB.
i) 1 feeder each with 125A FP MCCB for filtration machine with 125A three phase
Industrial power socket at firewall with suitable size of cable.
j) 1 feeder each with 25A 40A MCB for UPS
k) 1feeder each with 63A FP MCB for Air Conditioners with energy meter of
Accuracy Class 0.2 1.

l) 1 feeder each with 25A 32A FP MCB for Yard Lighting with energy meter of
Accuracy Class 1
m) 2 feeders with capacity according to the capacity of Solar Plant.
3.3 General and Technical Requirements of Electrical Panels
a. The Electrical Panel shall be same as low- voltage switchgear and control-
gear assemblies defined in IEC 61439-1 or EN 61439-1 built up from
compartments housing circuit breakers, control gear, relays, bus bars, controls
and other equipment.
b. As per IEC- 61439, the panels should comply to Design Verified

Assemblies, wherein the verification is done by
i) Testing,
ii) Verification by Calculation/Measurement,
iii) Verification by Design Rules, as per clause-10 of IEC-61439-1.
The tests should be carried out in government approved lab (NABEL

accredited) and should not be more than 5 years old from the date of
issuance of vendor approval. The contractor shall submit complete
record in support.
c. All the routine tests shall be performed in line of IEC 61439 and report
shall be provided.
d. The Electrical Panel shall pass the internal arc fault containment tests in
accordance with IEC 61641 for fault current ratings f o r a minimum time of
0.3 second.
e. The degree of Ingress Protection for Electrical Panels shall be IP-54, as

defined in IEC 60529 which shall not deteriorate with time.
f. The panel shall be suitable for Seismic withstand up to Zone IV per IS

1893. The same shall be tested at Govt. approved lab for seismic test and
report to be provided.

g. The Electrical Panels and the associated equipment, including switchgear

and control gear assemblies shall be certified for the category of duty specified
as per Annex A of IS/IEC 60947-1.
h. The main circuit as defined in vide clause 3.1.3 of IEC 61439-1 shall have
an insulation voltage of 1000 V AC.
i. The ambient temperature and ambient humidity for Electrical Panel shall
be as mentioned in GS of contract
j. The Electrical Panels shall be a minimum of Form 4b Type 5 in accordance with

IEC 61439-2. Heat dissipation calculation in support of offered "Form"
along with IP protection for barriers is to be provided as per the IEC.
k. Electrical panel shall have provision for top/bottom in-coming and

bottom/top out-going to suit site conditions of cable entries.
4. Low Voltage Switchgear:
4.1 Air Circuit Breakers
The moving part of incoming circuit breaker shall consist of a metal chassis fitted with
an extraction system. This chassis shall carry a manually controlled four-pole circuit
breaker with a current rating of 630 A. ACB should be mechanically robust of compact
design, air break horizontal and withdrawable type, confirming to IS/IEC 60947-2 and
EN 60947-2. The operating mechanism shall be trip-free.
Maximum number of circuit breaker auxiliary switches, spare auxiliary switches to be

equally divided between normally open and normally closed. At least 4 spare pairs of
N.O. and N.C. volt free contacts shall be provided.
The circuit breakers shall have sufficient breaking capacity to cut any short-circuit
which could occur without suffering damage. They shall be fitted with:
 Eight power connectors split down into two groups of four (inlet and outlet
connectors),
 A mechanical "closed" and "open" indicator (red and green)
 An interlocking system which prevents any movement of the chassis if the circuit-
breaker is closed,
4.1.1 All ACBs shall be provided with interlocks to ensure that:
a) The ACB cannot be plugged in or isolated while it is closed,
b) The ACB cannot be closed until it is fully plugged in or completely isolated
c) The ACB cannot be closed in the service position without completing the
auxiliary circuits between the fixed and moving portions
d) With manual charged and motor charged spring mechanisms the springs
cannot be discharged until they have been fully charged and until the means for
charging has been removed or disconnected,
e) Facilities shall be provided for testing the ACB operation when in the isolated
and withdrawn positions by the normal means as in service, and
f) Where control circuits are provided and interlock circuits are broken via plugs
on withdrawal of the ACB, a minimum of one jumper lead and plug assembly of
each size and type shall be provided to facilitate testing in the withdrawn
position.
g) The neutral shall be rated for 100%
h) A lock which only releases the key when the moving section is unplugged and
which engages in the fixed part,
i) A manual control system consisting of a lever that can be operated from

outside,
j) A grounding system, which keeps the chassis ground during plugging-in until
the power and monitoring connectors are engaged and which still ensures the
chassis is grounded in the unplugged position.
4.1.2 Control switch for ACB shall be as follows:
Air Circuit breakers shall be fitted with operative switches of the pistol grip type. The
handles of control switches for air circuit breakers shall turn clockwise for closing and
anti - clockwise for tripping.

The control switch shall be clearly labelled as CIRCUIT BREAKER OPEN - NEUTRAL
- CLOSE, with spring return to the neutral position. Mechanical interlock shall be fitted
to prevent repetitive closing without moving first to the trip position, and shall be
capable of padlocking in the neutral or trip position.
4.1.3 Voltage Monitoring
A voltage monitoring system shall be mounted upstream of the miniature circuit

breaker on each main inlet. This system shall comprise:
a) A moving-iron voltmeter and a selector switch to select voltages across phases

and between each phase and the neutral,
b) A 415 V indicators light (R-Y-B) protected by HRC fuses,
c) An On/Off voltage relay with a permanent power supply.
4.1.4 Current Monitoring
There shall be a current monitoring system mounted downstream of the main circuit
breaker protected by HRC fuses. This monitoring system shall comprise three 5 A, 15
VA, class 1 current transformers each feeding a moving-iron ammeter.
4.1.5 Protections
ACB shall have microprocessor based protection releases for type of faults with
selective over current (long time, short time & instantaneous) & earth fault protection,
measurement of electrical parameters and with communication capability with SCADA
system. ACB shall have an LED/LCD display to show true RMS current in all the three
phases and highest current among these phases. The release shall be equipped with
self diagnostic feature with indication. The release shall have zone selective
interlocking and IEC-61850 compliant. The protection characteristics should be front
adjustable and password protected.
These shall be installed in, or on the front panel of the upper compartment together
with the monitoring systems. They shall comprise:
 auxiliary relays (alarms, voltage, ..., etc.),
 test point boxes,

 indicator lights and a "lamp test" push button,
 selector switches and push button,
 the fuses required to protect this equipment and the monitoring systems.
However, in general, all accessory equipment which contributes to the operation of a

power switching component shall be mounted in the same cabinet as the component.
4.1.6 Auxiliary Power Supply
This shall be provided by a 110 V DC battery and battery charger system.
4.1.7 Selectivity
The protective systems shall provide optimum selectivity to ensure maximum

continuity of the electrical power supply and to restrict any failures to their immediate
area (in practice, this means that the values, curves and responses times of upstream
protective systems shall always exceed those of downstream protective systems)
4.1.8 Electrical Characteristics
 Rated Insulation Voltage: 1000 V
 Rated Frequency: 50 Hz
 Rated ambient temperature: As per IEC 60947
 Rated service short-circuit breaking capacity (I cs): 100% of Icu
 Rated short-circuit making capacity: shall be at-least 2.1 times of ultimate short
circuit breaking capacity at 0.25 power factor.
4.1.9 Main Bus-bar of LVSB 1 & LVSB 2
These bus bars shall have a current rating of 1000 A
4.1.10 Short-circuits
The short circuit current value Isc = 10 kA shall be used to select the dimensions of the
main bus bar sets, the characteristics of the main low voltage circuit breakers and
those of the protection equipment.
4.1.11 Manufacturing & Operating Principles

a) General
The equipment used in the cabinets shall consist of single insulation prefabricated
units complying with IEC standard 157-1. The Contractor shall supply a copy of the
test report for the equipment.
The main inlets and outlets shall include compact plug-in circuit breakers designed
such that the circuit breaker can be removed and replaced quickly without needing
access to live parts. The contactors used in permanent board and permanent stand-by
board shall be fixed.
b) Interchangeability
All moving components of plug-in units of the same type and with the same electrical
characteristics shall be interchangeable.
c) Installation
The boards shall be installed in the technical rooms which house the 33kV bays and
the 33kV / 415 V transformers.
d) Structure
Each structure used in primary cabinets shall be listed and allocated an identification
number to indicate its function (example: LVSB 1: Auxiliary Board 1).
The structure shall comprise:
 The uprights,
 The hardware,
 The main bus bars,
 The inlets and/or coupling bus bars,
 The identification.
Primary cabinet shall consist of three such structures:
 One for LVSB 1
 One for LVSB 2

 One for coupling board LVCSB
e) Equipment
The boards shall comprise the following compartments, from the bottom:
 A fixed compartment housing the monitoring systems and relays,
 A plug-out compartment for the incoming circuit breakers,
 A fixed compartment containing the protection equipment or the change-over

switch gear between the two power supplies for the permanent stand-by cabinet,
 The draw-out compartment(s) for the main outlets (> 63 A),
 The fixed compartment for the other outlets,
 And the terminal strips on the rear panel.
The boards shall be protected against fire by means of NOVAC system as per
detailed specification given in the annexure-7. The keys for all LV cabinets and
boxes shall be of the same type.
f) Connection to Transformer
LVSB1 and LVSB2 shall be connected to the respective transformers, by 3.5 core
Aluminium cables with 150 mm² cross section, per phase as well as neutral, shall be
used for the connection.
g) Wiring
Only copper cable, multi-wire or single-wire cables, with a core cross section area of
1.5 mm² or more, shall be used for control and signaling wiring. All power connections
shall be made at the bottom of the board. The terminal strips shall be designed to
accept cables one gauge higher in cross-section than the cable used. Separators shall
protect the strip against the danger represented by falling conductive objects.
h) Grounding
Frames shall be made electrically continuous by connection with copper bar, at least
30 x 3 mm size or 50x6 mm GI strip may be, provided for the grounding of the outlets.

Door earthing shall be provided with flexible Copper braided of minimum 25x3
mm size.
4.1.12 Remote Monitoring & Control
(i) The following status and alarms for each Electrical Panels shall be sent to SCADA
for remote monitoring on IEC 61850 standard protocol communication as approved
but not limited to:
a. ACB open/close status,
b. Common alarm for ACBs trip on fault/lock out,
c. Common alarm for any Auto/Manual or local/remote or local/auto

selector switch in local mode
d. Control supply failure,
e. ACB ready to close indication.
f. Emergency push button (EPB) operated, and
g. Busbar voltage ,current , frequency and energy parameter
h. Electrical Panels under voltage alarm and cause of tripping.
i. Provision of Selection of Manual/Auto control from SCADA.
j. Provision of close/open operation of ACBs from SCADA under

manual control.
(ii) Relays
a. The relays are having in-built function with protective gears such as ACB,
MCCB and MCB and MPCB etc. In case any relay is required for
additional protection or otherwise, the same shall be provided to ensure
full protection to the system.
b. O/L relay shall be adjustable type to meet the requirement, as per

capacity of the Aux. LT transformer.
(iii) Emergency Push Button (EPB)

Emergency lock and key type push buttons shall be installed wherever required or
specified to de-energize the Electrical Panels in the event of an emergency. The EPB
shall be button type with flat surface protection guard ring and pressed- in design with
key reset so that accidental triggering and vandalism shall be avoided as far as
possible. Transparent hinged cover shall be provided in front. Unless otherwise
specified on the Drawings, the EPB shall be mounted at 1300 + 100 mm above finish
floor level. The button design and the installation details shall be submitted for
approval.
4.2 Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCB)
MCBs shall comply with and be type-tested to IEC 60898 or EN 60898. Type test
report for the same shall be submitted. MCBs shall meet the following
requirements:
 Number of poles: single-pole, double-pole, triple-pole or four-pole
 Protection against external influences: Enclosed-type,
 Method of connection: Bolted type or clip-on type,
 Rated operational voltage and frequency 240 / 415 V AC and 50 Hz.
 Range of instantaneous tripping current: MCB's shall be current limiting Type

class to suit the requirement.
 Rated short-circuit breaking capacity: not less than 10 kA (M3) unless

otherwise specified
 I2t characteristic: suitable for load and circuit being protected,
 Degree of protection: IP-20 for MCB's
 Reference ambient temperature: as per IEC 60898.
 The load handling contacts shall be silver/tungsten or proven material and the
contacts and operating mechanism shall be designed so as to give a wiping
action both at make and break. The breaker operating mechanism shall be of
trip- free type. The breaker operating trolly shall be clearly indicated for the "ON"
and "OFF" positions. It should be of Quick make and Quick break type.
 Circuit protection against overload and short-circuit conditions shall be provided

by means of thermal-magnetic device. Double-pole, triple-pole, and four pole
MCBs shall be integral units and interlocked internally so that an over current
through any pole shall trip all the poles of the MCB simultaneously. An assembly
of two or three or four single-pole units mechanically strapped together is not
acceptable.
 Housing shall be heat resistant and having high impact strength. All DP, TP and
FP circuit breaker shall have a common trip bar and should be mechanically
coupled through a pin. It shall have an electrical endurance of the order of 10,000
operation cycle for current rating of up to 50A.
4.3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers (MCCB)
 MCCBs shall comply with and be type-tested to IS/IEC 60947-2 or EN 60947-2.

Type test report for the same shall be submitted.
 Each MCCB shall be of fixed type and have all the mechanical and live parts
completely enclosed in an insulated moulded case.
 MCCBs shall meet the following requirements:
• Number of poles: single/double pole/triple pole/four pole
• Rated operational voltage: 240 / 415 V AC, as per drawing
• Rated insulation voltage: 1000 V AC, higher voltage acceptable
• Rated uninterrupted current (In): as per capacity, but after taking into account
the installation conditions and temperature deration.
• Rated frequency: 50 Hz
• Rated ultimate short circuit breaking capacity(Ics)- should not be less

than 10 KA
• Ics should be equal to 100 % of Ics for the selected MCCB
• Rated short-circuit making capacity (Icm): shall be at least 2.1 times of ultimate
short circuit breaking capacity at 0.25 power factor,

• Utilization category: A or B as appropriate,
• Degree of protection: IP 3X to IEC 60529 or EN 60529
• Impulse Withstand Voltage - 8 kV
• Duty Cycle: CO-15 sec-CO
• MCCB's to be provided in LV Main Switchboard shall be fixed type with

handle.
• All MCCB's should have front adjustable microprocessor based releases with
adjustment in the range of 40 - 100% for nominal overloads and adjustable
setting for short circuit faults. MCCB's for network/feeder Protection shall
have releases with earth Fault Protection features.
• In case of 4 pole MCCB, neutral shall be defined and capable of offering

protection upto full rating with possibility of adjustment at site in the neutral
setting.
• Mechanical endurance shall be as specified in latest IEC standard.
• MCCB's shall have an electrical endurance operation cycles as per latest IEC
standard 60947.
• All MCCB's shall be arranged for padlocking in OFF positions with lock
provided.
• A shunt trip coil shall be provided to facilitate automatic tripping and local
manual tripping. The manual trip device shall be fitted with the means of
padlocking. The shunt trip coil shall be suitable for operation within a voltage
range of 70% to 110% of the rated AC power supply voltage.
• Electronic trip units shall comply with the requirements as specified in

Annexure- F (EMC /EMI Compatibility) of IEC 60947-2 or EN 60947-2.
• The trip unit shall be easily replaceable in the same MCCB without changing
the MCCB.
• The time delay on overload tripping shall be inversely proportional to the over

current up to a threshold value decided as per selectivity of protection.
• Handle position shall give positive indication of 'ON', ‘OFF’ or 'TRIPPED',

thus qualifying to disconnection as per IEC 60947-3 indicating true position of
all the contacts.
• The operating mechanism of MCCB's shall be Independent of the operating

speed of the over centre toggle and the MCCB shall be of current limiting type
and comprise of Quick make and Quick break switching. Contacts shall be
non- welding type. The operating mechanism should be trip-free and
provided with mechanical “ON", OFF" and "TRIPPED indicator.
• MCCB's shall have common field fittable auxiliaries for the entire range.
• Door interlock to prevent door being opened when breaker is ON and

Interlock to prevent breaker being switched ON when door is open.
4.4 Contactors
 Contactors shall comply with IS/IEC 60947-4-1 or EN 60947-4-1.
 Contactors shall be electro-magnetically controlled, double air-break type.
 Contactors shall be four-pole, triple-pole, double-pole or single-pole.
 Contactors shall be silver-faced or of proven material.
 The contactor should be modular in design with minimum inventory requirements

and built -in mechanically interlocked wherever required. They should be suitable
for the addition of auxiliary contacts and other electrical auxiliaries without any
compromise on the performance or the operation of the contactors. The
contactors from 4KW to 400KW shall be associated with the same 10 auxiliary
contact block range.
 The contactors for other applications shall have an un-interrupted rated duty and
utilization category of at least AC3 at 415V and 50 Hz. The contacts should be of
fast opening and fast closing type.
 The making and breaking capacity values of the contactors should be as follows
(as per IEC 60947-4)
For AC3 duty:
 Making capacity equal to or more than 10 Ie
 Braking Capacity equal to or more than 8 Ie,
For AC4 duty:
 Making capacity equal to or more than 12 Ie,
 Braking Capacity equal to or more than 10 Ie,
 The contactors should be capable of frequent switching and should operate

without de-rating at 60°C for AC3 applications. They should be climate proof.
The coil of the contactor should have class H insulation to support frequent
switching. Class F insulation is also acceptable with the consent of the site
Engineer.
 The rated voltage of the contactor and the rated insulation voltage shall be
690V. The rated Impulse voltage of the contactor should be at least 8 KV.
 Wherever DC control is required, the contactor should have wide range (0.7
to 1.25 Uc) DC coil with built in interference suppression as required.
 They should be capable of being integrated into automated system (PLCs)

without any interposing components in the minimum operating conditions.
4.5 Internal and Control Wiring
a. All equipment shall have adequate provision for the entry and termination of all
associated power and auxiliary cables.
b. 1100 V grade FRLS copper flexible wire of 1.5 sqmm shall be used for control
circuit and 6 sqmm for CT secondary circuit.
c. Wiring passing out to fully accessible positions shall be run in non-metallic low
smoke halogen free flexible tubes or conduits.
d. All internal wiring shall be neatly run and securely fixed in non-metallic cleats in
such a manner that, wherever practicable, wiring can be checked against
diagrams without removal of the cleats.
e. Bus-wires shall be fully insulated. Bus-wires terminals shall be fully accessible

from the point of entry to each enclosure. MCB and links shall be provided to
enable all control circuits within the Electrical Panels to be isolated from the bus-
wires.
f. All control circuits shall be protected by a MCB.
g. There shall be no joints in conductors between terminal points.
h. Terminations for terminals shall be of the crimped-on ring type. Terminations of

stranded conductors to clamp type terminals shall be of the crimped-on solid rod
type.
i. Identification markers shall be fitted to all wires and multicore cable tails within
enclosures in accordance with the diagram for apparatus concerned. Cable and
core makers shall be of insulation material, a glossy finish, be resistant to oil and
be incapable of supporting combustion. Numbers shall not be duplicated unless
the corresponding wires are directly in series or parallel
j. Different insulation colours shall be provided to distinguish the various circuits.

All wiring shall conform to the colour and ferrule codes to be approved by
Engineer.
5. Auxiliary Switches and Contacts
 Auxiliary switches provided for indication, protection, metering, control,

interlocking supervisory purposes shall be readily accessible at the front of the
Electrical Panels. Adequate secondary contacts shall be included to enable the
auxiliary switch to be wired to the fixed portion of the equipment.
 For each control compartment, spare auxiliary contacts with a minimum of two
NO and two NC contacts shall be provided and wired to suitably identify spare
terminals.
 Auxiliary contacts for all applications shall be rated at 240 V AC or 110 V DC with
contact rating of at least 6 A AC or DC and operating life of at-least one million on
on-load operations at 0.4 power factor inductive load.

6. Finishes
 Sheet Steel materials used in the construction of these units should have
undergone a rigorous rust proofing process comprising of alkaline degreasing, de-
scaling in dilute sulphuric acid and a recognized phosphating process. The steel
work shall then receive two dip-coats of oxide filler/primer before final painting.
Castings shall be scrupulously cleaned and fettled before receiving a similar oxide
primer coat. The manufacturer is required to have 7 tank treatment facility for this.
 All exposed metal surfaces, both internal and external, shall be thoroughly cleaned
of all dust, oil, grease, scale, rust or any other contaminants and shall be epoxy
powder coated immediately at the manufacturer's factory. In case of any doubt, the
painting procedure, paint samples and process shall be approved prior to
commencement of painting.
 The epoxy powder coating shall be not less than 80 micron thick and with colour
in accordance with BS 381C or BS 4800 as approved by Engineer.
 Every care shall be taken to protect the surface of the panel from damages during
transportation and installation. In case, there is any damage, the same shall be
made good by the method as approved by the site engineer, which may also
include change of the panel.
7. Nameplates and Labels
7.1 Name Plates
Each Electrical Panels shall have permanently attached to it in a conspicuous position

labels upon which shall be engraved or stamped with the manufacturer's name, type
and serial number, date of manufacture, designation of each Electrical Panels, details of
the loading and duty at which the item of the Electrical Panels has been designed to
operate. Such labels shall be of non- hygroscopic material.
7.2 Labels
 Labels shall be provided for every panel to describe the duty of or otherwise
identify every instrument, relay or item of control equipment mounted externally
and internally.
 The designation on these labels shall be clear and shall, where applicable,
incorporate the device number along with concise descriptive wording in
English.
 Externally fitted panel labels shall be of perspex or other approved transparent

plastic with letters and numbers rear engraved and filled with black.
 Labels shall not be less than 45 mm high. Lettering shall be of not less than 10
mm high. All labels shall be securely fixed to the panels by bolts and nuts.
 Circuit labels, one on the front of the panel and one on the rear of the panel
suitably engraved.
8. Other Provisions
 The Electrical Panels shall be provided with all necessary cable lugs etc., fixed in
positions on mounting plates and straps, to suit the types and directions of entry of
the cables as shown on the Drawings or as specified.
 Cable conductors for all circuits within the Electrical Panels shall be arranged in a
tidy manner and mechanically secured at regular intervals such that any
movement occurring to the conductors, either under normal operation conditions
(e.g. thermal expansion, vibration, etc.) or due to short circuit in any one of the
circuits, shall not cause any damage or short circuit to any healthy bare live parts
in the Electrical Panels.
 Each Electrical Panels shall be supplied complete with all operating handles jigs,
etc. required for the normal charging, closing, opening, racking in and out
operations of all circuit breakers of the Electrical Panels and shall be properly fixed
in a neat manner on a board with brass hooks inside the switch room/plant room
where the Electrical Panels is installed.
 Each Electrical Panels shall be provided with two nos of rubber insulating mats of
ribbed surface, complying with IS-15652 or equivalent international standard. The
mats shall be laid in front of and at the rear of the switch board. The rubber mats
shall be continuous sheets of minimum thickness of 10 mm, each of same length
as the switchboard and minimum width of not less than 1000 mm or the width of

the space between the fronts or back of the switchboard to the adjacent wall.
9. Special Condition
The Switchboard shall be complete with all components and accessories, which are
necessary or usual for their efficient performance and satisfactory maintenance under
the various operating and atmospheric conditions. Such parts shall be deemed to be
included within the scope of supply whether specifically included or not in the
specifications or in the tender schedules. The contractor shall not be eligible for any
extra charges for such accessories etc.
10. Spares Details
The manufacturer shall submit the list of spares which are required to be replaced as a
must change items along with interval.
11. Material and Manufacturing
 All similar items of the Electrical Panels and their component interchangeable.
 Spare parts shall be manufactured originals and shall fit all similar items of the
Electrical Panels. Where machining may be needed before fitting renewable parts,
the machining fits and the associated tolerances shall be shown on the drawings
accompanying the instruction manuals.
 All parts which are susceptible to wear or contaminated by dust shall enclosed in
dust-proof housings.
 The style and finish of the workmanship shall be consistent throughout the Works.
 Unless otherwise specified, Engineer shall decide the final colours for all paint
work and other finishes to be applied to the Electrical Panels.
12. Testing
Supplier shall submit MQP to DMRC indicating quality hold points for approval to DMRC.
Factory Acceptance Tests shall be carried out as per approved MQP plan.
13. Training
The contractor shall provide the following details

 Every marshalling box and PLC compartment of the Electrical Panels shall be
provided with a wiring diagram suitably treated to prevent deterioration from dirt or
age. The diagrams shall be drawn as if viewed from the point of access to the
enclosure, and shall be securely fastened to the inside of the access door of
that compartment.
 Bound booklet consisting of the details of the equipment
 Operating manual
 Warranty/DLP
 Purchase specification of maintenance spares
 List of staff trained
 Details of service centre

14. Indicative List of Items to be Included in FAT Plan for Electrical Panels
S. No. Description
1 Insulation Tests (Phase-Phase, Phase- Neutral, Phase-Earth,

Neutral-Earth)
2 High Voltage Test
3 Continuity test
4 Functional Test
5 BOQ Check
6 Paint Shade & Thickness
7 Dimensional & Foundation Checks
(This list is an indicative List for the tests / inspections to be conducted during FAT of
ACDB Panels. However, the detailed FAT plan needs to be developed for the specific
ACDB Panel based on approved GADs and Contract Specifications and as per the tests
defined in IEC 61439.)
Contract- DE-04 – Particular Specification- Annexure-3 (Inverter Specification) of Chapter 8A
ANNEXURE-3
SPECIFICATIONS OF INVERTERS FOR

RECEIVING SUBSTATION (RSS)

7th Floor, B-Wing, Metro Bhawan, Fire Brigade Lane,
Barakhamba Road, New Delhi –110 001.

1. Detailed Description of the Equipment ..................................................................... 3
2. Governing Specifications ......................................................................................... 3
2.1 Standards .............................................................................................................. 3
2.2 Abbreviations ......................................................................................................... 3
3. Technical Requirements .......................................................................................... 4
3.1 Operation Philisophy ............................................................................................. 4
3.2 Equipment Environment ........................................................................................ 5
4. Special Conditions ................................................................................................... 5
5. Maintenance & Life .................................................................................................. 5
6. Data Sheet ............................................................................................................... 5
7. Test Sheet ................................................................................................................ 9
8. Drawings of Inverter ............................................................................................... 12

1. DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE EQUIPMENT AND ITS APPLICATION IN

DMRC – INVERTERS FOR RECEIVING SUB STATION (RSS)
The substation automation system works on 110 V DC and 230 V AC single

phase supply. 110 V DC shall be given to all Control and Protection relay,
Ethernet switch and associated equipment through the three nos. battery
charger (two main + one standby) and two nos. of 110 V battery set. 230 V AC
supply to substation Automation equipment like servers, gateway printer, HMI
and other associated equipments shall be given through the inverter.
Input supply to the inverter shall be 110 V DC from the existing battery sets
available in the RSS. These batteries shall be charged by battery charger in
float mode, as well as in boost mode. During normal operation input supply to
the inverter shall be taken from the battery set and inverter will give 230 V AC
supply without any interruption to Substation Automation equipments, in case of
the failure of one inverter second hot standby inverter shall take full load. In the
event of power failure, necessary safeguards software shall be built for proper
shut down and restart.
2.1 Standards
The inverter shall satisfy the following requirements and shall also comply with
standards in force when the inverters are manufactured, particularly as
mentioned in the following table (Unless otherwise stipulated in the
specifications, the latest version of the following Standards shall be applicable):
Standard # Description
IEC 62040 Uninterruptible power systems (UPS)
2.2 Abbreviations
 IEC – International Electro Technical Council

 HMI – Human Machine Interface
 RSS – Receiving Sub Station
3. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1 Operation Philosophy
The inverter shall comprise of following components/equipment along with

100% standby inverter with same set of components/equipment:
- one Inverter
- one static bypass switch
- one Maintenance Bypass switch
- one AC output protection circuit breaker
During normal operation inverter will draw power from battery and load on the
inverters will be shared equally by both the inverters. In case of failure of one
inverter, the second standby inverter shall take over the complete load. Further,
in case of failure of both the inverters, power will be supplied to load by
thyristors switches automatically, without breaking, on the stand by supply
made through distribution board.
For maintenance purpose or in case of failure of both the static switches, the
supply of the connected equipment will be ensured by Maintenance bypass
Switch with the following operations:
 Automatically in case of standby supply static switch failure. This transfer

shall be made with a maximum delay of 20ms. In such a case, the coming
back to the normal situation, after repair, shall be only manual without
breaking.
 Manually for maintenance purpose. This transfer shall be made without

breaking in the both ways.

3.2 Equipment Environment
The following are the minimum requirements for inverter equipment to be

installed in below mentioned class of environment:-
a) Ambient Temperature- as per GS
b) Maximum Temperature- as per GS
c) Relative Humidity- as per GS
d) Chemical Environment Factor- 3C3 as per IEC 60721-3-3
e) Air Quality- Polluted and dusty, Suspended Particulate Matter 360-540

mg/m3 as per GS
f) Electric Noise- Impulse 1kV, 1.2/50 rise/decay, 500 Ω source impedance,

0.5 J source energy
g) Radio & High Frequency as Class A.
4. Special Conditions
Only industrial grade components shall be used in the inverters to ensure the
proper working of equipment under temperature range of -5◦C to 85◦C. All
electronic cards shall confirm to environment factor class 3C3 as
per IEC 60721-3-3 for highly Polluted area. Cards must have conformal coating
confirming with IEC 60815 - 1996 and tested for H2S, SO2 and mixed gas tests
as per IEC 60068 - 1 & 2.
5. Maintenance & Life
The inverters should be designed for best service life in the industry for all types
of installation & under prescribed environmental conditions.
6. Data Sheet
The Inverter shall comply with the following characteristics:
Standards IEC 62040

Type Indoor
Rated power (at cos  = 0.8) KVA 3.0
Input voltage V 110V DC
Input voltage variations % +10, -15
Bypass Input V 230V AC
Bypass voltage variations % +10, -15
Bypass frequency Hz 50
Bypass frequency variations % 5
Output voltage V 230 AC
Output voltage variations % 1
Output frequency Hz 50
Output frequency tolerance % 0.5
Harmonic content of output voltage % 3
System efficiency % 90
IP protection 31
Cable entry Bottom
Cabinet Panel Color RAL 7032

Static Bypass Electronic Thyristor

Switch
Manual Bypass MCB

Control and Monitoring Signal for SCADA
Following control and monitoring signals from the inverter shall be required on
SCADA
Sl. No. Origin Information
On Indication
Off Indication
Inverter Fail
1. Inverter-1 Inverter Static Bypass
Inverter Manual Bypass
Input Voltage
Output Voltage
On Indication
Off Indication
Inverter Fail
2. Inverter-2 Inverter Static Bypass
Inverter Manual Bypass
Input Voltage
Output Voltage

7. Test Sheet
All type tests and routine tests as per relevant IEC standards specified in
technical specifications shall be carried out. For type tests, type test reports of
not more than 5 years may be submitted.
S. No TYPE TEST Description Remarks
1 Cable and Interconnection Check All the Type Tests

to be conducted
2 Control Devices
either at
3 Protective Devices manufacturer’s

laboratory or at
4 Auxiliary Devices any third party
laboratory (NABEL
5 Supervisory, Monitoring, Signaling Devices
accredited). In
Auto transfer to bypass / isolation mode & back to case tests are
6
normal conducted at
manufacturer’s
Manual transfer to bypass / isolation mode and back
7 laboratory, third
to normal
party (NABEL
8 No Load accredited)
witness shall be
9 Full Load arranged for.
10 Frequency Slew Rate
11 Parallel redundant Inverter fail
12 Transfer test to bypass
13 Steady state input voltage tolerance

14 Input frequency tolerance
15 Input inrush current
16 Harmonic distortion of input current
17 Power factor
18 Efficiency
19 Standby generator compatibility
20 Normal Mode - No Load
21 Normal Mode - Full Load
22 DC voltage component
23 Current division across paralleled Inverter
24 Output Overvoltage Test
25 Periodic output voltage variation test (modulation)
26 Overload - Normal Mode
27 Overload - Stored Energy Mode
28 Fault clearing capability - Normal Mode
29 Fault clearing capability- Stored Energy Mode
Dynamic Performance - Normal to Bypass Mode -

30
Overload
31 Dynamic Performance - Step Load to Normal Mode

Dynamic Performance - Step Load to Stored Energy

32
Mode
33 Normal Mode - Full Load
34 Stored Energy Mode - Full Load
35 Dynamic Performance - Step Load to Normal Mode
Dynamic Performance - Step Load to Stored Energy

36
Mode
37 Battery Ripple Current
38 Restart Test
39 Repetitive shock during transportation
40 Free-fall during transportation
Storage in dry heat, damp heat and cold

41
environments
Operation in dry heat, damp heat and cold

42
environments
43 Acoustic Noise
44 Safety
45 Electromagnetic Compatibility

8. DRAWINGS OF INVERTER
a) General Arrangement of Inverter


b) Single Line Diagram of Inverter

Contract- DE-04 – Particular Specification- Annexure-4 (VRV Specification) of Chapter 8A
ANNEXURE-4 VRV SPECIFICATIONS
1. Detailed Description and Application in DMRC
1.1 Variable Refrigerant Flow (VRF) type of Air- conditioning system is to be provided
at DMRC premises. Generally, the control room of RSS shall be air- conditioned.
1.2 The scope of work related to Variable Refrigerant Flow Air-conditioning System
shall generally comprise of but not limited to the following :
 Design
 Manufacturing
 Testing at manufacturer’s works
 Supply and storage
 Installation
 Site testing and commissioning
 Training of DMRC staff
1.3 The VRF type air-conditioning system shall generally consist of:
 Outdoor and Indoor units along with refrigerant piping, its nitrile insulation with
aluminium cladding and cable tray / raceway. The cable tray /raceway used for
refrigerant pipe and electrical cables will be a part of the VRF system and no
separate payment is to be made. Each refrigerant circuit from Outdoor Unit to
Indoor Unit will run on separate cable tray.
 Air distribution system with ducting as per Industry standard Practice.
 Drain Piping.
 Electrical works.
 Materials and components not specifically stated in the specifications and/or

bill of materials or noted on the drawings but which are necessary for
satisfactory installation and operation of the system. No separate payment is
to be made for such items.

 Polymer coating on all copper parts which are directly exposed to environment
and Conformal coating on PCBs for protection against corrosion from ambient
air pollution. The anti-corrosion coating on ‘U’ bends as well as fins of
condenser / evaporator coils, copper pipeline brazing joints, electronic PCBs,
shall be ensured and confirmed. To ensure, proper anti-corrosion coating,
test report for the salt spray test shall be submitted. The contractor to ensure
provision for re-renewal / touch up of anti-corrosion coating periodically
particularly after each repair related to gas leakage.
 The electronic PCBs shall comply with IEC 60571 / EN50155, particularly dry
heat test, salt mist test, dust & sand test the contractor to submit type test
report for the same. Also all electronic PCBs shall have protection against
direct spikes & surges in the power supply inbuilt as defined in IEC 60571.
 Proper routing / layout / tagging of the control cables inside outdoor / indoor
units shall be ensured, the same shall be verified during the FAT at vendors
premises.
The VRF type air-conditioning system shall comply with standards mentioned
particularly in the table below unless otherwise stipulated in the specifications.
The latest version of standards shall be applicable.
ASHRAE-90.1-2010 or its latest standard and guidelines.
UL-94- V0
Indian Electricity Rules- 2005
ASTM B 280
Japanese Industrial Standard JIS H :3300
ISHRAE Guidelines for Testing and Rating of VRF systems
3. Requirements :-

The VRF system shall be designed to meet the following minimum requirements:-
3.1 Design Parameters
The Contractor should design the heat load calculation based on following design
Parameter including heat load due to control room orientation wall, glass and roof
area.
The following parameters shall be considered for the design:-
a) Outside Conditions for Cooling (as per GS)
DB WB
Ambient
47.2℃ As per ISHRAE published data
Temperature
b) Inside Conditions
Inside temperature 24 ± 2 °C
Condition (Relative humidity not exceeding 60%)
c) Fresh Air: As per ASHRAE/ISHRAE.
d) Lighting Load: 1.2 W/Sq ft.
e) Ducting (For Air conditioning)
Maximum Air velocity 460 mtrs/min
Maximum Friction 1 cm WG per 100 mtrs run
Maximum velocity at exhaust air grille 152 mtrs /min
3.2 Functional Requirements
3.2.1 Variable Refrigerant Flow
The Variable Refrigerant Flow (VRF) System should be air cooled, consisting of
modular condensing outdoor units connected to multiple indoor units. Each indoor

unit shall have the capability of individual set point control. Each modular
condensing unit should have inverter compressor (minimum 2 compressors for 18
HP and above units) to obtain 10% to 100%step less capacity control to match the
air-conditioning load. The VRF unit shall be capable of operating within a wide
range of temperatures. The system shall be designed for automatic cyclic
operation for a bank of VRF units with settable time feature including providing all
related microprocessor, cabling. The refrigerant used should be environmental
friendly and latest. The Outdoor units and Indoor units shall be in (N+1)
configuration where N is required number of unit as per design. The manufacturer
shall take a note of the ambient air pollution prevailing in Delhi/NCR region and
shall provide proven protection against corrosion to all the components of VRF
module. The VRF air conditioning system shall consist of the following sub-
systems:-
3.2.1.1 Outdoor Unit
The outdoor unit shall be a factory assembled unit housed in a sturdy weather
proof casing constructed from rust-proofed mild steel panels coated with a baked
enamel finish. There should be no scaling, corrosion or any other physical
deformation on the body of Outdoor unit. The outdoor unit shall be modular in
design and thickness of the sheet used for manufacturing the body shall be such
that it shall not deform during handling and may use corrugation to strengthen the
body structure. It should be possible to place the ODU’s side by side. The ODU
must deliver the rated capacity (within the acceptable tolerance as specified in
ISHRAE Guidelines for Testing and Rating of VRF systems) at outdoor ambient
as per ISHRAE. The minimum IEER should be as below:-
ODU Capacity IEER (Minimum)
All capacities 21
The outdoor unit should be able to operate even in case of breakdown of one of
the compressor (for 18 HP and above units).The Outdoor unit shall at least have
the following sub-components:-

 Compressor
The compressor shall be highly efficient and capable of capacity modulation

with inverter design
 Heat Exchanger
The heat exchanger shall be constructed with copper tubes mechanically

bonded to aluminium fins to form a cross fin coil. The heat exchanger and
condenser fins must be coated with Anti-corrosive treatment which should be
done during manufacturing stage itself.
 Fan Motor Speed Control
The condensing unit fan motors to have at least two speed operation to
maintain constant head pressure control at all ambient temperatures and
modes of operation.
 Refrigerant Circuit
The refrigerant circuit shall include an accumulator, liquid and gas shut off
valves and a solenoid valves or pulse width modulation valve. The
equipment must have inbuilt refrigerant stabilization control for proper
refrigerant distribution
 Oil Recovery System
Each unit shall be equipped with an oil separator to ensure stable operation
with long refrigerant piping.
3.2.1.2 Indoor Unit
Indoor unit shall be Wall mounted/Ceiling mounted/floor mounted/ AHU (as per
requirement) with metallic body, each complete with coil, pre-filter, etc. including
necessary steel supporting structure. Indoor unit should have flexibility for duct
extension (if required). CFM shall be as below:
IDU Capacity CFM (Minimum)

1.5TR 500
2 TR 600
2.5 TR 1000
4.75 TR 1700
It shall have electronic control valve to control refrigerant flow rate in response to
load variations of the room. The fan shall be dual suction multi blade type and
statically and dynamically balanced to ensure low noise and vibration free
operation. The indoor unit should be designed such that in case of failure/ trip of
one indoor unit, the working of ODU and other indoor units should not be affected.
The indoor unit fan shall be direct driven. The indoor unit casing shall be fully
insulated and sealed to prevent condensation. Each indoor unit shall have the
capability of individual set point control. The indoor unit should be provided with
corded remote control as a standard accessory and a multifunctional compact
touch screen remote controller should be also provided for remote control to N+1
units. The address of the indoor unit shall be set automatically in case of
individual and group control.
 Electronic Expansion Valve
Each indoor unit shall be fitted with an electronic expansion valve to control
the refrigerant flow in response to the load variations in the room. The
electronic expansion valve is to be controlled via a computerized control
sensing the return air temperature, refrigerant inlet and outlet temperatures.
During the cooling operation the electronic expansion valve shall control the
refrigerant superheat degree at the evaporator.
 Cooling Coils
Shall be direct expansion, constructed from copper tubes expanded into

aluminium fins to form a rigid mechanical bond.
 Unit Control Board

It shall Include in the indoor unit a printed circuit board complete with,
address switches for a variety of operation controls, emergency operation
switch and fault / operation indication LED’s. The fan motors shall be
thermally protected.
3.2.1.3 Centralized System Remote Controller
A multifunctional compact touch screen centralized system remote controller shall

be provided with the system. The System Controller shall provide proven air
conditioning management system to give complete control of VRF air conditioning
equipment. It should be user friendly. It should be able to control at least (N+1)
indoor units connected at a station. The centralized system remote controller shall
perform the following minimum functions:
a) Starting/stopping of Air conditioners as a zone or group or individual units.
b) Temperature setting for each indoor unit or zone.
c) Switching between temperature control modes, switching of fan speed and

direction of airflow, enabling/disabling of individual remote controller operation.
d) The address of the indoor unit shall be set automatically in case of individual
and group control.
e) Monitoring of operation status such as operation mode & temperature setting

of individual indoor units, maintenance information, trouble-shooting
information.
f) Scheduling of both Indoor and Outdoor units as per the requirement.
g) The controller shall be user friendly. A provision of wiring the centralized

system controller to the indoor unit, shall be made.
h) In case of power fluctuation or power failure, the addressing and other settings
such as temperature of individual indoor units should not be affected. Alpha-
numeric addressing of each indoor unit should be possible to facilitate the
location of individual indoor unit.
3.2.1.4 Refrigerant Pipework

 All interconnecting pipe-work between the condensing unit & indoor units shall
have quality seamless copper tubes with brazed connections and the
appropriate distribution joints and headers shall be used. The piping should be
routed at site in such a manner, that brazed joints in the Refrigeration Piping
are kept to a minimum. All interconnecting piping, joints and U bends within
the condensing unit shall be painted with two coats of clear transparent
coating of suitable material for protection against corrosion from ambient air
pollution.
 Each coat shall have dry film thickness of 35 micron or more. The coating shall
be strong, flexible and durable. It shall have good adhesive and abrasion
resistance. It shall be resistant to moisture, UV, acid alkali and other
chemicals.
 All suction & liquid lines of the Refrigerant pipe work shall be insulated with
Nitrile rubber /expanded polyethylene pipe sections as specified to avoid
condensation.
 The exposed piping insulation shall be painted with U/V paint. The refrigerant
pipe shall be thermally insulated by proven materials having low thermal
conductivity, high mechanical strength, non-combustible, resistance to Fungi,
ozone, UV and any other environmental pollutant. Moulded tee joints of
thermal insulating material shall be used at bends.The exposed piping
insulation shall be painted with U/V paint.
 The refrigerant piping shall be extendable minimum 165 m with 50 m level

without any oil trap. Distribution refrigeration pipe joints and headers shall be
installed in an appropriate orientation to enable correct distribution of
refrigerant. The Distribution joints shall be factory/site insulated. All pipe-work
must be kept clean and free from contamination to prevent breakdown of the
system. All pipe ends shall be kept sealed until immediately prior to making a
joint.
 Refrigerant charge must be calculated based on the actual length of the

refrigerant pipe work. The refrigerant charging process must be carried out

with an appropriate charging station and under supervision of manufacturer or

his representative.
 The insulated refrigerant piping and electrical conduit shall run on GI tray
properly supported by GI rods. The exposed tray on terrace shall be covered
by openable GI covers. The refrigerant pipe from each ODU should run on a
separate cable tray.
 The OD & wall thickness of copper refrigerant piping shall be depending on the
site conditions/VRF vendor recommendation. Test certificates for copper pipes
used in the refrigerant circuit (as per JIS H 3300) from an accredited laboratory
should be submitted.
3.2.1.5 Drain piping
The indoor units shall be connected to vertical drainage insulated GI pipe. The
pipes shall be laid in proper slope for efficient drainage of condensate water.
Drain pipes carrying condensate water shall be insulated with 6 mm Nitrile rubber
having a ‘K’ value of 0.036W/mk at a mean temperature of 20 0C and a minimum
density of 55 Kg/Sqm. The joints shall be properly sealed with synthetic glue to
ensure proper bonding of the ends.
3.3 Noise Level
The Noise level of outdoor unit shall not be more than 68 dB (A) at normal
operation. The Noise Level of indoor unit shall not be more than 42 dB (A) for non
ductable type and not more than 49 dB (A) for ductable/AHU unit type. The noise
level shall be measured at a distance of 1m away (horizontally) and 1.5m above
ground.
3.4 Input Voltage & Frequency
All the outdoor unit shall be suitable for operation with 415 V ±10%, 50±3% Hz,
3Ph 4 wire AC supply whereas all indoor units should be with 230 V± 10%, 50Hz
±3 % Single Phase supply or 415 V ±10%, 50±3% Hz, 3Ph 4wire.
4. Additional Requirements

4.1 The power/control/communication cable between indoor and outdoor units shall
run in GI conduits or armoured cable to be used.
4.2 The insulated refrigerant piping and cable between indoor and outdoor unit shall
run in a Galvanized Steel raceway/Cable tray with proper supporting
arrangement.
4.3 All galvanized support beams, galvanized legs, galvanized hangers, anchor bolts,
vibration isolators, and ductworks shall be provided for the installation of the units,
assembly and its sub-assembly.
4.4 The VRF type air conditioning units shall be mounted on vibration isolators and
installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendation such that no
disturbing vibration or noise is being transmitted to the nearby structure.
4.5 The centralized system Controller shall be located in a properly sized box with
lock and key facility along with its battery/adapter unit. The power supply cable for
the controller shall be taken in a conduit from the nearest 230V socket. A
guidance manual of the controller shall be located in this unit.
4.6 Joints in refrigerant piping should be minimized. Half Hard/Hard copper pipes up
to dia. 18 mm should be bended and not use elbow at the locations having bends
of 90 deg.
5. Safety
5.1 All necessary safety devices shall be provided in the indoor and outdoor units to
ensure the safety operation of the system. The design of the safety system shall
be such that the equipment is protected and defect of one unit shall not lead to
consequential damage to any other units. The safety and protection design shall
be submitted with the offer and shall be a part of the training course to DMRC
official.
5.2 The following safety devices shall be part of the outdoor unit:
a) High Pressure Switch
b) Low Pressure Switch

c) Fan Motor Safety thermostat
d) Over Current Relay
e) Fuse
f) Overload protection
g) Protection for indoor fan motor.
5.3 All the material used in the manufacturing of VRF system shall be fire retardant.
The indoor unit shall be in conformance to UL-94 guidelines. The manufacturer
shall submit UL compliance certificate with the offer.
6. Energy Efficiency
6.1 Only the best manufacturing practices i.e. the units with maximum IEER as per
ISHRAE will be accepted. The contractor shall study the best available designs
and offer the best IEER available in industry. However, the VRF unit should
provide a minimum IEER of 21.
7. Maintenance and Life
7.1 The service life of the VRF system shall be at least 20 years, with average 16
hours working per day during the year.
7.2 The manufacturer shall submit the list of those items whose life does not match
with the service life of VRF. The life of such spares shall be advised with a
certificate from the original manufacturer of the spares. The firm shall supply
purchase specification of these items.
7.3 The manufacturer should also submit Annual Maintenance cost rates for the full
service life of the system.
7.4 The manufacturer shall provide free service and guarantee for 24 months from the
date of taking over the metro station by the purchaser.
7.5 The manufacturer will submit an undertaking that the spare parts will be available
for the entire service life of the product.
8. Special Condition

8.1 Quality Assurance and Controls: The Contractor’s Management Systems shall
emphasize quality assurance and controls. The programme shall be adequate to
ensure an acceptable level of quality of the equipment supplied. The concept of
total quality assurance shall be based on the principle that quality is a basic
responsibility of the Contractor’s organization, and shall be visible by:
a) Firm procurement and job performance specifications.
b) Firm procedures for transmission of information and data to their

Subcontractors and ensuring their compliance.
c) Adequate testing to ensure repetitive product conformity to design

requirements and Total programme of surveillance and verification of physical
performance and configuration accountability.
d) Adequate records shall be kept by the Contractor to provide evidence of

quality and accountability. These records shall include results of inspections,
tests, process controls, certification of processes and personnel, discrepant
material, and other quality control requirements.
e) Complaint Handling and commitment towards customer satisfaction.
8.2 The manufacturer shall ensure use of best manufacturing practice like quality of
bends, no sharp corners, and no metallic parts with sharp edges, use of quality
gasket at appropriate loss to damp vibrations and sealing etc.
8.3 The manufacturer shall study the very heavy environmental pollution data
prevailing near the RSS where its equipment is going be installed. The
manufacturer shall take adequate precaution either during manufacturing or
installation to prevent any damage to the equipment or loss of life arising due to
prevailing pollution level during its entire life.
9. Testing
9.1 The unit shall be tested for capacity and IEER as per ISHRAE at manufactures
premises or at an accredited laboratory

9.2 The manufacturer shall also submit the deration graph for different ambient
conditions in the performance of their VRF system starting from the maximum
ambient temperature conditions as specified in this specification.
9.3 Before delivery, owner/ their representative reserve the right to witness the test in
presence of tenderers and manufacturer’s representative.
9.4 The manufacturer shall submit Installation guidelines duly approved by Engineer-
in-charge. The manufacturer shall ensure compliance of installation guidelines
and shall sign the installation certificate before commissioning of the plant to start.
9.5 After complete installation of refrigerant piping, it shall be pre-pressure tested and
repaired if necessary and further pressure tested to 3,800 Pa, to hold for a
minimum 24 hours with dry nitrogen prior to insulating the joints.
9.6 After satisfactory testing, the refrigerant pipe shall be evacuated and dehydrated
to (- 755 MM HG) and held for one to four hours depending on the pipe length.
9.7 The FAT plan for VRF equipment shall be as per Annexure-P.
10. Training
10.1 The contractor shall ensure training of DMRC staff as decided by DMRC at DMRC
workplace or at his workplace as considered necessary.
10.2 On completion of installation, the manufacturer shall supply two sets of well bound
handing over manuals duly approved by Consultants/Engineer-in-charge. Each
set shall include:-
 As Built Drawings.
 Do’s and Don’ts for the maintenance and operating staff.
 Working details of VRF system.
 Operating manual.
 Extracts of the warrant/DLP.
 Details of service center.
 List of staff trained on the said design of the VRF.

 The first page of the booklet shall be signed by the manufacture, contractor
and DMRC Engineer.
 Soft copy of the entire documents.

Annexure-P
FAT PLAN FOR VRF Equipment (Minimum Parameters)
PHYSICAL PARAMETERS TO BE CHECKED
COMPONENT PARAMETER Requirement Remarks
Weather proof casing

constructed from rust-
Casing proofed mild steel panels
coated with a baked enamel
1. Outdoor Unit finish
Minimum 2 no. variable

Compressor compressor for 18HP and
above.
Component Electronic Expansion Valve

2. Indoor Unit
Insulation fully insulated and sealed
The Condenser fins must be

3. Heat Exchanger Construction coated with Anti-corrosive
treatment.
Component Accumulator
Refrigerant
4. Component Liquid and gas shut off valve
Circuit
Component Solenoid valves
Oil Recovery
5. Component Oil Separator
System

Component High Pressure Switch
Component Low Pressure Switch
Fan Motor Safety

6. Safety Devices Component
Thermostat
Component Over Current Relay
Component Fuse
7. Fan Motor Component Thermal protection relay.
TECHNICAL PARAMETERS TO BE CHECKED
Sr
Component Parameter Requirement Remark
No.
100% cooling capacity at Outdoor

ambient temperature as per ISHRAE
Cooling
(within the acceptable tolerance as
capacity
specified ISHRAE Guidelines for
Testing and Rating of VRF systems)
1. Outdoor Unit
68 dB(A)at normal operation
Noise level measured horizontally 1m away and
1.5m above ground.
IEER As per ISHRAE Guideline Conditions
NOISE Level < 42dB for non ductable

2. Indoor Unit Noise level
type and <49 dB for ductable/AHU

unit
Refrigerant Extendable minimum 165 m with 50

3. Length
Piping m level without any oil trap.
At least two speed operation to

Speed
4. Fan Motor maintain constant head pressure
Control
control at all ambient temperatures
Starting/ Stopping of Air-conditioners

Operation
as a zone or group or individual unit
Temperature setting for each indoor

Operation
unit or zone
Switching between temperature

Operation
control modes
Operation Switching of fan speed

Centralized
Operation Control direction of air-flow
5. Remote
Controller
Enabling/disabling of individual
Operation
remote controller operation
Operation Monitoring of Operation status
Operation Maintenance information
Operation Trouble Shooting information
Temperature setting of individual

Operation
indoor units
Note: Additional tests may be conducted based on the requirement of the employer’s
representative.

Contract- DE-04 – Particular Specification- Annexure-5 (Dry Type transformer)
DMRC Electrical Standards & Design Wing DMES-T/0005
SPECIFICATIONS FOR DRY TYPE THREE PHASE 33 kV/415 V AUXILIARY Revision-2

TRANSFORMER
Dated: 10th October,
2020
DMRC ELECTRICAL STANDARDS &

DESIGN WING (DESDW)
SPECIFICATION NO.
DMES- T0005/ DMRC-E-TR-TRANSF-05
SPECIFICATIONS FOR DRY TYPE THREE PHASE 33

kV/415 V AUXILIARY TRANSFORMER
Issued on:
Date Stage
10th October 2020 Revision - 2

Page 1 of 24
DMRC/Contract DE-04 /Vol-4/PS


TRANSFORMER
2020
Barakhamba Road, New Delhi –110 001.
Previous Record of specification
Stage Date
Draft -1 04/02/2015
Draft - 2 05/09/2016
Approved (Nov 2016) 18/11/2016
Revision-1 14/08/2018
Revision-2 10/10/2020
Page 2 of 24


TRANSFORMER
2020
Table of Contents
1. Detailed Description of the equipment and its application in DMRC ....................... 5
2. GOVERNING SPECIFICATIONS: ........................................................................... 6
2.1 Standards ........................................................................................................... 6

2.2 Abbreviations ..................................................................................................... 6
3. Technical requirements: ........................................................................................... 7
3.1 Accessories ........................................................................................................ 8

3.2 Temperature Protection ..................................................................................... 8
3.3 Transformer Values............................................................................................ 9
3.4 Transformer Cubicle........................................................................................... 9
3.5 Terminal arrangements .................................................................................... 11
3.6 Painting ............................................................................................................ 12
3.7 Insulation of windings ....................................................................................... 12
3.8 Name Plate Details .......................................................................................... 13
3.8.1 Rating Plate fitted to the transformer ......................................................... 13
3.8.2 Rating Plate fitted to the transformer enclosure ......................................... 14
3.9 Capitalization and Penalty ................................................................................ 14
3.10 Transient overvolatge protectons:-................................................................ 15
3.11 Transportation and Packaging:- .................................................................... 15
4. MAINTENANCE & LIFE ......................................................................................... 16
5. DATA SHEET - AUXILIARY TRANSFORMERS .................................................... 17
5.1 AUXILIARY TRANSFORMER 200 KVA, 500 kVA and 630 KVA ......................... 17
5.2 AUXILIARY TRANSFORMER 1000kVA, 1600 kVA and 2000 kVA .................... 19
5.3 AUXILIARY TRANSFORMER 2500/3000 kVA, 3150 kVA and 3150/4000 kVA . 21
6. TEST SHEET ........................................................................................................... 23
6.1 AUXILIARY TRANSFORMERS .......................................................................... 23

6.2 Partial Discharge Test ........................................................................................ 23
Page 3 of 24


TRANSFORMER
2020
6.3 Environment, Climate & Fire behaviour Class ..................................................... 23

6.4 MEASUREMENT OF SOUND LEVEL (SPECIAL TEST) .................................... 24
6.5 TEMPERATU RERISE TEST:-……………………………… ………………………24
6.6 Chopped wave Lightning Impulse test for Line terminals (LIC) (Special test):-
24
Page 4 of 24


TRANSFORMER
2020

DMRC - 33 KV / 415 V, 3 PHASE AUXILIARY TRANSFORMERS
The Auxiliary Transformers, also referred to as Auxiliary Station Transformers are
required to supply the power requirement at 415 / 230 V of various electrical
equipments, systems and appliances. Mainly these comprise of power required for
lighting, fans, air-conditioning, Lifts, Escalators, Pumps, Signage boards, control
and monitoring circuits, battery chargers, space heaters in the switchgear / panels
etc.
This specification defines the main technical characteristics required for the 33000
/ 415 V dry type transformers to be used in auxiliary substations (ASS), auxiliary
main substations (AMS) or as required. This specification is applicable for the
transformers of power rating of following capacity which are generally used in
DMRC. This specification may be used for any other capacity in this range:
Transformer Capacity
AN (Air Natural) AF (Air Forced)
200 kVA N/A
315 kVA N/A
400 kVA N/A
500 kVA N/A
630 kVA N/A
800 kVA N/A
1000 kVA N/A
1600 kVA N/A
1600 kVA 2000 kVA
2000 kVA N/A
2000 kVA 2500 kVA
2500 kVA N/A
2500 kVA 3000 kVA
3150 kVA N/A
3150 kVA 4000 kVA
The transformer offered shall be complete in all respects with all parts and
accessories necessary for their efficient operation in sub stations. All such parts &
accessories shall be deemed to be within the scope of this specification whether
specifically mentioned or not.
Page 5 of 24


TRANSFORMER
2020
2. GOVERNING SPECIFICATIONS:
The dry type auxiliary transformer shall conform to IEC 60076-11 with specified
voltage as 33kV/415V.
2.1 STANDARDS
The transformer shall satisfy the following requirements and shall also comply with
standards in force when the transformers are manufactured, particularly which are
in the following table (Unless otherwise stipulated in the specifications, the latest
version of the following Standards shall be applicable): -
Power transformers - Insulation levels, dielectric tests and
IEC 60076-3
external clearances in air
IEC 60076-11 Dry-type power transformers
IEC 60076-1 General power transformers,
IEC 60076-5 Ability to withstand short-circuit,
IEC 60076-12 Loading guide for dry-type power transformers,
IS 2026 - 5 Ability to withstand short circuit
2.2 ABBREVIATIONS
 IEC – International Electro technical Council
 IS - Indian Standard
 BS – British Standard
 ASS – Auxiliary Sub Station
 GI – Galvanized Iron
Page 6 of 24


TRANSFORMER
2020
3. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS: The details and specifications applicable to

three phase 33 kV / 415 V auxiliary transformer are given below -
(i) The primary and the secondary windings shall be capable of withstanding
a symmetrical three-phase short-circuit regardless of the tapping selected.
The short circuit level at secondary side for various ratings of transformers
shall be as specified in the data sheet.
(ii) The terminals shall be of the 36 kV type. Conductors insulated at 36 kV

realize delta connection on primary side by using rigid conductors with
suitable insulation sleeves. The secondary neutral shall be solidly earthed.
(iii) This equipment shall satisfy all the requirements for interchangeability,
interlock ability and functional control applicable to this type of equipment.
It shall use a technology and components identical to those of the
equipment to be installed in the Auxiliary sub stations.
(iv) The Transformer shall be "Enclosed Dry Type Transformer" as per clause
3.3 of IEC 60076-11:2004, or as per latest updated version.
Characteristics :
Climatic conditions indoor operation

Ambient temperature for design 500C
Operation Continuous
Windings Aluminium for more than 200
kVA rating and Copper for 200
kVA& less rating
Primary line voltage (across phases) 33 kV
Secondary voltage, off-load 415 V
Primary Insulation rated voltage 36 kV
Frequency 50 Hz
Rated short duration separate source AC 70 kV (for HV winding), 3 kV
withstand voltage (r.m.s.) (for LV winding)
Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage 170 kV
(peak value) (for HV winding)
Connections Dyn11
Cooling Air natural/Air forced
Page 7 of 24


TRANSFORMER
2020
Off load tap link (Not Required for 200 KVA 0, +2.5%, +5%
or less rating transformers)
Overload Conditions At least 10% for 2 Hours
Class of insulation for all windings F Class for HV and LV winding
Climatic/Environmental/Fire Class C1/E2/F1 (IEC 60076-11)
The magnetic circuit shall be in low-loss oriented-grain silicon steel sheet.
3.1 ACCESSORIES
 Installed on rollers/ base channels
 Lifting rings / Lifting Eyes
 2 Nameplates - (1) on transformer, (2) on transformer enclosure
 Grounding terminal of Transformer frame, enclosure and Core
 Limit switches for enclosure doors as required
 Danger plates as per safety rules
 off circuit tap links with protection covers
 Fans with wiring upto scanner box, if applicable
 All the wires, control cables used shall be of FRLSH type, except in
underground stations where it shall be FRLSZH type
The connection with different terminals of transformer shall be through C type or

suitable connector for sufficient clearances from transformer windings HV
connections of transformer shall be connected through insulated cables. HV
terminals shall have suitable arrangement to provide sufficient clearance to 33 kV
class cables from transformer windings and transformer enclosure as per IEC
60076-3.
3.1.1 All hardware like nuts, bolts, studs used should be of stainless steel.
3.1.2 The core shall be connected to earth.
3.2 TEMPERATURE PROTECTION
3.2.1 Transformers shall be fitted with a temperature protection system that allows
winding temperatures to be monitored.
This shall consist of two sets of sensors placed inside each low-voltage
winding to provide signals of Alarm and Trip and for fan operation. These
signals to be used for Alarm and Trip of upstream circuit breakers, for fan
operation, and also for indication in SCADA.
Page 8 of 24


TRANSFORMER
2020
Temperature Sensor Relay should be installed in front side of the enclosure

instead of front door of enclosure.
An indicator and relay with 6 inputs channel with RS 485 communication port
as above shall be installed on the front side panel of the transformer
enclosure, to indicate continuously the winding temperature.
Temperature sensor to be so designed to prevent any mal-operation due to dust.
3.2.2 The Temperature monitoring unit (TMU) shall be fixed in a separate housing
fixed on the enclosure, which should prevent heat of transformer to directly
affect the electronic components / circuit of TMU.
3.3 TRANSFORMER VALUES

The contractor shall confirm the following characteristics for each power
distribution transformer:
 Short Circuit impedance (at 95℃ and at principal tap with +/- 10 % tolerance as per IEC / IS.)
 No-load losses (Maximum),
 Full-load losses at 950C (Maximum)
 Efficiency at 950C at different load conditions:
 Full load: Power factor = 1 (Minimum efficiency: 98.4%)
Power factor = 0.8 (Minimum efficiency: 98%)
The efficiency of transformer at ¼, ½, ¾, full load at unity and 0.8PF for these
loads shall be more than 98% (97% for 200 kVA). Bidder in the offer shall meet
the conditions of efficiency as above.
3.4 TRANSFORMER CUBICLE
3.4.1 Transformers shall be installed in dismountable cubicle, made up of sheet

steel of minimum 2 mm thickness, Powder coated with provision of wire-
mesh.
The transformer enclosure shall be provided with cut out openings. The
transformers shall be supplied in a cubicle with enclosure and without any HV
portions exposed.
These Ventilation openings shall be provided all around on the transformer

enclosure with sufficient open area to dissipate the heat released by
transformer.
The door shall be provided with a mechanical interlocking system, to ensure

that it is possible to open the door only when the protection circuit breakers
on the HV side as well as LV side of the transformer are in ‘open’ position
Page 9 of 24


TRANSFORMER
2020
and Earth switch on upstream 33 kV cable is closed. Also circuit breakers on

the HV side as well as LV side of the transformer should trip if somebody tries
to open the door without opening the HV & LV side breakers.
Minimum Clearance of any earthed part or enclosure from any live terminal
of transformer should be as per IEC 60076-3. Apart from this More than 320
mm clearance shall be maintained between HV terminals and terminals to
earth or any part of the transformer and its enclosure for ease of movement
during O&M.
The transformer should be tested with enclosure in temperature rise type test.
Temperature rise test shall be done with enclosure designed and intended to
be used for the particular type of transformer. The enclosure supplied shall
be similar as used in the temperature rise test.
Enclosure shall have inspection windows of minimum size of 400 mm x 400

mm on both sides to view primary & secondary sides of the transformer. LED
Lights (10 Watts) inside transformer enclosure on both HV and LV sides shall
be provided for visual inspection from outside. Switch should be provided on
outer side of the enclosure to operate the lights.
The transformer cubicle shall have adequate space for fitment of lightening
arrestor/snubber circuit as the case may be
The cubicle shall provide protection against direct contact with the power
transformer. It shall include connections for the HV lines from the protection
bay and connections for the low voltage circuit.
The transformer enclosure shall be designed and provided by the transformer

manufacturer along with the transformer.
3.4.2 Cable arrangement shall facilitate the exchange of either of the transformers
without any difficulty, i.e. the cables shall be laid along each side and
connected to the transformer in such a way that it will not block the passage
for removal of any of the transformer during service. The contractor will
provide suitable size stiffeners in enclosure for connection of bus duct and to
ensure that the enclosure does not deform due to Bus duct connection. The
Page 10 of 24


TRANSFORMER
2020
panel shall not make any rattling sound and should be provided with a rubber
gasket as required.
3.4.3 Not Used
3.4.4 ‘The bimetallic strip required for connection in any case shall be provided by
the contractor.
3.4.5 The Transformer enclosure shall be provided with earthing connections by

routing and connecting earth strips (suitably sized as per LT side fault level,
but minimum GI Strip of 50 X 5 mm), and connected to all the panel sheets
of the enclosure.
Above Earthing strips should be provided on suitable support arrangement

fixed horizontally & vertically running along the inside of enclosure.
3.4.6 Entry inside the transformer enclosure should be blocked and all the
trenches/cable entry openings etc. on the transformer enclosures should be
sealed to avoid any entry of rodents / lizards / insects etc.
3.5 TERMINAL ARRANGEMENTS

The terminal arrangements for high voltage side shall be suitable for required
size of cables. The terminal arrangement for Low voltage side shall be
suitable for required size of cables/Bus ducts. Suitable arrangements shall
be available for cable terminations so that the cable/Bus duct weight doesn’t
come on the terminals.
The terminals on the primary side should be provided with proper

protection against creepage suitable for 36 KV.
3.5.1 The clearances of transformer HV side terminals shall be more than 320mm
as per IEC 60076-3. The manufacturer shall submit the transformer drawings
showing all the clearances and dimensions.
3.5.2 The provisions shall be made for the earthing connection of cable sheath for
both HT and LT sides.
3.5.3 LV side terminal clearance: -
For the LV (415 V) terminals or bars, the clearances and creepage distances
in Air, shall not be less than as specified below: -
Page 11 of 24


TRANSFORMER
2020
Minimum Clearance & creepage Minimum Clearance & creepage

distances between Phase to distancesbetween Phase to Neutral
Phase in Air* / core / core frame / earth in Air*
25 mm 20 mm
* However, for safety purpose, Fire retardant Insulation tape of 1.1 kV

strength should be provided on the phase terminal bars of the transformer on
LV (415 V) side, wherever gap in air between phases to neutral is less than
50mm.
The Neutral terminal bar shall be preferably towards core / core frame, and
the Phase terminal bars shall preferably be away from core / core frame.
3.5.4 There should be “No exposed” conductors or exposed live parts. All HV and
LV terminals shall be protected/covered suitably with shrouds/tapes of
corresponding voltage rating. Painted bus bars are preferred, which should
be suitable for transformer design and service conditions.
3.5.5 33 kV Cable connections:-The 33 kV cable used for connection from 33kV

CB to HV(33 kV) terminals of Transformer inside ASS shall be of atleast 300
sq.mm. or higher size, similar to 33 kV cable used in main line between ASS
to ASS.
3.6 PAINTING
All steel surfaces shall be powder coated with average 120 micron thickness,
which shall be suitable for heavily polluted atmosphere and shall be of color
RAL 7032.
3.7 INSULATION OF WINDINGS

 HV windings should be cast resin moulded type,and
 LV winding shall be of pre impregnated with top and bottom properly sealed
by resin to protect from dust and moisture ingress/ or it may be cast resin
moulded type.
3.7.1 Identification of winding coils:- Each of the 33kV windings coils shall have
identification name plate (sticker or engraved) with details of coil number,
Page 12 of 24


TRANSFORMER
2020
Transformer Sl. no., voltage, capacity, date of casting, manufacturer, etc. for
traceability.
3.8 NAME PLATE DETAILS
3.8.1 Rating Plate fitted to the transformer
Each transformer shall be provided with a rating plate of weatherproof material,

fitted in a visible position, showing the items indicated below. The entries on
the plate shall be indelibly marked (i.e. by engraving, stamping or by a photo
chemical process).
a) Dry type transformer

b) Standard, Number & year of latest IEC 60076
c) Manufacturer’s name
d) Manufacturer’s serial number
e) Year of manufacture
f) Insulation system temperature for each winding. The first letter shall refer
to high voltage winding, the second letter shall refer to low voltage winding.
When more than two windings are present, the letters shall be placed in the
order of windings from the high voltage to low voltage
g) No. of phases
h) Rated power for each kind of cooling
i) Rated frequency
j) Rated voltages, including tapping voltages, if any
k) Rated currents for each kind of cooling
l) Connection symbol
m) Short circuit impedance at rated current, rated voltage and at the appropriate
referenced temperature (it shall be the measured value during FAT)
n) Type of cooling
o) Total mass
p) Insulation levels
q) Degree of protection
r) Environmental class
Page 13 of 24


TRANSFORMER
2020
s) Climatic class
t) Fire behaviour class
The rated withstand voltages for all windings shall appear on the rating plate.
The principles of the standard notation are illustrated in clause 5 of IEC 60076-
3.
3.8.2 Rating Plate fitted to the transformer enclosure

Each transformer enclosure shall be provided with a rating plate of
weatherproof material, fitted in a visible position, showing the items shown in
3.8.1 The entries on the plate shall be inedibly marked (i.e. etching, engraving,
stamping or by a photochemical process).
3.9 CAPITALIZATION AND PENALTY

between different tenders the present value of the capitalized cost of losses in
the transformers shall be added to their financial bid by the following formula
PW = K*365*24* C (Wir + b² Wcu)/1000
Where
- PW is the present worth (in INR) of annual capitalized cost of losses at 8%

rate of interest over 25 years
- K is the present worth factor (8% interest, 25 years) = {(1+0.08) 25 –
1}/{0.08*(1+0.08)25} = 10.675
- C is the cost of the kWh (in Indian Rupees) = Rs. 6.15(or actual present
tariff rate)
- Wir is the iron losses in Watts at normal voltage and main tapping
- Wcu is the full load losses in Watts at normal voltage and main tapping at
95°C
- b is the load factor of transformer = 50 %
Thus PW = 10.675*365*24* 6.15 (Wir + b² Wcu)/1000
PW = 575.10 (Wir + 0.25 Wcu)
guaranteed in the offer, a consolidated penalty shall be paid by the contractor,
according to the following formula (any tolerance from the declared value on upper
side will not be considered):
575.10 (dWir + 0.25 dWcu)
Where,
Page 14 of 24


TRANSFORMER
2020
- dWir and dWcu are the differences between the test values of iron losses at full
voltage and and full load loses at full load on one transformer at main tapping and
the values guaranteed in the offer.
3.10 TRANSIENT OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTIONS: -

Contractor to carry out System study using EMTP, simulation and
measurements, for ascertaining the over voltages due to transients at the
terminals of Transformer. Suitable measures and protection for Transient
over voltages should be worked out for different length and size of cable
and provided for the Transformer protection, with the approval of DMRC.
3.10.1 Surge Arresters/Snubber circuit:- RC Snubber circuit/ Surge Arresters

between Phase - Phase, and Phase - Earth, on all three phases, of suitable
rated values on 33 kV side of Transformers shall be provided. The surge
counters with SCADA communicability on IEC 61850 Ed-2 protocol for
above Surge arresters should be provided. Provisions for installation of
RC Snubber circuit / Surge Arresters shall be made in factory.
Contractor to design and verify the rating of surge arrester/ RC Snubber
circuit for suitability based on the study in Para 3.10 above and obtain
approval of DMRC.
3.10.2 Snubber circuit and surge arrestors of suitable ratings at the HV terminal of
Transformer to be provided. Design for the same to be submitted to
engineer for approval.
3.10.3 Transformer Insulation:- The insulation of Transformer should be so

designed and provided to be able to sustain the Transient over voltages in
the 33 kV system.
The Contractor should study the Transient over voltages expected in the
system, and the insulation of Transformer should be designed accordingly.
3.10.4 The Transformer may be proposed to be provided with any other alternate
protection measures against transient over-voltages subject to a proven
solution and its approval by DMRC.
3.10.5 Any damage due to fast switching events shall be covered under the
manufacturer’s standard warranties.
3.11 TRANSPORTATION AND PACKAGING: -
3.11.1 The transformer to be supplied in weather proof sea worthy proper packing to
prevent any dust, moisture or any physical damage.
Page 15 of 24


TRANSFORMER
2020
4. MAINTENANCE & LIFE

The transformer should be designed for best service life in the industry (Approx. 40 years)
for all types of installation & under prescribed environmental conditions.
4.1. The Transformer to be kept clean.
The installation of transformer should be carried out in clean environment i.e. free from
dust, debris etc. It should be ensured that the transformer should be kept clean in all
conditions during the storage, installation, after charging, before hand over and during
DLP.
During Project phase till handover, regular cleaning of the transformer is the responsibility
of contractor. After handover, DMRC will ensure the cleaning.
Page 16 of 24


TRANSFORMER
2020
5. DATA SHEET - AUXILIARY TRANSFORMERS

5.1 AUXILIARY TRANSFORMER 200 KVA, 500 KVA AND 630 KVA
S.no. INDICATIONS U VALUES Required
200 KVA 500 KVA 630 kVA
1 Manufacturer
2 Place of manufacture
3 Port of embarkation
4 Manufacturer drawing
reference
5 Standards IEC 60076 IEC 60076 IEC 60076
6 Rated power kVA 200 500 630
6 Cooling mode AN AN AN
7 Primary rated insulation kV 36 36 36
voltage
8 Primary operating voltage kV 33 33 33
9 Secondary rated operating V 415/240 415/240 415/240
voltage
10 Rated short duration power kV 70 70 70
for primary winding
11 Rated lightning impulse kV
withstand voltage for primary 170 170 170
winding
12 Short-circuit impedance (Cl. % 4 4 4
3.3)
13 Short circuit current on kA 6.9 17.4 21.9
secondary side
14 Voltage setting (Off load tap % +5.0, +2.5, 0, +5.0, +2.5, 0, +5.0, +2.5, 0,
links) -.2.5, -5.0 -2.5, -5.0 -2.5, -5.0
15 Vector Group Dyn11 Dyn11 Dyn11
16 Maximum noise level dBA 65 dB at 1.5 65 dB at 1.5 65 dB at 1.5
metres metres metres
17 Class of Insulation F F F
18 Maximum iron loses W As per As per As per
Manufacturer Manufacturer Manufacturer
(Efficiency (Efficiency (Efficiency
required is required is required is
defined in defined in defined in
Specifications) Specifications) Specifications)
19 Maximum load loses W As per As per As per
Page 17 of 24


TRANSFORMER
2020

20 Dimensions (maximum)*
- Length mm 2000 2000 2000
- Width mm 1500 2000 2000
- Height mm 2250 2250 2250
21 Weight (maximum)* Kg 1700 2600 3000
*Dimensions and weight
shown are indicative only
Page 18 of 24


TRANSFORMER
2020
5.2 AUXILIARY TRANSFORMER 1000 KVA, 1600 KVA AND 2000 KVA
1000 KVA 1600 KVA 2000 KVA
1 Manufacturer
4 Manufacturer drawing
reference
6 Rated power kVA 1000 1600 2000
7 Cooling mode AN AN AN
6 Primary rated insulation voltage kV 36 36 36
8 Secondary rated operating V 415/240 415/240 415/240
voltage
frequency withstand voltage for
primary winding
10 Rated lightning impulse kV 170 170 170
withstand voltage for primary
winding
11 Short circuit impedance (Cl. 3.3) % 6.0% 6.0% 6.0%
12 Short circuit current on kA 23.1 37.1 46
secondary side
13 Voltage setting (Off load Tap % +5.0, +2.5, 0, +5.0, +2.5, 0, +5.0, +2.5, 0,
links) -2.5, -5.0 -.2.5, -5.0 -.2.5, -5.0
17 Maximum iron loses W As per As per As per
18 Maximum load loses W As per As per As per
- Length mm 2000 2000 2000
Page 19 of 24


TRANSFORMER
2020
- Width mm 2000 2000 2700

- Height mm 2250 2250 2250
20 Weight (maximum)* kg 3600 8000 8000
*Dimensions and weight shown 6000 6500
are indicative only
Page 20 of 24


TRANSFORMER
2020
5.3 AUXILIARY TRANSFORMER 2500/3000 kVA, 3150 kVAand3150/4000 kVA

2500/3000 kVA 3150 kVA 3150/4000 kVA
1 Manufacturer
4 Manufacturer drawing reference
AN 2500 3150 3150
6 Rated power
AF 3000 Not Applicable 4000
AN AN AN
7 Cooling mode
AF Not Applicable AF
8 Primary rated insulation voltage kV 36 36 36
10 Secondary rated operating voltage V 415/240 415/240 415/240
frequency withstand voltage for
primary winding
12 Rated lightning impulse withstand kV 170 170 170
voltage for primary winding
13 Short-circuit impedance(Cl. 3.3) % 6 6 7
14 Short circuit current on secondary kA 58 62.6
side
15 Voltage setting (Off load Tap % +5.0, +2.5, 0, +5.0, +2.5, 0, +5.0, +2.5, 0,
Links) -2.5, -5.0 -2.5, -5.0 -2.5, -5.0
75 dB at 1.5 m 75 dB at 1.5 m
for AF for AF
19 Maximum iron loses kW As per As per As per
20 Maximum load loses kW As per As per As per
Page 21 of 24


TRANSFORMER
2020

- Length mm 2100 2200
- Width mm 2900 3000
- Height mm 2250 2350
22 Weight (maximum)* kg 7000 8500
*Dimensions and weight shown are indicative only
Page 22 of 24


TRANSFORMER
2020
6. TEST SHEET
6.1 AUXILIARY TRANSFORMERS

All Tests shall be performed on a completely assembled transformer including relevant
accessories supplied.
All routine tests as per IEC 60076-11 are to be conducted including Partial Discharge
during Manufacturer’s Internal test & Factory Acceptance Test on all completely
assembled transformer.
All type tests as per IEC 60076-11 shall be conducted on one transformer for each
rating and make before supply to DMRC.
All the type tests shall be conducted on each rating of the transformer separately.
Central Electricity Authority (technical standard for construction of Electrical Plants and
Electric Lines) regulations 2010, has made the short circuit testing mandatory. Short circuit
withstand test shall be conducted on one of each type, rating and make of transformer to
validate the design and quality unless such test has been conducted. The test shall be
conducted before making any supply to DMRC.
The relevant regulations No. are 10(3)(g), 37(4)(k), 43(2)(a)(vi), which are available on
CEA’s website www.cea.nic.in.
In view of above the supplier shall subject the transformer to a short circuit test as per
relevant IEC/IS standard meeting the requirement of above mentioned regulations of CEA.
6.2 PARTIAL DISCHARGE TEST

Partial Discharge Test shall be conducted on all the transformers in fully assembled
condition during the routine tests. The maximum level of Partial Discharges shall be 10 pC
as per IEC 60076-11 (2004) or updated as per latest IEC.
6.3ENVIRONMENT, CLIMATE & FIRE BEHAVIOUR CLASS

To establish above classes, Transformer should to be tested As per IEC 60076-11, and
reports should be submitted along with the vendor approval. The dry type transformer shall
be rated for following classes –Environment Class E2, Climatic Class C1/C2 and Fire
behaviour Class F1 -
Transformer only from the proposed manufacturing unit to be type tested, and confirmation
certificate by Design head and unit head, for similar material and design used in other
transformers to be submitted. This certificate shall be treated as corporate warranty for
any damages on this account.
Page 23 of 24


TRANSFORMER
2020
Class E2: Frequent condensation or heavy pollution or combination of both.
Class C1: The transformer is suitable for operation at ambient temperature not below –
5°C but may be exposed during transport and storage to ambient temperatures down to –
25°C.
Class F1: Transformers subject to a fire hazard. Restricted flammability is required. The
emission of toxic substances and opaque smokes shall be minimised.
6.4 MEASUREMENT OF SOUND LEVEL (SPECIAL TEST)

Measurement of Sound Level test (special tests as per IEC 60076-11) shall be conducted
during Manufacturer’s Internal test & Factory Acceptance Test on all transformer using
sound pressure level technique. The testing shall be conducted on a completely
assembled transformer including relevant accessories supplied.
6.5 TEMPERATURE RISE TEST:-

The transformer should be tested with enclosure in temperature rise type test.
Temperature rise test shall be done with enclosure designed and intended to be
used for the particular type of transformer. The enclosure supplied shall be similar
as used in the temperature rise test.
The temperature rise limits shall be as per IEC 60076-11, for example, for class F
insulation, Temperature Rise shall be limited to 90 Deg C above ambient
temperature of 50 Deg C.
The Temperature rise test of Transformer shall be conducted considering the

transformer as "Enclosed Dry Type Transformer" as per clause 3.3 of IEC 60076-
11:2004.
6.6 CHOPPED WAVE LIGHTNING IMPULSE TEST FOR LINE TERMINALS (LIC)
(SPECIAL TEST):-
Chopped wave Lightning Impulse test for Line terminals (LIC) (Special test) shall
be conducted as per IEC 60076-3 on all the windings, for one transformer of each
type of kVA rating, being supplied in the contract.
The test voltage for LIC test shall be 220 kV for 33 kV (Um=36 kV) windings.
The test report of previously conducted LIC test on exactly similar transformer shall
be valid if not older than 5 years.
Test should be conducted with transformer enclosure assembly installed.

Page 24 of 24

Contract- DE-04 – Particular Specification- Annexure-6 (Fire protection system Specification) of Chapter 8A
ANNEXURE-6
CLEAN AGENT GAS BASED HIGH TEMPERATURE POLYMER TUBE BASED
PROTECTION SYSTEM
1.
1. SCOPE:-
1.1 General
(i) The scope covers Design, Supply, Installation, Testing and Commissioning of
Automatic clean agent based Flooding System complete for Electrical Panels
& Dry Type Station Transformer encloser complete with storage cylinder,
indirect valves, flexible fire detection tubing as per NFPA-2001 including its
safety guidelines with respect to “Hazard to Personnel” electrical clearance
and enviormental factors, integration with Main Fire Alarm Control Panel for
status monitoring etc. The scope of work includes, but not limited to the
following
 Providing Direct Gas Flooding System with flexible fire detection/ discharge
tubing inside the panels & transformer encloser.
 Clean agent storage cylinder for flooding gas.
 Fire Detetction Tubing and spray nozzles
 Manual discharge facility.
 Interface with Fire Alarm System.
 Audio-visual annunciation devices for indicating incidence of fire.
 Any other item required to the successful commissioning of the system.
(ii) The electrical panel & dry type station transformer encloser fire suppression
system shall be complete with Direct Clean Gas storage cylinders for required
capacities, extinguishing agent as specified, fire detection tubing, filling and
end-of-line adaptors, pressure switches, control equipment, Clean Agent
Cylinder/Valve Assembly, Cylinder Mounting Bracket and all necessary

accessories to protect the Electrical panel & Transfomer in case of fire. The
system will have an interface with Main Fire Alarm and Control Panel. In case
of fire in the concerned Panel/Transformer encloser, indication of Fire /
Discharge status should come in Main Fire Alarm and Control Panel. System
Provider/Vendor has to submit authorization for use of clean agent/gas from
the manufacturer.
(iii) M/s OEM shall be involved in designing, planning, installation & commissioning
of system and certify the system before taking over by DMRC. The contractor
shall obtain vendor approval / Sub-Contractor approval for the OEM & ITC
Contractor.
(iv) The vendor shall submit recommended maintenance for the system including
maintenance of sub components for approval of DMRC.
(v) The vendor shall organize Training for DMRC Staff for better familiarization of
the system, installation rocedures & maintenance practices.
1.2 Design Requirements
(i) All the detecting devices, alarm, indicating devices, containers and other related
equipment shall have required approvals & authorization.
(ii) Entire system, including all accessories etc. shall be of same make
(iii) Complete installations shall conform to NFPA requirements.
(iv) Clean Agent should be used with below mentioned properties
a) The Clean Agent should have Zero Ozone Depletion Potential. (ODP = 0)
b) The Clean Agent should not have Global Warming Potential of more than 1.
c) The Clean Agent should be a low pressure agent.
1.3 System Equipment
(i) Tubing

The tubing shall be installed throughout the Electrical Panel & Transformer
encloser with one end connected to the top of the Clean Agent container valve.
The tubing shall be pressurized with Dry Nitrogen to 150 psig and maintains the
system in the “OFF” position. The tube shall burst at temp. 100-120 degree
Celecius. The tubing shall perform three functions viz. Heat Detection, System
Activation and Clean Agent discharge. Tubing should be UL Listed.
(ii) Clean agent Container
 Design, fabricate, certify and stamp containers in accordance with the

requirements of NFPA (DOT). Containers shall be standard model and size
of ease of replacement and addition.
 Each storage container shall be equipped with a nickel–plated brass valve, a

pressure gauge to monitor container pressure, and a quarter-turn ball valve
that interfaces with the detection tubing. The quarter-turn ball valve shall be
kept closed at all times when the container is not in service.
 All container valves shall be equipped with a pressure relief valve (rupture
disc) device in compliance with DOT requirements.
1.4 Technical and Installation Requirements
(i) The system shall be a clean agent pre-engineered automatic indirect Fire
Suppression System and shall be UL/FM Approved products and approval by
Local Fire Authority.
The installation and commissioning of the system should be by Manufacturer or

their authorised channel partner. The final connections between equipment and
system detection tubing should be under direct supervision of factory trained and
certified representative of manufacturer.
(ii) Provide sufficient amount of Extinguishing Agent to Inert the Micro environment
being protected considering the following when computing volume to verify
suitability and to establish design limitations:
 Volume of hazard area.

 Specific volume of Clean Agent.
 Discharge time and flow rates.
 Design concentration and design factors.
 Detector/discharge tubing placement.
(iii) The system shall be self-contained and have its own non-electric automatic
detection system, which when actuated shall automatically release the
suppression agent into the electrical panel/transformer cabinet.
(iv) The system shall be complete in all respects. It shall include agent storage
container, detection tubing, discharge nozzles, fittings manual release, abort
stations, audible and visual alarm devices, and any other operations necessary
for a functional Clean Agent suppression system.
(v) The System shall detect, control and extinguish the fire and also simultaneously
give audio visual indication on the control panel.
(vi) Interface system with main control fire alarm system
(vii) Storage containers shall be carefully located so that they are not subjected to
mechanical, chemical or other damage.
(viii) All doors and holes in the encloser/equipment should be closed or sealed to
maintain the tightness of enclosure.
(ix) The clean agent based Pre-Engineered automatic direct fire suppression system
shall be with required approvals & Authorization.
(x) Each clean agent pre-engineered automatic system is equipped with its own
detection/discharge tubing. Vendor to submit detailed drawings & calculations
based on NFPA & Specifications for Approval.
(xi) The Clean Agent is stored in DOT steel cylinders as a liquefied compressed gas,
super-pressurized with Dry Nitrogen to 150 psig at 70oF. The ambient operating

temperature range for all system components should be 0 degree Celcius to 54

degree Celcius.
(xii) Each container is equipped with a nickel–plated brass valve, a pressure gauge to
monitor container pressure, and a quarter-turn ball valve that interfaces with the
Detection Tubing. In addition, the container valve shall be equipped with a
pressure relief (rupture disc) device in compliance with DOT requirements.
(xiii) Provide wall-mounted painted steel bracket to mount the container/valve

assembly in a vertical (upright) position. Each bracket should be equipped with at
least two integral quick-clamp straps as per manufacturer standard practice.
(xiv) Install equipment as indicated on the approved shop drawings, and in

accordance with requirements of NFPA-70 and NFPA-2001.
(xv) All the necessary accessories required for operation of system shall be part of
supply from single Manufacturer and the complete system shall have proven
track record and International Third Party Approvals like UL, FM or any other
reputed certification.
(xvi) It shall be so designed that it does not affect the IP ratings of electrical
panels/transformer encloser. The Sub-Contractor has to coordinate with
manufacturer of electrical panels and station transformer for provision of holes to
run the tube and brackets for mounting the tube. The entry of tube inside the
panel/encloser shall be through suitable size of connector.
(xvii) The tubing shall be manufactured from specially processed polymer material to
achieve the desired heat detection and delivery characteristics. Provide minimum
two runs of fire trace tube along with any two sides of every compartment of the
panel/encloser.
(xviii) The tubing shall be capable of working even when contaminated with oil, dust
and debris as long as the contamination will allow the heat to pass through the
tube.
(xix) Distribution of Detection Tubing shall be ensured in each compartment of the

Panel/enloser viz. Busbar Section, Switchgear Section and Cable Alleys etc. with

routing on any two sides. Mounting/ installation of the detection tube to be as per
manufacturer design.
1.5 System Operation
(i) The system must operate automatically and its operation shall be as per following
sequence:
When the temperature of detection tube installed inside the Cabinet will increase
to above 100 degree Celcius or the detection tube comes in the direct contact of
flame, the tube shall burst and initiates ILP Valve which allows the diffusion of
extinguishing medium which is Clean Agent gas through strategically placed
pipes & nozzles.
(ii) The system shall be designed for In Direct discharge of extinguishing agent
through the pipes and nozzle when the tube rupture occurs. The diameter of tube
for indirect discharge shall be as per calculations and manufacturer
recommendations but shall not be less than 6mm under any condition.
(iii) The Contractor shall carry out the calculation and appropriate fill density to be
arrived at basis of the same. Vendor to submit detailed drawings & calculations
based on NFPA & Specifications for Approval.
(iv) The design & calculation shall be checked & certified by manufacturers trained
design engineer. The calculation is the only guarantee that the system shall work,
provided the system is installed exactly as per the design.
(v) These documents shall be prepared by a fully experienced person and qualified
in the design of gas based fire suppression system.
1.6 Equipment Specifications
(i) Cylinder
Design, fabricate, certify and stamp containers in accordance with the

requirements of NFPA (DOT). Containers shall be standard model and size of
ease of replacement and addition.

(ii) Discharge Hose
The Discharge Pipe should be high pressure braided hose with heavy duty
adopters. The nozzle should be made of Brass/Gun Metal and should have 180
degree discharge pattern.
(iii) System and Detection Tube
a) The System will be UL/FM approved product
b) Clean Agent should be used with below mentioned properties:
 The Clean Agent should have Zero Ozone Depletion Potential. (ODP = 0)
 The Clean Agent should not have Global Warming Potential of more than 1.
 The Clean Agent should be a low pressure agent.
The detection tube shall be manufactured from specially processed polymer

material to achieve the desired heat detection and delivery characteristics. The
tube shall be capable of working even when contaminated with oil, dust and
debris as long as the contamination will allow the heat to pass through the tube.
DETAILS of PANELS IN WHICH SUPRESSION SYSTEM IS TO BE PROVIDED: The

following is an indicative list of Panels for providing Fire suppression system -
S. No. Equipment details
1. 33KV MV Panel
2. 25 kV panel (if any)
3. ACDB
4. DCDB
5. Battery Charger

6. Dry type Transformer
7. Inverter/UPS
(iv)
(iv) Control Box
 Every unit of Panel/Transformer flooding system has to be provided with a

Control Box for giving Audio/Visual Alarm and interface with
panel/Transformer flooding system for accepting gas release signal and
further relay of the same to Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP).
 The control box enclosure shall be at least IP 54. Wiring of the Control Box
shall be FS type as per BS 6387/ FRPVC as per IS 694 and shall be
minimum 2.5 sqmm. The control box shall be fire red in colour having 2mm
thick CRCA sheet with powder coated finish.
 The unit shall contain indication for System Healthy, Mains Healthy and Gas
Release. The unit shall also have signal silence button. All components
such as Hooter, Strobe, Indication Lamps, Chip shall be of superior make
subject to approval by Engineer.
 Third party test reports for IP and Functionality of the system to be

submitted before approval. The system shall be supplied and certified by
OEM of the flooding system or their authorized vendor.

Contract- DE-04 – Particular Specification- Annexure-7 (Fire detection system Specification) of Chapter 8A
ANNEXURE-7
FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM
1. General
This Section specifies the scope of work, design, supply, installation, testing &
commissioning of the Fire Alarm and Detection System.
The system shall be an intelligent addressable fire alarm and detection system.
For RSS, NBC & IS 2189 shall be used as guiding standard and design of the
Fire alarm System.
2. Scope of Work
The scope of the work is to design, supply, installation, testing and

commissioning of intelligent addressable fire alarm and detection system in
compliance with codes and standard mentioned in this specification, Outline
design Criteria and International best practices for all RSS etc. The Addressable
Fire alarm system will comprise of the following:
 Micro-processor based Main Fire Alarm Panel
 Addressable Multi-sensor Detector, smoke detectors, heat detectors, Beam

detector etc.
 Addressable manual call points
 Addressable Hooter cum strobe (either addressable or made addressable

through control module)
 Batteries and charger
 Electrical wiring, conduits, and accessories
 Communication driver at the FACP for interfacing with the SAS

 Voltage free fire alarm signals through voltage free normally close
contacts from the fire alarm system to the SAS and connecting cables
between the fire alarm system and SAS for all interfaces.
The Addressable Main Alarm Panel will be minimum 2 loops for RSS with a
Loop capacity of minimum 150 devices/detectors as per manufacturer design
and UL listing. The panel will be located in the Control Room and will have
LED alpha-numeric display.
The fire alarm panel will have the capability to process and evaluate incoming
signals from addressable devices such as smoke detectors, heat detectors,
duct detector, combined optical and heat detectors, beam detectors, manual
call point and I/O modules etc. via FRPVC insulated copper wires as per IS
694 in GI conduits or FRLSH PVC insulated copper conductor cables as per
IS1554 for elevated stations ,Depots and RSS. Fault isolators will be provided
after every 20 devices.
The Fire Alarm System will be provided with input modules for interface with
flow switches and relay module for interface with the SAS system and Output
Module to Hooter cum strobe. Fire Alarm System shall be capable of
integration with:
 To be seamlessly interfaced with SCADA system
 Audio and strobes signal to areas in the RSS building in case of alarm
3.
3. Technical and Installation Requirements
3.2 Quality Control
3.2.1 Provide equipment which are products of manufacturers who have made these
products for a period of at least ten years, Complete System shall be the latest
developed products which have been listed by UL.
3.2.2 The system components such as control panel, detectors, line break isolator,
response indicators, repeater panel, Mimic panel, modules, battery, Two-way
Talkback System (Only for Depots) and all fire alarm devices shall be of the

same manufacturer and under one family design duly approved/listed by UL.
All Fixing accessories like back-boxes etc. shall either be the same
manufacturer or of superior quality duly certified by OEM and approved by
Engineer.
3.3 Control Panel
3.5.2 The fire alarm control panel (FACP) shall be multi-zone control panel of the
intelligent analogue addressable type, complete with power supply, battery
charger, batteries.
3.5.3 The Fire Alarm Control Panel shall be located within the Control Room,
capable of interface with a Workstation for the Fire Detection & Suppression
system. All the fire detectors, alarm devices and interfaces to other systems
shall be connected via this panel.
3.5.4 The FACP shall be analogue addressable in a lockable housing with

illuminated function keys and capable of full “stand-alone” operation. The
FACP housing shall be to a minimum protection rating of IP 54.
3.5.5 The FACP shall be minimum 2 Loop for RSS control panel with loops
expandable feature and of intelligent addressable type with a loop capacity of
minimum 150 devices/ detectors as per manufacturer’s design and UL listing
complete with all alarm loop cards and input / output control interface, at least
120 LED character display or greater, easily operable with acknowledgement,
reset and silence facility.
3.5.6 Activation of Manual call points or detectors shall be identified on the FACP
identifying the loop number and detector address number including the
associated Fire Alarm zone. This information shall be provided via a textual
message on a separate screen integral to the FACP. Fire alarm panels shall
be lockable with alarm/reset functions; On/Off controls and alarm disable
controls. A facility shall be provided to allow operating access to authorized
personnel. This shall be via key or password access.

3.5.7 The FACP shall be self-checking and shall have the facility to identify faulty/
contaminated devices or system malfunctions such that faulty status/condition
shall not be confused with fire alarms.
3.5.8 The processor shall be capable of polling all field devices on a loop within
three seconds.
3.5.9 A facility shall be provided to isolate a single device on a loop or a group of

devices on a loop on a temporary basis. An illuminated warning indication
shall be provided on the FACP, which shall remain lit until the isolation is
removed.
3.5.10 The FACP shall have an integral clock, which shall be synchronized with the
Station centralized clock system (provided by others). A facility shall be
provided to allow for an external logging printer to be connected. The printer
shall be located within the Control Room. The station FACP shall be equipped
with monitoring/relay points to relay status and alarm messages to the
SCADA system.
3.5.11 Relays points shall be provided for:
a) FAP healthy signal,
b) Fire alarm condition,
c) Fire zone of such alarm condition,
3.5.12 FACP shall be capable of interfacing with other systems including but not
limited to:
a) Clean Agent Based Panel & Transformer Flooding System: The FACP
shall receive signals from the individual Gas suppression system control
panels to identify activation of clean agent based panel/transformer
flooding system.
b) FACP shall also interface with SCADA system and all other systems as per
requirement.

3.5.13 The response to alarms from various combinations of the detectors, manual
call points shall, via the dedicated microprocessor, shall be capable of
initiating performance of such other functions as required like:
a) Alert RSS staff,
b) Initiate operation of Fire Suppression Equipment,
c) Capable to initiate signal for operating any other emergency devices as per
requirement.
3.5.14 All detector and bell circuits shall be continuously monitored and a fault on
any of these shall be indicated in the Main Fire Alarm Panel.
3.5.15 FACP shall be capable of control and monitoring of Gas suppression system.
3.5.16 Each system shall provide at least 25 % spare capacity for future expansion.
3.5.17 Access rights for Fire Alarm Control Panel with all necessary Hardware &
Software to be provided to DMRC for any change, addition/deletion or
modification in the system. The access shall be unconditional and
manufacturer to provide necessary support to DMRC including training to
DMRC personnel for the same. Any hardware required for software access
shall be a part of the system without any cost implication and without any
requirement for periodic renewal. The manufacturer is required to provide all
software upgradations free of cost to DMRC during the entire life of the
product.
The installation and commissioning of the FACP shall be done by

manufacturer or their approved channel partner. The manufacturer will also be
required to ensure overall supervision of the fire detection cabling and
detector/ device fixing works.
3.4 Battery Charger and Batteries
A 24 V DC trickle type battery charger and batteries shall be provided. The unit
shall incorporate Trickle charger assembly, Rotary type selector switch,

Suitably rated fuse, Sealed Maintenance Free battery as per UL listing,
Rectifiers and DC output voltage stabilizer as required.
The unit shall be suitable for use on a 240 V AC single phase power supply
and shall automatically maintain the 24 V DC batteries in a state approximate
to full charge and at the same time to compensate for the standing load. The
charger shall cater for re-charging the battery from fully-discharged condition
to fully-charged condition in not more than 24 hours.
Battery shall be of sealed maintenance free battery as per UL Listing requiring

no maintenance throughout the normal life of the battery and shall be of
capacity capable of maintaining the system in normal working condition for at
least 48 hours without recharging and subsequently operating in the "alarm"
condition continuously for at least one hour.
3.5 Break-glass Units / Manual Call Point
3.5.1 Manual call point shall comply with NFPA/NBC(IS) and shall be UL
approved/listed. They shall be addressable type and shall be arranged to
operate automatically upon pressing call point switch. The cover shall be locked
in position with a special key and the glass panel shall be clipped firmly into
place. It shall be manufactured in bright red compliant material, measuring 85 x
85 mm with 50mm overall depth or as approved/required by engineer. Operation
shall be via a plastic membrane (non-breakable) with wording on method of
operation in white lettering. The cover shall be etched in black lettering in Hindi
and English “FIRE”, the letters measuring not less than 10mm high.
3.5.2 The surface of the Manual call point shall be provided with a LED indicator. It
shall light up upon activation of the Manual call point. The operation of any call
point connected to the system shall cause the RSS FACP to enter the alarm
state within three seconds.
3.5.3 Contacts shall be of silver or approved non-deteriorating alloy, for normally

close/open system. The voltage and current ratings of the contacts shall be
marked within the unit.

3.5.4 The units shall be of the flush mounting type and suitable for direct connection to
the type of wiring system therein specified without the addition of unsightly
surface boxes, glands and adaptors. Special boxes compatible with the conduit
system shall be provided where necessary for installation of the call points.
3.5.5 Manual call point shall be positioned at a height of 1.2 m or as per NFPA/NBC
(IS) at strategic points throughout the station such that they are clearly visible
from front and sides as practicable and Manual call point shall be located at
every entrance and at such locations so that one is within 22.5 meters of any
point in the RSS or as per NFPA/NBC (IS) have to be provided. Provide flush
plates for the recess mounting units.
3.5.6 The alarm bells and flashing light units shall actuate upon receipt of a fire alarm
signal from any of the Manual call points or detection systems.
3.5.7 Each Manual call point shall be complete with built-in testing slot, such that
testing can be carried out by insertion of the test key without removing the glass
front cover of the unit
3.6 Detectors with associated base
3.6.2 General
a) Unless otherwise specified, smoke detectors shall be of multi sensor type.
b) Detectors shall be UL listed, multi-sensor. The internal circuits shall be of

solid state device and shall be hermetically sealed to prevent their
operation from being impaired by dust, dirt, humidity, corrosion or
mechanical shock. All circuitry shall be protected against typical electrical
transients and electromagnetic interference.
c) Each detector shall carry a built-in address.
d) There shall be a built-in magnetic test/any other mock test facility in each
intelligent device.
e) Built-in testing facility shall be provided based on NFPA 72.

f) The detector base shall have a positive mechanical means to hold the
removable portion of the device. However, such provision shall provide a
simple means to remove the detector from the base, either by hand or by
the use of a special tool that can plug-in and/or remove the detector head
from a distance of up to 6 m above floor level. Required tool to be
provided by vendor
g) Detector base shall be compatible for connection of all types of analogue

addressable detectors and shall have the facility to drive a remote visual
alarm indicator which shall be provided for all concealed detectors. Remote
indicator shall be compatible with the detector so that the operation of the
indicator will not impair or affect the brightness of the detector’s built-in
LED.
h) There shall be LEDs on the detector head so that alarm condition of the
detector can be seen clearly from any direction or angle.
i) The designed operating range of detectors shall be between 0 °C and 50

°C and up to 95% RH non-condensing or as per NFPA/NBC (IS).
j) There shall be at least 3 levels (high, medium and low) of sensitivity, as

approved by the agency listed or by Delhi Fire and Emergency Services,
which can be selected at any time at the FS control panel or by automatic
day/night sensitivity change over program which shall be built into the FS
control panel.
k) Detector shall be low profile, no more than 60mm in height or as approved

by Engineer including the base to minimize dust accumulation at detector
head, resulting from the pattern of airflow.
l) The remote indicator with labelling shall be provided for all detectors
installed above false ceiling as specified in clause (g) of this Specification.
m) Labels shall be provided adjacent to all detectors with appropriate letters

indicating the corresponding address.
3.6.3 Multi-Sensor Detectors

a) The multi sensor detector shall be a microprocessor based and operate on

light scattering principle, containing an emitter and photo sensor. The
scattered light reaching the photo sensor shall be proportional to the
smoke density inside the detection chamber. It will combine both optical
smoke and heat detector technology to detect clear burning fire products,
which hitherto could only be easily detected by ion-chamber detectors. The
detectors will not operate on a rate of rise of temperature alone. It shall be
UL listed.
b) The detector shall utilize advanced algorithms with time based analysis to
provide early warning and an accurate analysis of alarm situations.
c) Under normal ambient conditions, the optical detector will behave as a

normal optical detector. Only when a rapid rise in temperature is detected,
the sensitivity of the detector shall increase together with the presence of
smoke shall confirm a fire condition, which will be transmitted as a fire
alarm level.
d) The detector will be fully compensated for temperature, humidity and

barometric changes in the environment. All electronic components shall
be hermetically sealed to prevent their operation from being impaired
by dust, dirt, humidity, corrosion or mechanical shock. All circuitry must
be protected against typical electrical transients and electromagnetic
interference. The detector will be fully operable between -20 °C and + 70 °C
and up to 95% relative humidity non-condensing or as specified by
NFPA/NBC(IS).
e) The Sensitivity shall be adjustable by means of a pre-set control only

accessible by use of a special tool. Built-in wind-shields will be
provided to ensure that air velocity of up to 10 meters / second do not
affect the proper operation of the detector.
3.6.4 Heat Detectors
a) Heat detector shall be an analogue addressable type designed to raise an

alarm when the temperature is at a rate-of-rise of 8 °C per minute or higher

or at a fixed alarm temperature of 57 °C. It shall be UL listed and Delhi Fire

and Emergency Services approved.
b) The detector shall employ two matching thermal sensing elements in a

bridge configuration to give a response, which depends both on absolute
temperature and rate of change of temperature. The reference and sensing
thermal sensors shall be fabricated under identical conditions to ensure
good matching and tracking with both temperature and ageing.
3.6.5 Beam Detectors
a) Beam detectors shall generate an alarm if smoke affects the Infra Red
Beam between transmitter and a receiver unit.
b) Specification for beam detector:
 Monitoring Length – 5 Mtrs. to 100 Mtrs.
 Signal Processing – 8 Bit Microprocessor
 Sensitivity – 3 steps adjustable (25, 50, 70%)
 Compensation – Pollution of the optics is hourly compensated to + 1%
3.6.6 Hooter cum Strobe (either addressable or made addressable through

control module)
All the areas of RSS shall be provided with sounder cum visual strobe units.
The unit shall be wall mounted, approved color, suitable for operation on 24V
with following features.
a) Visual Characteristics: The visual strobe shall consist of Xenon flash tube
with associated lens / reflector. The feature selectable candela outputs (15,
15/75, 30, 75 or 110). The flash rate shall not exceed two flashes per
second (2Hz) and nor less than one flash per second (1 Hz) throughout the
listed operating range of appliances or as per NFPA/NBC (IS) and UL.

b) The light pattern shall be disbursed so that it is visible above and below the
strobe and from a 90° degree angle on both sides of the strobe.
c) Sounder pulse rate and decibel level above the ambient shall comply with
NFPA/NBC (IS) standards. The unit shall be tapped for 1/4, 1, 2 and 4
watts outputs.
d) Strobe shall be placed wall mounted in corridors no more than 4570 mm

(15 feet) from the end of a corridor with 30.48 m (100 feet) maximum
distance between strobes or as per NFPA/NBC(IS). Where there is an
obstruction to the viewing path in the corridors, such as a cross-corridor
door or ceiling elevation change, consider the obstruction as defining a new
corridor.
3.6.7 Fire Alarm Cables
RSS cabling to be FR PVC insulated wire as per IS 694 in GI Conduits or

FRLSH PVC insulated cable as per IS 1554 with copper conductors of cross
section 1.5 sq. mm. or above as per BOQ
3.6.8 Monitor Modules
Addressable contact monitoring module shall communicate via the detection

cable loop with the Fire Alarm Control Panel for continuous monitoring of any
NO or NC dry contacts connected including break glass, flow switch and
repeating dry contact signals from gas flooding system and gas detection
system. LED indication shall be provided to show the status of the module.
3.6.9 Control Modules
a) Control module shall provide an addressable output for a separately

powered alarm indicating circuit or for a control relay and housed in
covered galvanized steel or stove enamel steel box with sufficient size to
house all modules.
b) The control module shall provide a supervised indicating circuit where

indicated on the Drawings. Any open/short circuit fault shall be

detected/highlighted/displayed at the Fire Alarm Control Panel. Subsequent

fire alarm signals shall activate the appropriate controls and signaling
devices despite of the fault conditions.
c) The control module shall act as a control relay where required.
d) The control module shall contain a LED which blinks upon being scanned
by the Fire Alarm Control Panel. Upon activation of the module, the LED
shall be latched on.
e) Status of control module shall be fed back to Fire Alarm Control Panel and
print out automatically once it is activated.
3.6.10 Fault Isolator Modules
a) Fault isolator modules shall detect and isolate a short-circuited segment of

a fault-tolerant loop.
b) The module shall automatically detect a return-to-normal condition of the

loop and restore the isolated segment.
c) Modules shall be provided for every 20 field addressable devices to limit

the extent of devices affected in the event of short-circuit. A minimum of
two fault isolator modules shall be provided for one detection line loop.
d) The repeater panel enclosure shall be flush mounted and all electronics
shall be contained in the enclosure. Access to the repeater panel switches
shall be protected by key-switch.
e) The panel construction shall be as per Specification. One repeater panel

has to be provided at each fireman’s staircase.
3.6.11 Response Indicator
a) Response indicator of LED type shall be provided for above false ceiling
and below false floor detectors and these shall be mounted outside/ inside
the rooms wherever asked for by the Contractor/Employer representative

for indication of fire through detector in the room. The design & colour shall
be as per the standard.
b)
b) In RSS, for areas with room height more than 5m, UL listed beam detector
to be provided and integrated with the main fire alarm system of RSS.

Contract- DE-04 – Particular Specification- Annexure-8 (Interlocking Scheme ) of Chapter 8A
220 kV & 66 kV System Interlockings

EQUIPMENTS OPERATION INTERLOCK TO BE SATISFIED Type of INTERLOCK Remarks
CLOSE Either LCCB OR LCB-2 OPEN
LCB-1 Hard Wire & Soft Wire
OPEN NO INTERLOCK
CLOSE Either LCCB OR LCB-1 OPEN

LCB-2 Hard Wire & Soft Wire
OPEN NO INTERLOCK
EQUIPMENTS OPERATION INTERLOCK TO BE SATISFIED Type of INTERLOCK

CLOSE Either LCB-1 OR LCB-2 OPEN
LCCB Hard Wire & Soft Wire
OPEN NO INTERLOCK

CLOSE LBEIS (33KV) OPEN
ATCB Hard Wire & Soft Wire
OPEN NO INTERLOCK

CLOSE NO INTERLOCK
TTCB Hard Wire & Soft Wire
OPEN NO INTERLOCK

CLOSE LCB-1 OPEN LEIS-1 (66KV) OPEN
LIS-1-1 Hard Wire & Soft Wire
OPEN LCB-1 OPEN

CLOSE LCB-1 OPEN
OPEN LCB-1 OPEN

CLOSE LCB-2 OPEN LEIS-2 (66KV) OPEN
OPEN LCB-2 OPEN

CLOSE LCB-2 OPEN
OPEN LCB-2 OPEN

CLOSE CCB OPEN
CIS-1&2 Hard Wire & Soft Wire
OPEN CCB OPEN

CLOSE PT VOLTAGE = 0
LEIS-1 Hard Wire & Soft Wire
OPEN NO INTERLOCK

CLOSE ATCB OPEN
ATIS Hard Wire & Soft Wire
OPEN ATCB OPEN

CLOSE TTCB OPEN
TTIS Hard Wire & Soft Wire
OPEN TTCB OPEN

CLOSE NO INTERLOCK
PNISO Hard Wire & Soft Wire
OPEN ATCB OPEN LBCB (33KV) OPEN

CLOSE NO INTERLOCK
SNISO Hard Wire & Soft Wire
Page 1/5

66 kV GIS System Interlockings

Type of
EQUIPMENTS OPERATION
INTERLOCK TO BE SATISFIED INTERLOCK Remarks
CLOSE QZ1 & QZ2 & QZ9 & Q8 is not earthed
Q0 HARD WIRE
OPEN NO INTERLOCK
Type of
INTERLOCK TO BE SATISFIED INTERLOCK
CLOSE QZ2 & Q15 is not earthed and QZ2 is in open condition & Q0 is
QZ1 HARD WIRE
OPEN Q0 is open
Type of
CLOSE QZ1 & Q25 is not earthed and QZ1 is in open condition & Q0 is
QZ2 HARD WIRE
OPEN Q0 is open
Type of
CLOSE Q0 is open
QZ9 HARD WIRE
OPEN Q0 is open
Type of
CLOSE Q0 is open & Line PT voltage <1
Q8 HARD WIRE
OPEN NO INTERLOCK
Type of
CLOSE ALL QZ1 from F01-F09 are in open condition
Q 15 HARD WIRE
OPEN NO Interlock
Type of
CLOSE ALL QZ2 from F01-F09 are in open condition
Q 25 HARD WIRE
OPEN NO Interlock
Type of
In addition to above interlocks for Q0,Either of Line Voltage PT
CLOSE
Q0 of F02 & F08 or Selected Bus PT is Dead. HARD WIRE
OPEN No Interlock
Type of
CLOSE Either of the Bus PT is Dead
Q0 of F05 HARD WIRE
OPEN No Interlock
Type of
In addition to above interlocks for Q0, LBEIS (33kV) is in open
CLOSE
Q0 for ATCB condition HARD WIRE
OPEN No Interlock
Type of
CLOSE Either of QZ1 of F02 & F08 is open
QZ1 of F02 & F08 HARD WIRE
OPEN NO interlock
Type of
CLOSE Either of QZ2 of F02 & F08 is open
QZ2 of F02 & F08 HARD WIRE
OPEN NO interlock
Type of
EQUIPMENTS OPERATION INTERLOCK TO BE SATISFIED INTERLOCK
PNISO OPEN ATCB OPEN LBCB (33KV) OPEN HARD WIRE
Type of
CLOSE NO INTERLOCK
SNISO HARD WIRE
Page 2/5

25 KV SYSTEM INTERLOCKINGS
CLOSE Either 25 KV I/C-2 CB or 25 KV BUS COUPLER CB OPEN
25 KV I/C-1 CB Hard Wire & Soft Wire
OPEN NO INTERLOCK
CLOSE Either 25 KV I/C-1 CB or 25 KV BUS COUPLER CB OPEN
25 KV I/C-2 CB Hard Wire & Soft Wire
OPEN NO INTERLOCK
CLOSE BUS PT CHARGED OUTGOING PT DISCHARGED
Hard Wire & Soft Wire
CLOSE BUS PT DISCHARGED OUTGOING PT CHARGED
25 KV O/G CB
CLOSE BUS PT DISCHARGED OUTGOING PT DISCHARGED
OPEN NO INTERLOCK
CLOSE Either 25 KV I/C-1 CB or 25 KV I/C-2 CB OPEN
25 KV BUS CB Hard Wire & Soft Wire
OPEN NO INTERLOCK
CLOSE 25 KV I/C OPEN
25 KV I/C ISO Hard Wire & Soft Wire
OPEN 25 KV I/C OPEN
CLOSE 25 KV BUS CB OPEN
25 KV BUS ISO-1&2 Hard Wire & Soft Wire
OPEN 25 KV BUS CB OPEN
CLOSE 25 KV O/G CB OPEN
25 KV O/G ISO-1&2 Hard Wire & Soft Wire
OPEN 25 KV O/G CB OPEN
OTHER INTERLOCKINGS
FIRE PROTECTION OPERATED LVATCB & (415 V) ACDB TRIP Hard Wire & Soft Wire
WNDG. TEMP
220 KV SST HIGH Hard Wire & Soft Wire
LVATCB & (415 V) ACDB TRIP
66 KV MTR TT BUS OPERATED 25 KV INCOMER CB TRIP Hard Wire & Soft Wire
66 KV MTR AT BUS OPERATED 33 KV INCOMER CB TRIP Hard Wire & Soft Wire
ALL CBs OF 66 KV CONCERNED BAY SHOULD TRIP AND 25
66 KV BUSBAR OPERATED Kv & 33 KV I/C TRIP Hard Wire & Soft Wire
DMRC/Contract DE-04 /Vol-4/PS Page 3/5

33 kV System Interlockings
Type of
EQUIPMENT OPERATION INTERLOCK Remarks
INTERLOCK TO BE SATISFIED
CLOSE LBEIS-1 OPEN Either LBCB-2 OR LBCCB OPEN Hard Wiire &
LBCB-1
OPEN NO INTERLOCK Soft Wire
CLOSE LBEIS-2 OPEN Either LBCB-1 OR LBCCB OPEN Hard Wiire &
LBCB-2
CLOSE Either LBCB-1 OR LBCB-2 OPEN Hard Wiire &
LBCCB
CLOSE LVATEIS OPEN Hard Wiire &
LVATCB
CLOSE LFEIS OPEN Hard Wiire &
LFCB
RCCB PT
CLOSE RCEIS OPEN BUS PT CHARGED DISCHARGED
CLOSE RCEIS OPEN BUS PT DIS CHARGED BUS PT CHARGED Hard Wiire &
RCCB
RCCB PT DIS Soft Wire
CLOSE RCEIS OPEN BUS PT DIS CHARGED CHARGED
OPEN NO INTERLOCK
CLOSE LBCB OPEN ATCB (66KV) OPEN Hard Wiire &
LBEIS
Hard Wire &
LVATEIS CLOSE LVATCB OPEN LVATCB PT DIS CHARGED
Soft Wire
Hard Wire &
LFEIS CLOSE LFCB OPEN LFCB PT DIS CHARGED
Soft Wire
Hard Wire &
RCEIS CLOSE RCCB OPEN RCCB PT DIS CHARGED
Soft Wire

INTER-TRIPPINGS
EQUIPMENTS OPERATION INTERLOCK TO BE Type of INTERLOCK Remarks
Transformer Door Operated LVATCB & ACDB Trips Hard Wire & Soft Wire
Fire Protection Operated LVATCB & ACDB Trips Hard Wire & Soft Wire
EQUIPMENTS OPERATION INTERLOCK TO BE Type of INTERLOCK

66kV TTCB Trip on
Operated 25 KV I/C CB OPEN
Differential
66kV ATCB Trip on
Operated 33 KV I/C CB OPEN
Differential
EQUIPMENTS OPERATION INTERLOCK TO BE Type of INTERLOCK

33kV & 25kV Circuit Incoming AC supply
Operated Hard Wire & Soft Wire
Breaker Undervoltage Tripping

Contract- DE-04 – Particular Specification- Annexure-9 (I/O List ) of Chapter 8A
Annexure-9
INDICATIVE LIST OF CONTROL AND MONITORING SIGNALS
(I/O LIST FOR SCADA)
Normal State
Signal Type
Alarm State
Description
Alarm Type
Signal list
Feeder
Sl. No.
Origin
Alarm
Event
Class
RSS 220/132/66 KV
1 U/V Relay Status DI x x P2 Normal Operated
Status
2 VT MCB Position DI x x P2 Normal Trip
3 VTI-1 R-Y Voltage AI - - - - -
4 Y-B Voltage AI - - - - -
Measurement
5 R-B Voltage AI - - - - -
6 R Current AI - - - - -
7 CTIM-1 Y Current AI - - - - -
8 B Current AI - - - - -
9 Earth Switch Indication DI x x P0 Close -
Status
10 Earth Switch Indication DI x x P0 Open -
LEIS-1-1A
11 Close Command DO - - - - -
Control
12 Open Command DO - - - - -
Status
LEIS-1-1B
Control
17 Isolator Indication DI x x P0 Close -
Status
18 Isolator Indication DI x x P0 Open -
VTIS-1
Control
Incomer-1

Status
LIS-1-1
Control
25 L/R Mode Status DI x x P1 Remote Local
26 SCADA Permissive Indication DI x x P1 Banned Permitted
27 CB/ISO Motor Supply MCB Status DI x x P2 Normal Tripped
28 CB Control Supply MCB Status DI x x P2 Normal Tripped
29 LCC AC MCB Status DI x x P2 Normal Tripped
30 LCC DC MCB Status DI x x P2 Normal Tripped
31 Breaker Indication DI x x P0 Close -
32 Breaker Indication DI x x P0 Open -
33 CB Spring Status DI x x P1 Charged Discharged
Status
34 SF6 Gas Pressure Status DI x x P2 Normal Low
35 CB Loss of SF6 DI x x P2 Normal Alarm
36 CB Auto Trip at Lockout Pressure DI x x P2 Normal Trip
37 CB Stuck DI x x P2 Normal Alarm
38 Gas Compartment Loss Of SF6- Stage-1 DI x x P2 Normal Alarm
39 Gas Compartment Min SF6- Stage-2 DI x x P2 Normal Alarm
40 Gas Compartment SF6 Rising DI x x P2 Normal Alarm
41 CB Trouble Close/Block DI x x P2 Normal Alarm
42 CB Trip Coil 1/2 Status DI x x P3 Normal Unhealthy
DMRC/Contract DE-04 /Vol-4/PS 1 of 38

Normal State
Signal Type
Alarm State
Description
Alarm Type
Signal list
Feeder
Sl. No.
Origin
Alarm
Event
Class
44 Control Open Command DO - - - - -
45 SCADA Permissive Command DO - - - - -
LCB-1
46 MTR Status DI x x P3 Normal Unhealthy
Status
47 MTR Position DI x x P2 Normal Operated
48 Control MTR Reset Command DO - - - - -
49 Main BCPU relay Status DI x x P3 Normal Faulty
50 Standby BCPU relay Status DI x x P3 Normal Faulty
51 Over Current Stage 1 Protection DI x x P2 Normal Operated
53 Over Current IDMT Protection DI x x P2 Normal Operated
54 Over Current Protection DI x x P2 Normal Operated
55 Earth Fault stage 1 Protection DI x x P2 Normal Operated
57 Earth Fault IDMT Protection DI x x P2 Normal Operated
58 Status Earth Fault Protection DI x x P2 Normal Operated
59 Differential protection/ Distance Protection DI x x P2 Normal Operated
60 Differential protection 1 pole DI x x P2 Normal Operated
61 Differential protection 3 pole DI x x P2 Normal Operated
62 Distance Protection zone-1 DI x x P2 Normal Operated
63 Distance Protection zone-2 DI x x P2 Normal Operated
Incomer-1
64 Distance Protection Reverse zone DI x x P2 Normal Operated

65 SOTF Protection DI x x P2 Normal Operated
66 Manual close signal Status DI x x P2 Normal Alarm
67 Differential/Distance protection relay Status DI x x P3 Normal Faulty
Status
LIS-1-2A
Control
Status
LIS-1-2B
Control
Status
LEIS-1-2A
Control

Normal State
Signal Type
Alarm State
Description
Alarm Type
Signal list
Feeder
Sl. No.
Origin
Alarm
Event
Class
Status
LEIS-1-2B
Control
84 Surge Counter R-Phase IT - - - - -
Status
85 LAI-1 Surge Counter Y-Phase IT - - - - -
86 Surge Counter B-Phase IT - - - - -
Status
88 VT MCB Position DI x x P2 Normal Trip
89 VTI-2 R-Y Voltage AI - - - - -
90 Y-B Voltage AI - - - - -
Measurement
91 R-B Voltage AI - - - - -
92 R Current AI - - - - -
93 CTIM-2 Y Current AI - - - - -
94 B Current AI - - - - -
Status
LEIS-2-1A
Control
Status
LEIS-2-1B
Control
Status
VTIS-2
Control
Incomer-2

Status
LIS-2-1
Control
113 CB/ISO Motor Supply MCB Status DI x x P2 Normal Tripped
LCB-2 Status
122 CB Auto Trip at Lockout Pressure DI x x P2 Normal Trip

Normal State
Signal Type
Alarm State
Description
Alarm Type
Signal list
Feeder
Sl. No.
Origin
Alarm
Event
Class
126 Gas Compartment SF6 Rising DI x x P2 Normal Alarm
128 CB Trip Coil 1/2 Status DI x x P3 Normal Unhealthy
Status
141 LCB-2 Earth Fault stage 1 Protection DI x x P2 Normal Operated
144 Status Earth Fault Protection DI x x P2 Normal Operated
145 Differential protection/ Distance Protection DI x x p2 Normal Operated
146 Differential protection 1 pole DI x x p2 Normal Operated
147 Differential protection 3 pole DI x x p2 Normal Operated
148 Distance Protection zone-1 DI x x p2 Normal Operated
149 Distance Protection zone-2 DI x x p2 Normal Operated
Incomer-2
150 Distance Protection Reverse zone DI x x p2 Normal Operated

151 SOTF Protection DI x x p2 Normal Operated
152 Manual close signal Status DI x x p2 Normal Alarm
153 Differential/Distance protection relay Status DI x x P3 Normal Faulty
Status
LIS-2-2A
Control
Status
LIS-2-2B
Control

Normal State
Signal Type
Alarm State
Description
Alarm Type
Signal list
Feeder
Sl. No.
Origin
Alarm
Event
Class
Status
LEIS-2-2A
Control
Status
LEIS-2-2B
Control
Status
171 LAI-2 Surge Counter Y-Phase IT - - - - -

173 Voltage available in BUS-1 DI x x P2 Normal Alarm
VTC-1
174 Status VT MCB Position DI x x P2 Normal Trip
175 VTC-2 Voltage available in BUS-2 DI x x P2 Normal Alarm
Status
CIS-1
Control
Status
CEIS-1
Control
184 Close Indication DI x x P0 Close -
Status
185 Open Indication DI x x P0 Open -
CIS-2
Control
Status
CEIS-2
Control
192 Bus Bar Earth Switch Indication DI x x P0 Close -
Status
193 Bus Bar Earth Switch Indication DI x x P0 Open -
BEIS-1
Control
196 Bus Bar Earth Switch Indication DI x x P0 Close -
Status
197 Bus Bar Earth Switch Indication DI x x P0 Open -
BEIS-2
Control
Bus Coupler
202 CB/ ISO Motor Supply MCB Status DI x x P2 Normal Tripped

Normal State
Signal Type
Alarm State
Description
Alarm Type
Signal list
Feeder
Sl. No.
Origin
Alarm
Event
Class
Bus Coupler
203 CB Control Supply MCB Status DI x x P2 Normal Fail
Status
210 Gas Compt. SF6 Rising DI x x P2 Normal Alarm
CCB
216 CB auto trip at Lockout pressure DI x x P2 Normal Tripped

217 CB Trip Coil-1 & 2 Healthy DI x x P3 Normal Unhealthy
218 Status CB Spring Status DI x x P1 Charged Discharged
Status
225 O/C & E/F Relay Status DI x x P3 Normal Faulty
232 Earth Fault Protection DI x x P2 Normal Operated
Status
ATIS-1-1A
Control
Status
ATEIS-1-1A
Control
Status
ATIS-1-1B
Control

Normal State
Signal Type
Alarm State
Description
Alarm Type
Signal list
Feeder
Sl. No.
Origin
Alarm
Event
Class
Status
ATEIS-1-1B
Control
251 CB Motor Supply MCB Status DI x x P2 Normal Tripped
Status

261 Auto Trip at Lockout Pressure DI x x P2 Normal Trip
Outgoing Feeder (Auxiliary Trafo-1)

264 Gas Compt SF6 Rising DI x x P2 Normal Alarm
265 CB Trip Coil 1/2 Faulty DI x x P3 Normal Faulty
Control

ATCB-1

Status
273 Differential/Tank E/F Relay Status DI x x P3 Normal Faulty
274 Transformer Differential protection DI x x P2 Normal Operated
275 Transformer Differential Protection stage-1 Protection DI x x P2 Normal Operated
277 LV REF PROTECTION DI x x P2 Normal Operated
278 HV REF PROTECTION DI x x P2 Normal Operated
279 Standby Earth fault Relay Status DI x x P3 Normal Faulty
280 Standby Earth Fault Protection DI x x P2 Normal Operated
Status

282 STANDBY BCPU relay Status DI x x P3 Normal Faulty

Normal State
Signal Type
Alarm State
Description
Alarm Type
Signal list
Feeder
Sl. No.
Origin
Alarm
Event
Class
Status
ATEIS-1-2
Control
294 Oil Temp Alarm DI x x P3 Normal High
295 Oil temp Trip DI x x P3 Normal Operated
296 AT-1 Status OLTC PRV Trip DI x x P3 Normal Operated
297 OLTC OSR Trip DI x x P3 Normal Operated
298 Tank Earth Fault Protection DI x x P2 Normal Operated
299 Winding Temp Alarm DI x x P3 Normal High
300 Winding Temp Trip DI x x P3 Normal Operated
301 Buccholz 1st Threshold DI x x P2 Normal Alarm
302 Buccholz 2nd Threshold DI x x P2 Normal Trip
303 Transformer Oil Level status DI x x P2 Normal Low
304 Pressure relief Valve Trip Status DI x x P2 Normal Alarm
305 AVR Aux. Supply Status DI x x P2 Normal Fail
306 RTCC Auto/Manual Mode DI x x P1 Auto Manual
Status
307 RTCC Local/Remote Mode DI x x P1 Remote Local

308 T/C Alarm Mode In Local DI x x P1 Remote Local
309 T/C Lack Of Control Voltage DI x x P2 Normal Fail
310 T/C Buccholz Status DI x x P3 Normal Faulty

311 T/C Remote/Local in Local DI x x P1 Remote Local
AT-1
312 T/C Stuck/Fault DI x x P2 Normal Alarm

313 T/C in Lower Limit DI x x P2 Normal Alarm
314 T/C in Upper Limit DI x x P2 Normal Alarm
315 RTCC Auto/Manual Selection DO - - - - -
316 RTCC Local/Remote Selection DO - - - - -
Control
317 Raise Command DO - - - - -
318 Lower Command DO - - - - -
319 NIFPS Operated DI - - P2 Normal Operated
320 NIFPS Out of Service DI - - P2 Normal Operated
321 Status PNRV/TCIV valve close DI - - P2 Open Close
322 Fire Detector trip DI - - P2 Normal Trip
323 Nitrogen Cylinder Pressure low DI x x P2 Normal Alarm
324 Measurement Tap Changer Indication AI - - - - -
326 LAAT-1 Surge Counter Y-Phase IT - - - - -
Status

328 PNLA-1 Surge Counter PNLA IT - - - - -
329 SNLA-1 Surge Counter SNLA IT - - - - -
Status
ATIS-2-1A
Control
Status

Normal State
Signal Type
Alarm State
Description
Alarm Type
Signal list
Feeder
Sl. No.
Origin
Alarm
Event
Class
Status
ATEIS-2-1A
Control
Status
ATIS-2-1B
Control
Status
ATEIS-2-1B

Control
348 CB Motor Supply MCB Status DI x x P2 Normal Tripped
354 DI x x P2 Normal Low
Status
SF6 Gas Pressure Status

ATCB-2

358 Auto Trip at Lockout Pressure DI x x P2 Normal Trip
Control

Status

Normal State
Signal Type
Alarm State
Description
Alarm Type
Signal list
Feeder
Sl. No.
Origin
Alarm
Event
Class
374 LV REF PROTECTION DI x x P2 Normal Operated
375 HV REF PROTECTION DI x x P2 Normal Operated
ATCB-2
376 Standby Earth fault Relay Status DI x x P3 Normal Faulty

377 Status Standby Earth Fault Protection DI x x P2 Normal Operated
379 STANDBY BCPU relay Status DI x x P3 Normal Faulty
Status
ATEIS-2-2
Control
AT-2
393 Status OLTC PRV Trip DI x x P3 Normal Operated

394 OLTC OSR Trip DI x x P3 Normal Operated
401 Pressure relief Valve Trip Status DI x x P2 Normal Alarm
Status

405 T/C Alarm Mode In Local DI x x P1 Remote Local
AT-2


Normal State
Signal Type
Alarm State
Description
Alarm Type
Signal list
Feeder
Sl. No.
Origin
Alarm
Event
Class
413 RTCC Local/Remote selection DO - - - - -
Control
423 LAAT-2 Surge Counter Y-Phase IT - - - - -
Status

425 PNLA-2 Surge Counter PNLA IT - - - - -
426 SNLA-2 Surge Counter SNLA IT - - - - -
Status
TTIS-1-1A
Control
Outgoing Feeder (Traction Trafo-1)

Status
TTEIS-1-1A
Control
Status
TTIS-1-1B
Control
Status
TTEIS-1-1B
Control
445 LCC Motor Supply MCB Status DI x x P3 Normal Tripped
Status

455 Auto Trip TT Lockout Pressure DI x x P2 Normal Alarm

Draft No. DFA/3337 Attachment:Section VI Employer’s
Contract- DE-04 – Requirements PS (Part-2).pdf
Particular Specification- Annexure-9 (I/O List ) of Chapter 8A
Normal State
Signal Type
Alarm State
Description
Alarm Type
Signal list
Feeder
Sl. No.
Origin
Alarm
Event
Class
TTCB-1
Control
Status
Status


479 50 BF Protection Trip DI x x P2 Normal Operated
Status
TTEIS-1-2
Control
491 Pressure relief Valve Trip Status DI x x P3 Normal Tripped
492 AVR Aux. Supply DI x x P2 Normal Fail
Status

495 T/C L/R Mode Status DI x x P1 Remote Local
TT-1

Normal State
Signal Type
Alarm State
Description
Alarm Type
Signal list
Feeder
Sl. No.
Origin
Alarm
Event
Class
Control
512 Measurement RCMB return current of Cable -1 AI - - - - -
517 Surge Counter Phase-1 IT - - - - -
LATT-1 Status
Status
TTIS-2-1A
Control
Status
TTEIS-2-1A
Control
Status
TTIS-2-1B
Control
Status
TTEIS-2-1B
Control

Normal State
Signal Type
Alarm State
Description
Alarm Type
Signal list
Feeder
Sl. No.
Origin
Alarm
Event
Class
537 LCC Motor Supply MCB Status DI x x P3 Normal Tripped
Status

547 Auto Trip TT Lockout Pressure DI x x P2 Normal Alarm
548 Gas Compt. Loss of SF6 stage-1 DI x x P2 Normal Alarm

549 Gas Compt. Min SF6- Stage-2 DI x x P2 Normal Alarm
TTCB-2

Control

Status
561 Tank Leakage Protection DI x x P2 Normal Operated
Status

Status
TTEIS-2-2
Control

Normal State
Signal Type
Alarm State
Description
Alarm Type
Signal list
Feeder
Sl. No.
Origin
Alarm
Event
Class
Status
TT-2
583 Pressure relief Valve Trip Status DI x x P3 Normal Tripped
587 T/C L/R Mode Status DI x x P2 Remote Local
Status

(Traction Trafo-2)
Outgoing Feeder
Control
TT-2

LATT-2 Status
CRP Panel
611 DI x x P2 Normal Trip

Protection
Incoming AC MCB
Status
Panel
612 DC to Protection Circuit Fail -1 DI x x P2 Normal Fail

613 DC to Protection Circuit Fail - 2 DI x x P2 Normal Fail
614 Bus-1 BB Protection DI x x P2 Normal Operated
615 Bus-2 BB Protection DI x x P2 Normal Operated
616 I/C-1 Bay LBB Status DI x x P2 Normal Initiated
617 I/C-1 Bay LBB Protection DI x x P2 Normal Operated
618 I/C-2 Bay LBB Status DI x x P2 Normal Initiated
619 I/C-2 Bay LBB Protection DI x x P2 Normal Operated
620 AT-1 Bay LBB Status DI x x P2 Normal Initiated

Normal State
Signal Type
Alarm State
Description
Alarm Type
Signal list
Feeder
Sl. No.
Origin
Alarm
Event
Class
Bus Bar
621 AT-1 Bay LBB Protection DI x x P2 Normal Operated
Bus Bar Panel Status
622 AT-2 Bay LBB Status DI x x P2 Normal Initiated
623 AT-2 Bay LBB Protection DI x x P2 Normal Operated
624 TT-1 Bay LBB Status DI x x P2 Normal Initiated
625 TT-1 Bay LBB Protection DI x x P2 Normal Operated
626 TT-2 Bay LBB Status DI x x P2 Normal Initiated
627 TT-2 Bay LBB Protection DI x x P2 Normal Operated
628 Bus Coupler Bay LBB Status DI x x P2 Normal Initiated
629 Bus Coupler Bay LBB Protection DI x x P2 Normal Operated
AMS 33KV
630 R-Y Voltage AI - - - - -

631 LBVT-1 MeasurementY-B Voltage AI - - - - -
632 B-R Voltage AI - - - - -
633 Disconnector Switch Indication DI x x P0 Close -
Status
634 Disconnector Switch Indication DI x x P0 Open -
LBIS-1
635 Disconnector Switch open command DO - - - - -
Control
636 Disconnector Switch close command DO - - - - -
Status
LBEIS-1
639 Earth Switch open command DO - - - - -
Control
640 Earth Switch close command DO - - - - -
645 CB Position DI x x P2 Service Test
Incomer-1

Status

654 CB Trip Coil Status DI x x P3 Normal Unhealthy
LBCB-1
657 MTR reset command DO - - - - -

658 CB compartment SF6 pressure high DI x x P2 Normal Operated
659 CB compartment SF6 pressure low- Stage-1 DI x x P2 Normal Operated
663 Lack of Control Voltage DI x x P2 Normal Fail
664 CB Drive Status DI x x P2 Normal Prohibited

Normal State
Signal Type
Alarm State
Description
Alarm Type
Signal list
Feeder
Sl. No.
Origin
Alarm
Event
Class
669 R Phase Current AI - - - - -
670 Measurement Y Phase Current AI - - - - -
671 B Phase Current AI - - - - -
LALBCB-1
673 Surge Counter Y-Phase IT - - - - -
675 R-Y Voltage AI - - - - -
676 LBVT-2 Measurement Y-B Voltage AI - - - - -
677 B-R Voltage AI - - - - -
Status
LBIS-2
Control
Status
LBEIS-2
Control
Incomer-2

Status

LBCB-2


Normal State
Signal Type
Alarm State
Description
Alarm Type
Signal list
Feeder
Sl. No.
Origin
Alarm
Event
Class
LALBCB-2
720 R-Y Voltage AI - - - - -
721 LBCVT-1 Measurement Y-B Voltage AI - - - - -
722 B-R Voltage AI - - - - -
723 R-Y Voltage AI - - - - -
724 LBCVT-2 Measurement Y-B Voltage AI - - - - -
725 B-R Voltage AI - - - - -
Status

LBCCB

Control

754 R-Y Voltage AI - - - - -

Normal State
Signal Type
Alarm State
Description
Alarm Type
Signal list
Feeder
Sl. No.
Origin
Alarm
Event
Class
755 RCCVT-1 Measurement Y-B Voltage AI - - - - -
756 B-R Voltage AI - - - - -
Status
RCIS-1
Control
Status
RCEIS-1
Control
(ASS Network Cable-1)

Outgoing Feeder

Status

778 CB Trip Coil status DI x x P3 Normal Unhealthy
RCCB1


Normal State
Signal Type
Alarm State
Description
Alarm Type
Signal list
Feeder
Sl. No.
Origin
Alarm
Event
Class
785 Lack of Control voltage DI x x P2 Normal Fail
788 Differential protection (If any) DI x x P2 Normal Operated
789 Differential protection relay Status (If any) DI x x P2 Normal Faulty
Control
LARCCB-1

799 R-Y Voltage AI - - - - -
800 RCCVT-2 Measurement
Y-B Voltage AI - - - - -
801 B-R Voltage AI - - - - -
Status
RCIS-2
Control
Status
RCEIS-2
Control
Status

(ASS Network Cable-2)
Outgoing Feeder

RCCB2
826 MTR Reset command DO - - - - -


Normal State
Signal Type
Alarm State
Description
Alarm Type
Signal list
Feeder
Sl. No.
Origin
Alarm
Event
Class
833 Differential protection (If any) DI x x P2 Normal Operated
Status
834 Differential protection relay Status (If any) DI x x P3 Normal Faulty
Control
LARCCB-2

844 R-Y Voltage AI - - - - -
845 LFCVT-1 Measurement Y-B Voltage AI - - - - -
846 B-R Voltage AI - - - - -
Status
LFIS-1
Control
Status
LFEIS-1
Control
(Network Cable Spare-1)
H02 Outgoing Feeder

LFCB1
Status


Normal State
Signal Type
Alarm State
Description
Alarm Type
Signal list
Feeder
Sl. No.
Origin
Alarm
Event
Class
Control

Outgoing Feeder

LFCB1

LALFCB-1

887 R-Y Voltage AI - - - - -
888 LFCVT-2 Measurement Y-B Voltage AI - - - - -
889 B-R Voltage AI - - - - -
Status
LFIS-2
Control
Status
LFEIS-2
Control
Status

Outgoing Feeder

LFCB2


Normal State
Signal Type
Alarm State
Description
Alarm Type
Signal list
Feeder
Sl. No.
Origin
Alarm
Event
Class
Control
927 LALFCB-2 Surge Counter R-Phase IT - - - - -
930 R-Y Voltage AI - - - - -
931 LVATCVT-1 Measurement Y-B Voltage AI - - - - -
932 B-R Voltage AI - - - - -
Status
LVATIS-1
Control
Status
LVATEIS-1
Control
LVATCB1

Status

Outgoing Feeder (Auxiliary Trafo -1)

961 50 BF Protection Operated DI x x P1 Normal Operated

Normal State
Signal Type
Alarm State
Description
Alarm Type
Signal list
Feeder
Sl. No.
Origin
Alarm
Event
Class
Control
969 LVATCB1 Measurement Y Phase Current AI - - - - -
LALVATCB-1
974 Transformer door Status DI x x P0 Close Open

975 Transformer door Trip DI x x P0 Normal Trip
976 SST-1 Status Winding Temp. Alarm DI x x P3 Normal High
977 Winding Temp. Trip DI x x P3 Normal Trip
978 Winding temperature AI - - - - -
979 R-Y Voltage AI - - - - -
980 LVATCVT-2 Measurement Y-B Voltage AI - - - - -
981 B-R Voltage AI - - - - -
Status
LVATIS-2
Control
Status
LVATEIS2
Control
LVATCB2

Status

(Auxiliary Trafo -2)
Outgoing Feeder


Normal State
Signal Type
Alarm State
Description
Alarm Type
Trafo -2)
Signal list
Feeder
OutgoingFeeder
Sl. No.
Origin
Alarm
Event
Class
(Auxiliary
Control
LVATCB2

LALVATCB-2
1023 Transformer door Status DI x x P0 Close Open

1024 Transformer door Trip DI x x P0 Normal Trip
1025 SST-2 Status Winding Temp. Alarm DI x x P3 Normal High
1026 Winding Temp. Trip DI x x P3 Normal Operated
1027 Winding temperature AI - - - - -
TSS 25KV

1033 Trip Coil Status DI x x P3 Healthy Unhealthy
Status
1034 SF6 Pressure Low Status DI x x P2 Normal Alarm

1035 SF6 Pressure Low Low Status DI x x P2 Normal Alarm
1037 Control AC Supply Fail DI x x P2 Normal Alarm
1040 VT In service status DI x x P1 Connected Prohibited
CB-1
Control

1044 Control Lockout Relay Reset Command DO - - - - -
1045 Overcurrent Relay Status DI x x P3 Normal Faulty
1046 Overcurrent Protection DI x x P2 Normal Operated
Incomer-1 Bay

Status
1050 Directional Power Protection alarm DI x x P2 Normal Alarm

1051 Directional Power Protection operated DI x x P2 Normal Operated

Normal State
Signal Type
Alarm State
Description
Alarm Type
Signal list
Feeder
Sl. No.
Origin
Alarm
Event
Class
1052 VDOC protection operated DI x x P2 Normal Operated
1056 TCT-1 Current AI - - - - -
Measurement
1057 Voltage AI - - - - -
VTB-1
1058 Status VT MCB Position DI x x P2 Normal Trip
1059 Isolator indication DI x x P0 Close -
Status
1060 Isolator indication DI x x P0 Open -
1061 Isolator Close Command DO - - - - -
Control
1062 Isolator Open Command DO - - - - -
SP-1
1063 ES Close DI x x P0 Close -

Status
1064 ES Open DI x x P0 Open -
1065 ES Close Command DO - - - - -
Control
1066 ES Open Command DO - - - - -
1067 CB compartment SF6 pressure low- Stage-1 DI x x P3 Healthy Unhealthy
1068 Status CB compartment SF6 pressure low- Stage-2 DI x x P1 Normal Operated
1069 SF6 high pressure for compartments DI x x P3 Healthy Unhealthy
1070 LA-1 Status Surge Counter IT - - - - -
Status

1079 Control AC Supply Fail DI x x P2 Normal Fail
CB2
Control

Incomer-2 Bay

1088 Over Current Relay Status DI x x P3 Normal Faulty
Status
1093 Directional Power Protection alarm DI x x P2 Normal Alarm

1094 Directional Power Protection operated DI x x P2 Normal Operated

Normal State
Signal Type
Alarm State
Description
Alarm Type
Signal list
Feeder
Sl. No.
Origin
Alarm
Event
Class
1097 50 BF Protection Trip DI x x P2 Normal Trip
1099 TCT-2 Current AI - - - - -
Measurement
1100 Voltage AI - - - - -
VTB-2
1101 Status VT MCB Position DI x x P2 Normal Tripped
Status
1103 SP2 Isolator indication DI x x P0 Open -
Control
Status
SP2
Incomer-2 Bay-

Control
1111 Status CB compartment SF6 pressure low- Stage-2 DI x x P1 Normal Operated
1113 LA-2 Status Surge Counter IT - - - - -
Status

1121 SF6 Pressure Low Status Low DI x x P2 Normal Alarm
BC

Control

1133 Overcurrent Protection DI x x P2 Normal Operated
Status
1134 Directional Power Protection DI x x P2 Normal Operated

1135 Directional Power Stage-1 Protection DI x x P2 Normal Operated
1136 Directional Power Stage-2 Protection DI x x P2 Normal Operated
Bus-Coupler-

Status
Control
SP-1-A

Status

Normal State
Signal Type
Alarm State
Description
Alarm Type
Signal list
Feeder
Sl. No.
Origin
Alarm
Event
Class
Status
Control
Status
Control
1148 SP-1-B Isolator Open Command DO - - - - -
Status
Control
SP-1-A
1155 Status ES Close DO - - - - -

1156 ES Open DO - - - - -
1157 BPT-1 MCB Position DI x x P2 Normal Tripped
SP-1-B
1160 Status ES Close DO - - - - -

1161 ES Open DO - - - - -
1162 BPT-2 MCB Position DI x x P2 Normal Tripped
Status
(UP-1) Bay
Control
Outgoing

SP
Status
Control
Status

CB- UP-1

1182 Trip Coil Status DI x x P3 Normal Faulty
Control


Normal State
Signal Type
Alarm State
Description
Alarm Type
Signal list
Feeder
Sl. No.
Origin
Alarm
Event
Class
1190 Over Current Protection operated DI x x P2 Normal Operated
1193 Differential Relay Status DI x x P3 Normal Faulty
1194 Differential (87L) Protection DI x x P2 Normal Operated
1195 Distance Relay Status DI x x P3 Normal Faulty
1196 Distance (21) Protection operated DI x x P2 Normal Alarm
(UP-1) Bay-
Outgoing
1197 Distance-Zone-1 operated DI x x P2 Normal Operated

1201 Fault Distance AI - - - - -
1202 Fault Current AI - - - - -
1203 Fault Impedance AI - - - - -
Status
1204 VDOC Protection operated DI x x P2 Normal Operated

1205 PFR Protection Initiation DI x x P2 Normal Operated
CB UP-1
1206 PFR Protection OPTD from respective feeders DI x x P2 Normal Operated

1207 Local PFR Bypass/Enable Indication DI x x P2 Bypass Enable
1208 OCC PFR Bypass/Enable Indication DI x x P2 Bypass Enable
1209 PFR Protection POP UP DI x x _ _ _
1210 ARC Block Indication DI x x P2 Unblock Block

1214 ARC Lockout DI x x P2 Normal Operated
1215 ARC Successful Indication DI x x P2 Normal Operated
1217 50 BF Block Indication DI x x P2 Unblock Block
1218 50 BF Indication DI x x P2 Normal Operated
1219 50 BF Reset POP UP DI x x _ Normal
1220 PFR PoP UP Command DO x x - Reset -
1221 PFR Command (Configure at OCC) DO x x - Bypass Enable
1222 Control 50BF PoP UP Command DO x x - Reset
1223 50 BF Block Command DO x x - Unblock Block
1224 ARC Block Command DO x x - Unblock Block
1225 LA Status Surge Counter IT - - - -
Status
Control
SP
Status

Normal State
Signal Type
Alarm State
Description
Alarm Type
Signal list
Feeder
Sl. No.
Origin
Alarm
Event
Class
Control
Status
Control

Outgoing
(DN-1)

CB DN-1

Status



Normal State
Signal Type
Alarm State
Description
Alarm Type
Signal list
Feeder
Sl. No.
Origin
Alarm
Event
Class

1283 PFR POPP UP Command DO x x - Reset -
1288 LA Status Surge Counter IT - - - - -
Status
Control
(UP-2) Bay
Outgoing

SP
Status
Control

Normal State
Signal Type
Alarm State
Description
Alarm Type
Signal list
Feeder
Sl. No.
Origin
Alarm
Event
Class
Status
Control

CB UP-2
(UP-2) Bay
Outgoing

Status


1337 ARC Lockout DI x x P2 _ _
1338 SF6 low pressure for compartments DI x x P3 Healthy Unhealthy

1339 SF6 high pressure for compartments- Stage-1
1340 SF6 high pressure for compartments- Stage-2 DI x x P3 Healthy Unhealthy

Normal State
Signal Type
Alarm State
Description
Alarm Type
Signal list
Feeder
Sl. No.
Origin
Alarm
Event
Class
Status
Control
SP
Status
Control
Status

Control

Outgoing
(DN-2)


Normal State
Signal Type
Alarm State
Description
Alarm Type
Signal list
Feeder
Sl. No.
Origin
Alarm
Event
Class
CB DN-2
1393 Status Fault Current AI - - - - -

1401 ARC Lockout DI x x P2 _ _
1402 SF6 low pressure for compartments DI x x P3 Healthy Unhealthy

1403 SF6 low pressure for compartments-Stage-1 DI x x P3 Healthy Unhealthy
1404 SF6 low pressure for compartments-Stage-2 DI x x P3 Healthy Unhealthy
1410 50 BF Reset POP UP DI x x - Normal
1417 Incoming AC MCB DI x x P2 Normal Trip
25 KV
Protection
CRP
Status
1418 Panel DC to Protection Circuit Status DI x x P2 Normal Fail
AC-DC Distribution Signal
1419 Auto/Manual Selection DO - - - - -

Control
1420 Local/Remote Selection DO - - - - -
ACDB
Auto/Manual Mode Status DI x x P1 Auto Manual
Status
1421

Normal State
Signal Type
Alarm State
Description
Alarm Type
Signal list
Feeder
Sl. No.
Origin
Alarm
Event
Class
Status
1427 Trip Relay Position DI x x P2 Normal Operated
LVCB1
1428 Thermal Overload Protection DI x x P2 Normal Operated
1429 Under Voltage Trip DI x x P2 Normal Operated
1431 Change Over in SCADA mode DI x x P1 Banned Permitted

ACDB

LVCCB
1441 Under Voltage Trip DI x x P2 Normal Operated
1443 Change Over in SCADA mode DI x x P1 Banned Permitted

LVCB2

Control
1458 Auto/Manual Selection DO - - - - -

Control
1459 Local/Remote Selection DO - - - - -
DCDB
Auto/Manual Mode Status DI x x P1 Auto Manual
Status
1460
1463 Control Voltage Healthy DI x x P2 Normal Unhealthy

DCACB1

Control

Normal State
Signal Type
Alarm State
Description
Alarm Type
Signal list
Feeder
Sl. No.
Origin
Alarm
Event
Class
Control Voltage Healthy DI x x P2 Normal Unhealthy
Status
1473
DCACCB
1475 DCDB Breaker Indication DI x x P0 Open -
Control

Control Voltage Healthy DI x x P2 Normal Unhealthy
Status
1480
DCACB2

Control
1486 Battery voltage AI - - - - -

110V Bus1
1487 Lack of 110 V DI x x P0 Normal Alarm
Status
1488 Battery voltage AI - - - - -
110V Bus2
1489 Lack of 110 V DI x x P0 Normal Alarm
1490 Input MCB Status DI x x P0 Normal Trip
1491 Output MCB Status DI x x P0 Normal Trip

Battery Charger-1
1492 Charger Mode DI x x P2 Float Boost

AC Status DI x x P2 Normal Fail
Status
1493 Battery
Charger-1 Charger Status DI x x P2 Normal Unhealthy
1494
1495 Charger On Position DI x x P1 Normal Standby
1496 DC Under Voltage DI x x P2 Normal Alarm
1497 DC Over Voltage DI x x P2 Normal Alarm

Battery Charger-2

AC Status DI x x P2 Normal Fail
Status
1501 Battery
Charger-2 Charger Status DI x x P2 Normal Unhealthy
1502
1503 Charger On DI x x P1 Normal Standby

Battery Charger-Standby

Battery AC Status DI x x P2 Normal Fail
Status
1509
Charger-
1510 Standby Charger Status DI x x P2 Normal Unhealthy
1511 Charger On Position DI x x P1 Normal Standby

Normal State
Signal Type
Alarm State
Description
Alarm Type
Signal list
Feeder
Sl. No.
Origin
Alarm
Event
Class
1514 UPS/Inverter ON/OFF Status DI x x P2 ON OFF
UPS/Inverter
1515 UPS/Inverter Normal/Fail Status DI x x P2 Normal Fail
UPS/Inverter status
UPS/Inverter Bypass Status DI x x P2 _ Bypass
1516
UPS/Inverter Manual Bypass Status DI x x P2 _ Bypass
1517
1518 FACP Status DI x x P0 Normal Unhealthy
1519 FACP FACP Status Fire alarm DI x x P0 Normal Operated

Fire alarm acknowledgement DO _ _ _ _ _
1520
ACDB Inergen ACDB Inergen Gas flooding system status DI x x P2 Normal Unhealthy
1521 Status
Gas flooding
1522 system ACDB Inergen Gas flooding system Operated DI x x P0 Normal Operated
1523 33kV Bus-1 Inergen Gas flooding system status DI x x P2 Normal Unhealthy
33kV Inergen 33kV Bus-1 Inergen Gas flooding system Operated DI x x P0 Normal Operated
1524 Inergen Gas flooding Status
1525 Gas system 33kV Bus-2 Inergen Gas flooding system status DI x x P2 Normal Unhealthy
flooding
1526 system 33kV Bus-2 Inergen Gas flooding system Operated DI x x P0 Normal Operated
1527 SST-1 Inergen Gas flooding system status DI x x P2 Normal Unhealthy

SST Inergen
1528 SST -1 Inergen Gas flooding system Operated DI x x P0 Normal Operated
Gas flooding Status
1529 system SST -2 Inergen Gas flooding system status DI x x P2 Normal Unhealthy
1530 SST -2 Inergen Gas flooding system Operated DI x x P0 Normal Operated
RSS 220/132/66 KV Energy Metering
1531 Active Power (KW) (Import) AI - - - - -

1532 Active Power (KW) (Export) AI - - - - -
1533 Reactive Power (KVAR) AI - - - - -
1534 Apparent Power (KVA) (Import) AI - - - - -
1535 Apparent Power (KVA) (Export) AI - - - - -
1536 Power Factor (PF) AI - - - - -
Measurement
Energy Meter
Incomer 1
1537 Frequency (F) AI - - - - -

1538 Active Energy (KWh) AI - - - - -
1539 Reactive Energy (KWRh) AI - - - - -
1540 Apparent Energy (KVAh) AI - - - - -
1541 Maximum Demand (MVA) AI - - - - -
1542 Maximum Demand (MW)
1543 Integrated Maximum Demand AI - - - - -
1544 Total Harmonics Distortion (TDH) AI - - - - -
1545 Active Power (KW) (Import) AI - - - - -
1546 Active Power (KW) (Export) AI - - - - -
1548 Apparent Power (KVA) (Import) AI - - - - -
1549 Apparent Power (KVA) (Export) AI - - - - -
Measurement
Energy Meter

Incomer 2
1551 Frequency (F) AI - - - - -

1555 Maximum Demand (MDI) AI - - - - -

Normal State
Signal Type
Alarm State
Description
Alarm Type
Signal list
Feeder
Sl. No.
Origin
Alarm
Event
Class
AMS 33 KV Energy Metering
1558 Active Power (KW) AI - - - - -

H03 Incomer - 1 & 2 and All Outgoing feeders to Main

line, Interlinking Line, SST and depot feeders
1560 Apparent Power (KVA) AI - - - - -

1562 Frequency (F) AI - - - - -
Measurement

Energy Meter
1567 Phase Angle RY AI - - - - -
1568 Phase Angle YB AI - - - - -
1569 Phase Angle BR AI - - - - -
TSS 25 KV Energy Metering
Incomer - 1 & 2 and All Outgoing feeders to
1572 Active Power (KW) AI - - - - -

Main line, Interlinking Line and depot

1574 Apparent Power (KVA) AI - - - - -
Measurement
1576 Frequency (F) AI - - - - -

feeders
1577 Energy Meter Active Energy (KWh) AI - - - - -

• DI: Digital Input, DO: Digital Output, AI: Analog Input, IT: Integrated total. Source of origin of all signals:- RSS gate way. Destination of all
signals:- OCC/BCC (BCC-if applicable).Mode of Signals:-Soft.
• For metering purpose signals should come from metering core of CT's.
• Nomenclature and Colour coding scheme for the SCADA system shall be as per DMRC’s existing SCADA system and as approved by the
Employer..
• The above signals are indicative and may change at design stage. Any signal not indicated above but required as per tender specification
shall be provided by the contractor at no extra cost to DMRC.

Contract- DE-04 – Particular Specification- Annexure-10 (Protection Philosophy) of Chapter 8A
:i]o
,---. -,---~------------.---1
Draft No. DFA/3337
Attachment:Section VI Employer’s Requirements PS (Part-2).pdf
issue !Rev No. : ca DELHI METRO RAIL CORPORATION I,
LIMITED I
Issue Date : 24.06.2017 ELECTRICAL DEPARTMENT
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~_J
No: DMRC/Protection Philosophy/01 /2017
.PROTECTION PHILOSOPHY OF
DMRC TRACTION & AUXILIARY SYSTEM
Total No. of Pages- 11
Note: - This Protection Philosophy is the property of DMRC and this philosophy is not for
general use. No reproduction shall be done without permission from the Director
Electrical DMRC Ltd. Metro BhawanBarakhamba Road Delhi-110001.

Draft No. DFA/3337 Attachment:Section VI Employer’s Requirements PS (Part-2).pdf
------·-----··---------.--------'-------------~----'-~r--------
.
Issue /Rev No. : 08 DELHI METRO RAIL CORPORATION·
LIMITED
Issue/Rev Date : 24.06.2017 ELECTRICAL 'DEPARTMENT
Table of Contents . .
INTRODUCTION : .. l' ·. '

.
l.
.
3
PROTECTION PHILOSOPHY OF DMRC TRACTION SYSTEM :,. - : 4
1. Protectlcnlnzskv Outgoing Feeder •........................ : ;: , J 4

1.1 Distance protection (21) .. :········; ..J __ :·: , 4
1.2 · IDMT Over current protection (51) ~ :,..': , 4

. - ' . '
1.3 .Voltage dependent over current /{VDOC) protection with DMT Characteristic (50V) 4
1.4 : Emergency/Back-up over current , , .. ~ 4
1.5 · Auto Reclose function : ', -- 5

( ' :
1.6 WPC and PFR

.
: .. '.
~
; 1.~ .
: 5
1.7 MTR : : .. l y············ .. ································································5

1.8 DC under voltage tripping shall be provided in all 25 kV feed~r breakers at TSS 5
2 Protection in 25KV Incomer Feeder _. ~ , ...• ; : ~ •• 5
2.1 IDMT over current Protection 1 : 5
2.2 Voltage.dependent over current! (VDOC) protection with DMT Characteristic. : 5
2.3 Breaker Failure Protection (50BF)

. .
l i .
:..:· · : 5
2.4 Under Voltage Protection {27} .. :

• : : # •
5
3 Prctectionin Tra~ion Transformer (TTCB}/ Feeder at RSS 6
3.1 Biased Differential Protection : : 6
3.2 IDMT Over current. (51) and DMT Over Current {50) Protection : ; , .. 6
. : :
3.3 Transformer Tank Earth Fault Protection (64} L : 6
4 Protection in 33kV Outgoing Feeder; (LVATCB & RCCB) feeder at RSS , 6

. . .
4.1 Over current and Earth fault Protection (50/51, 50 N/51 N) .. - - 6
4.2 Breaker Failure Protection (SOBF) ,. _ '. : 6
5 Protection in 33kV Incomer (LBCB) Feeder at RSS - ! 7
5.1 Over current and Earth Fa~lt Protection (S0/51,SON/SlN) .. _ , 7
5.2 Under Voltage Protection (-27) L .. _ ; 7
6 Protection in Afiliary.Transformer (ATCB} Feeder at RSS ~ : ~ 7
6.1 Biased Differential protection .. ~ : _ 7

6.2 Over Current and Earth fault Protection (S0/51, 50 N/51 N) .1-. ~ .. - - 7
. . .
6.3 Transformer Tank Earth fault protraction (64) -·····-···············'······· 8

5.4 HV and LV REF Protection _ ,. - _ :. , - 8
6.5 Standby Earth Fault Protection shall be provided - : c 8
ljPage

,-;:::-~Rev No. : 08 DELHI METRO RAIL CORPORATION·

LIMITED
!issue/Rev Date : 24.06.2017 ELECTRICAL DEPARTMENT
7 220kV/13ikV/66kVBus-bar : l. : 8
7.1 Bus barDifferential 9rotection L.. : : i. 8
7.2 Local breaker backup protection (LBB) : : 8 •
8 Protection in 220/132/GGkV (LCB) Incomer Feeder at RSS e~d ;: ~ 8

8.1 Integrated Distance cum Line Differential Protection (21/87 L] : 8
. .
8;2 Over C~rrent and Earth fault Protection (SO/Sl; SO N/Sl N) : 8
8.3 Under Voltage (27)/0ver Voltage' Protection (S9)

. :
: .l..; . :
9
9 Protection in Discern End Feeder:- L : 9

9.1 Line Differential Protection (87 Lj : : ~ : 9
: .· : .
9.2 Integrated Distance cum Line differential protection at Discom End (Zl/87L) 9
(
9.3 Over current and Earth fault Protection (SO; Sl, SON, S1N) 9
10 General/ Miscellaneous:- : : 9
. ' ;
10.1 Main/ standby relay logic

:
c ........................•.•..•
'
1...:
10
10.2 Master Trip Relay (MTR) ; .. , ' : : 10

. ' : . -
10.3 IEC-6l8SO compatibility , : :: , 10
10.4 Operating tlme of Relay/ MTR/CB ::: ; 10
10.s Short Circuit Study : : ~ .': ....•................... 10
10.6 ·. Format for testing and record :~ ) 10
11 Protection in Auxiliary sub-station ,~ :··· 11

' .
. ; :
11.l Ring Main Circuit Breaker ' J 11

~ i
11.2 Transformer Protection Circuit Breaker L.. : 11
. .
12 Protection for Depot traction feeder fe~ from mainline 11
/.
[ .
2iPage

Contract- DE-04 – Particular Specification- Annexure-10 (Protection Philosophy) of
~·-
Chapter 8A
lr:~:_:~F~ev No. : oa . . DELHI METRO RAIL CORPORATION(

t
j Issue/Rev Date : 24.06.2017
LIMITED
ELECTRICAL DEPARTMENT :
'---~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
INTRODUCTION . . ; .
The protection philosophy of DMRC RSS (including TSS & AMS) and ASS Is prepared based
upon the protection philosophy adopted tin DMRC Phase-I and Phase-Z substations.
Based on field requirements, new protections which.are, added and were not available in
Phase-1 & 2 have been highlighted in Req color. . -.
Protection philosophy of ASS is already ab proved and is-attached with this ~ocument.
The logic for Panto-flash~.vi[ h~~~J;:~r9ng phas_e Coupling protection for 2SkV outgoing
feeder, as proposed by a;-comrrntte~ rs under testing. ·
. :- : .
In Phase-3 receiving substations, for each feeder one main and one standby relays have
been provided. 'Both main & ~andby protection relavs shallwork on Hot-Hot mode.
The final approved protection philosophy will be implemented in . Phase-B - as well as Phase-·
1&2 Substations ..
i
1
t
3IPage

-
Issue /Rev No. : 08
,.
Issue/Rev Date : 24.06.2017

DELHI ME I RO RAIL CORPOR.ATJON
LIMITED
ELECTRICAL DEPARTMENT
. .
e
PROTECTION PHILOSOPHY OF DMRC TRACTION SYSTEM
1. · Protection in 25KV Outgoing Feeder
• Distance Protection ( 21}
• Fuse Failure Monitoring for Distance Protection.
• IDMT Over current protection (51}
• VDOC (Voltage Dependent Over Current) Protection with DMT Characteristic.
• Emergency/Back-up Over Current.
• Auto-Recloser
• Wrong Phase Coupling
• Pantograph Flashover Protection
. (
• Master trip relay
• DC U/V tripping
1.1 Distance·protection (21)

The calculation of the distance ·protection function is done on the basis of per kilo
meter impedance including OHE. conductor, cables (from TSS to . feeding . post) and
the impedance of BT's connected in line. The line Up to first neutral section .is
covered in ZONE-1 with 0 msec time delay and Up to Second neutral section is
covered i~ Zone-2 with 0 msec time delay.
Fault locator for distance protection shall have independent tones/section wise
impedances can be set covering all cable, FOCS and ROCS sections.
PT indication for DPR to be taken from BUS PT only.
The Distance protection shall be configured with FFM (Fuse Failure Monitoring). If
the PT_fuse gets b~rnt out or any problem occurs in PT circuit the Distance (
protection should belblocked by, FFM function.
1.2 IDMT Over current protection (Si)

The setting of IDMT over current function (51) is calculated on the basis of
continuo~s current carrying capacity of the catenary svstern (800A, with 150 sq. mm
Contact -t GS sq. mm Catenary) or the capacity of 2_5kV feeding cable to OHE
(whichever is lower).
1.3 Voltage ci·e.pl~dent over currenqVDOC) protection with DMT Characteristic (SOV)
In case of PT fuse failure the VOOC protection should be disabled automatically. The
delay for VDOC/DMT shall be ke1=,-: 3:; 50rr,sec.
1.4 Emergency/Back .. up over current.

This function should onlv be activated with "D!st;.;; ve 1 Protection Bloch=:d Signai''7
4jPage

1~:;~~--~ JRev No. : 08

.
DELHI METRO RAIL CORPORAT,ON

.
LIMITED
l;~sue/Rev Date : 24.06.2017 ELECTRICAL DEPARTM.ENT
1.5 Auto Reclose function ' '
A single shot Auto Reclose Function is to be implemented in 25KV feeder .with

Distance protection only. The setting of ARC (Auto Recloser) will beias belowi-
• • j . • .
Dead Time 1.0 sec (Depending on the Rolling Stock for Train's VCB under
voltage time delay. At NDRSSit is set at 2.1 Sec. According to
BT Trains]
Reclaim time - ARC to be blocked. indefinitely after. one.operation. : .
Block/unblock and Reset features is to be provided from OCC for 25kV outgoing
breakers. Blocking of ARC through Manual switch and SCADA to be provided. Also
( under PFR and WPC tripping, AR function to be blocked.
1.6 WPC and PFR

The scheme for WPC and PFR will be as per committee report.
1.7 MTR
For all 25kV feeder. CBs (including 25kV CBs at UG feeding posts), MTR shall be of
auto & Scada reset type. For initiating tripping of-CS-by'-ONE.heavy duty contact of .
DPR and one through SECON_D CONTACT of DPR, through MTR should be initlated.
The MTR relay contact should be connected in parallel to·E>PR contact.
1.8 DC under voltage

.
tripping
.
shall
.
be provided in all 25 kV feeder breakers at TSS.
:· .
2 Protection in iSKV Incomer Feeder
•
•
/ .
IDMT Over current protection (51) in co-ordination.
Voltage. Dependent Over Current (VDOC) protection with DMT.·Characteristic
{SOV) with 150ms delay.
• Breaker Failure Protection (SOBF)
• Under Vo1tage Protection (2.7)
2.1 IDMT Overcurrent Protection

These setting are also co-ordinated with downstream breaker.
2.2. Voltage dependent over current (V.DOC) protectionwith DMT Characteristic.

In case of PT fuse failure the VDOC protection should be disabled automatically. The
delay for VDOC/DMT wiil be keptas 150msec.
I .
2.3 Breaker Failure Protection (SOBF)

Breaker Failure protection shall be impiemented in 25KV 10comer with TICB to act as
Back-up in case any circuit breaker stuck-up.
2.4 Under Voltage Protection (27)

Under voltage protection is required to prevent back'Ieeding and accidental charging
of traction transformer.
SjPage

r . .
! Issue /Rev No. : 08

f
I
' .
issue/Rev Date : 24.06.2017
. DELHI l\llETRO RAIL CORPORATION
Lli'JHTED
ELECTRICAL DEPARTMENT
01 I
r .
3 Protection in Traction Transformer {TTCB)/ Feeder at RSS

• Biased Differential protection ( 87T)
• IDMT & T~o stages DMT Over Current Protectiont 51 &50-1, 50-2)
•. !
• Transformer Tan~ Earth fault protraction (64)
3.1 Biased Differential Protection

Differential 'should be able to protect against fault in either of Primary Ptiases and
the secon~ary in the protection zone. Second Harmonic Blocking is to be activated.
Also stability test is a must before charging ..
3:2 IDMT Over current (51) and DMT Over Current (50) Protection
(
These setting are also coordinated with downstream breaker.
The setting·of Two Stage DMT over current function (50-1 & 50-2) to be below of
short circuit fault level of transformer at primary I secondq.ry side. These setting are
also co-ordi.nated with downstream circuit breakers with time grading.
This protection works as backup of Biased Differential protection.
To act as a back-up of Downstream circuit

(50-1) Breaker.
For Instantaneous Tripping in case Bus fault or

(50-2)
1:1igh Intensity F9ult .. '.
I
3.3 Transformer Tank Earth Fault Protection (64) .
To mitigate the leakage current and corresponding human risk, tank earth fault
protection is used with leakage current of 5-lOA with instantaneous tripping.
4 Protection in 33kV Outgoing Feeder (LVATCB & RCCB) Feeder at RSS

- . ' -·
• IDMT & DMT Over Current Protection( 51 & 50-1, 50-2)
. .
• Breaker Failure Protection (50BF) of LVATCB with LBCB
4.1 Over current and Earth fault Protection (50/51, 50 N/51 N)

The current setting of IDMT over current function (51) is to be kept at rated capacity
of transformer i.n LVATCB/ Cable in RCGL • . .
2nd Harmonics fsloddng· is to be Activated /implemented to block the Earth Fault
protection .during inrush condition (Charglng of Transformer). Th~ relay settings of
RCCB to be coordinated with 33kV ring network.
4.2 Breaker Failure Protection (SOBF)

Breaker Failure protection to be implemented in 33kV transformer breaker (LVATCB)
for Back-up in case any CB stuck-up. 50 BF protections wil! issue 3. Trip Command to
6\Page

F~~
I
/Rev No. : 08 DELHI METRO RAIL CORPO.RATION •
LIMITED
. . .
j Issue/Rev Date : 24.06.2017 ELECJRICAL DEPARTMENT

; .
Upstream CB {Respective LBCB) in case there is problem in 33KV LVATCB or in
control circuit.
.·.
s Protection in.33kV Incomer (tBCBj Feeder at RSS

• IDMT
.
& Two stages DMT: Ove~ current
.
protecti~n(
'.
51 &50-1, 50-2)
• Under Voltage Protection {27)
5.1 Over current and Earth Fault Protection {50/51,50N/51N) .

2"d Harmonics Blocking is to be Activated/trnplemented to block the Earth Fault
protection during inrush (Charging.of Transformer).
5.2 Under Voltage Protection (27)

. Under voltage function .is activated in the incomer feeder to avoid the accidental
back feed· charging of transformer. One out of three phase under' voltage
configuration to. be provided.
6 Protection in Auxiliary Transformer (ATCB) Feeder at RSS

• Biased. Differential protection ( 81:T)
• IDMT &Two stages DMT Over Current Protection( 51 &50-1, 50-2)
• HV & LV REF Protection (64R HV & 64R LV)
• Transformer Tank Earth fault protraction (64)
e Standby Earth fault protection(51G)
·. 6.1 Biased Differential protection

Biased differential protection is used to .protect transformer
: . from-
:
internal
.
faults.
Second harmonic restraint to be provided for protection against inrush conditions.
. . :
6.2 Over Current and Earth fault Protection (50/51, 50 N/51 N)

These setting are also coordinated with downstream breal\:r.
. .
Th~ setting of Two Stage DMT over Current function (50-1 & 50-2) to be below of
short circuit fault level of transformer rt primary I secondary side. These setting are
also to-ordinated with downstream circuit breakers with time grading.
This protection works as backup of Biased Differential protection.
1 To act as a back-up. of Downstream circuit

f 50-1 Breaker. :
~ ..
For Instantaneous Tripping in case Bus fault
50-2 or high Intensity Fault.
2nd Harmonics Blocking is to be Activated /implemented to block the Earth Fault

protection during inrush (Charging of Transformer). This function can · be
configured.
71Page

Issue /Rev No. : 08 DELHI METRO RAIL CORPORATION•

LIMITED
Issue/Rev Date : 24.06.201°7 .: ELECTRICAL DEPARTMENT
6.3 Transformer Tank Earth fault protraction (64)

To mitigate .. the leakage current and corresponding human risk, tank earth fault
protection is us~d with leakage current of 5-10A with instantaneous tripping.
6.4 HV and LV REF Protection . .
Auxiliary Transformer Circuit breaker to be provided with HV and LV REF protection

to protect against winding/ low level earth faults. . .
6.5 Standby Earth Fault Protection shall be provided.
7 220kV/132kV /66kVBus-bar
• Bus-bar Differential Protection (
• Local breaker backup (LBB)
7 .1 Bus bar Differential Protection

. =~ . :
Full-fledged bus bar protection shal! be provided of phase segregated type, providing
independent zones of protection and having operating selectivity for each bus-bar.
7.2 Local breaker backup protection (Ll3B)

Built in local breaker backup (LBB}!shall be provided.
8 Protection in 220/132/66kV (LCB) IncomerFeeder at RSS.end

Integrated· Distance cum Line Differential Protection(21/87L)
Back up O~er.Current and Earth Fault Protection ( 50,51, SON, 51N)
Under Voltage protection (27)/0vervoltage protection (59)
8.1 !ntegrated Distance cum Line Differential Protection (21/87 L)

Line Differential Protection is used with relays installed at both ends of feeder i.e.
.
(
Discorn 'end &. DMRC RSS .end. Differential Protection is used with Fibre Optic Pilot
wire communication scheme . with Relays of same protocol/
.
Manufacturer.
Integrated distance cum differential protection· shall be provided for protection of
cablebetween Discern and RSS. ·
8.2 Over Current and Earth fault Protection (50/51, 50 N/51 N}

' . '
The setting of IDMT over current function (51) is calculated on the basis of Full load
capacityof bo h Auxiliary and Traction Transformer.
. I : : .
These settingare also coordinated with downstream brea~er.
These setting are also coordinated with downstream circuit breakers with time
grading.
SI Page

r-·-··------------.--------------------~--.------
tl5::.;ue /Rev No. : 08 DELHI METRO RAIL CORPORATION
I . LIMITED
~sue/Rev Date : 24.06.2017 ELECTRICAL DEPART~ENT
Act as A Back-up of Downstream Circuit

50-1 Breaker
For Fast Tripping in case Bus fault or high·

50-2 .
Intensity Fault.
. .
8.3 Under Voltage (27}/0ver Voltage Protection (59)

Under voltage function is activated in this feeder to prevent Back feed to Discern.
Time delay of minimum 2 second .to be kept to avoid the tripping
.
during
.
·minor
fluctuation in the supply. One out of three phase under voltage configuration to be
( provided.
~1w Also overvoltage protection to be provided-
9 Protection in Discom End Feeder:-.

• Line Differential Protection (87L} j Di$~hc~·protection {21}
• Over current and Earth fault Prot~(SQ, .?J, 50 N, 51Nl
. • :·:.t., .· . . -. ·.·
9.1 Line Differential

.
Protection (87 L) ::·,~-.f,
~··.;;: ::• · -
. •. •
Differential Protection is u~ed w~h Fibre Optic Pilot wire cornrnunication scheme
with Relays of same protocol/ M8nufactu.fet'.:·'·c. -·
9.2 Integrated Distance cum Line differeriH9ki~rotection at Discom End (21/87L} .

Distance protection (21) is usepl~~t,;r1maty.protection, where- ta0le..1Jogths are
more than 3km ·to clear fault instartta:u,eorisfy without any delay. Impedance setting
is based. upon actual impedani:~~f,§b-les used. Integrated distance cum differential
protection shall be provided for protgcti.OUi:J'.Ftdb!~oetweerfDiscomand RSS.
9.3 Over current and Earth fault Protecti.<!>l'.r(50, 51, 50 N, 51N) ·• •

··:.'.~· -
.·: : .
The setting of IDMT over curreni.:frrnction (51} is calculated on the basis· of Full load
capacity. of both Auxiliary and Traction Transformer. ·
10 General/ Miscellaneou}:-
• Main/ standby relay logic
• Master trip relav
JEC:61850 :corr/patibility
'
• Minimumoperating time of Relay/MTR/CB .
Short circuit study
Format Iortesting arid records.
9jPage

: :
Issue /Rev No. : 08 DELHI METRO RAIL CORPORATION

LIMITED ' .·.!
, Issue/Rev Date : 24.06.2017 ELECTRICAL DEPARTM'.ENT

I
10.lMain/ standby relay logic· ..

Main and st~ndby relay for each bay to be provided in Hot-Hot configuration. ·
10.2Mas:ter
.
Trip Relay (MTR) . :
• MTR shall be provided in every feeders and for all voltage level.
• MTR shouldbe of auto & Scada reset type .
. .
• In all panels Two MTR one for main and one for standby relay with_scada reset shall
be provided. (As per CEA regulation).
·• For bus bar protection, dedicated MTR relay to be provided:.for each feeder:
10.3 IEC-61850 compatibility . . .

All numerical relays shall be fully compliant to IEC-61850 standard. · ·
10.40perating time of Relay/ MTR/CB : .

. .
S.No. Equipment Operating Time(Range)
1 Relay operating timing 20-30ms.

2 MTR operating timing 10-20ms
3 Breaker operating timing . 40-60m$
4 Total fault clearance Time ?0-110ms.
10.5 Short Circuit Study

All settings of IDMT.and DMT relays to be strictly based on short circuit study of entire
. . .
system considering minimum and maximum L~G, L-L-G, L-L-L short circuit levels at all
nodes of system· ..
•' :
Relay settings of IDMT & DMT relays will be based on short circuit and !Clad flow study (
and will be calculated on case to case basis for individual system.
10.6 Format for testing and record

In addition to the comprehensive checklist provided by respective
vendors/Otjvt/coritractors .. to avoid/prevent
any deficiency in the overall protection
system, some formats of testing and records, attached as Annexure: Al-AS. In general,
this is to be follovfed. Any other additional tests to be conducted as per approved format
by Engineer/DMRC. ·
10 I Page

Issue /Rev No. : 08 DELHI ME 1RO RAIL CORPORATION

-·-- ·----------------! LIMITED
issue/Rev Date : 24.06.2017 ELECTRl_CAL DEPARTMENT
11 Protection in Auxiliary sub-station -:

33kV switchgears are provided with the following protections.
11.lRing Main· Circuit Breaker ·

• Pilot Wire Differential Protection {87L)
• Directional
. . Overcurrent Relay {67). (Non directional
:
in breakers not a'' part of the ring)
• Master trip relay [Auto & Scada reset type)
11.2Transformer Protection Circuit Brebker . • :

• Transformer Differential Protection (87T} for UG stations only (>lOOO kVA)
• LV Restricted Earth fault {64R) for
.
UG stations only {>1000 kVA) ..
• IDMT and Two stage DMT Over Current Protection (51/S0-1/50-2)
• IDMT and DMT Earth Fault Protection (50N/51N}
• poor Limit Switch, WTI and Castle Key Arrangement
• ~nrush restraint feature to be activated
• Breaker Failure Protection (SOBF) with Ring main feeder (Wherever backup
co-ordination is not available).
• StandbvEarth fault protection(>1000 kVA)
• Master trip relay (Auto & Scada reset type)
PD ASS and ASS3 Protection philosophy shall be developed based cin case to case basis. The
detailed approved scheme is attached with document.
. .
12 Protection for Depot traction feeder fed from mainline

• Distance Protection ( 21)
(( • IDMT & DMT Over current protection (51/50)
***'***********~***~****************End********************'~******~*******
I'
ll!Peige

Contract- DE-04 – Particular Specification- Annexure-11 (33kV GIS Specification) of Chapter 8A
(ANNEXURE-11)
SPECIFICATIONS FOR
33 KV GAS INSULATED SWITCHGEAR

Barakhamba Road, New Delhi –110 001

1. Detailed description of the equipment and its application in DMRC – 33

KV Gas Insulated Switchgear (GIS)
These specifications are applicable to 33 kV Gas Insulated Switchgear (GIS) at various
substations, for Power supply distribution in DMRC Network.
1.1 General
Scope of Work
The scope of work comprises of design, manufacture, shop testing, supply, delivery at site,
installation, testing and commissioning of 3-phase, 33 kV GIS. 33 kV GIS in RSS shall
have single bus bar with sectionalizer at each bus between I/C 1 and I/C 2. Gas insulated
indoor type metal clad partitioned switch board panel. The supply will include all
supporting structures, auxiliary equipments, mechanical linkages, hydraulic piping for
control devices with pumps, SF6 gas piping, auxiliary circuits wiring, interlocking devices,
and SF6 bus ducts. Necessary sub-assemblies must be assembled in the supplier’s plan,
accounting for the transportation condition. The 33 kV GIS shall be provided as per the
configuration given in tender. The scope of work includes the following (but not limited
to):
Each Incomer Bay consisting of;
 Voltage Transformer with isolation device of rated insulation/Plug in type
VT integrated in 33 kV Panel
 Indoor lightning arrestor with counter
 Bus Disconnector with earth switches – 2 Nos. for double bus bar/ 1 No. for
single bus bar
 Cable box compartments.
 Other items as required for connection to the two bus bars,
Each O/G Feeder Bay and transformer feeder bays consisting of;
 Bus Disconnectors with earth switches – 2 Nos. for double bus bar/ 1 No. for
single bus bar
 Voltage Transformer with isolation device of rated insulation / Plug in type

VT integrated in 33 kV panel
 Other items as required for connection to bus bars, cables etc. and for
completing the intent of work
Each Bus Coupler Bay connecting two sections of bus consisting of :-

 Current Transformer – 2 Nos.

 Bus Disconnectors & Earth Switch – 2 Nos.

 Other items as required for connection to bus bars, cables etc. and for
completing the intent of work
Each Bus VT Module consisting of Voltage Transformer with isolator switch and bus
earthing switch – 1 No.
1.2 Governing Specifications:

Standards:
The complete GIS equipment shall meet the requirements of latest versions of
IEC/International standards/specifications, a few of these are indicated below:
Standard Description
IEC 60044 Instrument transformers
IEC 62271-1 Common specifications for high voltage switchgear and control gear
standards.
IEC62271-100 Circuit breaker.
IEC 62271- 102 AC disconnectors (isolators) and earthing switches.
IEC 62271- 103 Switches for rated voltage above 1kV and up to 52kV.
IEC 62271-200 GIS bays
IEC 60137 Insulated bushings for alternating voltage above 1000 volts.
IEC 60694 Common clauses for high voltage switch gear and control gear
switchgears.
IEC 60376 SF6 gas
IEC 66044 Current and potential transformers.
IEC 60028 Copper conductors
IEEE 80 Guide for safety in Ac s/s grounding
CIGRE 44 Earthing of GIS an application guide.
Abbreviations:
 GIS :- Gas Isolation System
 VVVF :- Variable Voltage Variable Frequency
 IEC :- International Electro-technical Commission
 RMS: - Remote Monitoring System.
 BOQ: - Bill of Quantity.
 BCU :- Bay control Unit
 LCC :- Local Control Centre
 RSS :- Receiving Sub Station
 SCADA :- Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition

1.3 Technical Requirements:
 33 kV equipment shall be built according to the SF6 gas insulation technology. Vendor
shall offer and provide latest model available. Contractor to submit certificate that latest
model available is delivered
 GIS supplier should have minimum experience of 05 years for manufacturing of similar GIS
substations. The type of GIS offered should have been in satisfactory operation for at least three
years. Contractor should submit performance certificate from the employer.
 The 33 kV equipment shall be built according to the SF6 gas insulation technology. 33 kV GIS as
offered should be fully type tested as per latest IEC standards as per Data Sheet of this
specification at the time of submitting the vendor proposal. Type test reports shall be submitted
along with the vendor proposal.
 In the event of arcing in a compartment, the arc should not extend to the neighbouring
compartment/panel. Any failure to the enclosure of the compartment shall not lead to damages in
the neighbouring compartments. The 33 kV GIS shall be internal arc classified as AFLR with
current and duration as specified in Data Sheet in this specification. Contractor to submit Type
Test Certificate of Internal Arc test along with the type test.
 Suitable means of expansions should be provided in the metal enclosure and pipeline to absorb the
actual thermal expansion and contraction of the SF6 equipment and to facilitate the alignment of
the switchgear assembly.
 The metal enclosure for the SF6 gas insulated equipment modules shall be made from stainless
steel/Aluminum alloy.
 GIS should be of modular design, and it should be possible to add feeder panels if required.
 Inter-panel auxiliary and control wiring shall have terminals in each relevant cubicle so placed for
the bus wiring to be readily run from unit to unit. Auxiliary and control wiring to be connected to
other equipment shall be wired to terminals at the rear/front of individual cubicles, suitably located
for the wiring to be extended via multi-core cabling. All auxiliary and control wiring shall be
separated from high-voltage conductors, even though the latter are insulated by earthed metal
enclosures.
 All auxiliary and control cables and wirings shall have suitable marking, such as ferrule markers,
which shall clearly identify their function and shall match the control schematic drawings and
wiring diagrams. The markers shall fit firmly over the outer diameter of individual cable and each
wire core. Marks shall be printed and legible. For easy identification, colour coding shall be used
to differentiate various functions of the cable and wires. All auxiliary and control wirings shall
also be complete with cable lugs for termination.
 A relay and instrument compartment shall be located at the front of each switchgear unit and shall
be provided with a hinged door for access to the internal wiring and terminals. Gaskets shall be
used to provide close sealing. The height of the instrument panel above floor level shall not exceed
2,000 mm unless otherwise reviewed without objection by the engineer who may require the
contractor to provide, at its own cost, suitable means for easy access to the instrument panel with
all the operative switches at height not more than 1.8 m.

 Anti-condensation heaters with humidity control function shall be installed for each switchgear
panel.
 The switchboard shall be designed to cater for future extension. The switchgear shall be capable
of operating in suitable environment stipulated in General Specification.
 Switchgear: the metal-enclosed switchgear shall be gas insulated indoor type and the circuit
interrupting device shall be of vacuum type.
 Switch gear cubicles: all non-welded assemblies shall be assembled by means of bolts and nuts
with mandatory use of lock-washers. All panels, separating partitions, coupling modules and
accessories shall be mounted similarly, in such a way so as to withstand indefinitely the vibrations
transmitted, in particular by the resetting mechanism of the circuit-breakers and their actuation
2. ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 Circuit Breakers

 Circuit breakers shall employ vacuum interrupters and shall have busbar side integral
isolation facilities, i.e. a 3-position isolator with On-Off-Earth positions.
 The circuit breakers shall have rated operating sequence (duty cycle) of:
O – 0.3”-CO – 15” – CO
Operating Mechanisms
 The circuit-breaker and switch mechanisms shall be of spring-powered stored energy
operation by means of a motor charged spring with manual and electrical released, or
solenoid operated.
 The mechanism shall be of the trip free type so that the circuit-breaker shall be free
to open during the closing operation immediately after the operation of its tripping
device. The circuit-breaker shall be capable of closing fully and latching, against its
rated making current. The various parts shall be of substantial construction, carefully
fitted to ensure free action, and designed to reduce mechanical shock during
operation to a minimum.
 In the event of a spring breaking, it shall still be possible to open the circuit-breaker
safely and it shall be possible to close the circuit-breaker or switch adequately to
carry its rated current in accordance with IEC 62271-100.
 Circuit-breaker spring operated mechanisms shall have the following additional
features:
 If the circuit-breaker is opened and the springs charged, it shall be possible to
close, and then trip the circuit-breaker;
 If the circuit-breaker is closed and the springs charged, there shall be sufficient
energy to trip, close, and then trip the circuit-breaker;
 Mechanical indication shall be provided to indicate the state of the spring; and

 Motor charged mechanisms shall be provided with means for charging the
springs by hand. A shrouded push button for releasing the springs and an
electrical release coil shall also be provided.
 All circuit-breaker operating mechanisms shall be fitted with an electrical shunt trip
release coil and a mechanical hand tripping device.
 Tripping and closing circuits shall be provided with a fuse or miniature circuit
breaker on each unit and shall be independent of each other and all other circuits. A
trip circuit supervision scheme shall be incorporated for every circuit.
 The electrical tripping and closing devices shall be operated satisfactorily, with a
maximum temperature of 55degree C inside the 33kV switchgear enclosure, over a
DC voltage range as follows:
 Closing solenoids 85 to 110% of rated voltage
 Spring charging motor 85 to 110% of rated voltage
 Closing release coil 85 to 110% of rated voltage
 Shunt trip release coil 70 to 110% of rated voltage
 All operating coils for use on the DC supply shall be connected in such a way that
failure of insulation to earth does not cause the coil to become energised.
 Auxiliary switches shall be provided in circuit breaker tripping circuits to interrupt
the tripping supply as soon as the circuit breaker has completed the tripping
operation. An auxiliary switch shall be provided in closing circuits to ensure that the
closing circuit is open after a close has been made.
 A proven positively-driven mechanically-operated indicating device shall be
provided to show whether a circuit breaker is in the open or closed position.
 Locking facilities shall be provided so that the circuit breaker, if required, can be
prevented from being closed when it is open, and from being manually tripped when
it is closed. It shall not be possible to gain access to the tripping toggle or any part of
the mechanism which would defeat the locking of the manual trip.
2.2 Busbar And Connections

 Busbars and connections between the pieces of apparatus forming the equipment of a
cubicle shall be of high-conductivity copper. The conductivity shall not be less than
99.9% of that of a “Standard Annealed Copper”, as defined in IEC Publication No.
60028.
 Busbar connections and their supports shall be of an approved type, designed to
withstand all normal and abnormal conditions arising in the System. They shall be
capable of carrying the current equivalent to the breaking capacity of the switchgear
for 1 second.
2.3 Insulation Gas

 The Contractor shall submit details on quantity, quality and density of SF6 gas to be
used in the switchgear in accordance with IEC 60376.

 The GIS shall be grouped into suitable gas compartments with each compartment
fitted with a monitoring pressure gauge/sensors and a pressure relief device.
 The gas leakage rate shall be guaranteed to be less than 0.1% by mass per year.
 The GIS shall be so designed that an internal arc fault in a compartment will not
affect other gas compartments, and compartments for operating mechanism and
protection relays. The high pressure gas or air from the GIS during an internal arc
fault shall be directed or vented to a direction away from the operator. The
Contractor shall provide type test reports for the internal arc test as per data sheet.
No extrapolations of other test results are acceptable.
 SF6 Gas apparatus warning sign shall be provided on the GIS.
 It is preferred that No gas handling/filling etc. shall be carried out site for Erection &
use of 33 kV GIS.
 All special tools and equipment for installation, testing, commissioning, operation
and maintenance of the GIS shall also be supplied by the Contractor. These include a
suitable sized gas handling unit mounted on a trolley for purging, refilling and other
gas works. The trolley shall be able to retain the SF6 gas purged from any gas zones
of the GIS if gas handling is required at site for the model approved by DMRC.
 Monitoring of Gas in the enclosure:
Each gas compartment should have its own SF6 pressure monitoring facilities as
well as static filters. Pressure relief devices shall be designed to limit maximum
pressurize below the busting level of the enclosure and barrier insulation.
Instruments communicable to SCADA shall be provided to continuously monitor the
Gas density.
 The protection devices for this equipment shall ensure permanent monitoring of gas
pressure inside each compartment by means of temperature compensated monitoring
devices triggering a dual alarm threshold annunciation system in the event of gas
pressure drops:
Stage 1: Performance of the station is unaffected, in particular cut-off
capabilities remain intact. Immediate intervention by the specialist is
not necessary, but recommended.
Stage 2: The dielectric properties of the station in the presence of occurring
over voltage shall be such that all the necessary isolating operations
still remain possible without any danger nor any accident taking place.
In case of drop of pressure below minimum level, the concerned
breaker should trip and then lock.
2.4 Switchgear Interlocking

 Where a circuit breaker or other switchgear is fitted with means for mechanical or
electrical operation, interlocks shall be provided so that it is impossible for the
electrical and mechanical devices to operate simultaneously.
 The earthing devices shall be provided with interlocks to ensure correct operation in
conjunction with the associated circuit breaker.
 The isolators and the associated circuit breaker which are integral parts of the

switchboard shall be equipped with mechanical interlocking to ensure that the

isolators cannot be operated unless the associated CB is opened. For the same
reason, motorised isolator shall be installed with electrical interlock to provide the
same interlocking logic.
 Means shall be provided whereby the electrical tripping of the circuit breaker is
rendered inoperative during earthing operations both when closing and when closed
in the earthed position.
 Where interlocking over a distance is required, two independent criteria shall be
used, e.g. absence of a voltage and remote feeding circuit breaker open. Indication
of the remote condition shall be by single purpose circuit, care being taken that the
conductors used are adequately screened and shielded to minimise both transverse
and longitudinal voltages resulting e.g. from electromagnetic induction, differences
in earth potential or other causes. The Contractor shall ensure that voltages
dangerous to personnel or deleterious to correct operation shall not arise.
 When there is provision for isolation of sections of cable between two “either-or”
interlocked circuit breakers, a key-operated over-ride shall be provided to permit
both circuit breakers to be closed at the same time provided that the circuit between
them is broken. It shall not be possible to restore the connection without tripping
one of the two circuit breakers and releasing the key.
 The mechanical closing button of circuit breaker shall be interlocked with the
closing conditions of the circuit breaker such that operation of the mechanical
closing button shall be prohibited if the closing conditions of the circuit breaker are
not fulfilled.
 The above interlocking provisions are indicative unless otherwise reviewed without
objection by the Engineer who may require the Contractor to reasonably explain and
provide, at its own cost, suitable interlocking schemes for correct operation of the
panels.
2.5 Locking Facilities

Padlocking facilities shall be provided for mechanical trip on circuit breakers to prevent
manual tripping. All cubicle access doors, other than those which are interlocked with a
switching device, shall be provided with pad-lock type locking facility.
2.6 Earthing And Earthing Devices

 All earth bars and terminals including those in the switchboard and inside the
AMS/ASS shall be tinned copper. All metal parts other than those forming part of an
electrical circuit shall be directly connected to a high conductivity copper earth
busbar which shall run the full length of and be bolted to the main frame of the
switchboard.
 At the position where joints or terminations occur, the earth busbar shall also be
tinned. The earth busbar shall be rated to carry currents equal in magnitude and
duration to that associated with the short circuit rating of the equipment.
 The metallic cases of all instruments, relays or other associated components mounted
on the switchgear shall be connected to the earth busbar by copper conductors or
equivalent of not less than 2.5mm2 cross-sectional area.

 When components are provided for mounting separately, each shall be provided with
an earthing terminal of not less than 30mm2 cross-sectional area.
 The above provisions are indicative unless otherwise reviewed without objection by
the Engineer who may require the Contractor to reasonably explain and provide, at
its own cost, suitable earthing connections.
2.7 Control Facilities
 All circuit-breakers shall be capable of being operated electrically from the OCC via
the SCADA system.
 Proven, positively driven mechanical indicating devices shall be provided on all
equipment to indicate whether the primary equipment is in the OPEN or CLOSED
position. Care shall be exercised in the design and fitting of these indicators to
ensure that the indicating device and associated apparatus does not interfere with the
correct operation of the circuit-breaker or isolator.
 Each circuit breaker shall be provided with the necessary auxiliary contacts and
internal wiring to permit remote control and indication.
 Separate switches for local electrical operation shall be installed for each circuit
breaker. They shall have CLOSE and TRIP positions, with a spring return to a
NEUTRAL position. The switches shall be lockable in the NEUTRAL position by
means of a padlock.
 A separate LOCAL / REMOTE CONTROL selector switch shall be provided for
each circuit-breaker. In addition to the contacts in the control circuits, the switch
shall have contacts closed in the LOCAL position for remote indication of switch
positions. The switch shall have two positions, and shall be lockable at both
positions by means of a padlock.
 Electrical tripping and closing devices shall be suitable for operation from 110V DC
batteries.
 Exposed LV 220V AC terminals inside each Control cubicle shall be adequately
shrouded to avoid accidental human contact.
2.8 Auxiliary Switches

Proven, positively direct-driven auxiliary switches shall be provided on all primary
switching devices as required for indication, control and interlocking. Auxiliary switches
shall be robust, shall have a positive wiping action when closing and shall be mounted in
an accessible position clear of operating mechanisms. Three sets of spare switches
comprising of normally-open and normally-closed contacts shall be provided on each unit.
Auxiliary switches shall be of the changeover type to be either normally-open or
normally-closed, and shall be positively lockable in the desired position. Auxiliary
switches shall be designed to make, break and carry, without undue heating, the current of
their associated circuit or a current of three amperes DC, whichever is the higher.
2.9 Cable Entry

Cable connection shall be bottom/top entry as per the locations of the substation. Cable
termination shall be inner cone/outer cone plug in type. Suitable cover should be provided

at the cable entry location of the GIS panel to avoid unintentional contact of the live parts
by rodents etc. Contractor shall obtain approval from the employer for the above scheme.
2.10 Testing Facilities

All fixed and moving portions of the switchgear shall be provided with facilities to enable
high voltage tests to be carried out. The PT shall be provided with isolation links/switches
for enabling the high voltage / IR tests to be carried out. These facilities shall be such that
wires and connections need not be disconnected for the tests to be made.
When current transformers and protective relays are fitted, facilities including but not
limited to isolation links, test blocks and test plugs shall be provided for primary and
secondary injection tests to be performed. These facilities shall be such that wires and
connections need not be disconnected for the tests to be made.
2.11 Current Transformers

 When CTs are used for protection and measurement purposes, they shall have the
appropriate ratio, class and burden in line with the functions they are used for.
 All current transformers shall have a 1-second short-time current rating of not less
than the maximum System fault level.
 Current transformers shall have an output rating adequate to cater for the burden
connected to them and shall function satisfactorily under the maximum system fault
condition.
 All connections from secondary windings shall be brought out and taken by means
of separate insulated leads to a terminal board mounted in an accessible position.
Where multi-ratio secondary windings are required, a label shall be provided at the
secondary terminal board clearly indicating the connections required for each ratio.
The connections and ratios in use shall be shown on all diagrams of connections.
 Current transformers shall have the appropriate ratio depending upon their
application.
 Secondary connection wirings shall have a minimum size of 4mm2 copper
conductors.
 The class of all protection CTs shall be as per GTP.
 The Contractor shall prepare a schedule of CTs to be installed, and submit the same
for the Engineer’s review.
 The secondary windings of current transformers shall adopt single point earthing.
The earth connection shall be made at a terminal block via a removable link.
2.12 Voltage Transformers

Voltage transformers shall be mounted inside panel (no external VT is acceptable) . The
secondary windings shall be connected to the secondary circuit through a LV fuse or a
Miniature Circuit Breaker (MCB). The nominal VT ratio shall be 33 kV / 110 V. For
protection and measurement applications, the VTs shall be of dual Class 3P / 0.5 unless
otherwise approved by the engineer. The burden of VTs shall be decided by the Contractor
with a margin of 40% for future additions of instrumentation, and submitted to the
Employer’s Representative for review and approval.

3. Special Conditions
Transportation, shipment and storage of GIS equipment shall be as per international
practice/standards.
3.1 Paint-Work
Painting should be suitable for polluted atmosphere and has to comply with IEC 60721-2-
5 standard. As a minimum, an initial coat of rust-proofing and anti-corrosion paint will be
applied after baring of all metal surfaces; then they will be covered with two coats of
paint and one finishing coat, colour to be defined. The Contractor shall submit to the
Employer, the complete details of the Switchgear Cubicles Metal work and Paintwork
details, including details of the structure, process of finish and painting etc, for
Employer’s approval.
3.2 Identification
The front of each cubicle shall carry a nameplate indicating its identification number and
function. The text and type of nameplate shall be defined.
3.3 Fitting & Accessories
As a minimum following fittings and accessories shall be provided
a) Mechanically operated tripping and closing device
b) Local / Remote /off control switch and indication lamps
c) Operation counter
d) Supporting frame if needed
e) Name plate
f) Foundation bolts
g) Semaphore indicators
h) Meters
i) CTs & PTs as required
j) Protection as required
3.4 Medium Voltage Switchgear Interlocking

The medium voltage switchgear interlocking has several purposes:
 To avoid any paralleling between the both transformers of the AMS in remote
control mode
 To avoid any paralleling between the both transformers of the AMS in local control
mode
 To avoid the earthing of a cable under voltage presence

a. Interlocking in Remote and Local Control Mode

In remote and local control mode it shall be possible to operate any two CB closed
out of three (two incomer and one bus-coupler) without any mechanical
interlocking in AMS.
b. Interlocking with Incomer CB with Outgoing CB (RCCB)

To avoid any paralleling while back feeding RSS from mainline, a interlocking
between incomer CB and outgoing CB (RCCB) shall be done with the sensing of
Bus PT voltage and outgoing CB PT voltage.
c. Earthing Interlocking
A mechanical interlocking linkage shall be built in to prevent the grounding switch
being closed if the main circuit breaker is closed. Nonetheless, it shall be possible to
operate the grounding switch with the compartment door open, but it shall be
impossible to close the main circuit breaker when the grounding switch is closed.
d. Local Interlocking
 Each MV board shall include a non-return interlocking system, formed by
security locks, to allow safe inspection of the transformer.
 This interlocking system shall make it necessary to open a main LV circuit
breaker (LVCB) and lock it open and unplugged before closing the protection
bay ground isolating switch. Once this switch has closed, it shall be possible
to open the door of the transformer bay.
 All 33 kV cable coupling bays shall include systems to interlock interrupters
and grounding isolators to make it possible to work on a bay without cutting
the main 33 kV cable.
 High-security locks shall form these interlocks.
4. Maintenance Life
The GIS should be designed for best service life in the industry and not less than 40 yrs
for all types of installation & under prescribed environmental conditions
5. Data Sheet (Electrical Characteristics)
Requirement as
S.No. Information (33 kV GIS)
appropriate
1 Particulars of system (not equipment rating)
a Nominal Voltage, kV 33
b Frequency, Hz 50

c No. of Phases 3
d Type of neutral earthing NGR
2 Switchgear characteristics
a Number of poles 3
b Class – Indoor, outdoor (or special service Indoor
conditions)
c Name of compartment :
Busbar
Main device
Connection
CT
VT etc.
d Type of compartment (specify type for each high Tool-based accessible
voltage compartment) if applicable: compartment
Interlock- controlled accessible compartment
Procedure based accessible compartment
Tool-based accessible compartment
Non-accessible compartment
e Partition class
Class PM PM
Class PI
f Withdrawable / Non-withdrawable (main device
Non-withdrawable
type)
g Loss of service continuity category (LSC) LSC2
h Rated Voltage 36
i Number of Phases 3
j Rated Insulation Level
 Power frequency withstand voltage 70
 Lightning impulse withstand voltage 170
k Rated frequency 50
l Rated normal current
 Incomer 1250 A
 Bus bar 1250 A
 Feeder 1250 A
 Transformer Feeder (ASS) 800 A

m Rated short-time withstand current

 Main circuit (incomer/bus bar/feeder) 25 kA
 Earthing circuit 25kA
n Rated peak withstand current
 Main circuit (incomer/bus bar/feeder) 62.5 kA
 Earthing circuit 62.5kA
o Rated duration of short circuit

 Main circuit (incomer/bus bar/feeder) 1 sec
 Earthing circuit 1 sec
p Rated supply voltage of closing and opening devices
and of auxiliary and control circuits
 Closing and tripping a) 110 V dc
 Indication b) 110 V dc
 Control c) 110 V dc
q Rated supply frequency of closing and opening and
of auxiliary circuits DC
r Internal arc fault IAC AFLR

Classification test value in kA and duration in sec 25 kA / 1 sec
s Rated cable test voltages 60 kV DC ,
15 min
As per IEC 60502-2 or
updated in latest IEC
t Low and high pressure interlocking and monitoring
Stage 1
devices (state requirements for example, lock out on
Low Pressure - Alarm
low pressure indication etc.)
Stage 2
Low Pressure - Trip &
lock
u Interlocking devices
* Earth switch
(any additional requirements) * Gas Pressure
v Degrees of protection by enclosures (if not IP2X):
- with doors closed
- with doors open
Weatherproofing test
w Artificial pollution tests N.A.
x Partial discharge tests Yes

y Partial discharge measurement Yes

z Additional information e.g. installation conditions
3 Particulars of the operating devices

a Type of operating devices Vacuum CB
b rated supply voltage (if any)
c rated supply frequency (if any)
d rated supply pressure (if any)
e Special interlocking requirements
f Current or power for operation
g Operating times Opening ≤ 50ms
Breaking ≤ 80ms
Closing ≤ 90ms
4 Type test certificates or reports on request Yes, all Type Tests

need to be submitted
by the manufacturer.
5 Constructional features
a Mass of the heaviest transport unit
b Overall dimensions of the installation LXBXH
c arrangement of the external connections
d facilities for transport and mounting
e mounting provisions
f description by name and category of the various
compartments
g classified sides
h instructions for installation, operation & maintenance
i type of gas pressure or liquid pressure system
j rated filling level and minimum functional level
k volume of liquid or mass of gas or liquid for the
different compartments
l Specification of gas or liquid condition
33 KV GIS as offered should be fully type tested as per latest IEC standards at the time of
submitting the vendor approval.

All type tests and routine tests as per relevant IEC standards specified in technical
specifications shall be carried out. The bidder would be required to submit the detailed type
test reports not older than five years.
 The modules individually as well as the assembly shall be subject to various test,
including type test, as required in terms of provisions of relevant IEC standards.
Site tests shall include leakage tests, moisture contents in dielectric and power frequency test to
ensure conducting particles present in the Gas are below permissible limits. These limits shall be
furnished by the Contractor.

Contract- DE-04 – Particular Specification- Annexure-12 (Reactive power compensation Specification) of Chapter 8A
1. Technical Specifications
1.1. General specifications
1.1.1. All the material supply/ installed shall be new and as per relevant IS / IEC
specifications.
1.1.2. Any defect in the material or workmanship detected shall be rectified at no

extra cost to DMRC for a period of two year from the date of commissioning
or handing over of the system, whichever is later.
2. 33 kV shunt reactor
2.1. General
2.1.1. The 33 kV shunt reactor and switchgear with accessories are to be installed
at DMRC Receiving substations (RSS) in DMRC network.
2.1.2. The 33 kV shunt reactor shall be provided with proper protection scheme
using numerical relay compatible to communicate with SCADA system
available in DMRC RSS.
2.1.3. 33 kV shunt reactor be designed, manufactured and tested as per standard

IEC 60076-6 (latest version).
2.1.4. Heat load calculation shall be carried out and proper cooling system shall
be provided, if natural cooling is insufficient.
2.1.5. The Rating of 33kV shunt reactor shall be as per approved design.
2.1.6. Switching of reactor shall be achieved by the circuit breaker coupled with
the 33kV panels. Each reactor shall have a current measuring device
connected with a meter capable of displaying / recording the instantaneous
and maximum current.
2.1.7. Earthing station if any required for the 33kV shunt reactor shall be provided
separately and shall be interlinked with the existing Substation grid.
2.1.8. Credential for proposed manufacturer of shunt reactor shall be submitted

along with the bid submission. The shunt reactor shall be shall be supplied

from the manufacturer having sufficient testing facility as per relevant

standards and up-to required BIL level.
2.1.9. The proposed manufacturer must be having minimum 5 years of experience

in manufacturing medium voltage reactors.
2.1.10. The contractor shall be responsible for the performance of the whole
system.
2.2. Air Core Reactor :-
2.2.1. Reactors shall be air core, dry type, be suitable for outdoor installation. The
insulation level shall be adequate. The contractor shall demonstrate
compliance with the requirement of insulation co-ordination specified.
2.2.2. The insulation of the reactor shall be class F and hot spot temperature rise
shall not exceed 105 deg. C above ambient temperature. Winding
temperature rise shall not exceed 80 deg. C above ambient temperature.
2.2.3. The reactor shall be designed to withstand thermal dynamic shocks and
mechanical shocks while in service and during erection.
2.2.4. The reactor shall fully conform to the relevant IEC standard.
2.2.5. The reactor shall be designed to withstand overloading due to over voltage
as specified and shall also be subjected to excitation by harmonics; the
reactor must be able to withstand such events without deterioration in
normal life.
2.2.6. All internal (with in a reactor coil) current carrying connections shall be
welded / Brazed or compressed joint.
2.2.7. All terminals shall be either tin plated or silver plated.
2.2.8. Lifting lugs shall be provided for handling of the reactor.
2.2.9. The reactor shall be vertically mounted.
2.2.10. The reactors shall be subjected to type and routine tests in accordance with
the latest issue of IEC-60076 as appropriate to the type of reactor provided.

2.2.11. GTP of Air core Reactor
Basic design information

Design technology air-core, dry-type reactors
Impregnation epoxy-impregnated cylindrical coil
technology
Cooling method AN
Temperature class of the winding F
insulation system
Max. average winding acc. to class F
temperature rise
Winding conductor material Aluminium
Winding surface treatment high performance insulation varnish
Reactor colour To be specified
Mounting arrangement side-by-side
Concrete platform reinforcement standard steel reinforcement
Type of Insulators porcelain
Colour of insulators brown
Length of support brackets 500 mm
Protection class IP 00
Standards IEEE C57.21
Site condition
Installation - outdoor
Altitude above sea level m ≤1000
Max. ambient temperature °C 40
Pollution level acc. to IEC 60815- - heavy
1
Unified specific creepage mm/kVph-gr 43.3
distance
Wind m/s 40
System data
Nom. system voltage kVrms 33
Max. system voltage kVrms 36.3

Fundamental frequency Hz 50
Technical data
Number of coils per phase - 1
Number of coils per reactor unit - 1
Number of phases per reactor - 1
unit
Rated three-phase power Mvar As per BOQ / Approved
design (may be multiple
units based on space
availability)
Rated impedance per phase Ohm
Rated inductance per phase Lr mH
Tolerance on rated inductance % +5/-5
Rated current (Ir) excl. harmonic Arms
currents
Max. current (Imax) incl. Arms
Harmonics
Max. S/C current (therm.) kArms
Max. S/C current (mech.) kApeak
Max. S/C current (therm.) s 1
duration
LIWL across reactor kVpeak 250
LIWL to ground kVpeak 250
Minimum insulator creepage mm 907
distance to ground
Max. losses/phase at Ir and 75°C kW
Total weight of reactor incl. kg
Insulators approx.
3. STATCOM
3.1. GENERAL
3.1.1. The scope of the works shall completely cover the works such as routine /
acceptance of materials used, execution and testing as per specification,

packing forwarding, supply of equipment’s and materials at site including

insurance and transporting by road / Rail / Air or any other mode.
3.1.2. Carry out the power analysis study before supply, to decide the rating of
STATCOM and extent of reactive power compensation required.
3.1.3. The STATCOM at the LV Side (ASS) or HV side (RSS/AMS/TSS) as per

requirement. In case of HV side Suitable transformer to be provided.
3.1.4. To Supply the necessary power and control cables, CAT6e cables, Ethernet
cables etc required for SCADA connectivity.
3.1.5. To undertake all required works in related to erection of STATCOM with all
necessary accessories including supply of cable with terminations, Earthing
arrangement and Air conditioning (if required).
3.1.6. To interface the STATCOM with SCADA system in DMRC to Control and
monitor the equipment with necessary hardware and software support.
3.2. Definitions
3.2.1. RSS : Receiving substation ASS: Auxiliary substation at stations
3.2.2. Point of common coupling (PCC): Point on a public power supply system,
electrically nearest to a particular load, at which other loads are, or could
be, connected. The PCC is a point located upstream of the considered
installation at grid substation of Transco (DTL).
3.2.3. notch depth: The average depth of the line voltage notch from the sine wave
of voltage.
3.2.4. notch area: The area of the line voltage notch. It is the product of the notch
depth, in volts, times the width of the notch measured in microseconds.
3.2.5. Total demand distortion (TDD): As per IEEE-519.
3.2.6. Total harmonic distortion (THD): As per IEEE-519.
3.3. Technical specifications of STATCOM:

3.3.1. The Enclosure shall be supplied with minimum IP 30 rating with self-
ventilation arrangement for cooling and provide the Air conditioning if
ventilation is not adequate.
3.3.2. The STATCOM shall be of the shunt configuration and of 3-wire/4 wire type
to filter harmonics and control the power factor in the all three phases so as
to maintain Harmonic limits as per IEEE-519 and unity power factor at Grid
substation connection point.
3.3.3. The STATCOM shall have bottom cable entry or top cable entry as per site
conditions.
3.3.4. The STATCOM shall be able to do reactive power compensation (both

Capacitive (-) kVAr and Inductive (+) KVAr. Target power factor must be
settable up to unity at PCC.
3.3.5. The STATCOM shall be able to do load balancing. The STATCOM shall
measure the network currents allowing for closed loop control. Standard
current transformers of class 0.2 accuracy shall be sufficient for proper filter
operation.
3.3.6. The STATCOM power inverter shall be based on IGBT technology / or any
other technology subject to approval of DMRC. It shall employ a PWM
modulation technology using a fixed switching frequency. The
communication between the main controller board and the individual power
modules must occur through an optical link to ensure maximum galvanic
isolation.
3.3.7. The STATCOM shall monitor all three phases of the low voltage line current
in real time and process the measured harmonics by means of a Digital
Signal Processor (DSP) based system. The output of the DSP based
system shall be a pulse width modulated (PWM) signal to control power
modules that shall be controlled as a current source.
3.3.8. The control of the power modules and associated reactors shall be such
that harmonic currents of exactly the opposite phase of those to be filtered

are injected into the source of supply to the filter so that the harmonic
currents flowing in the line are reduced to levels that can be individually
programmed by the user.
3.3.9. The system shall be operated under closed loop control. The control system
shall be such that the STATCOM cannot be overloaded. The STATCOM
shall be able to co-exist with tuned and detuned capacitor banks.
3.3.10. The STATCOM shall be of a fully proven design which is in production

currently as a standard product or which is based on an STATCOM
generation that has been in production for more than five years.
3.3.11. Each STATCOM shall undergo a functional filtering test before leaving the
product’s originator factory. All the STATCOM components like IGBTS’, AC
& DC Capacitors, Inductors etc. shall undergo routine tests as per
respective International standards IEC, NEMA etc. before leaving factory.
3.3.12. The STATCOM shall be able to filter individual harmonic components

programmable in a frequency range from the 2nd to the 50th harmonic.
3.3.13. The degree of filtering shall be programmable, for each harmonic, in terms
of percentage of load RMS fundamental current.
3.3.14. The STATCOM shall allow for different filter modes to be set expressing the
priority to be given to the filtering of harmonics and the generation of
reactive power and load balancing. The priority will be decided by DMRC.
3.3.15. Filtering efficiency and equipment efficiency shall be typically not less than
97%.
3.3.16. The STATCOM shall be able to do reactive power compensation and aim
to compensate for a target True power factor ensuring correct operation in
the presence of harmonics. The user must be able to choose this target
power factor in a range based on the power analysis study.
3.3.17. In addition to power factor targeting the STATCOM shall also be able
to generate / absorb a fixed amount (due to cable capacitance) of reactive

power within the STATCOM’s current capabilities on the user’s request

based on power analysis study.
3.3.18. The STATCOM shall have intelligent control technology that minimizes the
STATCOM switching losses for each operating point. The heat loss from
each STATCOM operating at full load shall not be more than 3% of the
module rating per module.
3.3.19. The STATCOM shall be provided with password protected HMI (7 inch LED
graphic coloured display) suitable for programming, monitoring and
controlling the performance of the unit mounted on the front of each
STATCOM.
3.3.20. The HMI shall allow at least for monitoring network and filter parameters;
Programming the harmonic reactive power and balancing requirements;
Setting up the hardware configuration parameters along with priority.
3.3.21. The operator interface shall allow for the logging of the time during which
selected network parameters have been higher than a pre-set value and
also for the storing of the maximum value recorded during a logging
session.
3.3.22. The operator interface shall allow for the setting up of programmable
warnings and alarms that may be associated with a selection of network
parameters.
3.3.23. The STATCOMs shall supply with potential free contacts for remote alarm
monitoring facility. They should be able to communicate through MODBUS
/ RTU or any other open protocol (profibus).
3.3.24. The operator interface shall give numerical data of the following parameters:
a. SLD of respective substation
b. RMS phase to phase voltages and Line currents
c. Fundamental of all phase to phase voltages and Line currents
d. Total Harmonic Distortion of all phase voltages and Line currents

e. Active, reactive and apparent power
f. Power factor, displacement power factor
g. Voltage imbalance
h. Network frequency
i. Percentage of filter capacity used,
j. IGBT and control board temperatures
k. Voltage present on the DC bus
l. Operating hours of the filter fan
m. Operating hours of the filter system
n. Waveform analysis and spectrum displays in bar graph and value table form
of:
(i) All the phase voltages, Line voltage
(ii) All the line currents,
o. Event and faults that have occurred, presented in an event log with real time
stamp.
p. Any other critical parameters as desired by DMRC.
3.3.25. The STATCOM shall incorporate its own protection devices that ensure
protection against at least over current, short-circuit, thermal overload,
IGBT bridge abnormal operation, network voltage phase loss, network
synchronization loss and DC capacitor over- and under voltage, Network
synchronisation loss, phase loss, unstable grid etc.
3.3.26. Suitable earthing to be provided and integrated with existing substation.
3.3.27. All the cables/wires used shall be FRLSH type.
3.3.28. Clean agent based gas flooding system to be provided for STATCOM
panels.
3.3.29. Suitable No. of CT’s, summation CT’s of class 0.2 type to be provided.

3.3.30. STATCOM at RSS level shall be provided with Dry type Transformers of
suitable rating. These Transformers shall be capable of handling the
Harmonics, and they should come with suitable K-factor. These
Transformers shall also be provided with Surge Arrestors and RC Snubber.
For detailed specifications refer Annexure 5 of chapter 8A of PS.
3.3.31. The STATCOM supplied at station level (ASS) or RSS level are such that
they keep current distortion limits (TDD) and Voltage Distortion limits as per
IEEE 519 at PCC.
3.3.32. CT feedback should be taken at the incomer points at the RSS and the
STATCOM should have the facility to maintain PF at the metering point at
grid substation (PCC) using this data
3.3.33. STATCOM shall also control the notch depth in Line-line voltage due to the
switching etc to an acceptable level as per IEEE 519.
3.3.34. The HMI (human machine interface) installed in the STATCOM shall have
the following features:
i. A 7-inch, colored touch screen LCD interface
ii. Start, stop and trip condition (with code) of the STATCOM
iii. Trip code and nature of fault indication
iv. Internal CAN communication with the DSP controller
v. The HMI must display the following (minimum) numerical parameters
a. Arms - All 3 phase currents + Neutral
b. A1rms (Fundamental Current) - All 3 phase currents
c. iTHD (%) - All 3 phase current harmonic distortion
d. Aunb (%) - All 3 phase current unbalance
e. Vrms - All 3 phase voltages
f. Urms - All 3 line voltages
g. V1rms (Fundamental Voltage) - All 3 phase voltages

h. vTHD (%) - All 3 phases voltage harmonic distortion
i. Vunb (%) - All 3 phase voltage unbalance
j. Grid Frequency
k. Active Power (kW) - All 3 phases + Total
l. Reactive Power (kVAr) - All 3 phases + Total
m. Apparent Power (kVA) - All 3 phases + Total
n. Power Factor (PF) - All 3 phases + Total
o. Displacement Power Factor (dPF) - All 3 phases + Total
p. Apk - Peak Current of 3 phases of each stack
q. Utilization (%) - Utilization percentage of 3 phases of each

stack
r. Vdc - DC bus voltage of each stack
s. Stack Temperature - Temperature of 3 phase IGBTs of each

stack
t. PCB Temperature
u. System Running hours
v. Fan Running hours
vi. The HMI must provide graphical information for the following
(minimum) data
a. Individual harmonic bar chart of 3 phase currents - upto 51st

order
b. Individual harmonic bar chart of 3 phase voltages - upto 51st

order
c. Graphical display of 3 phase currents and 3 phase voltages

on single window with user select-able options
vii. The HMI must save a minimum of 50,000 time stamped event logs

a. The logs view must be password protected
b. The logs should capture system events like System On/Off
c. System trip event should be logged with associated trip code
d. User entry into settings should get logged
e. Any failed user login attempt (wrong password) should be

logged
f. Logs must be accessible day-wise for ease of navigation
g. Logs must be arranged in First In - Last Out fashion to display

the latest events on top
h. User must be able to export the logs to an external USB

storage device
viii. HMI must have provision for Ethernet communication
3.4. Protection Relay and SCADA compatibility
3.4.1. All relays shall be of numerical type powered with 110V DC compatible with
the communication system provided in DMRC RSS. The relay shall be time
synchronizeable through NTP clock. The relay shall be configured by the
contractor. The contractor shall enable communication to the servers
located at Operation control center through the RTU network for purpose of
monitoring and controlling through SCADA (to operate the Circuit breaker,
display measurement values and generate alarms).
3.4.2. The following protection shall be provided for the 33kV reactor & STATCOM
breaker.
a. Over current protection (51-DMT & 50- IDMT)
b. Earth fault (51N-DMT E/F & 50N-IDMT E/F)
c. Restricted earth fault (64R)
d. Temperature protection
e. Incipient fault protections.

3.4.3. The relay shall be configured to communicate the following data to SCADA:
Load current Line voltage, status of remote local switch, CB status (Open /
close / rack-in / Rack-out), Earth switch status, relay healthiness, DC
healthiness Trip circuit healthiness, Trip alarm, protection alarms etc. The
CB status, earth switch and Remote local switch status shall be double point
signals. All the above mentioned data shall be configured in relay and
assigned to communication port.
3.4.4. Through the server at Operation control center the following operation
should be possible: altering relay setting, viewing measurement values,
downloading fault recorder and trip log, resetting the relay.
3.4.5. All connection including 110V DC power supply, signal inputs from panel
(CB, earth switch, etc.) Communication channels like RS232 and/or OFC
from relay to RTU shall be provided by contractor
3.5. Technical Sheet
The detailed STATCOM specification
S. No Particulars Details and Ranges
1 Installation location Indoor installation on firm foundation

in a clean environment
2 Connection Method 3P or 4P / 3W or 4W
3 Altitude Nominal output at 0 to 1000m (3300

ft) above sea level
4 Minimum temperature 0°C non-condensing
5 Maximum temperature 50°C
6 Relative humidity Max. 95% non-condensing.
7 Equipment Efficiency >97% (typical)
8 Filtering Efficiency Min 97%

9 Leading, Lagging, harmonic,

Compensation Modes
mitigation and load balancing
10 Suitable Door interlock ACB / MCCB

with necessary protection like SC,
Internal Protection
Over current , under voltage etc as
per BOQ
11 DC Capacitors used in DC
Film capacitors
Link
12 Communication between
Optical
Controller / Driver
13 Low noise single phase toroidal coil

PWM Reactors
with Class ‘H’ insulation.
14 Controller Design DSP 32 bit or 64 as per requirement
15 IGBT Max Junction

Temperature >175 deg C
16 IGBT Guaranteed life Minimum 20 years
17 Internal system power

consumption <3% (typical)
18 Semiconductor Converters IEC 60146
19 Dynamic Var Compensator installation information
20 Standard degree of Cubicle version: IP30 (IP20 open

protection door)
21 Dimensions per power unit Contractor to specify

(appr.)

22 Weight per power unit of Contractor to specify

Dynamic Var Compensator
(unpacked)
23 Color RAL 7035 (light grey)
24 Mechanical installation Floor fixation, lifting lugs
25 Cable Entry Bottom /top cable entry cubicle

based on site requirement
26 CT requirements As per scheme requirement
27 Airflow requirements As per site requirement
28 Network voltage characteristics
29 Network voltage tolerance +/- 10 %
30 Network frequency 50 Hz
31 Network voltage: 33kV
32 Dynamic Var Compensator characteristics
33 RMS output current per As per capacity of STATCOM

power unit type (50Hz
network).
34 STATCOM voltage As per the manufacturer design to

connect with 33 kV bus
35 Modularity Up to 32 units of the same rating.
36 For full redundancy combine

individual units of same rating
Redundancy
37 If any unit in a master-master
Dynamic Var Compensator system

fails, the other units should keep

running.
38 Response time < 2 ms instantaneous
39 Environmental Testing IEC 60068
40 Harmonics and Inter-

harmonics IEC 61000, IEEE 519
41 Panel IEC 61439
42 MCCB IEC60947-2
43 Contactors IEC 60947-4-1
44 AC Capacitors IS 13340-1993
45 Reactors IEC 60289, IEC 5553
46 DC Capacitors IEC 60068-1, 60384-4, 60068-2-6
47 Gate Driver Card IEC 60068-1
48 Sensor EN 50178
49 Reactive power DYNAMIC / dynamic Power factor

programmable from 0 (inductive) to
0 (capacitive); Programmable dual
power factor settings.
Full capacity of STATCOM to be
utilised based on system VAr
requirements.
50 Load balancing 3 phase Line to line balancing
51 Start and stop settings Energy save mode functionality /

standby functionality Auto restart
after power outage functionality.

52 Dynamic Var compensator < 3%

losses (maximum values)
53 Communication Through HMI.
54 Configuration Through HMI.
Separate forced air cooling for

individual phase IGBT stacks
55 Cooling Arrangements ensuring best cooling performance
56 Audible Noise Level Less than 65 dB (At 1meter)
4. Spares
The Tenderer shall furnish an un-priced list of spares for maintenance and
repair for a period of ten years from the date of taking over. The Employer
at his discretion, during a period of ten years from the date of taking over of
the whole works, purchase as any kits / items of spare parts as required by
him.
5. Testing and Commissioning
All major equipment supplied under this contract shall be Type Tested as
per applicable national / International standards. All test including routine,
Factory Acceptance, Site commissioning etc. shall be carried out by the
contractor. Tenderer is required to submit Test protocol for the approval of
the employer. Employer reserves the right to witness all or any of the test
as per approved test protocol.

Contract- DE-04 – Particular Specification- Annexure-13 (IGBC Requirement) of Chapter 8A
IGBC Green New Buildings Rating System Checklist
RSS
Applicable
Points
Strive for
Likely
Available
Not
Owner-occupied Buildings
Sustainable Architecture and Design Data requirement
• List of all the project team members and a brief on their contribution to the
integrated design approach, along with the date of appointment/ award of contract to
the project team members.
Integrated Design
1 SA Credit 1 1 • Minutes of Meeting (MoM) of at least three meetings held at different stages of the
Approach
project, on green building design and construction aspects.
• Photographs of the meetings held at different stages of the project.
• Narrative describing the strategies implemented to retain the site contour, existing
water bodies, existing natural rocks, existing topography/ landscape, and to integrate
existing trees with new development in the project.
• Site survey plan/ Sectional drawings showing the retention/ preservation measures
for each of the following site features, before and after development:
o Site contour
o Existing water bodies and channels
2 SA Credit 2 Site Preservation 2 o Existing natural rocks
o Existing topography/ landscape, without any disturbance whatsoever
o Integration of existing trees with new development
• Calculations indicating the site features retained/ preserved, before and after
development, in percentage.
• Photographs showing the site features retained/ preserved, before and after
development.
• List of the passive architectural measures implemented in the building.

• Drawings and photographs (such as site plan, floor plans, sections & elevations,
images, as applicable) showing the passive architectural features.
Option 1: Simulation Approach

• Simulation report indicating the energy savings achieved in the project through
passive architectural features.
Option 2: Prescriptive Approach

• Narrative describing the strategies proposed to design passive architecture measures,
as applicable.
Exterior Openings (Projection Factor):
o Calculations indicating the number of exterior openings (fenestration) having a
1 1 SA Credit 3 Passive Architecture 2
Projection Factor of 0.5 or more to the total number of the exterior openings
(fenestration), in percentage.
Skylights:
o Calculations indicating the roof area with skylights to the total roof area, in
percentage.
Passive Cooling / Heating Technologies:
o Narrative describing the passive cooling / heating technologies, along with drawings
and other supporting documents.
Daylight:
o Site/ master plan showing all the buildings.
o Floor/ roof plans with window and skylight schedule.
o Daylight simulation report with sky conditions (such as date & month; time; ambient
lux levels) and wall, floor & roof reflectance properties, for all the regularly occupied
2 0 3 5 spaces in the building. During simulation, consider shading devices and ‘shadow
Site Selection and Planning
• Site plan and as-built drawings (floor plans, elevations, sections, etc.,) approved by
local Government authority.-received
SSP Mandatory Local Building
Y Required • Fit-for-occupancy certificate issued by local Government authority.
Requirement 1 Regulations
• Photographs of the building taken at various stages of construction-pending
DMRC/Contract DE-04 /Vol-4/PS Page 1 of 11
• Narrative describing the Erosion and Sedimentation Control (ESC) measures

implemented, during construction and post occupancy.
• Site drawing highlighting ESC measures implemented on-site, during construction
SSP Mandatory
Y Soil Erosion Control Required and post occupancy.
Requirement 2
• Photographs showing ESC measures taken at various stages of construction, before
construction, during construction and post occupancy.
• Site vicinity map (with scale) highlighting the location of existing basic amenities,
showing pedestrian access from the project.
Note:
For campus projects with multiple buildings, the compliance for basic amenities can
1 SSP Credit 1 Basic Amenities 1 be shown through one or combination of the following criteria:
o From center of the campus/ zone
o From entrance of the campus/ zone
• Photographs showing the basic amenities.
Option 1:Public Transport

• Site vicinity map (with scale) highlighting the location of intra-city railway station
(or) a bus-stop, showing pedestrian access from the project.
Proximity to Public Note: For campus projects with multiple buildings, the compliance can be shown from
1 SSP Credit 2 1
Transport entrance of the campus/ zone.
• Photographs showing the intra-city railway station (or) a bus-stop. (Optional)
• Calculations indicating the total number of occupants catered through electric

vehicles/ CNG-powered vehicles in the project, in percentage.
• Purchase invoice of the electric vehicles/ CNG-powered vehicles provided in the
project.
Electric Vehicles:
• Calculations indicating the number of building occupants catered through electric
vehicles/ CNG-powered vehicles in the project to the total number of building
occupants, in percentage.
• Parking layouts highlighting the location of preferred parking spaces with electric
charging facilities for electric vehicles.
0 1 SSP Credit 3 Low-emitting Vehicles 1
• Photographs showing electric vehicles and electric charging facilities with signages,
provided in the project.
CNG-powered Vehicles:
• Site vicinity map (with scale) highlighting the location of CNG filling station within
5 km distance (by road) from the project campus entrance.
• Parking layouts highlighting the location of preferred parking spaces for CNG-
powered vehicles.
• Photographs showing CNG-powered vehicles and preferred parking spaces with
signages provided for CNG-powered vehicles-Pending
Certification
Option 1: Natural Topography and/or Vegetation:
• Site drawing highlighting the area with natural topography (and /or) vegetation.
• Calculations indicating the total area with natural topography (and / or) vegetation on
the ground to the total site area, in percentage.
• Photographs showing the site area with natural topography (and / or) vegetation.
Option 2: Vegetation over Built Structures:
Natural Topography or
2 SSP Credit 4 2 • Site drawing and building roof plans highlighting the area with vegetation, as
Vegetation
applicable.
• Calculations indicating the total area with vegetation over the built structures to the
total site area, in percentage.
• Photographs showing the site area and building roof with vegetation.

• Narrative describing the strategies implemented to retain existing trees, transplant

trees and plant new saplings, within the project site.
• Site survey drawing highlighting the existing trees that are retained and/ or
transplanted, within the project site.
• Landscape drawing highlighting the preserved trees, transplanted trees and tree
Preservation or
1 SSP Credit 5 1 saplings.
Transplantation of Trees
• Calculations indicating the total site area (in acres), number of preserved trees,
transplanted trees and tree saplings.
• Photographs showing the existing trees (before construction) and preserved trees,
transplanted trees and tree saplings (after construction).
• Narrative describing the strategies to reduce heat island effect from non-roof areas.
• Photographs showing the measures to reduce heat island effect from non-roof areas.
Option 1:
• Site drawing highlighting the non-roof impervious (hardscape) areas and the areas
covered with shade from tree cover within 5 years, (and/ or) open grid pavers,
including grass pavers (and/ or) hardscape materials with SRI of atleast 29 (and not
higher than 64).
• Calculations indicating the area covered with shade from tree cover, (and/ or) open
grid pavers, including grass pavers (and/ or) hardscape materials with SRI of atleast
29 (and not higher than 64) to the total exposed non-roof impervious area, in
percentage.
Heat Island Reduction,
2 SSP Credit 6 2 • List of the existing trees/ plant species which can mature into fully grown up trees
Non-roof
for shading, within the next 5 years.
• If non-roof reflective materials sourced, provide the following:
o Purchase invoice/ Payment receipt.
o Manufacturer letters/ brochures indicating the Solar Reflective Index (SRI).
Option 2:
• Calculations indicating the total number of parking spaces provided under cover to
the total number of parking spaces, in percentage.
• Parking layouts highlighting the parking areas under cover.
• Narrative describing the strategies implemented to reduce heat island effect from
roof areas.
• Photographs showing the measures to reduce heat island effect from roof areas.
Option 1: High Reflective Materials

• Roof plans highlighting the area covered with high reflective roof materials.
• Roof area calculations indicating the total area covered with high reflective roof
materials to the total exposed roof area (excluding service & utility areas), in
percentage
• Purchase invoice/ Payment receipt of the high reflective roof materials sourced for
the project.
Heat Island Reduction, • Manufacturer letters/ brochures indicating the Solar Reflective Index (SRI) of high
2 SSP Credit 7 2
Roof reflective roof materials used in the project.
Option 2: Vegetation
• Roof plans highlighting the area covered with vegetation in the project.
• Roof area calculations indicating the total area covered with vegetation to the total
exposed roof area (excluding service & utility areas), in percentage.
• Declaration letter from the owner/ developer stating that the vegetated areas on the
roof surfaces will be retained for life.
Option 3: Combination of High Reflective Materials and Vegetation
• Roof plans highlighting the area covered with high reflective materials and / or
vegetation installed in the project.
• Roof area calculations indicating the area covered with high reflective roof materials
and vegetation to the total exposed roof area (excluding service & utility areas), in

• Narrative describing the strategies implemented for outdoor light pollution reduction
and exterior LPD.
• Site drawing highlighting the exterior lighting fixtures.
• Calculations indicating upward lighting for each typical lighting fixture. The
Outdoor Light Pollution calculations shall include the lighting fixture type, quatity, total lumens, upward
1 SSP Credit 8 1
Reduction lumens and upward lighting percentage
• LPD calculations, along with the list of the exterior lighting fixtures (with make &
model) proposed in the project.
• Photographs showing the typical exterior lighting fixtures.
• Narrative describing the measures implemented in the building for differently abled
people and senior citizens.
• Drawings highlighting the measures implemented for differently abled people and
senior citizens.
• Calculations indicating the total number of preferred car park spaces (for differently
abled people and senior citizens) to the total number of car park spaces.
0 1 SSP Credit 9 Universal Design 1 • Calculations indicating the total number of rest rooms (toilets) provided in the
common areas (for differently abled people and senior citizens) to the total number of
building occupants.
• Photographs showing all the measures implemented.
• Manufacturer brochures for the measures implemented, as applicable.
• Narrative describing the basic facilities provided in the project for construction
workforce.
• Drawings highlighting the basic facilities provided for construction workforce.
Basic Facilities for • Calculations indicating the total number of construction workers and the total
1 SSP Credit 10 1
Construction Workforce number of toilet seats & urinals provided in the project, for men and women.
• Extract of the construction contract agreement highlighting the facilities provided.
• Photographs showing the measures implemented.
• Narrative describing the strategies adopted by the project team to create awareness
among the building occupants/ tenants and the facilities team.
Option 1: Owner-occupied Buildings
• Copy of the green building guidelines providing information which helps the
Green Building building occupants to implement and utilise the green features, post occupancy.
1 SSP Credit 11 1
Guidelines • Copy of green building renovation guidelines providing information which helps the
facilities team to implement the green features, during building renovation process.
12 0 2 14
Water Conservation
• Narrative describing the strategies implemented to capture/ harvest rain water from
roof & non-roof areas.
• Calculations indicating the run-off volume captured/ harvested from roof and non-
roof.
Notes:
o If bore well(s) are installed in the project to harvest rainwater, submit soil test report
indicating the percolation rate(s).
WC Mandatory Rainwater Harvesting, o If rain water harvesting pit(s) are installed, then submit percolation rate(s).
Y Required • External storm water drain layout highlighting the location of rain water harvesting -
Requirement 1 Roof & Non-roof
ponds, pits, storage tanks, etc., as applicable, including cross-sectional drawings of
rain water harvesting systems.
• If project’s water table is less than 4 meters, submit hydrology report (approved by
third-party) indicating the level of water table, at different locations within the project
site.
• Photographs of rain water harvesting systems, taken during and after construction.

• List of plumbing fixtures (flow and flush) installed in the project, with respective
make & model and flow rates.
• FTE occupancy calculations for the building occupants and visitors.
WC Mandatory Water Efficient Plumbing • Manufacturer cut-sheets/ brochures/ letters indicating the flow rates of the plumbing
Y Required fixtures (flow and flush) at 3 bar flowing water pressure.
Requirement 2 Fixtures
Note: The manufacturer letters should be project specific.
• Purchase invoice of plumbing fixtures (flow and flush) with make & model.
(On a case-to-case basis, assessor may request to submit purchase invoices)
• Landscape plan(s) highlighting the area covered with turf, drought tolerant species &
other plant species, on the ground and over built structures.
• Calculations indicating the total landscape area (on the ground and over built
structures) to the total site area, in percentage.
• List of turf, drought tolerant, native and adaptive species used in the project.
• Photographs showing the landscaped areas.
Turf:
2 WC Credit 1 Landscape Design 2
• Calculations indicating the area covered with turf (on the ground and over built
structures) to the total landscape area, in percentage.
Drought Tolerant Species:
• Calculations indicating the area covered with drought tolerant species/ native/
adaptive species (on the ground and over built structures) to the total landscape area,
in percentage.
• Narrative describing the water efficient irrigation systems and techniques installed in
the project.
• Landscape plan highlighting the irrigation systems, including soil moisture sensors.
Management of Irrigation • Manufacturer cut-sheets/ brochures of the installed water efficient irrigation systems
0 1 WC Credit 2 1
Systems and techniques.
• Photographs showing the installed irrigation systems and techniques.
Rainwater Harvesting, Please refer to the ‘Documentation required’ under WE Mandatory Requirement 1 –
4 WC Credit 3 4
Roof & Non-roof Rainwater Harvesting, Roof & Non-roof.
Please refer to the ‘Documentation required’ under WE Mandatory Requirement 2 –
Water Efficient Plumbing Water Efficient Plumbing Fixtures.
5 WC Credit 4 5
Fixtures
• Narrative describing the installed on-site waste water treatment system, along with
the capacity & efficiency of treatment plant and the quality standards of waste water
treated.
• Daily and annual water balance of the project.
Note:
The water balance shall include calculations (approximate) showing the quantity of
waste water generated & treated; water demand for landscaping, flushing and air-
conditioning cooling tower make-up water (if the project uses water-cooled chillers),
and quantity of waste water reused for such applications.
Wastewater Treatment • Calculations indicating the water requirement for landscaping, flushing and air-
3 2 WC Credit 5 5
and Reuse conditioning cooling tower make-up water (including evaporative losses, blow down
losses and drift losses).
• Site plan highlighting the location of installed on-site waste water treatment system.
• Schematic drawing showing dual plumbing lines, if treated waste water is reused for
flushing.
• Photographs showing the on-site waste water treatment system installed.
• Narrative describing the water meters, installed in the project.

• Schematic diagram showing the location of water meters, installed in the project.
• Manufacturer cut-sheets/ brochures of the installed water meters.
1 WC Credit 6 Water Metering 1
• Photographs of the installed water meters.
15 2 1 18
Energy Efficiency
• Declaration letter signed by the owner/ developer stating that the HVAC systems and
fire suppression systems installed in the project are CFC free and Halon free.
• Type of refrigerants installed in the HVAC systems.
• Type of fire suppression systems installed in the project.
• Manufacturer cut-sheet/ brochure of HVAC systems indicating the type of refrigerant
EE Mandatory Ozone Depleting
Y Required and fire suppression systems installed in the project.
Requirement 1 Substances
• In owner-occupied buildings, if HVAC systems (including unitary air-conditioners)
are not installed in the project, provide a declaration letter signed by the owner stating
that no HVAC systems are installed in the project.
Option 1: Performance Based Approach (Whole Building Simulation):

• Building simulation analysis with the following information, as applicable:
o Narrative stating the climate zone and the list of Energy Conservation Measures
(ECMs) proposed in the project.
o Comparison between the baseline building performance and the proposed building
performance with percentage improvement.
o The schedules for lighting power, thermostat set-point, HVAC system,
miscellaneous equipment power, etc., for proposed building, as determined by the
designer.
o An explanation of any error messages noted in the simulation program output.
• Details of the glazing proposed along with the list of identified manufacturers and
respective specifications of glazing (SHGC value, U-value and VLT). Also, submit
EE Mandatory Minimum Energy window-to-wall ratio (WWR) calculations for each building.
Y Required
Requirement 2 Efficiency • Construction details of the wall proposed (including wall insulation material, etc.,),
along with the U-value of the overall wall assembly.
o Sectional drawings of wall assembly.
• Construction details of the roof proposed (including roof insulation material, etc.,),
along with the U-value of the overall roof assembly.
o Sectional drawings of roof assembly.
• Details of the lighting system proposed, including a list of interior and exterior
lighting fixtures.
o Conceptual interior and exterior lighting layout. (Optional)
o Declaration letter signed by the project owner/ developer and lighting consultant
indicating the proposed LPD. (On a case-to-case basis, the assessor may request to
submit LPD calculations, as per ‘Building Area Method’ or ‘Space-by-Space method /
Space function method’)
•• Details
Copy ofofanthe air-conditioning
agreement system and
signed between space heating
the owner and the system proposed
third party indicating
commissioning
authority, if applicable.
• Narrative describing the experience of commissioning authority, on similar projects.
• Owners brief in terms of performance expectations from the building.
• Commissioning plan describing how the building would be audited for its green
building performance after occupancy, with regard to the following:
o HVAC systems - chiller, VRV systems, primary & secondary water pumps, cooling
tower, AHU fans, fresh air fans and flow settings, fresh air treatment units, heat
recovery wheel, VFDs
o Unitary air conditioners
o Temperature and RH measurements in individual spaces
o Pumps & motors
Commissioning Plan for
EE Mandatory o Lighting systems
Y Building Equipments & Required
Requirement 3 o Solar power systems
System
o CO2 monitoring system
o Energy & water metering
o Building management system
o DG sets
o Sewage treatment plant
o Any other equipment and systems
• Report specific observations and variations identified by commissioning authority to
the project owner, for each equipment and system with respect to commissioning plan
and how they were addressed.
• Measurement & verification plan for yearly reporting.
• Post-occupancy survey to verify occupants comfort (lighting levels, temperature,
relative humidity, noise levels, etc.,).
• Report on green building performance of the equipment & systems listed in
• Type of refrigerants installed in the HVAC systems.

• Calculation indicating the combined contributions of the refrigerant installed in the
1 EE Credit 1 Eco-friendly Refrigerants 1 HVAC system, to ozone depletion and global warming
Case 1 – Air-conditioned Buildings

Performance Based Approach (Whole Building Simulation):
• Please refer to the ‘Documentation required’ under EE Mandatory Requirement 2 –
Minimum Energy Efficiency.
Enhanced Energy
8 7 EE Credit 2 15 Case 2 – Non Air-conditioned Buildings (through Prescriptive Approach)
Efficiency
(Not applicable for Tenant-occupied Buildings)
• Please refer to the ‘Documentation required’ under EE Mandatory Requirement 1 –
Minimum Energy Efficiency.
• Narrative describing the installed renewable energy systems, along with the technical
details.
• Drawing showing the location of installed renewable energy systems.
• Owner-occupied-buildings: Calculations indicating the total annual energy
generation from the on-site renewable energy systems (kWh) to the total annual energy
consumption (kWh) of the building (interior & exterior areas), in percentage. Also,
provide the details of capacity of the renewable energy system (kW).
On-site Renewable • Tenant-occupied-buildings: Calculations indicating the total annual energy
4 2 EE Credit 3 6 generation from the on-site renewable energy systems (kWh) to the total annual
Energy
lighting energy consumption (kWh) of the building (interior & exterior areas)
including tenant-occupied spaces, in percentage. Also, provide the details of capacity
of the renewable energy system (kW).
• Purchase invoice/ Payment receipts of the installed renewable energy systems.
• Photographs showing the renewable energy systems.
Option 1: Off-site Renewable Energy Investments

• Extract copy of contract agreement signed between the project owner/ developer and
the green power developer, highlighting the company’s investment details on off-site
renewable energy.
generation from the off-site renewable energy systems (kWh) to the total annual
energy consumption (kWh) of the building (interior & exterior areas), in percentage.
• Tenant-occupied-buildings: Calculations indicating the total annual energy
Off-site Renewable
2 EE Credit 4 2 lighting energy consumption (kWh) of the building (interior & exterior areas)
Energy
including tenant-occupied spaces, in percentage.
• Detailed report with technical details of the off-site renewable energy systems.
Option 2: Renewable Energy Certificates (RECs)
energy consumption (kWh) of the building (interior & exterior areas), in percentage.
• Tenant-occupied-buildings: Calculations indicating the total annual energy
lighting energy consumption (kWh) of the building (interior & exterior areas)
• Report specific observations and variations vis-à-vis the plan drawn under ‘EC MR 2
– Commissioning Plan for Building Equipment & Systems’, identified during post
occupancy commissioning and report how they were addressed.
Commissioning, Post-
• Copy of the contract agreement signed between the owner/ developer and the
2 EE Credit 5 installation of Equipment 2
commissioning authority for a period of one year, to ensure that the commissioned
& Systems
equipment & systems perform efficiently.

Case 1: Energy Metering

• Narrative describing the energy meters installed in the project.
• Single line drawing showing the energy meters.
Case 2: Building Management System
• Narrative describing that the building management system is in place to control and
monitor the following systems, as applicable, along with the screen shots of live data:
o Air-conditioning management system
o Lighting management system
o Renewable energy management system
Energy Metering and
2 EE Credit 6 2 o Elevator management system
Management
o Fresh air monitoring system
o CO2 control and monitoring system
o Water management system
• Declaration letter from the project owner/ developer stating that the project will
provide the annual total building energy consumption data to IGBC. The energy data
shall be provided for all the major energy consuming equipment and systems.
17 9 2 28
Building Materials and Resources
• Narrative describing the strategies implemented to segregate and divert dry waste
(paper, plastic, metals, glass, etc.,) and wet waste from the building(s), to the easily
accessible common facility.
Also, describe strategies implemented to divert dry & wet waste and other waste such
as batteries, e-waste, lamps and medical waste (if any), from the common facility.
BMR Mandatory Segregation of Waste,
Y Required • Floor plans showing the location of waste bins at floor level and common areas, as
Requirement 1 Post-occupancy
applicable.
• Site plan showing the location of the centralised facility for segregation of waste.
• Photographs showing waste segregation area, with waste bins and siganges.
Building Reuse:
• Narrative describing the strategies implemented to retain the structural and/or non-
structural elements in the building. The narrative shall also include the list of
structural and/or non-structural elements retained.
• Calculations indicating the structural and/or non-structural elements retained in the
building (in terms of area) to the total structural and/or non-structural elements, in
percentage.
• Photographs showing the structural and/or non-structural elements retained (before
& after).
Reuse of Salvaged Materials:
• Narrative describing the strategies implemented to source and reuse salvaged
materials. The narrative shall also include the following:
Sustainable Building o List of the salvaged materials and their applications.
6 2 BMR Credit 1 8
Materials o Source of salvaged material.
• Calculations indicating the salvaged materials sourced by the project (in terms of
cost) to the total building materials cost, in percentage.
• Quotation/ Purchase invoice/ Payment receipts from vendors indicating the present
market value (in terms of cost) of salvaged materials used in the project.
• Photographs showing the salvaged materials used (before & after).
Materials with Recycled Content:
• Narrative describing the strategies implemented to source materials with recycled
content. The narrative should also include the list of materials specifying recycled
content, with manufacturer name.
• Calculations indicating the materials with recycled content (in terms of cost) to the
total materials cost of the project, in percentage.
• Manufacturer letters/ cut-sheets/ brochures indicating the recycled content in the
materials sourced.

• Narrative describing the strategies to handle kitchen waste & garden waste, and the
on-site organic waste treatment system.
• Site plan highlighting the location of on-site organic waste treatment system installed
in the project.
• Calculations indicating the quantity of organic waste treated in the project (including
Organic Waste tenant-occupied areas) to the quantity of organic waste generated, in percentage.
2 BMR Credit 2 Management, Post- 2 • Manufacturer brochure/ cut-sheet of the installed organic waste treatment system.
occupancy • Purchase invoice/ payment receipts of the installed organic waste treatment system.
• Photographs showing the installed organic waste treatment system.
• Narrative describing the strategies implemented to handle construction waste. The

narrative shall also shall include the following:
o List of construction waste materials generated and diverted for reuse, recycle & land-
fill.
o Applications of construction waste materials diverted for reuse, within or outside the
project.
• Site plan highlighting the construction waste management yard.
Handling of Waste • Calculations indicating the quantity of construction waste generated to the total
1 BMR Credit 3 Materials, During 1 quantity of construction waste reused, recycled and sent to landfill, in percentage.
Construction • Letters from scrap dealers stating the type and quantity of construction waste
received from the project site, for recycling.
• Letters from contractors stating the type and quantity of construction waste reused in
the project.
• Photographs taken at various stages of the project showing the construction waste
management.
• Narrative describing the strategies to source passive or active green building

materials, products, and equipment, that are certified by IGBC under Green Product
Certification Programme or by a third party agency approved by IGBC.
Use of Certified Green The narrative should also include the list of passive or active green building materials,
5 BMR Credit 4 Building Materials, 5 products, and equipment, with certification details.
Products & Equipment • Test certificates/ reports of the passive or active green building materials, products,
and equipment.
7 5 4 16
Indoor Environmental Quality
Mechanically Ventilated Spaces
• Narrative stating the building’s fresh air ventilation design in the project, as per
ASHRAE Standard 62.1 – 2010.
• Calculations indicating fresh air intake volumes in all regularly occupied spaces, for
each zone.
Non Air-conditioned Spaces
IEQ Mandatory Minimum Fresh Air
Y Required • Floor plans with window and door schedule.
Requirement 1 Ventilation
• Building elevations showing operable windows and doors.
• Calculations indicating the openable area of windows and doors to the carpet area,
for each of the regularly occupied spaces in percentage.
• Photographs showing the operable windows and doors to the exteriors, in all the
regularly occupied areas.
• Copy of ‘no smoking policy’ (or) Declaration letter from the project owner/
developer stating that ‘smoking’ will be prohibited in the project.
• Narrative describing the strategies implemented (eg. signages, posters, brochures,
building guidelines, etc.,) to communicate ‘no smoking policy’ to all the building
IEQ Mandatory
Y Tobacco Smoke Control Required occupants/ tenants and visitors.
Requirement 2 • If the building is designed with smoking rooms, provide the design details of the
smoking room.
• Photographs showing ‘no smoking’ signages installed in the project and smoking
room, as applicable.
• Narrative describing the strategies implemented to monitor CO2 levels in each zone.
• HVAC ducting layouts showing the location of CO2 sensors in return air ducts, for
each zone.
1 IEQ Credit 1 CO2 Monitoring 1 • Technical specifications of the installed CO2 sensors.
• Purchase invoice/ Payment receipts of the installed CO2 sensors.
• Site/ master plan showing all the buildings.

• Floor/ roof plans with window and skylight schedule.
• Manufacturer brochure/ cut-sheet/ letter of the glass installed showing the Visual
Light Transmittance (VLT).
• Photographs showing the building elevations (all sides) and interiors spaces at
different floors.
Option 1: Simulation Approach
2 IEQ Credit 2 Daylighting 2 • Daylight simulation report with sky conditions (such as date & month; time; ambient
Lux levels) and wall, floor & roof reflectance properties, for all the regularly occupied
spaces in the building. During simulation, consider shading devices and ‘shadow
effect’ of adjacent buildings.
Option 2: Measurement Approach

• Daylight analysis report indicating daylight illuminance levels measured at work
plane height, for all the regularly occupied spaces in the building.
• Site/ master plan showing all the buildings.

• Furniture layouts of all the floors.
• Sectional drawings indicating the direct line of sight to vision glazing, for each
1 IEQ Credit 3 Outdoor Views 1 typical floor.
• Calculations (floor-wise) indicating the regularly occupied spaces having access to
outdoor views to the total regularly occupied space.
• Photographs showing the outdoor views, for all the floors.
• Narrative describing the strategies implemented to minimise indoor and outdoor

pollutants.
• Plan highlighting the location of entry way systems at the building main entrance(s).
• Floor plans highlighting the location of printer/copier rooms, chemical storage room,
janitor rooms, AHU rooms etc., as applicable.
• Details of exhaust system such as negative pressure maintained/ air changes/ exhaust
Minimise Indoor and rate.
1 IEQ Credit 4 1
Outdoor Pollutants • Photographs showing exhaust system, self-closing door, deck-to-deck partition/ hard
ceiling, MERV 13 or EU 7 filters and germicidal/ UV lamps, as applicable.
• Purchase invoice of the MERV 13 or EU 7 filters and germicidal/ UV lamps, as
applicable.
• Declaration letter from the project owner/ developer stating that the project will use
low or no VOC content adhesives/sealants/paints.
• List of the proposed low or no VOC content (with make & model) proposed in the
3 IEQ Credit 5 Low-emitting Materials 3 building interiors.
• Manufacturer cut-sheets/ brochures/ Materials Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) indicating
the VOC content (in g/L, less water) of the adhesives proposed to be sourced.
• List of occupant well-being facilities (such as gymnasium, aerobics, yoga, meditation

or any indoor / outdoor games) provided in the project, with the location details.
• Plans highlighting the location of occupant well-being facilities.
• Calculations indicating the number of building occupants catered through occupant
Occupant Well-being
1 IEQ Credit 6 1 well-being facilities to the total number of building occupants, in percentage.
Facilities
• Photographs showing the occupant well-being facilities

• Narrative describing the details of indoor air quality testing in regularly occupied and
Indoor Air Quality common areas of the building (after construction and before occupancy), including the
Testing, After test procedure followed.
2 IEQ Credit 7 2
Construction and Before • Indoor air quality test report for each of the regularly occupied and common areas.
Occupancy
• Indoor Air Quality management plan describing the strategies implemented (during
construction and pre-occupancy phase) addressing – scheduling, equipment & systems
Indoor Air Quality protection, housekeeping, isolating clean areas and source control.
1 IEQ Credit 8 Management, During 1 • Photographs addressing IAQ measures taken at various stages of the project -
Construction construction, installation, commissioning and before occupancy of the building.
11 0 1 12
Innovation and Development
2 2 ID Credit 1 Innovation in Design 4
1 ID Credit 2 Optimisation in 1
1 1 ID Credit 3 Waste Water Reuse, 1
1 ID Credit 4 IGBC Accredited 1
3 4 1 7
Total Maximum points 100
Certified 40-49 points, Silver 50-59 points, Gold
67 20 14 60-74 points, Platinum 75-89, Super Platinum
90-100 points

Draft No. DFA/3337 Attachment:Section VISpecification-
Contract- DE-04 – Particular Employer’s Requirements
Annexure-14 (EOT cranes) ofPS (Part-2).pdf
chapter 8A
ANNEXUR-14
1 EOT CRANES
1.1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The specification c o ve r s the design, manufacture, supply,

installation, testing and commissioning of Electric Overhead Travelling
(EOT) Cranes to be installed in the RSS: -
1.2. TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS
The t e c h n i c a l p a r a m e t e r s of t h e EOT cranes are:-
1.2.1. Main characteristics
Which includes:-
The c a p a c i t y (nominal load),
 Operating speeds in all three directions at low speed (LS) and

high speed (HS),
 Dimensional characteristics,
 The movements of hoisting, traversing and long travelling

shall be operable simultaneously,
 Pendant control and
 Radio remote control
1.2.2. Mechanical part
1.2.2.1. Crane Bridge

The crane should be rigid, robust and of sturdy construction. The crane
bridge shall comprise of double girders of the plate box type. The
connection between crane Girder and End Carriages should be
through High strength frictional grip bolts with spacer washer. The inner
faces of plate joints containing spacer washers must be given one
primer coating with 60 micron layer thickness.
The crane bridge should be carried on end trolleys with double-flanged

solid casted wheels of spheroidal graphite impregnated material. The
minimum end clearance on each side of the long travel wheels should

chapter 8A
be 7.5mm. The wheels should be mounted inside the End Carriage and
can be conveniently removed, if required. For Underslung type EOT
cranes of Inspection bay, flangeless wheels are to be considered for
cross and long t r a ve l .
Suitable jacking pads should be provided on each end carriage for jacking
up the crane while changing track wheels. These jacking pads should not
interfere with replacement of long travel track wheels.
The end carriages should be fitted with suitable safety stops to prevent the
crane from falling more than 25mm in the event of breakage of track wheel,
bogie or axle. These s a f e t y stops should not interfere with the removal of
track wheels.
The diameter of the m o t o r i s e d wheels and the steel grade must be

studied to obtain, in all load configurations, perfect braking without any
slide. Each end carriage shall be provided with rubber stops adapted to the
end buffers.
1.2.2.2. Trolley frame and hoist

The trolley frame of all the double girder EOT cranes should be welded
rolled steel section, designed to transmit the load to the bridge rails
without undue deflection.
The trolley wheels of all double girder EOT cranes should be double
flanged. The Wheel bearings should be either grooved ball bearing or
taper roller bearings as per d e s i g n specifications.
The top of the trolley frame should be plated (chequered plate) all over at
the top, except for opening(s) required for the ropes to pass through. The
opening in the trolley frame should be such as to keep the ropes at a
safe distance from any part of the trolley frame or equipment, to prevent
damage at all positions of the bottom block.
The trolley should be fitted with substantial safety stops to prevent the
trolley from falling more t h a n 25mm in the event of breakage of track
wheel, bogie or axle. These safety stops should not interfere with the
removal of wheel.
The trolley frame/hoist shall be provided with rubber stops designed to

chapter 8A
absorb the kinetic energy in t h e event of a braking fault. Stops shall

be designed for a trolley running at high speed under a nominal load.
The hoist shall be provided with manual brake release in the event of
power failure.
1.2.2.3. Rails
The rails shall be designed with the consideration of building
expansion joints. The bridge rails shall b e Square / Rectangular bar of
EN8/SNT52 Material. Rail stops welded should be provided to prevent
creep in the longitudinal direction. These rails to be directly welded on
the Gantry Girders.
Since Under slung cranes of Inspection bay travels on bottom flange of

the runway beam, LT Rails are not required for these cranes. However,
the contractor should confirm t h e flange width and thickness of the
runway beams to the structural contractor at the stage of building
drawings approval.
1.2.2.4. Rail wheels

The rail wheels of all EOT cranes other than that of Inspection bay
should be double-flanged with straight tread. They shall be capable of
taking misalignments in span as per VDI 3576, Class IIspecifications.
These wheels shall be of spheroidal Graphite impregnated Cast Iron
material to have minimum hardness of 22 HRC. The Wheel Blocks to
be connected to End Carriage through Pin connection &circlip locking.
Wheels should be with splined hub profile t o DIN 5480, Residual
flange indicator, Dampening element and protected internal bearing
arrangement featuring Tapered Roller. Wheel bearings to be lubricated
for life.
1.2.2.5. Rope drums

The rope drum shall be designed to withstand the compressive stresses
caused by the wound on rope and the bending stress due to beam
action of the drum. The drum s h a l l be designed to take the entire
length of the rope in a single layer. Free extra turns shall also be
provided. The drum shall be flanged at both ends.
Cranes shall be designed with number of rope falls varying with lifting

chapter 8A
capacity as per details given below:
Upto 15.0 tonnes - 4 falls
Rope drums should be with R o p e guide made of tough plastic offering

smooth rope lead-in by means of hardened pressure rollers mounted on
Anti-friction bearings. Inclined pull upto 4o without touching the Rope
guide should be possible.
1.2.2.6. Wire ropes

The Wire rope should be of reputed make and designed according to
FEM 9.661 with tensile strength more t h a n 1570 N/mm2. Wire ropes
should be with Steel core IWRC.
1.2.2.7. Gearing
The gearing in all motions should be of suitable case-carburising low
carbon alloy steels and should conform to relevant Indian/International
standards. They shall generally be in accordance with IS: 4460-1967(or
latest) or relevant International standard like DIN. All gears and pinions
must be made from forged blanks only. All gears should be hardened
and profile ground for longer life and silent operation.
At all stages only helical gears should be used, except in planetary

gearboxes, which can be spur type. Overhung or split gears and pinions
should not be used. In addition, worm wheels and bevel gears must not
be used.
1.2.2.8. Gearboxes
All gearboxes shall be of completely enclosed splash lubricated type. All
gearboxes shall be oil tight and sealed with compound or gasket. All
gear shafts shall be supported in bearings mounted in the gearboxes.
Gearboxes should be made either of high quality pressure die cast
aluminium alloy or of grey cast iron housing. All gearboxes shall be
stress relieved. Adequate radial c l e a r a n c e s between the gearbox
inner surface and outside diameter of the gears shall be ensured. The
facial clearance between the inner surface of the gearbox and the face
of the nearest gear/pinions shall be at adequate.
These should be of a modular, integral design. Motors may be either

chapter 8A
flange-mounted or foot mounted, or a combination of the two. In case of

foot mounted motors, split type gearboxes shall also be acceptable.
The gearboxes should also be splash lubricated type. Alternatively,
VVVF controlled, directly coupled motors can also be offered.
1.2.2.9. Drives
The wheels of each end carriage should be driven by independent
synchronized drive m o t o r s mounted near each end carriage. A
separate cross traverse motor should be used for cross traverse drive
through a suitable gearbox.
Alternatively, Two Step Variable voltage variable frequency (VVVF) control

of adequate capacity for all the motions of the crane can also be
provided. Any alternative design of International standard may also
offer VVVF drives of Siemens, ABB, Demag, L&T, Allen Bradley,
Vectron shall be used.
1.2.2.10. Brakes
The hoisting motion shall be provided with fail-safe electro-hydraulic
thruster brakes. Disc brakes are also acceptable. The LT & CT
motion may have DC/AC electro-magnetic disc brakes in case of
flange mounted motors where integral gearboxes are being offered,
to derive the maximum advantage in terms of compactness and weight,
but if the motors are not flange-mounted then thrustor brakes should
be used. In case of Thruster Brakes, the maximum braking torque to
arrest long travel and cross traverse motions should not less than
100% of full load torque for each brake. For hoist motion, two brakes
should be used and the braking torque for each brake should not be
less than 125% of full load torque. One of the two hoist brakes shall be
applied with a time lag of 3 seconds in relation to the first. Thruster
brakes should also be with Double shoe brakes for each drive.
Brakes should be mounted on the input pinion shaft of all gearboxes.
The brake shoe should be of hinged type. Brake levers s h o u l d be
forged and hinge pins should be provided with steel bushes at the
bearing points. Brake drums mshould be of forged or cast steel and
should be completely machined. Width of brake drum should be about

chapter 8A
10mm more than the width of brake shoe on each side.
1.2.2.11. Couplings
In case of separate drive mechanism, motor shafts for MH/AH shall be
connected to gearbox input extension shaft through flexible gear
coupling. For driving the hoist drum gear type flexible coupling shall
be used between, the ropes drum and hoist gear box, where the hub
should not be integral with the output shaft, so as to avoid replacement
of the whole shaft whenever there is wear and tear in the coupling. Solid
couplings should not be used.
All couplings shall be of medium carbon steel and shall be designed

to suit the maximum torque that can be developed. Hardness of geared
portion in the gear coupling shall be more than 250 BHN. Bolted
connections shall be easily accessible for inspection and tightening.
1.2.2.12. Rope sheaves

All sheaves should be of cast/forged steel, they should be identical, with
the exception of the equaliser sheave. The equaliser sheave should be
mounted above the trolley floor and should be easily accessible and
removable from the trolley floor level. The equaliser sheave should be
arranged to turn and swivel in order to maintain rope alignment under
all circumstances. Sheave grooves should be smooth finished for getting
increased rope life. The supplier should further ensure that wire ropes
are parallel with each other.
1.2.2.13. Bearings
Ball and roller anti-friction bearings shall be of only reputed makes
like NBC, SKF, FAG, N O R M A , NRB, NTN and KOYO.
For long and cross traverse wheels, bearings should be either grooved
ball bearing or t a p e r roller bearings as per design specifications shall
be used. Bush bearings should not be used at any location.
Rated life of ball and roller bearings should not be less than the total
life in working hours g i ve n in accordance for a particular class of duty.
Independent bearing housings on long shafts are split on the shaft

centre line to permit easy r e m o va l of the shaft. The bottom surface of

chapter 8A
all bearing pedestals should be machined, and should bear upon a

machined surface.
1.2.2.14. Lifting hook

The hook shall be secured to a pulley block system with pulleys
designed according to the c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s of the wire ropes. The
pulley block system casing shall be provided with two proper grips.
Standard plain shank type trapezoidal section hooks should be used.

These hooks should conform to the relevant Indian Standard
Specifications IS: 15560 (latest) / DIN standard 15401.
Hooks should be mounted on grease lubricated anti-friction thrust

bearings and a protective skirt should be fitted to prevent rotation of
the hook. The hook block should have handle recess to provide
improved safety against hand crushing. The bottom block must be of
enclosed design. The rope sheaves of the bottom blocks must be
protected with covers, so that the operator’s hand cannot be jammed
between the rope sheaves and the rope. The Rope sheaves should
be self- adjustable type during Hoisting motion to accommodate the
Wire Rope. The hook shall be fitted with a safety catch of spring-loaded
type.
1.2.2.15. Buffer
Spring loaded or other suitable buffers should be fitted on the four
corners of the crane and also at the four ends of the bridge girders.
Buffers should be rigidly bolted in place, preferably along the centre
line of the crane rail or trolley rail as the case may be. All buffers should
have sufficient energy absorbing capacity to stop the bridge or
trolley in either direction when travelling at its rated speed.
1.2.2.16. Lubrication
Individual/Group lubrication, one for each of the end carriage and one
for the trolley platform, should be provided for all grease-lubricated
bearings, parts of the hoist, cross traverse and long travel. The
grease battery nipples should be located to facilitate regular greasing
by the operator with standard equipment. All gears and bearings
enclosed inside gearboxes should be splash lubricated. Bottom blocks

chapter 8A
and pedestal bearings should have independent greasing points. All

lubricating pipe work should be securely fixed and protected from
damage, and be accessible throughout. A lubricating chart should be
provided in the manual, indicating all lubrication points, the type of
lubricants required and the recommended frequency of lubrication.
These details should be repeated, and amplified, in the Maintenance
Manual.
1.2.2.17. Maintenance Platform

Each Double Girder crane shall include one maintenance walkway
installed along the crane box girder structures & one Short platform on
other side of the crane. Walkway shall be of a length equal to that of a
box structure and the other shall be of a length equal to that of the
traversing trolley. Crossover from one walkway to the other shall be via
a platform, mounted on the hoist trolley. Plating shall be of the anti-skid
type. Walkways shall be provided with guardrails designed in
accordance with safety standards. Whereas for under slung crane
maintenance platform is not applicable.
1.2.3. Electrical part
The Contractor shall carry out all electrical work from power supply
switch to the cranes. The available electrical power supply is 360-440V,
50 + 3% Hz, three-phase, 4-wires. The equipment and gear to be
supplied mainly includes:
 one latchable isolating switch and MCCB,
 down shop leads,
 electric switchboard and control panel ,
 various motors,
 power and control wiring,
 limit switches,
 the lighting (2Nos. H.P.M.V Under bridge lamps - 400W)- In case

of double girder cranes only,
 the control switch

chapter 8A
1.2.3.1. Latchable isolating switch
It is provided for maintenance purpose and shall impede any

movement of the EOT Crane when Maintenance work is in progress.
1.2.3.2. Down Shop Leads
The down shop leads shall be of enclosed type with copper conductors.
The conductor system shall be compact in construction finger safe to

IP-23. The conductor material shall be insulated by a high impact gloss
finish PVC compound which shall have a step/groove shrouded all
along its length for effective moulding of the conductor system.
The conductor section shall be minimum four mtrs. in length to be

jointed with moulded joint of the same material as the conductor and
these conductors shall be supported by way of a single piece moulding,
four pole hanger with single bolt fixing.
The current collector trolley running inside the enclosure should be with
spring loaded sliding contacts offering positive contact with copper
conductor. The cable from current collector trolley should be totally
insulated, fully enclosed and double insulated within the collector arm
with a proven performance.
Necessary wearing components for maintenance during DLP shall be

provided. The Contractor shall size the copper section of the conductor
in accordance with the necessary power, and voltage drop requirements
with the approval of the Employer.
The bays are provided with power supply to the down shop leads with
four sets of power-on indicator lights. The power supply for crane will
be provided at workshop working level through TPN MCCB.
The cabling from TPN MCCB to down shop leads shall be in crane
scope of work. Down shop leads shall be connected to power supply
at single / multiple points, as per the design requirements.
1.2.3.3. Switchboards and gear
Control gear shall be mounted in one or more switchboards depending

on the type of EOT Crane. The protection index shall be IP 54.

chapter 8A
The trip circuit of the circuit breaker shall be designed such that it
should prevent the circuit breaker from being enclosed when main
contactor of any of the motions has failed to open, although the
corresponding controller has been brought to OFF position. Suitable
protective features to trip the circuit breaker with the operation of limit
switches and emergency push buttons shall also be provided. For
protection of each drives, motor against over loads adjustable inverse
time lag manually reset electro-magnetic, type relays shall be provided
for each motor. Alternatively, electronic type relays shall be
acceptable. These relays shall be mounted in respective contactor
panels and shall be set to trip the circuit of motion being controlled
when current exceeds 200% of normal value for more than 10
seconds. Each motor feeder shall be protected with no volt trip device
& short circuit, and with instantaneous trip current sensitive type single
phasing cum phase reversal preventor. Isolating switches fitted with
protection shall be provided for the following branch circuits:
(a) Lighting and hand lamp socket outlets
(b) Control circuit.
Each control circuit branch to every contactor panel shall be provided

with facility for isolation and protection against short circuits and
sustained high overloads by means of appropriately rated miniature
circuit breaker.
The electrical switchboard shall be key locked. The door shall include
a 3-position switch provided for no-load testing of control circuits and
shall be connected to the cabinet via an earth braid.
All terminals and wiring shall be marked in accordance with the electrical
diagram.
1.2.3.4. Control Pendant
The controls shall be given from a push-button control pedant, which

shall be:
 sealed, insulated to IP65 and unbreakable,

chapter 8A
 be capable of moving along the EOT Crane independently from

the movement direction of the hook,
 be suspended with a stainless steel wire
 The pendant control shall be capable of withstanding rough

handling without being damaged. The cover shall be firmly
secured & made out of Nylon fiber.
The function of the push buttons shall be identified by means of

engraved labels. The various types of push buttons used are as
follows:-
 Safety means shall be provided to prevent inadvertent operation

from floor while maintenance work is being carried out on the crane.
 Adequate guards shall be provided to prevent accidental contact of

pendant ropes or holding wire rope/chain with cross traverse.
 released, not held, for all movements and for the hooters,
 held for switching on and lighting,
 turn to unlock for the emergency stopping.
1.2.3.5. Radio Remote Control
The wireless control facility shall incorporate control of movements in

all directions, with speeds identical to those provided for the pendent
control.
The facilities to be provided shall incorporate but need not to be

limited to the operations features listed below:
 Emergency stop button
 Emergency alarm button
 Normal ON/OFF button
 Low/High speed button
 Directional movement control buttons
 Radio/Pendent control selection buttons
 Overall, weight of remote control hand set (transmitter) not to

chapter 8A
exceed 0.5 kgs. Approx.
The system shall be so designed that in the event of mal-function it should

be possible for the user to switch over to pendent control through suitable
by pass switch facility. The general scope of supply Radio Remote Control
equipment shall be as follows:
 1 no. Transmitter-Push button type
 1 no. receiver
 1 no. Antenna and cable
 Two sets of Alkaline battery size AA
The transmitter shall be provided with a shoulder belt and shall be in

IP65 enclosed. The system shall be microprocessor based and shall
have watchdog circuit. The range of operation should be 40 meters
minimum. The crane supplier shall be responsible for commissioning the
system.
Tenderer shall ensure adequate supply of spares and availability of

maintenance spares support within the country.
Equipment supplied should be certified by internationally recognised

inspection agency.
1.2.3.6. Contactors
All contactors shall be of AC 4 Class of duty with rating sufficiently

higher than the full load current of the respective motors at the
specified duty cycle. The directional contactors of all motions shall be
suitably interlocked for correct sequence of operation. Electrical &
mechanical life of the contactors shall be indicated. For AC 4 Class of
duty Electrical life shall be minimum 2,00,000 cycles of operations. The
contactors shall have high contact reliability with preferably double
break parallel bridge contact and facility of time saving termination. All
contactors shall be of Telemechanique, ABB, Siemens, L&T and Cutler
Hammer make. Test certificate of the manufacturers shall be
submitted in support of life and rating of the contactors.
1.2.3.7. Limit switches

chapter 8A
All hoist motions shall be provided with limit switches to prevent crane
from over hoisting and over lowering. Limitation of the motions at the
upper and lower Hook positions should be effected by Geared Limit
switch, provided with 4 contacts. The design should be such that the
limits can be set as per the requirements during crane installation at site.
Two stages Limit switch for hoist cross and long travel motion shall be
supplied installed and wired by the manufacturer.
1.2.3.8. Control panel
Variable voltage variable frequency control (VVVF) if considered,

should be of adequate capacity for all the motions of the crane shall be
provided. VVVF drive of Siemens, ABB, L&T, Allen Bradley make shall
be used. Independent AC variable frequency control for main hoist, aux.
Hoist, CT & LT shall be used by using independent variable voltage
variable frequency drives. However, common controller for both the
motors of LT may be used.
The components inside the Control panel should be mounted in such

a way that all the components are easily accessible. The clearance
between cable tray and each component should be minimum 25mm.
GA drawing of control panel should indicate internal layout of the

components. Instrument cutouts should be exact and without burrs or
unevenness. Location of outgoing terminals should be minimum100mm
above the gland plate. Gland plate should be sufficient to
accommodate outgoing cables.
Proper stiffners should be provided to avoid buckling and unevenness.

Control panel should have self adhesive type gasketting arrangement.
Control panel box and base plate should have identification label
bearing details of project, electrical drawing number along with
revision number.
Minimum steel thicknesses to be used are:
 Base plate –2.0 mm
 Front Facia –2.0 mm

chapter 8A
 Other sides –2.0 mm/1.6mm
 Frame –2.0 mm
All power and auxiliary contactors, individual overload relay shall be

mounted in sheet steel cubical with lockable-hinged doors. The door
hinges shall be of such type that during the repair works inside the
panel the entire door can be lifted out and placed away enabling
better access inside the panel. A common panel with separate
compartment for each motion shall be acceptable. Interiors of panel
shall be dust and vermin proof. Panels shall be front wired with readily
accessible terminal blocks for making connections in the external
equipment. Panels shall be pre-wired into terminal strip. Single core,
copper conductor shall be used for control circuit wiring in the panel.
All the equipment shall be so mounted in panel as to enable its easy
removal/replacement from the front.
1.2.3.9. Cabling
Control wiring and signal wiring should be separate as far as possible.

Phase control wiring should be 1.5 Sq. mm gray while neutral wiring
should be black in colour. Power wiring should be minimum 2.5 Sq.
mm size and R,Y,B colour coated for R,Y,B phases. Maximum loading
of PVC cable should be 60% of cable tray capacity. Wire bends should
not be sharp to damage the conductors. Proper support for outgoing
cables should be provided with proper Ferruling. Wiring more than 5
cm length should not be exposed. Wiring should be properly bunched
or spiralled. Wiring should run parallel only, no crossing of two wires
is permitted. Common point of star connected current transformers
should be earthed. Where ever required, a separate instrument earth
should be provided, which is separate from main earth. Earthing can
be done as per cable size and application requirement, also creepage
distance could be decided as per IEC standard / switch gear
manufacturer requirement. Control and power links between the EOT
Crane Bridge and the hoist are made of flat cable, laid as a garland,
with appropriate carriers. Any cables exiting from a steel tube must
be protected by an insulating end fitting. Power cable shall be of

chapter 8A
FRLSH XLPE type. Labels of permanent nature shall be provided on

supports of all switches, fuses, contactors, relays etc, to facilitate
identification of circuits and replacement. All panels, controllers,
resistors etc. shall be properly marked for each motion. All power
control cable, lighting and other cables shall be ferruled at both end as
per cables numbers indicated in the supplier’s drawing. All equipment
terminals shall also to be marked likewise.
1.2.3.10. Motors
Motors shall be of the asynchronous or squirrel cage type with a built-in

electromechanical or magnetic brake. The ingress protection level of
motors shall be IP55. Motor selection for lifting and travel applications
should be according to rule FEM 9.683. The motors must be suitable
for the operating conditions and ensure safe operation under related
conditions. All motors shall have insulation class B. The criteria for motor
selection should be as below:
 Required power – the thermal power is also included in these

required powers.
 Maximum rated torque and maximum acceleration torque.
 Cyclic duration factor.
 No. of cycles / hour.
 Type of control (type of braking)
 Speed regulation.
 Degree of protection.
 Ambient Temperature.
This brake shall be applied automatically in case of power failure during

lifting or travel.
1.2.3.11. Lighting
For all double girders EOT cranes other than that of Inspection bay
should have high bay light fitting with metal halide lamps of 400 W and
associated control gear shall be securely fitted at two different locations

chapter 8A
below the crane platform. These units shall be supplied with 230 V via
a contactor controlled from a switch on the pushbutton pendant. A
switch for the tubes shall be provided on the walkway.
Tool Receptacle shall be provided on crane platform – 2 Nos. sockets

(1 No. – Single phase, 20Amps and 1No. – Three Phase, 32 Amps)
to provide power supply for maintenance purpose.
1.2.3.12. PROTECTION AND SAFETY
In addition to the various recommendations enumerated in the

previous paragraphs, the Contractor shall include the protection
systems scheduled in the standards and consider the following
recommendations:
 all metal parts shall be earthed,
 all movements (lifting, forwards/ reverse, traversing) shall include

limit switches, The lifting movement shall be fitted with:
 an over travel switch cutting off the power circuit which may be
reset from the crane walkway,
 a load limiter, which cuts off the power supply to all movements
except lowering
 A buzzer to warn the persons working near the crane operating

zone when crane is in working condition.
1.2.3.13. STANDARDS
The entire supply shall satisfy the requirements of Indian Standards

mentioned below or equivalent International/European/British standards/
DIN Standards and regulations in force:
 IS 3177 : 1999 – Indian Standard Code of practice for EOT Cranes
 IS 807 : 1976 – Indian Standard code of practice for design,

manufacture, erection and testing(structural portion) of cranes and
hoists
 IS 3938 : 1979 – Indian Standard code for electric wire rope hoists
 IS 2266 : 1976 – wire ropes

chapter 8A
 IS 4460: 1967 - gears
 BS 466: specification for power driven overhead travelling cranes,

semi-goliath and goliath cranes
For general use:
 BS 2573 : Part 1 & 2 - Rules for design of cranes BS 5395 - Stairs,

ladders and walkways
 DIN 15018 – Crane classification
 DIN 15401 – Lifting hooks for lifting appliances FEM 9.683 –

selection of lifting and travel motors.
 FEM 9.661 – Rules for design of series lifting equipment
 DIN 15020 – Principles relating to Rope Drives.
1.2.3.14. FINISH
Paintwork
Preparatory works prior to painting:
Outsides: brushing, degreasing, grit blasting. Copper Slag blasting to the

second quality finish (Swedish Standard grade SA 2.5) and blowing
clean.
Hollow bodies: these areas shall be treated prior to assembly by

applying a coat of anti- corrosion paint.
The thickness of this coat after drying shall not be less than 180 microns.
Painting:
External parts and ancillary parts shall receive:
 Type: Primer cum finish paint
 Make: Hempel fast dry 45410/ sigma cover 350/ intergard 345
 Nos. of coat: 2Nos.
 Gloss Level: Semi Gloss (40-50%)
 Total DFT: 125 Micron
The paints to be applied on walkways, access ladders and handrails

chapter 8A
shall have a good abrasive resistance. All equipment shall be painted

golden yellow (RAL 1004). On site, the Contractor shall touch-up
paintwork which may be made necessary by equipment installation.
1.2.3.15. Unpainted parts
All friction parts or parts which mast remain polished shall be coated
to protect them from corrosion until equipment start-up.
1.2.3.16. Identification
Two identification plates shall be fixed to each crane on either side of

the main structure.
These Identification plates shall indicate:
 Safe working load in Tonnes
 the year of manufacture,
 the unit item number.
The Constructor’s identification plate may be affixed.
 All nuts, bolts, washers etc shall be GI except where provided

otherwise.
1.2.3.17. CHECKS AND TESTS
In-manufacturer’s-plant
During manufacture, and prior to delivery, verifications and checks

shall be carried out in order to ensure that the supply is in accordance
with the technical specification and with the approved design documents.
All quality checks shall be carried out, as required, during manufacture

on the Contractor’s or on the sub-contractors premises.
The Contractor shall provide for quality check of supplies on his sub-
contractor’s premises prior to delivery of these supplies to his workshops.
Operation of safety and protection devices shall also be checked. The

Contractor shall also carry out the following practical tests:
 the various operating configurations with no load,
 insulation,

chapter 8A
 proper operation of dynamic tests including:
 verification of speeds,
 crane behavior during start-up, acceleration, deceleration and

braking.
 In particular, the efficiency of the brakes, limit switches, load

limiters, good collection of power and the various currents,
heating of electrical and mechanical devices, etc. shall be
checked.
These tests shall be carried out only on forward, reverse and

lifting movements. Traversing movements shall be tested on the site.
1.2.3.18. At-Site
After assembly and erection of the EOT Cranes at site, all tests
mentioned in para 6.1 shall be carried out in presence of a
representative of the Employer. In addition, the tests pertaining to the
traversing movement and the verification of the anti-collision devices
shall be carried out after assembly on the site along with the load test at
100% loading and over load test at 125% loading for determining crane
Girder deflection. After these tests, the load limiter shall be adjusted to
its normal value and tested. The Main contractor shall be responsible
for arranging loads at site for load testing.
TRAINING
The contractor shall provide following training for operation and

maintenance staff for EOT Crane
 6 working days training for four staff on operation of crane
 6 working days training for four staff for maintenance of the crane.
Two sets training material shall be provided to the trainees.
DOCUMENTS TO BE PROVIDED
All documents shall be provided in English.
In the Bid
The Contractor shall provide, for each overhead travelling crane:

chapter 8A
a detailed technical note including a description of the equipment, main

dimensions and total electrical power required,
 photographs or sketches of similar equipment with a list of

references,
 general drawings substantiating the good installation of the

equipment,
 references of the sub-contractors,
 the various speeds for each of the movements,
 the standards and specifications that the main components

used in the installation satisfy.
For Execution of Work
Prior to manufacture of equipment, the Contractor shall send the

following documents for approval:
 detailed dimensional drawing of the elements of the machine,

and dimensions of the cabinet,
 general, detailed assembly drawings and drawings of mechanical

parts,
 a note, indicating that the provisions in the civil work are

compatible with the equipment offered,
 characteristics of the drum and the pulley block system,
 detailed calculation notes,
 references and characteristics of the main standard parts,
 detailed electrical diagram for troubleshooting including cable

index,
 detailed electrical diagram for troubleshooting including cable

index,
 electrical power required at each workstation, including

switchboard equipment breakdown,
 list of basic spare parts to be kept in stock for repairs, during DLP,

chapter 8A
 documentation, drawings, notes and references of sub-contractors,
 installation and commissioning procedure,
 schedule of work and completion period.
At Completion of Work
The Contractor shall provide the entire documentation, upto date:
 the general nomenclature of the supply including sub-contractors,
 mechanical drawings and electrical diagrams required for

maintenance and troubleshooting of the machine,
 illustrated lists of mechanical and electrical parts itemised in

accordance with the diagrams and drawings mentioned above and
including the addresses of the various contractors,
 Two sets of maintenance and adjustment manual with summary of

circuits and functions and among other information, a lubrication
manual including location of lubrication points, type of lubricants,
frequencies and quantities,
 Two sets of an operating manual including start up and user’s

instructions,
 complete documentation on motors,
 test reports or certificates for conformity of the equipment,
 list of recommended spare parts for two years requirements.
COMMISSIONING
After completion of work, the crane shall be commissioned and all the
commissioning tests shall be jointly carried out by the contractor and The
Engineer and recorded in the format given by the contractor and
approved by The Engineer. All the equipment, tools & tackles and
measuring instruments shall be arranged by the contractor. All
consumables shall be arranged by The Contractor.

chapter 8A
Check List for EOT Cranes
CLAUSE S.N. DESCRIPTION OBSERVATION
1 Checking of Parameters as per Approved GTP
2 Checking of Dimensions as per Approved Drawings
General
3 Checking of Internal Test report
Checking of Calibration Certificate for equipment

4
used in testing
TECHINAL SPECIFICATION
EOT CRANES
Mechanical Parts
Check the Bridge has two Double Girders of the

1
Plate Box type
Check the Connection between the Crane Girder

2 and End Carriages is made through High Strength
Frictional Grip bolts with Space Washer
Check the Inner Faces of the Plate Joints

3 Containing Space Washers must be given one
Crane
Primer Coating of 60 Micron Coating thickness
Bridge
Check the Crane Bridge is carried on end trolleys
4 with double flanged solid casted wheels of
Spheroid Graphite Impregnated material
Check the Minimum End Clearance on each side

5
of the Long Travel wheels should be 10mm
Check the wheels is mounted inside the end

6
carriage and can be conveniently removed if

chapter 8A
required
Suitable jacking pads should be provided on each

7 Carriage for jacking up the crane while changing
the Track wheels
Check the end carriage is fitted with suitable

safety stops to prevent the crane from falling
8
more than 25mm in case of the breakage of track
wheel, bogie or axle
Check the trolley frame is welded rolled steel

1 section, designed to transmit the load to all the
bridge rails without undue deflection
Check the opening of the trolley frame is such as

2 to keep the ropes at a safe distance from any part
of the trolley frame or equipment
Trolley
Frame and
Check the trolley is fitted with substantial safety
Hoist
stops to prevent the trolley from falling more than
3
22mm in the event of Breakage of Track wheel,
Bogie or axle
Check the trolley frame is provided with rubber

4 stops designed to absorb the Kinetic Energy in
the event of braking fault
Check the bridge rail is square/rectangular bar of

1
EN8/ SN 52 material
Rails
Rail stops welded should be provided to prevent
2
creep in Longitudal Direction
Check the Rail Wheels is of Double flagged with

1
Rail Straight tread

chapter 8A
Wheels Check the wheels is of spheroid Graphite

2 Impregnated Cast Iron Material to have minimum
hardness of 22 HRC
Check the wheels blocks is connected to End

3 Carriage through Pin Connection and Circlip
Locking
1 Check the Drum is flanged at both ends
Rope Check the Rope Drum is with rope guide made of
Drums tough plastic offering smooth lead-in by means of

2
hardened pressure rollers mounted on anti-friction
bearings
Check the wire rope is of steel core IWRC with

Wire
1 tensile strength more than or equal to 1570N per
Ropes
sq mm
Check the Gearing is of Suitable case carburizing

1
low carbon alloy steels according to relevant IS
Gearing
Check the gears is of only Helical type except in
2
Planetry gear boxes which can be spur type
Gear Check the Gear Boxes is made either of high

Boxes 1 quality pressure die cast aluminium alloy or of frey
cast iron housing
1 Check the Rope Sheaves is of Cast/forged Steel
Rope
Check the equalizer sheave is mounted above the
Sheaves
2 trolley floor and easily accessible and removable
from the trolley floor level
Bearings 1 Check Ball and Roller anti-friction bearings is of

only makes like NBC, SKF, FAG, NORMA, NRB,

chapter 8A
NTN and KOYO
Check the Lifting hooks is of Standard plain shank

1
type trapezoidal section hooks as per relevant IS
Lifting
Check the hooks is mounted on grease lubricated
Hooks
2 anti-friction thrust bearing and a protective skirt is
fitted to prevent rotation of hook
Check the spring loaded or other suitable buffer is

1 fitted on the four corners of the crane and also at
the four end of the bridge girders
Buffer
Check the buffer is rigidly bolted in place
2 preferably along the center line of crane rail or
trolley rail
Electrical Parts
Check for the latchable isolating switch is

Latchable
provided for maintenance purpose and shall
Isolating 1
impede any movement of the EOT Crane when
Switch
maintenance work is in progress
Check the Down Shop Leads is of enclosed type

1
with Copper Conductors
Down
Check the conductor system is compact in
Shop 2
construction finger safe to IP-23
Leads
Check the Down Shop Leads Connection to
3
power supply as per approved GTP
1 Check the Protection Index and shall be IP 54

Switch
Boards For Protection of each Drives, motor against
and Gear 2 overloads adjustable Inverse time lag manually
reset electro-magnetic, type relays shall be

chapter 8A
provided for each motor
Check for each motor feeder is protected with no

volt trip device and short circuit, and with
3
instantaneous trip current sensitive type single
phasing cum phase reversal preventor
Check the electrical switch board shall be key

4
locked
Check the door shall include a 3-position switch

provided for no-load testing of control circuits and
5
shall be connected to the cabinet via an earth
braid
Check for the control pendant is sealed and

1
Insulated to IP 65 and unbreakable
Check the Control Pendant is capable of moving

2 along the EOT crane independently from
Control movement direction of hook
Pendant
Check the Control Pendant is suspended with a
3
Stainless Steel Wire
Check the Control Pendant cover is made out of

4
Nylon fibre
Check the Wireless control facility is provided

1 which incorporate control of movement in all
Radio directions
Remote
Check the operations features like
Control
1. Emergency Stop button
2
2. Emergency alarm button
3. Normal ON/OFF button

chapter 8A
4. Low/High speed button

5. Directional movement control buttons
6. Radio/Pendant control selection buttons
Check the overall weigth of remote control hand

3
set (transmitter) not to exceed 0.5kgs
Check transmitter is provided with a shoulder belt

4
and shall be IP65 enclosure
Check the range of operation is 40 meters

5
minimum
1 Check Contactors is of AC 4 Class of Duty
Contactors
Electrical life of Contactor is minimum of 200000
2
cycles of Operations
Check the Clearance between cable tray and

1
each component should be minimum 25mm
Check the outgoing terminals should be minimum

2
100mm above the gland plate
Control
Check the control panel box and base plate is
Panel
having Identification label bearing details of
3
project, electrical drawing number along with
revision number
Check the Control Circuit wiring is done through

4
Copper Conductor in the panel
Check the Phase Control Wiring should be 1.5 sq

1
mm Gray while neutral wiring is Black in color
Cabling
Check the Power Wiring is minimum 2.5 sq mm
2
size and R, Y, B color coded for R, Y, B phase

chapter 8A
Check the proper Ferruling is done according to

3
GTP
Check the Ingress protection level of motors and

1
shall be IP 55
Motors
2 Check the motor shall have the Insulation class B
1 Check that all the double girders EOT Cranes

other than of Inspection bay is provided with high
bay light fitting with metal halide of 400W
2 Check that a switch is provided for tubes on the

walkway
Lightning
3 Check that two number of sockets (1 single
phase, 20 Amps and 1 three phase, 32 Amps) is
provided on Crane Platform
4 Check each walk way is provided with 2 units of 2

Nos. 40W Fluorescent tubes
1 Check that all metal parts shall be Earthed
2 Check all the Movements (Lifting,

Forward/Reverse, traversing) is provided with the
limiting Switches
3 Check the Lifting movement is fitted with:

Protection 1. An over travel switch cutting off the power
and Safety circuit which may be reset from the crane
walkway
2. A load limiter which cuts off the power supply to
all movements except lowering
3. A buzzer to warn the persons working near the
crane operating zone when crane is in working
condition

chapter 8A
1 Check external part and ancillary parts shall

receive
a. Primer cum Finish paint
b. Hempel fast dry 45410/ Sigma Cover 350/

Intergrade 345 make
c. 2 No of coating is done
Finishing d. Total DFT is 125 Micron
2 Check all equipment shall be painted Golden

Yellow (RAL 1004)
3 Check all friction parts must remain polished and

coated to protect them from corrosion until
equipment start-up
4 Check all the nut, bolts, washers etc is GI except

otherwise specified in GTP

Contract- DE-04 – Particular Specification- Annexure-15 (Cable laying: GPR survey and Method statement) of Chapter 8A
ANNEXURE-15
Cable Laying: GPS Survey and Method Statement.
1. General
This Section covers GPS survey of Underground cable and guidelines

for preparing method statement for cable laying activities under this
contract and this section specifies the scope of work, documents
preparations, and execution, of above activities within RSS premises
and from GSS to RSS premises. This method statement shall be
prepared by cable manufacturer in line with these guidelines.
2. Details of Sections
2.1. GPS Survey of underground cable.
2.2. Guidelines for preparing method statement of cable laying.
3. Scope of Work
3.1. GPS Survey of underground cable.
The contractor will execute the work i.e. “GPR Survey of Underground
Cables of Delhi Metro Rail Corporation Ltd.”
The work may be required to be carried out during power block in non-
revenue hours.
The scope of work includes the following:
(a) The work shall be carried out as per Contract, Special conditions of
Contract and other terms & conditions given in the tender document.
(b) Contractor shall supply equipment of one of the following make –
SPECTRA/SOUTH/ASHTECH/TRIMBLE/LEICA. Product of any other

reputed GPS equipment manufacturer meeting given specifications shall

be considered for supplying, however, in this case detailed technical
brochure of equipment shall be submitted by the contractor to engineer-in-
charge for approval. The equipment shall be supplied only after approval
of engineer-in-charge.
3.1.1. The work shall be carried out by contractor as per following scope of
work:
3.1.1.1. All required manpower, DGPS survey, GPR equipment with different
Frequency Antenna as required, Total Station Equipment, Induction Cable
Locator shall arranged by the contractor. Other necessary Activities as
leveling of surface (if required for carrying out survey), necessary
permission from local civic authorities to produce the desired output will
be in the scope of contractor, DMRC will help in this regards.
3.1.1.2. The work shall be carried out in Delhi & NCR region as per direction of
engineer in-charge.
3.1.1.3. Before start of utilities detection survey contractor will have to submit the
Execution Plan and Project schedule etc to engineer in charge.
3.1.1.4. The survey shall be carried out for collection of information of utilities up to
5m depth on 5m wide corridor. The utility corridor of 5 meter will be based
on field survey input. All utilities (both metallic and non-metallic) in the
corridor need to be surveyed and scanned.
3.1.1.5. The GPR survey to be done at intervals of 10 meter for straight run of
cable and with close intervals of 2 meter at road crossings, location of
SVL, junctions, other utilities (Water, Gas Pipeline & Electric Cable etc.).
Crossing/parallel run or bent location and at new intermediate utilities
appears.
3.1.1.6. The survey should be conducted with adequate advanced technologies

(total station, DGPS, etc), in such a manner that all types of utilities,

sewer line, cable/duct etc are identified. In case of any other

methodology / technology is proposed by the contractor, the same may be
agreed by DMRC provided that end results are same. However for any
such changes approval of Engineer in-charge shall be obtained by the
contractor after giving all technical details of the methodology / technology
proposed to be adopted.
3.1.1.7. Coordinate system (Universal Mercator system-UTM) provided, should

allow superimposition on any standard mapping environment and platform
like Google Earth.
3.1.1.8. Undulations in land surface during utility scan to be taken care off.
3.1.1.9. Accuracy of utility detected for vertical and horizontal should not be more
than 50 cm.
3.1.1.10. The validation of the report shall be carried out in presence of Engineer in-
charge at one or more location in each line. The locations shall be
provided by engineer in-charge randomly and joint report shall be
prepared. For such locations, any work such as digging of earth as
required shall be done by contractor without any extra cost to DMRC. In
case during validation of the location of cable it is found that position of
cable is at distances more than given tolerance band, entire survey shall
be carried out again by the contractor until desired accuracy is achieved.
3.1.1.11. The survey should also pick up all surface projections of utilities such as
manhole valves, chambers, junction box, fire hydrants etc. falling in the
corridor.
3.1.1.12. If the utility corridor falls on both foot path and on carriage way, GPR
scanning to be done on both foot path and carriage way and if there are
any obstruction in the survey corridor, the readings to be taken before and
after the obstruction and also whatever readings possible in between.
3.1.2. The drawings/maps should have following notable features:

3.1.2.1. Horizontal/Vertical scale to be selected suitably to show the utilities clear,

readable and legible. Relative depth of utility shall be with respect to chart
datum (MSL) or any known permanent bench mark level established by
Survey of India in the near vicinity. Further depth of the cables should
also to be provided with respect to the ground surface.
3.1.2.2. The reference points to be created (and to be shown in drawings) from

where relative location of cables can be marked and will be associated with
various utilities like manhole valves, fire hydrants, chambers, and junction
boxes etc for better understanding for field team. In the drawings,
distances of these utilities from cable also to be shown.
3.1.2.3. Depth below ground shall be annotated at each measured change and at
significant change of depth (more than 50 cm change) & shall be indicated
in the diagrams/maps and chapter.
3.1.2.4. The survey and record making shall be carried out as per guidelines and
technology mentioned above. In case of any other methodology /
technology is proposed by the contractor, the same may be agreed by
DMRC provided that end results are same. However for any such changes
approval of Engineer in-charge shall be obtained by the contractor after
giving all technical details of the methodology / technology proposed to be
adopted.
3.1.2.5. Contractor shall submit preliminary drawing to engineer in-charge during

execution of work.
3.1.2.6. After the completion of work, as built drawings shall be furnished

incorporating all the suggestions given by engineer in-charge. In the
drawing at one end, title block shall be provided. Legends of symbols used
shall also be provided in the drawing and drawings/maps shall be
published by contractor in mutually agreed format only. The soft and hard
copies of as built drawings (in pdf & AutoCAD both) shall be given by the
contractor.

3.1.2.7. The drawings/maps to be prepared using specific utility symbols, with

colour coding, legible fonts and easy to understand, eliminating need to
refer back to legends. The special line types developed for utilities should
be standardized for all reports enabling data integration.
3.1.3. Deliverables of the Survey:
The contractor shall provide the following details/documents to DMRC

during and at the completion of work.
3.1.3.1. As built drawing in soft copy (in both pdf and AutoCAD).
3.1.3.2. As built drawing in hard copy. For different route, total 35 nos. maps of size
A0 or larger (as per requirement) duly laminated and mounted on hard
board for display in RSS. The bifurcation of no of maps for each route shall
be decided by engineer in-charge.
3.1.3.3. For each cable route, 2 nos. booklets shall be prepared. Scanned soft copy
of booklet in pdf shall also be provided. The booklet shall contain the
following:
(i) Cover Page with subject, name of route, DWRC logo & mascot.
(ii) INDEX
(iii) CHAPTER-1: Brief history of installation, EIG Sanction, make &

specification of cable, cut section diagram of cable, details of agency
and DMRC unit who have installed the cable originally. Total length of
cable, permission of civic agencies for allowing laying of cable in their
area, location of SVL any other relevant document etc. Details of other
utilities like water, sewerage and gas network, other underground utilities
etc. crossing or parallel of the cable in 5 meter corridor should be
furnished along with any other relevant information as informed by
engineer in charge.

(iv) CHAPTER-2: Co-ordinates of cable at every 10 meter / 2 meter and at

SVL location or as specified in tender document. Each point shall be
given a unique ID and shall be related to co-ordinates in the tabular
form. For each ID, depth of cable, distance of cable from centre of the
road, nearest landmark (as applicable) shall be indicated. Tolerance in the
distances & depth shall also be indicated in the table.
The tentative format of the table is given below; it may vary as per actual
requirement.
Depth of Cable
centre of road (as
Distance from
Landmark (as
Co- ordinates
of cable from
applicable)
applicable)
Landmark
Name of
Remarks
Distance
(UTM)
S. No.
From From
UID
Surface MSL
(v) CHAPTER-3: For all curves in the cable, road crossing, drain
crossing locations, actual colour photograph of the site superimposed
with route of the cable shall be provided.
Before taken of photograph, 10 or more light weight portable flags (colour

red) shall be kept on cable route, so that route of cable can be easily
identified after development of photograph. Contractor shall arrange high
resolution digital camera for taking photographs. DMRC staff will co-
ordinate during taking photograph. These photographs will normally be
taken with nearest landmark at background. The size of photo in the
chapter shall be A4 size. Two photos per A3 size sheet shall be
placed. UID & Landmark of photograph location should be given below
the photograph. Minimum one photograph per Kilometre shall be taken.
The route of cable shall be superimposed on photograph.

(vi) CHAPTER-4: The AutoCAD drawing divided in suitable parts adjusted in

several A-3 sizes of sheets shall be provided. Drawing should also
indicate the distance from nearest landmark at specified curved / road
crossing / other utilities crossing the cable. Further, drawings should
contain all notable features mentioned above. In case, if the quantity of
information is more in the detailed drawing, code words / abbreviations /
symbols / UID can be used.
(vii) CHAPTER-5: All the code words / abbreviations / symbols used in the
booklet shall be explained in the chapter as Glossary. Any other
references and important information shall be given in this chapter. The
Contact details of contractor with address shall also be given.
3.2. Guidelines for preparing method statement of cable laying.
Contractor (manufacture) shall prepare proper cable laying method

statement for cable activities including transportation, loading and
unloading, unwrapping, and laying in coordination with the employer.
Manufacturer shall be sole responsible for all cabling activities; from
manufacturing to commissioning at site as per contract conditions and
requirements.
3.2.1. For preparing method statement for cable handling following

instruction shall be taken in account:
3.2.1.1. Drum handling at site:
3.2.1.1.1. Unloading the drum should be by forklift or crane, rolling should be

avoided.
3.2.1.1.2. If the above equipment are not available, rolling as per direction on special
constructed ramps is allowed with a slope of 1/4 (q = 14 degrees).
3.2.1.1.3. Drum should not be dropped on the ground under any circumstances
even on soft material.

3.2.1.1.4. Drums should be kept in the up-right position.
3.2.1.1.5. Be sure that the end seal cap is still in place.
3.2.1.1.6. Drums should be covered all the time.
3.2.1.2. PREPARATION, CABLE PULLING AND LAYING:
3.2.1.2.1. It is recommended to dig a trial hole in the cable route which shall indicate
the position of other services and a smooth bend can be provided to
reduce the pulling load on the cable.
3.2.1.2.2. Drum flange bolts should be inspected and tightened as they may get
loosened during drum transportation and frequent handling.
3.2.1.2.3. Cable should be inspected before laying to ensure that it is damage free.
3.2.1.2.4. Location of drum prior to pulling can be decided based on minimum

pulling tension which can be achieved.
3.2.1.2.5. Drums should be normally mounted so that the cable is pulled from the
top of the drum and for very heavy cables it may be necessary to use a
ramp to support the cable during passage into the trench. When cables
have significant stiffness, e.g. those with HDPE outer sheaths, it may be
preferable to pull from the bottom to reduce the tendency for the cable to
come off with a wavy or spiral profile.
3.2.1.2.6. The cable should preferably be drawn to its final position is a continuous
manner. During stops, it will settle between rollers and may cause high
strain on machines during re-starting.
3.2.1.2.7. When pulling cables beside existing cables, special care should be taken
to avoid damage to the existing cables.
3.2.1.2.8. Precautions should be taken such as clearing all excavated material from
the trench edges, using vertical timbers etc., so that no stones or sharp

objects shall fall onto the cable.
3.2.1.2.9. Minimum permissible bending radius shall be as per Table -I and Table -2.
3.2.1.2.10. Maximum pulling tension should be as per Table -3.
3.2.1.2.11. Side wall pressure at the bend should not be exceeded.
3.2.1.2.12. Remember always that cables are a high commodity value and it is very
sensitive to damage and must be handled with necessary care.
3.2.1.2.13. Cable drum needs to be controlled properly during sudden stoppage of

cable pulling. Continuation of drum rotation can cause sharp bending of
the cable.
3.2.1.2.14. During pulling, the inner end of the cable needs to be projected more and
more, then, it is necessary to interrupt the cable pulling from time to time
in such cases for re-securing the said end.
3.2.1.2.15. Depth of laying shall be minimum 0.6 meters under footpath and 0.8
meters under roads for Low Voltage and Medium Voltage cables while it
shall be around 1.5 meters for High Voltage cables.
3.2.1.2.16. Layer of sand 10 cm approx. under and over the cable shall be finished.
Then a layer of brick or tile shall be placed for warning, mechanical
protection, load distribution.
3.2.1.2.17. When pulling the cable inside conduit/pipe the inner diameter of the pipe
shall be min. 1.5 times the cable diameter.
3.2.1.2.18. It is preferable to use pipe with funnel shape, cable should not rest at the
sharp edges of the pipe, special care should be taken such that stones
and other objects are not dragged with the cable inside the pipe
3.2.1.2.19. Pipe should be cleaned before pulling operation.
3.2.1.2.20. Special lubricant can be used to minimise the cable friction with the pipe

wall.
3.2.1.2.21. When cables of different voltages are laid together it is preferable that the
higher voltage to be laid down, then the lower voltage and then lower
voltage. High voltage cables should be separated by a covering slab from
the other cables.
3.2.1.2.22. For direct buried installations, rollers at a distance of around 1-2 meters
are to be used based on cable weight, in any case cable should not touch
the ground, it is recommended to use motorised rollers at the distance of
20 M to 30 M with proper monitoring. These are beside the normal cable
rollers specially near bending points so that the cable pulling force shall be
distributed evenly over the complete length of the cable. This kind of
pulling is recommended when there are many bends in the cable route.
3.2.1.2.23. For cable pulling, cable stocking can be used for Steel Wire armoured
cables while for non-armoured cables and Steel Tape armoured cables
pulling head is preferred. Special care shall be taken to seal the cable
head avoiding water penetration during pulling.
3.2.1.2.24. It is not advisable to use cable pulling stocking when the ambient
temperature is around 45°C or more and under direct sunlight as the outer
jacket might soften and get damaged.
3.2.1.2.25. It is recommended to use pulling head when the cable is pulled inside
pipes or conduits as slipping of stocking might occur inside the pipe or
conduit.
3.2.1.2.26. While pulling, continues monitoring of the tensile force should be

maintained.
3.2.1.2.27. At the bend, cable shall be guided by rollers. Direct touch with trench wall
shall be completely avoided.
3.2.1.2.28. Immediately after cutting, the cable ends must be suitably sealed so that

there is no ingress of moisture.
3.2.1.2.29. It is recommended to inspect the cable after laying to ensure that the
cable has not been damaged.
3.2.1.2.30. Cable after laying should not be straightened but left with slight
meandering to allow longitudinal expansion and contraction during thermal
cycling.
3.2.1.2.31. When the ground water table is high it is advisable to use special
cable construction with longitudinal and radial watertight characteristics.
3.2.1.3. CONSIDERATION FOR CABLE CURRENT RATING :
When laying cables special attention should be given to:
(a) Cable spacing.
(b) Any other cable passing by, in parallel or crossing as this might affect
considerably the cable rating.
(c) Any other heat source which might be near the cable as this shall have
the same effect as point no. 2.
(d) Drying effect of soil on the value of soil thermal resistivity and side effects
on current rating.
(e) Avoid connecting the armour and sheath at both ends for single core
cables as this shall reduce the current rating of the cables
considerably but special attention should be given to induced voltage in
both normal operation and short circuit.
(f) The deeper the cables are laid lower is the ampacity of cables.
(g) If cables are passing through pipes for more than 6 meters then the pipe
derating factor should be considered.

(h) Avoid pulling single core cable inside steel pipe or any other magnetic
material as this shall cause high losses and cable overheating.
(i) Soil thermal resistivity of the actual ground at different places of the trench
shall be measured to ensure that the value is matching the one used for
current rating computation.

3.2.1.4. Cable bonding using SVL (Sheath Voltage Limiter):
Typical drawing of SVL box and typical cross bonding connection using SVL
is shown below in figure 1 and Figure 2 respectively.
Figure-1
Figure-2

Contract- DE-04 – Particular Specification- Annexure-16 (Earthing Adequacy Audit for RSS) of Chapter 8A
Annexure-16
Specification for Earthing Adequacy Audit for RSS
1. General Instructions:
1.1. These specifications contained herein shall be read in conjunction with other
tender documents.
1.2. The work shall be carried out in accordance with the design and drawings.
2. Scope of Works:
The contractor shall carry out the earthing adequacy audit for all RSS under
this contract.
2.1. The Scope of work for earthing adequacy audit for a Receiving substation is as
under:
2.1.1. Comprehensive earthing adequacy audit of the entire substation grounding

system shall be carried out to determine the effectiveness of the earthing
system by engaging a third-party auditor by the contractor under this contract
herein after referred to as auditor.
2.1.2. Audit shall be carried out in accordance with the standards IEEE 80 (latest
edition), IEEE 81, guidelines given in CBIP manual 339, IS 3043 – 2018 and
other relevant standards.
2.1.3. Individual earth electrode resistance measurement shall be carried out for all
earth electrodes in the substation.
(i) Fall of potential method shall be used where it is possible to isolate the
earth electrode from the rest of the grid.
(ii) Stake-less method shall be used where it is not possible to isolate the
earth electrode from the rest of the grid.
(iii) Test results shall be compared with calculated resistance of individual

earth electrodes as per IS 3043 and BS 7340 formulae to determine the
quality of installation and whether the earth electrode has been installed
as per manufacturer’s recommendation. Measured Soil Resistivity Data
shall be considered for calculating the resistance of individual earth
electrodes.

2.1.4. To identify open & defective risers and grid conductors, riser & grid integrity
tests shall be carried out in the substation.
(i) Riser Integrity Test shall be carried out on all risers in the substation
through current division method after injecting low voltage low magnitude
current to pin point open and defective risers. All open and defective risers
should be marked with red paint by the audit engineer for easy
identification in order to carry out rectification.
(ii) Grid Integrity Test shall be carried out using micro ohm meter
measurement. Comparison between calculated & measured resistances of
various grid sections in the substation shall be carried out to pinpoint open
and defective grid sections. Test shall be repeated several times to cover
the entire area of the earth grid.
2.1.5. To measure grid resistance either through FOP (fall of potential) method or
TAGG slope method as per IEEE 81- 2012.
2.1.6. Vendor shall carry out step & touch potential measurement using off grid
frequency current injection method and tuned voltmeters within substation.
(i) Touch potential measurement shall be carried out at 4 corners.
(ii) Step potential measurement shall be carried out at the center & all the four
sides of the grid.
(iii) Measured touch & step potentials shall be compared with those obtained
through manual or computer software design at respective location for
compliance. Design touch and step potential values to be provided to the
auditor.
2.1.7. Metal to Metal touch voltages to be measured at various accessible external

metal parts within the GIS room by injecting low voltage low magnitude current
from a nearby earth pit with a loop formed between the earth pit and metal
enclosure.
2.1.8. Surface layer thickness to be measured at 10 locations within the substation

area.

2.1.9. Earth Fault Loop Impedance and prospective fault current test in all the LT
switchgears in control rooms and LT motors switchgears in substations as
applicable.
2.1.10. To check physical condition of earth electrode, earth pits and damage of
earthing arrangement, if any.
2.2. General Methodology to be adopted for Audits:
2.2.1. All meters and test equipment required for adequacy audit should be arranged
by the auditor.
2.2.2. Copies of valid calibration reports for all the meters and test equipment should
be carried to the site by the audit team and the same shall be submitted to
DMRC engineers.
2.2.3. Report should consist of all test & measurement results, collected data and
drawings in appropriate chapters.
2.2.4. All defective earth pits, open / defective risers & grids, touch and step potential
measured data, shall be clearly brought out in the report.
2.2.5. Final report in one soft copy and two hard copies shall be submitted by the
auditor within 10 days of report discussion.

Contract- DE-04 – Particular Specification- Annexure-17 (Disturbance Fault Recorder Specification) of Chapter 8A
ANNEXURE-17
Fixed type Digital Fault recording system (DFRS)
1. Detailed Description of the Equipment & Its application i n DMRC: DFRS
The Supply, design, manufacturing, installation, testing and commissioning of

complete digital fault recorder at 66 kV, 33 kV and 25 kV bus of RSS in accordance
of IEC/EN/IS standards, it shall be multi-functional and must complies with
communication protocol IEC 61850 (MMS, GOOSE messaging, and sample
value).
As wave recordings of different signals shall be done at all voltage level in each
RSS, which shall be complied at one centralised sever for monitoring at each RSS
level and similarly, data from all RSSs shall be complied at one centralised server
at OCC / or one particular RSS with same features as of centralised unit for
monitoring at RSS.
Digital fault recorder system shall conform to the latest standard as given below or
specified along with the equipment in the specification.
In case of any conflict between specifications & the standards, the instructions /
decision of the Engineer' or Employer's authorized representative shall be binding.
3. Technical and Installation Requirement
3.1 Description
The Digital Fault recorder shall be panel mountable, the contractor shall mount the
DFR in respective panels for 66kV, 33kV and 25kV as per requirement. Necessary
interface with panel OEM shall be done by contractor during design stage.
It shall be fully featured digital fault recorder having latest technology. It shall be a
distributed multifunctional data acquisition device that continuously records all
waveform signals at a sampling rate of 1,024 Sample / Cycle for monitoring,
protecting, operating, power quality, synchro phasors and load profiles. It shall
provide a powerful platform for acquisition, analysis and report of data from power
system substations.
Detailed features required in Digital fault Recorder system are as follows:

a. This system shall perform following functions:
i. Digital Fault Recorder (DFR)
ii. Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)
iii. Power Quality Monitoring (PQM)
iv. Sequence of Event Recording (SER)
v. Dynamic System Monitoring (DSM)
vi. Impedance based Fault Location (IbFL)
b. It shall be modular and panel mountable type.
c. Inputs shall be taken from all bays at 66 kV voltage level, Incomer bays and
outgoing bays for network at 33 kV voltage level, and all bays at 25 kV voltage.
d. Centralised server shall be provided at each RSS and one centralised server for
all RSSs shall be provided.
e. All units shall communicate at IEC 61850 protocol with SAS/RSS SCADA unit.
f. It shall allow interface with any web-enabled device using most web servers.
g. It shall have continuous waveforms recordings at high-speed i.e. 1024 samples /

cycles with higher bit converter for superior accuracy.
h. The system shall record following data continuously at high resolution:
i. Phasor angle between voltage and current.
ii. Complies with IEC 61000-4-30, voltage sags (dips), swells, interruptions, and rapid
voltage change.
iii. Waveforms of all inputs.
iv. Complies with IEC 61000-4-7, total harmonics distortion (THD), crest factor, K
factor and up-to 100th harmonics.
i. It shall have minimum 3 USB, 2 Serial and 1 LAN communication ports.
j. It shall have extensive charts capabilities not limited to trend chart, phasor chart,
spectrum chart, cyclic histogram chart, event chart, and etc.
k. It shall have 7-inch high resolution touch LCD display HMI.

l. Hardware shall be robust.
m. Sever computer shall consist of latest processer at the time of ordering but not less
than Intel Xeon or Core i7 quad-core CPU, 32 GB DDR4 type, Industrial-grade SLC
SSDs in 256 GB capacities; industrial-grade multilevel cell (iMLC) SSDs in 480 GB;
and nonindustrial MLC SSDs in 2 TB (4 TB maximum storage), Second load-
sharing, high-voltage, and hot-swappable ac/dc power supply, with Windows® 10
IoT Enterprise LTSB and Windows Server® 2016 Standard, or Windows Server®
2012 R2 Standard. Server computer shall consist of 23inch FHD display monitor.
n. All cards shall have conformal coating of industrial grade conforming to minimum
class 3C2.
3.2 Server Software
Following are minimum features required:-
The software shall have capability for Integration of multiple digital fault recorder
and Minimum three concurrent user from one central SCADA server can be
associated. The software shall have feature for assigning permissions to groups
and users. Different location of measurements, trends, waveform, & graphs can be
plotted on single page for analysis.
The software shall have feature for data analysis using Multi-site investigation,
Trend Chart, Phasors, Grid Chart, Summary Chart, Spectrum Chart, Statistics
Chart, Event Chart, Scatter Event Chart, Scatter parameters chart, Cyclic
Histogram.
There shall be live monitoring of Trends, Phasors, & Values. The data can be
imported in the different file format like Excel, CSV, Word in a standard template
3.3 Technical Specifications
S. no. Item Requirement
1. Measurement Channels Device should measure 16 Voltage or 16

Current or combination of Voltage &
Current.
2. Measurement Standards IEC61000-4-30 Ed. 3 (2015) Class A

IEC 62586-2 Ed. 2 (2017)
3. Measurement Range
Voltage
i. Full range scale 500V/1,500V/8000V
ii. Peak Voltage 8000V AC
iii. Accuracy 0.1%
Current
i. Nominal 5A AC
ii. Peak Current 50 A AC
iii. Accuracy 0.1%
Frequency
i. Fundamental Frequency 50 Hz
ii. Frequency Resolution As per manufacture
iii. Accuracy As per manufacture
6. Measures parameters Frequency, Active power, Apparent power,

Reactive Power, Power Factor, Vthd
[amplitude & percentage], Ithd [amplitude &
percentage], TDD, Phase Angle, Positive
Sequence, Negative Sequence, Zero
Sequence, Pst, Plt, Voltage Waveforms,
Current Waveforms, Harmonic Voltage
waveforms, Harmonic Current waveforms.

7. Harmonic range Up-to 100th level
8. Inter harmonics Range Yes
9. Sampling frequency 1024 / cycle for all channel simultaneously.
10. Analog to digital 24 bit or higher

converter
11. Recoding data
i. Recording Norms Continuous recording with or without

threshold and triggering setting (waveform
recording)
ii. Recording duration Cycle by cycle recoding of all channel for 1

year
12. Memory storage 32 GB or higher
13. Data storage capacity One-year data of all measured parameters.
14. Time synchronization All equipment shall sync with master clock
i. GPS
ii. IRIG B
iii. NTP
iv. Internal Real time clock
15. Communication Optical fibre, LAN (IP based)
16. Communication protocol IEC 61850
17. SFP Ports
18. Serial Ports Min 2 nos

19. USB ports Min 3 Nos
20. PPS
21. Power Supply 110 V DC; Auxiliary 240 V AC
22. Device configuration Web browser based through IP address.
23. Human Machine 7” high resolution LCD, additional web

Interface (HMI) server for local and remote real time
monitoring and historical data analysis and
control
24. Environmental As per GS

Conditions
25. Mechanical Dimensions As per manufactures
26. Software (Parameters Easy for report creation, Different location

Available for Analysis) measurements trends should be plotted on
single graph.
i. RMS Voltage
ii. RMS Current
iii. Active Power
iv. Apparent power
v. Reactive Power
vi. Power Factor True, Displacement PF
vii. Active Energy Import, Export
viii. Apparent Energy Import
ix. Reactive Energy Import, Export

x. Harmonics Voltage Up-to 100th level, THD, Amplitude,

Percentage, Angle, Waveform
xi. Harmonics Current Up-to 100th level, THD, Amplitude,

Percentage, Angle, Waveform
xii. Inter harmonics Yes
xiii. Flicker Pst 10 min, Plt 2 hours,
xiv. Unbalance Negative Sequence, Zero Sequence
xv. Transient
xvi. Waveform All channels & for all the recording period
should be recorded. Irrespective of event
trigger condition.
xvii. Events as per EN50160 Customized thresholds should be available.

Dip, Swell, Short & long Interruption, Rapid
Voltage Change, Frequency Variation,
Harmonic Deviation,

Contract- DE-04 – Particular Specification- Annexure-18 (Optical fibre cable Specification) of Chapter 8A
ANNEXURE-18
OPTICAL FIBRE CABLE
1. GENERAL
This specification covers the broad guidelines for design and construction
requirements for Single Mode Optical Fiber Cables for this tender.
The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring adherence to relevant

specifications wherever applicable, sizing, procurement, installation, wiring
and testing of OFC in each RSS required for the protections and control of
power system.
2. MANUFACTURING, PHYSICAL AND GENERAL PERFORMANCE

REQUIREMENTS
2.1. General
2.1.1. The cable shall have continuous operating life of at least 30 years and for
Telecom cables it should be at least 25 Years.
2.1.2. The cable shall be to latest IRS specifications or other international standard
for railway signaling cables. The contractor shall submit the standards and
specifications to which the proposed cable comply. Optical fibre cables shall
be laid in HDPE pipe.
2.1.3. HDPE pipe for protection of optical fibre cables shall be solid, rugged,
minimum 40mm diameter, permanently lubricated and suitable for air
blowing of optical fibre cable. HDPE pipe shall be to latest TEC
specifications.
2.1.4. The cable shall be armoured type and shall be able to withstand rain and
ultraviolet ray exposure. The cable insulation shall be moisture & heat
resistant and be able to withstand temperature up to 70°C.
2.1.5. The cables shall be resistant to any kind of corrosion due to soil &
environmental conditions and shall be suitable for use and also be immune
from degradation under the following atmospheric impurities and
environmental conditions:
(a) Total immersion in water, acidic solutions with low concentration, salty

media, etc.
(b) Exposure to toxic materials, dirt, dust, grease, oil hazardous gases, etc.
(c) Exposed to atmospheric conditions including indirect sunlight
2.1.6. The outdoor single mode optical fibre cable shall have minimum fibre count
of 6 fibres.
2.1.7. Optical Fiber Cables shall be constructed with Dispersion Unshifted Single
Mode Optical Fibers, with a matched cladding.
2.1.8. Matched clad fibers feature a dual UV curable acrylate coating system.
2.1.9. The coating is easily strippable using mechanical methods.
2.1.10. Each fiber is proof-tested to 100kpsi, so it will survive installation loads and
associated long term residual stresses, even under extreme environmental
conditions.
2.1.11. The optical, dimensional, and mechanical properties are measured for
compliance to Industry Specifications (IEC, IS etc.).
2.1.12. Fusion splicing shall be done.
2.1.13. Single Mode Fibers shall be manufactured to meet low polarization mode
dispersion (PMD) specifications.
2.1.14. The Employer or his Engineer shall have free access to the works of the
manufacturer and shall be given facilities by the manufacturer to inspect the
manufacturing of the cable during any stage of manufacture. He shall have
right to reject the manufacture in whole or part of any work or material that
does not conform to the terms of this specification or and may order the
same to be removed/ replaced or altered at the expense of the
manufacturer.
2.1.15. In case of no relevant test certificates being available, tests shall be carried
out by the manufacturer as those laid down with relevant specification but
this shall not preclude any test desired by the Employer’s Engineer to
determine the quality of the cable. The Contractor shall satisfy the
Employer’s Engineer regarding the quality of cable supplied by him by
production of a certificate from a recognized testing laboratory or otherwise

that the materials used and the cable itself meets with the required
standards and meet with all the testing requirements of relevant
specifications.
2.2. Manufacturing process:
2.2.1. Optical fibers shall be placed inside a loose buffer tube.
2.2.2. Each buffer tube shall be filled with a non-hygroscopic, non-nutritive to

fungus, electrically non-conductive, homogenous gel. The gel shall be free
from dirt and foreign matter. The gel can be readily removed with
conventional nontoxic solvents.
2.2.3. Buffer tubes containing fibers shall be color-coded with distinct and
recognizable colors.
2.2.4. All buffer tubes shall have a filling compound to provide water penetration
resistance and to cushion the fibers during installation and operation.
2.2.5. The buffer tubes shall not kink when a 360º loop is freely bent to a diameter
of 10Dmm, where D is the diameter of the tube.
2.2.6. The fibers are colored with ultraviolet (UV) curable inks.
2.2.7. The fibers do not adhere to the inside of the buffer tube.
2.2.8. The cable shall have central anti-bucking member consists of a dielectric,
fibre reinforced plastic (FRP) rod.
2.2.9. Water-blocking technology [Dry binder threads are impregnated with the
Super Absorbent Polymers (SAP) / water blocking tape (non-nutritive to
fungus, electrically non-conductive, and homogenous) / glass fibre yarn
reinforcement] shall be provided over buffer tube to impede migration of
water through the cable core.
2.2.10. The cable core shall be stranded evenly around by High tensile strength
dielectric yarns.
2.2.11. The cable shall have two ripcords and low smoke zero halogen fire resistant
inner sheath.
2.2.12. Water-blocking technology [glass fibre yarn reinforcement] shall be

provided over inner sheath.

2.2.13. The cable shall be corrugated steel tape armored type, and plastic coated
on both sides for corrosion resistance.
2.2.14. The outer jacket of the cables shall be of a black High-Density Polyethylene
(HDPE) extruded with low smoke zero halogen and UV resistant.
2.2.15. Cable Sheath Marking: All cables have sequential length markings along
the cable sheath. The cable is marked in white print every meter. The height
of the marking is approximately 2.5mm. “DMRCL - Optical Fibre Cable -
GSS name to RSS name - …. Meter”.
2.3. FIBER SPECIFICATIONS
The dispersion unshifted single mode fiber utilized in the cable is made to
the following specifications:
S. No. Item Description Required
1. Typical Core Diameter 8.3 µm
2. Cladding Diameter 125.0 + 1.00 µm
3. Core to Cladding offset ≤ 8 µm
4. Cladding Non-circularity ≤ 1% {1-(min Cladding

dia/max. cladding)} x 100
5. Coating Diameter 245 ± 10 µm
6. Colored Fiber Diameter Nominal 250 µm
7. Cable external diameter 13.5 mm
8. Cut off Wavelength ˃1260 nm
9. Mode-field Diameter 9.30 ± 0.50 µm at 1310 nm
10.50 ± 1.00 µm at 1550 nm
10. Cabled fibre attenuation Max. Avg.

Attenuation Attenuation

(dB/Km) (dB/Km)
Wavelength 1310 nm 0.38 0.35
1550 nm 0.25 0.24
11. Attenuation uniformity No point discontinuity greater

than 0.1 dB at either 1310 nm
or 1550 nm.
12. Attenuation at Water Peak 1383 ± 3nm < 2.1dB/km
13. Maximum total dispersion 1285 1330nm: ≤ 3.2ps / (nm

* km)
1550nm: ≤ 18.0ps / (nm * km)
14. Zero Dispersion Wavelength 1301.5nm ≤ ZDW ≤ 1321.5nm
15. Zero Dispersion Slope ≤ 0.092ps / (nm2 * km)
16. Fiber Polarization Mode ≤ 0.5ps / √ km

Dispersion (PMD)
17. Fiber Curl ≥ 4.0m radius of curvature
18. Cable weight 180-240 Kg / Km
19. Operating temperature range -20 ºC to +60 ºC
20. Storage Range -20 ºC to +70 ºC
2.4. Tests:
2.4.1. The cable shall be tested as per relevant latest IEC / IS standard. Contractor
shall prepare and submit list of all type tests, routine tests, and special tests
as per standard to Employer for review.
2.4.2. Test results and certificates shall be submitted for review to the Employer’s
Engineer.
2.4.3. In case of no relevant test certificates being available, tests shall be carried
out by the manufacturer as those laid down with relevant specification but
this shall not preclude any test desired by the Employer’s Engineer to
determine the quality of the cable.

Contract- DE-04 – Particular Specification- Annexure-19 (Transformer Health Monitoring) of Chapter 8A
Transformer Health monitoring
1. General
In power system, transformers are vital / critical assets as whole power flow in
network depends on it. If any fault occurs in the system directly or indirectly it
affects transformer heath. As, DMRC have very wide electrical network of 33 kV
as well as 25 kV power supply which is feed by RSS, and interruption in 25 kV
supply hampers the train movement. Therefore, for maximum utilization of
transformer and reducing aging effect, transformer health online monitoring is
required. It will help in reviewing transformer on daily basis and make preventive
maintenance more fruitful.
2. Technical Requirement
2.1. The contractor shall provide online transformer health monitoring system for all
individual transformers in each RSS and data of each system shall be
summarized on one sever / HMI (Human Machine Interface) in the control room of
RSS.
2.2. The system shall analyse and monitor the followings of the transformer but not
limited to:
(i) Temperature of oil and winding
(ii) Minimum Three gas (Hydrogen, ethylene, and acetylene) DGA with
moisture content of Transformer main tank as well as OLTC tank. (on half
day basis)
(iii) Winding temperature hot spot
2.3. It shall generate alarm (as per employer requirement) based on the analysis of
reports, if any, abnormality is found.
2.4. It shall compute / execute transformer model based on the type tests, routine tests
and in reference with daily analysis / testing report estimating the following;
(i) Transformer life expectancy
(ii) Insulation aging
2.5. All data / report shall be displayed in visual graphical and trend charts.

Contract- DE-04 – Particular Specification- Annexure-19 (Transformer Health Monitoring) of Chapter 8A
2.6. The system shall comply IEC 61850 protocol for communicating with the RSS
SCADA.
2.7. The system shall produce data report in proper format (easily understandable) or
convertible to Ms-Excel or any format. Report shall be downloadable from HMI/
server/ directly from device.
2.8. The system shall be reliable and maintenance free.
2.9. Environmental conditions as per general specification and transformer parameters

as per transformer specification.
3. Testing:
Contractor shall submit valid type test report for all the equipment and test report
for all raw material used to employer for review.

Contract- DE-04 – Particular Specification- Annexure-20 (Sever Specification) of Chapter 8A
Detailed specification of sever:
S. No Hardware Specification
1. Make HP/Dell/ Fujitsu/IBM
2. Type Rack Type, Industrial application for 24x7 working
3. Processor System Intel Xeon Dual Core Processor 3.0 GHz or Quad Core 2 GHz or
higher upgradeable to dual processing 4 cores. with Integrated disk
controller, Integrated RAID controller
4. RAM: 8 GB upgradable up to 16 GB
5. Hard Disk Total storage of 2TB (2 nos. of 1 TB with RAID-1 hard disk
controller or HDD Total storage of 3 x 500GB with RAID-5,
SSD
Other accessories:
6. Graphics 2x VGA
7. Monitor 32 inch (LED)
8. Optical Drive 16x DVD RW/(Multibarrier Ultra bay Enhanced Drive)

(DVD R/W)
9. Video Card Standard Graphics controller
10. USB/VGA ports 4x USB Ports, 1VGA
11. Hot swap Redundant Power Supplies & Hot swap Redundant Fans
12. LAN / Ethernet 2x Intel PRO/1000MT Dual Port (Teaming supported)
13. Windows Server 2012 R2 SP0 64Bit or latest, At least 04 RDP

OS licence should be required for each machine. CAL/RDP licence
should be incorporated with OS licence.
All Remote Management software should be enabled in machine.
14. Antivirus Antivirus With 3 Year Subscription McAfee/Norton/
15. Rating 90V-264 V AC (47-63 Hz)
16. EMI immunity As per IEC 801
Note:
1. Including all cables / connectors / accessories to achieve the complete working of the
system.
2. All hardware and software shall be provided with key (key protected)

Contract- DE-04 – Particular Specification- Annexure-21 (33 kV cable Specification) of Chapter 8A
SPECIFICATIONS FOR 33 kV CABLES, JOINTS AND END CONNECTIONS Revision-0

FOR ELEVATED AND UNDERGROUND CORRIDOR
DMRC ELECTRICAL STANDARDS & DESIGN WING (DESDW)
SPECIFICATION NO.
DMES- T/0018/ DMRC-E-TR-CABLE-2
SPECIFICATIONS FOR 33 kV CABLES, JOINTS AND END CONNECTIONS FOR

ELEVATED AND UNDERGROUND CORRIDOR
Issued on:
Date Stage
28th Jul’2020 Revision-0
Page 1 of 27



Stage Date
Draft -1 20/08/2014
Page 2 of 27


Contents

1. Detailed description of the equipment and its application in DMRC - Medium voltage cables …4
2. Governing Specifications ..................................................................................................................... 5
2.1 Standards ............................................................................................................................. 6
2.2 Abbreviations ....................................................................................................................... 7
3. Technical Requirement ........................................................................................................................ 7
3.1 Conductor:............................................................................................................................ 8
3.2 Conductor Screen: ............................................................................................................... 8
3.3 Insulation: ............................................................................................................................. 8
3.4 Insulation Screen: ................................................................................................................ 10
3.5 Water Barrier: ....................................................................................................................... 11
3.6 Metallic Screen: .................................................................................................................... 11
3.7 Inner Sheath:........................................................................................................................ 12
3.8 Armouring: ............................................................................................................................ 12
3.9 Outer Sheath ........................................................................................................................ 12
4. Additional Requirement ........................................................................................................................ 12
5. Maintenance & Life ............................................................................................................................... 15
6. Special Condition .................................................................................................................................. 15
7. TESTING ................................................................................................................................................ 15
8. DATA SHEET - 33kV CABLES ........................................................................................................... 17
9. Tentative list of Test to be performed on cables .............................................................................. 21
10.Joints and terminations ........................................................................................................................ 22
10.1 System Data ......................................................................................................................... 22
10.2 Governing Specification for Straight Through Joints ............................................................ 23
10.3 Governing Specification for Terminations- ........................................................................... 24
10.4 PACKING AND MARKING: .................................................................................................. 26
10.5 Additional requirement- ........................................................................................................ 26
Page 3 of 27


1. DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE EQUIPMENT AND ITS APPLICATION IN DMRC

- MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLES
These specifications are applicable to 33 kV cables used in various corridors,
constituting the 33 kV distribution network.
33 kV Cables are required to be used in the Auxiliary Network, for supply of power at
33 kV to various ASSs located at Stations and in the Depot. The Auxiliary Network
consists of double 33 kV feeder circuits, each feeder consisting of 3 Single core
cables, run in trefoil arrangement. The Cross section and material of the conducting
core of 33kV cables generally used is as follows for various connections:
Conducting Core
 From AMS/RSS to ASS 400sqmm Copper
 33 kV Ring Main (Underground/Elevated &
400sqmm Aluminium
Underground section)
 33 kV Ring Main (Only Elevated section) 300sqmm Aluminium
 33 kV CB to Transformer (33 kV/415 V)
(Underground/Elevated & Underground 400sqmm Aluminium
section)
 33 kV CB to Transformer (33 kV/415 V)
300sqmm Alumnium
(Only Elevated sections)
 Station ASS Panel to PD ASS
400sqmm Aluminium
(underground/elevated)
The electro technical characteristics required to be guaranteed for medium voltage

cable for the above cable sizes, are shown in the technical sheet enclosed as an
Annexure with this specification.
The elevated/UG corridor ASSs shall be supplied from a 33 kV cables Network,

which shall consist of two circuits (circuit 1 and circuit 2) normally independent from
one another. The network is divided into loops, as necessary, as shown in the
Page 4 of 27


relevant ‘Auxiliary Power Supply scheme’. The 33 kV distribution cables in the

elevated sections shall be laid inside cable path/channels provided on the viaduct or on
the cable brackets along the tracks. The 33 kV distribution cables in the UG sections
shall be laid on brackets provided on the tunnel side along the tracks. 33kV Cables
between AMS and first ASS are generally buried in trench, except in the portion on
the viaduct/Underground sections. Current rating for cables shall be determined
taking into consideration the following installation methods as applicable:
 In the tunnels
 In cast –in pipes
 Trenches
 On brackets
 Ducts
 temperature correction
 thermal resistivity
 laying depth
 cable distance
 cable grouping factor etc
2. GOVERNING SPECIFICATIONS
The 33 kV Cables shall conform to IEC 60502 and shall be of 18/30 kV (36 kV). The
cables shall be of dry-insulated, radial-field cable, based on proven technology. They
shall be constituted by assembly of three single core cables in trefoil pattern, annealed
circular stranded Copper Conductor or stranded Al Conductor for the cables as
specified. The cable shall be XLPE insulated with semi-conducting screen over
conducting core. The cable shall also be Tape armoured.
Page 5 of 27


2.1 Standards

The 33 kV Cables shall satisfy the following requirements and shall also comply with
the latest standards in force when the cables are manufactured, particularly which
are in the following table (Unless otherwise stipulated in the specifications, the latest
Power cables with extruded insulation and their accessories for
rated voltages from 1 kV (Um = 1,2 kV) up to 30 kV (Um = 36
IEC 60502 kV) –
Part 2: Cables for rated voltages from 6 kV (Um = 7,2 kV) up to
30 kV (Um = 36 kV)"
IEC 60228 Conductors of insulated cables
IEC 60840 rated voltages above 30 kV (Um = 36 kV) up to 150 kV (Um =
170 kV) - Test methods and requirements
Part 1 : Tests on electric and optical fiber cables under fire
IEC 60332 conditions
Part 3 : Tests on electric cables under fire conditions
Electric and optical fibre cables - Test methods for non-metallic
IEC 60811
materials
Test on gases evolved during combustion of materials from
IEC 60754
cables - Part 1: Determination of the halogen acid gas content
ASTM D Standard Test Method for Density of Smokefrom the Burning or
2843 Decomposition of Plastics
Measurement of Smoke Density of Cables Buring under defined

IEC 61034 conditions.
Part 1 & 2
Page 6 of 27


ASTM D Test Method for Measuring the Minimum Oxygen Concentration

2863 to Support Candle-Like Combustion of Plastics (Oxygen Index)
Cross linked polyethylene insulated thermoplastic sheathed

IS 7098
cables,
Part 2
Part 2: for working voltages from 3.3 KV upto & Including 33 KV.
2.2 Abbreviations
 IEC – International Electro technical Council

 ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials
 AMS – Auxiliary Main Substation
 ASS – Auxiliary Sub Station
 XLPE – Cross Linked Poly Ethylene
 FRLS – Fire Retardant Low Smoke
 FRLSZH – Fire Retardant Low Smoke Zero Halogen
 CB – Circuit Breaker
 PD – Property Development
 IS – Indian Standard
3. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT
The cables shall be insulated cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE), with semi-
conducting screen over a Copper/Aluminium conducting core, insulating envelope,
metallic screen, Aluminium Tape armouring and suitable protective sheath.
 operating voltage: 33 kV rms between phases,

 specified voltage: 18/30 kV rms (according to IEC 60502)
 Conductors as specified
Page 7 of 27


The Contractor shall calculate and inform current rating required to verify cross-

sectional area of 33 kV cables, considering all the de-ratings as per laying
arrangement en route.
All cables, whether Fire Retardant Low Smoke (FRLS) to be used in elevated sections
or Fire Retardant Low Smoke Zero Halogen (FRLSZH) to be used in the Underground
Sections, shall conform to IEC 60502 or equivalent.
The various constructional features required for the 33 kV cables are as under:
3.1 Conductor:
The conductor shall be formed from annealed compact circular stranded class-2
Copper conductor or compact circular stranded class-2 Aluminium Conductor, as the
case may be, complied with IEC latest publications 60228. The conductor shall be
compact circular stranded.
3.2 Conductor Screen:

The conductor screen to be provided as per Clause 7.1 IEC 60502-2:2005 or
equivalent clause in latest version of IEC 60502-2. It shall be easily removable from
conductor during jointing. A semi conducting tape (s) shall be provided below the
extruded semi conducting conductor screen to prevent penetration of compound in to
the under lying conductor. The conductor screen shall be as per the attached GTP.
3.3 Insulation:
The Insulation shall be XLPE, complying with IEC 60502 and IEC 60811. The
insulation shall have a higher degree of Cross- Linking, free from contaminants and air
voids, heat resistant and shall be applied by the extrusion process.
The XLPE insulation shall be suitable for use on power cable in wet and dry locations
at conductor temperature as per IEC 60502-2. For this purpose, short circuit current in
conductor is to be considered as 7 kA for 3 sec.
Page 8 of 27



The conductor with screening shall be provided with cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE)
insulation applied by extrusion. The nominal thickness of insulation is specified in
the attached GTP and subject to tolerance as per IEC – 60840, clause 10.6.2.
The insulation compound shall be of high quality, and shall be heat, moisture, ozone
and corona resistant. XLPE compound should be from reputed manufacturer e.g.
Borealis Sweden, DOW or NUC Japan or equivalent with satisfactory service
experience of more than 5 years. The Insulation shall be applied by triple extrusion
and vulcanized using dry curing process to form a compact homogenous body free
from micro voids and contaminants. Make of the XLPE, will be approved by the
Engineer, before giving manufacturing clearance.
Approved Cable manufacturer shall have a procedure to check and record the
eccentricity of the insulation of the entire cable length while manufacturing. Such
reports shall be produced during the factory acceptance test of cable to the
representative of DMRC.
Other requirement for Insulation-
For each piece of core, the smallest value measured shall not fall below 90% of the
nominal value by more than 0.1 mm i.e tmin>0.9tn-0.1
And additionally: (tmax-tmin)/tmax<0.15
where
tmax is the maximum thickness, in mm;
tmin is the minimum thickness, in mm;
tn is the nominal thickness, in mm;
tmax and tmin are to be measured at the same cross section
Page 9 of 27


3.4 Insulation Screen:

The Insulation screening shall be applied direct upon the insulation as per IEC 60502-
2. The screen shall be tightly fitted to the insulation to exclude all air voids and still it
could be easily stripped on site. Semiconducting compound should be from a reputed
manufacturer e.g. Borealis, Sweden, DOW or NUC Japan or equivalent with
satisfactory service experience of more than 5 years. Make of the semi-conducting
compound, shall be got approved by the Engineer, before giving manufacturing
clearance.
The manufacturing process of XLPE cable shall consist of conductor screen, insulation
& insulation screen shall be extruded in a single process (triple extrusion) and cross
linked by dry curing technology to ensure homogeneity and absence of micro voids.
The cables shall be manufactured by “Dry Curing” Process.
The Employer may decide to visit the works of cable manufacturer to confirm the
manufacturing process mentioned.
Special precautions shall be taken to ensure that XLPE and insulation screen shall
only be procured from Borealis Sweden, NUC Japan or DOW.
Two stage inspections shall be conducted to ensure the quality and compliance of
XLPE and insulation screen.
Stage inspection –
 The EPC Contractor/Cable manufacturing will inform DMRC well in advance
before commencement of cable manufacturing work so that DMRC may
carry out the stage inspection of raw material/ process of cable
manufacturing as per the requirement. Mechanical and Electrical properties
of XLPE and insulation screen must meet the specification requirements.
 The FAT plan of stage inspection shall be approved by Engineer-in-charge.
Page 10 of 27


During the stage inspection, The cable manufacturer shall submit documentary

evidence like purchase order, bill of lading, bill of entry and proof of shipment etc. of
importing XLPE and insulation screen for manufacturing the entire quantity of cables
only from approved sources. The traceability of material shall be proven by the
documents itself.
3.5 Water Barrier:

Longitudinal:
The water barrier shall be semi-conducting water swellable tape to be applied over the
extruded insulation screening to block and prevent moisture propagation in
longitudinal direction. The semi-conducting tape shall be suitable for the operating
temperature of the cable and compatible with the insulation.
3.6 Metallic Screen:
The metallic screen shall be plain copper/aluminium round wire as the case may be,
applied over the semi-conductor bedding tape(s). An annealed plain copper/aluminium
binder tape shall be applied in the form of an open helix, over the copper/aluminium
wire screen. The area of the metallic wire/tape should be able to withstand specified
earth fault current (minimum 1 kA for 3 sec).
Bidder to submit the calculations proving the short circuit current carrying capacity of
metallic wire/tape screen, giving details of the cross section area of the wire/tape
screen. Short Circuit Test in 3rd party lab on one of the samples taken from the
supplied lot shall also be arranged by the contractor.
The sheath shall be impervious to moisture, reasonably close fitting and free from
defects and impurities such as oxide, which give rise to failure under working
conditions.
Page 11 of 27


3.7 Inner Sheath:

A layer of FRLSZH/FRLS binder tape shall be applied over metallic screen followed
by Polyethylene laminated Aluminium tape that shall be acting as a radial water
barrier. Extruded black FRLS/FRLSZH layer shall be provided as a separation sheath.
3.8 Armouring:
Double Tape armouring should be applied over the inner sheath and the thickness of
the same should be as GTP attached.
3.9 Outer Sheath

The outer sheath to be provided as per IEC 60502-2. A conductive layer shall be
provided on outer sheath to comply over sheath electrical testing requirement as per
IEC 60502.
The minimum thickness of outer sheath of the cable shall be strictly as per the
attached GTP of the cable.
4. ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENT
4.1 Outer Sheath should have following features:
A. FRLS Cables laid in elevated sections shall be exposed to sun, therefore such
cables shall be capable of withstanding ultraviolet radiations. The outer sheath shall
be extruded continuously in black colour with UV Protection, FRLS PVC conforming
to the requirement of IEC specifications. Such cables shall have phase identification.
Coloured tapes of reputed make, which can last for about 35 years in the exposed
condition to be provided for identification not exceeding 50mts and also at locations
advised by the Engineer. The details of compound used for outer sheath shall be
submitted.
Page 12 of 27


B. Outer sheath of FRLSZH cables for Underground section, shall be extruded Red/

Yellow/ Blue colour halogen free flame retardant polyolefin conforming to the
requirement of IEC specifications and extruded continuously. Outer sheath shall
be treated with Anti Termite/ Anti pest/ Anti rodent & corrosion Resistant Compound.
The sheath shall be resistant to water, fungus attacks, conforming to the requirement
of IEC specifications. The details of compound used for outer sheath shall be
submitted.
4.2 The Contractor shall confirm the cross section of the cables in as regard to:
- the route installation,
- the thermal conditions in service,
- the climatic conditions,
- the energy and currents flowing through these cables, taking into account the
worst electrical conditions,
- operation under permissible overload conditions,
- operation under permissible overload conditions when all 33 kV distribution
are supplied by only one transformer, and on only one 33 kV cable circuit.
4.3 The protective sheath shall carry the indications listed below, in letters and digits at
least 6 mm high:
- Designation of ownership,
- Nature and cross-sectional area of conductors,
- Specified cable voltage,
- phase numbering,
- Manufacturer’s name
- Length of cable shall be marked at 1 m interval.
- Year and month of manufacturing
Page 13 of 27


4.4 The cable shall be manufactured by a company having ISO accreditation for quality.

The cable manufacturer shall have NABL accredited laboratory facility to conduct
routine and acceptance test.
4.5 The Contractor shall provide trefoil clamps of non-metallic/metallic & non-magnetic
sturdy type as per IEC 61914 at every 5 meters with cable ties at every meter.
Material of cable tie shall be approved by the Engineer. Cable ties should last for 35
years.
4.6 The Employer may decide to visit the works of cable manufacturer to verify the
manufacturing processes.
4.7 The Bidder along with the Bid, shall submit the details regarding cable construction,
bill of material, the manufacturing process proposed to be adopted for the
manufacturing of 33 kV cables to be used in the project, along with Quality control
measures adopted by the Manufacturer, to ensure:-
 The values and tolerances are strictly as per IEC.

 The cable manufacturer exercises strict quality control measures, including
stage inspections, routine inspections etc. to ensure conformity to standards.
Periodical inspections of the Manufacturer works, manufacturing processes, Internal

Quality control records of the manufacturer etc. shall be carried out by the User
(DMRC/Nominated agency), to ensure compliance to Quality standards.
4.9 Each end of the cable in cable drum shall be covered with heat shrinkable tape to
avoid water ingress during the storage and transportation. The cable drum without
heat shrinkable tape shall be rejected.
Page 14 of 27



The cable should be designed for maintenance free service of minimum 35 years for
all types of installation & under prescribed environmental conditions.
6. SPECIAL CONDITION
6.1 All type of Cables to be used in Underground Sections shall be Fire

Retardant Low Smoke Zero Halogen Type (FRLSZH) and cables to be used
in elevated and at grade sections shall be FRLS Type. Cables from AMS to ASS
shall also be FRLS type excluding portion laid in underground section (station and
tunnel) which shall be FRLSZH type. The interconnections between the elevated &
underground section shall be dealt accordingly with minimum number of joints.
6.2 Cable drum schedule should be selected in manner to minimise run-through joints in
the cable laid between two stations. Maximum weight of one cable drum can be upto
8 ton.
7. TESTING
7.1 All type tests to be conducted as per IEC 60502-2. The 33 kV cable shall comply
with following Test Standards in addition to the test standards of IEC60502:
a. IEC 60332 Part 1 and 3, category A, test on single and bunched cables under fire
condition.
b. Limiting Oxygen Index, at least 30, tested as per ASTM D-2863.
c. Temperature index of minimum 250 deg C, as per IS 7098 (Part-2).
d. Smoke density Test (on sheathing material), when tested in accordance to ASTM
D-2843 for FRLS cables, maximum smoke density rating shall be 60 as per IS
7098 Part – 2.
e. Smoke density Test, when tested in accordance to IEC 61034 for FRLSZH
cables, minimum light transmittance shall be 60%.
Page 15 of 27


f. Insulation is to be moisture and heat resistant, with temperature rating

appropriate to the application conditions and in no case lower than 90 deg C.
In addition to the above FRLSZH cables used in U/G section shall also
comply with following test standard: -
g. Determination of the amount of halogen Acid Gases as per IEC 60754 Part 1
(Maximum HCL gas shall not exceed 0.5%) and IEC 60754 Part –II
7.2 The contractor on advise of the Engineer shall arrange for repetition of the following
type tests as per IEC 60502-2, from independent laboratory after delivery of cables
by collecting random sample from site –
- Bending Test
- Tan δ measurement for cables
- Impulse test followed by a voltage test for 4 hrs.
- Partial Discharge test
- Hot set Test
7.3 Test to prove the Short Circuit withstand capacity of Power Cable and Metallic
Screen shall be conducted as per the relevant standard. If no guidelines are
available, as a general practice, routine test such as High Voltage, Partial Discharge,
Check of Electrical Parameters shall be conducted prior and after performing short
circuit test on the cables, to prove the integrity of cables under short circuit test
7.4 The manufacturer shall not change the Bill of Material used in the manufacturing of
samples for routine and Type testing as repeated above and in cables intended to be
supplied against the contract.
Page 16 of 27


8. DATA SHEET - 33KV CABLES

DESCRIPTION UNIT VALUES
Manufacturer Name
Cable Size Sq.mm. 300 400 400
Al/XLPE/AlWS/DA Al/XLPE/AlWS/DA Cu/XLPE/CuWS/D
Cable Type
TA TA ATA
Voltage Grade U0/U
KV 18/30 (36) 18/30 (36) 18/30 (36)
(U2)
IEC 60228, IEC 60228, IEC 60228,
Reference Standard IEC 60502-2, IEC 60502-2, IEC 60502-2,
IEC 60840 IEC 60840 IEC 60840
No. and cross
sectional area of 3x1C x 300 sq.mm 3x1C x 400 sq.mm 3x1C x 400 sq. mm
conductor
Conductor Material Aluminum Aluminum Copper
Circular compact Circular compact Circular compact
Shape
stranded stranded stranded
Class 2/ Class 2/
Class/Standard Class 2/ IEC 60228
IEC 60228 IEC 60228
Conductor and
Extruded semi- Extruded semi- Extruded semi-
Insulation Screen
conducting com’d conducting com’d conducting com’d
Materials
Nominal thickness of
mm 0.7 0.7 0.7
conductor screen
Insulation Material XLPE XLPE XLPE
mm 9 9 9
insulation
Page 17 of 27


Nominal Thickness of
mm 0.8 0.8 0.8
Insulation screen
Conductor screen, insulation and insulation screen shall be extruded in a single process
Aluminium round Aluminium round Copper round wires

wires followed by wires followed by followed by helically
Insulation screen helically applied helically applied applied Copper
material (Metallic) Aluminium Tape Aluminium Tape Tape
(Metallic screen should be able to withstand specified earth fault
current (minimum 1 kA for 3 sec).
*Polyethylene
laminated Aluminium mm - - -
Tape
Flame retardant Flame retardant Flame retardant
polyvinyl chloride polyvinyl chloride polyvinyl chloride
for elevated. for elevated. for elevated.
Inner Sheath Material
low smoke zero low smoke zero low smoke zero
halogen for UG halogen for UG halogen for UG
Minimum Thickness of
mm 1 1 1
extruded inner sheath
Double layer of Aluminium Tape (nominal thickness of each
Armouring
type -0.5mm)
polyvinyl chloride polyvinyl chloride polyvinyl chloride
Extruded Outer sheath for elevated. for elevated. for elevated
material Flame retardant Flame retardant Flame retardant
low smoke zero low smoke zero low smoke zero
halogen for UG. halogen for UG halogen for UG
Page 18 of 27


mm 3.1 3.1 3.1
outer sheath
Max. Conductor
temperature on Deg.C 90 90 90
continuous
Max. Conductor
temperature in short Deg.C 250 250 250
circuit
Min. Short circuit
current 7 kA for 3 sec 7 kA for 3 sec 7 kA for 3 sec
rating (Conductor)
*Nominal Diameter of mm - - -
Conductor
*Nominal Diameter mm - - -
Over Insulation
*Nominal Thickness of
mm - - -
Tape
*No. and diameter of
No./mm - - -
wires
*Cross sectional Area
Sq.mm - - -
of Metallic Screen
*Nominal overall
mm - - -
diameter (± 2mm)
*Capacitance per
uF/km - - -
phase
*Charging current per
A/km - - -
phase at U0, 50 Hz
*Max. Current rating in
A - - -
Air
Page 19 of 27



A - - -
Ground
*Maximum Pulling
force of the cable for
laying
*Bending Radius of
cable
Length marking: Length shall be marked with number at one meter intervals on the
sheath.
*Bidder to furnish the data
Page 20 of 27


9. TENTATIVE LIST OF TEST TO BE PERFORMED ON CABLES

INDICATIONS TYPE of TEST
Factory
Type On site Specials
Acceptance
IR Test X X
Hot set X
Short Circuit test* X

Eccentricity X
High Voltage Test X X
Measurement of Resistance X
As per IEC 60502

Partial discharge test X
Capacitance Test X
Flame Spread Test X
Acid Gas Generation X
Smoke density test X
Oxygen index test on outer sheath X
Temperature index test on outer sheath X
Outer sheath test X X
Visual check X X
*Test to prove the Power Cable and Metallic Screen Short Circuit Withstand Capacity to be
conducted as per the relevant Standard Recommendations. If no guidelines are available,
as a general practice routine test such as High Voltage, Partial Discharge, Check of
Electrical Parameters etc., to be conducted prior and after performing short circuit test on
the cables, to prove the integrity of cables under short circuit test.
Page 21 of 27


10. JOINTS AND TERMINATIONS

Joints and terminations shall constitute perfectly all elements of the MV cables, so as to
obtain electrical and mechanical characteristics at least equal to those of the cable. The
Contractor shall submit to the client, for approval, a detailed description of the technique to
be used for execution of connections in MV Cables. However, maintenance and repair
being carried out only during a short period of time, at night, due consideration shall be
given to connection processes having the following characteristics, quality being otherwise
equal:
 quickness of execution,
 possibility of replacement without having to disturb the cable,
The jointing & termination materials and components shall be offered in the form of kits. The
kits shall be supplied complete with all necessary tubings and components (ferrules / lugs /
earthing/ cable preparation etc.) to form a ready to use and energize joint /
termination/cable .
Material used in jointing and termination should be FRLS and FRLSZH compliant in
Elevated and UG section respectively.
10.1 System Data

The distribution system in which the cables along with the joints and terminations are
expected to perform reliably over a period of 30-35 years, is a three phase, 3-wire System
operating at 33kV having resistive grounding at the source neutral terminal, limiting earth
fault current to 1KA and 3-Ph fault current to 7KA and maximum possible continuous
voltages being 36 kV, and cable conductor temperatures up to 90°C on a continuous basis
and under short circuit conditions up to 250°C. The service conditions shall be as per GS
clause 1.12.
Page 22 of 27


10.2 Governing Specification for Straight Through Joints

All 33kV Straight Through Joints shall be of Heat Shrinkable Type, conforming to IEC
60502-4/IS 13573 (Part-2) and shall be of 18/30 kV (36 kV) grade. The jointing kit should
majorly consist of following components and accessories-
i. Conductor Connection-
Mechanical shear bolt type connections (lugs and ferrules), made from the corrosion
resistant, high strength, high conductivity material shall be used for jointing of
copper/aluminium cable conductors. They should be designed and Type Tested as
per IEC 61238.
The connection design should be such that the resistance of the conductor
connection shall be less than 1.1 times the conductor resistance.
ii. Heat Shrink Tubing-

The electrical stress control for the cable insulation screen ends and over the
connectors shall preferably be achieved with a combination of a high permittivity void
filling mastic and a heat shrinkable stress control tubing. The stress control tubing
shall have a defined impedance property comprising of a resistance and high
permittivity. The AC Impedance of this tubing material shall remain constant inspite
of temperature rise and thermal ageing as a consequence of the temperature rise of
the conductor.
Following shall be the part of technical document for taking approval of Engineer-
a. A technical explanation in relation to the proposed electrical properties of the
material i.e. specific volume resistivity and permittivity to give a specific AC
Impedance.
b. Reports showing the effects of temperature and thermal ageing on the
impedance of the stress control material offered.
c. The recommended lengths of the stress control material.
Page 23 of 27


d) Volume resistivity and permittivity of the material considered for stress

relieving void filling mastic.
All types of heat shrink tubes shall be extruded and cross-linked before expansion. In
addition to the design and testing requirements as per IEC 60502-4/IS13573,
dimension check of tubes when expanded and recovered shall be proved as per
IEEE 404.
iii. Earthing and Bonding-

Tinned copper braids, Constant force springs, mechanical connector, sealing tapes &
mastics shall form the earthing/sheath continuity connection. Additionally, Copper
wire mesh shall be wrapped around the joint with 50% overlapping followed by cotton
tape. Continuity of metallic screen/sheath shall be ensured to carry the fault current
of 1kA for 3 sec.
10.3 Governing Specification for Terminations-

All 33kV Terminations shall be of Heat Shrinkable Type conforming IEC 60502-4/IS
13573 (Part-2) and shall be of 18/30 kV (36 kV) grade. Also, in particular to design
aspect, terminations shall be of Class 1A type as per IEEE 48. The termination kit
should majorly consist of following components and accessories-
i. Conductor Connection-
All lugs shall be screwed connectors with shear head bolts, made from the corrosion
resistant, high strength, high conductivity material shall be used for terminating
Copper/Aluminium cable conductors. They should be designed and Type Tested as
per IEC 61238. The connection design should be such that the resistance of the
conductor connection shall be less than 1.1 times the conductor resistance.

Page 24 of 27


ii. Heat Shrink Tubing

The terminations for Indoor and Outdoor application shall comprise of a single non-
tracking, erosion and weather resistant heat shrinkable tubing. The stress control
system shall have excellent electrical stress distribution of the electrical field along
the length of the termination and prevent any overstressing of the material.
Following shall be the part of technical document for taking approval of engineer in
charge-
a. A technical explanation in relation to the proposed electrical properties of the
material i.e. specific volume resistivity and permittivity to give a specific AC
Impedance.
b. Reports showing the effects of temperature and thermal ageing on the
impedance of the stress control material offered.
c. The recommended lengths of the stress control material.
d. Volume resistivity and permittivity of the material considered for stress
relieving void filling mastic.
e. Minimum 2 number and 4 number of sheds to be considered for indoor and
outdoor terminations respectively and calculations proving the requirement of
creepage length to withstand specified voltage levels shall be part of the
technical document.

iii. Earthing and Bonding-
Tinned copper braids, Constant force springs, mechanical lug, sealing tapes &
mastics shall form the earthing connection. The cross section of copper braids shall
be suitable for the short circuit rating specified for the cable.
Bonding of cable metal screen to the armour and flexible copper braid shall be
provided with a constant force arrangement and further they shall be solidly bonded
with support clamps ensuring a lowest possible resistance path. The bonding area
shall be adequately sealed and shaped.
Page 25 of 27


10.4 PACKING AND MARKING:

The packing of the kits shall be such as to prevent any ingress of moisture and or dust as
well protects the contents against mechanical damage. The external packing shall carry a
cable with the following information clearly marked
 Name of the manufacturer
 Manufacturer’s Batch No.
 Manufacturers Reference Kit No., Size(s), ratings of the Cable for which it is offered.
 Year of manufacturer.
 Expiry date of kit or any component(s) included in the kit contents.
A checklist stating the description and quantities of each component contained in the kit
shall be supplied in each kit with an illustrated installation instruction containing complete
step-by-step instruction. Each component of the kit shall be separately packed in a sealed
polyethylene wrapping and the component’s name and part No. shall be marked on the
packing. All components comprising the kit shall be clearly and permanently marked with
the suppliers and manufacturers names, product identification, batch number and year of
manufacture. Extruded and moulded components shall additionally be marked with their
expanded (as supplied) diameters and fully recovered internal diameters. Components and
kits shall be capable of being stored without deterioration in an ambient air temperature
between –5°C to 45°C when protected from direct sunlight or exposure to rain.
10.5 Additional requirement-

Cable jointing will be done by a qualified jointer, preferably the employee of the jointing kit
manufacturer, or a person duly trained and verified by the jointing kit manufacturer. In case
the jointer is not a regular employee of the jointing kit manufacturer, valid certificate of
authorisation, issued by the kit manufacturer in favour of such jointer, will be produced
before starting the jointing/termination of the cable. Approved procedure along with site
condition requirement such as free from moisture, plane surface etc., for jointing/termination
issued by the jointing kit manufacturer and vetted by cable manufacturer will be submitted
Page 26 of 27


by the contractor for approval of the Engineer, at least 28 days before commencement of

jointing/termination work. Due care should be taken before commencing jointing/termination
work at site and if any pre-condition of site requirement is not fulfilled, jointing/termination
work shall be cancelled till the time site condition is made favourable.

Page 27 of 27

Contract- DE-04 – Particular Specification- Annexure-22 (3.3 kV cable Specification) of Chapter 8A
SPECIFICATIONS FOR 3.3kV CABLES FOR ELEVATED AND Revision-0

UNDERGROUND METRO RAIL CORRIDOR
SPECIFICATION NO.
DMES- T/0020/ DMRC-E-TR- CABLE-3
SPECIFICATIONS FOR 3.3 kV CABLES FOR ELEVATED AND UNDERGROUND

CORRIDORS
Issued on:
Date Stage
Revision-0

Page 1 of 17


Stage Date
Page 2 of 17


CONTENTS
DMRC…. ........................................................................................................................... 4
2. GOVERNING SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................................. 5
3. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT ...................................................................................... 6
3.2 CONDUCTOR ........................................................................................................ 7
3.3 INSULATION.......................................................................................................... 7
3.4 WATER BARRIER: ................................................................................................ 9
3.5 ARMOURING: ........................................................................................................ 9
3.6 OUTER SHEATH ................................................................................................... 9
4. ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENT ..................................................................................... 9
5. MAINTENANCE & LIFE .............................................................................................. 11
6. SPECIAL CONDITIONS ............................................................................................. 12
7. TESTING .................................................................................................................... 12
8. DATA SHEET- 25KV CABLES ................................................................................... 14
9. TENTATIVE LIST OF TEST TO BE PERFORMED ON CABLES .............................. 15
10.JOINTS AND TERMINATIONS .................................................................................. 16
10.1 SYSTEM DATA .................................................................................................... 17

Page 3 of 17


1. DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE EQUIPMENT AND ITS APPLICATION IN DMRC –

3.3 KV TRACTION RETURN CABLES
1.1 These specifications are applicable to 3.3 kV Traction Return cables in various corridors,
constituting the 25 kV Traction Power supply distribution and Overhead Equipment
Traction network.
3.3 kV Cables are generally required for the following connections:
 From Traction Transformer Secondary to Buried Rail in the TSS
 From Feeding Post at Main Line and Depot to TSS.
 Any other location as required
1.2 Cables of aluminium conductor with cross section of 400 sq. mm are generally used as
the case may be; however different cross section may also be used as required.
1.3 Current rating for cables shall be determined taking into consideration the following
installation methods as applicable:
 In the tunnels
 Trenches
 On brackets
 Ducts
 laying depth
 cable distance
Page 4 of 17


The 3.3 kV Traction Return cables shall conform to IEC 60502 with specified voltage as
1.8/3.0 kV (3.6 kV) grade. The cables shall be of dry-insulated, radial-field cable, based
on proven technology. They shall be constituted of single core cables of 2 runs per feeder,
annealed circular stranded Al Conductor for the cables as specified. The cable shall be
XLPE insulated over conducting core. The cable shall also be Tape armoured.
2.1 Standards
The 3.3 kV Traction Return cables shall satisfy the requirements given below and shall
also comply with latest standards in force when the cables are manufactured, particularly
which are in the following table. (Unless otherwise stipulated in the specifications, the
latest version of the following Standards shall be applicable): -
rated voltages from 1 kV (Um = 1.2 kV) up to 30 kV (Um = 36 kV)
IEC 60502-1 –
Part 1: Cables for rated voltages from 1 kV (Um = 1.2 kV) up to 3
kV (Um = 3.6 kV)
IEC 60840 rated voltages above 30 kV (Um = 36 kV) up to 150 kV (Um = 170
kV) - Test methods and requirements
Part 1 : Tests on electric and optical fibre cables under fire
Standard Test Method for Density of Smoke from the Burning or
ASTM D 2843
Decomposition of Plastics
Page 5 of 17


Standard Test Method for Measuring the Minimum Oxygen

ASTM D 2863 Concentration to Support Candle-Like Combustion of Plastics
(Oxygen Index)
Part 1 & 2
IS 7098 Cross linked polyethylene insulated thermoplastic sheathed
Part 1 cables.
2.2 Abbreviations
IEC – International Electro Technical Council
ASTM- American Society for Testing and Materials
IS- Indian Standard
TSS – Traction Sub Station
ASS – Auxiliary Sub Station
RSS – Receiving Sub Station
OHE – Over Head Equipment
XLPE – Cross Linked Poly Ethylene
FRLS – Fire Retardant Low Smoke
FRLSZH – Fire Retardant Low Smoke Zero Halogen
FP – Feeding Post
SP- Sectioning Post
SSP – Sub Sectioning and Paralleling Post
SS – Sub Sectioning Post
3.1 The cables shall be insulated with cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE), AIuminium Tape
armouring and suitable protective sheath.
Page 6 of 17


 operating voltage: 1.8 kV rms between phase and ground

 specified voltage: 1.8/3.0 kV (3.6 kV) rms (according to IEC 60840)
 Conductor as specified
The various Constructional features required for the cables are as under:
3.2 Conductor
The conductor shall be formed from annealed compact circular stranded Aluminium class-
2 Conductor, as the case may be, complied with IEC latest publications 60228. The
conductor shall be compact circular stranded.
3.3 Insulation
The Insulation shall be XLPE, complying with IEC 60502 and IEC 60811. The insulation
shall have a higher degree of Cross- Linking, free from contaminants and air voids, heat
resistant and shall be applied by the extrusion process.
The XLPE insulation shall be suitable for use on cable in wet and dry locations at conductor
temperature as per IEC 60502. For this purpose, short circuit current in conductor is to be
considered as 14 kA for 3 seconds.
The conductor shall be provided with cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE) insulation applied
by extrusion. The nominal thickness of insulation is specified in the attached GTP
and subject to tolerance as per IEC – 60840, clause 10.6.2.
The insulation compound shall be of high quality, and shall be heat, moisture, ozone and
corona resistant. XLPE compound should be from reputed manufacturer e.g. Borealis
Sweden, DOW or NUC Japan or equivalent with satisfactory service experience of more
than 5 years. The Insulation shall be applied by extrusion and vulcanized using dry curing
process to form a compact homogenous body free from micro voids and
contaminants. Make of the XLPE, will be approved by the Engineer, before giving
manufacturing clearance.
Page 7 of 17


Approved Cable manufacturer shall have a procedure to check and record the eccentricity
of the insulation of the entire cable length while manufacturing. Such reports shall be
produced during the factory acceptance test of cable to the representative of DMRC.
For each piece of core, the smallest value measured shall not fall below 90% of the nominal
value by more than 0.1mm i.e tmin>0.9tn-0.1
where
The Employer may decide to visit the works of cable manufacturer to confirm the manufacturing
process mentioned.
Special precautions shall be taken to ensure that XLPE shall only be procured from Borealis
Sweden, NUC Japan or DOW.
Two stage inspections shall be conducted to ensure the quality and compliance of XLPE
before commencement of cable manufacturing work so that DMRC may carry
out the stage inspection of raw material/ process of cable manufacturing as per
the requirement. Mechanical and Electrical properties of XLPE must meet the
specification requirements.
Page 8 of 17


During the stage inspection, the cable manufacturer shall submit documentary evidence like
purchase order, bill of lading, bill of entry and proof of shipment etc. of importing XLPE for
manufacturing the entire quantity of cables only from approved sources. The traceability of
material shall be proven by the documents itself.
3.4 Water Barrier:

Longitudinal:
extruded insulation screening to block and prevent moisture propagation in a
3.5 Armouring:
Double Tape armouring should be applied over the FRLS/FRLSZH binder tape and the
thickness of the same should be as GTP attached.
3.6 Outer Sheath

The outer sheath to be provided as per IEC 60502-1.

A. FRLS Cables laid in elevated sections shall be exposed to sun, therefore such cables
shall be capable of withstanding ultraviolet radiations. The outer sheath shall be extruded
continuously in black colour with UV Protection, FRLS PVC conforming to the
requirement of IEC specifications. The details of compound used for outer sheath shall
be submitted.
B. Outer sheath of FRLSZH cables for Underground section, shall be extruded continuously
in black colour with halogen free flame retardant polyolefin conforming to the requirement
of IEC specifications. Outer sheath shall be treated with Anti Termite/ Anti pest/ Anti
Page 9 of 17


rodent & corrosion Resistant Compound. The sheath shall be resistant to water, fungus
attacks, conforming to the requirement of IEC specifications. The details of compound
used for outer sheath shall be submitted.
4.2 The Contractor shall confirm the cross section of the cables in as regard to:
- the route installation,
- the thermal conditions in service,
- the climatic conditions,
- the energy and currents flowing through these cables, taking into account the
worst electrical conditions,
- operation under permissible overload conditions,
4.3 The protective sheath will carry the indications listed below, in letters and digits at least
6 mm high:
 designation of ownership
 nature and cross-sectional area of conductors
 specified cable voltage
 Manufacturer’s name
 Length of cable shall be marked at 1 m interval.
 Year and month of manufacturing
4.4 The cable shall be manufactured by a company having ISO accreditation for quality. The
cable manufacturer shall have NABL accredited laboratory facility to conduct routine and
acceptance test.
4.5 The Contractor shall provide clamps of non – metallic/metallic & non-magnetic sturdy
type as per IEC 61914, at specified locations and with cable ties at every meter. Material
of cable tie shall be approved by the Engineer. Cable ties should last for 35 years.
Page 10 of 17


4.6 The Employer may decide to visit the works of cable manufacturer to verify the
manufacturing processes.
4.7 The Bidder along with the Bid, shall submit the details regarding cable construction, bill
of material, the manufacturing process proposed to be adopted for the manufacturing of
3.3 kV traction return cables to be used in the project, along with Quality control measures
adopted by the Manufacturer, to ensure :-
 The values and tolerances are strictly as per IEC.

 The cable manufacturer exercises strict quality control measures, including stage
inspections, routine inspections etc. to ensure conformity to standards.
Periodical inspections of the Manufacturer works, manufacturing processes, Internal

Quality control records of the manufacturer etc shall be carried out by the User
(DMRC/Nominated agency), to ensure compliance to Quality standards.

The cable should be designed for maintenance free service of minimum 35 years for all
types of installation & under prescribed environmental conditions.
Page 11 of 17


6. SPECIAL CONDITIONS
6.1 All type of Cables to be used in Underground Sections shall be Fire Retardant
Low Smoke Zero Halogen Type (FRLSZH) and cables to be used in elevated and
at grade sections shall be FRLS Type. Cables from TSS to Feeding point on
Viaduct/Station shall also be FRLS type excluding portion laid in underground section
(station and tunnel) which shall be FRLSZH type. The interconnections between the
elevated & underground section shall be dealt accordingly with minimum number of joints.
6.2 Cable drum schedule should be selected in manner to minimise run-through joints in the
cable laid from TSS to Feeding point. Maximum weight of one cable drum can be upto 8
ton.
7. TESTING
7.1 All type tests to be conducted as per IEC 60840. The 3.3kv traction return cable shall
comply with following Test Standards in addition to the test standards of IEC 60502:
a. IEC 60332 Part 1 and 3, category A, test on single and bunched cables under fire
condition.
b. Limiting Oxygen Index, at least 30, tested as per ASTM D-2863.
c. Temperature index of minimum 250 deg C, as per IS 7098 (Part-2).
d. Smoke density Test (on sheathing material), when tested in accordance to ASTM D-
2843 for FRLS cables, maximum smoke density rating shall be 60 as per IS 7098 Part
– 2.
e. Smoke density Test, when tested in accordance to IEC 61034 for FRLSZH cables,
minimum light transmittance shall be 60%.
f. Insulation is to be moisture and heat resistant, with temperature rating appropriate
to the application conditions and in no case lower than 90 deg C.
Page 12 of 17


In addition to the above FRLSZH cables used in U/G section shall also comply with
following test standard: -
g. Determination of the amount of halogen Acid Gases as per IEC 60754 Part 1
(Maximum HCL gas shall not exceed 0.5%) and IEC 60754 Part –II
7.2 The contractor on advise of the Engineer shall arrange for repetition of the following type
tests as per IEC 60502, from independent laboratory after delivery of cables by collecting
random sample from site –
- High Voltage test
- Hot set Test
7.3 Test to prove the Short Circuit withstand capacity of Power Cable shall be conducted as
per the relevant standard. If no guidelines are available, as a general practice, routine
test such as High Voltage, Partial Discharge, Check of Electrical Parameters shall be
conducted prior and after performing short circuit test on the cables, to prove the integrity
of cables under short circuit test.
7.4 The manufacturer shall not change the Bill of Material used in the manufacturing of
samples for routine and Type testing as repeated above and in cables intended to be
supplied against the contract.
Page 13 of 17


8. DATA SHEET- 3.3KV CABLES
DESCRIPTION UNIT VALUES
Manufacturer
Cable Size Sq.mm. 400
Cable Type Al/XLPE/DATA
Voltage Grade U0/U (Um) KV 1.8/3.0 (3.6)
IEC 60228,
Reference Standard IEC 60502-1,
IEC 60840
No. and cross sectional area
1C x 400 sq.mm
of conductor
Conductor Material Aluminum
Circular compact stranded

Shape
Class 2/
Class/Standard
IEC 60228
Insulation Material XLPE
mm 2
insulation
Semi conducting tape of min
Insulation envelope Screen
0.1mm thick
Double layer of Aluminium Tape
Armouring (nominal thickness of each type -
0.5mm)
Extruded Outer sheath chloride for elevated.
material Flame retardant low smoke
zero halogen for UG
mm 2
outer sheath
*Minimum bending radius mm -
Max. Conductor temperature
Deg.C 90
on continuous
Page 14 of 17


Max. Conductor temperature

Deg.C 250
in short circuit
Min. Short circuit current
14 kA for 3 sec
rating (Conductor)
*Nominal Diameter of mm -
Conductor
*Nominal Diameter Over mm -
Insulation
*Nominal overall diameter (±
mm -
2mm)
*Capacitance per phase uF/km -
*Charging current per phase
A/km -
at U0, 50 Hz
*Max. Current rating in Air A -
A -
Ground
*Maximum Pulling force of
the cable for laying
Length marking: Length shall be marked with number at one meter intervals on the sheath.
*Bidder to furnish the data at the time of vendor approval or design approval stage.

9. TENTATIVE LIST OF TEST TO BE PERFORMED ON CABLES
INDICATIONS TYPE of TEST
Type Factory On site Specials
Page 15 of 17


Acceptance
IR Test X X
Dimension check X
Hot set X
Short Circuit test* X
Eccentricity X
As per IEC 60502

High Voltage Test X X
Measurement of Resistance X
Flame Spread Test X
Acid Gas Generation X
Smoke density test X
Oxygen index test on outer sheath X
Temperature index test on outer

X
sheath
Visual check X X
*Test to prove the Power Cable Short Circuit Withstand Capacity to be conducted as per the
relevant Standard Recommendations. If no guidelines are available, as a general practice
routine test such as High Voltage, Check of Electrical Parameters etc., to be conducted prior
and after performing short circuit test on the cables, to prove the integrity of cables under short
circuit test.
10. JOINTS AND TERMINATIONS

Joints and terminations shall constitute perfectly all elements of the cables, so as to obtain
electrical and mechanical characteristics at least equal to those of the cable. The Contractor
Page 16 of 17


shall submit to the client, for approval, a detailed description of the technique to be used for
execution of connections in Cables. However, maintenance and repair being carried out only
during a short period of time, at night, due consideration shall be given to connection processes
having the following characteristics, quality being otherwise equal:
 quickness of execution,
 possibility of replacement without having to disturb the cable,
The jointing & termination materials and components shall be offered in the form of kits. The kits
shall be supplied complete with all necessary tubings and components (ferrules / lugs / earthing/
cable preparation etc.) to form a ready to use and energize joint / termination/cable .
Material used in jointing and termination should be FRLS and FRLSZH compliant in Elevated
and UG section respectively.
10.1 System Data

The distribution system in which the cables along with the joints and terminations are expected
to perform reliably over a period of 30-35 years, is a single phase, operating at 3.3kV designed
to carry earth fault current upto 14KA and cable conductor temperatures up to 90°C on a
continuous basis and under short circuit conditions up to 250°C. The service conditions shall be
as per GS clause 1.12.
Page 17 of 17

SPECIFICATIONS FOR 25 kV CABLES FOR ELEVATED AND Revision-0

SPECIFICATION NO.
DMES- T/0019/ DMRC-E-TR- CABLE-3
SPECIFICATIONS FOR 25 kV CABLES FOR ELEVATED AND UNDERGROUND

CORRIDORS
Issued on:
Date Stage
28th July 2020 Revision-0

Page 1 of 26


Stage Date
Draft -1 10/10/2014
Page 2 of 26


1. Detailed description of the equipment and its application in DMRC - 25 kV cables . 5
2. Governing Specifications .............................................................................................. 6
2.1 Standards ........................................................................................................................... 6
2.2 Abbreviations ..................................................................................................................... 7
3. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT ............................................................................................... 8
3.2 Conductor ........................................................................................................................... 8
3.3 Conductor Screen: .............................................................................................................. 8
3.4 Insulation ........................................................................................................................... 8
3.5 Insulation Screen .............................................................................................................. 10
3.6 Water Barrier: .................................................................................................................. 11
3.7 Metallic Screen ................................................................................................................. 11
3.8 Inner Sheath: .................................................................................................................... 12
3.9 Armouring: ....................................................................................................................... 12
3.10 Outer Sheath .................................................................................................................... 12
4. Additional Requirement ..................................................................................................... 12
5. MAINTENANCE & LIFE ................................................................................................ 14
6. SPECIAL CONDITIONS ....................................................................................................... 14
7. TESTING ......................................................................................................................... 15
8. DATA SHEET- 25kV Cables ........................................................................................ 17
9. Tentative list of Test to be performed on cables ........................................................... 20
10.JoinTs and terminations .................................................................................................... 21
Page 3 of 26


10.1 System Data ..................................................................................................................... 21
10.2 Governing Specification for Straight Through Joints ......................................................... 22
10.3 Governing Specification for Terminations‐ ........................................................................ 23
10.4 PACKING AND MARKING: ................................................................................................. 25
10.5 Additional requirement‐ ................................................................................................... 25
Page 4 of 26


1. DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE EQUIPMENT AND ITS APPLICATION IN DMRC

- 25 KV CABLES
1.1 These specifications are applicable to 25 kV cables in various corridors, constituting

the 25 kV Traction Power supply distribution and Overhead Equipment Traction
network.
25 kV Cables are generally required for the following connections:
 From Traction Transformer Secondary to 25 kV Switchgear in the TSS
 Connections between 25 kV equipment, as necessary, in the TSS
 At locations of FP, SSP, SP & SS interrupters and isolating switches
 Any other location as required
1.2 Cables of aluminium conductor with cross section of 400 sq. mm or Copper conductor
with cross section of 240 sq.mm are generally used as the case may be; however
different cross section may also be used as required.
1.3 Current rating for cables shall be determined taking into consideration the following
installation methods as applicable:
 In the tunnels
 Trenches
 On brackets
 Ducts
 laying depth
 cable distance
Page 5 of 26


The 25 kV Cables shall conform to IEC 60840 with specified voltage as 26/45 kV (52
kV) grade. The cables shall be of dry-insulated, radial-field cable, based on proven
technology. They shall be constituted of single core cables of 2 runs per feeder,
annealed circular stranded Copper Conductor or circular stranded Al Conductor for the
cables as specified. The cable shall be XLPE insulated with semi-conducting screen
over conducting core. The cable shall also be Tape armoured.
2.1 Standards
The 25 kV Cables shall satisfy the requirements given below and shall also comply
with latest standards in force when the cables are manufactured, particularly which are
in the following table. (Unless otherwise stipulated in the specifications, the latest
rated voltages from 1 kV (Um = 1,2 kV) up to 30 kV (Um = 36
IEC 60502-2 kV) –
Part 2: Cables for rated voltages from 6 kV (Um = 7,2 kV) up to
30 kV (Um = 36 kV)
IEC 60840 rated voltages above 30 kV (Um = 36 kV) up to 150 kV (Um =
170 kV) - Test methods and requirements
Part 1 : Tests on electric and optical fibre cables under fire
Standard Test Method for Density of Smoke from the Burning or
ASTM D 2843
Decomposition of Plastics
Page 6 of 26


Standard Test Method for Measuring the Minimum Oxygen

ASTM D 2863 Concentration to Support Candle-Like Combustion of Plastics
(Oxygen Index)
Part 1 & 2
Cross linked polyethylene insulated thermoplastic sheathed
IS 7098
cables,
Part 2
Part 2: for working voltages from 3.3 KV upto & Including 33 KV.
2.2 Abbreviations
IEC – International Electro Technical Council
ASTM- American Society for Testing and Materials
IS- Indian Standard
TSS – Traction Sub Station
ASS – Auxiliary Sub Station
RSS – Receiving Sub Station
OHE – Over Head Equipment
XLPE – Cross Linked Poly Ethylene
FRLS – Fire Retardant Low Smoke
FRLSZH – Fire Retardant Low Smoke Zero Halogen
FP – Feeding Post
SP- Sectioning Post
SSP – Sub Sectioning and Paralleling Post
SS – Sub Sectioning Post
Page 7 of 26


3.1 The cables shall be insulated with cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE), with semi-
conducting screen over a Copper/Aluminium conducting core, insulating envelope,
metallic screen, AIuminium Tape armouring and suitable protective sheath.
 operating voltage: 27.5 kV rms between phase and Ground,

 specified voltage: 26/45 kV rms (according to IEC 60840)
 Conductor as specified
The various Constructional features required for the 25 kV cables are as under:
3.2 Conductor
The conductor shall be formed from annealed circular stranded class-2 Copper
conductor or stranded Aluminium class-2 Conductor, as the case may be, complied with
IEC latest publications 60228. The conductor shall be compact circular stranded.
3.3 Conductor Screen:

The conductor screen to be provided as per Clause 7.1 IEC 60502-2:2005 or equivalent
clause in latest version of IEC 60502-2. It shall be easily removable from conductor
during jointing. A semi conducting tape (s) shall be provided below the extruded semi
conducting conductor screen to prevent penetration of compound in to the under lying
conductor. The conductor screen shall be as per the attached GTP.
3.4 Insulation
The Insulation shall be XLPE, complying with IEC 60840 and IEC 60811. The
insulation shall have a higher degree of Cross- Linking, free from contaminants and air
voids, heat resistant and shall be applied by the extrusion process.
Page 8 of 26


The XLPE insulation shall be suitable for use on power cable in wet and dry locations at
conductor temperature as per IEC 60840. For this purpose, short circuit current in
conductor is to be considered as 14 kA for 3 seconds.
The conductor with screening shall be provided with cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE)
insulation applied by extrusion. The nominal thickness of insulation is specified in
the attached GTP and subject to tolerance as per IEC – 60840, clause 10.6.2.
The insulation compound shall be of high quality, and shall be heat, moisture, ozone
and corona resistant. XLPE compound should be from reputed manufacturer e.g.
Borealis Sweden, DOW or NUC Japan or equivalent with satisfactory service
experience of more than 5 years. The Insulation shall be applied by triple extrusion and
vulcanized using dry curing process to form a compact homogenous body free from
micro voids and contaminants. Make of the XLPE, will be approved by the Engineer,
before giving manufacturing clearance.
Approved Cable manufacturer shall have a procedure to check and record the
eccentricity and ovality of the insulation of the entire cable length while manufacturing.
Such reports shall be produced during the factory acceptance test of cable to the
representative of DMRC.
For each piece of core, the smallest value measured shall not fall below 90% of the
nominal value by more than 0.1mm i.e tmin>0.9tn-0.1
where
Page 9 of 26


3.5 Insulation Screen

The insulation screening shall be applied direct upon the insulation. The screen shall be
tightly fitted to the insulation to exclude all air voids and still it could be easily stripped
on site. Semiconducting compound should be from a reputed manufacturere.g. Borealis,
Sweden, DOW or NUC Japan or equivalent with satisfactory service experience of more
than 5 years. Make of the semi-conducting compound, shall be got approved by the
Engineer, before giving manufacturing clearance.
The manufacturing process of XLPE cable shall consist of conductor screen, insulation
& insulation screen shall be extruded in a single process (triple extrusion) and cross
linked by dry curing technology to ensure homogeneity and absence of micro voids.
The cables shall be manufactured by “Dry Curing” Process.
The Employer may decide to visit the works of cable manufacturer to confirm the
manufacturing process mentioned.
Special precautions shall be taken to ensure that XLPE and insulation screen shall only be
procured from Borealis Sweden, NUC Japan or DOW.
Two stage inspections shall be conducted to ensure the quality and compliance of XLPE and
insulation screen.

before commencement of cable manufacturing work so that DMRC may carry
out the stage inspection of raw material/ process of cable manufacturing as
per the requirement. Mechanical and Electrical properties of XLPE and
insulation screen must meet the specification requirements.
Page 10 of 26


During the stage inspection, the cable manufacturer shall submit documentary evidence like
purchase order, bill of lading, bill of entry and proof of shipment etc. of importing XLPE and
insulation screen for manufacturing the entire quantity of cables only from approved sources.
The traceability of material shall be proven by the documents itself.

3.6 Water Barrier:

Longitudinal:
extruded insulation screening to block and prevent moisture propagation in a
3.7 Metallic Screen

The metallic screen shall be plain copper/aluminium round wire as the case may be,
applied over the semi-conductor bedding tape(s). An annealed plain copper/aluminium
binder tape shall be applied in the form of an open helix, over the copper/aluminium
wire screen. The area of the metallic wire/tape should be able to withstand specified
earth fault current (minimum 14 kA for 3 sec).
Bidder to submit the calculations proving the short circuit current carrying capacity of
metallic wire/tape screen, giving details of the cross section area of the wire/tape
screen. Short Circuit Test in 3rd party lab on one of the samples taken from the
supplied lot shall also be arranged by the contractor.
The sheath shall be impervious to moisture, reasonably close fitting and free from
defects and impurities such as oxide, which give rise to failure under working
conditions.
Page 11 of 26


3.8 Inner Sheath:

A layer of FRLSZH/FRLS binder tape shall be applied over metallic screen followed by
Polyethylene laminated Aluminium tape that shall be acting as a radial water barrier.
Extruded black FRLS/FRLSZH layer shall be provided as a separation sheath
3.9 Armouring:
Double Tape armouring should be applied over the inner sheath and the thickness of
the same should be as GTP attached.
3.10 Outer Sheath

The outer sheath to be provided as per IEC 60502-2. A conductive layer shall be
provided on outer sheath to comply over sheath electrical testing requirement as per
IEC 60840.

A. FRLS Cables laid in elevated sections shall be exposed to sun, therefore such cables
shall be capable of withstanding ultraviolet radiations. The outer sheath shall be
extruded continuously in black colour with UV Protection, FRLS PVC conforming to
the requirement of IEC specifications. The details of compound used for outer sheath
shall be submitted.
B. Outer sheath of FRLSZH cables for Underground section, shall be extruded
continuously in black colour with halogen free flame retardant polyolefin conforming to
the requirement of IEC specifications. Outer sheath shall be treated with Anti Termite/
Anti pest/ Anti rodent & corrosion Resistant Compound. The sheath shall be resistant
to water, fungus attacks, conforming to the requirement of IEC specifications. The
details of compound used for outer sheath shall be submitted.
Page 12 of 26

Part 02-1 de 04 PS

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Part 02-1 de 04 PS

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DELHI METRO RAIL CORPORATION LIMITED

PART 2: EMPLOYERS REQUIREMENTS

SECTION-VI: PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS (PS)

VOL 4 PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS (PS)

DELHI METRO RAIL CORPORATION LTD.

(A Joint venture company of Govt. of India & Govt. of NCT of Delhi)

DMRC/Contract DE-04 /Vol-4/PS Page 1

1.1 SCOPE AND PURPOSE ...................................................................................... 3

1.2 RELEVANT DOCUMENTS ................................................................................... 4

1.3 DESIGN SERVICES ...................................................................................... 5

1.4 POWER SOURCE .............................................................................................. 5

1.4.1 TRANSCO Substation ............................................................................ 5

1.4.2 DMRC Receiving Substation .................................................................. 6

DMRC/Contract DE-04 /Vol-4/PS Page 2

1.1 SCOPE AND PURPOSE

This Specification defines the objectives, guidelines and requirements for

S. No. RSS Location Corridor

Along with above mentioned RSS, some augmentations at existing RSS

S. RSS Location Corridor Augmentation

* The Notice to Proceed for the works of augmentation at Indraprastha

DMRC/ PS/Chapter-1 Page 3

The works to be executed under the Contract include Design,

1.2 RELEVANT DOCUMENTS

This Specification should be read in conjunction with the General

c) Indian Railway Standards

e) International Standards referenced herein.

f) Other International Standards

g) Other National Standards.

Notwithstanding the precedence specified, in the event of conflicts

DMRC/ PS/Chapter-1 Page 4

1.3 DESIGN SERVICES

1.4 POWER SOURCE

1.4.1 TRANSCO Substation

S. Location of Supplies power to

DMRC/ PS/Chapter-1 Page 5

DTL Vasant DTL Vasant

Sangam DTL DTL

1.4.2 DMRC Receiving Substation

 33 kV, three phase supply will be fed to the 33 kV Auxiliary Network

DMRC/ PS/Chapter-1 Page 6

 25 kV Traction supply shall be taken from RSS for feeding 25kV

DMRC/ PS/Chapter-1 Page 7

VOLUME 4 – PARTICULAR SPECIFICATION

DMRC/Contract DE-04 /Vol-4/PS Page 1

DMRC/Contract DE-04 /Vol-4/PS Page 2

7.10. ELECTRONIC DRAWING FORMAT / DESIGN DOCUMENT FORMAT ..................... 34

DMRC/Contract DE-04 /Vol-4/PS Page 3

1.1. LOCATIONS OF RSS’S

A general description of the broad scope of work, relating to RSS, covered

For complete appreciation of the Scope, the Specifications, and Bill of

S.No RSS Location Corridor Type*

1 Madhuban Chowk R.K. Ashram - GIS

2. SCOPE (RSS WORKS)

The scope of work under the contract includes the following:

Detailed Design, Supply, Installation, Testing and Commissioning of RSS

DMRC/Contract DE-04 /Vol-4/PS Page 4

A. Constructions of New RSS:- Following six new RSS are proposed to be

S.No. RSS Location AMS TSS

B. Bay augmentation:- In addition to the above, augmentation in following

S.No. RSS Location Augmentation Required

1. Mukundpur RSS Provision of additional 25kV bays for standby

2. Indraprastha RSS Interconnection with New IP RSS of Phase-IV

3. Rithala RSS Provision of 66/33kV Additional transformer